Chapter 12 Rooms are created when walls are drawn to enclose an area. When a room is defined in this way, it automatically receives both a floor and ceiling as well as features like moldings and finish materials that can be seen in 3D Views.   Rooms can be selected and edited. Each room can be assigned a Room Type with predefined characteristics. For example, a room defined as a Deck is assigned certain attributes that are different from a Kitchen. TOPICS Room Definition 413 Floor and Room Defaults 413 Room Types and Functions 415 Displaying Rooms 417 Selecting Rooms 418 Editing Rooms 419 Room Labels 422 Decks 425 Floor and Ceiling Heights 426 Floor and Ceiling Platforms 428 Tray and Coffered Ceilings 430 Tray Ceiling Specification Dialog 431 Special Ceilings 434 Room Moldings 436 Room Polylines 436 Room Specification Dialog 437 Room Finish Schedules 447 412 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Room Definition Room Definition A room is a totally enclosed area defined by any combination of joined walls or railings, visible or invisible. To be recognized as a room by Chief Architect, a room must have an unbroken perimeter. Unless otherwise specified, rooms generate floor and ceiling platforms automatically. Most rooms are also automatically covered by the roof when one is built. There are exceptions to this, such as rooms defined as Decks. See Room Types and Functions on page 415. Room definition disappears if part or all of a surrounding wall is deleted. It is a good idea to finalize the position of walls before specifying Room Types or defining room attributes such as floor or ceiling height. SUBDIVIDING ROOMS When a room area is first defined, it inherits its characteristics from the Floor Defaults dialog for that floor. If the room is then specified as a particular type, it may inherit properties from the Room Defaults dialog associated with its type. See Floor and Room Defaults on page 413.   If a new room is created by subdividing a larger room, it inherits its characteristics from that larger room - including any non-default settings.   If two rooms are separated by an Invisible wall, their interior areas will be measured from the wall’s centerline and characteristics like the floor finish materials and moldings will break along that line.   l If the two rooms have different floor heights, the break will occur at the wall edge that faces the room where the floor is lower.   l If the two rooms have different ceiling heights, the break will occur at the wall edge that faces the room where the ceiling is higher.   COPYING AND PASTING ROOMS A room can be copied into the same or a different plan by copying and pasting the walls that define it. Rooms copied in this manner retain their size and shape, as well as any finish materials assigned to the walls. See Copying and Pasting Objects on page 167. If you want to retain the room’s Type and other specifications, copy and paste it and the walls that define it using the Edit Area tools. See Edit Area Tools on page 269. Floor and Room Defaults Select Edit> Default Settings to open the Default Settings dialog, then click the arrow to the left of “Floors and Rooms” to expand the category.  Here, you can access several defaults dialogs which directly affect rooms. Select a line item and click the Edit button to open the defaults dialog associated with it. FLOOR LEVEL DEFAULTS Many important default values that affect rooms are specified in the Floor Defaults dialog for each floor in a plan. This dialog controls important information that the program uses to create a 3D model - particularly floor and ceiling heights and materials. Moldings can also be specified in the Floor Defaults dialog.   413 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Floor and Room Defaults Only the defaults for Floor 1 can be set ahead of time. The program uses the settings from Floor 1 to create subsequent floors. Once a new floor is created, its floor defaults can be changed. See Floor Defaults Dialog on page 731.   The Floor Defaults dialog for the current floor can also be opened by clicking the Floor Defaults button, which can be added to the toolbars. See Adding and Removing Buttons on page 132.   FLOOR 1 DEFAULT HEIGHT Chief Architect always defines the default height of Floor 1 at 0’-0”. This height value is measured from the top of the subfloor and is the constant by which the heights of structural elements in the program like walls, floors, and ceilings are measured. The heights of architectural objects can be measured relative to this absolute height, as well. As such, this default cannot be changed. FLOOR/CEILING PLATFORM DEFAULTS Floor and Ceiling Structure and Finish definitions assigned to rooms have a hierarchy of dynamic defaults. See Dynamic Defaults on page 79.   l The plan-wide defaults for platforms are set in the Floor/Ceiling Platform Defaults dialog.   l The plan-wide defaults can be overridden for each floor level in the Floor Defaults dialogs.   l Floor-wide platform defaults can be overridden in the Room Type Defaults dialogs.   l The platform defaults for Room Types can be overridden for individual rooms in the Room Specification dialog. See Structure Panel on page 439.   See Floor and Ceiling Platforms on page 428.   ROOM TYPE DEFAULTS The Room Types dialog can also be opened by clicking the Room Types button, which can be added to the toolbars.   Select an Available Room Type from the list, then:   l Click the Edit button to modify the selected Room Type in the Room Type Defaults dialog.   l Click the Copy button to create a new Room Type based on the selected one, and customize it in the Room Type Defaults dialog to meet your needs.   l Click the Rename button to specify a new Name for the selected Room Type, which will affect its room label as well as how it is listed in room schedules.   l Click the Delete button to remove the selected Room Type from the list of those available in the plan.   The settings in the Room Type Defaults dialogs allow you to specify the following for each Room Type:   414 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Room Types and Functions l The Name, as used in its default Room Label  and in Room Schedules. See Schedules and Object Labels on page 681. l The room Function. See Room Types and Functions on page 415.   l Inclusion in the Living Area. See Living Area on page 424.   l Inclusion in the Conditioned Area. See Exported Envelope Data on page 1241.   l Ceiling Structure and Finish. See Floor and Ceiling Platforms on page 428.   l Floor Structure and Finish.   l Framing and Supports for Deck rooms. See Decks on page 425.   l Moldings. See Room Moldings on page 436.   l Components information for use in the Materials List. See Components Panel on page 1330.   These settings are also found in the Room Specification dialog. See General Panel on page 438, Structure Panel on page 439, Deck Panel on page 443, and Deck Support Panel on page 445.   ROOM LABEL DEFAULTS The Room Label Defaults dialog allows you to specify the initial appearance of room labels. This dialog is also accessed by expanding the “Rooms” category in the Default Settings dialog. See Room Labels on page 422.   The options on most panels of the Room Label Defaults dialog are similar to those in the Text Specification dialog.  See Text Specification Dialog on page 506. The options on the DIMENSION FORMAT panel are similar to those in the Displayed Line Length dialog. See Displayed Line Length Dialog on page 293.   Any text added to the Room Label Defaults dialog displays in all subsequently created room labels, after the Room Name. Changes made to default settings do not alter existing room labels. To update existing labels so that they reflect changes made to the defaults, delete and replace them. See Editing Room Labels on page 423.   Room Types and Functions Room Types are used to quickly apply useful structural, functional, and appearance properties to different kinds of rooms. For example, a room assigned the “Garage” Room Type will receive concrete curbs under its walls when the Foundation is built, while a “Kitchen” will get GFCI Outlets when the Auto Place Outlet tool is used. When a room is first created by enclosing an area with walls, it is assigned a generic room type of “Unspecified.” Once a room is created, though, it can be assigned a Room Type in the Room Specification dialog. See General Panel on page 438. A selection of pre-defined Room Types is available for use; they are, however, editable; and, you can create your own, as well. See Room Type Defaults on page 414.   ROOM TYPE DEFAULTS Each Room Type is composed of two sets of characteristics: those set by the program, and those that are directly editable.   Characteristics set by the program are grouped together based on typical requirements for different types of rooms. These non-editable sets of properties is referred to as Room Functions.   Characteristics of a Room Type that can be modified include the default room Name, whether it is included in the Living Area and Conditioned Area, and the floor structure, finish, and deck supports. A default Function can also be specified. See Room Type Defaults on page 414. 415 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Room Types and Functions When you specify that a room be a certain Room Type, all of the characteristics associated with that Room Type are assigned to the room, overriding existing settings. After you specify a Room Type, though, various settings can be customized.   ROOM FUNCTIONS A room Function is a set of non-editable characteristics that are typical of a certain type of room.   There are three broad categories of room Functions: Interior, Exterior and Hybrid. l Interior - Most room Functions are Interior. l Exterior - Balcony, Court, Deck. l Hybrid - Attic, Garage, Open Below, Porch, Slab. EFFECTS OF ROOM FUNCTIONS Chief Architect applies specific properties to rooms depending on the assigned Room Function.   Living and Conditioned Areas l All interior type rooms are included in Living Area calculations by default; exterior and hybrid type rooms are not.   l All interior type rooms are included in Conditioned Area calculations by default. Open Below rooms are also included; however, exterior and other hybrid type rooms are not. See Exported Envelope Data on page 1241.   Ceilings and Roofs l Interior rooms have a flat ceiling and are set to generate a roof above them. l Exterior rooms are assumed to be open to the outside and do not have a flat ceiling or generate a roof above them. l Attic rooms do not receive a ceiling and are ignored by the program’s automatic roof generator. l Garage, Slabs, and Porches are treated like exterior rooms in all cases except that they generate a ceiling and a roof above them by default. Floors and Foundations l A room’s default floor structure and finish definitions are determined by its Room Type. See Room Type Defaults on page 414. l Open Below rooms have no floor platform and influence how adjacent walls are framed. Stairwells and Crawl Spaces are created using the Open Below Room Function. l Garages have a foundation under them as defined by the Foundation Defaults dialog with a concrete slab at the top of stem wall or grade beam. l The floor in Garage and Slab rooms display in 3D on Floor 0, not the first floor. See Garages on page 716. l Defining a room as Slab causes the floor platform thickness to equal the slab thickness value in the Foundation Defaults dialog.   l Deck rooms do not generate foundations. See Decks on page 425. Doors and Windows l A window placed in a wall between an exterior room and an interior room always faces out toward the exterior. l Doors placed between interior and exterior type rooms inherit their settings from the Exterior Defaults for the door tool, if hinged or sliding; they display threshold lines and are considered Exterior. See Interior vs Exterior Doors on page 544. l Doors placed between interior type rooms do not display thresholds and are considered Interior. 416 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Displaying Rooms l Open Below rooms are treated as interior rooms for window and door placement. All other hybrid type rooms are treated as interior.   Electrical l An electrical object placed on the wall of an exterior room using the Light , Switch , 110V Outlet or 220V Outlet tool will automatically be a waterproof or outdoor type fixture, as specified in the Electrical Defaults dialog. See Electrical Defaults on page 667. l The Auto Place Outlets tool adds outlets automatically to all interior rooms. In Bath rooms, only one outlet over each sink is added. See Auto Place Outlets on page 671.   l Auto Place Outlets places GFCI outlets in Kitchens and Baths.   l Auto Place Outlets places fewer outlets in hybrid type rooms.   l Auto Place Outlets does not place outlets in exterior type rooms, Porches or Open Below rooms.   Dimensions l Auto NKBA® Dimensions only generate in rooms specified as Kitchens or Baths. See The Automatic Dimension Tools on page 472.   Plan Check l Plan Check uses Room Functions and their characteristics for basic plan checking. For example, a closet does not need a smoke detector but a bedroom does. See Plan Check on page 72.   Displaying Rooms Unlike most things in Chief Architect, a room is not an individual object. Rather, a room is a space defined by the walls that enclose it. You can see the primary and secondary layers associated with a room by selecting it and clicking the Object Layer Properties edit button. See Object Layer Properties on page 187.   IN PLAN VIEWS Rooms typically display a transparent fill in plan view. You can, however, specify a solid color or fill pattern for all the rooms on an entire floor in the Floor Defaults dialog, or for individual rooms in the Room Specification dialog. See Fill Style Panel on page 447. In order for room fill styles to display, the “Rooms” layer must be turned on. See Layer Attributes on page 177. Room labels that include the room’s name as well as its size and other information can be set to display in plan view. See Room Labels on page 422. IN 3D VIEWS Rooms can be viewed in views created by any of the 3D view tools. The  Floor Overview tool  s can be used to see all rooms on the current floor without their ceilings. See Creating Overviews on page 1087.   417 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Selecting Rooms IN THE MATERIALS LIST The contents of a room, including furnishings and floor and ceiling materials can be calculated using the Calculate in Room tool. See Calculate Materials in Room on page 1304.   The Calculate Materials From Selection edit tool creates a Materials List that calculates the finish materials in a selected room or rooms. Room moldings and wall, floor, and ceiling finish materials are counted, as is subflooring; but doors, windows, and structural materials like framing and other structural materials are not.   IN SCHEDULES Information about rooms and their contents can be reported in different types of schedules. See Room Finish Schedules on page 447. You can also create any type of schedule that lists the contents of a selected room using the Create Schedule from Room edit tool. See Create Schedule from Room on page 683. Selecting Rooms Room definition is established when a room is completely enclosed by walls. You can confirm that a room has room definition by using the Select Objects tool to select it. When a fully-enclosed room is selected, its interior space becomes highlighted. See Selecting Objects on page 210. Rooms can be group-selected using the Shift or Ctrl key. They can also be marquee-selected using the Marquee Select Similar edit tool. To select rooms of a particular type, us the Restrictive Selection option. See Selecting Multiple Objects on page 213. Although rooms may be visible, if the “Rooms” layer is locked in the  currently active layer set, it will not be possible to select a room. See Locking Layers on page 178. Note: The selection color can be specified in the Preferences dialog. See Colors Panel on page 98. As with many other objects in the program, rooms can be group-selected. Not all attributes of multiple selected rooms can be edited; however, many - such as moldings, materials, and fill style - can be.   THE EXTERIOR ROOM Each floor level of a plan has an Exterior Room, which allows you to control its exterior wall coverings and materials in the Exterior Room Specification dialog. See Room Specification Dialog on page 437. 418 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Rooms To select the Exterior Room in plan view, click just outside an exterior wall using the Select Objects tool. If a wall or other object becomes selected instead, click the Select Next Object edit button or press the Tab key until the Exterior Room becomes selected. The Status Bar indicates which object is currently selected. See The Status Bar on page 24. When it is selected, a highlighted band around the plan’s exterior displays. IN 3D VIEWS A room can be selected in a 3D view by clicking on an empty space on its floor or a wall surface while the Select Objects tool is active. If you select a wall or other object instead of the room, click Select Next Object edit button or press the Tab key until the room becomes selected. In exterior camera views and overviews, the Exterior Room for each floor can be selected by clicking on the exterior surface of an exterior wall using the Select Objects tool and then clicking the Select Next Object edit button. SELECT ROOM BEFORE WALL IN 3D By default, when you click on a wall surface in a 3D view, the individual wall will become selected. If you prefer to always select the room first instead of the wall, check  Select Room Before Wall in 3D in the Preferences dialog. See Architectural Panel on page 113.   MATCH PROPERTIES Click a room to select it, then click the Match Properties edit button and group-select rooms with shared attributes. See Match Properties on page 282.   Editing Rooms A room’s structure and appearance can be modified using its edit tools and specification dialog. Rooms can be selected in all views, and the ways in which they can be edited depend somewhat on the current view. See Selecting Rooms on page 418. 419 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Rooms IN 3D VIEWS The top and bottom heights of individual walls, the floor and ceiling heights of individual rooms, and the floor and ceiling heights for entire floor levels can be edited using edit handles in 3D views. Lowered ceilings cannot be edited in 3D. See 3D Views on page 1079. See The Exterior Room on page 418. The default floor and ceiling heights for an entire floor level can be edited by selecting the Exterior Room. See The Exterior Room on page 418 and Floor and Room Defaults on page 413. To change default ceiling heights in 3D 1. Create a 3D or Cross Section/Elevation view of the exterior of your plan. 2. Click on the exterior surface of a wall, then click the Select Next Object edit button. 3. When the Exterior Room is selected in 3D: l The wall that you clicked on remains highlighted and an edit handle displays along its top edge. l When the wall is on any floor other than Floor 1, an edit handle also displays along its bottom edge. l A bounding box displays around each wall of the selected floor level. l The Status Bar says “Exterior Room”. See The Status Bar on page 24. l A temporary dimension will display, measuring from the floor’s default rough floor to default rough ceiling. See Temporary Dimensions on page 473. 4. Click and drag the edit handle on the top wall edge to adjust the default ceiling height, or the edit handle on the bottom edge to adjust the default floor height. 5. As you drag a handle, notice that the entire floor level is affected.   l The wall that you clicked on remains highlighted and an edit handle displays along its top edge. l When the wall is on any floor other than Floor 1, an edit handle also displays along its bottom edge. l A bounding box displays around each wall of the selected floor level. l The Status Bar says “Exterior Room”. See The Status Bar on page 24. l A temporary dimension will display, measuring from the floor’s default rough floor to default rough ceiling. See Temporary Dimensions on page 473. 6. Click and drag the edit handle on the top wall edge to adjust the default ceiling height, or the edit handle on the bottom edge to adjust the default floor height. Note: Any rooms that do not update when the default floor or ceiling height is changed are not using the default values. To use the default values for a specific room, check Default for any of the room height values in its specification dialog. See General Panel on page 438. To adjust room heights in 3D 1. Create a 3D or Cross Section/Elevation view of your plan. 2. Click on the surface of a wall that faces a room to select it, then click the Select Next Object edit button. 3. When a room is selected in 3D: 420 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Rooms l The wall that you clicked on remains highlighted and an edit handle displays along its top and bottom edges. l The Status Bar says “Room”. l A temporary dimension will display in cross section/elevation views, and measure from the room’s rough floor to rough ceiling. 4. Click and drag the edit handle on the top wall edge to adjust the room ceiling height, or the handle on the bottom edge to adjust its floor height. Temporary dimensions display. 5. As you drag a handle, notice that all walls defining that room are affected. To adjust the height of a wall in 3D 1. Create a 3D or cross section/elevation view of your plan.   2. Click on a surface of the wall to select it.   3. Click and drag the edit handles along its top and bottom surfaces. See Wall Heights on page 371.   Room materials such as floor, ceiling, and wall materials can be changed in 3D views using the Material Painter . See Material Painter Tools on page 1052. Room moldings can be replaced directly from the library in 3D views, as well. See Replace From Library on page 976. If you use the Material Painter to change a room’s floor or ceiling finish material, it will add that material to the room’s Floor or Ceiling Finish Definition. Changes to a Deck room’s planking or framing will affect its floor structure definition. IN THE SPECIFICATION DIALOG Floor and ceiling heights and structure, moldings, wall coverings, and materials can all be specified in the Room Specification dialog. See Room Specification Dialog on page 437. When multiple rooms are selected, the options available in the Room Specification dialog will be limited. You can, however, apply attributes to multiple rooms using the Match Properties and Apply Properties edit tools. See Match Properties on page 282.   You can also apply a variety of attributes to rooms using Style Palettes. See Style Palettes on page 279.   USING THE EDIT TOOLS A variety of options are available on the Edit Toolbar for a selected room. See The Edit Toolbar on page 130.   Calculate Materials for Room creates a materials list of the contents of the selected room, not including walls. See Calculate Materials in Room on page 1304.   Turn Ceiling Off removes the flat ceiling from the selected room while Turn Ceiling On restores it. See Vaulted and Cathedral Ceilings on page 435.   Add Selected Object(s) to Style Palette adds the selected room’s attributes to a Style Palette. See Style Palettes on page 279.   Build Framing for Selected Object(s) builds or rebuilds the framing for the selected room. See Build Framing for Selected Object(s) on page 885.   Make Room Polyline creates a CAD polyline that follows the surfaces of the selected room. See Room Polylines on page 436.   421 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Room Labels Make Standard Area Polyline creates a CAD polyline that follows the perimeter of the room’s Standard area. See Displaying Room Labels on page 423.   Make Room Molding Polyline creates a room molding polyline. See Make Room Molding Polyline on page 436.   Make Tray Ceiling in Room creates a tray ceiling in the room. See Tray and Coffered Ceilings on page 430.   Expand Room Polyline creates a temporarily enlarged room definition that ignores invisible walls and railings. See Expand Room Polyline on page 437.   Create Schedule from Room creates a schedule showing only objects of a particular type located in that room. See Create Schedule from Room on page 683.   Create Room Elevation Views creates an interior elevation view of each wall defining the selected room. See Cross Section/Elevation Views on page 1089.   Auto Room Dimensions edit button to generate interior dimensions that measure each wall defining the selected room(s). See Auto Room Dimensions on page 473.   Room Labels A label can display in plan view for any area defined as a room. There are two parts to each room label: l The Room Name, which is set in the Room Specification dialog. l The room size, which can be reported as dimensions and/or an area and is determined by the configuration of the walls that define the room. Room labels can move or even disappear when room entries are revalidated. CUSTOM ROOM NAMES The Room Names that display in room labels are based on the Room Types assigned in the Room Specification dialog. See Room Types and Functions on page 415. You can, however create a custom name for a selected room, also in the Room Specification dialog. See General Panel on page 438. Before creating a custom Room Name, assign the Room Type most similar to the room’s actual use.  For example, if you wish to name a room “Guest Room”, begin by specifying it as a “Bedroom” since these rooms have similar uses. You can assign a custom Room Name, move a room label or even delete it without affecting the Room Type. ROOM LABEL DEFAULTS The initial settings that control the size, font, color and other aspects of room label appearance are controlled in the Room Label Defaults dialog. See Room Label Defaults on page 415.   You can also add additional text to the default room label if you wish. This text will appear in the labels for all rooms.   Room labels can be customized using a variety of text macros. See Text Macros on page 540. 422 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Room Labels DISPLAYING ROOM LABELS The display of room labels is controlled in the Layer Display Options dialog.  By default, room labels are placed on the “Rooms, Labels” layer and use the Text Style assigned to that layer. See Layer Display Options Dialog on page 179.   You can specify how the area of rooms is reported by the program by turning on the display of one or more of these layers:   l Rooms, Standard Area is measured from the center of interior walls that define the room and from either the outside surface or the outside of the Main Layer of exterior walls, depending on the Living Area to setting in the General Plan Defaults dialog. It is rounded to the nearest square foot or mm and does not include the area within bay, box and bow windows. See Exterior and Interior Walls on page 351 and General Plan Defaults Dialog on page 92.   l Rooms, Interior Area is measured from the inner surfaces of all the room's walls.   l Rooms, Interior Dimensions is also measured from the inner surfaces of the room walls. Its format is set on the DIMENSION FORMAT panel of the Room Label Defaults dialog. See Room Label Defaults on page 415. The display of room labels can also be controlled on a room by room basis in the Room Specification dialog. See General Panel on page 438.   EDITING ROOM LABELS Room labels are similar to simple Text objects and can be moved and resized much like any other text object. You can also modify a room label’s Text Style and other attributes in the Room Label Specification dialog. See Text Specification Dialog on page 506. The text of a room label cannot be modified in its specification dialog, however. The Room Name can only be specified in the Room Specification dialog and additional text can only be added in the Room Label Defaults dialog. If you delete a room label, the Room Type and Room Name remain unchanged in the Room Specification dialog. To restore the label, check the Show Room Label check box on the GENERAL panel of that dialog. If you wish to further customize an individual room’s label by adding text or a text macro, uncheck Show Room Label in the Room Specification dialog and create your own label using a Text object. See The Text Tools on page 497. Note: If you use the Convert to Rich Text edit tool to convert a Room Label to a Text object, it will no longer be display room size information or update if the room type is changed. See Convert to Rich Text on page 512. ROOM AREA Unlike the rest of a room label, the room area and dimensions are not standard text entries and cannot be edited or changed. The room area moves, resizes and rotates with the rest of the room label, but you can turn the area and dimensions on or off separately in the Layer Display Options dialog. See Displaying Rooms on page 417. All three area formats measure the room's size at floor level. The Interior Area room area calculation includes the areas within bay, box or bow windows, while the Standard Area and Interior Dimensions calculations do not. You can use the Make Room Area Polyline edit button to see the exact extents of the selected room’s Standard Area.   You can also insert room areas as well as other information into text objects using Text Macros. See Text Macros on page 540.   423 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Room Labels LIVING AREA The Living Area label is an automatically generated Text object that reports the area of the current floor specified as living space. By default, interior type rooms are defined as part of the Living Area, while exterior and hybrid type rooms are not. In addition, rooms with a Rough Ceiling height that is less than 48" (1200 mm) are excluded from the Living Area by default. See Room Functions on page 416. Regardless of its Room Type, you can specify whether any room is included in the Living Area Calculation in the Room Specification dialog. See General Panel on page 438. A Living Area label is created as soon as a room area is defined by walls and/or railings and is recalculated every time you add, remove, resize, or redefine a room or when you Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings . If multiple buildings are created, each will have its own Living Area label. If none of a structure’s rooms are included in the Living Area Calculation, however, no Living Area label will display for it. Each Living Area label can be edited in its specification dialog. Bear in mind, though, that if a new floor is added, any existing Living Area labels will be deleted and replaced. See Text Specification Dialog on page 506. Living Area labels are placed on the "Room Labels" layer by default. To turn off the display of all Living Area labels in a plan without affecting individual room labels, you can uncheck Show Living Area Label in the General Plan Defaults dialog. See General Plan Defaults Dialog on page 92. Living Area labels cannot be deleted: if you select one and click the Delete edit button, Show Living Area Label in the General Plan Defaults dialog will become unchecked.   LIVING AREA VS. FOOTPRINT The Living Area should not be mistaken for the footprint of a house. Only true livable areas are included in the Living Area calculation. By default, exterior and hybrid room types such as Garage, Deck, and Porch are not included. Neither is any room labeled Open Below or Attic. See Room Functions on page 416. Regardless of its room type, you can specify whether a room is included in the Living Area calculation in the Room Specification dialog. See General Panel on page 438. You can quickly see which rooms are included in the Living Area using the Match Properties edit tool. See Matching Properties on page 282. Living Area is measured from either the outside surface or the outer surface of the Main Layer of exterior walls. See Wall Type Definitions on page 384. You can use the Make Living Area Polyline edit button to see the exact extents of the current Living Area Calculation.   To find the extents of the Living Area 1. Click just outside an exterior wall to select the current floor’s Exterior Room. See The Exterior Room on page 418.   2. Click the Make Living Area Polyline edit button. This creates a polyline surrounding the area included in the Living Area on the current floor.   3. You can edit the polyline’s shape to include or exclude portions of the plan if you wish. See Using the Edit Toolbar on page 230.   424 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Decks Note: Editing the shape of the Living Area Polyline does not affect the Living Area Calculation. 4. Select the polyline and click the Open Object edit button. The polyline’s Area is stated in the Polyline Specification dialog. See Polyline Panel on page 317.   A polyline created using the Make Living Area Polyline edit tool is a static representation of the current Living Area Calculation. If changes are made to the model that affect the Living Area, any previously created Living Area Polylines will not be affected.   To find the footprint of a floor 1. Select the Exterior Room.   2. Click the Make Room Polyline edit button. This creates a polyline around the exterior walls.   3. Edit the shape of the polyline if you wish.   4. Select the polyline and click the Open Object edit button. The polyline’s Area is stated in the Polyline Specification dialog.   Decks A Deck room is an exterior-type room that uses deck planking and framing to create a floor platform rather than using a floor finish that spans the entire room area. See Floor and Ceiling Platform Definitions on page 429. The default settings for deck planking and framing are set in the Deck Room Defaults dialog. See Room Type Defaults on page 414.   To draw a deck, select Build> Railing and Deck> Straight Deck Railing , then click and drag to draw a railing. Once room definition is established, the area defined by the railing can be assigned the “Deck” room type. l To create a deck without a railing, use one of the Deck Edge tools. See Fencing Tools on page 351.   l You can also create a regular, polygon-shaped deck using the Polygon Shaped Deck tool. See Polygon Shaped Deck on page 350.   A room does not have to be defined by Deck Railing to be specified as a “Deck.” See Room Types and Functions on page 415. You can also define a room as a “Deck” in the Room Specification dialog. See General Panel on page 438. By default, decks do not have roofs. If you want a roof over a deck, check Roof Over This Room in the Room Specification dialog. See Structure Panel on page 439. To give the roof a visible means of support, you can select the Post to Beam option in the Wall Specification dialog. See Rail Style Panel on page 407. Openings in deck railings can be created using Doorways . See Openings in Railings on page 556. DECK FRAMING AND PLANKING When a Deck room is created, the floor platform is modeled using joists, beams, posts, and planking as specified in the Deck Room Defaults dialog. See Structure Panel on page 439, Deck Panel on page 443, and Deck Support Panel on page 445. 425 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Floor and Ceiling Heights l If a floor level is present below the one that the Deck room is created on, the framing will be created there. If needed, beams may be generated with posts beneath them, if specified. When terrain is present, the posts will have footings, again, if specified.   l If a floor level is not present below the Deck, framing will be generated on the same floor as the room. Beams may be created but posts will not.   l Deck framing, planking, posts, and beams are placed on their own layers with names that begin with “Framing, Deck”: for example, “Framing, Deck Posts”. These layers are often turned off in plan view but are typically turned on in 3D views. See Displaying Framing on page 879. If standard floor framing is present when a room is specified as a Deck, that framing is deleted and replaced with deck framing.   If changes are later made to the settings on the DECK panel of the Room Specification dialog, the deck framing and planking will be automatically rebuilt in response. To prevent this from happening, uncheck Automatic Deck Framing.   Once created, the individual planking and framing objects generated for a Deck room can be selected and edited like other framing objects, provided that Automatic Deck Framing is turned off. See Editing Framing on page 882.   To rebuild a deck’s framing and remove any changes you may have made to individual deck framing or planks, select the Deck room and click the Build Deck Framing edit button.   If you delete a Deck room, its deck framing and planking will be automatically deleted, as well. To prevent this from happening, check Keep Deck Framing After Deck Room is Deleted. See Deck Panel on page 443.   The structural materials for a selected deck can be calculated in a Materials List by clicking the Calculate Structural Materials for Deck edit button. See Materials Lists on page 1303. DECK FRAMING SCHEDULES The framing components that make up the decks in a plan can be listed in a Framing Schedule. See Framing Schedules on page 882.   Floor and Ceiling Heights Default floor and ceiling heights are defined in the Floor Defaults dialog for each floor, including the foundation. Use the Floor Defaults dialog to change these values on a floor-by-floor basis. See Floor and Room Defaults on page 413. Use the Room Specification dialog to set floor heights on a room-by-room basis. See Room Specification Dialog on page 437. Different rooms on the same floor can have unique floor and ceiling heights, allowing you to create: l Split levels and bi-levels l Sunken living rooms and garages l Cathedral, vaulted, and coffered ceilings. 426 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Floor and Ceiling Heights In 3D views, you can adjust the default floor and ceiling height for the entire floor, the floor and ceiling height for an individual room, or the top and bottom heights of an individual wall. See In 3D Views on page 420. In order to raise or lower an area’s floor or ceiling height, you must give it a room definition. To create room definition without enclosing an area with solid walls, use Railings . Invisible walls and railings will fill in the vertical space between floor platforms of different heights as long as Generate Between Platforms is checked in their specification dialog. See General Panel on page 392.   Ceiling and floor heights are interrelated. Changing the floor height in one room can affect ceiling heights of the rooms below. l If a room’s floor is lowered, its ceiling height is increased while the ceiling below that room drops. l If the floor is raised, the ceiling height decreases while the ceiling below that room is raised. If the rooms above a particular room have more than one floor height, the room’s ceiling is stepped. In a situation like this, a Lowered Ceiling can be used to cover “steps” made by different floor heights on the floor above. See General Panel on page 438. DROPPED CEILINGS AND RAISED FLOORS The structure of a dropped, or suspended, ceiling can be specified in the Ceiling Finish Definition dialog either for a room or the defaults for a floor. See Floor and Ceiling Platform Definitions on page 429.   To create a framed dropped ceiling 1. Select a room and click the Open Object edit button.   2. On the STRUCTURE panel of the Room Specification dialog, click the Ceiling Finish button. See Structure Panel on page 439.   427 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Floor and Ceiling Platforms 3. In the Ceiling Finish Definition dialog:   l Specify Layer 1 as the plenum, or air gap, space.   l Specify Layer 2 as the horizontal framing. Framing member spacing and width are set in the material definition. See Define Material Dialog on page 1066.   l Specify Layer 3 as the drywall.   l Specify Layer 4 as the paint color.   A dropped ceiling composed of a metal grid requires only two layers: one for the plenum and one for the tiles.   You can create a raised floor, such as for a shower pan, in a similar manner by specifying it in the Floor Finish Definition dialog.   SHELF CEILINGS In rooms with high or vaulted ceilings, it is possible to have a smaller room such as a closet that has a flat, lower ceiling. By default, the area above the flat ceiling will be enclosed by automatically-generated Attic walls. See Attic Walls on page 380. If you prefer, you can specify that these Attic walls be suppressed and an open space be created instead. This condition is referred to as a Shelf Ceiling, or plant shelf, and can be specified in the Room Specification dialog of the room with the lower flat ceiling. See Structure Panel on page 439. SPLIT LEVELS A split level can be created by raising or lowering the floor and ceiling heights of various areas of the plan. In the following example, the lowest floor height is 0, the next is 24, and the next is 48 inches. The ceiling height in each room is set at 109 inches. See Split Levels on page 736. Floor and Ceiling Platforms In many ways, rooms in Chief Architect are defined by the floor platforms below them and the floor and/or ceiling platforms above.   All floor and ceiling platform and finish materials are used for the calculation of the materials list. See Materials Lists on page 1303.   428 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Floor and Ceiling Platforms FLOOR VS CEILING PLATFORMS Floor and ceiling platforms are not the same thing in Chief Architect. Floor platforms have living space above them and are designed to be weight-bearing. Ceiling platforms, on the other hand, have living space below them but not above them. They are not designed to bear weight and are typically less strong - and less thick - than floor platforms.   FLOOR AND CEILING PLATFORM DEFINITIONS Floor and ceiling platforms are made up of layers of different materials such as framing, subflooring or drywall, and finish materials.  So, typically, are Floor Material Regions. See Floor and Wall Material Regions on page 1037. Floor and ceiling platform definitions play a role in determining floor and ceiling heights. Floor and ceiling finishes can be used to create  raised floors as well as dropped ceilings. See Floor and Ceiling Heights on page 426. l You can specify the composition of the default floor and ceiling platforms for an entire plan in the Floor/Ceiling Platform Defaults dialog. The settings in this dialog are also found in the Room Specification dialog. See Structure Panel on page 439.   l Floor and ceiling platforms can be customized on a floor-by-floor basis in the Floor Defaults dialog. See Floor Level Defaults on page 413.   l Floor and ceiling platforms can also be customized for individual rooms in the Room Specification dialog. See Structure Panel on page 439.   Regardless of how they are accessed, floor and ceiling structure are defined in the Floor and Ceiling Structure Definition dialogs. See Material Layers Definition Dialogs on page 1040.   Note: Subflooring refers to the topmost layer(s) of a floor structure not specified as Framing. In addition to the structural layers of a platform, floors and ceilings typically have one or more finish layers. You can specify floor and ceiling finish materials for an entire floor or individual room much the way you can structural layers: by clicking the Floor Finish and/or Ceiling Finish button on the STRUCTURE panel of either the Floor Defaults or Room Specification dialog to open the Floor or Ceiling Finish Definition dialog.   FLOOR AND CEILING FINISHES AND THE MATERIAL PAINTER If you use the Material Painter to change a room’s floor or ceiling finish material, it will add that material to the room’s Floor or Ceiling Finish Definition. Changes to a Deck room’s planking or framing will affect its Floor Structure Definition. See Material Painter Tools on page 1052.   When the Material Painter is used to add a floor or ceiling finish material in a room where one does not currently exist, a new finish layer is created and the material Depth is used as its Thickness. See Materials List Panel on page 1075.   FLOOR MATERIAL REGIONS Floor Material Regions allow you to create areas within a floor that use different layers of materials than the parent object. See Floor and Wall Material Regions on page 1037.   STEPPED FLOOR AND CEILING PLATFORMS Each floor has default floor and ceiling heights. You can, however, use the Room Specification dialog to specify floor and ceiling heights on a room by room basis to create stepped floors and ceilings. See Structure Panel on page 439.   429 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Tray and Coffered Ceilings If you require a single floor platform with a uniform height and thickness but different ceiling heights for the rooms below, specify a lowered ceiling using the Ceiling Finish Specification dialog. See Lowered Ceilings on page 434.   Either way, by default, any gap between floor and ceiling platforms that step at a railing or invisible wall is closed off by a short section of solid wall. If you require a gap between the platforms, either select a single-layer wall type or uncheck Generate Between Platforms in the Wall or Railing Specification dialog. See General Panel on page 392.   PLATFORM EDGES Typically, floor and ceiling platforms are built so that they bear on top of walls. The edges of the platform structures extend through exterior walls to the layer of the wall type definition with the Build Platform to This Line setting. See Wall Type Definitions on page 384.   l For framed walls, the Build Platform to This Line layer is set as the outside of the wall’s Main Layer,   l For concrete walls, it’s the inside of the wall’s Main Layer.   l The platforms of rooms with raised floors and/or lowered ceilings build in the same manner: to the Build Platform to This Line layer of the wall type assigned to the railing or invisible wall defining the room. See Floor and Ceiling Heights on page 426.   For a given wall type, you can specify a different Build Platform to This Line wall layer surface provided that it  is on the exterior side of the Main Layer.   In addition, you can specify that individual walls build through floor and ceiling platforms in the Wall Specification dialog.   See General Panel on page 392.   PLATFORM HOLES Select Build> Floor> Hole in Floor Platform or Hole in Ceiling Platform, then click and drag a rectangular polyline that forms a hole in the designated platform.   You can also create a hole in a floor or ceiling platform by drawing a closed CAD polyline and then using the Convert Polyline edit button to convert it into a platform hole. See Convert Polyline on page 262.   Platform hole edges derive their material from the ceiling finish of the room directly below the hole.   Note: The Hole in Ceiling Platform tool only forms holes in the flat ceiling that is automatically generated in a room. It does not create holes in manually drawn Ceiling Planes. See Ceiling Planes on page 826. Tray and Coffered Ceilings A wide variety of different tray and coffered ceiling configurations can be created using Tray Ceiling Polylines. A basic Tray Ceiling Polyline is made up of an upper and lower Ceiling Plane and a ceiling plane hole, but you can add moldings and rope lights if you wish. You can also add sloped sides formed by additional Ceiling Planes, and you can recess the tray ceiling into the ceiling platform rather than build it below the room’s ceiling. In addition to placing a single Tray Ceiling Polyline, smaller polylines can be nested inside larger ones and you can replicate nested polylines to create a coffered ceiling. See Multiple Copy on page 172. There are four ways to create Tray Ceiling Polylines: Select Build> Roof> Tray Ceiling Polyline and then click inside a room. A Tray Ceiling Polyline that follows the shape of the room is created. Tray Ceiling Polylines can also be created by clicking and dragging. See Polylines on page 316. 430 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Tray Ceiling Specification Dialog Create a Tray Ceiling Polyline that follows the perimeter of a room by selecting that room and clicking the Make Tray Ceiling in Room edit button. You can also convert a closed CAD polyline into a Tray Ceiling Polyline. See Convert Polyline on page 262. In addition, you can select a Tray Ceiling Polyline and create a new, smaller one that follows the perimeter of the original by clicking the Make Nested Tray Ceiling edit button. In order for a Tray Ceiling Polyline to generate in 3D, it must be located in a room with a flat ceiling. Tray Ceiling Polylines do not have surfaces on their sides, so while one can be positioned next to a room with no ceiling, it will not have a closed side. See Structure Panel on page 439. If a Tray Ceiling Polyline is shaped or positioned in a way that is not supported, a Caution symbol will display in its interior. In this state, the tray ceiling will not generate framing or display in 3D views. Move the mouse pointer over the symbol to display a Tool Tip with information about how to fix the problem. EDITING TRAY CEILING POLYLINES Once created, Tray Ceiling Polylines can be edited much the way other closed CAD polylines are. See Editing Closed Polyline-Based Objects on page 228. Tray Ceiling Polylines can also be edited in their specification dialogs. See Tray Ceiling Specification Dialog on page 431. To generate framing for a selected Tray Ceiling Polyline, select it and click the Build Framing for Selected Object edit button. See Build Framing for Selected Object(s) on page 885. EXPLODE TRAY CEILING Click the Explode Tray Ceiling edit button to explode a selected Tray Ceiling Polyline into its component parts. The ceiling planes as well as the ceiling and/or platform hole and any Molding Polylines and Rope Lights can then be edited individually. Once exploded, the components of a Tray Ceiling Polyline cannot be blocked together again. This option is not available if the polyline displays a Caution symbol. Tray Ceiling Specification Dialog The Tray Ceiling Specification dialog opens if you select one more Tray Ceiling Polylines and click the Open Object edit button. This dialog also opens when you select a room and click the Make Tray Ceiling in Room or Make Nested Tray Ceiling edit button. See Tray and Coffered Ceilings on page 430. The Tray Ceiling Specification dialog has the following panels:   431 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Tray Ceiling Specification Dialog GENERAL PANEL Tray Ceiling Specify the tray ceiling's structure.   l Specify the Width of the outer ceiling, from the outside edge to the hole in its center. The Width setting is only present when this dialog is opened using the Make Tray Ceiling in Room or Make Nested Tray Ceiling edit tool.   l Specify the vertical Depth, which is the distance from the surface of the lower ceiling to that of the upper ceiling.   l Check Recess into Ceiling to build the outer ceiling at the room’s specified ceiling height and raise the inner ceiling into the room’s ceiling platform. When unchecked, the inner ceiling is positioned at the room’s specified ceiling height and the outer ceiling is dropped.   l Specify the Pitch of the tray’s sides. When a non-Vertical value is specified, a sloped Ceiling Plane is created along each edge. When this is the case, rope lights and moldings cannot be specified.   l Check Vertical to produce vertical sides with no side Ceiling Planes.   l Check Pitch in Degrees to display the pitch value in degrees in all dialogs as well as in roof plane labels. Values between -89° and 89° can be entered. When this is unchecked, Pitch is described in terms of rise and run: x inches in 12 or in metric plans, x mm in 1000.   Ceiling Layers l The total thickness of the Structure displays here for reference. Click the Edit button to modify the structure. See Material Layers Definition Dialogs on page 1040.   l Check Use Room Ceiling Material for Sides to apply the room’s ceiling finish material to the sides of the tray ceiling.   l Check Use Room Ceiling Material for Top to apply the room’s ceiling finish material to the top of the tray ceiling.   432 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Tray Ceiling Specification Dialog Framing l Check Retain Framing to prevent the framing associated with the selected Tray Ceiling Polyline from being rebuilt. See Build Framing for Selected Object(s) on page 885.   l Specify the Tray Ceiling's on-center Rafter Spacing. l Specify the Rafter Width. POLYLINE PANEL The POLYLINE panel indicates the length of the tray ceiling interior’s Perimeter and its enclosed Area. See Polyline Panel on page 317.   MOLDINGS PANEL Crown or other moldings can be assigned to a Tray Ceiling Polyline on the MOLDINGS panel. Moldings are placed around the inside perimeter of the polyline at the specified height.   The settings on the MOLDINGS panel are similar to those found in other specification dialogs throughout the program. See Moldings / / Profiles / Rails / Panels on page 927.   The settings on  this panel are only available when the Pitch of the tray ceiling sides is set to “Vertical” on the GENERAL panel.   ROPE LIGHTS PANEL The settings on the ROPE LIGHTS panel allow you to assign rope lights to the inside perimeter of the selected Tray Ceiling Polyline. See Rope Lights on page 669.   The settings on this panel are similar to those on the MOLDINGS panel found in a variety of dialogs in the program. See Moldings / / Profiles / Rails / Panels on page 927.   Two things about the ROPE LIGHTS panel are unique:   l No attributes of the rope light aside from its Horizontal and Vertical Offset can be specified here.   l Click the Edit button to open the Rope Light Specification dialog for the rope light selected in the table. See Rope Light Specification Dialog on page 678.   The settings on the ROPE LIGHTS panel are only available when the Pitch of the tray ceiling sides is set to “Vertical” on the GENERAL panel.   LINE STYLE PANEL For information about the settings on this panel, see Line Style Panel on page 305.   FILL STYLE PANEL The settings on the FILL STYLE panel affect the appearance of the selected polyline in plan view. For information about these settings, see Fill Style Panel and Dialogs on page 193.   MATERIALS PANEL The MATERIALS panel can be found in dialogs throughout the program. For information about the settings on this panel, see Materials Panel on page 1055.   433 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Special Ceilings LABEL PANEL Tray Ceiling Polyline labels display in plan  views when the “Roofs, Labels” layer is turned on and use the Text Style assigned to that layer. The Automatic Label for Tray Ceiling Polylines is blank, but you can specify a custom label.   For information about the settings on this panel, see Label Panel on page 700.   Special Ceilings By default, the program builds a flat ceiling platform on top the wall plates of a room. More varied and complex ceilings are made using settings in the Room Specification dialog and the Ceiling Plane tool. Ceiling planes are drawn and can be edited much like roof planes. See Ceiling Planes on page 826. LOWERED CEILINGS If you require uniform top plate heights and a single floor platform with a uniform height and thickness but different ceiling heights for the rooms below, specify a lowered ceiling. You can define a lowered or dropped ceiling in a room without affecting the top height of the walls by specifying the lowered ceiling framing as a layer in the Ceiling Finish Definition. See Floor and Ceiling Platforms on page 428. In the following illustration, the default ceiling height for the entire first floor is 120", and the room on the right has a ceiling finish lowered to 96".   When a Soffit is positioned against the ceiling in a room, the Ceiling Finish layers located directly above it - including any lowered ceiling framing - will not generate. See Placing Soffits on page 1033.   To create a lowered ceiling 1. Select the room in which you would like to specify a lowered ceiling. 2. Click the Open Object edit button to open the Room Specification dialog. 3. On the STRUCTURE panel, click the Ceiling Finish button to open the Ceiling Finish Definition dialog. See Material Layers Definition Dialogs on page 1040.   l Select Layer 1 of the ceiling finish definition, then click the Insert button to create a new layer above the current Layer 1.   l Specify the desired Thickness of the new layer, which will form the lowered ceiling framing.   434 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Special Ceilings l Click the Select Material button and specify the new layer’s material as a Framing material.   l Specify the Structural Type, the type of framing member you want to use to frame the lowered ceiling.   4. Repeat step 3 if you require additional layers, such as an air gap, above the lowered framing.   5. When you are finished, click OK to close the Ceiling Finish Definition dialog.   6. On the Structure panel, notice that the preview diagram represents the Finished Ceiling height (F). VAULTED AND CATHEDRAL CEILINGS A cathedral ceiling has the same pitch as the roof and is created using the underside of the roof above the room. A vaulted ceiling typically has a different pitch from that of the roof and is often framed using scissor trusses. See Scissors Trusses on page 911. To create a cathedral ceiling 1. Build a roof for your plan. See Roofs on page 791. 2. Select the room and open the Room Specification dialog. See Room Specification Dialog on page 437. 3. On the STRUCTURE panel, uncheck Flat Ceiling Over This Room. You can also remove or restore a selected room's flat ceiling by clicking the Turn Off Ceiling or Turn On Ceiling edit button. By default, cathedrals ceiling use the ceiling material set in the Room Specification dialog. If you require a different material on a given roof plane, uncheck Use Room Ceiling Finish in the Roof Plane Specification dialog. See Options Panel on page 817.   To create a vaulted ceiling 1. To create a ceiling pitch different from the roof’s, select Build> Roof> Ceiling Plane and draw ceiling planes. See Ceiling Planes on page 826.   2. Select each ceiling plane and specify its pitch. See Ceiling Plane Specification Dialog on page 828.   TRAY CEILINGS A tray ceiling is an area within a ceiling that is raised and has either vertical or sloping sides. A variety of different tray and coffered ceiling configurations can be created using Tray Ceiling Polylines. See Tray and Coffered Ceilings on page 430. CANTILEVER UNDERSIDES Occasionally, a room will cantilever out past an exterior wall. You can specify the surface material of the underside of a cantilever on the MATERIALS panel of the Room Specification dialog. For no material, select “No Material” from the Plan 435 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Room Moldings Materials dialog. See Room Specification Dialog on page 437. Room Moldings Base molding, chair rail, and crown moldings can be applied to rooms on a floor by floor basis in the Floor Defaults dialogs, to different room types in the Room Type Defaults dialogs, and to individual rooms in the Room Specification dialog. See Floor and Room Defaults on page 413 and Room Specification Dialog on page 437. By default, Chief Architect does not automatically add room moldings to exterior or hybrid room types. Baseboards and chair rails are not automatically added to Open Below rooms, either; however, crown molding is if it is specified in the defaults for the room’s floor. See Room Types and Functions on page 415. Base molding and chair rail heights are both offset from the floor, while crown molding is offset from the ceiling. For additional information, see Moldings / / Profiles / Rails / Panels on page 927. By default, room moldings are suppressed behind cabinets placed against a wall. You can prevent this from occurring by checking Suppress Adjacent Room Moldings in the Cabinet Specification dialog. See General Panel on page 644. Suppress Adjacent Room Moldings is also an option in the Architectural Block Specification dialog as well as in the Symbol Object Specification dialog for fixtures and furniture. See General Panel on page 1011 and Symbol Object Specification Dialogs on page 986. Room Moldings can be suppressed along an individual wall by checking No Room Molding Exterior and/or Interior in the Wall Specification dialog. See General Panel on page 392.   Room Moldings can be converted into Molding Polylines that can be selected and edited as independent objects. See Room Polylines on page 436. Room Polylines Polylines for a variety of purposes can be created using the buttons on the Edit Toolbar for a selected room. See Using the Edit Tools on page 421. Once they are created, these polylines are not linked to the room in any way and are not affected if the room is altered. MAKE ROOM POLYLINE Click the Make Room Polyline edit button to create a standard CAD polyline on the Current CAD Layer that follows the surfaces of the selected room. See Current CAD Layer on page 326. MAKE STANDARD AREA POLYLINE Click the Make Standard Area Polyline edit button to create a CAD polyline on the Current CAD Layer that follows the extents of the selected room’s Standard Area. See Room Area on page 423. MAKE ROOM MOLDING POLYLINE To create a molding polyline that follows the interior surfaces of a room, select the room and click the Make Room Molding Polyline edit button. If a Room Molding Polyline crosses a door or window, or a cabinet set to not cut room moldings, it will have a separate line segment at that location, with No Molding on Selected Edge. No Molding on Selected Edge will also be checked for any line segment associated with an Invisible wall or a wall that is set to have No Room Molding. 436 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Room Specification Dialog Room molding polylines can be edited just like other molding polylines. Their shape and height can be altered and the molding profile can be changed. Additional molding profiles can also be assigned. See Molding Polylines on page 935. MAKE ROOM MOLDING POLYLINE DIALOG l From the Convert Molding drop-down list, select the molding profile that you would like to convert from a room molding to a molding polyline. The available options will be the molding profiles assigned to the selected room. l Alternatively, select “Blank Molding” from the list to generate a molding polyline that follows the room perimeter and has separate edges with “No Molding” where it passes through door and window openings, but has no molding profile assigned to it. l Specify the Height of the molding polyline being created, as measured from the selected room’s floor. When you convert a base, crown, or chair rail molding to a molding polyline, that molding is removed from the room itself. See Moldings Panel on page 446. MAKE TRAY CEILING IN ROOM Click the Make Tray Ceiling in Room edit button to create a Tray Ceiling Polyline that follows the shape of the selected room. See Tray and Coffered Ceilings on page 430. EXPAND ROOM POLYLINE The Expand Room Polyline edit button is available when you select a room separated from other rooms by invisible walls or railings. Select this edit tool to create and select a temporarily enlarged room definition that ignores those invisible walls and railings. With this expanded room selected, you can then use one of the room polyline tools, create a Revision Cloud, or create a Materials List based on that selection. To use the Expand Room Polyline tool 1. Click in a room defined by at least one invisible wall or railing. 2. Click the Expand Room Polyline edit button. 3. Click any of the edit buttons that remain available on the Edit Toolbar. Expand Room Polyline does not create a new room and cannot be used in combination with the Auto Room Dimensions edit tool. Room Specification Dialog The Room Specification dialog controls the structural characteristics and appearance of a selected room. To open the Room Specification dialog, select one or more rooms and click the Open Object edit button. See Selecting Rooms on page 418. Some of the panels in this dialog are also found in the Exterior Room Specification dialog as well as in the Floor, Floor/Ceiling Platform, and Room Type Defaults dialogs. See Floor and Room Defaults on page 413. 437 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Room Specification Dialog The Room Specification dialog has the following panels:   Some values in this dialog are dynamic. A value with Default specified references the Floor Defaults dialog. To return a value to the default, replace the check mark. See Dynamic Defaults on page 79.   The settings in this dialog are similar to those in the Floor Defaults dialog, but affect only the selected room See Floor Defaults Dialog on page 731.   If multiple rooms are selected, not all of the settings in this dialog will be available. See Selecting Objects on page 210.   Many of the settings in this dialog can be included in a Room Finish Schedule. See Schedules and Object Labels on page 681.   GENERAL PANEL The GENERAL panel is also available in the Room Type Defaults dialogs. See Floor and Room Defaults on page 413.   General Specify the Room Type, the appearance of the Room Label, and how the room appears in the Room Finish Schedule. l Select the Room Type from the drop-down list. Changing the Room Type can affect settings throughout the dialog. See Room Types and Functions on page 415.   l Click the Define button to open the Room Types dialog where you can customize the settings of the selected Room Type.   l In the Room Type Defaults dialog only, specify the Function of the selected room type. See Room Functions on page 416.   l If you wish to use a custom name in the room’s label and in Room Schedules, type the desired Room Name in the text field. 438 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Room Specification Dialog l Check Show Room Label to display the room label in plan view. See Room Labels on page 422. Show Room Label is unchecked automatically if you select “Unspecified” as the Room Type, and checked automatically if you select any other Room Type; however, you can turn this behavior off if you wish in the Preferences dialog. See Architectural Panel on page 113. Living Area See Living Area on page 424.   l Select Include in Total Living Area Calculation to include the room in the Living Area regardless of its Room Type.   l Select Exclude from Total Living Area Calculation exclude the room from the Living Area regardless of its Room Type.   l Select Use Default for Room Type (Included/Excluded) to base the selected room’s inclusion in the Living Area on its Room Type. The default for the selected Room Type is stated in parentheses.   Conditioned Room Conditioned Area totals are included when data is exported to REScheck. See Exported Envelope Data on page 1241.   l Select Conditioned to include the room in the Conditioned Area of the structure, regardless of its Room Type.   l Select Unconditioned exclude the room from the Conditioned Area, regardless of its Room Type.   l Select Use Default for Room Type (Conditioned/Unconditioned) to base the selected room’s inclusion in the Living Area on its Room Type. The default for the selected Room Type is stated in parentheses.   Options l Specify the Roof Group of the selected room. Change this value to control how the program combines the selected room’s roof system with that of the rest of the building when automatic roofs are built. This value is nearly always left at zero. Not available in the Room Type Defaults dialogs. See Roof Groups on page 795.   Room Information Size information about the selected room or rooms is reported here for reference. Preview The preview on the right side of this dialog features a cross section diagram showing the relationships between the room’s heights and platform thicknesses. l If present, the floors above and below the selected room are also shown. The left side of the floor above is offset for clarity. l The height and thickness values shown in this diagram are set on the Structure Panel on page 439. STRUCTURE PANEL Some settings on the STRUCTURE panel are also found in the Floor, Floor/Ceiling Platform, and Room Type Defaults dialogs. In the Floor/Ceiling Platform and Room Type Defaults dialogs, only the Floor and Ceiling settings are available. See Floor and Room Defaults on page 413.   439 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Room Specification Dialog Active Defaults icons in the Elevation and Height fields, as well as Default check boxes next to the Structure and Finish fields indicate that these settings are Dynamic Defaults. See Dynamic Defaults on page 79. Note: Many of the settings on this panel are interdependent. For example, if the Ceiling Structure thickness is modified, the Absolute Ceiling and Rough Ceiling heights will change in response. Absolute Elevations These height values are measured from zero, which is the default top height of the subflooring on Floor 1. See Floor and Ceiling Heights on page 426.   l The Floor Above height displays here for reference. If multiple rooms with differing floor heights exist directly above, “No Change” will display.   l Specify the Ceiling height of the selected room, as measured from zero to the bottom of the ceiling framing. Not available in the Room or Floor Defaults dialog or if multiple floor heights are specified above the selected room.   l Specify the Floor height, as measured from zero to the top of the subfloor. Note: The default floor height for Floor 1 is 0. It can be modified in the Room Specification dialog, but not in the Floor 1 Defaults dialog. See Floor and Room Defaults on page 413.   l If a room is defined directly beneath the selected room on the floor below, additional settings may be available.   440 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Room Specification Dialog l Specify the Floor Below height, which is the subfloor height of the room directly below where you clicked to select the currently selected room. If there are multiple rooms with differing floor heights located below, this value may change depending on where you click.   l If the selected room is directly above a Garage and there is a foundation present, you can specify the SWT Below height, which is the top height of the concrete stem walls around the perimeter of the garage. Relative Heights These height values are measured from surfaces within the selected room or the room below.   l Specify the Rough Ceiling height, as measured from the subfloor surface to the bottom of the ceiling framing. Not available if multiple floor heights are specified directly above the selected room.   l Specify the Finished Ceiling height, as measured from the finished floor surface to the finished ceiling surface. Not available if multiple floor heights are specified directly above the selected room.   l Specify the distance from the Stem Wall Top to Ceiling. Only available when Floor for this Room is Supplied by the Foundation ‘Room’ from the Floor Below is checked, below.   l Specify the Floor to Stem Wall Top for rooms with Floor for this Room is Supplied by the Foundation ‘Room’ from the Floor Below specified.   l Specify the Ceiling Below height, which is the height of the ceiling of the room below, as measured from that room’s subfloor to rough ceiling surfaces. Not available when Auto Rebuild Foundation is enabled or if there is no room below the selected room. See Rebuilding Foundations on page 713.   l Specify the Stem Wall height, which is measured from the top of the foundation wall footing to the top of the treated sill plate, if one is specified. Only available if the selected room or the room below it is defined by foundation walls. Ceiling Only the Ceiling Finish and Structure settings are available in the Room Type Defaults dialogs. l If Roof Over This Room is checked, a roof automatically generates over the room. If unchecked, no automatic roof generates. If this option is unchecked and a roof plane is manually drawn over this room, its structure will be that of an eave rather than a regular roof. In most cases, if a roof is present over a room, this box should be checked. See Roof Panel on page 869. l If Flat Ceiling Over This Room is checked, the room has a flat ceiling. If unchecked, the ceiling follows the underside of the roof or manually drawn ceiling planes. l Check Shelf Ceiling to prevent Attic Walls from generating over the interior walls that define the selected room. When unchecked, interior Attic Walls will generate if surrounding rooms have higher ceilings than the selected room. See Shelf Ceilings on page 428. l Check Use Soffit Surface for Ceiling to frame the roof over the selected room using the framing defaults for fascia rather than for rafters.   l The Ceiling Structure depth displays here for reference. Click the Edit button to open the Ceiling Structure Definition dialog and define the layers of materials that form the ceiling platform. Check Default to use the Ceiling Structure Definition set in the current floor’s Floor Defaults dialog. Not available for rooms on Floor 0. See Material Layers Definition Dialogs on page 1040.   441 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Room Specification Dialog l The Ceiling Finish depth displays here for reference. Click the Edit button to open the Ceiling Finish Definition dialog and define the layers of materials that form the finished ceiling surface. Check Default to use the Ceiling Finish  Definition set in the current floor’s Floor Defaults dialog. See Material Layers Definition Dialogs on page 1040.   l Check the Default box to the right of either button to restore the default structure and/or finish. See Floor/Ceiling Platform Defaults on page 414.   Floor Only the Floor Finish, Structure, and On Structure Resize settings are available in the Room Type Defaults dialogs.   l When Floor Under This Room is checked, the room has a floor platform as specified below.   l If Floor Supplied by the Foundation Room Below is checked, the floor platform for this room is a slab located on the floor below and cannot be edited here.   l If Monolithic Slab Foundation is checked, the current Floor Structure will be replaced by a single 4” (100 mm) layer of concrete with footings that can be seen in camera views only. When a stem wall or grade beam foundation is generated, a slab will be created beneath the selected room.   If the selected room has a living space located anywhere beneath it, avoid checking Monolithic Slab Foundation. l When Build Foundation Below is checked, the selected room receives a foundation under it when the foundation is automatically built. Uncheck this box to prevent a foundation from being created below the selected room. See Building a Foundation on page 710.   l Check Raised Floor For Bump Out to allow a bump out room's floor and the ceiling of a room on the floor level below to build independently. When unchecked, the room below will use the bump out's floor platform as its ceiling. This box is checked by default for rooms created when a Bay/Box/Bow Window is exploded. See Explode Bay/Bow Window on page 610.   l Check Retain Floor/Ceiling Framing to preserve the selected room’s floor and ceiling framing when floor and/or ceiling framing is globally rebuilt. See Rebuilding and Retaining Framing on page 855.   l When Monolithic Slab Foundation is checked, specify the room’s Slab Pour Number. Pour Numbers are listed separately in the Materials List. See In the Materials List on page 712.   l When Monolithic Slab Foundation is unchecked, specify the selected room’s Framing Group instead. See Framing Groups on page 851.   l The Floor Finish depth displays here for reference. Click the Edit button to open the Floor Finish Definition dialog and define the layers of materials that form the finished floor surface. Check Default to use the Floor Finish Definition set in the current floor’s Floor Defaults dialog. See Material Layers Definition Dialogs on page 1040.   l Specify which part of the floor platform moves On Structure Resize. Select Lock Floor Top to keep the top of the floor structure at the same height and raise or lower its bottom when the platform depth is changed. Select Lock Floor Bottom to keep the bottom of the floor structure at the same height and raise or lower the top when the depth is changed.   l The Floor Structure depth displays here for reference. Click the Edit button to open the Floor Structure Definition dialog and define the layers of materials that form the floor platform. Check Default to use the Floor Structure Definition set in the current floor level’s Floor Defaults dialog. See Material Layers Definition Dialogs on page 1040.   442 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Room Specification Dialog l If the selected room is a Deck, the Floor Structure button will be labeled Planks, Joists instead. See Decks on page 425.   l Check the Default box to the right of either button to restore the default structure and/or finish. See Floor/Ceiling Platform Defaults on page 414.   Note: The default floor and ceiling platform and finish definitions for rooms are set in the current floor’s Floor Defaults dialog. In the Floor Defaults dialog, the defaults are drawn from the Floor/Ceiling Platform Defaults dialog. See Floor and Room Defaults on page 413. Preview The preview on the right side of this dialog features a cross section diagram showing the relationships between the room’s heights and platform thicknesses. l If present, the floors above and below the selected room are also shown. The left side of the floor above is offset for clarity. l The callout or dimension line associated with selected height or thickness value will be highlighted in the preview, as will any height or thickness value that you move your mouse point over. l The font used by the callouts and dimensions is set in the  currently active Dimension Defaults dialog, while the unit of measurement is specified in the Dialog Number/Angle Style dialog. See Dimension Defaults Dialog on page 451 and Dialog Number/Angle Style Dialog on page 126.   l What appears in both the diagram and in the settings on the STRUCTURE panel may be affected by the location where you clicked to select the room. For example: l If the selected room is located above two rooms with different structural settings, the position of the pointer relative to these two lower rooms determines which of them displays as the floor below. l If the selected room is located below two rooms with different floor heights, its absolute and relative ceiling height settings will be disabled. DECK PANEL The options on the DECK panel are only available for rooms designated as Decks, and control how deck planking and joists are generated. See Deck Framing and Planking on page 425. The settings on this panel are also found in the Deck Room Defaults dialog, but affect the selected Deck room(s) only rather than Decks as they are initially created. See Room Type Defaults on page 414.   443 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Room Specification Dialog Automatic Deck Framing l Check Automatic Deck Framing to generate planking and support framing for the deck that updates as changes are made to the deck. See Decks on page 425. l Check Keep Deck Framing After Deck Room is Deleted to retain the automatically generated framing and planking when the selected deck room is deleted. When this box is unchecked, the framing is automatically removed if the room is deleted.   Deck Planking l Specify how far the deck planking Overhangs the rim joists.   l Specify the Plank Width of the deck planking. l Check Max Plank Length, then specify the maximum allowable length for the selected Deck's planks. When unchecked, planks run the full length of the Deck room. l Specify the Plank Gap Width, which is the distance between individual planks.   l If you want to enter a Plank Direction, remove the check mark from Automatic. Enter the direction as degrees.   l Specify the Number of Border Planks. These are planks that follow the outside edge of the deck and may not be parallel with the rest of the planking. Border planks generate as long as the length of an inside edge is greater than 0”. They do not generate on curved deck edges.   Note: Planking thickness and joist depth are specified in the Floor Structure Definition dialog. See Floor and Ceiling Platform Definitions on page 429.   l Check No Border Against Walls to prevent border planking from being generated along any walls defining the deck.   444 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Room Specification Dialog l Check Herringbone to produce a herringbone pattern where the border planks meet.   l Check Treated to specify that the deck planking is counted as treated in  framing schedules and the Materials List.   Deck Joists l Enter the Width of the joists that support the deck.   l Specify the Spacing between joists, as measured from joist center to joist center.   l If you want to specify joist Direction, uncheck Automatic and enter the direction in degrees. When checked, joists are run in the direction that results in the shortest spans.   l Check Treated to specify that the deck joists are counted as treated in framing schedules and the Materials List.   Preview The preview on the right side of this dialog features a cross section diagram showing the relationships between the room’s heights and platform thicknesses.   l If present, the floors above and below the selected room are also shown. The left side of the floor above is offset for clarity.   l The height and thickness values shown in this diagram are set on the Structure Panel on page 439.   DECK SUPPORT PANEL The options on the DECK SUPPORT panel are only available for Deck rooms and control how deck beams and posts are generated. See Deck Framing and Planking on page 425.   The settings on this panel are also found in the Deck Room Defaults dialog, but affect the selected Deck room(s) only rather than Decks as they are initially created. See Room Type Defaults on page 414.   Deck Beams Specify the configuration of the beams under the selected Deck room.   445 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Room Specification Dialog l Uncheck Deck Beams to prevent the automatic generation of support beams under the selected Deck room.   l Click the Edit Beam button to open the Deck Beam Defaults dialog and define the beam size and other characteristics. See Framing Specification Dialog on page 887.   l Specify the maximum on-center Beam Spacing. Beams may be positioned closer than this value, but not further apart.   Deck Posts Specify the configuration of the posts under the selected Deck room.   l Uncheck Deck Posts to prevent the automatic generation of support posts under the selected Deck room.   l Click the Edit Post button to open the Deck Post Defaults dialog and define the size and other characteristics of the posts associated with the selected Deck. See Framing Specification Dialog on page 887.   l Specify the maximum Post Spacing. Posts may be positioned closer together than this value, but not further apart.   l Specify the Offset from End, which is the distance from the outermost beam to the edge of the deck platform. For railings directly over the outside of the beam, set this value to 0.   Deck Post Footings These settings are not available if Deck Posts is unchecked, above.   l Uncheck Deck Post Footings to prevent the automatic generation of footings under the selected Deck room’s posts.   l Specify the footings’ Height Above Terrain. See Foundations and the Terrain on page 717.   l Specify the footings’ Thickness and Width.   l Specify whether the footings are Square or Round in shape.   l Specify the Rebar Size Number.   l Specify the Rebar Count, or number of bars in each footing.   Preview The preview on the right side of this dialog features a cross section diagram showing the relationships between the room’s heights and platform thicknesses.   l If present, the floors above and below the selected room are also shown. The left side of the floor above is offset for clarity.   l The height and thickness values shown in this diagram are set on the Structure Panel on page 439.   MOLDINGS PANEL Chair rail, crown and base moldings can be assigned to one or more selected rooms on the MOLDINGS panel. Moldings are placed on a room’s wall surfaces and continue around the surface of any soffit that is attached to the wall at the molding height.   The settings on this panel are also similar to those found in the Floor Defaults dialog, but affect only the selected room instead of all rooms on the current floor.   The settings on this panel are similar to those found in other specification dialogs throughout the program. See Moldings / / Profiles / Rails / Panels on page 927.   446 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Room Finish Schedules WALL COVERING PANEL The settings on the WALL COVERING panel of the Room Specification dialog are the same as those on the same panel of the Wall Specification dialog. When a wall covering is assigned in the Room Specification dialog, it is applied to all walls in the selected room only. See Wall Covering Panel on page 404.   FILL STYLE PANEL The settings on the FILL STYLE panel affect the appearance of the room in plan view.  This panel is also found in the Floor Defaults dialog. For more information, see Fill Style Panel and Dialogs on page 193. MATERIALS PANEL The settings on this panel affect the appearance of a selected room’s walls, floor, ceiling, and moldings in 3D views. See Materials Panel on page 1055. The materials that make up the floor and ceiling platforms can be defined on the STRUCTURE panel. See Structure Panel on page 439.   Default molding and ceiling and floor covering materials can be set on this panel in the Floor Defaults and Room Defaults dialogs.   COMPONENTS PANEL The information on the COMPONENTS panel can be used in the materials list. For more information, see Components Panel on page 1330.   SCHEDULE PANEL The settings on the SCHEDULE panel determine which schedule categories the selected room is included in. See Schedule Panel on page 704.   Room Finish Schedules The Room Finish Schedule tool allows you to produce customizable room finish schedules with information about room size, structure, materials and moldings. Information about door and window trim can also be included. See The Schedule Tools on page 682. By default, Room Finish Schedules are set to include all Room Types: including any new Room Types that you may create. You can specify which Room Types are included in a Room Finish Schedule in its Schedule Specification dialog. See General Panel on page 692. Additional information about tray ceiling moldings and door and window trim can be included in any schedule set up to include items in the Molding category. You can also create any type of schedule that lists the contents of a selected room using the Create Schedule from Room edit tool. See Create Schedule from Room on page 683. 447

Dimensions Chapter 13 Chief Architect provides a variety of manual and automatic dimensioning tools for measuring walls, doors, windows, and many other objects in various 2D and 3D views. Dimensions can be used to accurately position objects relative to other objects. In addition, dimension lines and extensions can be selected and customized. TOPICS Compatibility With Previous Versions 449 Dimension Preferences and Defaults 449 Dimension Defaults Dialog 451 Auto Story Pole Dimension Defaults Dialog 464 Temporary Dimension Defaults Dialog 467 The Manually Drawn Dimension Tools 469 The Automatic Dimension Tools 472 Displaying Dimension Lines 474 Selecting Dimension Lines 475 Editing Dimension Lines 476 Editing Extension Lines 478 Add Additional Text 482 Moving Objects Using Dimensions 483 Dimension Line Specification Dialog 485 448 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Compatibility With Previous Versions Compatibility With Previous Versions Dimensions function differently in Versions 9 and later of Chief Architect than they did in  previous versions. Being familiar with these changes is helpful if you have plans that were originally created in these legacy program versions.   EXTENSION LINES In Chief Architect 8, extension lines had two modes: normal and short. Version 9 and later offer full control over extension lines. If Legacy Compatible Extensions is checked, you do not have this control. See Extensions Panel on page 462.   ACCURACY When the model is drawn with greater accuracy than dimensions are set to display, rounding may be required. The Rounding Method in the Dimension Defaults dialog controls how Chief Architect handles dimensions that require rounding. See General Panel on page 451.   In Chief Architect Version 8 and prior, dimensions used Distance Rounding, which shows the distance between equally spaced objects correctly, but dimension runs are not always accurate when added.   In Versions  9 and later, dimensions use Grid Rounding, which always add up dimension runs correctly, but individual distances may be inaccurate in order to achieve this.   Dimensioning the same object using these two rounding methods will obtain the same results as long as  objects are placed with the same accuracy as the precision of the dimension lines. If an object is placed using more precision than the dimensions, results may vary between methods.   A good approach to accurate dimensioning is to turn on the accuracy indicators and position objects so that the inaccuracy indicators do not display. Dimension Preferences and Defaults There are a number of defaults settings as well as options in the Preferences dialog that affect dimensions.   449 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Dimension Preferences and Defaults PREFERENCES All plan and layout files save measurements in either U.S. or metric units. The type of unit used is determined when the file is first created and cannot be changed later. See Creating a New Plan or Layout on page 38. You can specify either metric files or those using U.S. Units to be used as the templates whenever you open a new, blank plan or layout file in the Preferences dialog. See New Plans Panel on page 108.   You can also specify the minimum on-screen display size for dimension numbers in the Preferences dialog. See Appearance Panel on page 95.   DEFAULT SETTINGS Select Edit> Default Settings to open the Default Settings dialog, then click the arrow next to "Dimension" to expand the category. The Dimension Defaults dialogs can also be accessed by double-clicking the Dimension Tools parent button or the Automatic Dimension Tools parent button. There are three dimension defaults dialogs: l Dimension Defaults Dialog on page 451 l Auto Story Pole Dimension Defaults Dialog on page 464 l Temporary Dimension Defaults Dialog on page 467 When Angle Snaps are enabled, dimensions can be drawn at the Allowed Angles set in the General Plan Defaults dialog. Regardless of their angles, however, dimensions will only locate objects that are parallel to one another. See General Plan Defaults Dialog on page 92. When a Marker is created in association with a manually drawn dimension or Auto Elevation Dimension, the Marker will inherit its initial settings from the currently active Saved Marker Defaults. See Markers on page 529. SAVED DIMENSION DEFAULTS Dimensions are an example of objects that use Multiple Saved Defaults. This lets you set dimensions up for more than one task or requirement in advance, and then simply specify which default you want to use as the Active Default at any given time. See Multiple Saved Defaults on page 79.   A Saved Dimension Default can be activated in any view that supports dimensions: plan view, cross section/elevation views, CAD Details, and Wall Details. A Saved Dimension Default can be activated in any of five ways:   l Select a default from the Active Dimension Defaults Control Default drop-down, which can be added to the toolbars. See To add a button to a toolbar on page 132.   l Select a Currently Active Dimension Defaults in the Active Defaults dialog. See Active Defaults Dialog on page 82.   l Select a default in the Saved Dimension Defaults dialog. See Saved Defaults Dialog on page 80.   l Open a saved view in which dimensions are supported. See Saved Views on page 144.   l Select a Default Set. See Default Sets on page 83.   450 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Dimension Defaults Dialog Dimension Defaults Dialog Select Edit> Default Settings, expand the “Dimension” category, select “Dimensions”, and click the Edit button to open the Dimension Defaults dialog.   You can also double-click either the Dimension Tools or Automatic Dimension Tools parent button to open this dialog. The Manually drawn dimension tools support multiple Saved Defaults for specific drawing tasks.  See Multiple Saved Defaults on page 79.   l When you access the Dimension Defaults dialog via the Default Settings dialog, the Saved Defaults dialog will open first, allowing you to select which Saved Manual Dimension Default that you wish to edit. Multiple Defaults can be selected and edited if you wish. See Shift and Ctrl Select on page 214.   l When you access this dialog by double-clicking the Dimension Tools button, the defaults dialog for the currently active Saved Default is opened directly. If you would like the Saved Defaults dialog to open first in this situation, you can enable this option in the Preferences dialog. See General Panel on page 102.   l In either case, the name of the Saved Default being edited will display in the title bar at the top of the dialog box.   The settings in this dialog are dynamic defaults, which means that any changes made here may affect existing dimension lines in the drawing that are using the Saved Manual Dimension Default being edited. See Dynamic Defaults on page 79. In addition, you can specify how Temporary Dimensions locate walls and CAD objects in the Temporary Dimension Defaults dialog. See Temporary Dimension Defaults Dialog on page 467.   GENERAL PANEL 451 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Dimension Defaults Dialog General l Specify the Line Separation, which is the distance between Baseline Dimension lines in plan inches (mm). This value should always be greater than the Character Height. If two formats are used, it should be at least twice the Character Height. See Text Style Panel on page 463. l Specify how far manually drawn dimension lines Reach to locate walls and/or objects specified on the LOCATE panels. The default is 24” (450 mm) in plan files and 1” (10 mm) in layout. See Locate Manual Panel on page 454.   Rounded Value Indicators Rounded Value Indicators can display when the degree of accuracy in use is not sufficient to describe a dimension’s true value.   l Check + or - After Number to indicate that the actual dimension value is higher or lower than the value shown.   l Check ~ Before Number to indicate dimension values that are not accurate with the ~ symbol.   Rounding Method l Grid Rounding ensures that the sum of the parts of a dimension line add up to the whole distance. To produce this result, some sections may not be rounded accurately. This is the recommended rounding method and is selected by default.   l Distance Rounding addresses each section of a dimension line individually, which could result in the sum of these sections not being equal to the whole. This option is available for legacy purposes only and is not recommended. See Compatibility With Previous Versions on page 449.   To avoid the appearance of inaccuracy that rounding may cause, draw with Grid Snaps enabled and place objects in your plan using the same accuracy as your dimensions. See Grid Snaps on page 163. Dimension Text Position and Orientation Specify the location and angle of dimension numbers relative to the dimension line.   l Centered on Dimension Line centers the primary dimension numbers on the dimension line. If two formats are used, the primary format is placed above the line and the secondary format, beneath it.   l Position dimension numbers Above Dimension Line.   l Position dimension numbers Below Dimension Line.   l If you would like to specify a specific angle for dimension label text, uncheck Automatic. Then, type the desired Angle, in degrees, in the text field. Preview A preview of the selected dimension line displays on the right side of the panel. This preview shows a summary of the dimension line's general style attributes rather than its actual appearance. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22. SETUP AUTOMATIC PANEL The settings on the SETUP AUTOMATIC panel affect how  automatically generated dimensions are created. See The Automatic Dimension Tools on page 472. 452 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Dimension Defaults Dialog General l Specify the Line Separation, which is the distance between Auto Exterior Dimension lines in plan inches (mm). This value should always be greater than the Character Height used by the label. If two formats are used, it should be at least twice the Character Height. See Dimension Labels on page 474.   l Specify the 1st Line Offset, which is the distance between each wall and the nearest Automatic Dimension line that measures its length in plan inches (mm).   Exterior These settings control how Auto Exterior Dimensions generate.   l Specify how far Auto Exterior Dimensions Reach to locate objects set back from exterior walls. If exterior walls are set back further than this distance, additional dimension lines are produced to locate the set-back walls.   l Specify the Minimum Area, which is the minimum area defined as a room needed for Auto Exterior Dimensions to generate.   l When Overall Dimension is checked, a dimension line reporting the overall length of each side of the structure is created. l When Inner Dimension is checked, up to three rows of Auto Exterior Dimensions per exterior wall are generated. Uncheck this box to suppress these inner dimension strings.   l Check Auto Refresh to delete and replace Auto Exterior Dimensions whenever a change is made to the model that affects them.   Room These settings control how Auto Room Dimensions generate.   453 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Dimension Defaults Dialog l Specify the Minimum Area, which is the minimum area defined as a room needed for Auto Room Dimensions to generate.   l When Overall Dimension is checked and a room's Auto Room Dimensions locate objects in addition to its walls, an overall dimension for each wall is also generated.   l Check Outer Dimension to generate an outer dimension that locates objects as specified on the LOCATE ROOM panel.   l Check Auto Refresh to delete and replace Room Dimensions whenever a change is made to the model that affects them.   l Check Allow Duplicates to generate a full set of dimensions along each wall, potentially creating duplicate overall dimensions.   l Specify the Line Position: select Outside Room to generate Room Dimensions outside the selected room, or select Inside Room to generate them inside the room.   Elevation These settings control how Auto Elevation Dimensions generate in cross section/elevation views.   l When Overall Dimension is checked, an overall dimension is created outside each Auto Elevation Dimension string.    l Check Outer Dimension (Top/Bottom) to generate an outer dimensions that locate the marks specified on the LOCATE ELEVATIONS panel.   l Check Auto Refresh to delete and replace dimensions created by the Auto Elevation Dimensions tool whenever a change is made to the model that affects them.   l Dimension on/Across - Check any of these boxes to generate a dimension string on the Left, Right, across the Top, and/or across the Bottom of the model.   LOCATE MANUAL PANEL The settings on the MANUAL panel specify how and whether or not Manual Dimensions , Baseline Dimensions , and Running Dimensions locate specific types of objects.   Similar settings are also found on other panels in this dialog, on the LOCATE OBJECTS panel of the Auto Story Pole Dimension Defaults dialog and in the Temporary Dimension Defaults dialogs. Changes made on this panel only affect new dimension lines as they are drawn, not those already drawn. Once created, a dimension line's extensions can be edited so that they locate objects in ways not specified here. See Editing Extension Lines on page 478. 454 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Dimension Defaults Dialog In the Dimension Defaults dialog for a layout file, only the CAD Objects settings on this panel is available.   Walls Specify the marked location in wall assemblies referred to by Extension Lines as well as the Reach and 1st Line Offset settings. See The Dimension Layer on page 386.   l Select Surfaces to locate exterior and interior walls at their surfaces.   l Select Wall Dimension Layer to locate walls at their Dimension Layer. A wall’s Dimension Layer is specified in its wall type. See Wall Type Definitions Dialog on page 387.   l Select None to prevent Manual and Baseline Dimensions from locating walls. Also available for End to End and Centerline dimensions. Wall Options These settings control how or whether exterior and interior walls are located by Manual and Baseline Dimensions. See Exterior and Interior Walls on page 351 and Primary and Secondary Sides on page 367.   l Specify how Exterior walls are located:   o Check Primary Side to have dimensions locate the exterior side of exterior walls.    o Check Secondary Side to have dimensions locate the interior side of exterior walls.   o When neither box is checked, exterior walls are not located by Manual and Baseline Dimensions. 455 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Dimension Defaults Dialog l Specify how Interior walls are located:   o Check Primary Side to have dimensions locate the interior side of interior walls. For Auto Exterior Dimensions, this option locates the bottom of horizontal interior walls and the left side of vertical interior walls.   o Check Secondary Side to have dimensions locate the exterior side of interior walls. For Auto Exterior Dimensions, this option locates the top of horizontal walls and the right side of vertical walls.   o Check Centers to have dimensions locate the centers of interior walls.   o When neither box is checked, interior walls are not located by Manual and Baseline Dimensions. l Check Wall Steps to have dimensions locate steps in walls in elevation views. Steps in foundation walls in plan views are also located. See Stepped Walls and Footings on page 381.   l When Display Wall Widths is checked, the thicknesses of any walls that a dimension line crosses will be measured. Uncheck this box to suppress the segments dimension line segments that report these measurements. Note: Walls specified as No Locate will not be located by some dimension tools. See No Locate on page 368.   Locate Objects l Each category corresponds to a type of object in Chief Architect. Under each category are locations, or marks, on these objects that dimensions can locate. l Check the box beside an option to have dimension lines locate that mark on objects of that type as they are drawn or generated.   l Uncheck the box beside a category to not locate objects in that category: any checked boxes in that category remain checked, but disabled. Check the box beside a category to locate the selected marks on objects of that type. l On the LOCATE AUTO ROOM and LOCATE AUTO ELEVATION panels only, there are two scrollable lists: Outer Dimension and Inner Dimension. Check Outer Dimension to generate a second dimension line further from the marked objects than the Inner Dimension, as well as specify the marks that it locates. Not available for other dimension types.   Cabinets Cabinets can be moved and resized in plan and cross section/elevation views. See Using Dimensions on page 635. Sides The sides do not have to be perpendicular to the dimension line Corners Angled cabinets are dimensioned to their corners at a right angle to the dimension line. A cabinet’s front or sides do not need to be perpendicular or parallel to the dimension line for its corners to be located. Centers A cabinet’s front or sides do not need to be perpendicular or parallel to the dimension line for its center to be located. Moldings In elevation views only, locate the tops and bottoms of cabinet moldings. Countertop In plan view, a cabinet’s front or sides must be perpendicular or parallel to the dimension line for its countertop to be located. In elevation views, only the top and bottom edges can be located when the dimension is being drawn. Backsplash In elevation views only, locate the tops and bottoms of backsplash edges. 456 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Dimension Defaults Dialog Toe Kick In elevation views only, locate the tops and bottoms of toe kicks. Openings In elevation views only, locate the top and bottom edges of openings in the cabinet box. Doors/Drawers/Panels In elevation views, locate the tops and bottoms of doors, drawers, and panels. In plan views, locate their inner and outer surfaces when Show Closed Doors/Drawers and Panels is enabled. See General Cabinet Defaults on page 619. Fixtures/Appliances These options affect how dimension lines locate appliances and other fixtures such as hardware, millwork, sprinklers, and Geometric Shapes. In cross section/elevation views, dimensions can only locate furniture at points where a surface is present. Sides/Corners For sides to be located, they must be perpendicular to the dimension line Centers An object’s front or sides do not need to be perpendicular or parallel to the dimension line for its center to be located. Furniture These options affect how dimension lines locate furniture and furnishing accessories. See Stand-Alone Objects on page 973. Sides/Corners For sides to be located, they must be perpendicular to the dimension line. Centers An object’s front or sides do not need to be perpendicular or parallel to the dimension line for its center to be located. Openings Specify how dimensions locate doors and windows. Openings in walls specified as No Locate will not be located by Auto Exterior Dimensions. See Doors on page 543, Windows on page 576, and No Locate on page 368. Casing Locate the outer edges of both sides of wall openings’ casing. Because interior and exterior casing often have different widths, an opening may have different interior and exterior dimensions when this option is selected. Centers Locate the centers of wall openings. Rough Opening Locate both sides of the rough opening of doors and windows. Sides Locate the both sides of wall openings. This option locates the nominal width - not the rough opening. CAD Objects These options control how dimension lines locate 2D CAD objects as well as CAD-based objects such as slabs and stairs. See CAD Objects on page 290. Line/Sides For a line/side to be located, it must be perpendicular to the dimension line. Ends/Corners Locate all ends/corners of polylines, no matter what angle they are in relation to the dimension line. Callouts/Markers See Callouts on page 521 and Markers on page 529. Clip Lines See Side Clipping on page 1093. Text See The Text Tools on page 497. Construction Lines See Construction Lines on page 65. Primitives/3D Solids 457 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Dimension Defaults Dialog All Primitive objects can be moved using dimensions. 3D Solids, Pyramids, and Faces can also be resized. See Primitive Tools on page 1015. Sides The sides must be perpendicular to the dimension line. Corners Locate the corners of all primitive/solid objects within the Reach area. Corners are dimensioned at a right angle to the dimension line. An object’s front or sides do not need to be perpendicular or parallel to the dimension line for its corners to be located. Centers Locate the centers of all primitive/solid objects within the Reach area. An object’s front or sides do not need to be perpendicular or parallel to the dimension line for its center to be located. Framing See Using Dimensions on page 883. Sides Locate both sides of framing objects. Centers Locate the centers of framing objects. Other Objects Electrical and image objects can be moved using dimensions, but not resized. Electrical See Using Dimensions on page 675. Plants and Images See Using Dimensions on page 1188. LOCATE END TO END PANEL The settings on the LOCATE END TO END panel are the same as those on the LOCATE MANUAL panel, but control how objects are located when an End to End Dimension or Point to Point Dimension is drawn. See End-to-End Dimensions on page 470 and Locate Manual Panel on page 454.   LOCATE CENTERLINE PANEL The settings on the LOCATE CENTERLINE panel are the same as those on the LOCATE MANUAL panel, but control how objects are located when a Centerline Dimension is drawn. See Centerline Dimensions on page 472 and Locate Manual Panel on page 454. LOCATE INTERIOR PANEL The settings on the LOCATE INTERIOR panel are also found on the LOCATE MANUAL panel, but control how objects are located when an Interior Dimension is drawn. See Interior Dimensions on page 470 and Locate Manual Panel on page 454. LOCATE AUTO EXTERIOR PANEL The settings on the LOCATE AUTO EXTERIOR panel are also found on the LOCATE MANUAL panel, but control how objects are located when Auto Exterior Dimensions are generated. See Auto Exterior Dimensions on page 473 and Locate Manual Panel on page 454.   458 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Dimension Defaults Dialog LOCATE AUTO ROOM PANEL The settings on the LOCATE AUTO ROOM panel are also found on the LOCATE MANUAL panel, but control how objects are located when Auto Room Dimensions are generated. See Auto Room Dimensions on page 473 and Locate Manual Panel on page 454.   LOCATE AUTO ELEVATION PANEL The settings on the LOCATE AUTO ELEVATION panel are also found on the LOCATE MANUAL panel, but control how objects are located when Auto Elevation Dimensions are generated. See Auto Elevation Dimensions on page 473 and Locate Manual Panel on page 454.   LOCATE ELEVATIONS PANEL The settings on the LOCATE ELEVATIONS panel determine what elevation marks are located by vertically oriented, manually drawn dimension lines in cross section/elevation views. This panel is also found in the Auto Story Pole Dimension Defaults dialog. See Locate Elevations Panel on page 466.   PRIMARY FORMAT PANEL The settings on the PRIMARY FORMAT panel allow you to specify the units, position, and degree of accuracy of dimension numbers. The settings on this panel also control the format of object length numbers in the Status Bar. See The Status Bar on page 24. These settings are the same as those on the PRIMARY FORMAT panel of the Dimension Line Specification dialog and the DIMENSION FORMAT panel of the Room Label Defaults dialog. See Dimension Line Specification Dialog on page 485 and Room Label Defaults on page 415. These settings are also similar to those on the INNER, OUTER, and MARKER FORMAT panels of the Auto Story Pole Dimension Defaults and Dimension Line Specification dialogs. See Auto Story Pole Dimension Defaults Dialog on page 464.   In addition to these Primary dimension numbers, you can display a set of Secondary dimension numbers that indicate the dimension’s length using different units, degree of accuracy, and location. See Secondary Format Panel on page 461.   459 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Dimension Defaults Dialog In the Auto Story Pole Dimension Defaults and Specification dialogs only, check Use Default Formatting to use the Primary Format settings of the currently active Dimension Defaults as the Inner Format.   Format Specify the numbering Format for dimension numbers.   l Select the Units of measurement to be used by dimensions from the drop-down list. The choices in this list correspond to all units measuring length specified in the Preferences dialog. See Unit Conversions Panel on page 109. Note: Although you can select U.S. or metric units in any plan or layout, it is best to use the same unit type that the file uses to save measurements. See Units of Measurement on page 38. l Check Unit Indicators to display the unit of measurement along with the dimension number. l Check Leading Zeros to include the zero before a decimal less than 1 or to display  0’ or 0” when the ft-in or ’-” unit formats is used. l Check Trailing Zeros to display trailing zeros at the end of decimal values. When the ft-in or ’-” unit format is used and fractional inches are specified, 0” will be included. o Check Thousands Separator to use a digit grouping symbol for values greater than 999.   o Select the Use Comma, Use Dot, or Use Non-Breaking Space radio button to specify the thousands separator used by dimensions. Which option is available will depend on your operating system settings. See Region and Language Settings on page 78.   l Select the Use Space radio button to use a space as the thousands separator.   l Check Display as Inches to display the dimension number of sufficiently short segments in inches rather than the Unit selected above. This option is only available when the specified Unit is a form of either feet or yards, or a format that includes feet.   460 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Dimension Defaults Dialog l The Less than or equal to value specifies how short a segment must be before its number uses inches rather than the specified Unit.   l Select a Fraction Style from the drop-down list. This option affects the angle of the fraction's vinculum line and is also applied to the Secondary Format if one is used. See Secondary Format Panel on page 461, below.   l Specify the desired Fraction Text Size as a percentage of a selected dimension line's Number Height. Only available when either "Diagonal" or "Vertical" are selected as the Fraction Style. Accuracy Specify the degree of accuracy used by dimension numbers.   l Select the Decimal Places radio button for dimension numbers in decimal format. In the text field, specify the number of decimal places to use, from 0 to 20. If 0 is used, no decimal places are used.   l Select the Smallest Fraction radio button for dimension numbers using whole numbers and fractions. In the text field, specify the largest denominator to use, from 1 to 128. If 1 is entered, whole numbers are used.   l Uncheck Show Denominator to turn off the display of fraction denominators used by dimension lines. Typically, denominators are only turned off when eighths are desired.   l Uncheck Reduce Fractions to always use the denominator specified above. When checked, the lowest possible denominator will be used. When Smallest Fraction is selected, specify how fractions are reduced:   o Select Use Greatest Common Divisor to reduce fractions using the largest value that divides equally into the numerator and the denominator specified above. This option is best for fractional inches.   o Select Use Closest Fraction to reduce fractions without referring to the denominator specified above. Should only be used with Distance Rounding. Not recommended when fractional inches are used.   A value of 0.33333 is represented by the fraction 5/16 when Greatest Common Divisor is used and the Smallest Fraction denominator is 16. When Closest Fraction is selected, this value is represented by 1/3.   Angular Format Specify format used by Angular Dimensions. See Angular Dimensions on page 470.   l Select an Angle Style. For a description of each, see Dialog Number/Angle Style Dialog on page 126.   l When Degrees is selected, you can specify the number of Decimal Places to report. SECONDARY FORMAT PANEL In addition to the Primary dimension label, you can display a set of secondary numbers that indicate the dimension’s length using different units and/or degree of accuracy.   The settings on the SECONDARY FORMAT panel of the Dimension Defaults dialog are similar to those on the PRIMARY FORMAT panel, but without the Angular Format settings and with one addition:   l Check Include Second Format to use a secondary dimension label and enable the settings on this panel.   The settings on this panel are also the same as those on the same panel of the Dimension Line Specification dialog. See Dimension Line Specification Dialog on page 485.   If you choose to use a second format, you may want to increase the default Line Separation on the GENERAL panel. See General Panel on page 451.   461 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Dimension Defaults Dialog EXTENSIONS PANEL The settings on the EXTENSIONS panel control the length of extension lines.   Extension Length Specify the Extension Length relative to the marked location on an object.   l Specify the Length Away From Marked Object, which is the length of the portion of an extension line that extends from the dimension line in the opposite direction of the object it locates.   l Select Length Towards Marked Object to specify a fixed length for the portion of an extension line that extends from the dimension line toward the object it locates. If the dimension line is moved, this length remains the same but the size of the gap updates.   l Select Gap From Marked Object to specify the distance between the end of extension lines and their marked location in plan inches or mm. If a dimension line is moved, extension lines update, and the size of this gap is maintained.   Gap From Marked Object  +  Length Toward Marked Object =   Distance to Marked Object Fixed Proximity Specify a fixed length for one extension line that will not change if the object the extension line locates is moved. See Using Fixed Proximity on page 481.   l Check Fixed Proximity to specify a fixed distance between the marked object and the dimension line. You can only fix the proximity for a single extension line.   l Specify the Distance to Marked Object, which is the distance from the dimension line to the marked object, using a positive value.   Extension Line and Gap lengths are measured from the marked location on a wall. See The Dimension Layer on page 386. 462 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Dimension Defaults Dialog Fixed Proximity only affects dimension lines that locate an object using an extension line. When a dimension line arrowhead points directly to the object without using an extension line, this option has no effect.   Auto Exterior Dimensions ignore Distance to Marked Object and use the default 1st Line Offset and Line Separation values. See Setup Automatic Panel on page 452. Legacy Support These settings are only recommended for files originally created in Chief Architect  Version 8 and prior. See Compatibility With Previous Versions on page 449.   l Check Legacy Compatible Extensions to assign a program-defined length to extension lines that cannot be edited.   l Check Short Extensions to have short, uniform-length extension lines that do not reach all the way to the objects they locate.   Note: If you select an extension line, Legacy Compatible Extensions will be turned off automatically. Centerline See Centerline Dimensions on page 472.   l When Auto Mark Centerlines is checked, extension lines that locate the midpoint or center of an object are automatically marked as Centerlines. l Check Same Angle as Dimension to orient Centerline symbols at the same angle as the dimension line's text. When unchecked, Centerline symbols are oriented vertically, regardless of the angle of the dimension line's text. l Specify the Offset From Extension, which is the distance from the Centerline symbol and the end of the associated extension line. Preview A preview of the selected dimension line displays on the right side of the panel. This preview shows a summary of the dimension line's general style attributes rather than its actual appearance. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22. LAYER PANEL The LAYER panel is found in the specification dialogs for many different objects. For more information, see Layer Panel on page 186.   If an automatic dimension line is edited, it will no longer be considered Automatic and the Default check box on this panel will be unchecked. See Editing Dimension Lines on page 476.   ARROW PANEL The settings on the ARROW panel control the size and style of dimension line arrows. See Arrowheads on page 327.   TEXT STYLE PANEL The settings on the TEXT STYLE panel control the size, font and other attributes of automatic, manually drawn, and temporary dimension line labels. Individual dimension lines inherit their text style from a Saved Dimension Default: they cannot have a non-default text style assigned to them. See Dimension Labels on page 474. For information about the settings on this panel, see Text Style Panel on page 538. 463 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Auto Story Pole Dimension Defaults Dialog Temporary dimensions and their labels always use the Selection Line color set in the Preferences dialog. See Colors Panel on page 98. Auto Story Pole Dimension Defaults Dialog The settings in the Auto Story Pole Dimension Defaults dialogs allow you to control how Auto Story Pole Dimensions are created in cross section/elevation views. See Auto Story Pole Dimensions on page 473. Select Edit> Default Settings , expand the Dimension category, select "Auto Story Pole Dimensions", and click Edit to access this dialog. It can also be opened by clicking the Auto Story Pole Dimension Defaults button, which can be added to your toolbars. See To add a button to a toolbar on page 132. As with other types of dimensions, the appearance of Auto Story Pole Dimensions, including size, primary and secondary formats, and extension lines can be set in the Dimension Defaults dialog. The defaults for Auto Elevation Dimensions can be set there, as well. See Dimension Defaults Dialog on page 451. GENERAL PANEL Position The Position settings control where automatic elevation dimensions are generated, relative to the model.   l Check Dimension on Left to create a dimension string or story pole on the left side of the model in cross section/elevation views.   l Check Dimension on Right to create a dimension string or story pole on the right side of the model.   l When either Dimension on Left or on Right is selected, a corresponding Reach value can be specified. A Reach of 100% locates marks across the width of the structure while a Reach of 1% only locates marks located 1/100 of the way across. Reach is measured from the structural surface that is closest to the dimension line in the current view, including roof eaves but not including gutters or shadow boards.   464 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Auto Story Pole Dimension Defaults Dialog l Check Dimension on Top to create a dimension string above the model.   l Check Dimension on Bottom to create a dimension string below the model.   Options Additional Options control how many dimension strings are created.   l Uncheck Inner Dimension to suppress the inner dimension string and generate only one outer dimension. Only available in the Auto Story Pole Dimension Defaults dialog. See Auto Story Pole Dimensions on page 473.   l Uncheck Dimensions Between Elevation Markers to suppress the outer dimension string that measures the distances between each of the elevation markers.   l When Primary Ridge Marks Only is checked, Auto Story Pole extension lines only locate roof ridges that are exposed to the horizon or backdrop on the surface edge that faces the Auto Story Pole. When unchecked, Auto Story Poles will locate all roof ridges within the specified Reach distance. In order to be located, "Ridges" must be selected on the LOCATE ELEVATIONS panel. l When Primary Height Marks Only is checked, Auto Story Pole extension lines only locate top of subfloor and top plate heights that they can reach without crossing any portion of the model. Uncheck to locate all top of subfloor and top of plate heights located within the Reach distance. In order to be located, "Top of Plate" and "Top of Subfloor" must be selected on the LOCATE ELEVATIONS panel. Preview A preview of an Auto Story Pole dimension line displays on the right side of the dialog box. This preview shows a summary of the dimension's general style attributes only. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22. INNER FORMAT PANEL The settings on the INNER FORMAT panel control the format of the inner string of dimensions on a Story Pole, if present, and are similar to those on the PRIMARY FORMAT panel of the Dimension Defaults dialog. See Primary Format Panel on page 459.   l Check Use Default Formatting to use the Primary and Secondary Format settings of the Dimension Defaults that are active when a Story Pole is created as the Inner Format. See Multiple Saved Defaults on page 79 and Primary Format Panel on page 459.   OUTER FORMAT PANEL The settings on the OUTER FORMAT panel control the format of the outer string of dimensions on a Story Pole and are similar to those on the PRIMARY FORMAT panel of the Dimension Defaults dialog. See Primary Format Panel on page 459.   l Check Use Default Formatting to use the Primary and Secondary Format settings of the currently active Dimension Defaults as the Outer Format.   MARKER FORMAT PANEL The settings on the MARKER FORMAT panel control the format of the elevation value stated in elevation markers’ bottom line of text on a Story Pole and are similar to those on the PRIMARY FORMAT panel of the Dimension Defaults dialog. See Primary Format Panel on page 459.   l Check Use Default Formatting to use the Primary Format settings of the currently active Dimension Defaults as the Marker Format.   465 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Auto Story Pole Dimension Defaults Dialog Once a Story Pole dimension has been created, Additional Text can be added to the bottom line of marker text in the Dimension Line Specification dialog. See Segments Panel on page 490.   LOCATE OBJECTS PANEL The settings on the LOCATE OBJECTS panel specify whether or not Auto Story Pole Dimensions locate specific types of objects. See Locate Manual Panel on page 454.   LOCATE ELEVATIONS PANEL The settings on the LOCATE ELEVATIONS panel control what marks Auto Story Pole Dimensions locate, as well as how Elevation Markers report their heights.   This panel is also found in the Dimension Defaults dialog.   Auto Story Pole Dimensions can also be set to locate additional object types on the LOCATE OBJECTS panel. See Locate Manual Panel on page 454.   Grade Level Marker Specify the position of the Grade Level Marker measured Relative to 1st Floor Subfloor. This value determines the height at which Grade Level is marked by dimension line Elevation Markers, but is not tied to the location of the terrain.   l If this value is greater than or less than 0 and Grade Level is a Mark to Include, it will be located at this distance above or below the Default 1st Floor Subfloor. See Floor 1 Default Height on page 414.   l When this value is 0, Grade Level is marked at the same elevation as the Default 1st Floor Subfloor.   l There is only one Grade Level Marker height in each plan, and it is a dynamic setting. If it is modified in one defaults dialog, its value will change automatically in the other two defaults dialogs and any dimensions with Elevation Markers in the plan will update as well.   Note: The Grade Level setting and the terrain in the plan are completely independent of one another. See Terrain on page 1243. 466 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Temporary Dimension Defaults Dialog Select the desired Elevation Reference, which is the elevation mark that all other marks’ elevations are measured relative to.   l Select Grade Level Marker to specify the elevation of the Grade Level Marker as 0 and measure all other marks relative to it.   l Select 1st Floor Subfloor to specify the elevation of the Default 1st Floor Subfloor as 0 and measure all other marks relative to it.   Marks Specify which elevation Marks are included in vertically-oriented automatic elevation dimensions by default.   l An alphabetical list of Available Marks displays on the left.   l Select one or more names in the list, then click the Add button to move them to the Marks to Include list on the right. See Shift and Ctrl Select on page 214.   l You can also double-click on an item in this list to add it to the Marks to Include.   l A list of the Marks to Include displays on the right. At least one column must be included to create a vertical automatic elevation dimension.   l In the Marks to Include list, click in the Outer column of any line item to add or remove a check mark. When checked, the selected mark will be included on the outer dimension line of an Auto Story Pole.   l Select or double-click on an item in the Marks to Include list and click the Rename button to specify a new name.   l Click the Reset button to restore the default names for the selected Marks to Include.   l Select one or more items in the Marks to Include list, then click the Remove button to move those items back to the Available Marks list on the left.   Note: Deck framing and planking cannot be automatically located by vertically oriented elevation dimensions. They can, however, be located by manually added extensions. See Adding an Extension Line on page 478. LAYER PANEL The LAYER panel allows you to specify what layers Auto Story Pole Dimensions are placed on when they are created. It is found in the specification dialogs for many different objects. For more information, see Layer Panel on page 186.   Temporary Dimension Defaults Dialog The settings in the Temporary Dimension Defaults dialog allow you to control how Temporary Dimensions locate walls and CAD objects. See Temporary Dimensions on page 473. Select Edit> Default Settings , expand the Dimension category and choose “Temporary”, and click Edit to access this dialog. You can also open this dialog by clicking the Temporary Dimension Defaults button, which you can add to your toolbars. See To add a button to a toolbar on page 132. The appearance of Temporary Dimensions, including their size, format, and extension lines, are set along with those of manual and automatic dimensions in the Dimension Defaults dialog. See Dimension Defaults Dialog on page 451. The default settings for manually drawn dimensions are set in the Dimension Defaults dialog.   467 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Temporary Dimension Defaults Dialog With Wall Selected Specify how walls are located by temporary dimensions when a wall is selected.   l Select Locate Wall Surface to locate wall surfaces.   l Select Locate Wall Dimension Layer to locate wall dimension layers as specified in the Wall Type Definitions dialog. See Wall Type Definitions on page 384.   The next two settings control how temporary dimensions locate interior walls.   l Select Primary Wall Side to locate one side of interior walls.   l Select Both Wall Sides to locate both surfaces of a selected interior wall. Wall thicknesses are not dimensioned.   Note: Temporary Dimension Defaults do not affect the temporary wall length dimensions that displays when a wall is selected. See Measuring Walls on page 366. The next two settings control how temporary dimensions locate interior walls.   l Select Primary Wall Side to locate one side of interior walls.   l Select Both Wall Sides to locate both surfaces of a selected interior wall. Wall thicknesses are not dimensioned.   Note: Temporary Dimension Defaults do not affect the temporary wall length dimensions that displays when a wall is selected. See Measuring Walls on page 366. With Opening Selected Specify how walls are located by temporary dimensions when a door, window, or masonry fireplace in that wall is selected.   l Select Locate Wall Surface to locate the wall’s surfaces, or Locate Wall Dimension Layer to locate the wall’s dimension layer.   l Select Locate Primary Wall Side to always locate the wall along the exterior side.   468 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - The Manually Drawn Dimension Tools l Select Automatic to locate the wall’s exterior by clicking on the wall opening near its exterior side, or locate the wall’s interior by clicking on the wall opening near its interior side.   Locate Interior Wall Centers   Check Locate Interior Wall Centers to locate interior walls at their centers instead of their surfaces. When checked, this option overrides the other settings in this dialog for interior walls.   CAD Options Specify how CAD objects inside a selected CAD object are located by temporary dimensions.   l Select Ignore Objects Inside for temporary dimensions to ignore any other objects inside a selected CAD object.   l Select Locate First Objects Inside to locate the first edge of another CAD object drawn inside a selected CAD object.   The Manually Drawn Dimension Tools Select CAD> Dimensions to access the manually-drawn Dimension Tools. Manually drawn dimensions are created by clicking and dragging like other line-based objects and can be drawn in plan view, cross section/elevation views, CAD Details, and on layout pages. The Automatic Dimension tools can also be used to create dimensions in plan and cross section/elevation views. See The Automatic Dimension Tools on page 472. There are nine manually drawn Dimension Tools:   With the exception of Angular Dimensions , dimension lines only locate objects that are parallel or nearly parallel to one another and should be drawn orthogonal, or at right angles, to the objects being located.   Dimension lines locate objects using Object Snaps , although they do not need to be enabled in order to draw dimensions. See Object Snaps on page 160. Bear in mind, though, that Object Snaps must be enabled in order to:   l Locate parallel objects drawn at angles other than Allowed Angles.   l Locate more than one object drawn in the same space, such as a CAD line drawn over a wall.   The zoom factor of the current view affects whether objects drawn close together are dimensioned or not. If you try to dimension an array of objects but the dimension line locates only the first and last objects along its path, Zoom in on the 469 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - The Manually Drawn Dimension Tools objects and try again. Similarly, if you want to dimension between two objects but the dimension locates unwanted objects between them, Zoom out. See Zoom Tools on page 153.   Once created, both manually drawn and automatically generated dimension lines can be selected and edited.  See Editing Dimension Lines on page 476.   If the object or objects located by a dimension are resized or moved, the dimension will update to reflect the change. Objects located by a dimension can also be accurately relocated or resized by specifying a new dimension value. See Moving Objects Using Dimensions on page 483.   MANUAL DIMENSIONS The Manual Dimension tool creates dimension lines that locate all eligible objects positioned between their start and end points and within the default Reach distance.   Manual Dimensions locate walls and a variety of other object types as specified in the Dimension Defaults dialog. See Locate Manual Panel on page 454.   END-TO-END DIMENSIONS The End-to-End Dimension tool creates dimension lines that locate an eligible object at its start and end points but ignores any objects in between.   End to End Dimensions locate walls and a variety of other object types as specified in the Dimension Defaults dialog. See Locate End to End Panel on page 458.   ANGULAR DIMENSIONS The Angular Dimension tool measures the angle between any two straight edges, including walls, cabinets, and the straight sides of polyline-based objects. Edges nested up to four levels deep within a CAD block can be dimensioned, as well. To create an angular dimension, click on the first edge to be dimensioned, then drag an arc and release on the second edge.   Like other dimension lines, an Angular Dimension can be included in a CAD block. When the block is exploded, however, the Angular Dimension may become invalid and disappear when edited or changed.   By default, Angular Dimensions use the Angle Style specified in the Dimension Defaults dialog. See Primary Format Panel on page 459.   INTERIOR DIMENSIONS The Interior Dimension tool creates dimension lines that measure the interiors of rooms. Interior Dimensions do not locate the exterior sides of exterior walls by default, although they can be edited to do so, and they have Display Wall Widths unchecked by default in their specification dialog so they do not report the thicknesses of walls or wall layers. See Dimension Panel on page 486.   Interior Dimensions locate either wall surfaces or the Main Layer, as well as a variety of other objects, depending on the settings in the Dimension Defaults dialog. See Locate Interior Panel on page 458.   POINT TO POINT DIMENSIONS The Point to Point Dimension tool creates dimension lines that locate an eligible object at their start and end points if possible. If no object is present at either location, a Point Marker is created and the dimension line locates it instead. See Markers on page 529.   470 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - The Manually Drawn Dimension Tools Point to Point Dimensions can be drawn in either of two ways:   l When the Default edit behavior is active, a Point to Point Dimension places Point Markers at its start and end points, which it locates. Any objects along the dimension line’s length are ignored. See Point Markers on page 298.   l When the Alternate edit behavior is active, a Point to Point Dimension locates objects along its length as well as objects or Point Markers at its start and end. See Defaults, Preferences, and Edit Behaviors on page 206.   The Point Markers created by the Point to Point Dimension tool can be selected and edited. See Editing Markers on page 529.   Point to Point Dimensions locate walls and a variety of other objects depending on the settings in the Dimension Defaults dialog. See Locate End to End Panel on page 458.   BASELINE DIMENSIONS The Baseline Dimension tool creates a series of dimension lines that all share the same origin instead of continuing from each previous location. Baseline Dimensions are independent and can be edited separately. This tool is not available in layout files.   In plan view, a cross section/elevation view or a CAD Detail, select CAD> Dimensions> Baseline Dimension , click near an object and drag a dimension line near or through the objects requiring dimensions.   Baseline Dimensions locate walls and a variety of other objects depending on settings on the MANUAL panel of the Dimension Defaults dialog, while the spacing between lines is determined by the Line Separation value set on the GENERAL panel. See Dimension Defaults Dialog on page 451.   RUNNING DIMENSIONS The Running Dimension tool is similar to the Baseline Dimension tool in that it produces multiple measurements from a single point of origin. It is different, though, in that these measurements display on the same dimension line rather than on multiple lines. The start point of a Running Dimension line is marked by a circle. The circle’s size is the same as the dimension line’s Arrow Size.   Running Dimensions locate walls and a variety of other objects as specified on the LOCATE MANUAL panel of the Dimension Defaults dialog. See Locate Manual Panel on page 454.   471 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - The Automatic Dimension Tools CENTERLINE DIMENSIONS The Centerline Dimension tool is available in floor plan and cross section/elevation views. It allows you to locate the centers of a variety of object types using special centerline extension lines, which can be distinguished by a dashed line style and a symbol.   Centerline Dimensions locate walls and a variety of other objects as specified on the CENTERLINE panel of the Dimension Defaults dialog. In order for the centers of an object type such as cabinets, fixtures, and wall openings to be located as a dimension line is drawn, Centers must be selected for that object type. Both free-standing fixtures and appliances as well as those placed into cabinets can be located by Centerline Dimensions. See Locate Centerline Panel on page 458.   The centers of a variety of other objects - including stairs, footings, electrical, and CAD objects - can also be located with a Centerline by adding an extension at the object’s midpoint.   You can also specify any extension line on any dimension line as a Centerline using the Mark as Centerline edit tool as well as in the Dimension Line Specification dialog. See Mark as Centerline on page 482.   TAPE MEASURE Use the Tape Measure tool to draw a temporary dimension line between any two points in the drawing area. The tool will place temporary markers at the start and end points of the dimension line. The Tape Measure line and its start and end points all disappear when you release the mouse button. If Object Snaps are enabled and an object is located by the temporary line, you can snap to it. The Automatic Dimension Tools The Automatic Dimension Tools allow you to generate dimensions in floor plan and cross section/elevation views for specific purposes. Select CAD> Automatic Dimensions to access these tools. If you edit an Auto Dimension line, it will be marked as edited, so if Auto Dimensions are later regenerated, your changes will not be lost. If an Auto Dimension line has been edited, the Default check box will be unchecked on the LAYER panel of its specification dialog. See Layer Panel on page 491. Each of the Automatic Dimension tools has its own defaults settings so that you can customize the functionality of each independent of the others. See Dimension Defaults Dialog on page 451. There are seven Automatic Dimension Tools: The manually drawn Dimension tools can also be used to draw dimensions in plan and cross section/elevation views. See The Manually Drawn Dimension Tools on page 469. 472 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - The Automatic Dimension Tools TEMPORARY DIMENSIONS Temporary Dimensions display automatically when an object is selected and report the distance between that object’s selected edge and other objects. Select View> Temporary Dimensions to turn on or off the display of Temporary Dimensions. This toggle affects all views and is saved between launches of Chief Architect. A Temporary Dimension will only display when an object is selected, and as with other dimension lines, it will only locate objects that are parallel or nearly parallel to one another. Temporary Dimensions will also locate the endpoints of CAD lines and the corners of objects located past the end of the selected edge, within 4 feet (1200 mm) of the point where you click to select the object. You can control how Temporary Dimensions locate objects in the Temporary Dimension Defaults dialog. See Temporary Dimension Defaults Dialog on page 467. AUTO EXTERIOR DIMENSIONS The Auto Exterior Dimensions tool generates dimensions around a plan’s exterior in plan view, locating walls and openings as specified in the Dimension Defaults dialog. Auto Exterior Dimensions require one or more rooms to be defined in order to generate. See Room Definition on page 413. Up to three rows of automatically generated dimensions may be created per exterior wall: l The innermost dimension line locates exterior walls, interior walls, and all openings in exterior walls. l The second dimension line locates exterior and interior walls. l The outermost dimension line is the overall exterior dimension. AUTO ELEVATION DIMENSIONS The Auto Elevation Dimensions tool generates dimensions that locate walls and other objects in cross section/elevation views, as specified in the Dimension Defaults dialog. See Locate Auto Elevation Panel on page 459. AUTO STORY POLE DIMENSIONS The Auto Story Pole Dimensions tool generates Elevation Markers and dimensions that locate walls and other objects in cross section/elevation views, as specified in the Auto Story Pole Dimension Defaults dialog. See Auto Story Pole Dimension Defaults Dialog on page 464. Note: Only one set of automatic elevation dimensions created by any of the Auto Dimension tools can exist in a given cross section/elevation view at a time. If you want to have more than one, mark them as edited. See Editing Dimension Lines on page 476. AUTO ROOM DIMENSIONS Select one or more rooms and click the Auto Room Dimensions edit button to generate interior dimensions that measure each wall defining the selected room(s). Auto Room Dimensions lines are generated inside the rooms they measure and locate walls and wall openings, as well as other objects, as specified in the Dimension Defaults dialog. See Locate Auto Room Panel on page 459. Auto Room Dimensions do not recognize the No Locate setting for walls. If a wall is specified as No Locate, Auto Room Dimensions will locate it anyway. See No Locate on page 368. 473 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Displaying Dimension Lines Displaying Dimension Lines The display of dimension lines is controlled in the Layer Display Options dialog as well as by using Drawing Groups. See Displaying Objects on page 175. You can customize the both appearance and the display of dimension lines for different purposes. See Default Sets on page 83.   Dimension lines created by any of the dimension tools share the same components: l Dimension Lines run parallel with the distance being measured. l Extension Lines are perpendicular to dimension lines, indicating what they locate. If a dimension line locates more than two objects, extension lines divide the dimension line into segments. l Arrowheads display at the intersections of dimension and extension lines. l Dimension Labels display at the midpoint of dimension line segments and indicate the distance that each segment measures. EXTENSION LINES If a dimension line is offset from the objects it locates, extension lines help clarify exactly what is being located. Extension lines are numbered: when a dimension line is selected, an Extension Line Number displays at the end of each extension line.    You can specify the default length of extension lines in the Dimension Defaults dialog. See Extensions Panel on page 462.   Once drawn, the appearance of extension lines can be edited. See Editing Extension Lines on page 478.   Any extension line can be specified as a Centerline that displays the symbol. See Centerline Dimensions on page 472.   In cross section/elevation views, vertically-oriented dimension lines can display Elevation Markers along their extension lines. See Extensions/Markers Panel on page 488.   DIMENSION LABELS Manually drawn, automatic, and temporary dimension labels use the Text Style specified in the Dimension Defaults dialog. Unlike many objects that use Text Styles, by default dimensions use a Text Style specified in the defaults dialog rather than the Text Style assigned to their layer. See Text Style Panel on page 538. Like other text, dimension labels are subject to scaling. For example, A Character Height of 6” prints a 1/8” tall number at 1/4” = 1’ scale. A Character Height of 125 mm prints a 3 mm tall number at 1 m = 50 m scale. See Printing Text, Dimensions, and Line Styles on page 1373. By default, dimension labels have a solid fill that is the same as the Background Color set in the Preferences dialog. You can instead specify that labels use a Text Style with a transparent fill.   You can also specify the minimum size of dimension numbers displaying on screen in the Preferences dialog. See Appearance Panel on page 95.   474 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Selecting Dimension Lines Labels can have both a primary and secondary format and can be centered on dimension lines or located either above or below them. See Primary Format Panel on page 459. Dimension labels have their own edit handles and can be moved and rotated when a dimension line is selected. See Editing Dimension Lines on page 476. DIMENSION ARROWHEADS You can specify the style, color and size of  dimension arrows in the Dimension Defaults and Dimension Line Specification dialogs. See Arrowheads on page 327. The arrow at the end of a dimension line will not display if it is close enough to another dimension arrow that the two will overlap. A typical example of this is where two sections of an Interior Dimension locate two sides of an interior wall.   ELEVATION MARKERS The Auto Story Pole Dimensions tool creates a story pole with Elevation Markers and dimension strings automatically. See Auto Story Pole Dimensions on page 473.   In addition, Elevation Markers can be added to any vertically-oriented dimension line in a cross section/elevation view.   To add an elevation marker 1. Select an eligible dimension line and note the number of the extension line that you would like to add a marker to. See Extension Lines on page 474.   2. Click the Open Object edit button.   3. On the EXTENSIONS/MARKERS panel of the Dimension Line Specification dialog, select the number you noted in Step 1 from the Selected Extension drop-down list.   4. Check the box beside Draw Elevation Marker.   5. Type the desired Elevation Marker Text then click OK.   The resulting marker will display your text above the line and the height above grade below the line. In addition to the height above grade, you can add Additional Text below the line. See Segments Panel on page 490.   By default, grade level is set at the same height as the default subfloor for Floor 1; however, this can be changed in the Auto Story Pole Dimension Defaults dialog and for dimensions created with other tools, the Dimension Defaults dialog. See Locate Elevations Panel on page 466.   These Elevation Markers inherit their attributes, including marker Type, from the Saved Marker Defaults specified in the Dimension Line Specification dialog. See Extensions/Markers Panel on page 488.   Selecting Dimension Lines Before a manually-drawn or automatic dimension line can be edited, it must be selected. A dimension line can be selected in one of three ways, each of which affects the ways that the dimension line can then be edited.   The standard way to select an individual dimension line is to click anywhere along its length when the Select Objects or any of the Manual Dimension tools is active. When selected in this manner, the dimension line’s full range of editing options are available.   475 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Dimension Lines You can instead click on one of the dimension line’s extension lines. When selected in this way, the selected extension line’s length can be edited and a Centerline marker added to or removed from it; however, fewer edit handles are available overall. See Editing Extension Lines on page 478.   If you select an extension line by mistake, press the Esc key to display the full set of dimension line edit handles. Dimension lines can also be group-selected, with limited editing options. See Selecting Multiple Objects on page 213.   Editing Dimension Lines Before a dimension line can be edited, it must be selected. See Selecting Dimension Lines on page 475.   With the exception of Temporary Dimensions , dimension lines can be selected and edited using the mouse, the Edit Toolbar buttons, and the Dimension Line Specification dialog. See Dimension Line Specification Dialog on page 485. If an Auto Dimension line is edited, it will no longer be considered an automatic dimension line and will not be deleted and replaced the next time the tool used to create it is used. For information about changing the value reported in a dimension line label, see Moving Objects Using Dimensions on page 483.   USING THE EDIT HANDLES When a dimension line is selected, its edit handles can be seen. There are seven types of dimension line edit handles. The total number of edit handles a dimension line has depends on how many extension lines it has.   A. The Extension Line End handles are positioned at the point that each extension line locates and are used to move or delete extension lines. See Moving an Extension Line on page 479. B. The Add Extension Line handle displays to the side of the Move handle and is used to add extension lines to the dimension line. Extension lines added in this manner are able to locate marks that the dimension line might not locate as it was being drawn. See Adding an Extension Line on page 478. C. The Move handle is located where you clicked to select the dimension line and displays the Selected Edge Handle Fill color. It is used to move the entire dimension line, including any subsections, perpendicular to itself. Extension lines are resized as appropriate. The pointer changes to a two-headed arrow when moved over this handle. D. The Add Segments handles are located just past the ends of the dimension line and are used to increase the length of the dimension line and locate additional objects with it. The types of objects and their mark points that can be located with this method are dependent on the Dimension Defaults that the selected dimension line inherits its settings from, as well as the tool used to draw it. The Status Bar reports a selected dimension line's type, as does its specification dialog. See Dimension Panel on page 486.   476 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Dimension Lines E. A small triangular Rotate Dimension Label handle is located near the center of each dimension segment's label. Use this handle to rotate an individual dimension label. F. The small, square Move Dimension Label handle is located at the center of the selected label. Use this handle to move the dimension number for each dimension line section. The pointer changes to a  four-headed arrow when moved over this handle. When Object Snaps are enabled, dimension label centers will snap to their associated dimension line.   G. The Rotate handle is located past the end of the dimension line and can be used to rotate the dimension line. Note: A selected dimension line cannot be moved if Fixed Proximity is checked in the Dimension Line Specification dialog. See Extensions/Markers Panel on page 488. A selected Angular Dimension has only one edit handle. When you click and drag this handle, the selected Angular Dimension will move. Its length will increase or decrease concentrically depending on which direction it is moved, and the location of its arc center will be maintained. As a selected dimension line is resized, it's drawing behavior and the objects it locates may vary, depending on the Dimension Tool that was used to create it. When selected, Interior, Centerline, Baseline, and Running Dimensions are described as such in the Status Bar. See The Status Bar on page 24. USING THE EDIT TOOLS Dimension lines can be repositioned, copied, and deleted using the Edit Toolbar buttons just like other objects in the program can. See The Edit Toolbar on page 130. Click the Edit Extensions edit button to edit the lengths of the selected dimension’s extension lines. See Editing Extension Lines on page 478.   Click the Add Additional Text edit button to add or replace the text in a dimension line segment’s label. See Add Additional Text on page 482.   DIMENSION NUMBER SIZE The initial size of dimension numbers is specified in the Dimension Defaults dialog. See Dimension Defaults Dialog on page 451. You can specify number height for individual dimension lines in the Dimension Line Specification dialog. See Dimension Panel on page 486. As with text and other objects, dimension number size is subject to scaling when sent to layout or printed. See Printing Text, Dimensions, and Line Styles on page 1373. COPYING AND PASTING DIMENSION LINES Dimension lines can be copied and pasted into any view type that supports dimensions. If a dimension line is copied independent of the objects it originally locates, the pasted dimension line will locate Point Markers. See Point Markers and Dimensions on page 530. Dimension lines can also be copied and pasted from one plan or layout file to another. Bear in mind that dimension lines use dynamic defaults. If the destination file has a Saved Manual Dimension Default with the same name as that used by the dimension line being copied, the pasted dimension will refer to it. If no such saved default exists in the destination file, the pasted dimension will become associated with the currently active Saved Manual Dimension Default.   477 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Extension Lines DELETING DIMENSION LINES There are several ways to delete dimension lines. You can select any manual or automatic dimension line or group of dimension lines, then press the Delete key or click the Delete edit button. See Deleting Objects on page 284. The Delete Objects dialog allows you to delete all manually drawn and/or automatic dimension lines at once. See Delete Objects Dialog on page 285. Individual dimension line segments located between extension lines can also be deleted. If a segment is located between two other segments along the same dimension line, that dimension will be broken in two. To delete a portion of a dimension line 1. Select any Dimension Tool aside from Angular or Auto Exterior Dimensions. 2. Manually draw a dimension line over the segment that you wish to remove, dragging from extension line to extension line. Editing Extension Lines Before extension lines can be edited, either they or their dimension line must be selected. See Selecting Dimension Lines on page 475.   Extension lines can be added, edited, and deleted using the edit handles when their dimension line is selected. In addition, extension lines can be individually selected and edited. Extension lines are also affected by settings in the Dimension Line Specification dialog. See Extensions/Markers Panel on page 488.   ADDING AN EXTENSION LINE The Add Extension Line edit handle allows you to locate marks that the dimension line might not have been able to locate as it was being drawn. Interior Dimensions, for example, do not locate cabinets as they are drawn; however, you can add an extension line that locates a cabinet. To add an extension line 1. Select the dimension line anywhere along its length. 2. Click the diamond-shaped Add Extension Line edit handle which displays near the Move edit handle. The pointer changes to a two-headed arrow . 3. Drag the handle to the object that you want to locate with a new extension handle. This example adds an extension line to the left side of the window. 478 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Extension Lines 4. Release the mouse button to add an extension line. Additional extension lines can also be created by clicking and dragging an Add Segments edit handle. See Editing Dimension Lines on page 476. MOVING AN EXTENSION LINE Extension lines can be moved to locate the centers, sides, or surfaces of most objects. Here, an extension line is moved from the windows edge to the center. To move an extension line 1. Select the dimension line anywhere along its length: do not click on the extension line itself. 2. Click the Extension Line edit handle. The pointer changes to a two-headed arrow . 479 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Extension Lines 3. Drag the handle to a new location. The extension line snaps to possible marks as the handle is moved. 4. Release the mouse button at the new location. Not all library symbols can be located by a dimension line as it is drawn. Once a dimension is drawn, however, you can move or add an extension line to locate the library object. DELETING AN EXTENSION LINE When an extension line is deleted, the remaining dimensions update. If a dimension line has only two extension lines, they cannot be deleted. To remove an extension line 1. Select the dimension line anywhere along its length: do not click on the extension line itself. 2. Click the Extension Line edit handle. 480 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Extension Lines 3. Drag it perpendicular to the direction of the arrows, away from any dimensionable object, and release the button when the extension line disappears. In addition, individual extension lines can be selected, allowing you to resize them and/or mark them as Centerlines.   RESIZING EXTENSION LINES You can resize extension lines in the Dimension Line Specification dialog or using their edit handles. See Extensions Panel on page 462.   To resize an extension line 1. Click on the extension line or select the dimension line and click the Edit Extensions edit button to display two handles along the extension line.   2. Click either handle, turning the pointer into a two-headed arrow .   3. Extend or contract the extension line and release the mouse.   USING FIXED PROXIMITY The Fixed Proximity option allows you to specify a fixed length for one extension line that will not change if the object the extension line locates is moved.   481 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Add Additional Text To use Fixed Proximity 1. Select a dimension line that locates multiple independent objects and note the Extension Number of the extension line that you would like to have a fixed length.   2. Open the Dimension Line Specification dialog and go to the EXTENSIONS panel. See Extensions/Markers Panel on page 488.   l Select the Extension Number that you  noted in step 1 from the Selected Extension drop-down list.   l Check Fixed Proximity.   l Specify the desired Distance to Marked Object, which is the distance from the selected dimension line to the object that the Selected Extension locates. This distance includes the Gap From Marked Object.   l Click OK.   To see how Fixed Proximity works, select the object that the extension line with Fixed Proximity specified and move it.   Notice that the dimension line moves in response and that all extension lines’ lengths adjust except for the one with Fixed Proximity specified.   MARK AS CENTERLINE Any extension line can be specified as a Centerline. Click on an extension line to select it, and then click the Mark as Centerline edit button. See Centerline Dimensions on page 472.   Similarly, the Centerline can be removed from an extension line using the Remove Centerline Mark edit button.   Add Additional Text Text can be added to any manual or automatic dimension line using the Add Additional Text edit tool. To add text to a dimension label 1. Select a dimension line that you would like to add text to. 2. Click the Add Additional Text edit button. 3. Click on the segment of the dimension line with the label you wish to add text to. 4. In the Additional Text dialog: 482 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Moving Objects Using Dimensions l Type any Leading Text that you want to display before the dimension value. l Type any Trailing Text that you want to display after the dimension value. l Check Suppress Dimension Value to prevent the dimension value from displaying in the selected segment at all. 5. When you click OK, the segment you selected will display the added text. Additional Text can also be added and edited in the Dimension Line Specification dialog. See Segments Panel on page 490. If a dimension segment has an elevation marker associated with it, any added text will also be added to the marker’s bottom line of text. See Marker Format Panel on page 488. You can check Highlight Overridden Dimension Text in the Preferences dialog to identify any dimension label text that replaces a suppressed dimension value. See General Panel on page 102. Note: Dimension lines with text added are not supported when exported to .dxf/.dwg. When exported, they are converted to text and CAD lines. The same occurs when CAD Detail from View is used. See CAD Detail from View on page 338. Moving Objects Using Dimensions Most objects can be moved by changing an automatic, manual, or temporary dimension value that locates it. This technique can be applied in nearly any situation where dimensions are present, including angular dimensions. See Moving Objects on page 243. In addition, some objects can be resized using dimensions. See Resizing Objects on page 253. Your pointer indicates which dimensions can be used to relocate the selected object by changing to a pointing hand icon. Another way to tell is to select an object and drag it in the desired direction. As you drag, note which dimensions update. These dimensions are the dimensions that can be used to move that object. Note: A selected object can be moved and resized using a dimension line even when that dimension’s layer is locked. See Locking Layers on page 178. To move an object using dimensions 1. Select the object and click on a dimension line that locates it. An inline text field opens at the location where you clicked. l The actual distance displays in the text field using the default primary format. See Primary Format Panel on page 459. l If the dimension is locating two different objects and the selected object is polyline-based, the Move Edge and Move Entire Object buttons display to the right of the text field. 483 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Moving Objects Using Dimensions l If the dimension describes a selected wall’s length, additional buttons display to the right. See Using Dimensions on page 369. 2. Click the Move button of your choice. 3. Enter a new value in the text field. The unit of measurement is set in the Number Style/Angle Style dialog. See Dialog Number/Angle Style Dialog on page 126. l To use a different unit, include its indicator after the value.   l To move the selected object past a second object, to its opposite side, enter a negative value. l Basic math operations can also be performed in the inline text box, just as they can in dialogs. See Units and Math Operations in Dialogs on page 20. 4. The selected object moves or resizes when you press the Enter key or click outside the text field. 5. If Bumping/Pushing is enabled, the object being moved will bump into any objects in its move path and not move the entire distance. Hold down the Ctrl key when you press Enter to override this move restriction. See Bumping/Pushing on page 243.   A variety of polyline- and box-based objects can also be resized using dimensions. To resize an object using dimensions 1. Select the object along the edge that you would like to move. See Selected Edge on page 212. 2. Click on a dimension line that indicates its distance from the object’s opposite side. 3. In the inline text field, enter a value. 4. Click Move edge to move the selected edge only. 5. The selected edge moves, resizing the object, when you press the Enter key. You can cancel a move or resize operation using dimensions at any time by pressing the Esc key. RESIZING WALLS USING EXTERIOR DIMENSIONS When resizing a structure using dimensions, it is important to work your way around it in one direction. Relocate one wall at a time in succession so that you do not redefine the same dimension more than once. For more information, see Measuring Walls on page 366. USING ANGULAR DIMENSIONS Angular Dimensions are useful for adjusting the angles of polyline-based objects and walls.   484 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Dimension Line Specification Dialog To change an angular dimension 1. Draw an CAD> Dimensions> Angular Dimension , then click and drag to draw an arc within the angle you wish to measure.   2. Select the edge that you want to move.   3. Click the dimension value to open the Set Angular Dimension dialog.   The Set Angular Dimension dialog reports the Previous Value in degrees, minutes and seconds. 4. Enter a value in the New Value field.   5. Specify what you want to rotate:   l Select Rotate edge to move the selected edge when you click OK, or   l Select Rotate entire polyline to rotate the entire object about the corner formed by the edges that the Angular Dimension locates, maintaining the previous value of that angle.   6. Click OK to apply the change.   Dimension Line Specification Dialog To open the Dimension Line Specification dialog, select one or more dimension lines and click the Open Object edit button.   The settings in this dialog are dynamic defaults associated with a particular Saved Manual Dimension Default. See Dimension Defaults Dialog on page 451. The Dimension Line Specification dialog has up to nine panels, depending on the type of dimension line selected: 485 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Dimension Line Specification Dialog DIMENSION PANEL Inherits Default Properties From The name of the Saved Dimension Default that the selected dimension line gets its default attributes from displays here. If a dimension line inherits attributes from a Saved Dimension Default, that default cannot be deleted. See Saved Defaults Dialog on page 80.   l If multiple dimension lines are selected, “No Change” may display here.   l You can select a different Saved Dimension Default from the drop-down list.   l The Locate Settings associated with the tool used to draw the selected dimension line is stated here for reference. A Manual Dimension line uses Locate Settings from the LOCATE MANUAL panel of the Dimension Defaults dialog, for example, while an Interior Dimension line uses settings from the LOCATE INTERIOR panel.  These settings affect how the dimension line behaves when edited. See Using the Edit Handles on page 476. l Depending on the type of dimension line selected, you may be able to choose between the Locate Settings of two tools: the one that originally created the dimension line, and Manual Dimension. Options Specify the text size and display of wall widths attributes for the selected dimension line. The minimum on-screen size can be set in the Preferences dialog. See Appearance Panel on page 95.   l Specify the Number Height of the selected dimension's labels. See Dynamic Defaults on page 79. Dimension Number Height is subject to scaling. See Scaling Text on page 513. 486 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Dimension Line Specification Dialog l Uncheck Display Wall Widths to suppress those portions of the dimension line that measure between two surfaces of the same wall. Both sides of a wall may still be located, but its width will not display. This option is checked by default for most manually drawn dimensions, but is unchecked for Interior Dimensions .   l Check Display Gaps Between Cabinet Face Items to show those portions of the dimension line that measure the gaps between cabinet face items in elevation views. This option also controls dimension lines that locate opening edges and the nearest cabinet box edge. When unchecked, these gaps are measured but will not display. Rounded Value Indicators Specify the use and appearance of Rounded Value Indicators, which can display when the degree of accuracy in use is not sufficient to describe a dimension’s true value.   l Check Use Default to use the default indicator(s). Uncheck this box to make the options that follow active.   l Check + or - After Number to indicate that the actual dimension value is higher or lower than the value shown.   l Check ~ Before Number to indicate dimension values that are not accurate with the ~ symbol.   Dimension Text Position and Orientation Specify the location and angle of dimension numbers relative to the dimension line. These settings are also found in the Dimension Defaults dialog. See General Panel on page 451. Preview A preview of the selected dimension line displays on the right side of the panel. This preview shows a summary of the dimension line's general style attributes rather than its actual appearance. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22. DIMENSION PANEL FOR ANGULAR DIMENSIONS l The name of the Saved Dimension Default that the selected dimension gets its default attributes from displays here. You can select a different Saved Default from the drop-down list.   l Specify a Number Height for the selected dimension. See Dynamic Defaults on page 79. 487 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Dimension Line Specification Dialog Use Default Angle Style When this box is checked, the selected dimension uses the angle style set in the Dimension Defaults dialog. Uncheck this box to select a different Angle Style and number of Decimal Places. See Primary Format Panel on page 459. Preview A preview of the selected dimension line displays on the right side of the panel. This preview shows a summary of the dimension line's general style attributes rather than its actual appearance. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22. PRIMARY FORMAT PANEL To enable the settings on the PRIMARY FORMAT panel of the Dimension Line Specification dialog, uncheck Use Default Formatting.   The settings that follow are the same as those on the same panel of the Dimension Defaults dialog, but apply only to the selected dimension line(s). See Primary Format Panel on page 459. Not available for Angular Dimensions.   SECONDARY FORMAT PANEL To enable the settings on the SECONDARY FORMAT panel of the Dimension Line Specification dialog, uncheck Use Default Formatting and then check Include Second Format.   The settings on this panel are the same as those on the same panel of the Dimension Defaults dialog, but apply only to the selected dimension line(s). See Secondary Format Panel on page 461. Not available for Angular Dimensions.   MARKER FORMAT PANEL The settings on the MARKER FORMAT panel control the format of the elevation value stated in elevation markers’ bottom line of text on a Story Pole and are similar to those on the PRIMARY FORMAT panel of the Dimension Defaults dialog. See Primary Format Panel on page 459.   This panel is only available if the selected dimension line is drawn vertically in a cross section/elevation view. See Detailing Cross Section/Elevation Views on page 1094.   l Check Use Default Formatting to use the Primary Format settings of the currently active Dimension Defaults as the Marker Format.   Leading and trailing text can be added before and after the elevation value in an elevation marker’s bottom line of text on the SEGMENTS panel of the Dimension Line Specification dialog. See Segments Panel on page 490.   EXTENSIONS/MARKERS PANEL The settings on the EXTENSIONS/MARKERS panel allow you to edit the selected dimension line's extensions. See Editing Extension Lines on page 478. This panel is not available for multiple dimensions selected as a group or for Angular Dimensions .   Opening this panel will turn off Legacy Compatible Extensions if it is enabled in the Dimension Defaults dialog. See Extensions Panel on page 462. 488 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Dimension Line Specification Dialog Extension Lines An editable table lists the selected dimension line's extensions here. Initially, the extension closest to the point where you clicked to select the dimension line will be highlighted. The highlighted extension line is selected and can be edited.   Each extension line’s number displays beside it when a dimension line is selected. See Displaying Dimension Lines on page 474.   l Click on a line item to select and edit it. The Properties for Selected Extension are listed and can be edited using the settings below.   l The available Extension Length and Marker Style settings can also be edited in the table. The available options depend on which Extension Length option is selected below, as well as the view type. l Only available in the table, click in the Fixed Proximity column to specify a fixed distance between the marked object and the dimension line. You can only fix the proximity for a single extension line. See Using Fixed Proximity on page 481.   l When Fixed Proximity is checked, specify the Distance to Marked Object, which is the distance from the dimension line to the marked object, using a positive value. Extension Length These settings are the same as those in the Dimension Defaults dialog, but apply to the extension lines associated with the selected dimension line only.  See Extensions Panel on page 462.   l Uncheck Use Default to enable the three settings that follow as well as the equivalent fields for the selected line item in the table above. l Check Use Default to restore the default settings to the Selected Extension line. 489 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Dimension Line Specification Dialog l Specify the Length Away From Marked Object, which is the length of the portion of an extension line that extends from the dimension line in the opposite direction of the object it locates.   l Select Length Towards Marked Object to specify a fixed length for the portion of an extension line that extends from the dimension line toward the object it locates. If the dimension line is moved, this length remains the same but the size of the gap updates.   l Select Gap From Marked Object to specify the distance between the end of extension lines and their marked location in plan inches or mm. If a dimension line is moved, extension lines update, and the size of this gap is maintained.   Marker Style These settings provide alternatives to the standard extension line style. The selected extension line may have Mark as Centerline checked, or Display Elevation Marker, but not both.   l Check Mark as Centerline to mark the selected extension line with a Centerline symbol. Not available in the Dimension Defaults dialog. See Mark as Centerline on page 482.   l Check Draw Elevation Marker to add an elevation marker to the selected extension line. Only available for vertically oriented dimension lines in cross section/elevation views. See Elevation Markers on page 475.   l Specify the Elevation Marker Text, which is the text that accompanies an Elevation Marker. This will be prepopulated if the selected extension line locates an elevation mark recognized by the program. Only available when Draw Elevation Marker is selected, above. See Locate Elevations Panel on page 466.   l Specify which Saved Marker Defaults the selected extension line’s Marker Inherits Properties From. Only available when Draw Elevation Marker is selected above, this setting determines the marker’s size and appearance. See Multiple Saved Defaults on page 79.   l Click the Define button to modify the selected Saved Marker Defaults. See Marker Defaults on page 495.   SEGMENTS PANEL Additional Text can be added to the label of any segment of the selected dimension line on this panel as well as using the Add Additional Text edit tool. See Add Additional Text on page 482.   If the selected segment has an elevation marker associated with its extension line, the marker’s lower text will also receive this Additional Text. See Auto Story Pole Dimensions on page 473.   This panel is not available for multiple dimensions selected as a group or for Angular Dimensions . 490 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Dimension Line Specification Dialog Segments An editable table lists the selected dimension line's segments here. Initially, the segment that was clicked on when the dimension line was selected will be highlighted. The highlighted extension line is selected and can be edited.   Each extension line’s number displays beside it when a dimension line is selected. See Displaying Dimension Lines on page 474.   Blank Segment Check Blank Segment to suppress the selected segment’s dimension label. When this box is checked, the settings that follow are disabled. Text Added to Segment Specify any required text to add to the selected segment and elevation marker, if one is present.   l Type the Leading Text, which appears before the dimension value in the label.   l Type the Trailing Text, which appears after the dimension value in the label.   l Check Suppress Dimension Value to prevent the dimension value from displaying in the selected segment at all. l To specify the Angle of the dimension label associated with the selected segment, uncheck Automatic and then enter a value in the text field, in degrees. If the label has been rotated using its edit handle, Automatic will be unchecked and its angle will be reported. LAYER PANEL The LAYER panel is found in the specification dialogs for various objects. For more information, see Layer Panel on page 186.   If the selected dimension line was automatically generated, the Default check box on this panel will be unchecked automatically if the dimension line is edited. See The Automatic Dimension Tools on page 472.   491 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Dimension Line Specification Dialog ARROW PANEL For information about the settings on this panel, see Arrowheads on page 327. 492

Text, Callouts, and Markers Chapter 14 The Text Tools help you draw attention to special details of your drawings. Text objects can be added in plan view, in cross section/elevation views, in CAD Details, and to layout pages. The display of text can be controlled by layer or set specifically for each text object. TOPICS Text Defaults and Preferences 494 Fonts and Alphabets 495 The Text Tools 497 Creating Text Objects 497 Displaying Text Objects 499 Rich Text Specification Dialog 500 Text Specification Dialog 506 Editing Text 510 Copying and Pasting Text 514 Find/Replace Text and Spell Check 516 Text Arrows 519 Callouts 521 Linked Callouts 524 Callout Specification Dialog 526 Markers 529 Marker Specification Dialog 531 Notes, Note Types, and Note Schedules 533 Note Specification Dialog 535 Note/Callout Panel 536 Text Styles 538 Text Macros 540 493 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Text Defaults and Preferences Text Defaults and Preferences Text Defaults can be accessed by selecting Edit> Default Settings in any view in which text can be created. Click the "+" next to Text, Callouts and Markers to display the sub-headings. See Default Settings vs Preferences on page 77.   The default settings for Rich Text, Text, Callouts, Markers, and Arrows determine what these objects look like when they are first created. Text Style Defaults determine the appearance of text associated with things like dimensions and object labels.   Rich Text , Text , Callouts , Markers , and Arrows can support multiple Saved Defaults. In order to open the defaults dialog for of these tools, you must first open its Saved Defaults dialog and choose an available saved defaults setup. See Multiple Saved Defaults on page 79.   l When you access a defaults dialog for any of the Text Tools via the Default Settings dialog, the Saved Defaults dialog will open first, allowing you to select which Saved Default you wish to edit. Multiple Defaults can be selected if you wish. See Shift and Ctrl Select on page 214.   l When you access this dialog by double-clicking a Text Tool button, the defaults dialog for the currently active Saved Default is opened directly. If you would like the Saved Defaults dialog to open first in this situation, you can enable this option in the Preferences dialog. See General Panel on page 102.   l In either case, the name of the Saved Default being edited will display in the title bar at the top of the dialog box.   Changes made to default settings do not alter existing text objects, so it is a good idea to go over these settings before placing text.   TEXT STYLE DEFAULTS Select “Text Style” from the list in the Default Settings dialog and click the Edit button to open the Saved Text Style Defaults dialog.  The Text Style Defaults button can be added to your toolbars. See To add a button to a toolbar on page 132. The Text Style Defaults dialog allows you to specify the attributes of the various Text Styles in use in the current file. See Text Styles on page 538.   RICH TEXT DEFAULTS Double-click the Rich Text or Leader Line tool to open the Saved Rich Text Defaults dialog and edit the currently active Saved Default.   The Rich Text Defaults dialog is similar to the Rich Text Specification dialog, but the name of the current Saved Default displays in the title bar. See Rich Text Specification Dialog on page 500.   Leader Lines and Text Lines with Arrows use the same default layer as Rich Text, so by default they have the same color, line weight and line style. See Layers on page 176.   TEXT DEFAULTS Double-click the Text tool to open the Saved Text Defaults dialog and edit the currently active Saved Default.   The Text Defaults dialog looks almost the same as the Text Specification dialog, but the name of the current Saved Default displays in the title bar. See Text Specification Dialog on page 506.   494 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Fonts and Alphabets CALLOUT DEFAULTS Double-click the Callout tool to open the Saved Callout Defaults dialog and edit the currently active Saved Default.   The Callout Defaults dialog looks almost the same as the Callout Specification dialog, but the name of the current Saved Default displays in the title bar. See Callout Specification Dialog on page 526. MARKER DEFAULTS Double-click the Marker tool to open the Saved Marker Defaults dialog and edit the currently active Saved Default.   The Marker Defaults dialog looks almost the same as the Marker Specification dialog, but the name of the current Saved Default displays in the title bar. See Marker Specification Dialog on page 531. ARROW DEFAULTS Double-click the Text Line with Arrow tool to open the Saved Arrow Defaults and edit the currently active Saved Default.   The settings in the Arrow Defaults dialog determine the initial settings for arrows drawn using the  Leader Line , Text Line with Arrow and Line With Arrow tools. These settings also determine the initial appearance of arrows when they are added to CAD lines, arcs, and polylines. The Arrow Defaults dialog looks almost the same as the ARROW panel of the Line Specification dialog, but the name of the current Saved Default displays in the title bar. See Arrowheads on page 327.   Avoid typing any text in any text Defaults dialog unless you want it to be present in all text objects you create. DEFAULT SETS The Text Tools are among the items associated with Default Sets, which are groups of Saved Defaults that can be customized and activated for specific drawing tasks. See Default Sets on page 83.   PREFERENCES Specify the number of segments for new leader lines and whether pressing the Enter key creates a new line of text or closes the Rich Text and Text Specification dialogs in the Preferences dialog. See Text Panel on page 101. Fonts and Alphabets Chief Architect allows you to use any font found in your computer’s Fonts directory.   For best printed results, using true-type or open-type fonts is recommended.   CHIEF BLUEPRINT FONT The Chief Blueprint font is installed in the Windows Fonts directory when Chief Architect is installed.   On Mac systems, this font is embedded with the Chief Architect Premier X15 installation but not installed on the system. As such, it is available for use in Chief Architect Premier X15 but not in other programs.   495 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Fonts and Alphabets INTERNATIONAL ALPHABETS The Rich Text tool supports unicode alphabets and characters. In order to use a unicode alphabet or characters, the appropriate language support must be installed on your computer. See The Text Tools on page 497.   Special characters can be added to any Rich Text object by:   l Copying and pasting the character from another application;   l Copying and pasting the character from the Windows Character Map;   l Using the Mac Character Viewer;   l Typing the keystroke associated with the character.   See Copying and Pasting Text on page 514.   CHARACTER SIZE Rich Text , Text , Callouts , Markers , Schedules , and dimension numbers can be sized to 1/128” accuracy (0.078125 mm). See Text Style Panel on page 538.   These objects use CAD Style Font Sizing, which specifies text size as the measurement from the baseline to the topmost part of the capital letter A, as in most CAD programs.   In legacy files migrated into Version X15, an additional Legacy Compatible Size option will be available for some objects if it was specified in the original program version. When this method is used, text size is based on information stored in the font that is then modified to approximate the specified Character Height.   Rich Text objects have two font sizing methods to choose from: CAD Style Font Sizing and a method similar to most word processing applications, where size is based on information stored in the font. See Options Panel on page 505.   REPLACE FONTS Select Edit> Replace Fonts to replace one or more fonts in the current file with a different font using the Replace Fonts dialog. The Replace Fonts dialog will also open if you open a plan or layout file that uses a font that is not installed on the current computer, giving you an opportunity to replace that font. 496 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - The Text Tools The table lists all fonts in the current file and how they will be replaced. l Click on a font name in the list to select it. Use the Shift or Ctrl key to select multiple fonts. See Shift and Ctrl Select on page 214. l Select a replacement font from the Replace With drop-down list, or leave “No Change” as the selection to maintain the file’s association with the missing fonts. l A preview of the selected font displays below the Replace With list. If this dialog opens in response to missing fonts and you do not plan to return the file to the computer where it was created, you may want to replace missing fonts with the fonts you normally use. On the other hand, if you do intend to return the file, you may prefer to not replace any missing fonts. The Text Tools Select CAD> Text to access the Text Tools. These tools are available in plan view, in cross section/elevation views, in CAD Details, and in layout files.   The Rich Text tool is used to create text objects. See Creating Text Objects on page 497.   The Text tool is used to create simple text objects with a single font and style format, or with Tab-delimited columns. It is not as flexible as the Rich Text tool; however, it was the tool used to create text in Chief Architect X1 and prior. See Creating Text Objects on page 497.   You can convert simple Text to a Rich Text object by clicking the Convert to Rich Text edit button. See Convert to Rich Text on page 512. The Text Line with Arrow tool is used to connect text and another object with an arrow. See Text Arrows on page 519.   The Leader Line tool places either a Text or Rich Text object with an arrow attached. See Leader Line on page 519.   The Callout tool is used to place callouts. See Callouts on page 521.   The Marker tool is used to place markers for Level Lines, Test Borings and Point Markers. See Markers on page 529.   The Note tool is used to create callouts that are associated with a Note Schedule. See Notes, Note Types, and Note Schedules on page 533.   The Text Macro Management tool allows you to create and manage text macros in the current file. See Text Macro Management Dialog on page 1396.   The Note Type Management tool allows you to manage the different types of Notes available in the current file. See Note Type Management Dialog on page 534.   Creating Text Objects Text, callouts and markers can be created in plan view, in cross section/elevation views, in CAD Details, and on layout pages. See View Windows on page 144. Notes can be created in these views as well. In addition, they can be created in camera views. See Notes, Note Types, and Note Schedules on page 533.   497 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Creating Text Objects Once created, text, callouts and markers can be selected and edited in a variety of ways. See Editing Text on page 510. To create Rich Text 1. Select CAD> Text> Rich Text . 2. Click and drag to draw a rectangle defining the area of the text object.   l The rectangle that you drag must be at least as tall as the default line spacing for a single line of text. See Rich Text Specification Dialog on page 500.   l When you release the mouse button, a blank text box is created with an active cursor, ready for you to type.   3. Type or paste the desired text into the Text Field. If the program identifies any spelling issues, they will be underlined in red. 4. Use the options on the Edit Bar, which displays above the Text Field, to change the font, style and size of any portion of the text. See Editing Text on page 510. 5. When you are finished, simply click outside the Text Field to close it and the Edit Bar. The Rich Text tool remains active, so you can click and drag to create additional Text objects if you wish.   Note: If you do not type anything in the Text Field, a text object will not be created when you click outside it. To create Text 1. Select CAD> Text> Text .   2. Click where you want the upper left corner of the text to be located. The Text Specification dialog opens. See Text Specification Dialog on page 506.   3. Enter text and click OK.   Up to 32,000 characters can be inserted in one Text object. It is usually better to use several smaller Text objects when a lot of text must be inserted.   Rich Text , Callouts ,  Markers , and Notes can also be created  in the same manner as Text : by clicking where you want the upper left corner of the object to be created. The object’s specification dialog will open: enter text and click OK.   You can also create lines with arrows connecting the text that you create to items in the drawing. See Text Arrows on page 519. PLACING TEXT FROM THE LIBRARY Rich Text, Text, Callouts, Markers, and Notes can be added to the User Catalog in the Library and then placed into plans and layout files as needed. See Add to Library on page 965 and Replace From Library on page 976.   TEXT AND CAD OBJECTS Text can be used in combination with CAD objects to create legends, title blocks, and a wide variety of other details. See CAD Objects on page 290 and Layout on page 1333.   498 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Displaying Text Objects A selection of legends and other CAD blocks that use both text and CAD can be found in the Library Browser. See The Library on page 945.   HYPERLINKS Hyperlinks that link to web pages both in the views they are created in as well as when printed to PDF can be added to Rich Text objects in their specification dialogs. See Text Panel on page 500. Hyperlinks can also be added to simple Text objects that can be used in the views they are created in but not when printed. These hyperlinks can link to both web pages as well as files on the local system. See Link Panel on page 509. To open a link in Chief Architect, select a Rich Text or Text object, then: l Mouse over the text in the selected Rich Text object. If the mouse pointer displays a pointing hand icon, the Status Bar will report the address that it links to, and you can click once to open the link in your default web browser. l When a Text object with a hyperlink is selected, the Follow Hyperlink edit button will be available. Click this button to open the linked file, or the linked page in your default web browser. Displaying Text Objects As with other types of objects, the display of Text objects is controlled in the Layer Display Options dialog.  By default, text objects are located on layers with “Text” at the beginning of the layer name, such as “Text, Callouts”. See Layer Display Options Dialog on page 179. Text objects can only be displayed in views where text can be created. The display attributes of each individual text object can be controlled independent of the layer it is placed on. See Rich Text Specification Dialog on page 500. CUSTOM TEXT LAYERS Text objects do not need to be shown at all times. For instance, electrical notes will be included with the electrical plan, but are not needed in the framing plan. You can create custom layers and layer sets to control the display of text and other objects. See Layer Sets on page 182 and Layer Display Options Dialog on page 179.   To move text to a different layer, select the text object or group of text objects, then click the Open Object edit button to open the Text Specification dialog. The selected text object’s layer can be changed on the LINE STYLE panel. See Line Style Panel on page 305.   TEXT ARROWS If a text arrow is attached to a Text object and they are on the same layer, changing the layer of the text will also change the layer of the attached text arrow. However, changing the layer of the text arrow will not change the layer of the text it is attached to. See Layer Attributes on page 177.   NOTES Unlike other text objects, Notes can be created and display in camera views. See Notes, Note Types, and Note Schedules on page 533.   499 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Rich Text Specification Dialog Rich Text Specification Dialog The Rich Text Specification dialog opens if you select one or more Rich Text objects, then click the Open Object edit button. This dialog also opens when you select the Rich Text tool and then click once in the drawing area. When Rich Text objects are group-selected, the text content, zoom factor, and Paragraph Options cannot be changed, but everything else can be. The Rich Text Specification dialog is similar to the Rich Text Defaults dialog but affects the selected text rather than all subsequently created text objects. Also, the name of the Saved Default being edited will display in the title bar of the defaults dialog. See Text Defaults and Preferences on page 494.   Note: Text objects have a different specification dialog. See Text Specification Dialog on page 506. TEXT PANEL The settings on the TEXT panel allow you to type the selected Rich Text object’s content and control many aspects of its appearance, including its font, size, color and style. You can specify the appearance of the text before typing, and can also select and change the attributes of all or portions of the text content after it is typed. To change text that already exists, simply highlight it using the mouse and/or the Shift + arrow keys and then make any needed changes to its attributes. Note: If you do not type anything in the text field on this panel when creating a new object, no object will be created when you click OK. On the other hand, if you remove the text from an existing object and click OK, an empty text box will result. Edit Bar Use the options on the Edit Bar, which displays above the Text Entry field, to change the font, size, and style of the text.   The Edit bar also displays in the drawing area above the Text object when you click the Edit Text in Place edit button. See Editing Text on page 510. Select the desired options before typing to affect the text as it is typed, or select some or all of the text and then specify which options to apply to it. 500 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Rich Text Specification Dialog l Select a Font from the drop-down list.   l Specify the Text Size in drawing units.   l Click the Print Size button to open the Printed Size Input dialog. See Scaling Text on page 513.   l Click the Color button to specify the color of the selected or subsequently typed text. See Color Chooser/Select Color Dialog on page 203. If Layer Color Text is checked on the APPEARANCE panel, any custom colors specified here are lost. See Appearance Panel on page 504. l Click the Insert Hyperlink button to insert text that links to a web address or edit an existing selected hyperlink. See Hyperlinks on page 499 and Insert Hyperlink Dialog on page 502, below. Note: Hyperlink text is automatically underlined and assigned a nondefault blue color. Once created, though, it is editable. To remove a hyperlink, select the linked text, right-click, and select Remove Hyperlink from the contextual menu.   l Click the Bold button to specify the selected text as bold. The Ctrl+B hotkey can also be used.   l Click the Italic button to specify the selected text as italic. The Ctrl+I hotkey can also be used.   l Click the Underline button to specify the selected text as underlined. The Ctrl + U hotkey can also be used.   l Click the Strikethrough button to specify the selected text as stricken-through.   l Click the Uppercase button to display the selected text in all capital letters.   l Click the Align Left , Align Center , or Align Right button to specify how the selected text is aligned.   l Click the Paragraph Options button to specify the selected paragraph’s alignment, spacing and bullets or numbering in the Paragraph Options dialog.   l Click the Spell Check button to check the spelling in the selected text object. See Spell Check on page 517.   l Click the Insert Macro button to place a Text Macro at the location of the cursor. Not available when multiple text objects are selected. User Defined macros are only available when the selected Rich Text object points to an eligible object using a Leader Line or Text Line with Arrow. See Text Macros on page 540.   l Specify the Zoom factor of the selected text by typing a percentage value in the text field or clicking the up/down arrows. This setting only affects the text as it appears in this dialog. Note: Some fonts cannot be drawn at certain zoom factors. When this is the case, the appearance of the text will not change. Text Entry Field Type or paste text in the Text Entry field. See Copy, Cut and Paste on page 514.   l Depending on the current Preferences settings, pressing the Enter key either forces a new line in the text box or closes the dialog. A carriage return can also be added by typing Shift + Enter or Ctrl + Enter. See Text Panel on page 101.   501 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Rich Text Specification Dialog l Right-click in the Text Entry field to access a contextual menu from which you can select Undo, Redo, Cut, Copy, Paste, Spell Check and Select All. See Contextual Menus on page 19.   l To edit text in the entry field, click and drag to highlight any portion of it and then use the tools on the Edit Bar as needed.   l If the program identifies any spelling issues, they will be underlined in red.   Two spelling suggestions, Ignore Spelling, and Learn Spelling are available in the contextual menu if you right-click on a selected misspelled word. See Spell Check on page 517. INSERT HYPERLINK DIALOG This dialog can also be accessed when adding Notes to an unlocked library item via the Details panel of the Library Browser. See The Library Browser on page 946. Text Specify the text of the hyperlink that the reader will see. l If any text in the Rich Text Specification dialog is selected or if the cursor is located within an existing hyperlink when you click the Insert Hyperlink button, it will populate the Text field. If you change this initial text, the selected text in the Rich Text Specification dialog will update when you click OK and return to that dialog. l If no text is selected but the cursor is located within an existing hyperlink when you click the Insert Hyperlink button, that hyperlink will essentially be selected: its text will populate the Text field and its address will populate the Address field. Address Specify the address, or URL, of the page that the link will access.   l If the Address field is empty when you click OK, the hyperlink will be removed. 502 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Rich Text Specification Dialog PARAGRAPH OPTIONS DIALOG Alignment Specify the Alignment of the selected paragraph(s). See Aligning Text on page 513. Line Spacing Specify the Line Spacing of the selected paragraph(s). l Click the radio button beside Single, 1.5 Lines, Double or User Specified. l If you select User Specified Line Height, type the desired height in the text field. For best results, this value should be at least as much as the largest text size used in the selection. Margins Specify the appearance of the selection’s side Margins, as measured in from edges of the text box. Only positive Margin values can be used. l Specify the Indent, which is measured from the left side margin. A negative value can be used if a left Margin has been specified. Bullets Specify the appearance of Bullets and numbering in the selection. l Select the desired bullet, numbered, or lettered Type from the drop-down list. l Specify the Number Prefix, which are any characters that you would like to display before the number or letter. Does not affect paragraphs using circle or square bullets. 503 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Rich Text Specification Dialog l Specify the Number Suffix, which are any characters that you would like to display after the number or letter and before its actual text. Does not affect paragraphs using circle or square bullets. APPEARANCE PANEL Leader Lines and Text Lines with Arrows use the same default layer as Rich Text, so they share the same default color, line weight and line style. See Layers on page 176.   Layer Information l Check Default to place the selected object on the default Text layer.   l Click the drop-down list to select from all layers available in the plan or layout file.   l Click Define to open the Layer Display Options dialog and select, modify, or add a new layer. See Layer Display Options Dialog on page 179.   l Check Layer Color Text to apply the color assigned to the selected Layer to the text on the TEXT panel. See Text Panel on page 500. Note: If you change the color of some or all of the selected object’s text, Layer Color Text will become unchecked. If it is checked again, the custom color(s) will be removed. Border Check Border to display a border around the selected text object and enable the settings that follow.   Fill Check Fill to display a fill color within selected text object(s) and enable the settings that follow.   504 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Rich Text Specification Dialog l Select Custom Color then click the Color bar to use a fill color of your choosing.   l Check Use Layer Color to use the color assigned to the text object’s layer as its fill color.   l Check Use Background Color to use program’s Background color as the text object’s fill color. See Colors Panel on page 98.   l Use the Transparency slider bar or text field to control how transparent the fill color is.   Margins Specify the Top, Bottom, Left, and Right Margins, which are the distance between the text and the border of the selected text object(s).   OPTIONS PANEL Options l Check Add an Arrow to add a Text Arrow to the selected text object. It will be attached to the left side of the selected object if the text is set to Align Left, or to the right side if it is set to Align Right or Align Center. See Text Arrows on page 519.   l Check Rotate with Plan to rotate the selected text when Rotate Plan View is used. If unchecked, the selected text is unaffected when Rotate Plan View is used. See Rotate Plan View on page 147. Rotate with Plan also affects text in views sent to layout if the layout box is rotated. See CAD and Text in Layout on page 1337.   l Specify the Layout Page that the selected object(s) is located on. Only available in layout files, but not in the Rich Text Defaults dialog in layout. See Layout on page 1333.   505 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Text Specification Dialog Origin/Angle l Specify the X Position and Y Position of the selected object relative to the origin. See 3D Drafting on page 13.   l Specify the Angle of the selected text object. The default value is 0°.   Size Specify the Size of the selected text object.   l Specify the Height of the selected text object(s) or check Auto Height to automatically adjust the text object’s height to match its contents.   l Specify the Width to of the selected text object(s) or check Auto Width to automatically adjust the text objects width to match its contents. When Auto Width is used, text extends in a single line rather than wrap.   l CAD Style Font Sizing measures text size based on the total height of the capital letter A, as most CAD programs do. Uncheck this to instead size text according to information stored with the font, as most word processing programs do. See Character Size on page 496.   Drawing Group See Drawing Groups on page 190.   Bumping See Bumping/Pushing on page 243.   l Check CAD Stops Move to bump the selected object into other CAD or CAD-based objects as it is moved.   l Check Wall Stops Move to stop the selected object when it bumps into a wall.   Text Specification Dialog The Text Specification dialog opens if you select the Text tool and then click once in the drawing area. It will also open when you use the Leader Line tool if Create Rich Text is unchecked in the Preferences dialog. See Text Panel on page 101.   You can also open this dialog by selecting one or more Text objects or Room Labels, then clicking the Open Object edit button. See Editing Room Labels on page 423.   The Text Specification dialog is similar to the Text Defaults dialog but affects the selected text object rather than all subsequently created text. Also, the name of the Saved Default being edited will display in the dialog box title bar. See Text Defaults and Preferences on page 494.   Note: Rich Text objects have a different specification dialog. See Rich Text Specification Dialog on page 500. The Text Specification dialog has the following panels: TEXT PANEL The settings on the TEXT panel allow you to type the selected Text object or Living Area Label's content. Text cannot be added to a selected room's label, however.   506 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Text Specification Dialog Note: If you do not type anything in the text field on this panel when creating a new object, no object will be created when you click OK. On the other hand, if you remove the text from an existing object and click OK, an empty text box will result. l Click Insert to choose from a list of special characters and text macros.  User Defined macros are only available when the selected Rich Text object points to an eligible object using a Leader Line or Text Line with Arrow. See Text Macros on page 540. Not available when the selected object is a Room Label. See Room Labels on page 422. l Check Add an Arrow to add a Text Line with Arrow to the selected text object. It will be attached to the left side of the selected object if the text is set to Align Left, or to the right side if it is set to Align Right or Align Center. See Text Arrows on page 519.   l Click the Spell Check button to check the spelling of the text that displays in the Text Entry area. If Spell Check finds a word that may be spelled incorrectly, the Check Spelling dialog opens. See Spell Check on page 517. Not available when multiple Text objects are selected.   Text Entry l Enter text in the Text Entry field. This field is available for the Living Area but not for a selected room's label. See Room Labels on page 422. l Depending on the current Preferences settings, pressing the Enter key either forces a new line in the text box or closes the dialog. A carriage return can also be added by typing Shift + Enter or Ctrl + Enter. See Text Panel on page 101.   l Text automatically wraps to a new line without requiring a hard return.   l Tabs can be added to the text by pressing the Tab key.   l If the program identifies any spelling issues, they will be underlined in red.   Two spelling suggestions, Ignore Spelling, and Learn Spelling are available in the contextual menu if you right-click on a selected misspelled word. See Spell Check on page 517. Preview In the Text Specification dialog only, a preview of the selected text object displays on the right. Not available for Room Labels. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22. 507 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Text Specification Dialog ATTRIBUTES PANEL Box/Grid l Specify the positions of the selected text object's Tab Stops. l In the text field, specify the number of spaces from the left edge of the text box where each new column begins. The first column always starts at 0 and is not listed. l Check Display Border to turn on the display of a border polyline around the selected object. l Check Display Grid Lines to turn on the display of the grid formed by the specified rows and columns.   Alignment l Select "Left", "Centered", "Right", or "Justified" from the drop-down list.   Origin/Angle l Specify the X Position and Y Position of the selected object relative to the origin. See 3D Drafting on page 13.   l Specify the Angle of the selected text object. The default value is 0°.   Size l Specify the Height of the selected text object(s) or check Auto Height to automatically adjust its height to match its contents.   508 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Text Specification Dialog l Specify the Width to of the selected text object(s) or check Auto Width to automatically adjust its width to match its contents. When Auto Width is used, text extends in a single line rather than wrap.   l Specifying a Height and/or Width of 0 sizes the text box as small as the text within it allows without turning on the Automatic behavior.   Margins l A default Left and Right margin is applied. Top and Bottom margins are measured relative to the line height and may not extend to the text box completely when given a value of 0. l Check Apply Top/Bottom Margins to Each Row to apply the Top and Bottom Margins specified above to each line of text within the selected Text object. When unchecked, the Top and Bottom margins are applied to the Text object as a whole. Preview In the Text Specification dialog only, a preview of the selected text object displays on the right. Not available for Room Labels.   LINK PANEL Hyperlinks can be associated with web pages or files saved on your computer. If a selected Text object has a hyperlink specified, you can click the Follow Hyperlink edit button to open the linked web page or file.   Hyperlink Only one hyperlink can be specified for a single Text object. If more than one is added, none will work. See Hyperlinks on page 499.   l Type a web page address or the pathname of a file on your computer in the text field. No additional text should be added.   l Click the Browse button to select a file on your computer and add its pathname to the text field above.   l Click the Test Link button to confirm that the address or pathname in the text field is associated with a web page or available file.   Chief Architect automatically adds the http:// prefix for links that begin with "www" when Test Link is clicked. Preview A preview of the text entered on the TEXT panel displays on the right. Not available for Room Labels.   509 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Text To use a hyperlink 1. Select the text object. 2. Click the Follow Hyperlink edit button to activate the link. LINE STYLE PANEL The LINE STYLE panel is found in the specification dialogs for many different objects. For more information, see Line Style Panel on page 305.   FILL STYLE PANEL For information about the settings on this panel, see Fill Style Panel and Dialogs on page 193.   TEXT STYLE PANEL The TEXT STYLE panel is available for a number of objects in the program and control the appearance of the selected object’s text. See Text Style Panel on page 538.   DIMENSION FORMAT PANEL The DIMENSION FORMAT panel is available in the Room Label Defaults dialog and allows you to control the format of the portion of the room label that describes the room’s size. For information about these settings, see Displayed Line Length Dialog on page 293.   Editing Text Once created, Rich Text objects can be selected individually or as a group and edited using the edit handles, the Edit Toolbar buttons, and their specification dialogs. See Rich Text Specification Dialog on page 500. Text objects can be selected and edited much the way Rich Text objects can; however, there are a few differences which are described here. A customized text object can be added to the Library for future use. See Add to Library on page 965. Text objects can be edited using a variety of methods:   Callout and Marker editing are described separately. See Editing Callouts on page 522 and Editing Markers on page 529.   EDITING TEXT ATTRIBUTES Most text attributes, including the font, size, style, and the content itself, are edited in the Rich Text and Text Specification dialogs. In order to edit the attributes of an existing Rich Text object, you must select some or all of the text before making changes. See Text Panel on page 500. 510 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Text To edit Rich Text attributes 1. Select a Rich Text object and click the Open Object edit button. 2. On the TEXT panel of the Rich Text Specification dialog, click and drag to select some or all of the text typed into the Text field. 3. With some or all of the text selected, change any of the attributes available along the top of the panel, including the font, size, color, and style. 4. As changes are made, the selected text updates. Only the selected text is modified. Text objects do not support multiple fonts or other attributes in the same text object. When you choose an attribute, it is applied to all characters in the text object. USING THE EDIT HANDLES A selected Rich Text or Text object has the same edit handles as other box-based objects with one addition: the Add Text Line with Arrow handle. Click and drag the diamond-shaped Add Text Line with Arrow handle in any direction to draw a Text Line with Arrow that is snapped to the selected text object at its tail end. You can also right-click and drag to draw multiple line segments. See Text Arrows on page 519 and To continuously draw by right-clicking on page 165. As a text box’s width is made narrower or wider using an edit handle, its height may increase or decrease so that none of the text becomes hidden. The opposite is not true, however: a text box’s height cannot be resized smaller than the height of the rows of text it currently contains, plus its margins. 511 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Text Depending on the active Edit Behavior , the text box and the characters within it may or may not resize together when a corner edit handle is dragged. See Defaults, Preferences, and Edit Behaviors on page 206.   l If Resize editing is enabled, both the text object and the font resize when a corner edit handle is dragged.   l If Default or Concentric editing is enabled, the text box resizes, but not the font size.   l If Fillet editing is selecting, the corners become rounded and the font size does not change. See Behaviors Panel on page 118.   When text is resized using the edit handles, there is a “sticky point” at the natural size of the text box. Hold down the Ctrl key while resizing to override this behavior. EDIT TEXT IN PLACE The contents and appearance of text objects created with the Rich Text tool can be edited directly in the drawing area using the Edit Text in Place edit tool.   To use Edit Text in Place 1. Select a Rich Text object and click the Edit Text in Place edit button.   l The text appears as it did when it was first created: inside a text field with the Edit Bar above. See To create Rich Text on page 498.   2. Click inside the Text Field to type or select any of the existing text.   3. Use the tools on the Edit Bar to edit any or all of the text as needed. The tools on the Edit bar are the same as those on the TEXT panel of the Text Specification dialog. See Text Panel on page 500.   4. When you are finished, click outside the text field to close it and the Edit Bar.   CONVERT TO RICH TEXT Text objects cannot be edited to the same degree that Rich Text can. You can, however, convert a selected simple Text object to Rich Text by clicking the Convert to Rich Text edit button. Most attributes of the selected simple Text object are retained; however, columns created using the Tab key are not. See Tab Spacing on page 514.   USING THE EDIT TOOLS A selected Rich Text or Text object can be edited in a variety of ways using the buttons on the Edit Toolbar. See The Edit Toolbar on page 130. The Match Properties and Apply Properties tools can be used to apply selected attributes of a selected text object to other objects in the current view. See Matching Properties on page 282. RESIZING TEXT Both the border of a text object and the characters it contains can be resized.   The border of a text object can be resized using its edit handles or by specifying the Height and Width in its specification dialog.   512 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Text The default character height of Rich Text and Text objects can be specified as can the character height for individual objects, in their specification dialogs. See Text Defaults and Preferences on page 494. Character height can be measured in either of two ways. See Character Size on page 496.   SCALING TEXT As with the size of other objects, text size is subject to the current drawing scale specified in the Page Setup dialog. See Drawing Sheet Setup Dialog on page 1367.   To determine the Height in drawing units that is needed to produce text of a specific size when printed, use the Print Size Calculator dialog.   To use the Print Size Calculator dialog 1. Select the text object or Text Style that you wish to scale and click:   l The Print Size button on the TEXT panel of the Rich Text Specification dialog. See Text Panel on page 500.   l The Scale button on the TEXT panel of a variety of specification dialogs. See Text Style Panel on page 538.   l The Scale button in the Text Style Defaults dialog.   2. In the Print Size Calculator dialog:   l Confirm the desired Printed Scale.   l Enter the Desired Print Size of the text.   l The Text Height in View required to produce the Desired Print Size displays here for reference.   3. Click OK to return to the previous dialog. The Character Height value now equals that of the Text Height in View.   Generally, the Printed Scale does not need to be changed in the Print Size Calculator dialog unless you intend to send the current view to layout at a different drawing scale. See Sending Views to Layout on page 1338.   ALIGNING TEXT Text can be aligned in a number of ways.   l The text content of a text object can be aligned to the left, right, center or justified in the Rich Text Specification dialog. See Text Panel on page 500. l The text content of a text object can be also be aligned by clicking the Align Left , Align Right , Center , or Justify edit button.   l The center points of text objects can be aligned with one another by assigning them the same X and/or Y Position. See Attributes Panel on page 527.   l Text objects can be aligned by bumped them against a CAD line or CAD based object such as a roof plane. See Bumping/Pushing on page 243.   513 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Copying and Pasting Text A variety of other alignment methods are also available. See Aligning Objects on page 246. The text in the columns of a schedule can also be aligned. See Editing Schedules on page 685. COPY, CUT AND PASTE Copy, Cut and Paste of text into and out of the text specification dialogs can be accomplished using keyboard hotkeys: l Press Ctrl + X to Cut the selected text and save it to the system clipboard. l Press Ctrl + C to Copy the selected text and copy it to the system clipboard. l Press Ctrl + V to paste your last cut or copied selection in a new text object. For more, see Copying and Pasting Objects on page 167.   Copy, Cut and Paste use the system clipboard, making it possible to transfer text between text objects, between Chief Architect files, from a plan or layout into another application, or vice versa. See Copying and Pasting Text on page 514.   TAB SPACING The Tab key functions differently in Rich Text and Text objects:   l In Rich Text , the Tab key creates a space. CAD Style Font Sizing affects the size of the space created. See Options Panel on page 505.   l Tab spacing in Text objects produces columns with widths that can be edited using edit handles.   To insert tab-spaced text 1. Highlight a block of text objects containing tabs from another program or text from the Materials List and press Ctrl + C to copy them to the system clipboard.   2. Return to the plan view, select the Text tool, and click to place a text object.   3. Press Ctrl + V to paste the copied materials into the text box, then click OK. The text object displays on-screen.   4. Select the text object and note the additional lines with handles separating each column.   Columns automatically resize to fit the contained text. When a text object is selected, you can use the edit handles that display at each column to adjust spacing.   Copying and Pasting Text The Copy, Cut and Paste commands use the system clipboard, making it possible to transfer text between text objects, between Chief Architect files, from a plan or layout into another application such as a text editor or spreadsheet program, or vice versa. See Copying and Pasting Objects on page 167. All or selected portions of the Materials List can also be copied and pasted into a text object, as well as into a word processing or spreadsheet program. See Materials Lists on page 1303.   514 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Copying and Pasting Text Cut, Copy, and Paste can also be accessed from the Edit menu of many applications, including Chief Architect. These menu commands are not available when the text specification dialogs are open, but you can use the associated hotkeys. To Copy, Cut and Paste text 1. On the TEXT panel of either text specification dialog or in another program altogether, highlight the text you wish to cut, copy or paste. 2. Press Ctrl + X to Cut the selected text out of its original location and save it to the system clipboard. 3. Press Ctrl + C to Copy the selected text to the system clipboard without removing it from its original location. 4. Open the text object or a file in another application and click to place your cursor in the Text field, writing area, or spreadsheet cell. 5. Press Ctrl + V to Paste the copied text at the location of your cursor. Bear in mind that when text is copied and pasted, its formatting is not always retained. The results depend on the program or type of text object in which the content was created as well as the type of text object into which it is pasted. PASTING INTO TEXT Text pasted into a simple Text object from another source will not retain its formatting. Instead, the settings for that Text object are always used. See Text Specification Dialog on page 506.   This is the case even if the text is copied from another Text object unless that object happens to use the same formatting.   Text pasted into a simple Text object  from a spreadsheet program will retain basic column and row information. Each row can only have a single line of text; however, the width of each column can be adjusted. See Tab Spacing on page 514.   PASTING INTO RICH TEXT Text pasted into a Rich Text object from another source, on the other hand, will retain most - but not necessarily all - of its custom formatting. If a line of text is sufficiently long, however, it may be wrapped automatically when pasted into Rich Text. To retain the same character size when text is pasted from a word processing program into the Rich Text Specification dialog, uncheck CAD Style Font Sizing. See Options Panel on page 505.   If you want to retain the original color(s) of the text being pasted into a Rich Text object, be sure to uncheck Layer Color Text in the Rich Text Specification dialog. See Appearance Panel on page 504.   Text pasted into a RichText object from a spreadsheet program retains basic column and row information. Column width cannot be adjusted as it can in simple Text ; however, as you add or remove text from a cell, row height will increase or decrease to accommodate your changes. PASTING INTO A VIEW Text can also be pasted directly into a plan view, CAD Detail, or cross section/elevation view. When you use the Paste command, a new Rich Text object is created, the text is pasted into that object, and it is selected. In order to see the new object, you may need to Fill Window. 515 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Find/Replace Text and Spell Check Find/Replace Text and Spell Check Find/Replace Text and Spell Check locate text in Rich Text, Text, Callouts, Markers, CAD blocks, schedule titles and headings, Object Information, and custom labels for objects and rooms. They do not locate text in automatic object labels, default room labels, suppressed labels, the Materials List, or in the bodies of schedules, however.   Find/Replace Text and Spell Check locate text even when an object’s layer is turned off and/or locked.  They can also find text in objects on locked layers. See Locking Layers on page 178.   FIND/REPLACE TEXT Select Edit> Find/Replace Text to find a particular word or string of text in your plan or layout file and replace it if you wish.   Find and Replace l Type the string of text that you want to Find in the text field.   l Type the string of text that you want the text you find to be Replaced With.   l Select the scope of your search from the Searching In drop-down list. Choose “Current View”, “Current File”, “All Open Files” or “Selected Objects”.   Search Options These settings allow you to refine your search.   l Check Case Sensitive to distinguish between capitalized and lowercase letters when searching. When unchecked, capitalization is ignored while searching. Regardless of whether this is checked, the capitalization used in the Replaced With field will be applied when text is replaced.   516 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Find/Replace Text and Spell Check l When Expand Percent Signs is checked, the program will ignore strings of one or two % signs in a row, which may be used to mark up imported text with style commands. Uncheck this to find individual % signs in the search results.    l Check Show in File to open a new view window or go to a new layout page and highlight the object associated with the current search Result. When unchecked, the current search Result will only be highlighted if it is located in the current view window. See Working in Multiple Views on page 150.   l Click the Highlight Color button to specify the color used to highlight the object associated with the current search Result.  This color is also used to identify misspelled words using the Check Spelling tool. See Color Chooser/Select Color Dialog on page 203. Macro Options These settings control whether macros are included in the search Results. The text of the actual Macro Names are searched: not their values or results. See Text Macros on page 540.   l Select Exclude Macros to ignore macros when searching.   l Select Macros Only to include macros and nothing else in the search Results, below.   l Select Include All to include both macros and regular text in the search Results.   Results The current search Results are shown for reference in the field on the left. The location of the associated object, including file name, view name, and its object type is stated above the Results field as well. Click a button to the right of the Results field to perform the associated action:   l Click Find Previous to find the previous search Results.   l Click Find Next to search for additional Results.   l Click to Replace the current search Results with the replacement specified above.   l Click to Replace All instances of the current search Results found throughout the Searching In scope, selected above.   Although the Find options do not locate text in suppressed labels, Replace All will replace that text. See Displaying Labels on page 700. SPELL CHECK Select Tools> Checks> Spell Check to open the Spell Check dialog. The Spell Check feature checks each text object in the current .plan or .layout file consecutively for spelling errors.   Spell Check can also be accessed by clicking the Spell Check button in the Rich Text, Text, Note, or Schedule Specification dialog or by clicking the Spell Check edit button. When accessed in this manner, only the selected object is checked for spelling errors. See Editing Text on page 510. 517 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Find/Replace Text and Spell Check SPELL CHECK DIALOG Results Spell Check looks for each word in all open dictionaries. When a word that is not recognized is found, it displays here.   l The location that the spelling error was Found in is reported at the top of the dialog for reference.   l The text where the error was found displays in the top field for reference. The error itself is highlighted.   l Click Ignore to ignore the word in question in all Spell Checks during the current program session. The word will not be ignored the next time Chief Architect is launched.   l Click Skip to ignore the current instance of the word, but find other instances that may be present.   l Click Learn to add the word in question to the User Dictionary. See Chief Architect Premier Data on page 37.   l Click Delete to remove the selected word from the text.   l Click Replace to replace the word in question with the suggested word, below.   Suggestions Spell check displays Suggestions for corrections here. There are two ways to replace a misspelled word:   l Type a correction in the field and click the Replace button.   l Click on a suggestion to select it, then click Replace to accept it.   Highlight Color Click the Color bar to specify the Highlight Color for misspelled words when Check Spelling is used. This color is used to identify misspelled words in this dialog, text objects with misspelled words in views where an error is found, and text objects located using Find/Replace Text. See Color Chooser/Select Color Dialog on page 203. When Spell Check is finished checking the text object or file for errors, the Spell Check results window displays.   518 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Text Arrows Two spelling suggestions, Ignore Spelling, and Learn Spelling are available in the contextual menu if you right-click on a selected misspelled word in the Rich Text and Text Specification dialogs. See Rich Text Specification Dialog on page 500. Text Arrows Text arrows, which are simply CAD lines with arrows drawn on the “Text” layer, can be used to connect text objects to details of interest in your drawing. See Line Tools on page 300. There are several ways to create text arrows, and special snapping behaviors to take advantage of. LEADER LINE The Leader Line tool places either a Rich Text or a Text object with an arrow attached. This line with arrow can be selected and moved like any other line with arrow.   Note: Leader lines create Rich Text and have two leader line segments by default. You can change this in the Preferences dialog. See Text Panel on page 101. To create text with a leader line 1. Select CAD> Text> Leader Line .   2. Starting at the point where you want the arrow to point, drag to where you want a bend in the leader line and release the mouse button.   3. Click at the point where you want the center of the first line of text to display. The Rich Text Specification dialog opens. See Rich Text Specification Dialog on page 500.   4. Enter text and click OK.   Alternatively, you can click in the same location twice without dragging to create a Rich Text object without a leader.   If multiple leader lines are specified, click in the same location twice to stop adding leader segments.   The initial alignment of text created with the Leader Line tool depends on the direction that the leader line was drawn:   l Leader lines drawn from left to right produce text that is right-aligned.   l Leader lines drawn from right to left produce text that is left-aligned.   l Leader lines drawn from vertically produce text that is center-aligned.   Leader lines inherit their default line style from the current defaults of the type of text associated with the Leader Line tool. If Leader Lines produce Rich Text, they derive their line style from the Border settings in the active Rich Text Defaults. If Leader Lines produce Text, they inherit the Line Style from the current Text Defaults. See Appearance Panel on page 504 and Text Specification Dialog on page 506. 519 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Text Arrows They derive their default arrow style from active Arrow Defaults. See Arrowheads on page 327.   TEXT LINE WITH ARROW Text Lines with Arrow can be attached to text, CAD, and architectural objects by selecting CAD> Text> Text Line with Arrow and then clicking and dragging to draw a line. There is no limit to the number of text lines with arrows that can be attached to an object.   The endpoints of Text Lines with Arrow can be joined to form polylines with corners that can be adjusted using the edit handles. See Polylines on page 316. A Text Line with Arrow behaves like a Line With Arrow with one exception: Text Lines with Arrow are initially placed on the default Text layer, not the Current CAD Layer. See Layers on page 176. ADD TEXT LINE WITH ARROW EDIT HANDLE Rich Text, Text, and Callout objects have a diamond-shaped Add Text Line with Arrow edit handle that you can click and drag in any direction to draw a Text Line with Arrow that is snapped to the selected object at its tail end. See Using the Edit Handles on page 511 and Editing Callouts on page 522. TEXT ARROWS AND SNAPPING A CAD line, arc, spline, or open polyline with an arrow can be attached to other objects. It can attach to an architectural object anywhere within its 2D symbol in plan view, but attaches to a closed polyline-based object along its edges. A text line with arrow will automatically be deleted if one of the objects it is snapped to is deleted. Text Lines with Arrow that have the same Line Style and Arrow attributes can be snapped together to form open or closed polylines. If two lines with arrows meet within the bounding box of a text object, however, they will not join. This allows you to attach multiple, separate text arrows to a single text object. See Editing Line-Based Objects on page 216. Text Lines with arrow can be independent or attached to other objects at both their tail and head ends. Arrows attach to closed polyline-based objects along their edges, but can attach to Text or an architectural object anywhere within its bounding box in plan view.   l When a selected Text Line with Arrow or Leader Line is snapped to an object on either end, its end edit handle will display the Selected Edge Handle Fill color. See Colors Panel on page 98. l If an attached object is moved, the end of the Text Line with Arrow will move, as well. l When a selected text object is connected to another object using a Text Line with Arrow or Leader Line, a selection of Referenced Object macros that report information about that other object will be available to insert into the text. See Text Macros on page 540.   l If a Leader Line or Text Line with Arrow is drawn with its tail end snapped to a text object or another Leader Line or Text Line with Arrow, it will be placed on the same layer as the text object and inherit all of that layer’s attributes. Regular CAD lines with arrows do not do this. See Layers on page 176.   l If a text arrow is attached to text or another object, deleting either the text or the object will also delete the text arrow. AUTO POSITION ARROWS If either or both ends of a line with arrow are attached to an object, Auto Position Tail and Auto Position Head will be available in the Line Specification dialog. See Arrowheads on page 327.   The Auto Position options are designed to prevent lines with arrows from crossing over the text or other objects that they are snapped to. These options snap the ends of a line with arrow to predefined points on the object(s) it is attached to. If an attached object is moved, the end of the line with arrow will update so that it is snapped to the closest Auto Position 520 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Callouts location. Similarly, if the line with arrow is moved, rotated, or resized, its end may snap to a new Auto Position location on an attached object.   There are four Auto Position locations on a text object: one at the midpoint of each side. The Auto Position locations on other objects varies by object type.   The following image illustrates the behavior of Auto Positioning. The arrow has the Auto Position Tail option checked, and the tail end of the line is snapped to the text object. When the head of the line with arrow is moved, the tail of the arrow snaps to different Auto Position locations on the text object, maintaining its connection. In addition:   l If a selected Text Line with Arrow is moved away from an Auto Position location and you check Auto Position Tail, the tail will snap to the nearest Auto Position location.   l The first segment of a polyline arrow attached to text maintains its angle when Auto Position is off and text is moved.   l Auto Position is disabled automatically when an arrow is not attached to one of the auto position locations.   l Arcs and splines with arrows can also be attached to text and other objects.   Callouts To create a callout, select CAD> Text> Callout, then click at the location where you want a callout to be placed in plan view, a cross section/elevation view, a CAD Detail, or on a layout page. The Callout Specification dialog displays. Make any needed changes and click OK to place a callout. See Callout Specification Dialog on page 526. Newly created callouts derive their attributes, including their shape and size, from the currently active Saved Callout Defaults. See Multiple Saved Defaults on page 79. Callouts can be used to make connections between information on different pages of your construction documents. See Linked Callouts on page 524. CROSS SECTION LINES Check the Cross Section Line box in the Callout Specification dialog to add a cross section line with the length, angle, and other attributes that you specify. See Attributes Panel on page 527.   Callout with Cross Section Line and Section Arrow 521 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Callouts Cross section lines can be added to any callout shape. You can specify the cross section line's length and angle in the Callout Specification dialog, as well as add text above and/or below the line. A cross section line can also be resized as well as rotated using the square edit handle located at the end of the cross section line. You can also add an arrow to the end of a cross section line that is perpendicular to the angle of that line. See Editing Callouts on page 522, below.   CALLOUT ARROWS To add an arrow or “hat” to a callout, select the callout and drag the diamond-shaped handle away from the center of the callout. An arrow is created, pointing in the direction you dragged. See Editing Callouts on page 522, below. Arrows can also be specified in the Callout Specification dialog. See Attributes Panel on page 527.   You can also add as many CAD Lines with Arrows as you like to callouts. To add a line with arrow to a callout: l Select the callout, then click and drag the diamond-shaped Add Text Line with Arrow edit handle located below the callout. l Select CAD> Text> Text Line with Arrow , then click and drag to create a line with arrow, which can be moved or resized as needed.   See Text Arrows on page 519. DOUBLE CALLOUTS Any callout can be specified as a Double Callout in the Callout Specification dialog. See Attributes Panel on page 527.   To resize the line between the two callout shapes, select the callout and then click and drag the edit handle at the center of either callout shape. The arrows on a double callout are always the same on both callouts.   EDITING CALLOUTS Callouts can be edited using the edit handles, the Edit Toolbar buttons and the Callout Specification dialog. See Callout Specification Dialog on page 526. Layout view callout labels can also be edited using the edit handles and their specification dialog. See Layout Box Borders and Labels on page 1345. When a callout or callout label is selected, it has a selection of edit handles. The number varies depending on whether the object in question is a regular callout or a callout label, as well as whether it has a cross section line and/or arrow. 522 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Callouts A. Move l The Move handle is located at the center of the callout shape. Click and drag this handle to move the callout according to the currently active Edit Behavior . B. Concentric Resize l The small circular Concentric Resize handle displays on the perimeter of the callout shape. If the callout has a cross section line, it will be found where that line meets the perimeter. Click and drag this handle to resize the callout without moving its center point. l If the callout's Size is set to Automatic in its specification dialog, any text displaying inside its shape will also resize when this edit handle is used. See Note/Callout Panel on page 536.   C. Rotate l The large triangular Rotate handle displays outside the callout shape perimeter, just past the end of the cross section line if one is present. It is used to rotate the callout shape. The callout's text does not rotate along with the shape unless the Text Angle is set to Automatic. D. Extend Cross Section Line l The  square Extend handle is at the end of the cross section line, if there is one. Click and drag this handle to change the cross section line's length and/or angle. E. Add Text Line with Arrow l The diamond-shaped Add Text Line with Arrow handle is located below the callout shape. Click and drag this handle away from the callout shape in any direction to draw a Text Line with Arrow with its tail end snapped to either the callout center or the end of the cross section line and the arrow head end snapped to an object of your choosing. Not available for layout view callout labels. F. Add Callout Arrow l The diamond-shaped Add Callout Arrow handle is located just outside the callout shape. Click and drag this handle away from the callout shape in any direction to draw a callout arrow, or hat, to the perimeter. See Callout Arrows on page 522. G. Rotate Callout Arrow l The small triangular Add Callout Arrow handle is located at the end of each callout arrow, or hat. Click and drag this handle to rotate that arrow around the callout shape. l Remove an arrow by clicking and dragging this handle towards the center of the callout. 523 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Linked Callouts Linked Callouts In construction documents, callouts are used to make connections between information on different pages. For example, a callout in a plan view can mark the location where the information in a detail drawing is relevant. That callout will include an identifier for the detail drawing and may also report the page where that drawing can be found. Meanwhile, a similar callout in or near the detail drawing will report its identifier along with the page with the plan view showing where its information is relevant. Callout with Cross Section Line and Section Arrow In Chief Architect, you can add this information and help ensure that it stays current using Linked Callouts. CREATING LINKED CALLOUTS To link a callout to a view or a layout page, select it and click the Link View edit button. A selected callout can also be linked to a view or a layout page in its specification dialog. See Link Panel on page 529. There are several things you should do in order to use Linked Callouts: l The file in which the callout is created must be saved. If it links to a view in a different file, that file must also be saved. See Saving Plan and Layout Files on page 40. l Set up your layout file to include Page Labels with a page numbering convention that meets your needs. See Layout Page Information on page 1358. l Create, save, and assign names to the views that you want to link using callouts: l Plan Views on page 146 l Cross Section/Elevation Views on page 1089 l CAD Details on page 337 l Send these views to layout. See Sending Views to Layout on page 1338. l Specify callouts for the layout box labels of section views and CAD Details sent to layout and link them to the page in layout where a plan view referencing them is found. See Layout Box Specification Dialog on page 1349. l Alternatively, you can add Callouts to section views and CAD Details themselves and link them to the page in layout where a plan view referencing them is found. See Callouts on page 521. l By default, cross section/elevation views are represented in plan view using a callout that has a label and - if the view is sent to layout, it will also report the layout page it was sent to. See Camera Labels and Callouts on page 1098. l CAD Details are not represented in plan view automatically, but you can add a Callout, link it to a CAD Detail view, and set it up to report that view's name and the layout page it was sent to. By default, cross section/elevation views are represented in plan view using a round callout shape that has a label and - if the view is sent to layout, it will also report the layout page it was sent to. CAD Details are not represented in plan view automatically, but you can place a Callout in plan view, link it to a CAD Detail view, and set it up to report that view's name and the layout page it was sent to. 524 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Linked Callouts You can also direct a camera view to report the layout page it is sent to using the %layout_page_label% macro. CAD DETAILS AND PLAN VIEWS One application for linked callouts is creating an association between a detail drawing and a location in a plan view where that information is relevant. To create a Linked Callout in plan view 1. Select CAD> Text> Callout , then click to place a callout. 2. In the Callout Specification dialog, which opens next, go to the LINK panel, then: l Click the Link button. l If the current file is unsaved, you will be prompted to save it. l In the Link View dialog, expand the "CAD Details" folder under the current plan's file name, click on the name of the view you want to link to, and click OK. 3. On the CALLOUT panel of the Callout Specification dialog: l Click the Insert button to the right of the Callout Label field, mouse over "Object Specific", and select %linked_ view_name%. l Click the Insert button to the right of the Text Below Line field, mouse over "Object Specific", and select %linked_view_layout_page_label%. 4. Click OK to create a Callout that reports the name of a CAD Detail as well as the layout page it was sent to. 5. If the CAD Detail in question has not been sent to layout, the Text Below Line will be blank. Open the CAD Detail view and send it to layout. See Sending Views to Layout on page 1338. When using Linked Callouts, consider assigning CAD Details names that consist of a single capital letter. LAYOUT BOX LABELS Linked Callouts can also be used in layout box labels. See Layout Box Borders and Labels on page 1345. To create a Linked Callout layout box label 1. If you have not done so already, open the plan view where the Linked Callout was created and send it to layout. 2. Go to the layout page where the CAD Detail was previously sent to layout, select its layout box, and click the Open Object edit button. 3. On the LABEL panel of the Layout Box Specification dialog, select Use Callout, then click the associated Edit button. 4. On the CALLOUT panel of the Callout Label Specification dialog: l By default, the Callout Label uses the %referenced_view_callout_label% macro. This macro reports information for camera views, but not plan or CAD Detail views. l Delete the %referenced_view_callout_label% text and replace it with %automatic_label%, which reports the view's name. 5. On the ATTRIBUTES panel, 525 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Callout Specification Dialog l The Text Above Line uses %automatic_label% by default. l Delete the %automatic_label% text and replace it with a short, descriptive name for the detail. 6. On the LINK panel, link the view to a layout page in the current file with a plan view where a Linked Callout references the selected detail: l Click the Link button. l If the current file is unsaved, you will be prompted to save it. l In the Link View dialog, expand the Pages" folder under the current layout's file name, click on the page you want to link to, and click OK. MANAGING CALLOUT LINKS There are a number of edit tools that help you manage a selected callout's link to a view or layout page. Link View opens the Link View dialog, where you can link or relink the selected callout to a view. See Link View Dialog on page 51 Unlink View removes the link between the callout from the view it is currently linked to. Find in Layout switches to the layout page that the selected callout is linked to, making it the active view. If a callout's link to a view or layout page is broken, a Caution symbol will display over the callout. Click on the Caution symbol to open a contextual menu where two additional options are available: l Refresh Link confirms whether the callout's link is valid or invalid. l Ignore Invalid Links to remove the Caution symbol from any callouts that have one and leave all callouts unchanged. You can also add, change, or remove a callout's link to a view in the Callout Specification dialog. See Link Panel on page 529. If you want to relink all references to a particular plan file so they refer to equivalent views in a different plan, use the Referenced Plan Files dialog. See Referenced Plan Files Dialog on page 52.   Callout Specification Dialog To open the Callout Specification dialog, select a Callout and click the Open Object edit button. This dialog also displays when a new Callout is created using the Callout tool. See Callouts on page 521. The Callout Specification dialog is similar to Callout Label Specification dialog, which allows you to create callout labels for layout views. See Layout Box Borders and Labels on page 1345. This dialog is also similar to the Callout Defaults dialog but affects the selected callouts rather than all subsequently created callouts. Also, the name of the Saved Default being edited will display in the title bar of the defaults dialog. See Text Defaults and Preferences on page 494. CALLOUT PANEL For information about the settings on this panel, see Note/Callout Panel on page 536. 526 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Callout Specification Dialog ATTRIBUTES PANEL Cross Section Line Check Cross Section Line to apply a cross section line to the selected callout and enable the settings that follow.   l Check Double Callout to specify two identical callouts connected by the cross section line. Only available when Display is checked.   l Select the cross section line’s line Style from the drop-down list or by clicking the Library button. When By Layer is checked, the line style specified in the Layer Display Options dialog is used. See Line Styles on page 199. l Specify the Weight of the cross section line or check By Layer to use the line weight specified in the Layer Display Options dialog.   l Specify the Length of the cross section line.   l Specify the Relative Angle of the cross section line. This setting is not absolute: rather, it is measured relative to the Shape Angle of the callout object.   l When Auto Adjust Text Direction is checked, label text is oriented relative to the bottom or the right side of the view window, depending on the cross section line's angle. When unchecked, label text is oriented relative to the cross section line, regardless of its angle.   l Specify the Text Above Line, which is positioned above the cross section line.   l Click the Insert button to the right of the Text field to choose from a list of special characters and text macros. See Text Macros on page 540.   527 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Callout Specification Dialog l Specify the Text Style of the Text Above Line. When Match Callout is checked, the Text Above Line uses the Main Text Style used by the text inside the callout shape; uncheck this box to select a Text Style from the dropdown list or to click the Define button to open the Saved Text Styles dialog. See Text Styles on page 538.   l Specify the Alignment of the Text Above Line: "Toward Callout", "Centered", or "Away from Callout".   l Text Below Line can also be specified, along with its Text Style and Alignment. These options are the same as for the Text Above Line with one exception: a "Match Text Above" Alignment option. Callout Arrows l Specify whether the arrows are Small or Large.   l Check Filled to specify arrows with a solid fill. When unchecked, arrows are unfilled.   l Specify the Color of the callout's arrow(s): check By Layer to use the color specified in the Layer Display Options dialog or click the Color bar to choose an arrow color. See Color Chooser/Select Color Dialog on page 203. l Use the Transparency slider or text field to control how transparent the callout arrow(s) are.   l Specify the Number of Arrows. l The angle of each arrow can be set using the callout's edit handles. See Editing Callouts on page 522. Preview A preview of the selected callout displays on the right. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22.   LINE STYLE PANEL The LINE STYLE panel is found in the specification dialogs for many different objects. For more information, see Line Style Panel on page 305.   Additional attributes for the cross section line and arrows can be specified on the Attributes Panel on page 527. SECTION ARROW PANEL The settings on the SECTION ARROW panel are also found on the ARROW panel in the specification dialogs for a variety of different objects. For more information, see Arrowheads on page 327. If Include Arrow is available but unchecked and you check this box, Cross Section Line will become checked on the Attributes panel if it is not already. None of the settings on this panel are available when Double Callout is checked. See Attributes Panel on page 527. MAIN TEXT STYLE PANEL The settings on the MAIN TEXT STYLE panel control the appearance of the selected callout's Label and its Text Below Line, which can be specified on the CALLOUT panel. See Note/Callout Panel on page 536. The Text Style of the text above and below the cross section line, if present, can be specified on the Attributes Panel on page 527. For information about the settings on this panel, see Text Style Panel on page 538.   528 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Markers LINK PANEL The settings on the LINK panel allow you to link the selected callout to a particular view and use text macros to report information about that view, such as its name, in the callout's text. See Linked Callouts on page 524. Link Information The File Name, View Name, and View Type of the view currently linked to the selected callout are reported here, along with page number and page label of the view's linked Layout Page. See Linked Callouts on page 524. l Click the Link button to create a link between the selected callout and a saved view or layout page in an open file, or click the Relink button to replace the existing link with a different one. l Click the Unlink button to remove the existing link from the layout without replacing it. Preview A preview of the selected callout displays on the right. You can use macros to report information about a linked view in the Callout Label, Text Below Line, and in the text above and below the cross section line. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22.   Markers To create a marker, select CAD> Text> Marker and click at the location where you want it to be placed. The Marker Specification dialog opens.  See Marker Specification Dialog on page 531. Markers for Level Lines, Test Borings and Point Markers can be placed in plan view, cross section/elevation views, as well as CAD Details. You can also place a framing reference marker using Build> Framing> Framing Reference . Framing Reference Markers should only be placed in plan views. See Framing Reference Markers on page 875.   EDITING MARKERS Markers can be edited using the edit handles, edit toolbar and Marker Specification dialog. See Marker Specification Dialog on page 531. When a marker is selected, it has four edit handles. 529 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Markers A. Move l The Move handle is located at the center of the callout shape. Click and drag this handle to move the callout according to the currently active Edit Behavior . B. Concentric Resize l The small circular Concentric Resize handle displays on the perimeter of the callout shape. If the callout has a cross section line, it will be found where that line meets the perimeter. Click and drag this handle to resize the callout without moving its center point. l If the callout's Size is set to Automatic in its specification dialog, any text displaying inside its shape will also resize when this edit handle is used. See Note/Callout Panel on page 536. C. Extend Cross Section Line l The  square Extend handle is at the end of the cross section line, if there is one. Click and drag this handle to change the cross section line's length and/or angle. D. Rotate l The large triangular Rotate handle displays outside the callout shape perimeter, just past the end of the cross section line if one is present. It is used to rotate the callout shape. The callout's text does not rotate along with the shape unless the Text Angle is set to Automatic. A customized marker can be added to the Library for future use. See Add to Library on page 965. POINT MARKERS AND DIMENSIONS There are a number of scenarios in which Markers may be created in conjunction with dimension lines. These Point Markers derive their initial attributes from the  currently active Saved Marker Default and can be selected and edited:   l When the Point to Point Dimension tool is used to draw a dimension line and an object is not available to snap to at either the start or end point, a Point Marker will be automatically created and the dimension line will locate it. See Point to Point Dimensions on page 470.   l Dimensions drawn in a cross section/elevation view may locate Cross Section Lines that represent objects rather than the objects themselves. When this occurs, Point Markers will also be placed and the dimension lines will locate them. See Cross Section Lines on page 1110.   l If a dimension line is copied independent of the objects it locates, the pasted dimension line will locate Point Markers. See Copying and Pasting Dimension Lines on page 477.   In addition, Auto Story Pole Dimensions and other vertically-oriented dimension lines in cross section/elevation views can display Elevation Markers along their extension lines. These markers are not individually editable but inherit their attributes, including marker Type, from the Saved Marker Defaults specified in the Dimension Line Specification dialog. See Elevation Markers on page 475.   530 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Marker Specification Dialog Marker Specification Dialog To open the Marker Specification dialog, select a marker and click the Open Object edit button.   This dialog also displays when a new marker is created by clicking in plan view using the Marker tool.   The Marker Specification dialog is similar to the Marker Defaults dialog but affects the selected markers rather than all subsequently created markers.  The name of the Saved Default being edited will display in the title bar of the defaults dialog. See Text Defaults and Preferences on page 494.   MARKER PANEL Type Choose a marker Type. Note that Framing Reference Markers affect the model, while the other marker types are for annotation only. See Framing Reference Markers on page 875. 531 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Marker Specification Dialog Line Specify the Length and Angle of the marker's line and text. For Test Boring and Point Markers, the Length controls the gap between marker and text. Label Specify the text and alignment of the selected marker’s Label. The label’s text style can be specified on the TEXT STYLE panel. See Text Styles on page 538.   l When Auto Adjust Text Direction is checked, label text is oriented relative to the bottom or the right side of the view window, depending on the cross section line's angle. When unchecked, label text is oriented relative to the cross section line, regardless of its angle.   l Type the Text which displays above the marker’s line. l Select a text Alignment option from the drop-down list. Only available for Level Line and Framing Reference markers. l Toward Marker positions the text next to the marker shape. l Centered centers the text along the length of the marker's line. l Away From Marker positions the text at the end of the marker's line. Text Below Line and the related settings below it are only available for Level Line markers. l Type the Text Below Line that displays below the Level Line marker’s line, if desired.   l Click the Insert button to the right of either Text option to choose from a list of special characters and text macros. See Text Macros on page 540.   l Specify the Text Style used by the Text Below Line:   l When Match Text Above is checked, the Text Below Line uses the same Text Style as the text above the line.   l Uncheck this box, then select a different Text Style from the drop-down list.   l Select a text Alignment option for the Text Below Line from the drop-down list. "Match Text Above" is selected by default.   Size Specify the Size of the selected marker.   l Specify the Marker Radius, which is the distance from the marker’s center to the edge of its filled shape.   l In a cross section/elevation view, specify the Height of the marker, relative to 0. This setting is also available in plan view but does not affect the marker’s position.  This value will display in the Label when a height macro is entered in either Label text field. See Detailing Cross Section/Elevation Views on page 1094.   Preview A preview of the selected marker displays on the right. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22.   LINE STYLE PANEL The LINE STYLE panel is found in the specification dialogs for many different objects. For more information, see Line Style Panel on page 305.   532 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Notes, Note Types, and Note Schedules Additional attributes for the cross section line and arrows can be specified on the ATTRIBUTES panel. See Attributes Panel on page 527.   TEXT STYLE PANEL The settings on the TEXT STYLE panel control the appearance of the selected object’s text. For more information, see Text Style Panel on page 538.   Notes, Note Types, and Note Schedules Notes are a special type of callout that link directly to a line item in a Note Schedule. Notes can be created for a variety of purposes, such as General Notes and Framing Notes. See Note Type Management Dialog on page 534, below.   Notes are typically used in plan view but can also be created in CAD Details, cross section/elevation views, and camera views. Like other schedules, it is recommended that Note Schedules be placed in CAD Details; however, they can also be placed in plan and cross section/elevation views. See CAD Details on page 337.   A Note created in plan view can be seen in camera views, and vice versa, provided that its layer is turned on. In contrast, a Note created in a cross section/elevation view only exists in that view. If the note’s position in plan view puts it behind one or more surfaces in a camera view, it will be partially transparent.   Notes created in either plan or camera view can be included with exported Chief Architect 3D Viewer models. See Export Chief Architect 3D Viewer File on page 1223.   Note callouts are created using the settings in the Note Defaults dialog. Once created, they can be edited much like standard Callouts. One exception is that standard Callouts can display arrows and cross section lines while Notes cannot. See Editing Callouts on page 522.   A customized Note can be added to the Library for future use. See Add to Library on page 965. To create a note schedule with notes 1. Select CAD> Text> Note , then click at the location where you want a note callout to be placed.   2. The Note Specification dialog opens automatically. On the NOTE panel:   l Type the desired Text that you would like the new Note callout to be associated with in its Note Schedule.   l Specify the Type of Note Schedule to associate the new Note with.   l Notice that the Label Text Above Line uses the %simple_schedule_number% text macro by default. See Text Macros on page 540.   3. Make any other needed changes, and click OK to place a Note callout. See Note Specification Dialog on page 535. 4. The new Note callout is blank and has a Caution symbol because it is not yet associated with a Note Schedule. 5. If you click on the Caution symbol, a contextual menu displays: l Create Note Schedule from Note(s) creates a Note Schedule in the current view that reports information about the selected Note's Type. 533 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Notes, Note Types, and Note Schedules l Ignore Note With No Schedule removes the Caution symbol from the selected Note and leaves it unlinked to a schedule. l Ignore All Notes With No Schedule removes the Caution symbol from all unlinked notes in the current view. 6. Select none of these and instead open a CAD Detail window and select Tools> Schedules> Note Schedule .   7. Select the new schedule and click the Open Object edit button.   8. On the GENERAL panel of the Note Schedule Specification dialog:   l Type the desired Main Title for the schedule.   l Under Objects to Include, all Note Types that are currently present in the plan will be listed. Choose the Types that you wish to include in this schedule.   9. Make any other needed changes to the schedule’s settings and click OK. See Schedule Specification Dialog on page 692.   10. Return to the view where you created the Note in step 1 and notice that the Note callout now displays a schedule row number.   NOTE SCHEDULES The Note Schedule tool allows you to produce customizable schedules that report information about Note objects created for a variety of purposes. See The Schedule Tools on page 682.   All Note Types present in the current plan are listed in the Schedule Specification dialog, under the Categories to Include heading. See General Panel on page 692.   By default, when a new Note Type is created, it will not be included in any existing schedules or in the Note Schedule Defaults automatically. You can specify which Note Types to include in a selected Note Schedule in the Schedule Specification dialog. See General Panel on page 692.   You can also create a Note Schedule in the current orthographic view by selecting one or more Note callouts and clicking the Create Note Schedule from Note(s) edit button. The resulting schedule will only report information about the selected Note Type(s). This edit tool is not available in camera views or overviews.   NOTE TYPES Note Types are used to indicate a unique purpose for each Note Schedule and to determine which Note objects each schedule lists.   Note Types are saved with each plan, so if you expect to use certain custom Note Types on a regular basis, you should add them to your plan template file(s). See Template Files on page 87.   Note Types can be exported from a plan file and then imported into other plans. Select File> Export> Export Note Types or File> Import> Import Note Types. They can also be imported and exported using the Note Type Management dialog. See Importing Files on page 45 and Exporting Files on page 41.   NOTE TYPE MANAGEMENT DIALOG Select CAD> Text> Note Type Management to manage the various Note Types available in the current file.   534 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Note Specification Dialog The Available Note Types in the current plan file are listed on the left. Click on a name to select it.   The buttons on the right let you manage the Note Types in the list.   l Click the New button to create a new Note Type. In the New Note Type dialog, type a short, descriptive, unique name for the new Note Type.   l Click the Rename button to open the Rename Note Type dialog and type a new name for the selected Note Type.   l Click the Delete button to remove the selected Note Type from the list. Only available when a custom Note Type is selected in the list.   l Click the Import button to import Note Types previously exported from another plan into the current file.   l Click the Export button to export the Note Types in the current file into a .json file so that they can be imported into other plan files.   You can specify a selected Note object’s Note Type in the Note Specification dialog. See Note/Callout Panel on page 536.   Note Specification Dialog To open the Note Specification dialog, select a note callout and click the Open Object edit button. This dialog also displays when a new note callout is created using the Note tool. See Notes, Note Types, and Note Schedules on page 533. The Note Specification dialog is similar to the Note Defaults dialog but affects the selected Note callout(s) rather than all subsequently created Notes. Also, the name of the Saved Default being edited will display in the title bar of the defaults dialog. See Text Defaults and Preferences on page 494. NOTE PANEL For information about the settings on this panel, see Note/Callout Panel on page 536. LINE STYLE PANEL The LINE STYLE panel is found in the specification dialogs for many different objects. For more information, see Line Style Panel on page 305.   TEXT STYLE PANEL The settings on the TEXT STYLE panel control the appearance of the selected object’s text. For more information, see Text Style Panel on page 538.   535 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Note/Callout Panel OBJECT INFORMATION PANEL The information entered on the OBJECT INFORMATION panel can be used in Note Schedules. For more information, see Object Information Panel on page 1331.   SCHEDULE PANEL The settings on the SCHEDULE panel determine which schedule categories the selected Note is included in. See Schedule Panel on page 704. Note/Callout Panel The NOTE panel is found in the Note Specification dialog, while the CALLOUT panel is found in the CALLOUT SPECIFICATION dialog. The NOTE and CALLOUT panels have numerous settings in common. See Notes, Note Types, and Note Schedules on page 533 and Callouts on page 521. Schedule The Schedule settings determine how and where the selected Note will be represented in a Note Schedule. These settings are not available for Callouts. See Notes, Note Types, and Note Schedules on page 533. 536 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Note/Callout Panel l Specify the Text associated with the selected Note that will display in the Note Schedule.   l Click the Insert button to the right of the Text field to choose from a list of special characters and text macros. See Text Macros on page 540.   l Click the Spell Check button to check the selected Note’s Text for errors. See Spell Check on page 517.   l Specify the Type of Note Schedule to associate the selected Note with. See Note Type Management Dialog on page 534.   l Click the New Note Type button to create a new type to choose from. See Note Types on page 534. Label By default, the Text Above Line for Notes is populated by the %simple_schedule_number% macro. See Schedule Number Format on page 689. l Type the Callout Label or Text Above Line, which displays inside the callout shape. This text is centered in the callout shape when no Text Below Line is specified.   l Type the Text Below Line for the bottom row, if desired. If Text Below Line is added, a line centered in the callout shape will separate this text from the Text Above Line.   l Click the Insert button to the right of either option to choose from a list of special characters and text macros. See Text Macros on page 540.   Shape    l Check Generate Shape from Schedule to use the callout shape set in specification dialog of the Note Schedule associated with the selected Note. See Labels Panel on page 697.   l Select a callout shape by clicking the radio button beside one of the options.   Size/Orientation l Check Generate Size from Schedule to set the Note’s callout size based settings in the Note Schedule Specification dialog.   l Uncheck Automatic to enable the Size field and specify a new value. When checked, the callout is sized so that it encompasses its Label. l When Generate Angles from Schedule is checked, you can specify the selected Note's shape below. Check this box to instead set the Note's Shape and Text Angles based on settings in the Note Schedule Specification dialog.   l Specify the Shape Angle of the callout shape. Does not affect the Ellipse, Capsule, or Rectangle shapes. l Specify the Text Angle of the text inside the callout shape. Check Automatic for the Text Angle to match the Shape Angle. Position Specify the X, Y, and Z Position of the selected Note relative to the origin. These settings are not available for Callouts. See 3D Drafting on page 13.   Preview As in many specification dialogs, a preview of the selected object displays on the right. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 537 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Text Styles 22.   Note: When the %simple_schedule_number% macro is used in a Note’s Label, the schedule number it reports will not be shown in this preview.   Text Styles In Chief Architect, a Text Style is a saved set of attributes that can be assigned to any object that displays text, such as Text, Callouts, Markers, Dimensions, Schedules, CAD objects, and object labels. A given Text Style can be assigned to objects: l By layer, in the Layer Display Options dialog;   l On the TEXT STYLE panel of various objects’ defaults dialogs;   l On the TEXT STYLE panel of some individual objects’ specification dialog.   This makes it easy to ensure that various objects display text with a consistent appearance.   Note: Because of its ability to use multiple attributes in the same object, Rich Text does not use Text Styles. See Rich Text Specification Dialog on page 500. You can create your own or edit existing Text Styles to suit your needs in the Text Style Defaults dialog. TEXT STYLE DEFAULTS Select Edit> Default Settings,  expand the Text, Callouts and Markers category, click on “Text Styles” and click the Edit button. The Saved Text Styles dialog will open, allowing you to select which Saved Text Style Defaults you would like to edit. See Multiple Saved Defaults on page 79. The Text Style Defaults dialog can also be accessed:   l From the Layer Display Options dialog. See Layer Display Options Dialog on page 179.   l By clicking the Text Style Defaults button, which can be added to your toolbars. See To add a button to a toolbar on page 132.   l By clicking the Define button on the TEXT STYLE panel of various objects specification dialogs.   TEXT STYLE PANEL The TEXT STYLE panel is found in various specification and defaults dialogs in the program.   The settings on this panel are also found in the Text Style Defaults dialog, where they affect all objects using that style rather than a single selected object.   538 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Text Styles Source of Text Style Specify where the selected object should draw its Text Style from. These options are not available in the Text Style Defaults dialog.   l Select Use Layer for Text Style to use the Text Style assigned to the layer that the selected text is located on.   l Select Use Text Style, then choose a style from the drop-down list to apply that style to the selected object, regardless of what layer it is on. When this is not selected, the name of the selected object’s Text Style displays here for reference.   l Select Use Custom Text Style to enable the settings below and customize the selected objects Text Style attributes.   l Check Use Default Text Style to use the default style for the selected object type, or uncheck this box to enable the settings below and define a custom style.   l The settings that follow are only editable when Use Custom Text Style is selected. When it is not selected, information about the Text Style that is assigned to the selected object displays for reference. Font l Select a font from the drop-down list.   l The text styles Bold, Underline, Italic, Strikeout, and Uppercase are available. Check any of the boxes to apply that style.   Character Height l Enter the Character Height in drawing units. This height is subject to the current drawing scale.   l Click the Scale button to open the Printed Size Input dialog. See Scaling Text on page 513.   539 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Text Macros l If the selected object was originally created in an older program version and had Legacy Compatible Size checked in that version, this check box will be available. If you uncheck the box and click OK, however, the option will be removed. See Character Size on page 496.   Options l Check Rotate with Plan to rotate text using the selected Text Style when Rotate Plan View is used. If unchecked, the text is unaffected when Rotate View is used. See Rotate Plan View on page 147. Rotate with Plan also affects text in a view sent to layout if the layout box is rotated. See CAD and Text in Layout on page 1337.   l Check Transparent to make text boxes using the selected Text Style transparent. When unchecked, text boxes have a solid fill the same color as your background color. Not available for objects that have FILL STYLE panels in their specification dialogs. See Colors Panel on page 98.   Text Color l When By Layer is checked, text uses the line color assigned to the layer that the object it is assigned to is located on. See Layer Attributes on page 177.   l Uncheck By Layer, then click the Color bar to select a different color. See Color Chooser/Select Color Dialog on page 203.   Preview of Text Style A preview of the Text Style currently assigned to the selected object displays here.   Object Preview In some specification dialogs, a preview of the selected object displays on the right. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22.   Text Macros Text macros insert dynamic information relevant to the current plan or layout file, or a selected object. Macros can be used to create customized object labels and Materials List formulas. See Creating User Defined Macros on page 1387. Macros can be inserted into Text objects as well as added to object labels, object information, and in the materials list. There are four categories of insertable text macro: l Global macros have information about the project, the plan or layout file, a room, and the date and time. They can also be used to insert special characters. l User Defined macros can include a wide range of values, including global and object specific information and text. They can also be written to perform calculations. See Creating User Defined Macros on page 1387.   l Object Specific macros have information specific to a selected object type and can be included in object information and labels. See Label Panel on page 700.   l Some Object Specific and User Defined macros can also be inserted into Materials List cells and used to create custom Materials List formulas. See Materials List Formulas on page 1320.   l Referenced Object macros can be inserted into text objects that have an arrow attached to another object. These macros report information about that object rather than the text. See Text Arrows on page 519 and Referenced Object Context on page 1391.   540 f Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Text Macros In layouts, macros can be used to add page numbers, drawing scale, and information to identify drawings can be inserted to improve organization and clarity.   To insert a macro 1. The Insert Macro button can be found on a variety of dialog panels where text can be specified.   2. When you click it, a menu of macros displays. Move your cursor over a menu item to view its submenu.   3. Select from the list of available macros. In this example Global> Time Date> Short Date (%date.short%) is used.   4. Depending on the context, some menu items may appear inactive; however, they can still be selected and inserted. 5. Click OK to close the dialog.   6. The text object displays the date rather than the macro formula.   As an alternative to creating and then inserting a custom macro, you can also type ruby macro code directly into a text object or label and it will be evaluated provided that it is placed between two percent signs. DESIGNER/CLIENT INFORMATION Information about the current project, the client it is drawn for, and the registered Chief Architect user working on the design can be inserted into text objects using macros. Some of this Designer and Client Information can also be included when exporting information to REScheck. See Export to REScheck on page 1240. To specify what information these macros report by default in all plan and layout files, open the Default Designer/Client Information dialog, which can be accessed through the Preferences dialog. See New Plans Panel on page 108. To specify what information these macros report in the current plan or layout file, select Tools> Designer/Client Information 541 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Text Macros Information about the file's designer can be entered on the DESIGNER INFORMATION panel of the dialog, while information about the client can be entered on the CLIENT INFORMATION panel. When entering new Designer or Client Information, begin by clicking the Clear Form button

Doors Chapter 15 Chief Architect comes with tools for creating a wide variety of interior and exterior doors. In addition, the library offers a large selection of specialty doors and doorways including hinged, sliding, pocket, bifold, and garage doors. Additional name-brand door catalogs are also available for download from our website, chiefarchitect.com. TOPICS Door Defaults 544 Door Tools 545 Displaying Doors 548 Editing Doors 551 Changing Door Swings 553 Special Doors 556 Door Specification Dialog 558 543 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Door Defaults Door Defaults There are several defaults dialogs for doors. Default Settings are accessed by selecting Edit> Default Settings . Click the arrow next to “Doors” to expand the category. Select a subheading and click the Edit button to open the defaults dialog associated with your selection: Door Defaults can also be accessed by double-clicking the Door Tools parent button or the Hinged Door or Sliding Door child button. Double-clicking the other Door Tools child buttons will open the defaults dialog for that particular door type.   The various Door Defaults in the list can be multiple-selected by holding down the Shift or Ctrl keys. See Shift and Ctrl Select on page 214.   The Door Defaults dialogs look nearly the same as the Door Specification dialog. See Door Specification Dialog on page 558. There are only a couple of differences: l Since default settings are specified here, “Use Default” is not an option for some settings as it is in the Door Specification dialog. l The Door Type cannot be changed in the Defaults dialogs. Because Hinged and Sliding Doors are often used in both interior and exterior applications, they have both Interior and Exterior Door Defaults. INTERIOR VS EXTERIOR DOORS Regardless of its Door Type or the tool used to create it, a door will be: l An Interior Door if it is created in a wall that separates two interior rooms; l An Exterior Door if it is created in a wall that separates an interior room from either an exterior room or the building’s exterior. See Room Types and Functions on page 415. This rule does not apply to doors placed from the Library or copied and pasted from one location to another, however. If, for example, you place a hinged door in an interior wall between two rooms and then paste a copy of that door in an exterior wall, the copy will remain an interior door. See Exterior and Interior Walls on page 351. 544 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Door Tools DYNAMIC DOOR DEFAULTS A variety of door default values are dynamic, including the Door Style, Casing, Lintel, Jamb, Hardware, Framing, and Rough Opening. When a dynamic default is changed, existing door using the default value are affected. See Dynamic Defaults on page 79. All Materials listed under “Doorway” on the MATERIALS panel are also dynamic. Materials assigned to doors and hardware items from the library, however, are listed separately and are dynamically linked to the “Interior Door”, “Exterior Door” and “Fixture Trim” and “Hardware” materials set in the Material Defaults dialog rather than the Door Defaults dialogs. See Material Defaults Dialog on page 1051.   DOOR FRAMING The default headers, trimmers, rough opening, and sill for doors can be defined in the Door Defaults dialogs. You can also specify an additional amount to cutout for door openings in concrete garage curbs and foundation walls. See Rough Opening Panel on page 572 and Framing Panel on page 573. The default header depths for different spans can be set in the Framing Defaults dialog. See Openings Panel on page 865. Door Tools To place a door, select the type you want from the Build> Door submenu. Move your mouse pointer over a wall section. When a preview outline can be seen, click to place a door at that location. The minimum initial size for doors varies by Door Type. For example, If there is room enough along the wall to fit a 12” (300 mm) wide Hinged Door, a preview outline will display and a door can be placed. Garage doors, in contrast, must initially be at least 6’ (1800 mm) wide. Doors can be placed in both straight and curved walls, as well as span across straight, collinear wall segments.   A newly created door inherits the settings in the Door Defaults dialog for its door type. Once created, doors can be edited in a variety of ways. See Door Defaults on page 544. Doors cannot be placed in a wall specified as Invisible or if the wall in question is on a locked layer. See Locking Layers on page 178. Once placed, any door may be changed into any other type of door in the Door Specification dialog. See General Panel on page 559. HINGED DOORS Select Build> Door> Hinged Door and click on a wall to place a hinged door at that location. Hinged doors have separate defaults for interior and exterior doors. By default, a hinged door becomes a double door when its width is four feet (1200 mm) or greater. The initial swing direction of a hinged door depends on the location of the mouse pointer relative to the wall when you click. The door will swing towards the side of the wall that you click nearest. The initial hinge side of a hinged door can be set by clicking to place the door and then holding the mouse button down rather than releasing it. Move the mouse toward the end of the door that you would like the hinges to be on: as the mouse pointer nears either end, the door preview’s hinge side will move to that end. You can also adjust the door’s swing direction in this manner. When the swing direction and hinge side are correct, release the mouse button. 545 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Door Tools DOORWAYS Select Build> Door> Doorway and click on a wall to place a doorway. Doorways are simply openings without a door and can be placed in interior and exterior walls, railings, and fences. You can assign a door from the library to a doorway if you wish. SLIDING DOORS Select Build> Door> Sliding Door and click on a wall to place a sliding door. Sliding doors have separate defaults for interior and exterior doors: interior sliding doors are typically solid while exterior sliding doors are Glass Panel doors. The initial opening side of a sliding door can be specified by moving the mouse pointer along the wall while the mouse button is still pressed.   POCKET DOORS Select Build> Door> Pocket Door and click on a wall where you want to place a pocket door. As with sliding doors, the initial opening side of a pocket door can be specified by moving the mouse pointer along the wall while the mouse button is still pressed.   By default, a pocket door becomes a double pocket door if its width is four feet  (1200 mm) or greater. BIFOLD DOORS Select Build> Door> Bifold Door and click on a wall where you want to place a bifold door. Like a hinged door, the initial opening side of a bifold door depends on the location of the mouse pointer relative to the wall when you click. The door will open towards the side of the wall that you click nearest. Similarly, the initial hinge side of a bifold door can be specified by moving the mouse pointer along the wall while the mouse button is still pressed.   By default, a bifold door becomes a double bifold if its width is greater than three feet (900 mm). GARAGE DOORS Select Build> Door> Garage Door and click on a wall to place a garage door. In plan view, dashed lines show the size and location of the garage door when open. Garage doors will build into a garage stem wall provided the room is designated as a garage before the door is inserted. See Room Types and Functions on page 415. FIXED DOOR Select Build> Door> Fixed Door and click on a wall to place a fixed door. 546 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Door Tools BARN DOOR Select Build> Door> Barn Door and click on a wall to place a surface mounted sliding door, sometimes referred to as a barn style door. SHOWER DOOR Select Build> Door> Shower Door and click on a wall to place a hinged glass slab shower door. Place a Shower Door in a Straight Glass Wall. See Wall Tools on page 347. THE DOORS & DOORWAYS LIBRARY CATALOG The Doors & Doorways library catalog can be accessed by selecting View> Library Browser and browsing to Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Architectural> Doors and Doorways. This catalog contains a variety of interior and exterior doors, as well as special entryways and wrapped openings. Entryways and wrapped openings are examples of Doorways, which are wall openings that do not have doors within them. To add a door to the Doorway, select a Door Type other than “Doorway” from the drop-down list in the Door Specification dialog. See General Panel on page 559. You can also select a door from the library and place it into a doorway in plan view or any 3D view. To place a library door in a doorway 1. Go to plan view or any 3D view. 2. Open the Library Browser. 3. Browse or search to find a door style that suits your needs. 4. Select the door in the Library Browser, then click on the doorway to place the selected door within it. If a door already exists, it is replaced. 5. Continue clicking other doorways as needed. CUSTOM DOORS AND DOORWAYS You can import or create custom doors and doorways and save them in your own library for use in future plans. See Symbol Objects on page 978.   You can also specify the Door Type associated with a custom door symbol saved in the library in its Symbol Specification dialog. See Options Panel on page 994.   547 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Displaying Doors Displaying Doors The display of doors, door labels, opening indicators, header lines, and casing is controlled in the Layer Display Options dialog. See Layer Display Options Dialog on page 179. Doors can only be placed in walls, so if a wall’s layer is turned off in plan view, any doors placed in that wall will not display, either. Doors can display independent of their containing walls in 3D views, however. See Displaying Walls on page 363. If the “Doors” layer is turned off, doors and their casing do not display but openings in the walls where they are located are visible. Along with the doors themselves, the display of a number of door components can also be controlled by layer: l Interior and exterior door casings are located on the “Casings, Exterior” and “Casings, Interior” layers and can display in all views. In plan view, the vertical side casings will be shown, but the horizontal top casing or lintel will not. If a door is recessed, the affected wall layers will adjust to accommodate the casing. l Window and door shutters are located on the "Shutters" layer and can display in all views. Shutters can also be set to Show Closed or open. See Shutters Panel on page 604. l When the “Opening Header Lines” layer is turned on in plan view, headers are represented by dashed lines within each door. These lines do not correspond to actual framing objects and cannot be selected. In addition, header framing members can be set to display. See Wall Framing on page 852.   l If a door is placed in a Garage room at a height where it extends into the stem wall or curb, a cutout in the concrete will display on the floor below. You can specify the cutout’s size and whether it displays in plan view in the Door Specification dialog. See Rough Opening Panel on page 572. IN PLAN VIEWS A door’s jamb, casing, and swing are all represented in plan view. If a door is recessed, the affected wall layers will adjust to accommodate the casing. A threshold line will display across a door opening in plan view when the door: l Is located in an exterior wall. See Exterior and Interior Walls on page 351. l Opens to an exterior room such as a Garage or Deck. See Room Types and Functions on page 415. l Is located between rooms with different floor heights. See Floor and Ceiling Platforms on page 428. 548 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Displaying Doors Doorways display dashed lines that represent the wall surface between the doorway and the ceiling. Other types of doors do not display these wall surface lines, however, you can specify that any door display them or not in its specification dialog. See Options Panel on page 561.   If an exterior door to a Garage room on Floor 1 extends into a Garage stem wall or curb on Floor 0, its location will be indicated on Floor 0. You can control the display of this concrete cutout in the Door Specification dialog. See Garages on page 716. When the “Opening Header Lines” layer is turned on in plan view, headers are represented by dashed lines within each door’s opening. These lines do not correspond to actual framing objects and cannot be selected. In addition, header framing members can be set to display. See Wall Framing on page 852.   The vertical casing on the sides of doors will display in plan view when the “Casings, Exterior” and “Casings, Interior” layers are turned on. See Casing Panel on page 563.   IN 3D VIEWS In addition to the components drawn in plan views, door hardware and millwork display in camera views. You can specify whether a selected door is shown open or closed in 3D views by clicking the Show Door Open in 3D and Show Door Closed in 3D edit buttons as well as in the Door Specification dialog. See Options Panel on page 561. If a door is set to display open in 3D, the angle of the open door can be changed using the edit handles in plan view. See Using the Edit Handles on page 551. You can specify whether an exterior door has a threshold in the Door Specification dialog. See Casing Panel on page 563. You can also specify whether window and door glass is opaque or transparent in the Rendering Technique Options dialog. When Opaque Window Glass is used, window and door glass uses the color specified for the active Rendering Technique. See Rendering Technique Options on page 1153.   OPENING INDICATORS Doors, windows and cabinet doors can all display opening indicator arrows in Vector Views. See Vector View on page 1150. To display an object's opening indicator arrows in a Vector View: l Turn on the “Opening Indicators” layer in the Layer Display Options dialog. l Make sure the object is set to Show its opening indicators in its specification dialog. See Opening Indicators Panel on page 570. 549 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Displaying Doors Opening indicators on a cabinet, window, and doors in a Vector View You can specify whether opening indicators point to the opening hinge side or the opening side in the General Plan Defaults dialog. See General Plan Defaults Dialog on page 92. DOOR LABELS Door labels display in floor plan and cross section/elevation views, centered on the doors they represent, when the “Doors, Labels” layer is turned on and use the Text Style assigned to their layer. See Label Panel on page 700. Automatic door labels indicate Width and Height. For example: l In U.S. Unit plans, the automatic label for a 3’-0” wide, 6’-8” high double hung window will read 3068. l In metric plans, the automatic label for a 900 mm wide, 2100 mm high double hung window will read 900x2100. If you prefer, you can use one of two other formats: Height/Width and Width Only. Label formats are specified in the Door Specification dialog or in the Door Defaults dialog if no schedule is present. See Labels Panel on page 697.   Customized labels  using text and Object Specific Text Macros as well as label position and orientation can also be specified in the Door Specification dialog. See Text Macros on page 540. IN THE MATERIALS LIST The materials associated with doors are listed under different Categories in the Materials List: l Doors - Lists door panels, handles, and hinges.   l Interior Trim - Lists interior casing and lintels as well as interior door jambs.   l Exterior Trim - Lists exterior casing, lintels, shutters. Exterior jambs and thresholds are also listed here.   As with other objects, there are a number of ways to control how, or whether, doors are included in the Materials List. See Organizing Materials Lists on page 1310.   You can add and edit information about a door’s accessories in the Door Specification dialog. See Components Panel on page 1330.   DOOR SCHEDULES The Door Schedule tool is set up to produce customizable door schedules as well as door labels that display schedule numbers. Any schedule, however, can be set up to include doors. See Schedules and Object Labels on page 681. In addition, any information about door casing and lintels can also be included in any schedule set up to include items in the Room and/or Molding categories. See Room Finish Schedules on page 447.   Hinge and Swing Side Hinge Side and Swing Side columns can be added to door schedules. See Columns to Include on page 689.   There are various methods for describing hinge side as well as door swing direction, or door hand. In Chief Architect, both are described from the perspective of someone standing on the exterior side of the door.   l The hinge side will be described as L if the hinges are on the left side of the door, as viewed from its exterior side. If the hinges are on the right side, they will be described as R. l The swing direction will be Out if the door swings towards the viewer on the exterior side. l The swing direction will be In if the door swings away from the viewer, towards the interior. Regardless of where they are located in a plan, all doors have an interior and an exterior side, as do the walls they are placed in. See Interior and Exterior Surfaces on page 386. 550 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Doors Editing Doors Before a door can be edited, it must be selected. To select a door, click it when the Select Objects tool or any of the Door Tools are active. Doors and/or windows can also be group selected and edited. See Selecting Objects on page 210. Blocked units are made up of individual doors and windows that have been grouped together to act as one object. You can create a blocked door unit or by creating a Mulled Unit composed of doors and/or windows.  See Mulled Units on page 583. Select a blocked unit by clicking on it in any view. To select a door that is a component of a blocked unit, click at the location of the component in question, then click the Select Next Object edit button. See Selecting Objects on page 210. USING THE EDIT HANDLES In plan view, click either of the two end handles and drag along the wall to change the width. The label showing the size updates as the handles are dragged. Click and drag the Move handle at the center to move the door along the wall it is placed in. Use the triangular Rotate handle to adjust the door’s swing. If door labels are set to display, they will each have a small square Move edit handle and a small rectangular Rotate handle. See Displaying Doors on page 548. In 3D views, a selected door has five edit handles: the Move handle at the center and a Resize handle on each edge.  Click and drag an edge handle to resize the door. In cross section/elevation views, door labels will also display when their layer is turned on, and will have the same edit handles as in plan view. Using the edit handles, doors resize according to the currently active Edit Behavior . See Defaults, Preferences, and Edit Behaviors on page 206.   A door or window moved against an intersecting wall temporarily stops when the casing meets the intersecting wall. You can continue to drag and it resumes movement past the intersecting wall. IN THE SPECIFICATION DIALOG The most precise method of editing a door or group of doors is to use the Door Specification dialog. Door type, size, casing, materials, shape, and more can all be specified in this dialog. See Door Specification Dialog on page 558. You can use the Object Painter tools to assign the properties of one door to other doors. See Matching Properties on page 282.   You can also apply a variety of door attributes to multiple doors at once using Style Palettes. See Style Palettes on page 279.   USING THE EDIT TOOLS A selected door or doors can be edited in a variety of ways using the buttons on the Edit Toolbar. See The Edit Toolbar on page 130. Change Opening/Hinge Side changes the side of the door that its hinges are on. See Changing Door Swings on page 553. 551 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Doors Change Swing Side changes which direction the selected door swings. Show Door Open in 3D or Show Door Closed in 3D controls the selected door’s appearance in 3D views. See In 3D Views on page 549. Gable Over Door/Window creates a gable over the selected door(s) the next time the roof is rebuilt. See Gable/Roof Lines on page 830. Make Mulled Unit can be used to block multiple selected doors and/or windows into a single unit, while Explode Mulled Unit breaks a mulled unit into its individual components. See Mulled Units on page 583. USING DIMENSIONS Like various other objects, doors can be moved using dimensions. See Moving Objects Using Dimensions on page 483. You can specify how doors and windows are located by dimensions in the Dimension Defaults dialog. Dimensions can be set to locate the centers, sides, casing, and/or rough openings of doors and windows, or you can choose to not locate them at all. See Locate Manual Panel on page 454.   Once a dimension line has been drawn, you  can move or add its extension lines to locate non-default locations on a door. See Editing Extension Lines on page 478. CENTERING DOORS The Center Object edit button allows you to center a selected door along a wall within a room or relative to a cabinet or window. See Center Object on page 250. To center a door along a wall 1. Select a door or combination of windows and doors in plan view. 2. Click the Center Object edit button then choose from one of the following options: l Click near a wall inside a room to center the door along that wall in that room. l Click outside the house (on the exterior room) near an exterior wall to center the door along an exterior wall. DOOR STYLE AND PANELS There are a number of Door Styles available for use, including Slab, basic Panel, and Louvered. In addition, a selection of door panel symbols is available in the Library. See Placing Library Objects on page 972. By default, most door types are either single or double, depending on their width. You can specify how many panels a selected door has in the Door Specification dialog. See Options Panel on page 561.   DOOR SIDES Like walls, all doors have two sides: an interior side and an exterior side. This is the case even for doors placed in interior walls. See Exterior and Interior Walls on page 351.   By default, the interior side of the door will face the direction that the door swings to open. If you prefer, you can specify that the interior side face the opposite direction in the Door Specification dialog. See General Panel on page 559.   You can specify the materials for the two sides separately in the Door Specification dialog. See Materials Panel on page 575.   552 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Changing Door Swings You can also specify different casing for the interior and exterior sides of exterior doors - that is, doors placed in exterior walls or walls defining a Garage or other exterior room type. See Room Types and Functions on page 415.   DOOR CASING Doors typically feature casing, or trim, on both sides of the wall opening. See Moldings / / Profiles / Rails / Panels on page 927.   l By default, interior doors use the same casing profile on both sides. You can specify that both sides be edited separately in the Door Specification dialog. See General Panel on page 559.   l Exterior doors can have different casing profiles on their interior and exterior sides.   The default casing for interior and exterior doors is a basic rectangular stock profile. You can specify a door’s casing profiles  in the Door Specification dialog, or you can choose to suppress casing altogether. See Casing Panel on page 563.   A separate molding profile can be specified for the lintel, or top horizontal molding. See Lintel Panel on page 565.   Exterior and interior door casing will display in all views when the “Casings, Exterior” and “Casings, Interior” layers are turned on. In plan view, only the vertical side casing is shown.   DOOR HARDWARE Handles, locks, and hinges can be assigned to a door in the Door Specification dialog. See Hardware Panel on page 569. In 3D views, handles and locks can also be applied directly from the Library Browser. Select a hardware item in the library, then click on the door to apply it to that side of the door. See Inserted Objects on page 973.   Changing Door Swings Door swing direction and hinge side can be changed using the edit handles and the Change Opening/Hinge Side and Change Swing Side edit buttons. Swing and hinge side can also be applied from one door to another using the Match Properties tool. See Matching Properties on page 282.   Note: If the door is set to draw closed, the swing as it appears in plan view has no effect on the 3D view. See Options Panel on page 561. The Change Opening/Hinge Side edit button is available for all doors except doors with multiple panels and garage doors. The Change Swing Side edit button is available for all doors except pocket doors. HINGED DOORS In addition to using the edit buttons, Hinged Doors and Shower Doors’ hinge side and swing direction can be changed using the triangular Rotate edit handle. To adjust the angle of swing: 1. In plan view, select the door and grab the triangular handle. 2. Drag to change the amount of swing. 553 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Changing Door Swings 3. Release the mouse. If you drag near the closed position, the door snaps to a closed position. To change the swing using edit handles: 1. In plan view, select the door and grab the triangular edit handle. 2. Drag the pointer along the path of the new arc to change the hinge side and/or swing direction. 3. Release the mouse. You can specify a Double Hinged Door to swing from its center in the Door Specification dialog. See Options Panel on page 561. To change the swing using edit buttons: 1. In plan view, select the door. 2. To change the hinge side, click the Change Opening/Hinge Side edit button. 554 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Changing Door Swings 3. To change the swing direction, click the Change Swing Side edit button. You can also specify a Hinged Door to swing in both directions in the Door Specification dialog. See Options Panel on page 561. SLIDING TYPE DOORS Sliding, Pocket, Bifold, and Barn Doors are types of sliding door. Similar to hinged doors, the Opening/Hinge and Swing sides of a Sliding, Pocket, Bifold, or Barn Door can be changed by clicking and dragging its diamond-shaped edit handle. To change the side of a Sliding, Pocket, Bifold or Barn door that opens, select the door and click the Change Opening/Hinge Side edit button. Note: For a Pocket Door to change Opening Side, there must be enough room for the entire door to fit in the wall on that side. To flip the fixed and moving sides of the door, click the Change Swing Side edit button. GARAGE DOORS To change the side of a garage door that it faces, select it and click the Change Swing Side edit button. Unlike other door types, the Swing side of a garage door cannot be modified using the edit handles. 555 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Special Doors IN DOOR SCHEDULES Both Hinge Side and Swing can be included in Door Schedules. See Columns to Include on page 689.   Special Doors A variety of special doors and doorways can be created in Chief Architect. TRANSOMS ABOVE DOORS Transom windows above doors are created the same as other stacked windows. See Grouped Windows on page 582. WRAPPED OPENINGS Wrapped openings of various shapes are available in the Doors & Doorways Library.   You can also create a wrapped opening by unchecking Use Interior Casing and/or Use Exterior Casing in a Doorway’s Door Specification dialog. See Casing Panel on page 563. If base molding is present, it will wrap around the opening. RECESSED DOORS A door placed in a brick or stone wall is often recessed into the wall’s exterior. In the illustration below, the door to the right is recessed, so the brick wraps the opening. The door on the left is not recessed, so the casing is outside the brick.   You can specify a door as recessed in the Door Specification dialog. See Options Panel on page 561.   BLOCKED DOORS AND WINDOWS Combinations of doors and windows can be blocked. Blocked units are mulled together and can be copied together as a unit. Blocked units containing doors can be treated as either windows or doors for materials list and schedule generation. See Mulled Units on page 583.   OPENINGS IN RAILINGS Use the Doorway tool to open a railing for a stairway or other access. 556 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Special Doors To open a railing across an entire section, resize the doorway’s Width so that it is greater than the length of the railing in the Door Specification dialog. The opening resizes to the maximum width possible for that space. See General Panel on page 559. To add a gate, specify the doorway’s Door Type as a Door, then choose an appropriate gate as the Door Style. A selection of gates is available in the Fences & Railings library folder. See Placing Library Objects on page 972.   CREATING A DOORWAY WITH A RAILING When a railing is specified as No Room Def, it can be positioned within a Doorway . To create a doorway with railing 1. Place a Doorway at the desired location in your plan. 2. Select Build> Railing and Deck> Straight Railing , then click and drag to draw a railing parallel to the wall with the doorway. 3. Select the railing, then use the Resize edit handles to adjust the length of the railing as needed. See Using the Edit Handles on page 216. 4. With the railing selected, click the Open Object edit button. 5. On the GENERAL panel of the Railing Specification dialog, check No Room Def and click OK. See General Panel on page 392. 6. With the railing still selected, Ctrl + drag it into position within the doorway. See To move an object freely on page 244. 557 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Door Specification Dialog PLACING A GABLE OVER A DOOR Click the Gable Over Door/Window edit button to produce a gable roof over the selected door(s) the next time automatic roofs are built. See Gable/Roof Lines on page 830. You can manually edit or delete this gable line at any time. Your changes take effect when the automatic roofs are rebuilt. This can also be used with group selected doors. CUSTOM MUNTINS Like windows, doors that are specified as “Glass” can have custom muntins. Custom muntins are created from CAD lines. See Custom Muntins on page 590.   Door Specification Dialog To open the Interior or Exterior Door Specification dialog, select a door or group of doors and click the Open Object edit button or double-click on a door using the Select Objects or any Door tool. Whether a selected door is Interior or Exterior depends on where it is placed. See Interior vs Exterior Doors on page 544. You can also open the specification dialog for the door(s) associated with a schedule row. See Open Row Object(s) on page 686. The Lintel, Framing, and Energy Values panels are also found in the Window Specification dialog. In addition, the Frame panel for windows is similar to the Jamb panel for doors. See Window Specification Dialog on page 591. The Door Specification dialog has the following panels: 558 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Door Specification Dialog GENERAL PANEL General l Door Style - Select Slab, Glass Slab, Panel, Glass Panel, Louvered, or Glass Louver from the drop-down list; select a style from the Library; or choose “Use Default” to use the default door style set in the Door Defaults dialog. See Door Defaults on page 544. l Select “Library” from the drop-down list or click the Library button to choose a door symbol from the library. Once a library door is selected, its name is added to the Door Style list. See Select Library Object Dialog on page 974. l Specify the Door Type as Doorway, Hinged, Sliding, Pocket, Bifold, Garage, Fixed, Barn, or Shower. In the Door Defaults dialogs, the Door Type cannot be changed. l Specify the Swing Angle of the selected door in plan view, between 0° and 180°. An angle of 0° displays the door as closed and an angle of 180° displays it as wide open. The Swing Angle for Bifold doors and double doors that swing from the center can be no more than 90°. The Swing Angle also affects the door’s appearance in 3D views if Draw Closed is unchecked on the OPTIONS panel. See Options Panel on page 561. Size and Position   Specify the Size and Position of the selected door. 559 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Door Specification Dialog l Specify the Width, Height, and Thickness of the door. These values do not include the jamb unless Door Size Includes Jamb is selected on the JAMB panel. l Select the Elevation Reference from the drop-down list. This determines where the next two settings are measured from and also affects their labels. l Specify the height to Top, measured from the selected Elevation Reference to the top of the door frame. l Specify the height to Bottom, measured from the selected Elevation Reference to the bottom of the door frame. Panel Size l When Automatic is checked, the door panel's Height is the door height specified above minus the Bottom Offset and will update if changes are made to either of these values or the Elevation Reference. Uncheck this box and specify a panel Height that will not be affected if those settings change. l Specify the Bottom Offset, which is the gap between the bottom of the door panel and the floor. l When From Floor Finish is checked, the Bottom Offset is measured from the surface of the floor finish. Uncheck this box to instead measure the offset from the top of the subfloor. Sliding Doors   The Sliding Doors settings are available for Slider, Pocket, and Barn Doors. l Specify the Side and Top Overhang values, which control how much the selected door extends past its wall opening. Only available for Barn Doors. l Specify the Offset from Wall, which is how far the selected door is offset from its default location. Slider and Pocket Doors are centered in the wall’s Main Layer by default, while Barn Doors are positioned against the wall surface. Panel Frame Widths Specify the dimensions of the selected door’s rails and stiles. Only available for Glass, Panel, and Louvered doors.   l Specify the Width of the stiles and top rail. Uncheck Uniform to specify separate values for the Left, Right, and Top of the frame, or leave it checked to use the same value for all three. l Specify the height of the Bottom rail. Louvers l Specify the Size, or vertical height, of the selected door’s louvers. Only available for Louvered and Glass Louvered doors. l By default, louvers face the direction that the door swings. Check Reverse Direction to reverse the direction that they face. Options l Check Reverse Interior/Exterior to reverse the two sides of the selected door so that they face the opposite direction. Only available when a door symbol from the Library is specified as the Door Style. See Door Sides on page 552. 560 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Door Specification Dialog l Check Separate Trim and Materials for Each Side to specify the casing, lintels, and all materials for each side of the selected interior door independently. When unchecked, the two sides of the door use the same trim and materials. Only available when the selected door is placed in an interior wall. See Exterior and Interior Walls on page 351. Preview A preview of the door displays on the right side of the dialog box. A label indicates which side of the door is its Interior and which is its Exterior. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22. OPTIONS PANEL Door Panels   Specify the number of Door Panels or sections that the selected door has.  See Door Style and Panels on page 552. l Select Single Door Only to force the selected hinged, pocket or bifold door to be a single door, regardless of its width. l Select Double Door Only to force the selected hinged, pocket or bifold door to be a double door, regardless of its width. l Select Calculate From Width to use the program defaults. Hinged and pocket doors default to Single Door when less than four feet (1200 mm) wide; bifold doors do so when less than three feet (900 mm) wide. If the width is greater than this, Double Door is the default. Note: The Calculate From Width defaults are not editable. l Select Custom, then specify the number of panels on the Left and/or Right door components. Only available for sliding, pocket, and bifold doors.   l For a selected Garage Door, specify the number of Vertical Panels. 561 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Door Specification Dialog l When All Glass is unchecked, only the third panel from the bottom the door is a glass panel: the rest are solid panels. Check this box to make all of the panels glass. The number and style of the lites and the Muntin Width can be specified on the LITES panel. Plan Display The Plan Display settings control the display of dashed wall surface lines above the door in plan view. See In Plan Views on page 548.   l Select Automatic to display wall surface lines only when the selected door is a Doorway. l Select Show Top Edge to display wall surface lines regardless of the door type. l Select Hide Top Edge to not show wall surface lines regardless of door type. 3D Display Specify whether the selected door is shown open or closed in 3D and cross section/elevation views. l If Show Open is selected, the Swing Angle set on the General Panel on page 559 is used. Door Swing Specify how the selected door swings. Most options here are only available when the selected Hinged or Pocket door is a Double Door. Not available for Bifold, Slider or Garage doors. See Changing Door Swings on page 553.   l Check Both Doors Swing to allow both sides of a Double Door to swing. l Check Left Swing Only or Right Swing Only to allow only the left or right side of a Double Door to swing. l Check Swings from Center to create a Double Door with hinges at the center rather than at the outside edges. l Check Swings Both Directions to allow a door or both sides of a Double Door to swing both directions. Safety The Safety settings affect how the selected door is listed in the Door Schedule. See Schedules and Object Labels on page 681.   l Check Tempered Glass to specify the selected door as having tempered glass.   l Check Fire Door to specify the selected door as being a fire door.   Recessed Into Wall The Recessed into Wall options allow you to recess the selected door’s jamb into a wall, away from the exterior surface. This setting also affects the exterior casing and lintel, if used. Only available if the door is placed in a multi-layered wall. See Wall Type Definitions on page 384.   l Check Recessed to activate the settings that follow.   Not Recessed 562 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Door Specification Dialog l Select To Main Layer to recess the door to the wall’s Main Layer. Recessed to Main Layer l Select To Sheathing Layer to recess the door to the wall’s sheathing layer. Recessed to Sheathing Layer In Curved Wall Specify whether a door placed in a curved wall is Straight or Curved. This setting affects both the frame and the door panel. Slider, Pocket, and Barn Doors are specified as Curved automatically and cannot be changed. See Drawing Curved Walls on page 360. Plinth Blocks Add an Interior Plinth Block and/or Exterior Plinth Block to the selected door. Plinth blocks do not display in 3D views, but are counted in the Materials List. Preview A preview of the door displays on the right side of the dialog box. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22.   CASING PANEL The CASING panel is also found in the Window and Mulled Unit Specification dialogs. See Window Specification Dialog on page 591. By default, interior and exterior casing is suppressed for doorways placed into railings: including solid railings and railing pony walls.   563 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Door Specification Dialog Use Interior Casing When this box is unchecked, no casing is used and the settings that follow are disabled.   l Casing Profile - Click the Library button to select a molding profile for the casing. A preview of the casing profile displays to the right. See Select Library Object Dialog on page 974.   l Click the Clear button to remove a selected casing profile from the door. When no profile from the library is selected, a basic rectangular stock profile is used.   l Specify the Width of the selected casing.   l Define the Depth of the selected casing, as measured from the back to the front of the casing profile.   l Define the Reveal, which is the distance between the inside edge of the door or window frame and the inside edge of the casing. Use Exterior Casing Check this box to enable the settings that follow, then specify the exterior casing for the selected door(s) These settings are the same as those for the Interior Casing, and are not available for doors in interior walls unless Separate Trim and Materials on Each Side is checked on the GENERAL panel. See General Panel on page 559. Sill/Threshold Uncheck this box to prevent a sill from being generated under the door. Not available for windows. See Displaying Doors on page 548. Double Wall Options These options affect doors and windows placed in a Double Wall. See Double Walls on page 382.   564 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Door Specification Dialog l Select Through to create a single jamb running through both Double Walls. This option is selected by default.   l If Enlarged is selected, casing is created only on the wall the door is inserted in. The opening on the other wall is enlarged to accommodate the casing.   l Select Double to place a second door in the Double Wall opposite the selected door. This second door cannot be selected. Casing is produced as with the Through type window.   l Select Not Through to place the door in one wall with no corresponding opening in the other wall.   Curved Wall Casing These settings are enabled if the selected door or window is located in a curved wall. See Drawing Curved Walls on page 360.   l Door and window casing and jamb can be constructed three ways in curved walls:   l Straight - Both the door and casing are straight. This can be used where the wall’s curvature is not too sharp and the opening is not too wide. Not available for Sliding, Pocket, or Barn Doors. l Radial - A vertical surface that would be perpendicular to a straight wall has its plane pass through the wall's center of curvature. l Parallel - A vertical surface that would be perpendicular to a straight wall remains parallel to the line from the wall center through the opening center. Preview A preview of the door displays on the right side of the dialog box. If casing is not specified for a Doorway or Passthrough, the Show Wall option will be toggled on automatically. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22. LINTEL PANEL The settings on the LINTEL panel allow you to assign a lintel: a top molding that meets the side casing using a butt joint instead of a mitered joint.   The LINTEL panel is also found in the Window and Mulled Unit Specification dialogs. See Window Specification Dialog on page 591.   The profiles and materials of door and window lintels can be included in Room Finish Schedules. See The Schedule Tools on page 682. 565 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Door Specification Dialog Use Interior Lintel Check Use Interior Lintel to enable the settings that follow, then specify the lintel applied to the interior side of the selected door(s) using these settings. When this box is unchecked, no lintel is used.   l Lintel Profile - Click the Library button to select a molding profile for the lintel. A preview of the selected profile displays to the right. See Select Library Object Dialog on page 974. l Click the Clear button to remove a selected lintel profile from the door. l Specify the Width of the lintel. This value is independent of the casing’s width; however, the lintel does inherit its depth from the casing. l Specify how far to Extend the lintel past the outside edges of the casing on each side. l Check Wrap to wrap the lintel profile back toward the wall. Use Exterior Lintel Check Use Exterior Lintel to enable the settings that follow, then specify the exterior lintel for the selected door(s) using these settings. These settings are the same as those for the Interior Lintel, and are not available for doors in interior walls unless Use Exterior Trim and Materials is checked on the GENERAL panel. See General Panel on page 559.   Preview A preview of the door displays on the right side of the dialog box. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22.   LITES PANEL The settings on the LITES panel of the Door Specification dialogs are only available when the selected door is specified as a Glass door on the General Panel on page 559. These settings are also found on the LITES panel of the Window Specification dialog. See Lites Panel on page 599.   JAMB PANEL The settings on the JAMB panel are similar to those on the FRAME panel of the Window Specification dialog. See Frame Panel on page 598.   By default, Has Jamb is unchecked for doorways placed into railings: including solid railings and railing pony walls.   566 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Door Specification Dialog Has Jamb Check Has Jamb to enable the settings that follow, then specify the attributes of the selected door’s jamb using those settings. The jamb is not included in the door’s size, which is set on the General Panel on page 559.   l Specify the Positioning of the door. These settings affect what the door's Size settings on the GENERAL panel are describing; however, switching these settings does not affect the Size values: o Select Door Size Includes Jamb to specify size as a total of the door panel plus jamb width. o Select Door Size Excludes Jamb to specify the size of the door panel only. l These values only affect the door's specified size when Door Size Includes Jamb is selected, above: o Specify the Sides Width, which is the thickness of the pieces of the door jamb that display in plan view. This value is subtracted from the "pocket" side rough opening for Pocket Doors when wall framing is generated. See Pocket Doors on page 546. o Specify the Top Width, which is the thickness of the top vertical piece of the door jamb. l Uncheck Fit Jamb to Wall to specify the Depth and Inset of the selected door’s jamb. When this box is checked, the jamb Depth automatically extends from the Recessed Into Wall layer to the wall’s inside surface with an Inset of 0”. The Recessed Into Wall layer is specified on the OPTIONS panel of this dialog. o Specify the Depth of the door jamb from front to back. o Specify the jamb’s Inset, which is measured from the Recessed Into Wall layer and moves the door jamb towards its interior side. If used, the casing and lintel are not affected by this setting. Preview A preview of the door displays on the right side of the dialog box. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22.   ARCH PANEL The settings on the ARCH panel are also found in the Window Specification dialog; however, it is not available for window symbols, and its settings are not available if a selected window has been modified using the SHAPE panel. See Shape Panel on page 601.   567 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Door Specification Dialog Arch Define the style and size of the Arch.   l Select a Type of arch from the drop-down list.   l Specify the Height of the arch, as measured from the base of the arch to the top of the door. Not available for Round Top and Octagonal Arches.   l The Radius can also be defined for Tudor and Double Arches. Options Define the orientation of the arch. l Check Reflect Vertically to reflect the arch, top to bottom. This option cannot be used if a Sill is specified, and is typically used with windows rather than doors. See Sill Panel on page 596.   l Select Full Arch to produce an arch with the apex at the door’s center.   l Select Left Arch to produce an arch with the apex on the door’s right side.   l Select Right Arch to produce an arch with the apex on the door’s left side.   568 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Door Specification Dialog Note: The Left and Right settings here on this panel refer to the door or window as viewed from its exterior. Preview A preview of the door displays on the right side of the dialog box. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22.   HARDWARE PANEL Many of the settings on the HARDWARE panel are Dynamic Defaults: if “Use Default” is selected, the setting in the Door Defaults dialog for the selected door’s Type is used. See Dynamic Defaults on page 79. Handles . l Select an Interior Handle and/or Exterior Handle from the drop-down lists. Select “Library” or click the Library button to select a handle from the library. See Select Library Object Dialog on page 974. l When a handle from the Library is selected, you can click the Edit button to customize its size and angle. See Hardware Size/Orientation Dialog on page 659. l Specify the location of the door handles In From Door Edge. l Specify the location of the door handles Up From Bottom. Locks l Select an Interior Lock and/or Exterior Lock from the drop-down lists. Select “Library” or click the Library button to select a lock from the library. 569 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Door Specification Dialog l When a lock from the Library is selected, you can click the Edit button to customize its size and angle. See Hardware Size/Orientation Dialog on page 659. l Specify the location of the door locks Up From Bottom. The locks use the same In From Door Edge value as the handles. To use the same handle and lock on both sides of a door, select “Match Interior” as the Exterior option. Hinges Only Hinged and Bifold doors receive hinges. l Select a style of Hinges from the drop-down list. Select “Library” or click the Library button to select a hinge style from the library. l Specify the distance In From Top/Bottom of the door to the center of the top and bottom hinges. Note: For hinges to look right, it is best to have at least a 1/4" (6 mm) reveal for the interior, or hinge side, door casing. l Specify the Number of Hinges on the selected door. Interior hinged doors and bifold doors typically have two hinges while exterior hinged doors have three. Sliding Tracks Only available when a Barn Door is selected. l Select a Sliding Track from the drop-down list. Select “Library” or click the Library button to select a track from the library. See Select Library Object Dialog on page 974. l Specify the track’s Height Above Door. l Select a style of Hangers from the drop-down list. Select “Library” or click the Library button to select a hanger from the library. l Specify the distance In From Sides of the door to the center of the outermost hangers. l Specify the number of Hangers to be evenly spaced along the door. Options Check Hardware on Fixed Section to include handles, locks, and hinges on the fixed side of a double Hinged door. Only available for Double Doors with Left or Right Swing Only selected. See Options Panel on page 561.   Preview A preview of the door displays on the right side of the dialog box. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22. SHUTTERS PANEL The settings on the SHUTTERS panel of the Door Specification dialogs are also found on the Shutters panel of the Window Specification dialog. See Shutters Panel on page 570.   OPENING INDICATORS PANEL The settings on the OPENING INDICATORS panel control the appearance of the selected hinged or sliding door's opening indicator in camera views using the Vector View Rendering Technique. These settings are also available for windows and 570 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Door Specification Dialog cabinets. See Opening Indicators on page 549. Opening Indicators Specify whether the selected door's opening indicators display. Sliding Indicator Style Available for Sliding, Pocket, Barn, and Garage doors, as well as Single Hung, Double Hung, and Sliding windows. Sliding indicator arrows display centered over all movable door panel(s) or window component(s).   l Select Fixed Length, then specify the desired Length of the indicator arrow in the text field. l Select Relative Length for an indicator arrow sized relative to the movable component it is drawn over. l Specify the Inset from Edge, which is the distance of each end of the indicator arrow line from the adjacent edge of the associated door panel or window component. If a panel or component is not wide or tall enough to accommodate the Inset distance on both ends of the arrow line, this value will be ignored and an arrow 10" (250 mm) long will be used.   l Specify the Horizontal Offset, which allows you to offset the arrow line to the right or left using a positive or negative value.   l Specify the Vertical Offset, which allows you to offset the arrow line upwards or downwards using a positive or negative value. Preview A preview of the door displays on the right side of the dialog box. Opening indicators only display in Vector Views. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22. 571 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Door Specification Dialog ROUGH OPENING PANEL Rough Opening l The Total Width, Total Height and the Header Bottom Height are reported here for reference. l  Specify the Behavior used to define the rough opening:   o When Additional Space is selected, the rough opening is equal to the specified size of the door or window plus additional space, specified below.   o When Clearance Gap is selected, the rough opening for doors is equal to the specified size of the door plus the thickness of its jamb plus the values specified below. For windows, the rough opening is equal to the specified size plus the values set below.   l When Additional Space is the selected Behavior: o Specify the total Additional Width added to the width of the window frame or that of the door, not including jamb. o Specify the total Additional Height added to the height of the window frame or that of the door, not including jamb. If the selected opening at floor level, the bottom of the rough opening will be at the height of the subfloor. l When Clearance Gap is the selected Behavior: l Specify the Side Clearance, which is the space on each side of the window frame or door jamb, between it and the adjacent trimmers. l Specify the Top Clearance, which is the space above the window frame or door jamb, between it and the header or wall top plate. l Specify the Bottom Clearance, which is the space below the window frame or door jamb, between it and the sill, bottom plate, or subfloor. Add for Concrete Cutout l Specify the amount to add to Each Side of the door opening when the upper part of the door is in a framed wall and the lower part is located in a concrete or masonry wall, stem wall, or garage curb. See Wall Type Definitions on page 384. 572 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Door Specification Dialog l Uncheck Show in Plan to suppress the display of the concrete cutout in plan views. A concrete cutout will only display in plan views if it is located in a garage curb. See In Plan Views on page 548. FRAMING PANEL The settings on the FRAMING panel control how the selected door or doors is framed. A similar panel is also found in the Window Specification dialog. See Window Specification Dialog on page 591.   Chief Architect is dependent upon user input and does not calculate loads or perform structural analysis. Always consult your local building authorities and contact a licensed engineer for structural calculations. Header Specify the characteristics of the selected door’s header. See Headers on page 852.   l Uncheck Include Header to prevent a structural header from generating when wall framing is created. When this box is checked, a header as defined below is generated; when it is unchecked, a single, non-structural, horizontal framing member of the same type as the wall studs is created above the door opening.   l Select the header’s framing member Type from the drop-down list. See Structure Types on page 886.   l When Automatic is checked, the program will confirm that the Type selected above agrees with the framing material used by the wall, and will generate a different header Type if it does not. The Type that will be generated is reported in parentheses for reference. When unchecked, the specified Type is used regardless of the wall’s structural material.   l Specify the Thickness of each header framing member.   573 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Door Specification Dialog l Specify the Count, which is the number of the framing members used to create the header. Up to 10 header boards can be specified, but only those that fit within the wall’s framing layer will be generated when wall framing is created.   l Specify the vertical Depth of the header. This value does not include the top and bottom chords of a Box Header.   l In the Door and Window Defaults dialogs, an additional Calculate from Width check box is available. When checked, the header Depth is automatically calculated based on settings in the Framing Defaults dialog and the door’s current width. See Openings Panel on page 865.   l When Evenly Spaced is checked, the boards that comprise the header are evenly spaced within the wall's framing layer. Uncheck this box to specify the spacing of the header boards, below.   l When Evenly Spaced is unchecked, specify the Spacing of the vertical boards that comprise the header.   l Check Box Header to add horizontal top and bottom rails above and below the vertical rails. These horizontal boards are not included in the header Depth.  See Headers on page 852.   l Specify the attributes of the Header Label for the selected door’s headers. See Framing Labels on page 879.   Header Placement Specify where the selected door's header is positioned within the wall assembly. The defaults for these values are set in the Door Defaults dialogs. See Headers on page 852.   l Depth Placement - A header that does not span the full thickness of the wall's framing layer can be Flush Against Exterior Edge of that layer, or Flush Against Interior Edge.   l Vertical Placement - A header may be positioned directly above the Top of Opening, just above the Rough Opening, or at the Top of Wall, just below the wall's bottom top plate. Adjacent Openings These options are only available when Top of Wall is selected for the Vertical Header Placement, above.   l Check Combine Headers to have any doors and/or windows close to the selected opening share the same header. In addition to being closely positioned, the other openings must have the same header Depth and have Top of Wall selected. Not all openings must have this box checked, however. l Specify the Maximum Combine Distance, which is the largest distance between openings that will allow them to share a header. Supports Specify the number of Trimmers and King Studs to be generated on each side of the selected door.   Sills When the bottom of a door is raised sufficiently off the floor, it will require a sill as part of its framing.   l Specify the Bottom Sill Thickness, which is the vertical thickness of the sill board.   l Check Double Bottom Sill to generate two bottom sill members of the specified thickness instead of one.   l Check Include Top Sill to include a sill board across the top of the Rough Opening. If Top of Opening is selected as the header's Vertical Placement, the header will be positioned on top of the sill.   l Specify the Top Sill Thickness.   l Check Double Top Sill to generate two top sill members of the specified thickness instead of one. 574 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Door Specification Dialog ENERGY VALUES PANEL The settings on the ENERGY VALUES panel are also found on the panel of the same name in the Window Specification dialog. See Energy Values Panel on page 606.   LAYER PANEL The LAYER panel is available for a variety of different objects. For more information, see Layer Panel on page 186. MATERIALS PANEL The MATERIALS panel is available for a variety of objects throughout the program. For more information, see Materials Panel on page 1055. LABEL PANEL Door labels display in plan view and cross section/elevation views when the “Doors, Labels” is turned on and use the Text Style assigned to that layer. See Door Labels on page 550. For information about the settings on this panel, see Label Panel on page 700. COMPONENTS PANEL The information on the COMPONENTS panel can be used in the materials list. For more information, see Components Panel on page 1330.   OBJECT INFORMATION PANEL The information entered on the OBJECT INFORMATION panel can be used in schedules and the materials list. For more information, see Object Information Panel on page 1331.   SCHEDULE PANEL The settings on the SCHEDULE panel determine which schedule categories the selected door is included in. See Schedule Panel on page 704. MANUFACTURER PANEL The MANUFACTURER panel provides contact information for the selected door’s manufacturer. Only available for doors from Manufacturer library catalogs. See Manufacturer Catalogs on page 961.   575

Windows Chapter 16 Chief Architect can model a wide variety of windows. Fixed glass, hung, casement, sliding, awning, hopper, and louver window styles can all be created with the standard Window tool. The shape of a window can be angled or made into a round top or other arch styles. Chief Architect can create bay, box, and bow windows with a single click. In addition, the library contains many mulled window combinations and additional name-brand door catalogs are also available for download from our website, chiefarchitect.com. Once windows have been placed in the model, the program can automatically generate a window schedule. See The Schedule Tools on page 682.   TOPICS Window Defaults 577 Window Tools 577 Special Windows 579 Grouped Windows 582 Mulled Units 583 Window Levels 585 Displaying Windows 586 Editing Windows 588 Custom Muntins 590 Window Specification Dialog 591 Bay, Box, and Bow Windows 608 Bay, Box, Bow Windows and Roofs 610 Bay/Box and Bow Window Specification Dialogs 613 576 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Window Defaults Window Defaults Default Settings can be accessed by selecting Edit> Default Settings. Select Window from the Default Settings dialog and click the Edit button. You can also double-click the Window Tools parent button to open the Window Defaults dialog.   The settings in the Window Defaults dialog control the attributes of a window when it is initially placed in a plan, so you should define the type of window that will be placed most often in your model. See Default Settings on page 77. The panels in the Window Defaults dialog are similar to those found in the Window Specification dialog, with one exception: On the GENERAL panel of the Window Defaults dialog, you can specify the Minimum Separation between window and/or door units in the plan. The Minimum Separation value in the Window Defaults dialog specifies how close window and/or door units can be to each other. This setting also determines the width of the shared casing between windows. For more information, see Window Specification Dialog on page 591. DYNAMIC WINDOW DEFAULTS A variety of window default values are dynamic, including the Window Type, Casing, Lintel, Sash, Frame, Treatments, Framing, and Rough Opening. All Materials are also dynamic. When a dynamic default is changed, existing windows using the default value are affected. See Dynamic Defaults on page 79. WINDOW FRAMING The defaults for window framing can be defined in the Window Defaults dialogs. You can also specify an additional amount to cutout for window openings in concrete walls when the upper part of the window is located in a framed wall. See Rough Opening Panel on page 606 and Framing Panel on page 606. The default header depths for different spans can be set in the Framing Defaults dialog. See Openings Panel on page 865. Window Tools To place a window, select Build> Window and choose the desired Window Tool. Move your mouse pointer over a wall section, then click to place a window in the wall at that location. l If there is room enough along the wall to fit a 6” (150 mm) wide Standard Window, a preview of the window will display and a window can be placed. l The Bay, Box, and Bow Window tools do not have preview outlines. If a minimum width of 30” (725 mm) cannot be accommodated at the location where you click, a warning message will display and a window unit will not be created. Standard Windows, Passthroughs, and Wall Niches can be placed in both straight and curved walls, as well as span across straight, collinear wall segments. In contrast, a Bay, Box, or Bow Window can only be placed in a single, straight wall. Windows can also be placed in the Pony Walls; however, if the upper wall is a Railing, only Windows, Passthroughs, and Wall Niches can be placed provided that they are located entirely within the lower wall. See Pony Walls on page 354. 577 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Window Tools Windows cannot be placed in a wall specified as Invisible or if the wall in question is on a locked layer. See Locking Layers on page 178. STANDARD WINDOWS Select Build> Window> Window, then click on a straight or curved wall to place a Standard Window at that location. A Standard Window is a single window that is not a bay, box, bow window, a corner window or a blocked unit. These special types are made up of multiple Standard Windows. A Standard Window that is part of a special window is called a Component Window. Standard Windows can be specified as any of a variety of window types, such as double hung, casement and awning. See Window Specification Dialog on page 591. BAY WINDOWS The roof is affected by Bay, Box and Bow Windows. These windows should therefore be placed before the roof is built. A Bay Window is composed of three wall sections, each with a single component window. The two side walls are at an angle to the main wall. Select Build> Window> Bay Window and click on a straight wall to produce a bay window. When initially placed, bay windows measure  2’-2” across at the front, 4’-2” across at the back, and are 1’-0” deep. The component windows are specified in the Window Defaults dialog and their sizes adjust to fit the available space. BOX WINDOWS A Box Window is a bay window with side angles set at 90°. Select Build> Window> Box Window and click on a straight wall to produce a box window. Box windows initially measure 4’-2” wide with a depth of 1’-6”. The component windows are specified in the Window Defaults dialog and their sizes adjust to fit the available space. BOW WINDOWS A Bow Window is a group of identical wall segments that form a segmented curve. Select Build> Window> Bow Window and click on a straight wall to produce a 5-section bow window. Bow windows can be composed of between two and twenty sections. The number of bow window components can be changed in the Bow Window Specification dialog. See Bay/Box and Bow Window Specification Dialogs on page 613.   The component windows are specified in the Window Defaults dialog. Their sizes adjust to fit the available space. 578 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Special Windows The 5-section bow below has a 4’-10” radius centered 3’-9” inside the wall, giving an opening 5’-10” across and a depth of 11½”. Note that for a bow with an odd number of sections, the radial dimension is from the center of the arc to an outside corner where two window sections join. The depth (11 ½”) is measured to the flat area of the center section, not to a corner. As a result, the radius is a bit greater than the sum of the depth and the distance from the center of the bow’s curve to the exterior of the wall.   Note: Bay, box, and bow window areas are not included in the living area or in room standard area calculations. They are included in room interior area calculations. PASS-THROUGHS Select Build> Window> Pass-Through, then click on a straight or curved wall to place a Pass Through at that location.   A Pass-Through is simply a wall opening without a window unit placed inside. Like a window, it can have casing and a sill. It does not, however, have a sash, frame, or glass. It is one of the window Types available in the Window Specification dialog. See General Panel on page 592.   WALL NICHES Select Build> Window> Wall Niche, then click on a straight or curved wall to place a Wall Niche at that location. A Wall Niche is a wall opening that does not extend through the entire depth of the wall. You can specify the niche’s depth in the Window Specification dialog. See General Panel on page 592. WINDOWS LIBRARY Select View> Library Browser, then browse to Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Architectural> Windows to access a selection of special window units. Select the desired window, then click on a wall to place the window at that location. Special Windows A variety of special windows can be created using multiple standard windows, the edit tools or custom symbols. CREATING MANUAL BAY, BOX AND BOW WINDOWS Sometimes it is easier to draw bay, box and bow windows manually than to use the automatic tools. Bays created using walls can have more than one window per section, which is not possible using a bay window unit. Bear in mind that moving a manually created bay, box or bow window is generally more difficult than moving a unit created with one of the Window Tools since it is composed of individual walls. 579 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Special Windows CORNER WINDOWS To create a corner window, first create the desired window on each side of the corner. For best results, the heights, casing, and sills of both windows should be the same. For glass that meets at the corner: l Specify both windows as Fixed Glass.   l Use each window’s Move edit handle to position it all the way in the corner. To do this, drag the Move handle past the corner and parallel to the wall that the window is placed in. When the preview outline moves into the middle of the wall corner, release the mouse button.   l You can also position a window in a corner using its end Resize handle.   l Select Mitered in the Window Specification dialog. See Frame Panel on page 598.   Angled top, or shaped windows can be components of corner windows as long as their heights are equal at the corners. Windows with single or two segment tops can be used, but windows with three cannot. If a two segment window is used, the segment nearest the corner must be flat.   When a corner post is required, select Post instead of Mitered. There are a number of ways to control its size.   l Use dimensions to position the windows relative to the corner. By default, windows will stop when their interior casing bumps into the adjacent wall. See Editing Windows on page 588. l To move a window all the way into a corner, check Ignore Casing for Opening Resize. See General Plan Defaults Dialog on page 92. l To produce a minimal corner post and no siding or casing between the windows, use their Move edit handles. Click and drag each window past the exterior corner until its preview outline moves into the middle of the wall corner. SPECIAL WINDOW SHAPES A selection of special shaped windows is available in the Windows Library, including arched windows and mulled units. In addition, you can create a wide variety of window shapes in the Window Specification dialog, including:   l Arched windows. See Arch Panel on page 603.   l Trapezoidal windows. See Shape Panel on page 601.   580 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Special Windows l Round windows can be created by reflecting a Round Arch window vertically. See Arch Panel on page 603.   RECESSED WINDOWS A window or mulled unit placed in a brick or stone wall is often recessed into the wall’s exterior, so the brick wraps the opening.   You can specify a window as recessed in the Window Specification dialog. See Options Panel on page 593.   WINDOW SYMBOLS You can import custom windows and save them in your own library for use in future plans. See Symbol Objects on page 978.   By default, window symbols are assigned the “Custom” Type in Window Schedules and in the Window Symbol Specification dialog, and they use automatic labels appended with the letters CU. The Type is derived from the Symbol Specification dialog, where you can also select the CAD block used to represent the symbol in plan view. See Symbol Object Specification Dialogs on page 986.   PLACING A GABLE OVER A WINDOW Click the Gable Over Door/Window edit button to produce a gable roof over the selected window(s) the next time automatic roofs are built. See Gable/Roof Lines on page 830.   You can manually edit or delete this gable line at any time. Your changes take effect when the automatic roofs are rebuilt. This tool can also be used with group selected windows.   STAINED GLASS A selection of solid stained glass materials is available in the Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Materials> Glass library. See Materials on page 1049.   VENTS A selection of attic, foundation and gable vents are available in the Library Browser. See The Library on page 945. Vents are placed in the same manner as regular windows and can be edited in much the same way, as well. 581 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Grouped Windows Grouped Windows Windows can be grouped together to create a wide variety of custom configurations. Stacked windows are easy to create in 3D views, particularly cross section/elevation views, using their edit handles. See Editing Windows on page 588. Notice how the windows and door in this example are separate, with spaces between them. Doors and/or windows can also be organized into a unit in which there are no spaces between the windows and door units, and the casing between them is shared. To help organize their display in plan view, you can place stacked windows of varying heights on different Window Levels. See Window Levels on page 585. AUTOMATICALLY MULLED OPENINGS To form a mulled group of windows and/or doors, move them close enough together so that their casings touch. Once the casings touch, the windows are mulled together with one casing between the two of them. The sill of each window in the group must be at the same level for them to share the middle casing; however, the casing tops do not. The casings are modeled as if they are one unit but the windows remain separate objects for dimensioning and the Materials List. Windows can be automatically mulled to doors if the bottom of the window is at the elevation of the floor, equal to the bottom of the door. The Minimum Separation value in the Window Defaults dialog specifies how close window and door units can be to each other. This setting also controls the width of the shared casing between adjacent windows. See Window Defaults on page 577.   MULLED UNITS IN THE LIBRARY A selection of mulled window units is available in the Windows library. To place one in your plan, select it and click on a wall in any view. See Placing Library Objects on page 972. MAKE MULLED UNIT Windows and doors can be selected as a group and blocked together into a single unit by clicking the Make Mulled Unit edit button. See Mulled Units on page 583.   MULTIPLE STACKED OPENINGS If four or more multiple windows or doors occupy the same space in a wall, a Caution symbol will display at the problem location in plan view. 582 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Mulled Units Click on the Caution symbol that displays over the wall to open a contextual menu, then select Delete Duplicate to delete a duplicate opening. When no more Caution symbols remain, you should then confirm that the remaining three openings meet your needs and delete any that are unnecessary. Mulled Units A mulled unit is a group of two or more windows and/or doors blocked together to form a single unit. A selection of mulled units is available in the Library Browser, and you can also create your own using the Make Mulled Unit edit tool. MAKE MULLED UNIT The Make Mulled Unit edit tool allows you to block a group of selected windows and/or doors into a single unit. Wall openings in a mulled unit are referred to as components. Components of a mulled unit must be within 24” (600 mm) of one another in order to become a blocked unit; however, their casings do not have to touch. When created, mulled units use the default settings for all attributes they possess: for example, casing profile and materials. These attributes potentially override those of the individual components. Attributes that mulled units do not possess: for example, sash size and materials, are derived from each component. Windows and doors in a mulled unit can be framed as a single opening or as multiple openings, and can be listed as a single unit or individual objects in the Materials List. See Materials Lists on page 1303. To create a mulled unit 1. Make sure that dimensions are set to locate Opening Sides, then use dimensions to position the windows and doors the desired distance apart. See Moving Objects Using Dimensions on page 483. 2. In any view, group-select multiple windows and doors on the same wall that are within 24” of each other. 3. Click the Make Mulled Unit edit button to create a block. The Make Mulled Unit edit tool can be used to block component windows and/or doors only if they meet the following requirements: l They must be placed in the same wall. l Adjacent objects be within 24” (600 mm) of one another (side to side or top to bottom). l The edges of adjacent components that face one another must be parallel. l The edges of adjacent components that face one another must be straight, not curved. l The selected components can be adjacent vertically or horizontally, but not a combination of the two. Complex units can be formed only by mulling several blocks together. Unlike automatically mulled openings, adjacent component edges of mulled units do not need to be the same length. MULLING STACKED OPENINGS Group selection can be done in plan view or any 3D view. Plan views work well for blocking windows that are side-by-side, but a camera or elevation view is needed to block vertically stacked objects. 583 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Mulled Units To block stacked openings 1. In a cross section/elevation view, select the door and the windows on level 1 and 2 above it, then click the Make Mulled Unit edit button. 2. Repeat step 1 with the sidelight on the right and the window above it. 3. Repeat step 1 with the sidelight on the left and the window above it. 4. Group select the three vertically joined units and click the Make Mulled Unit edit button to join them side to side. The configuration of the horizontal and vertical mullions in a mulled unit will vary depending on the order in which you block stacked openings. l If you form a mulled unit by first blocking objects vertically, the vertical mullions of the larger unit will extend continuously from the bottom to the top of the entire unit, breaking any horizontal mullions. l If you form a mulled unit by first blocking objects horizontally, the horizontal mullions of the larger unit will extend from side to side, breaking any vertical mullions. In a complex unit composed of smaller units, there may be a variety of ways to organize the sub-units. SELECTING COMPONENTS OF MULLED UNITS To select a component of a mulled unit, click at the location of the component in question, then click the Select Next Object edit button or press the Tab key until that individual component is selected. Only the component clicked on is selectable using this method. If you need to select a different component, click on it and repeat the process. The selected component may be on any window level in the mulled unit. If there are multiple levels, it is easiest to select the components in a 3D view. When you have selected an individual component, you can change its parameters in the Window Specification dialog. See Window Specification Dialog on page 591. If the selected component is not itself a mulled unit and has no components above it, its Height and Arch parameters can be changed. Changing the Height causes the component top to move. The bottom remains stationary. DISPLAYING MULLED UNITS As with other windows, the display of mulled window units is controlled in the Layer Display Options dialog. See Layer Attributes on page 177. Mulled units are placed on the “Windows” layer by default and have a single label, which is on the “Windows, Labels” layer. Mulled units are also included in the windows category of the Materials List and in window schedules. If the component objects of a mulled unit have unique moldings or materials, they will not be noted in the Materials List or in room finish schedules. See Schedules and Object Labels on page 681. If a mulled unit includes a door, Treat as Door will be checked in the Mulled Unit Specification dialog. When this box is checked, the unit’s default layer is “Doors” and its label is placed on the “Doors, Labels” layer. Units set to Treat as Door are also included in the “Doors” category of the Materials List, and these units’ Auto Schedule Category is “Mulled Door Units” instead of “Mulled Window Units”. Similarly, their casing is recognized as door casing in Room Finish Schedules. See Options Panel on page 593. You can, if you wish, display a mulled unit’s individual component labels instead of a single label for the unit. Labels are placed on the layers they would be on were the unit not mulled. A mulled unit’s label setting also affects how it is listed  in schedules and in the Materials List. See Label Panel on page 700.   584 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Window Levels l When Suppress All Labels is selected, individual components are counted  in schedules and in the Materials List.   l When Show Component Labels is selected, components are counted  in schedules and in the Materials List. l When Show Single Label for Entire Unit is selected, the unit is treated as a single object in schedules and the materials list. Mulled units can be placed on different Window Levels to control their appearance in plan view. See Window Levels on page 585.   EDITING MULLED UNITS A mulled unit moves as a single standard window in both floor plan and 3D views.   The components of a mulled unit cannot be moved relative to one another. If this is required, you will first need to explode the mulled unit.   To explode a mulled unit 1. Select the mulled unit.   2. Click the Explode Mulled Unit edit button.   Window Levels It is often necessary to position more than one window, mulled unit, and/or door at the same location along a wall in plan view: for example, to create an entry with side lites and transom. To help control and organize the appearance of stacked wall openings in plan view, you can assign windows at various heights to different Window Levels.   Window Levels do not define the height of a window, just the appearance and behavior of windows and doors in plan view.   l In plan view, windows and doors on the Default Level display the line color and style of the layer they are on. See Layers on page 176.   l Windows on any other level appear light gray, regardless of the layer they are on.   THE DEFAULT LEVEL The Default Level is the Window Level that Standard Windows are initially placed on when created and affects several things:   l In plan view, windows and doors on the Default Level display the line color and style of the layer they are on.   l When you click on stacked doors and windows in plan view, those on the Default Level are selected first. To select an opening on another level, use the Select Next Object edit button. See Select Next Object on page 211.   585 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Displaying Windows Typically, the Default Level is set as 0 (zero).   WINDOW LEVEL ZERO Window Level 0 (zero) is the level that all Bay, Box and Bow windows and doors are always placed on. Typically, it is also the Default Level that standard windows are placed on, as well.   Because doors are always on Level 0 and because Window Levels affect line colors in printouts, it is usually best to keep the Default Level at 0. If you do change the Default Level, remember to change it back before printing.   Once the window is created, its parameters, including Window Level, can be changed. See Editing Windows on page 588.   In addition to using Window Levels to manage the appearance of stacked windows, you can combine them into a single blocked unit. See Mulled Units on page 583.   Displaying Windows The display of windows and window labels in floor plan and 3D views can be controlled in the Layer Display Options dialog. See Layer Display Options Dialog on page 179. Along with the windows themselves, the display of a number of window components can also be controlled by layer: l Interior and exterior window casings are located on the “Casings, Exterior” and “Casings, Interior” layers and can display in all views. In plan view, the sills and vertical side casings will be shown, but the horizontal top casing or lintel will not. If a window is recessed, the affected wall layers will adjust to accommodate the casing. l Window and door shutters are located on the "Shutters" layer and can display in all views. Shutters can also be set to Show Closed or open. See Shutters Panel on page 604. l Window curtains and blinds are located on the "Windows, Curtains & Blinds" layer, which controls their display in camera views only. See Treatments Panel on page 603. l When the “Opening Header Lines” layer is turned on in plan view, headers are represented by dashed lines within each window. These lines do not correspond to actual framing objects and cannot be selected. In addition, header framing members can be set to display. See Wall Framing on page 852.   l If a window is placed in a Garage room at a height where it extends into the stem wall or curb, a cutout in the concrete will display on the floor below. You can specify the cutout’s size and whether it displays in plan view in the Window Specification dialog. See Rough Opening Panel on page 572.   If the “Windows” layer is not set to display, window casing and other components are not visible, but the openings in the walls where they are located can still be seen. Windows can only be placed in walls, so if a wall’s layer is turned off in plan view, any windows placed in that wall will not display, either. Windows can display independent of their containing walls in 3D views, however. See Displaying Walls on page 363. IN PLAN VIEW A window’s frame, glass, and sill are all represented in plan view. This makes some window types, notably Sliding and Double and Triple Casement windows, distinguishable. 586 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Displaying Windows Window Types in plan view By default, when a window is located entirely in one part of a pony wall, and that part is not displayed in plan view, the window’s outline is shown but the wall’s layer lines and fill drawn through it. You can instead display windows in the nondisplayed parts of pony walls the same as in the displayed parts, or not at all. See Pony Wall Defaults on page 345.   Bay, box, and bow windows have dimensions lines associated with them. l You can suppress their display by turning off the “Manual Dimensions” layer or on a unit by unit basis in the unit’s specification dialog. See Bay/Box and Bow Window Specification Dialogs on page 613. l The arrow style and fill are set in the Dimension Defaults dialog. See Dimension Defaults Dialog on page 451.   IN 3D VIEWS In addition to the components that are drawn in plan views, in camera views, interior and exterior window treatments display when the "Windows, Curtains & Blinds" layer is on. In 3D Vector Views, windows can also display opening indicator arrows. See Opening Indicators on page 549.   You can also specify whether window and door glass is opaque or transparent in the Rendering Technique Options dialog. When Opaque Window Glass is used, window and door glass uses the color specified for the active Rendering Technique. See Rendering Technique Options on page 1153.   WINDOW LABELS Window labels display in floor plan and cross section/elevation views, centered on the windows they represent, when the “Windows, Labels” layer is turned on and use the Text Style assigned to their layer. Similarly, Wall Niche labels display in the same manner when the "Wall Niches, Labels" layer is turned on. See Label Panel on page 700. Automatic window and niche labels indicate Width and Height, followed by Type. For example: l In U.S. Unit plans, the automatic label for a 3’-0” wide, 4’-0” high double hung window will read 3040 DH. l In metric plans, the automatic label for a 900 mm wide, 1200 mm high double hung window will read 900x1200 DH. If you prefer, you can use one of two other formats: Height/Width followed by Type and Width Only followed by Type. Label formats are specified in the Window Schedule Specification dialog or in the Window Schedule Defaults dialog if no schedule is present. See Labels Panel on page 697.   You can specify whether a Bay, Box or Bow Window displays a single label or displays the labels of its component windows. This choice will affect how the unit displays in schedules. See Bay, Box, and Bow Windows on page 608. 587 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Windows l When Suppress All Labels is selected, individual components of Bay, Box and Bow Windows are counted in schedules and in the Materials List.   l When Show Component Labels is selected, components of Bay, Box and Bow Windows are counted  in schedules and in the Materials List.   l When Show Single Label for Entire Unit is selected, the Bay, Box or Bow Windows is treated as a single object in schedules but not in the materials list.   These options are also available for mulled units but affect their display in schedules and the materials list somewhat differently. See Displaying Mulled Units on page 584.   Customized labels using text and Object Specific Text Macros as well as label position and orientation can also be specified in the Window Specification dialog. See Text Macros on page 540. IN THE MATERIALS LIST The materials associated with windows are listed under different Categories in the Materials List: l Windows - Lists windows units, including Passthroughs.   l Interior Trim - Lists interior casing, lintels, aprons, and sills.   l Exterior Trim - Lists exterior casing, lintels, aprons, sills, and shutters.   l Wall Board - Lists the backerboard associated with Wall Niches.   As with other objects, there are a number of ways to control how, or whether, windows are included in the Materials List. See Organizing Materials Lists on page 1310.   You can add and edit information about a window’s accessories in the Window Specification dialog. See Components Panel on page 1330.   WINDOW SCHEDULES The Window Schedule tool is set up to produce customizable window schedules as well as window labels that display schedule numbers. Any schedule, however, can be set up to include windows. See Schedules and Object Labels on page 681. In addition, any information about window casing and lintels can also be included in any schedule set up to include items in the Room and/or Molding categories. See Room Finish Schedules on page 447. Editing Windows Before a window can be edited, it must be selected. Click on a window when the Select Objects tool or any of the Window Tools are active. Doors and/or windows can also be group-selected and edited. See Selecting Objects on page 210. To select a window that is part of a blocked unit, click the component window, then click the Select Next Object edit button. See Selecting Components of Mulled Units on page 584. Once selected, windows can be edited using their edit handles, the Edit Toolbar buttons, and their specification dialogs. 588 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Windows USING THE EDIT HANDLES In plan view, click either of the two end handles and drag along the wall to change the width. The label showing the size updates as the window is resized. In 3D views, a selected window has five edit handles: the Move handle at the center and a Resize handle on each edge. Click and drag an edge handle to resize the window. If window labels are set to display, they will each have a small square Move edit handle and a small rectangular Rotate handle. See Displaying Windows on page 586. Using the edit handles, a window resizes according to the currently active Edit Behavior . See Defaults, Preferences, and Edit Behaviors on page 206.   In 3D views, a selected window has five edit handles: the Move handle at the center and a Resize handle on each edge.   Click and drag an edge handle to resize the window. In cross section/elevation views, window labels will also display when their layer is turned on, and will have the same edit handles as in plan view. A single window or a group of windows can be moved with the center edit handle. A door or window moved against an intersecting wall temporarily stops when it is the casing distance from the intersecting wall. Enable Ignore Casing for Opening Resize in the Plan Defaults dialog to turn off this behavior. See General Plan Defaults Dialog on page 92. You can continue to drag the selected window and  it will resume movement past or onto the intersecting wall. To create a corner window, drag the Move handle straight out past the wall corner, parallel to the selected window’s wall. See Corner Windows on page 580. IN THE SPECIFICATION DIALOG The most precise method of editing an individual window or group of windows is to use the Window Specification dialog. The window type, size, casing, materials, shape, and more can all be specified in this dialog. See Window Specification Dialog on page 591. You can apply a variety of window attributes to multiple windows - including bay, box, and bow windows - at once using Style Palettes. See Style Palettes on page 279.   You can also use the Object Painter tools to assign the properties of one window to other windows. The Object Painter tools do not affect bay/box/bow windows. See Matching Properties on page 282.   USING THE EDIT TOOLS A selected window or windows can be edited in a variety of ways using the buttons on the Edit Toolbar. See The Edit Toolbar on page 130. Gable Over Door/Window creates a gable over the selected window(s) the next time the roof is rebuilt. See Gable/Roof Lines on page 830.   Change Wall Side moves a selected Wall Niche to the opposite side of the wall. See Wall Niches on page 579. Make Mulled Unit can be used to block multiple selected windows and/or doors into a single unit, while Explode Mulled Unit breaks a mulled unit into its individual components. See Mulled Units on page 583. 589 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Custom Muntins USING DIMENSIONS Like various other objects, windows can be moved using dimensions. See Moving Objects Using Dimensions on page 483. You can specify how windows and doors are located by dimensions in the Dimension Defaults dialog. Dimensions can be set to locate the centers, sides, casing, and/or rough openings of windows and doors, or you can choose to not locate them at all. See Locate Manual Panel on page 454.   Once a dimension line has been drawn, you  can move or add its extension lines to locate non-default locations on a window. See Editing Extension Lines on page 478. WINDOW CASING, SILLS, AND MILLWORK Windows often feature casing, or trim, on both sides of the wall opening as well as a sill on one or both sides. See Moldings / / Profiles / Rails / Panels on page 927.   The default casing for windows and doors is a basic rectangular stock profile. You can specify a window’s casing profiles in the Window Specification dialog, or you can choose to suppress casing altogether. See Casing Panel on page 563.   A separate molding profile can be specified for the lintel, or top horizontal molding. A sill profile can be specified, as well. See Lintel Panel on page 595.   Additional millwork items can be applied above and below the window’s casing on its exterior side. See Treatments Panel on page 603.   Each of these objects can be replaced with a different profile or object directly from the library in 3D views. Select a molding profile or millwork item, then click on the window component you want it to replace. See Replace From Library on page 976.   WINDOW TREATMENTS AND SHUTTERS Curtains and blinds can be assigned to the interior side of windows in the Window Specification dialog. See Treatments Panel on page 603. Shutters can be assigned to the exterior of windows in a similar manner. See Shutters Panel on page 604. Each of these objects can be replaced with a different object directly from the library in 3D views. Select a window treatment or shutter item, then click on the window component you want it to replace. See Replace From Library on page 976.   Custom Muntins You can design your own muntins for the glazing of a window or door. Muntins are formed from a CAD block composed of lines and arcs drawn over window or door glass in a cross section/elevation view. The CAD block should cover at least half the glass horizontally and one quarter of the area vertically, but should not overlap it in either direction by more than five percent. Nested CAD blocks cannot be used. See CAD Blocks on page 329.   CREATING MUNTINS Custom muntins are created by drawing their pattern using the CAD tools, blocking the pattern to create a CAD block, and then selecting the window and clicking the Load Muntins edit button.   590 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Window Specification Dialog To create custom muntins 1. Create a Cross Section/Elevation view of the wall the window or door is in and Zoom in on the window or door.   2. Use the Draw Line and Draw Arc tools to design the desired muntins. Try to make them start and end as close to the edge of the glass as possible.   3. When the muntin design is complete, group-select all lines and arcs and click the Make CAD Block edit button. See Selecting Objects on page 210.   4. Select the door or window and click the Load Muntins edit button to convert the CAD block into custom muntins.   l If the window in question is the component of a mulled unit, bay, or box window, click on it and, then click the Select Next Object edit button.   l If the window in question is the component of a bow window, the custom muntins will load onto all of its components - not just one of them.   If your window has more than one sash (a double-hung window, for example, has two), you must create a separate CAD block for each pane. When you click Load Muntins , all CAD blocks are loaded.   Custom muntins move with the opening and copy with their opening. They also stretch or compress when the glass area is resized. This stretching may not be perfect for non-rectangular glass areas that are resized by a large amount.   Custom muntins can be created for the components of Bay Windows , Box Windows , and mulled units. To create custom muntins for a Bow Window , you must draw them on the one component that is selectable. When the muntins are loaded, they will be applied to all of the components See Component Windows on page 609.   The Load Muntins edit tool can also be used to add custom muntins to glass doors. See Special Doors on page 556.   A selection of CAD blocks created for use as custom muntins is available in the library in Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Architectural> Windows> Custom Muntins. EDITING MUNTINS Once blocked and loaded, custom muntins cannot be edited. If you wish to make changes to them, you must first remove them.   REMOVING MUNTINS Remove custom muntins from a door or window by selecting the opening in cross section/elevation view and clicking the Unload Muntins edit button. The muntins disappear and the original CAD block takes their place.   Window Specification Dialog To open the Window Specification dialog, select a window or a group of windows and click the Open Object edit button; or double-click the window using the Select Objects or a Window tool. 591 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Window Specification Dialog This dialog is also available for the components of Bay, Box, and Bow Windows. See Bay, Box, and Bow Windows on page 608. You can also open the specification dialog for the window(s) associated with a schedule row. See Open Row Object(s) on page 686.   The settings in this dialog are similar to those in the Window Defaults dialog. See Window Defaults on page 577. The settings in this dialog are also similar to those in the Wall Niche, Mulled Unit and Window Symbol Specification dialogs. Although similar, a number of the options cannot be edited when either a window symbol or a mulled unit is selected, and some panels are not available. See Grouped Windows on page 582. The panels that are available in the Window Specification dialog will vary depending on whether the selected window is a regular window, a mulled unit, or a symbol object. GENERAL PANEL In the Wall Niche Specification dialog, only the Size and Position and Include in Schedule settings on this panel are available. See Wall Niches on page 579. Window Type Select the type of window from the list. The first entry in the list is the “Use Default”, which is set in the Window Defaults dialog. Size and Position l Specify the window’s Width and Height. These values do not include the window frame unless Window Size Includes Frame is selected on the FRAME panel. l Select the Elevation Reference from the drop-down list. This determines where the next two settings are measured from and also affects their setting labels. l Specify the height to Top, measured from the selected Elevation Reference to the top of the window frame. 592 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Window Specification Dialog l Specify the height to Bottom, measured from the selected Elevation Reference to the bottom of the window frame. l Specify the Depth of the selected Wall Niche, measured from the wall surface to the back of the niche. Only available for Wall Niches. Note: When either the Floor to Top or Floor to Bottom setting is modified, the other will adjust in response to prevent the window’s Height from changing. Component Options These settings affect windows with movable sections and are not available for Pass-Throughs, Fixed glass windows, mulled units, or window symbols.   l Specify the Bottom Component Size for Single Hung, Double Hung, Double Awning, Double Hopper, and Triple Hopper windows; specify the Top/Bottom Component Size for Triple Awning windows; or, l Specify the Side Component Size for Triple Casement and Triple Sliding windows, the Right Component Size for Left Sliding windows, or the Left Component Size for Right Sliding and Double Casement windows. A Component Size value of 0 creates  a window with identically sized components. l Specify how each Component Opens from the available options. Only available for Casement, Double and Triple Awning, and Double and Triple Hopper windows.   Interior Windows These settings are only present when the selected window is a Pass-Through placed in an interior wall. See Exterior and Interior Walls on page 351. l Check Separate Trim and Materials for Each Side to specify the casing, lintels, sills, and all materials for each side of the selected Pass-Through independently. When unchecked, the two sides use the same trim and materials. Options l Louver Size - Specify the vertical height of the selected window’s louvers. Only available for Louvered and Glass Louver windows.   l Check Include in Schedule to include the selected window(s) in Window Schedules. See The Schedule Tools on page 682.   Preview A preview of the selected window displays here. A label indicates which side of the window is its Interior and which is its Exterior. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22. Window opening directions can best be seen using the Vector View Rendering Technique.   OPTIONS PANEL The OPTIONS panel is not available in the Wall Niche Specification dialog.   The Mulled Units and Mullion Depth settings on the OPTIONS panel are only available in the Mulled Unit Specification dialog. See Grouped Windows on page 582.   593 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Window Specification Dialog Options l Check Interior Corner Block to count interior corner blocks in the materials list. These do not display in 3D views.   l Check Exterior Corner Block to count exterior corner blocks in the materials list. These do not display in 3D views.   l Check Egress to specify the window as an egress window in window schedules and the Materials List. Not available for Pass-Throughs.   Consult your local building and fire code authorities for your local egress window requirements. l Check Tempered Glass to specify the selected window’s glass as tempered in the Window Schedule. See Columns to Include on page 689.   l Check Reverse Symbol to reverse a window symbol as though it were reflected about a vertical line through its center. Only available in the Window Symbol Specification dialog. See Window Symbols on page 581. Mulled Units Only available when a mulled unit is selected. See Make Mulled Unit on page 583.   l Check Treat as Door to include the unit in the “Doors” category of the Materials List and in the “Mulled Door Units” Auto Schedule Category. Only available when the selected unit contains a door. l Uncheck Single Wall Hole to produce individually framed wall openings for each unit in a mulled unit. When this box is checked, a single wall opening with one header for the entire unit is produced.   Mullion Depth Specify the depth of the casing between the components of a mulled unit, measured from the wall surface. Positive values move the mullion surface towards the wall center; negative values, away from it. Only available when a mulled unit is selected.   594 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Window Specification Dialog l Specify the Inside depth of the mullion on the interior surface of the wall.   l Specify the Outside depth of the mullion on the exterior surface of the wall.   Recessed into Wall These settings allow you to recess the selected window or mulled unit into a wall, away from the exterior surface. Only available if the window or mulled unit is in a multi-layered wall.   l Check Recessed to enable the options below. l Select To Main Layer to recess the window to the wall’s Main Layer. l Select To Sheathing Layer to recess the window to the wall’s sheathing layer, which is the layer located just outside the wall type’s Main Layer(s). See Wall Type Definitions on page 384.   Vertical Stacking l Specify the window Level that the selected window is placed on. Not available for mulled units or window symbols. See Window Levels on page 585.   Preview A preview of the selected window displays here. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22.   CASING PANEL The settings on the CASING panel of the Window and Mulled Unit Specification dialogs are also found on the panel of the same name in the Door Specification dialog. See Casing Panel on page 563. The CASING panel is not available in the Window Symbol Specification dialog. Window casing and materials can be included in Room Finish Schedules. See The Schedule Tools on page 682. LINTEL PANEL The settings on the LINTEL panel of the Window and Mulled Unit Specification dialogs are also found on the panel of the same name in the Door Specification dialog. See Lintel Panel on page 565.   The LINTEL panel is not available in the Window Symbol Specification dialog.   595 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Window Specification Dialog The profiles and materials of window lintels and sills can be included in Room Finish Schedules. See The Schedule Tools on page 682.   SILL PANEL The settings on the SILL panel of the Window and Mulled Unit Specification dialogs are not available if the window has a reflected arch. See Arch Panel on page 603.   The SILL panel is not available in the Window Symbol Specification dialog.   The profiles and materials of window lintels and sills can be included in Room Finish Schedules. User Interior Sill Check Use Interior Sill to enable the settings that follow, then specify the sill applied to the interior side of the selected window(s) using these settings. When this box is unchecked, no interior sill is used.   l Sill Profile - Click the Library button to select a molding profile for the sill. A preview of the selected profile displays to the right. See Select Library Object Dialog on page 974.   l Click the Clear button to remove the selected sill profile from the window. When no library profile is selected, a basic rectangular profile is used.   l Specify how far to Extend the sill past the outside edges of the casing on each side. If an Apron is specified, it will also be affected by this setting.   l Specify how far to Inset the sill into the window. A value of 0 positions the sill profile against the surface of the wall. Only available when a sill profile from the library is selected.   l Check Wrap to wrap the sill profile back toward the wall.   l Check Apron to include an apron under the sill. When Wrap is checked, the apron will be 1/2” (12 mm) shorter than the sill on each side; when it is unchecked, it will be the same length as the sill.   Use Exterior Sill Check Use Exterior Sill to enable the settings that follow, then specify the exterior sill for the selected window(s) using these settings. These settings are the same as those for the Interior Sill, above.   Preview A preview of the selected window displays here. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22.   596 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Window Specification Dialog SASH PANEL The settings on the SASH panel control the size and position of the selected window’s sash. Note that increasing the Side, Middle, Top or Bottom Width decreases the area of the glass and vice versa. The SASH panel is not available in the Wall Niche, Mulled Unit, and Window Symbol Specification dialogs, and the settings on this panel are not available for Pass-Throughs. Sash Specify the width and depth of the selected window’s sash, which are the pieces of the window that hold the glass; or, uncheck this box to prevent it from having a sash. l Specify the Side Width of all vertical sash members: those at the window sides as well as the central members of Casement and Sliding windows. This is also the width of the top portion of the window when an arch is specified.   l Specify the Middle width of horizontal components between the top and bottom sash in Double Hung, Double and Triple Awning, and Double and Triple Hopper windows. It does not affect Casement and Sliding windows.   l Specify the Top and Bottom Widths. The Top value is not used if the window has an arch.   l Specify the Depth, or thickness, of the sash stock measured from the exterior to the interior.   l Specify the Inset, the distance between the frame and the outermost sash. If there is no frame, the inset is measured from the outer surface of the wall’s Main Layer.   l Curved Options - When the selected window is placed in a curved wall, specify whether it has a curved or straight sash. A curved sash is typically used with Radial casing. See Casing Panel on page 563.   597 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Window Specification Dialog Preview A preview of the selected window displays here. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22. FRAME PANEL The FRAME panel is not available for mulled units or window symbols. The settings on the FRAME panel are similar to those on the JAMB panel of the Door Specification dialog. See Jamb Panel on page 566.   Has Frame Check Has Frame to include a frame and enable the settings below. When this is unchecked, the selected window has no frame around it.   l Specify the Positioning of the window frame. These settings affect what the window's Size settings on the GENERAL panel are describing; however, switching these settings does not affect the Size values: o Select Window Size Includes Frame to specify size as a total of the window glass plus sash plus jamb width. o Select Window Size Excludes Frame to specify the size of the window glass plus sash only. l Specify the Side, Top, and Bottom Widths of the window’s frame. Changing these values only affects a window's total size when Window Size Includes Frame is selected, above.   598 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Window Specification Dialog l Uncheck Fit Frame to Wall to specify the Depth and Inset of the selected window’s frame. When this box is checked, the frame Depth automatically extends from the Recessed Into Wall layer to the wall’s inside surface with an Inset of 0”. The Recessed Into Wall layer is specified on the Options Panel on page 593 of this dialog.   o Specify the Depth of the window frame from front to back.   o Specify the frame’s Inset, which is measured from the Recessed Into Wall layer and moves the window frame towards its interior side. If used, the casing and lintel are not affected by this setting.   Options Specify how corner windows join. Only available when the selected window is one of two Fixed glass windows that meet at a wall corner, or when both windows are selected. See Corner Windows on page 580.   l Select Post to produce a vertical support between the two windows that separates their sash and glass. l Select Mitered for sash and glass that meet and miter at the corner where the two windows meet. Preview A preview of the selected window displays here. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22. LITES PANEL The LITES panel allows you to add muntins to windows, and is also available for Glass doors. See Doors on page 543. There are four possible styles of muntin bars for regular windows, plus two additional options for arched windows. A window that has been modified using the SHAPE panel cannot have divided lites or shutters added. You can, however, create Custom Muntins for such a window. See Custom Muntins on page 590. The LITES panel is not available in the Wall Niche, Mulled Unit, and Window Symbol Specification dialogs, and the settings on this panel are not available for Pass-Throughs. Lites Specify the number, position and style of lites for the selected window.   599 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Window Specification Dialog l Select a Type, or style, of window lite from the drop-down list. l Normal style is the most common, with muntins going horizontally and vertically. Colonial windows are an example of the normal style.   l Diamond style uses angled muntin bars to divide up the lites. French windows are an example of the diamond style.   l Prairie style is based on the normal style, but with all the central muntin bars removed, leaving only the two outside muntin bars both horizontally and vertically. Typically, both Lites Across and Lites Vertical should be set between 6 and 8. Federal or Federation windows are an example of the Prairie style.   l Craftsman style is based on the normal style, but only the topmost horizontal muntin bar is kept with all the portions of the vertical muntin bars above it. Typically, both Lites Across and Lites Vertical should be set between 4 and 8.   l Enter the number of horizontal Lites Across in each sash.   l Enter the number of vertical Lites Vertical in each sash.   l Specify the Muntin Width, which is the width of the bars dividing the panes of glass.   l Check or uncheck Lites in Top and/or Lites in Bottom - or Lites in Left and/or Lights in Right - to specify either one or both of the sashes to have divided lites.   l Check Muntin in Corner to add a vertical muntin bar where two corner windows meet. Only available when Has Corner Post is unchecked on the FRAME panel. See Corner Windows on page 580.   l Check Auto Adjust Lites for Component Size to have the program produce lites that are consistent in size across all components. When this is checked, the window’s lites and its specification settings may not agree; when unchecked, lites in the components may not be consistent in size. l Note: Because the fixed window in a Triple Sliding window is twice the size of the movable windows, the fixed section has a vertical muntin bar. To eliminate this, uncheck Auto Adjust Lites for Component Size. Round Top Arch These options are only available if the window has an Arch specified. l Specify a Ray Count of up to 10 radial muntin bars in the portion of the window within the arch. There is one more pane of glass than the number of rays specified. See Arch Panel on page 603.   l Check Concentric to produce muntins radiating from a curved inner muntin that is concentric with the window’s arch. You must have at least three Lites Across for this to be used.   600 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Window Specification Dialog Preview A preview of the selected window displays here. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22. SHAPE PANEL The settings on the SHAPE panel control the position of the selected window’s corners, allowing you to create angled edges and mitered top corners.   If any of these settings are used to create a custom shape, the selected window will be automatically specified as “Fixed Glass” on the GENERAL panel. If the selected window has an arch specified on the ARCH panel, it will be removed.   The SHAPE panel is not available for mulled units or window symbols.   Note: The Left and Right settings on this panel refer to the window’s exterior. Window Width The Window Width displays for reference here. It can be changed on the General Panel on page 592.   l Click Match Roof to match the angle of the top of the window to the pitch of the roof above by changing its Sides heights, below. If either Top Inside Corner box is checked, it will become unchecked. Match Roof does not work for curved roofs, has no effect if the window is not in a gable end wall, and is not available in the Window Defaults dialog.   l Click Revert All to restore the window to its original shape, type and arch settings.   601 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Window Specification Dialog Sides Specify the height of the window’s Left and Right sides, as measured from the bottom of the window. By default, these settings match the window’s Height.   Top Inside Corners These settings allow you to create a second set of top corners with angled edges between them and the outside top corners.   l Check Left to add an additional corner along the top edge.   l Specify the Height of the left inner corner, as seen from the exterior, measured from the bottom of the window.   l Specify the Offset of the left inner corner, as measured from the left side of the window.   l An additional Right Inside Corner can be specified in a similar manner.   Bottom Corners These settings allow you to raise the heights of the bottom corners, as measured from the bottom of the window specified on the General Panel on page 592.   l Check Left to raise the height of the bottom left corner.   l Specify the Height of the bottom left corner. This value cannot exceed the Height of the Left Side.   l The height of the Bottom Right corner can be raised in a similar manner.   l The height of the Bottom Right corner can be raised in a similar manner. Preview A preview of the selected window displays here. You may want to rotate the view so the window’s exterior can be seen. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22.   Note: The Left and Right settings on this panel refer to the window’s exterior. The following diagram represents added Inner corners using open circles and the left and right corners using solid black circles:   602 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Window Specification Dialog l A has different left and right Side Heights with no Top Inside Corner added.   l B has matching left and right heights with an added Top Inside Corner.   l C is the same as B, except that the left and right Side Heights have been shortened to 1/4”.   l D is the same as B except it has two added Top Inside Corners.   l E is the same as A except that the Bottom Right Corner has been raised.   ARCH PANEL The settings on the ARCH panel of the Window and Mulled Unit Specification dialogs are also found on the panel of the same name in the Door Specification dialog. See Arch Panel on page 567.   The settings on this panel of the Mulled Unit Specification dialog define the overall shape of the blocked unit’s top. If the mulled unit already includes a component window with an arch, these settings cannot be modified.  If you intend to arch the top of a mulled unit, the top components should be constructed with horizontal, straight tops all at the same height. The ARCH panel is not available for window symbols, and its settings are not available if the selected window has been modified using the SHAPE panel.   TREATMENTS PANEL The settings on the TREATMENTS panel allow you to add embellishments to the interior and exterior of the selected window or mulled unit.   The TREATMENTS panel is not available in the Wall Niche and Window Symbol Specification dialogs.   Curtains Curtains are applied to the selected window or mulled unit’s interior side.   603 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Window Specification Dialog l Specify a style of Curtains by selecting “Use Default”, “None” or “Library” from the drop-down list.  If a nondefault library item has been selected, its name will display in the list, as well.   l Click the Library button or select “Library” from the drop-down list to choose a style of curtain from the library. See Select Library Object Dialog on page 974.   l Specify the Height Off Floor of the bottom edge of the curtains.   l Specify the Height Above Casing of the top of curtains.   Blinds Blinds are specified in the same manner that Curtains are chosen, above.   Exterior Millwork Above Casing Exterior millwork above the casing can be specified in the same manner that Curtains are chosen, above.   l Specify the selected millwork's Height and Width.   Exterior Millwork Below Casing Exterior millwork below the casing can be specified in the same manner that Curtains are chosen, above.   l Specify the Height of the millwork and the distance that it should Extend past the side casing. Preview A preview of the selected window displays on the right. You may want to rotate the view so the window’s interior can be seen, as needed. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22.   SHUTTERS PANEL The settings on the SHUTTERS panel allow you to specify exterior shutters for the selected window or mulled unit.   The SHUTTERS panel is not available in the Wall Niche and Window Symbol Specification dialogs.   604 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Window Specification Dialog Shutters Select a Type of shutters from the drop-down list or click the Library button to select a style of shutters from the Library Browser. See Select Library Object Dialog on page 974.   Size l When Match Opening Width is checked, each shutter’s width is exactly half that of the window, excluding casing.   l Uncheck Match Opening Width to specify a Width in the text field. If the window is later resized, the shutters will not adjust in response.   l When Match Opening Height is checked, each shutter’s height equals that of the window, excluding casing.   l Uncheck Match Opening Height to specify a Height in the text field. If the window is later resized, the shutters will not adjust in response.   Position Specify the position of the shutters relative to the window.   l Select On Casing to position the shutters just outside the window frame, like functional shutters.   l Select Outside Casing to position shutters outside the window casing, as decorative shutters often are.   l Select Custom to create a custom position for the shutters by specifying the Offset from Side and Offset from Bottom in the fields below.   Options Additional shutter Options can be specified here.   605 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Window Specification Dialog l Specify the Louver Size. Only available when "Louvered" is selected as the Type, above. l Check Reverse Direction to orient the shutters so their exterior sides face outward and their interior sides face the wall. For functional shutters, this should remain unchecked.   l Check No Arch for shutters with flat tops that reach the bottom of the curved portion of an arched window. Only available when an Arch is selected. See Arch Panel on page 603. l Check Show Closed  to draw the shutters so they cover the exterior of the selected window. When this is unchecked, the shutters are positioned against the wall on either side of the window.   Sides Specify which sides of the selected window receive shutters.   l Select Automatic to assign shutters to both sides of the window as long as there is sufficient room on the wall. If the window is next to a wall intersection or corner, the shutter closest to the intersection will not generate.   l Select Left Side Only to assign a shutter to the left side of the window and none on the right.   l Select Both Sides to assign shutters to both sides of the window under all circumstances, even if there isn’t enough room on the wall for one or both of them.   l Select Right Side Only to assign a shutter to the right side of the window and none on the left.   Preview A preview of the selected window displays on the right. Shutters will only generate if there is sufficient room for them along the window's containing wall. In order to see the shutters, you may need to rotate the preview to show the Exterior. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22.   OPENING INDICATORS PANEL The settings on the OPENING INDICATORS panel are also found on the panel of the same name in the Door Specification dialog. See Opening Indicators Panel on page 570.   ROUGH OPENING PANEL The settings on the ROUGH OPENING panel are also found on the panel of the same name in the Door Specification dialog. See Rough Opening Panel on page 572.   FRAMING PANEL The settings on the FRAMING panel are also found on the panel of the same name in the Door Specification dialog. See Framing Panel on page 573.   ENERGY VALUES PANEL The settings on the ENERGY VALUES panel let you specify information used for export to REScheck. See Export to REScheck on page 1240. 606 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Window Specification Dialog This panel is not available in the Wall Niche Specification dialog.   Assembly l Select a Frame Type and Glazing Type from the drop-down lists.   l In the Door Specification dialog, instead select a Door Type from the drop-down list.   Energy Values l Specify the selected window’s U-Factor.   l Specify the selected window’s SHGC (Solar Heat Gain Coefficient).   LAYER PANEL The settings on the LAYER panel are the same as those found on the same panel in dialogs throughout the program. See Layer Panel on page 186.   MATERIALS PANEL The settings on the MATERIALS panel are the same as those found on the same panel in dialogs throughout the program. See Materials Panel on page 1055. The settings on the MATERIALS panel of the Mulled Unit Specification dialog apply to all components of the blocked unit. Any settings made for individual components of the blocked unit are overridden here.   LABEL PANEL Window labels display in plan view and cross section/elevation views when the “Windows, Labels” layer is turned on and use the Text Style assigned to that layer. See Window Labels on page 587.   Similarly, Wall Niche labels display in plan view  and cross section/elevation views  when the “Wall Niches, Labels” layer is turned on and use the Text Style assigned to that layer. See Window Labels on page 587.   For more information about the settings on this panel. See Label Panel on page 700.   607 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Bay, Box, and Bow Windows COMPONENTS PANEL The information on the COMPONENTS panel can be used in the materials list. For more information, see Components Panel on page 1330.   OBJECT INFORMATION PANEL The information entered on the OBJECT INFORMATION panel can be used in schedules and the materials list. For more information, see Object Information Panel on page 1331.   SCHEDULE PANEL The settings on the SCHEDULE panel determine which schedule categories the selected window is included in. See Schedule Panel on page 704.   MANUFACTURER PANEL The MANUFACTURER panel provides contact information for the selected window’s manufacturer. Only available for windows from Manufacturer library catalogs. See Manufacturer Catalogs on page 961.   Bay, Box, and Bow Windows Bay, Box and Bow Windows are created much the way regular windows are: select a tool, then click a wall to place that window type. Chief Architect automatically builds a foundation under bay/box/bow windows placed on Floor 1 unless they are raised from their original position. That section of the foundation wall is also a bay/box/bow, but without windows. If the foundation was generated before the window is placed, the foundation must be rebuilt or edited manually. DISPLAYING BAY, BOX, AND BOW WINDOWS The display of bay, box, and bow windows is controlled in the Layer Display Options dialog. See Layer Display Options Dialog on page 179. Like other windows, bay, box, and bow windows can display labels. Either a single label for the unit can be used, or a separate label for each component. See Window Labels on page 587. Bay, box, and bow window width and radius dimensions, which display in plan view when specified to do so in the window’s specification dialog, are placed on the “Dimensions” layer. See Options Panel on page 615.   EDITING BAY, BOX, AND BOW WINDOWS Bay, box, and bow windows are edited similar to regular windows with one exception: in plan view, a diamond-shaped Depth edit handle displays on the section. Drag this Depth handle outward to increase the depth, or inward to decrease the depth of the unit. See Editing Windows on page 588. 608 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Bay, Box, and Bow Windows Bay, box, and bow windows can also be edited in their respective specification dialogs. See Bay/Box and Bow Window Specification Dialogs on page 613. A variety of style attributes can be assigned to bay/box/bow windows using Style Palettes. See Style Palettes on page 279. COMPONENT WINDOWS A component window within a bay, box, or bow window can be edited like others standard window, with a few restrictions. To select a component window, click at the location of the component in question, then click the Select Next Object edit button or press the Tab key. l Only the bay or box window component that was clicked on is selected using this method. If you need to select a different component, click on it and repeat the process. l In a bow window, all components are identical, so only one component can be selected. Changing this component changes them all. An individual component window can be resized using the edit handles or by changing settings in the component’s Window Specification dialog. Component windows can also be resized using the Transform/Replicate Object dialog. See Transform/Replicate Object Dialog on page 266. When a bay/box/bow window is first created, there is room for one standard trimmer on each side of each component window. When the bay as a whole is moved and resized, its components automatically resize so that a standard trimmer is still accommodated. If you increase a component window’s width to the point where there is not enough room for standard trimmers, a thinner trimmer can be used. The size of this thinner trimmer is specified in the Build Framing dialog. See Openings Panel on page 865.   If a component window is resized, it retains its size if at all possible when the containing bay/box/bow window is moved or resized. If the bay is resized in such a way that the component is too large to fit even with a thinner trimmer, the component resumes its default behavior, resizing as the containing bay window is resized. FLOORS AND CEILINGS When originally created, the floor and ceiling within a bay, box, or bow window are the same heights as the floor and ceiling of the room in which it is placed. 609 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Bay, Box, Bow Windows and Roofs Both the top and bottom heights of these window units can be adjusted in its specification dialog or a 3D view using its edit handles to create a lowered ceiling and/or a bench seat or garden window. When the ceiling is lowered, the top heights of the walls that define the window unit are also lowered. When a roof is built over the unit, its height will be affected, as well. When the bottom of the window is raised to create a bench seat, the unit’s walls will not reach the ground. As a result, window units with bench seats will have no foundation beneath them when the foundation is built. EXPLODE BAY/BOW WINDOW Click the Explode Bay/Bow Window edit button to explode a selected Bay/Box/Bow Window into its component parts. The walls and windows can be edited individually and, if the original window had a Lowered Ceiling or Raised Floor, a new, editable room will be also created. Walls created when the Explode Bay/Bow Window tool is used will have Treat As Part Of Bay/Bow/Bow Window checked in the Wall Specification dialog, which affects how the roof above is generated. See Roof Panel on page 398. Rooms created when this tool is used will have Raised Floor For Bump Out checked in the Room Specification dialog, allowing its floor platform to build independent of the ceiling of a room on the floor level below. See Structure Panel on page 439.   Once exploded, it is not possible to block the components into a Bay/Box/Bow Window object again.   Bay, Box, Bow Windows and Roofs Several different roof styles can be specified for Bay, Box and Bow window units in the Bay/Box and Bow Specification dialogs. See General Panel on page 613. If you change a Bay, Box, or Bow Window’s roof specification, you will need to rebuild the roofs to see the changes. See Rebuilding Roofs on page 796. HIP ROOFS By default, a hip roof is built above the unit when roofs are automatically generated. Bay and Bow Windows with angled side walls also receive two additional roof planes that produce a ridge at the back of the bump-out's roof, sometimes referred to as a California ridge. No roof directives need to be selected in the Bay/Box/Bow Specification dialog to produce this roof. 610 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Bay, Box, Bow Windows and Roofs Hip roofs over Bay, Box, and Bow Windows USE THE EXISTING ROOF To generate a standard roof that ignores a Bay, Box, or Bow Window, check Use Existing Roof. Existing roof extending over and following the shape of Bay, Box, and Bow Windows With this option the Bay, Box, or Bow Windows is tucked under the roof eave. You may find it necessary to increase the width of the eave. See Roof Panel on page 798. EXTEND THE EXISTING ROOF To have the main roof extend down over the window unit and follow the shape of the unit, select Extend Existing Roof Over. Existing roof extending over and following the shape of Bay, Box, and Bow Windows To extend the main roof down over a window unit to create a rectangular roof over it rather than one that follows its shape, select both Extend Existing Roof over and Rectangular Roof Over. 611 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Bay, Box, Bow Windows and Roofs Existing roof extending rectangular bumpouts over Bay, Box, and Bow Windows For this roof style, the ceiling heights of the window unit and the adjacent room must be the same. If you lower the ceiling of the window unit and then build the roof, a lower hip roof over the window is created. See Floors and Ceilings on page 609. If a header is desired over the window unit, first build the roof, then lower the ceiling of the window unit. Once the ceiling is lowered, select Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings . Do not rebuild roof planes. RECTANGULAR HIP ROOFS To create a rectangular-shaped hip roof above a Bay, Box, or Bow window, select Rectangular Roof Over. Rectangular-shaped hip roofs over Bay, Box, and Bow Windows GABLE ROOF A gable roof is not one of the automatic options for the roof above a Bay, Box, or Bow Window. A gable can be created by manually editing the rectangular hip roofs that are automatically created. See Roof Planes on page 804. To create a gable over a bay window 1. Select a Bay, Box, or Bow window, open its specification dialog, and choose the Rectangular Roof Over option. 2. Rebuild the roof. 3. Select one of the side roof planes and drag the corner edit handle located at front end of the ridge forward until the fascia snaps to the edge of the front hip section. 4. Edit the other side roof plane in the same manner.   5. Delete the front hip section.   6. Adjust the roof’s overhang as needed.   612 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Bay/Box and Bow Window Specification Dialogs To create a gable roof over a normal window, use the Gable Over Door/Window edit button. See Gable/Roof Lines on page 830. Bay/Box and Bow Window Specification Dialogs To open the Bay/Box Window Specification or the Bow Window Specification dialog, select one or more Bay, Box, or Bow Windows and click the Open Object edit button. See Bay, Box, and Bow Windows on page 608. The options in this dialog can only be set for objects placed in a plan: Bay, Box, and Bow Windows do not have defaults dialogs. The settings that are available in these dialogs depend on whether the selected object is a Bay, Box, or Bow Window.   The Bay/Box and Bow Window Specification dialogs have the following panels:   GENERAL PANEL Sections The setting that displays here depends on whether the selected window is a Bay, Box, or Bow Window.   613 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Bay/Box and Bow Window Specification Dialogs l Specify the Bay Angle, which is the angle of the side components of a Bay or Box Window. Bay Windows have an angle of 45° by default; Box Windows have an angle of 90°. l Specify the Quantity, which is the number of component windows in a Bow Window.   Size Specify the Width and Depth of the Bay, Box, or Bow Window. Wall Type Specify the Wall Type used by the walls embedded in the selected Bay, Box, or Bow Window. See Wall Type Definitions on page 384. l Select “Use Main Wall Type” from the drop-down list to use the same wall type as that of the wall that the window unit is placed in. If the main wall is a Pony Wall, both wall types are used.   l Select a specific wall type from the drop-down list to use it instead of the Main Wall Type.   l When a specific wall type is selected, click the Define button to modify its definition. See Wall Type Definitions Dialog on page 387.   Ceiling Specify the height and structure of the Ceiling within the selected window. l Check Has Lowered Ceiling to enable the settings that follow. When this is unchecked, the ceiling height and finish material within the window is the same as that for the adjacent room. l Specify the Height Lowered, which is measured from the ceiling height of the adjacent room. Note: If the Height Lowered is 0”, Has Lowered Ceiling will become unchecked when you click OK. l Specify the Finish Thickness, which is the thickness of the ceiling’s finish material.   l Specify the Structure Thickness, which is the thickness of the ceiling’s structural layer.   Floor Specify the height and structure of the Floor within the selected window. l Check Has Raised Floor to enable the settings that follow. When this is unchecked, the floor height and material within the window is the same as that for the adjacent room. l Specify the Height Raised, which is the measured from the floor height of the adjacent room. Note: If the Height Raised is 0”, Has Raised Floor will become unchecked when you click OK. l Check Use Floor Finish to measure the Height Raised distance from the surface of the floor finish. When unchecked, as it is by default, this height is measured from the subfloor.   l Specify the Finish Thickness, which is the thickness of the floor’s finish material.   l Specify the Structure Thickness, which is the thickness of the floor’s structural layer.   614 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Bay/Box and Bow Window Specification Dialogs OPTIONS PANEL Roof Specify the structure of the automatic roof over the selected window unit. See Bay, Box, Bow Windows and Roofs on page 610. l Check Use Existing Roof if the existing roof needs no changes to accommodate the bay window. l Check Extend Existing Roof Over to extend the existing roof plane to cover the bay window below. l Check Rectangular Roof Over to create a roof over the bay window that is square across the end instead of following the profile of the roof. Dimensions Specify the appearance of the selected window unit’s dimensions in plan view. These dimensions are drawn on the "Dimensions" layer but cannot be selected. See Dimensions on page 448. l Check Display Standard Dimension to display the automatically-produced dimensions that show the window’s width and depth. l Check Display Dimensions to Center to display a Bow Window’s radial dimension. Components Specify the structure of the selected window unit’s components and the wall sections containing them. l Uncheck Has Component Windows to remove the component windows of the selected Bay, Box, or Bow Window and disable the settings that follow.   l Check No Trimmers for Components to eliminate the trimmer studs for Bay and Box Window components, allowing the width of each component window to increase. See Wall Framing on page 852.   l Check No Framing Between Components to remove both studs between the component windows.   615 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Bay/Box and Bow Window Specification Dialogs Note: If the selected unit is moved or resized, its components automatically resize to use a standard trimmer, regardless of whether either of the two options above are selected. l Check Connect Outer Casing to have exterior casing surround the component windows of a Bow Window as a group rather than individually. Mullions are provided between components. This is how interior casing is always created.   l Check Components Recessed to recess the component windows into the wall and enable the settings that follow. Typically used if the window is placed in a brick wall and you want to produce a brick molding.   l Select To Main Layer to recess the components to the wall’s Main Layer instead of the exterior wall surface. See The Main Layer on page 385.   l Select To Sheathing Layer to recess the components to the sheathing layer instead of the exterior wall surface.   LAYER PANEL For information about using the LAYER panel, see Layer Panel on page 186.   MATERIALS PANEL The settings on the MATERIALS panel are the same as those found on the same panel in dialogs throughout the program. See Materials Panel on page 1055. LABEL PANEL Bay, Box, and Bow Window labels display in plan view  and cross section/elevation views  when the “Windows, Labels” layer is turned on and use the Text Style assigned to that layer. See Window Labels on page 587.   For more information about the settings on this panel. See  Label Panel on page 700.   COMPONENTS PANEL The information on the COMPONENTS panel can be used in the materials list. See Components Panel on page 1330.   OBJECT INFORMATION PANEL The information entered on the OBJECT INFORMATION panel can be used in schedules and the materials list. For more information, see Object Information Panel on page 1331.   SCHEDULE PANEL The settings on the SCHEDULE panel determine which schedule categories the selected object is included in. See Schedule Panel on page 704.   616

Cabinets Chapter 17 With Chief Architect’s cabinet tools you can create base, wall, and full height cabinets as well as soffits, shelves, partitions, and custom countertops. These objects are very versatile, allowing for a wide range of customization. A selection of cabinet door and drawer styles are available in the Library Browser and, in addition, a numerous cabinet manufacturer catalogs are available for download on our website, chiefarchitect.com. Chief Architect also has many customized cabinets and cabinet groups available in the library. Cabinets you have customized can be saved to your own library for future use. TOPICS Cabinet Defaults 618 The Cabinet Tools 621 Cabinet Fillers 624 Placing Cabinets and Fillers 625 Countertops 627 Displaying Cabinets 628 Cabinet Labels 630 Cabinet Construction 633 Editing Cabinets 634 Editing Cabinet Styles 636 Special Cabinets 639 Cabinet Specification Dialog 643 Cabinet Shelf Specification Dialog 658 Hardware Size/Orientation Dialog 659 Shelf/Partition Specification Dialog 660 Custom Countertop Specification Dialog 662 617 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Cabinet Defaults Cabinet Defaults There are several defaults dialogs for cabinets. Access Default Settings by selecting Edit> Default Settings, then clicking the arrow beside “Cabinets”. Select a subheading and click the Edit button to open the defaults dialog associated with your selection. The Cabinet Defaults dialogs can also be accessed by double-clicking the Cabinet Tools parent button.   Double-clicking a Cabinet Tools child button also opens its corresponding defaults dialog, if that object has a defaults dialog.   The Base, Wall, and Full Height Cabinet Defaults can be multiple-selected by holding down the Shift or Control keys. See Shift and Ctrl Select on page 214.   Each type of cabinet object has default definitions for size, style, materials and much more. In fact, the default dialog for each cabinet type is similar to its corresponding specification dialog. For descriptions of these settings, see Cabinet Specification Dialog on page 643, Shelf/Partition Specification Dialog on page 660 and Soffit Specification Dialog on page 1034. Cabinet Fillers and Custom Countertops do not have defaults dialogs. Instead, their initial settings are based on the those of other objects.   l Base Cabinet Fillers’ initial settings are based on Base Cabinet Defaults.   l Wall Cabinet Fillers’ initial settings are based on Wall Cabinet Defaults.   l Full Height Cabinet Fillers’ initial settings are based on Full Height Cabinet Defaults.   l Custom Countertops’ initial settings are based on Base Cabinet Default settings but are also influenced by the settings of cabinets beneath them. See Countertops on page 627.   DYNAMIC CABINET DEFAULTS When a dynamic default is changed, existing cabinet objects using the default value are affected. See Dynamic Defaults on page 79.   The following cabinet default values are dynamic: Separation, Backsplash Height and Thickness, Countertop Overhang and Thickness, Toe Kick Height and Depth, Side and Vertical Overlap, Stiles, and  Hardware spacing.   All Materials are also dynamic. In addition, the Cabinet Defaults can be set up to refer dynamically to information in the Material Defaults dialog. This makes it easy to have all cabinet objects in a plan use the same default materials. See Material Defaults Dialog on page 1051.   618 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Cabinet Defaults To use dynamic cabinet Material Defaults 1. Specify the desired materials for the cabinet categories in the Material Defaults dialog:   l “Cabinets” can be linked to the default cabinet box, cabinet interior, shelves, and toe kicks as well as to Shelves and Partitions.   l “Cabinet Door/Drawer” can be linked to the default frames and panels of cabinet doors and drawers.   l “Countertop” can be linked to the default countertop.   l “Hardware” can be linked to the default door and drawer pulls and hinges.   2. On the MATERIALS panel of the Base Cabinet Defaults dialog, select the first object component and click the Select Material button.   3. The Select Material dialog opens:   l On the LIBRARY MATERIAL panel, check Use default material, or   l On the PLAN MATERIAL panel, select “Use Default” at the top of the list.   4. Click OK, then repeat this step for each of the components in the list.   5. Repeat steps 2-4 in each of the Cabinet Defaults dialogs.   SET AS DEFAULT You can set the attributes for a cabinet placed in your plan as the defaults for that cabinet type. See Set as Default on page 79. Note: Set as Default is not available for special shaped cabinets. Only Standard cabinets can be the default cabinet type. See Special Cabinets on page 639. GENERAL CABINET DEFAULTS The General Cabinet Defaults dialog can be accessed only from the Default Settings dialog. 619 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Cabinet Defaults Automatic Behaviors l Specify the Minimum Cabinet Width. The smallest allowable value is 1/16 of an inch (10 mm). l Specify the Minimum Shelf Spacing inside Door and Opening face items. l Specify the Auto Door Threshold, which controls when Auto Left and Auto Right doors switch from single to double doors. When the opening behind an Auto door is this size or smaller, the Auto door is single; when the opening is larger than this value, a double door is applied. See Front/Sides/Back Panel on page 648.   l Uncheck Create Automatic Fillers to prevent fillers from automatically generating in spaces between cabinets. This setting is dynamic: changing it will affect cabinets already present in your plan. See Cabinet Fillers on page 624.   l Uncheck Create Automatic Fillers for Angled Connections to prevent fillers from automatically generating in spaces between cabinets that meet at only one corner. See Special Cabinets on page 639. l Uncheck Create Automatic Blind Corner Cabinets to prevent blind corner cabinets from being created. This setting is dynamic: changing it will affect cabinets already present in your plan. See Blind Cabinets on page 642.   620 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - The Cabinet Tools Cabinet Resizing Specify how Cabinet Resizing takes place when the edit handles are used. l Select Use Grid Snaps to resize cabinets using Snap Grid increments. See Grid Snaps on page 163.   l Select Use Resize Increment to resize cabinets using the increment specified here.   l Set the Resize Increment at which cabinets resize. The minimum allowable increment is 1/16 of an inch (10 mm). Plan Display Options l Check Show Partial Module Lines to represent module lines as grey lines that do not extend across the cabinets. When this is unchecked, lines between merged cabinet modules display as specified by the “Cabinets, Module Lines” layer. See Displaying Cabinets on page 628.   l Check Show Closed Doors/Drawers and Panels to display closed cabinet doors, drawers, and panels in plan view. When unchecked, these items are not shown. See Displaying Cabinets on page 628. l Check Show Pilasters to display corner and front pilasters in plan view. See Pilasters, Feet, and Moldings on page 638.   The Cabinet Tools Select Build> Cabinet to access the Cabinet Tools. Cabinets are easily created with a single click in plan view or any camera view. See Click-to-Create on page 164. Typically, groups of cabinet objects are positioned closely together and arranged to form work spaces, and there are some special behaviors and techniques to be aware of. See Placing Cabinets and Fillers on page 625. Once created, cabinets, soffits, shelves, partitions and fillers can be selected and edited much like other box-based objects. See Editing Cabinets on page 634. BASE CABINETS Base cabinets can be placed directly under wall cabinets and generate a countertop and toe kick by default. WALL CABINETS Wall cabinets can be placed directly over base cabinets. FULL HEIGHT CABINETS Full height cabinets generate a toe kick by default and cannot be placed on top of other cabinets. BASE, WALL, AND FULL HEIGHT FILLERS The Base, Wall, and Full Height Filler tools place fillers that look and behave similarly to their corresponding cabinet tools. See Cabinet Filler Tools on page 624. 621 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - The Cabinet Tools SOFFITS Soffits typically fill the space between cabinet tops and the ceiling, but can also be used to create any object that can be modeled as a 3D box. To place a soffit, select Build> Cabinet> Soffit and click in any view. By default, soffits use the material assigned to interior walls in the Material Defaults dialog. Like cabinets, soffits can have molding profiles applied to them. For more information about using soffits for a variety of purposes, see Other Objects on page 1014. SHELVES Select Build> Cabinet> Shelf and click in any view to create a shelf. Create corner shelves by placing one shelf on each wall, then moving or stretching them until they touch. Once created, shelves can be selected and edited. See Shelf/Partition Specification Dialog on page 660. You can also specify shelves inside base, wall, and full height cabinet boxes. See Cabinet Shelf Specification Dialog on page 658.   PARTITIONS Select Build> Cabinet> Partition button and click in any view to create a vertical partition. Like shelves, partitions can be selected and edited after they are placed. Partitions can be used with shelves to create complex storage systems. CUSTOM COUNTERTOPS Custom Countertops are drawn and edited just like other closed-polyline based objects. Select Build> Cabinet> Custom Countertop, then either click and drag a rectangle or single-click to place a 2’x2’ countertop. See Countertops on page 627.   You can also generate a custom countertop over one or more base cabinets using the Generate Custom Countertop edit tool. See Using the Edit Tools on page 635.   CUSTOM COUNTER HOLES Select Build> Cabinet> Custom Counter Hole, then either click and drag a rectangle or single-click to place a 2’x2’ countertop hole. Custom Counter Holes must be drawn within an existing Custom Countertop, can be drawn in any view except cross section/elevation views and can be edited to any shape. See Editing Custom Countertops on page 627.   CUSTOM BACKSPLASHES Select Build> Cabinet> Custom Backsplash while an elevation or camera view is active, then either click and drag a rectangle or single-click on a wall surface to place a Custom Backsplash Layered Material Polyline on that wall. See Custom Backsplashes on page 1037. A custom backsplash can also be created using the Convert Polyline edit tool. See Convert Polyline on page 262.   622 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - The Cabinet Tools CABINET LIBRARY CATALOGS In the Library Browser, browse to Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Architectural> Cabinets to access a selection of specialty cabinets. Select the library object you want, then click in any view to place it in the plan. Once placed, library cabinets can be edited. See Placing Library Objects on page 972. A selection of cabinet manufacturer catalogs is also available for download. These catalogs include door and drawer styles and may also provide moldings and millwork, finishes, and hardware. See Manufacturer Catalogs on page 961.   In addition, you can add single cabinets and blocked units to the library. See Adding Library Content on page 965 and Architectural Blocks on page 1007.   CABINET DOORS, DRAWERS, AND PANELS CATALOGS A selection of cabinet door panels, drawer fronts, and specialty cabinet storage options can be found in the Library Browser in Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Architectural> Cabinet Doors, Drawers, and Panels. l Doors, drawers, and panels can be assigned to a cabinet in its specification dialog. See Door/Drawer Panel on page 652 and Accessories Panel on page 655. l Select a door or drawer in the library, then click on a cabinet in your plan to place the door or drawer onto that cabinet. Side and back panels cannot be applied to cabinets using this approach. See Inserted Objects on page 973. l Cabinet doors and drawers can also be placed as stand-alone fixtures. Once placed, they can be edited like other standalone library objects. See Editing Library Objects on page 970. You can create custom cabinet doors and drawers and save them in the library for future use. See Convert to Symbol on page 1002.   BUILT-IN SINKS AND APPLIANCES A variety of fixtures and appliances such as sinks, cooktops, and dishwashers can be placed into cabinets. See Inserted Objects on page 973. Place fixtures and appliances into cabinets early, so that any resizing can be done while there is adequate free space. To insert a fixture into a cabinet, select the fixture in the Library Browser, then click on a cabinet. There must be enough space in the cabinet or adjoining cabinets to contain the selected fixture. Only one front mounted appliance can be inserted in this manner; however, additional front fixtures can be added in the Cabinet Specification dialog. See Front/Sides/Back Panel on page 648.   If a sink or cooktop is inserted into a cabinet with a top Drawer or Double Drawer, its Item Type will automatically change to a False Drawer or False Double Drawer. Once placed, an inserted fixture can be selected and edited: l To select a fixture in a cabinet top, click on it and then click the Select Next Object edit button. See Select Next Object on page 211. l Front fixtures can only be modified or deleted in the Cabinet Specification dialog. See Front/Sides/Back Panel on page 648. When a cabinet has a fixture on either its top or front, the Open Symbol edit button opens its specification dialog. When a cabinet has both, the Open Symbol button opens the specification dialog for the fixture on the front. When a cabinet has multiple front appliances, the Open Symbol edit button will not be available.   623 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Cabinet Fillers Fixtures can be added to both the top and front of the same cabinet. It is up to you to determine which can be effectively and safely combined in the real world. STORAGE AND ORGANIZATION INSERTS Rollout organizing and storage items can be specified  for any Door or Opening front item in the Cabinet Shelf Specification dialog. See Rollout Shelves and Storage on page 629.   Inserts for drawers and the backs of doors can be specified in the Door and Drawer Face Item Specification dialogs. See Door/Drawer Panel on page 652.   ELECTRICAL SWITCHES AND OUTLETS Electrical switches and outlets can be placed on cabinets in most views. See The Electrical Tools on page 668. Cabinet Fillers Cabinet fillers can be created automatically, placed manually, or specified as part of a cabinet's face frame.   All three types of fillers are included in the Materials List and are rounded to the nearest 1/16” (1 mm). Automatic and manually placed fillers are listed as individual items, while extended stiles are listed as components of their cabinets. Manually placed Cabinet Fillers can be listed in Cabinet Schedules, as can information about any cabinets' extended stiles. Auto fillers, however, are not listed. See Cabinet Schedules on page 630.   AUTOMATIC FILLERS By default, Chief Architect automatically generates fillers when cabinets of the same height are either touching or placed with 3” (75 mm) of one another. Automatic fillers receive the same toe kick, moldings, and backsplash as adjacent cabinets, and model a continuous countertop. If two cabinets meeting at a corner are separated from each other by 3” (75 mm) or less, the program will automatically generate a filler in the angle between them. A filler is used to separate the front of one of these cabinets from the one it meets so that drawers and doors have room to operate. You can specify whether these automatic fillers generate in both situations the General Cabinet Defaults dialog. See General Cabinet Defaults on page 619.   CABINET FILLER TOOLS If you prefer, you can place cabinet fillers manually using Cabinet Fillers. Select Build> Cabinet, choose the desired tool from the submenu, then click to place a filler just as you would a cabinet, in any view.   624 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Placing Cabinets and Fillers Base Cabinet Fillers are composed of a front surface, a toe kick and a section of countertop.   Wall Cabinet Fillers are composed of a front surface only.   Full Height Cabinet Fillers are composed of a front surface and a toe kick.   By default, fillers are 3" (75 mm) wide with a single Blank face item, and inherit their other attributes from the defaults for their associated cabinet type. See Cabinet Defaults on page 618. You can convert a regular base, wall or full height cabinet into a filler by checking Filler in the Cabinet Specification dialog. Similarly, a cabinet filler can be converted to a regular cabinet by unchecking this box. See General Panel on page 644.   Once created, manually placed cabinet fillers can be edited much like regular cabinets. See Editing Cabinets on page 634.   EXTENDED FACE FRAMES You can also produce fillers by extending the front face on either side of a Framed cabinet. These extended stiles take precedence over the automatic fillers, but otherwise behave much like them. They affect the generation of toe kicks, moldings, backsplashes, and countertops but do not extend into adjacent walls or cabinets. See Box Construction Panel on page 647. In plan view, extended stiles on cabinets are represented using lines on the cabinet's primary layer. In cabinet labels, they are indicated using "XL", "XR", and "XLR". See In Plan View on page 628 and Cabinet Labels on page 630. Placing Cabinets and Fillers Cabinets and cabinet fillers are easily created with a single click in any view. See Click-to-Create on page 164. When used near a wall corner, the Cabinet Tools will produce corner cabinets and soffits. See Corner Cabinets on page 639. When created, cabinets are positioned relative to the floor of the room in which they are placed. Base and full height cabinets typically rest on the floor while wall cabinets are placed a set distance above the floor. See Cabinet Defaults on page 618. If the ceiling height of the room does not accommodate the height of a cabinet, its Floor to Bottom value will be retained and its Height will be reduced so that it fits under the ceiling. When this happens, some front items may be removed from the cabinet if there is not enough room for them. See Front/Sides/Back Panel on page 648. Because cabinets are typically organized into groups with shared attributes, they have some special behaviors. CABINET SNAPPING AND ALIGNING Cabinets have several special snapping and aligning behaviors which help you create precisely aligned cabinets quickly and easily. l When Base and/or Full Height cabinets are within 3” of one another’s sides, they will snap together. Wall cabinets snap in a similar manner, but only with other Wall cabinets. l When Base and/or Full Height cabinets are within 3” of one another’s sides and their front or back surfaces are within 3” of aligning, they will become aligned. Wall cabinets snap in a similar manner with other Wall cabinets as well as Full Height cabinets. 625 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Placing Cabinets and Fillers l When a Base and/or Full Height cabinet is placed against the back of another Base or Full Height cabinet, its back surface will automatically face the other cabinet’s back. Wall cabinets snap in a similar manner with other Wall as well as Full Height cabinets. l When a cabinet or cabinet filler is placed against a wall, its back and/or side will snap to the wall and, if the wall is moved, the cabinet will move with it. When cabinets are snapped to a wall or to other cabinets, only exposed end cabinets have side counter overhangs, closed toe kicks, feet and corner pilasters. Adjacent cabinet fronts share front pilasters. Cabinet snapping and aligning occurs even when Object Snaps are turned off; however, you can override this behavior by moving a cabinet into the desired position using dimensions. See Moving Objects Using Dimensions on page 483. CABINET MERGING When cabinets of the same height and type are placed side-by-side within 3” (30 mm) of one another they will automatically merge, making any shared components such as the toe kick, countertop, backsplash, and moldings continuous. Any gap between merged cabinets will be automatically filled. The exposed ends of merged cabinets have side counter overhangs, closed toe kicks, feet and corner pilasters. Adjacent merged cabinets share front pilasters. Cabinets placed at different angles will also merge if they face toward one another and meet at a front corner. Cabinets that meet at a back corner will also merge provided that they face away from one another at an angle no greater than 87°. In either case, a filler is created in the angle between the two. If the side of a cabinet is placed within 3” (30 mm) of a wall, the countertop will extend to the wall and a filler will be created. Cabinet merging occurs even when Object Snaps are turned off; however, you can suppress this behavior for cabinets that do not actually touch by turning off Create Automatic Fillers. See General Cabinet Defaults on page 619. BASE AND WALL CABINETS Base and wall cabinets have different default heights, so they can be placed directly above or below one another without interference. You can use Object Snaps to center a wall cabinet’s back center point above that of a base cabinet, or vice versa. See Click-to-Create on page 164. MINIMUM CABINET SIZE If you try to place a cabinet into a space that is too narrow for its default size, the program will place a smaller cabinet with a width that is a multiple of the default Resize Increment. For example, if you try to place a 24” wide cabinet in a 20” wide space and your Resize Increment is 3”, the program places an 18” cabinet. See General Cabinet Defaults on page 619. If you try to place a cabinet into a space narrower than the default Minimum Cabinet Width, a cabinet will not be placed. If, for example, you have a space that is 8” and your Minimum Cabinet Width is 9”, no cabinet is placed. CABINET FILLERS By default, the program will automatically place a filler between cabinets that are within 3” of one another. You can instead turn off Create Automatic Fillers and place fillers manually.   626 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Countertops Countertops Countertops are automatically generated on top of base cabinets, but can also be drawn manually. AUTOMATIC COUNTERTOPS Base cabinets automatically receive countertops as specified in the Base Cabinet Defaults dialog. These default countertops are components of the cabinets and can be edited in the Cabinet Specification dialog, but cannot be selected and modified separately. The overhangs on automatic countertops are clipped on any side where the cabinet is positioned against or within 3" (75 mm) of a wall, a Full Height Cabinet, a Partition, or free-standing appliance from the Library. Edge profiles on those sides are also suppressed, as are toe kicks. CUSTOM COUNTERTOPS When an automatic countertop does not meet your needs, you can instead use a Custom Countertop. In any view except a cross section/elevation, select Build> Cabinet> Custom Countertop, then either click and drag a rectangle or single-click to place a 2’x2’ countertop polyline. This countertop can be selected independent of any cabinets beneath it and is edited just like other closed-polyline based objects. See Editing Closed Polyline-Based Objects on page 228. When a Custom Countertop covers any portion of a base cabinet, it overrides that cabinet's automatic countertop and bases its thickness and height on the base cabinet below.   l If there are multiple cabinets below, it uses the specifications for the cabinet with the greatest overall height.   l If there is no base cabinet below, its height and thickness are based on the base cabinet defaults. See Cabinet Defaults on page 618. If a sink or built-in appliance is added to the cabinet, a hole for the fixture is automatically cut in the Custom Countertop. By default, if a side of a Custom Countertop is positioned against a wall, the edge profile on that side will not generate. You can also generate a Custom Countertop over one or more selected base cabinets by clicking the Generate Custom Countertop edit button. See Using the Edit Tools on page 635. When created in this manner, the Custom Countertop inherits the cabinet's countertop material. If the cabinet has a To Top molding profile at counter height, the Custom Countertop will inherit it, as well. See Pilasters, Feet, and Moldings on page 638.   EDITING CUSTOM COUNTERTOPS Once created, a custom countertop or Custom Counter Hole can be selected in 2D and 3D views and edited like other closed-polyline based objects. See Editing Closed Polyline-Based Objects on page 228.   627 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Displaying Cabinets Custom countertops initially use the default countertop material set in the Base Cabinet Defaults dialog. You can specify a different material as well as the height and position in the Custom Countertop Specification dialog. See Custom Countertop Specification Dialog on page 662.   You can also specify the edge profile of a custom countertop in the Custom Countertop Specification dialog. See Moldings Panel on page 661.   WATERFALL COUNTERTOPS To add a vertical waterfall to the edge of a Custom Countertop, select that edge and click the Add Waterfall to Selected Edge edit button. See Selected Edge on page 212.   You can also specify a waterfall edge as well as edit its attributes in the Custom Countertop Specification dialog. See General Panel on page 662.   To remove a waterfall from a countertop edge, select that edge and click the Remove Waterfall from Selected Edge edit tool.   Displaying Cabinets The display of the various cabinet object types, labels, module lines, door opening indicators, and more is controlled in the Layer Display Options dialog. See Layer Attributes on page 177. IN PLAN VIEW Fill Styles and colors that display in plan view can be assigned to cabinet objects. See Fill Styles on page 192.   Like other objects, cabinets are placed in Drawing Groups that affect whether they display in front of or behind other objects in plan view. By default, wall cabinets, soffits and shelves are drawn in front of base and full height cabinets, countertops and partitions. You can modify a selected  cabinet’s place in the drawing order by clicking the View Drawing Group Edit Tools edit button. See Drawing Group Edit Tools on page 190. Objects assigned to cabinets, including hardware and moldings, are located on the same layer as their parent object. They display in 3D views, but are not shown in plan view. There are a few exceptions: l Both automatic and Custom Countertops are drawn on the “Cabinets, Countertops” layer in all views. In plan view, countertops use the line style, color, and weight assigned to this layer; in 3D views, the line attributes of the parent object’s layer is used instead. l Cabinet doors, drawers, and panels are drawn on the “Cabinets, Doors & Drawers” layer in all views. When closed, however, they only display in 3D views by default. See Cabinet Doors and Drawers on page 629, below. l End panels are also drawn on the "Cabinets, Doors & Drawers" layer and only display in 3D views by default. l Closed Doors, Drawers and Panels as well as Pilasters can be set to display in plan view in the General Cabinet Defaults dialog. See General Cabinet Defaults on page 619. l You can also display cabinet front indicator arrows in plan view by turning on the “Cabinets, Front Indicators” layer. Both automatic and Custom Countertops can be assigned an edge profile, and can display the width of this profile when Display Molding Edges in Plan Views is selected in the Base Cabinet or Custom Countertop Specification dialog. If you wish to display this or any cabinet molding in plan view on its own layer, use the Make Cabinet Molding Polyline edit tool. See Make Cabinet Molding Polyline on page 638. 628 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Displaying Cabinets By default, cabinet module lines display in plan view when cabinet objects of the same type are placed side by side. If you prefer that these lines not display, turn off the “Cabinets, Module Lines” layer. This layer also controls the display of the lines associated with extended face frames. You can also specify whether module lines are full or partial. See General Cabinet Defaults on page 619. Cabinet labels display in plan and cross section/elevation views when the “Cabinets, Labels” layer is turned on Text Style assigned to their layer. See Cabinet Labels on page 630. IN 3D VIEWS A cabinet’s label will display in cross section/elevation views when the “Cabinets, Labels” layer is turned on and the center point of the cabinet’s front is visible in the view. See Cabinet Labels on page 630.   In 3D Vector Views, cabinet doors can display opening indicator arrows. See Opening Indicators on page 549.   CABINET DOORS AND DRAWERS There are several options for controlling the display of cabinet doors and drawers in plan and 3D views.   Cabinet doors and drawers are drawn on the “Cabinets, Doors & Drawers” layer. In plan view, they use the line style, color, and weight assigned to that layer when they are set to display. In 3D Vector Views, they use the line style, color, and weight assigned to their parent cabinet’s layer.   l Cabinet doors and drawers can be drawn open or closed in both plan and 3D views.   l To draw a selected cabinet’s doors open in all views, click the Open Cabinet Doors edit button. Any shelves set as Rollout will display in 3D views as well.   l To draw its drawers open in all views, click the Open Cabinet Drawers edit button.   l To close the doors and/or drawers, click the Close Cabinet Doors or Close Cabinet Drawers edit button.   Cabinet doors and drawers also can be set to Show Open in the Cabinet Specification dialog. In addition, you can specify how far open each is drawn. See Front/Sides/Back Panel on page 648.   By default, doors and drawers do not display in plan view when they are closed: even when the “Cabinets, Doors & Drawers” layer is set to display. You can, however, check Show Closed Doors/Drawers in Plan Views in the General Cabinet Defaults dialog. See General Cabinet Defaults on page 619.   ROLLOUT SHELVES AND STORAGE Shelves can be specified for Door and Opening cabinet front items and are visible in 3D views. Those inside Doors will only display in 3D views when Doors and Rollout Shelves are set to Show Open. See Front/Sides/Back Panel on page 648.   Shelves can be specified as Rollout, each with its own rollout percentage, and will display in 3D views when Doors and Rollout Shelves are set to Show Open. If a Rollout shelf is in a Door item, the door must be set to 100% Percent Open in order for the shelf to draw open. See Cabinet Shelf Specification Dialog on page 658.   Cabinet shelves and added storage items do not display in plan view.   IN THE MATERIALS LIST The materials associated with cabinet objects are listed under different Categories in the Materials List:   l Cabinets - Lists Cabinets, Shelves, Partitions, Custom Countertops, Custom Backsplashes, Cabinet Fillers, storage and organization inserts, as well as cabinet doors and drawers placed from the library as free-standing objects.   629 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Cabinet Labels l Interior Trim - Lists Soffits and any moldings assigned to cabinet objects located in Interior rooms. Note that Soffits are not listed in the Materials List unless a non-default material is applied to them.   l Exterior Trim - Lists any Soffits and moldings assigned to cabinet objects located in Exterior rooms. See Room Types and Functions on page 415.   l Fixtures - Lists any sinks inserted into base cabinets. See Inserted Objects on page 973.   l Appliance - Lists any appliance fixtures inserted into cabinets. If a base cabinet has an under-counter appliance inserted into it, that cabinet will not be counted in the Materials List - only the countertop and backsplash materials associated with it will be listed. The cabinet will also display the appliance’s label information instead of its own. See Cabinet Labels on page 630.   As with other objects, there are a number of ways to control how, or whether, cabinets are included in the Materials List. See Organizing Materials Lists on page 1310.   You can add and edit information about a cabinet’s accessories in the Cabinet Specification dialog. See Components Panel on page 1330.   Note that cabinet door and drawer height is described in two different ways:   l In the Cabinet Specification dialog, the Item Height for cabinet doors and drawers describes the height of the opening in the cabinet box rather than that of the door or drawer front. See Front/Sides/Back Panel on page 648.   l In the Materials List, the full height of cabinet door and drawer front is listed in the Size column.   CABINET SCHEDULES The Cabinet Schedule tool is set up to produce customizable cabinet schedules as well as cabinet labels that display schedule numbers. Cabinet objects can, however, be included in any schedule. See Schedules and Object Labels on page 681.   In addition to cabinets, Soffits, Shelves, Partitions, free-standing cabinet panels, Countertops, Custom Backsplashes, and holes in Custom Countertops and Custom Backsplashes can also be listed in schedules. Manually-placed Cabinet Fillers can be listed, as well; however, automatically-generated fillers cannot. See Cabinet Fillers on page 624. Cabinet moldings and counter profiles can be included in schedules, as well. They are found in the "Molding" category, and have several molding-specific Columns, including "Total Length". If you specify a Type for a cabinet molding, it will be reported in the Description column. See Cabinet Moldings and Counter Profiles on page 930. Individual cabinets in Architectural Blocks are also included in cabinet schedules provided that they are set to be included and Treat as One Object is unchecked in the Architectural Block Specification dialog. See General Panel on page 1011.   By default, some cabinets with built-in appliances will not be included in a schedule. Examples include base cabinets with dishwashers or built-in ranges. You can, however, specify that the cabinet be included in one or more schedule categories if you wish. See Schedule Panel on page 704.   Cabinet Labels Labels for cabinets and cabinet fillers display in plan and cross section/elevation views when the “Cabinets, Labels” layer is turned on. See Label Panel on page 700. Shelves and Partitions can also display labels when the “Cabinets, Labels” layer is turned on, while Custom Countertop labels display when the “Polylines 3D, Labels” layer is turned on. Unlike cabinets and cabinet fillers, the Automatic Label for these objects is blank; however, you can specify a custom label in their specification dialogs. Cabinet labels have their own edit handles and can be moved and rotated when a cabinet is selected. They use the Text Style specified for the “Cabinets, Labels” layer. See Text Styles on page 538.   630 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Cabinet Labels If a base cabinet’s only front item aside from Separations and Blank Areas is an Appliance, the appliance’s label will display instead of the cabinet’s, and will be placed on the “Cabinets, Labels” layer.   Cabinet labels are available in three different formats:   l Automatic Labels, which include size, type and other information in abbreviated form.   l User-Specified, which are entered in the Cabinet Specification dialog. See Label Panel on page 700.   l Schedule Callout Labels, which are specified in the Cabinet Schedule Specification dialog. See Labels Panel on page 697.   The minimum on-screen display size of object labels can be specified in the Preferences dialog. See Appearance Panel on page 95.   AUTOMATIC LABELS The format for automatic cabinet labels has four parts: Key, Code, Size, and Door Swing.   The Key provides basic information about the cabinet box and its use. B refers to base cabinets, W refers to wall cabinets and U refers to full height cabinets.   Together with the key, the Code provides additional information about the shape of the cabinet box:   Code All Cabinets LS + Key Lazy Susan LSD + Key Lazy Susan Diagonal Door DC + Key Diagonal Door LC + Key Left Corner BC + Key Blind Corner PBC + Key Peninsula Blind Corner Key + P Peninsula Key + F Filler E + Key Right or Left End A + Key Angled Front PR + Key Peninsula Radius R + Key Radius End Key + XL Extend Left Face Frame Key + XR Extend Right Face Frame Key + XLR Extend Left and Right Face Frame B Base OB Oven Base SB Sink Base RB Range Base #DB Drawer Bank (# is the number of drawers 631 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Cabinet Labels Code FHB Full Height Base (1 full height door) W Wall Code above + #D Drawer (# is the number of drawers U Full Height (Utility) OTC Tall Oven RTC Tall Refrigerator Blind corner cabinets are dependent on the cabinet’s position in the plan. A cabinet can only be a blind corner cabinet when its front is partially hidden by another cabinet. See Blind Cabinets on page 642. If a cabinet is moved, therefore, its Code information may change.   Peninsula cabinets are only designated as such when they have one or more doors on the back side. See Front/Sides/Back Panel on page 648.   The Size follows the Code in a cabinet label. Cabinet width is always included in the label; depth and height, on the other hand, may be included depending on the cabinet type and whether they are standard or non-standard.   Base and full height cabinet labels present Size information in this order: width, depth, height. Wall cabinet labels present it in a slightly different order: width, height, depth.   Sizes Base W(D)(H) Width (W) Always included Depth (D) 24” (60 cm) Height (H) 34 1/2” (90 cm) Corner Depth (D) Depth = Width Wall WH(D) Width (W) Always included Depth (D) Always included Height (H) 12” (30 cm) Corner Depth (D) Depth = Width Full Height WDH Width (W) Always included Depth (D) Always included Height (H) Always included Corner Depth (D) Always included Door Swing is included at the end of the label as either L or R, but only if all the doors on a cabinet have the same swing.   Here are a few examples of automatic cabinet labels and their meanings:   l 3DB24: Base cabinet with 3 drawers, 24” wide. Depth and height are standard.   l SB24R: Sink base, 24” wide, with a right door. Depth and height are standard.   l BCW2436R: Blind wall cabinet, 24” wide, 36” high, with a right door. Depth is standard.   632 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Cabinet Construction l DCW2436L: Diagonal corner wall cabinet, 24” wide, 36” high, with a left door. Depth is standard (equal to width).   l OTC362490: Full height cabinet with oven, 36” wide, 24” deep, 90” high.   The Automatic Labels for Shelves and Partitions are blank, but you can specify custom labels for both. See Shelf/Partition Specification Dialog on page 660. Cabinet Construction Both framed and frameless, or European-style, cabinet construction can be specified in Chief Architect. You can also specify either the overlay or reveal of cabinet doors, drawers, and panels. If you know what cabinet construction style you want, you can save time by specifying that style in the Cabinet Defaults dialogs before you start placing cabinets. See Cabinet Defaults on page 618. A wide variety of cabinet attributes, including construction, can be included in and applied to multiple cabinets and cabinet fillers at once using Style Palettes. See Style Palettes on page 279. FRAMED AND FRAMELESS A cabinet can be specified as Framed or Frameless on the BOX CONSTRUCTION panel of the Cabinet Specification dialog. See Box Construction Panel on page 647. The sides of both Framed and Frameless cabinet boxes are 3/4" (18 mm) thick. This value is also the system default Item Height for Separation face items in Frameless cabinets. See Cabinet Defaults on page 618. Framed cabinets have left and right stiles with widths that can be specified. The stiles on the Front face of a cabinet can also be set to Extend past its sides. The Separation value set on the BOX CONSTRUCTION panel of the Cabinet Specification dialog serves as the default Height value for separation face items as well as the default width for left and right stiles. These can be set individually on the FRONT/SIDES/BACK panel. See Front/Sides/Back Panel on page 648. TRADITIONAL OVERLAY To specify how far doors, drawers and panels overlap vertical stiles and horizontal separations, select Traditional Overlay on the BOX CONSTRUCTION panel of the Cabinet Specification dialog and then specify the Overlap of all doors, drawers, and panels on the selected cabinet. When Traditional Overlay is selected, the widths of stiles can be specified on the FRONT/SIDES/BACK panel, as can the heights of selected Separation items; however, the overlap of individual items cannot. FULL OVERLAY AND REVEAL To specify the reveal on horizontal separations and vertical stiles, select Full Overlay on the BOX CONSTRUCTION panel and then specify the desired Reveal. Both the sizes and the reveals on the Left and Right Stiles and on individual Separation items can be customized on the FRONT/SIDES/BACK panel. INSET DOORS AND DRAWERS Cabinet doors and drawers can be specified as Inset instead of overlaid on the BOX CONSTRUCTION panel of the Cabinet Specification dialog. 633 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Cabinets Editing Cabinets Cabinets and cabinet fillers can be selected in 2D and 3D views both individually and in groups and edited using the edit handles, the Edit Toolbar and their specification dialog. You can marquee-select cabinets of multiple types when the Full Height Cabinet tool is active. See Marquee Select on page 213. USING THE EDIT HANDLES Cabinets can be edited like other box-based objects. See Editing Box-Based Objects on page 232. The edit handles that a cabinet displays when selected will vary depending on the view. When a cabinet is selected in plan view or on its top surface in a 3D view, ten edit handles display: the Move handle at the center, the Rotate handle, and a Resize handle on each edge and at each corner. In plan view, cabinet labels also have a small square Move edit handle and small rectangular Rotate handle. See Displaying Cabinets on page 628. In 3D views, cabinets can be selected on any surface: front, side, back or top. When the side of a cabinet is selected, five edit handles are available: the Move handle and a Resize handle on each edge. In cross section/elevation views, a cabinet label will also display on a cabinet's front when that side is visible and their label is set to display, and will have the same edit handles as in plan view. Cabinets cannot be concentrically resized, even when the Concentric edit behavior is enabled. See Defaults, Preferences, and Edit Behaviors on page 206.   IN THE SPECIFICATION DIALOG A selected cabinet can be customized in a variety of ways in its specification dialog. See Cabinet Specification Dialog on page 643. When you group select cabinets of different types, some options are not available in the Cabinet Specification dialog. For example, you cannot modify the crown molding on a full height cabinet if it is selected with a base cabinet that does not have crown molding. Any specifications that they share in common, however, can be edited.   Soffits, shelves, and partitions can also be group-selected and edited using a shared specification dialog. It is, however, necessary that only soffits, or only shelves, or only partitions be a part of the selection set in order to access a shared specification dialog.   You can use the Object Painter tools to assign the properties of one cabinet to other cabinets. See Matching Properties on page 282.   634 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Cabinets You can also apply a variety of cabinet attributes to multiple cabinets and cabinet fillers at once using Style Palettes. See Style Palettes on page 279.   EDITING BUILT-IN SINKS AND APPLIANCES The Library Browser features a selection of fixtures that can be inserted into cabinet fronts and countertops. Once placed, these fixtures can be edited via the Cabinet Specification dialogs: l Top-mounted fixtures can be edited on the Accessories Panel on page 655. l Cabinet front fixtures can be edited on the Front/Sides/Back Panel on page 648. In addition, top-mounted fixtures can be selected and edited in plan and 3D views using the Select Next Object edit tool. See Select Next Object on page 211. When cabinet with a top-mounted fixture is selected: l The Open Object edit button opens the Cabinet Specification dialog. See Cabinet Specification Dialog on page 643. l The Open Symbol edit button opens the Symbol Specification dialog. See Symbol Object Specification Dialogs on page 986. USING THE EDIT TOOLS A cabinet or cabinets can be edited in a variety of ways using the buttons on the Edit Toolbar. See The Edit Toolbar on page 130. The Open Cabinet Doors/Drawers and Close Cabinet Doors/Drawers tools affect the cabinet's doors and drawers in 2D and 3D views. See Cabinet Doors and Drawers on page 629. Generate Custom Countertop replaces a base cabinet's countertop with a separate Custom Countertop object. See Custom Countertops on page 627. Make Cabinet Molding Polyline creates a Molding Polyline that replaces a molding applied directly to a selected cabinet. See Make Cabinet Molding Polyline on page 638. Select Next Object allows you to select a fixture inserted into a cabinet. See Select Next Object on page 211. Open Symbol allows you to edit an inserted fixture's symbol data. See Symbol Object Specification Dialogs on page 986. ADD TO LIBRARY Cabinets can be saved in the Library Browser. Select a base, wall or full height cabinet or cabinet filler and click either the Add to Library or Add to Library As edit button. See Add to Library on page 965. If you use Add to Library As , you can add the selected cabinet to the library in either of two ways:   l Select Cabinet Module to save the cabinet along with its doors, drawers and panels and any fixtures or appliances.   l Select Cabinet Doors and Drawers to save the cabinet door style only.   USING DIMENSIONS Like various other objects, cabinets can be moved and resized using dimensions. See Moving Objects Using Dimensions on page 483. 635 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Cabinet Styles In order to be edited using dimensions, cabinets must be located by them. In the Dimension Defaults dialog, you specify what components of a cabinet are located by dimensions as they are drawn:   l Cabinet sides, corners, and centers can be located in both plan and elevation views.   l Closed cabinet doors, drawers, and panels can be located in plan view provided that they are set to display. See Dimension Defaults Dialog on page 451. l Cabinet face items, openings, backsplash heights, countertop heights, toe kick heights, and molding heights can be located in elevation views. The heights of cabinet components cannot, however, be edited using dimensions.   l Automatic and Custom Countertops can be located as well as edited in both plan and elevation views provided that Countertops are set to be located. l If Display Molding Edges in Plan View is checked in the Base Cabinet Specification dialog, a cabinet's counter edge profile will display and can be located by dimensions provided that Cabinet Moldings are set to be located. l Automatic Backsplashes can also be located and edited in both types of views provided that CAD Objects are set to be located.   See Locate Manual Panel on page 454.   If you wish, you can add or move a dimension’s extension lines to locate countertop edges in plan view after the dimension line is drawn. In elevation views, the heights of cabinet face items, openings, the toe kick, backsplash, and/or moldings can also be located in this manner. Depending on whether a cabinet box or Custom Countertop is selected, Temporary Dimensions will locate objects near the Selected Edge somewhat differently: See Temporary Dimensions on page 473. l If a cabinet box is selected, Temporary Dimensions will locate the nearest wall surface or another cabinet box, but not automatically generated or Custom Countertops.   l If a Custom Countertop is selected, Temporary Dimensions will locate the nearest wall surface, Custom Countertop, or automatically generated countertop edge.   MOVING WALLS WITH CABINETS ATTACHED When a cabinet is placed or moved against a wall, it will snap to the wall and become attached to it. When a wall is moved, all attached cabinets move with it. When wall layers are resized or the wall layer definition redefined, the cabinets may become unattached. To reattach, select the cabinets, drag them away from the wall, and then drag them back again.   Editing Cabinet Styles A variety of settings allow you to customize the appearance of your cabinets to create styles ranging from traditional to contemporary. If the desired style is known before cabinets are placed, you can save time by specifying that style in the Cabinet Defaults dialogs before you start drawing. See Cabinet Defaults on page 618. A wide variety of cabinet style attributes can be included in and applied to multiple cabinets and cabinet fillers at once using Style Palettes. See Style Palettes on page 279. 636 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Cabinet Styles A variety of cabinet style attributes, including doors and drawers, moldings, and millwork accessories can be replaced with different items selected in the library. See Replace From Library on page 976. CABINET FACE ITEMS A variety of different face items can be added to the front of any cabinet, including doors, drawers, cutting boards, and horizontal separations. Face items can be moved, resized, as well as removed and can also be split vertically or horizontally to produce a variety of custom configurations. See Front/Sides/Back Panel on page 648. When adding, removing, or resizing face items, it is helpful to keep a few rules in mind: l Door and drawer Item Height settings reflect the height of the opening rather than that of the front item. When Traditional Overlay is specified, an item’s front height will be equal to its Item Height plus its top and bottom Vertical Overlap.   l When the overall height of a cabinet or the height of a face item is changed, the height of the lowest face item that is not a Separation is adjusted to accommodate the change. l If you increase the height of the lowest face item, the non-Separation item directly above is adjusted; if you decrease its height, a Blank Area and Separation are created below it. l If the bottom-most face item on a cabinet is a Separation and you increase its height to be greater than the default value, it will extend down past the bottom of the cabinet, creating a recessed bottom. l By default, if the bottom-most face item on a cabinet is anything other than a Separation or Blank Area, the cabinet box will be treated as an appliance garage and will not have a bottom. Note: To ensure that Face Item heights always equal the total cabinet front height, the program automatically adjusts the bottom Face Item as changes are made elsewhere. This means you should start editing Face Items at the top and work down. When editing a cabinet’s width, or when adding or removing features that affect the width of a cabinet’s front items, the program will try to maintain the relative sizes of face items in any vertically split layouts.   DOORS, DRAWERS AND PANELS l Cabinet doors, drawers, and panels can be applied in either of two ways:   l In the Cabinet Specification dialog. See Door/Drawer Panel on page 652 and Front/Sides/Back Panel on page 648. l Directly from the Library Browser. Select a style in the Library, then click on a cabinet to apply the selected style to that cabinet. See Replace From Library on page 976. A secondary door or drawer style can also be specified - for example, to create glass doors above solid doors in wall cabinets. See Front/Sides/Back Panel on page 648.   FRAMED AND FRAMELESS CABINETS Both framed and European-style frameless cabinets can be specified in Chief Architect.   For both types of cabinet, you can define the door and drawer overlay or specify inset doors. On a traditional framed cabinet, you can also control the size of the rails and stiles. See Front/Sides/Back Panel on page 648.   637 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Cabinet Styles CABINET HARDWARE Cabinet handles, pulls, and hinges can be assigned in the Cabinet Specification dialog. See Door/Drawer Panel on page 652. The hardware on individual doors and drawers can also be customized. See Front/Sides/Back Panel on page 648.   In 3D views, cabinet hardware can also be applied directly from the Library Browser. Select a cabinet hardware item in the Library, then click on a cabinet door or drawer to assign it to all face items of that type, including custom hardware on individual face items. See Inserted Objects on page 973.   PILASTERS, FEET, AND MOLDINGS Pilasters can be applied to any cabinet in its Cabinet Specification dialog. Cabinet feet can also be applied to base and full height cabinets. See Moldings and Millwork on page 926 and Accessories Panel on page 655.   Base cabinet with pilasters and feet Wall cabinet with crown molding and light rail MAKE CABINET MOLDING POLYLINE Cabinet moldings can be converted to molding polylines, which allows you to make adjustments to their position and display. To create a molding polyline that follows the exterior of a cabinet, select the cabinet and click the Make Cabinet Molding Polyline edit button. 638 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Special Cabinets From the Convert Molding drop-down list, select the molding profile that you would like to convert from a cabinet molding to a molding polyline. The available options will be the molding profiles assigned to the selected cabinet. When you convert a cabinet molding to a molding polyline, that molding is removed from the cabinet itself. Cabinet molding polylines can be edited just like other molding polylines. Their shape and height can be altered and the molding profile can be changed. Additional molding profiles can also be assigned. See Molding Polylines on page 935. COUNTERTOPS AND BACKSPLASHES The countertop thickness, overhang, corner shape, edge profile, and material for a selected base cabinet can be specified in the Cabinet Specification dialog. See General Panel on page 644 and Moldings / / Profiles / Rails / Panels on page 927. Backsplashes can be specified for base cabinets on the GENERAL panel of their specification dialogs, as well.   Custom Countertops, Counter Holes, and Backsplashes can also be created independent of base or wall cabinets. See The Cabinet Tools on page 621. CABINET SHELVES You can customize the shelves inside base, wall, and full height cabinet boxes. See Cabinet Shelf Specification Dialog on page 658.   You can also specify the material assigned to a cabinet’s shelves on the MATERIALS panel of the Cabinet Specification dialog. See Cabinet Specification Dialog on page 643.   Special Cabinets There are a number of special cabinet shapes that can be specified. Certain requirements must be met before some special cabinet shapes can be specified. If the requirements are not met, a warning message will explain what is needed. See Cabinet Specification Dialog on page 643. Note: Only Standard cabinets can be the default cabinet Type. See Cabinet Defaults on page 618. STANDARD CABINETS Select Build> Cabinet> Base Cabinet and click in plan view to place a standard, rectangular base cabinet. CORNER CABINETS To create a corner cabinet, click as close to an inside wall corner as possible using either the Base Cabinet , Wall Cabinet , or Full Height cabinet tool. A corner cabinet remains a corner cabinet when it is moved, edited or copied. 639 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Special Cabinets You can turn an existing cabinet into a corner cabinet by selecting “Corner” from the Special drop-down list in its specification dialog. See General Panel on page 644. l Before a corner cabinet can be specified in the Cabinet Specification dialog, the cabinet’s Width must be greater than its Depth. l The Left and the Right Side Widths can be set independently for corner cabinets. l You can specify a Diagonal Door on corner cabinets to create an angled corner cabinet. See Front/Sides/Back Panel on page 648. l The diagonal door on corner cabinets can be curved by entering a negative value in the second Right Side Width field. See General Panel on page 644.   EXPOSED END CABINETS A cabinet that is merged on one side but not the other is referred to as an Exposed End.   Pilasters, feet, countertop overhangs and closed toe kicks all behave differently when groups of cabinets are merged:   l If multiple cabinets are joined together, only Exposed End cabinets have corner pilasters, cabinet feet, side counter overhangs, and closed toe kicks.   l If multiple joined cabinets have both Front Pilasters and Corner Pilasters specified, the Exposed End cabinets include corner pilasters and inside cabinets have front pilasters.   l If multiple cabinets are joined, inside cabinets share Front Pilasters.   l Corner pilasters and cabinet legs are eliminated on the back if the cabinet is against a wall, and on either side if it’s joined with another cabinet.   640 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Special Cabinets END CABINETS To turn a cabinet into an end cabinet, specify its Type as “Left End” or “Right End”. l End Cabinets have an angled front and side. l The cabinet width must be no greater than its depth for an end cabinet to be specified. RADIUS END CABINETS To turn a cabinet into a radius end cabinet, specify its Type as “Left Radius End” or “Right Radius End”. As you face the cabinet, a right radius end curves to the right, and a left radius end curves to the left. PENINSULA RADIUS CABINETS To turn a cabinet into an end cabinet, specify its Type as “Peninsula Radius”. The radius can be adjusted by changing the Depth/Bow Depth value. See General Panel on page 644.   ANGLED FRONT CABINETS To assign an angled front to a cabinet, specify its Type as “Angled Front”.   641 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Special Cabinets l The length of the left and right side of an Angled Front cabinet can be defined by changing the Depth/Bow Depth value. See General Panel on page 644.   BOW FRONT CABINETS To assign a bow front to a cabinet, specify its Type as “Bow Front”.   l The bow depth of a Bow Front cabinet can be defined. See General Panel on page 644.   l The bow depth cannot exceed half the cabinet width.   l The doors and drawers on a Bow Front cabinet automatically match the curvature of the cabinet.   KITCHEN ISLANDS To create a kitchen island, simply place several cabinets back-to-back and/or side-to-side. Match the widths so that each cabinet back or side meets the back or side of only one other cabinet. If this is not done, the lines separating the cabinets cannot be suppressed. A given side of a single cabinet cannot merge with the edges of two different cabinets. The example below shows two instances of cabinets placed back-to-back. Cabinet fronts and joining surfaces are shown. BLIND CABINETS Often, when two cabinets meet in a corner, one is partially hidden by the other. This partially hidden cabinet is called a “blind” cabinet. Chief Architect will resize and offset the front items of the partially hidden cabinet so that they are not located in the hidden portion of the cabinet face. 642 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Cabinet Specification Dialog You can turn off this automatic behavior in the General Cabinet Defaults dialog. See General Cabinet Defaults on page 619.   You can also create a blind cabinet manually by controlling the widths of a cabinet’s left or right stile in its Cabinet Specification dialog. See Front/Sides/Back Panel on page 648.   Cabinet Specification Dialog Select one or more cabinets and click the Open Object edit button to open the Cabinet Specification dialog. You can also open the specification dialog for the cabinet(s) associated with a schedule row. See Open Row Object(s) on page 686.   If the selected cabinet is an imported symbol in a legacy plan, the Cabinet Symbol Specification dialog opens instead and has fewer options than the Cabinet Specification dialog.   The options in the Cabinet Specification dialogs are similar to the corresponding Cabinet Defaults dialog. See Cabinet Defaults on page 618.   The Cabinet Specification dialogs have the following panels: 643 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Cabinet Specification Dialog GENERAL PANEL Cabinet Style A number of Cabinet Types are available in the drop-down list. Certain requirements must be met before some types can be specified. Not available in the Cabinet Defaults dialogs. See Special Cabinets on page 639. l Check Filler to specify the selected cabinet as a filler of the same type instead of a true cabinet. See Cabinet Fillers on page 624. Not available in the Cabinet Defaults dialogs.   Size/Position The selected cabinet’s dimensions and position relative to the floor can be specified here. Fractional values are supported to 1/16th of an inch (1 mm). l Specify the Width of the cabinet box, as measured across the front of the cabinet box from left to right. This does not include the countertop overhang. l Specify the Height (Including Counter) of the cabinet box, as measured from bottom to top. For base cabinets, this value includes the countertop thickness, but not the height of the backsplash. Note: Height refers to the height of the entire cabinet, including countertop and toe kick. If you change the Countertop Thickness or Toe Kick Height, the cabinet’s total height is not altered. Instead, the cabinet face height and the heights of face items change in response. 644 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Cabinet Specification Dialog l Specify the Depth of the cabinet box, as measured from front to back. It does not include the thickness of overlay doors or the countertop overhang. l For Corner cabinets, the Width and Depth fields are instead named Right Side Width and Left Side Width. l For Corner and Bow Front cabinets, specify the Bow Depth. A positive number creates a bow and a negative number, an inside bow. Not available for Corner cabinets if Diagonal is unchecked on the Front panel. See Front/Sides/Back Panel on page 648. l For Angled Front cabinets, specify the Left Depth and Right Depth rather than the Depth and Bow Depth. l Select the Elevation Reference from the drop-down list. This determines where the next two settings are measured from and also affects their setting labels. l Specify the to Top distance, measured from the Elevation Reference to the top of the cabinet’s countertop. l Specify the to Bottom distance, measured from the Elevation Reference to the bottom of the cabinet, including the toe kick. Countertop Specify the dimensions and style of the selected cabinet’s Countertop, or uncheck this box to prevent it from having a countertop. Only available for base cabinets and fillers.   l Specify the countertop Thickness. Changing this value does not alter the cabinet height, but it does affect the height of face items. See Front/Sides/Back Panel on page 648.   l Specify the countertop Overhang. Uncheck Uniform to specify separate values for each side in the fields below, or leave it checked to use the same value for all sides. Overhangs do not generate on sides that are against a wall, freestanding appliance, Partition, or another Base or Full Height Cabinet. See Cabinet Snapping and Aligning on page 625.   l Corner Treatment - Specify Clipped or Rounded countertop corners. The options here are the same as those for the Cabinet Corner Treatment, but affect the countertop rather than the cabinet box. See Box Construction Panel on page 647. l When Clipped or Rounded is selected, specify the Corner Width, which is measured from the original location of the corner to the point where the straight front edge ends.   l When Include Countertop in Schedule is checked, the selected cabinet's countertop is listed in any schedule set up to include Countertops. Uncheck this box to exclude the selected cabinet's countertop from schedules. See Cabinet Schedules on page 630.   l Check Display Molding Edges in Plan Views to draw the molding profile applied to the countertop in plan views, if there is one. When unchecked, only the countertop's Overhang is represented. See Pilasters, Feet, and Moldings on page 638.   Backsplash Check the box beside Backsplash, then specify its dimensions and when it should generate, or leave this box unchecked to prevent the selected base or wall cabinet or filler from having a backsplash.   l Specify the backsplash Height and Thickness.  Height is only available for base cabinets - not wall cabinets. l Check Side to add the backsplash to the side of the cabinet if it is against a wall or a taller cabinet. Not available for Corner cabinets.   645 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Cabinet Specification Dialog l Check Always Present to display the backsplash at all times. If unchecked, a backsplash is present only when the cabinet is against a wall.   l The Backsplash to Base Below check box is only available in legacy plan files if it was checked in the original program version. When checked, a backsplash extends from the selected wall cabinet down to the backsplash or countertop of the base cabinet below. If this box is unchecked and you click OK, the setting will be removed from the dialog.   l When Include Backsplash in Schedule is checked, the selected cabinet's backsplash is listed in any schedule set up to include Backsplashes. Uncheck this box to exclude the selected cabinet's backsplash from schedules. See Cabinet Schedules on page 630.   Toe Kick Specify the dimensions and style of the selected cabinet’s  Toe Kick, or uncheck this box to prevent it from having a toe kick. Only available for base and full height cabinets and fillers. Regardless of the settings here, toe kicks do not generate   on sides that are against a wall, free-standing appliance, Partition, or another Base or Full Height Cabinet.   l Specify the toe kick’s Height and Depth. Changing the Height does not alter the cabinet height but does affect the heights of the cabinet face and face items.   l Flat Sides can be added to base and full height cabinets. Checking Flat Sides eliminates the toe kick area on the exposed end(s) of the cabinet.   l Check Flat Back to eliminate the toe kick on a cabinet with an exposed back. This does not eliminate the toe kick on the cabinet front.   l Check Closed Toe to extend the cabinet sides to cover the sides of the toe kick. If pilasters that do not extend to the floor are specified, checking this places a support block under them at Exposed Ends. See Accessories Panel on page 655.   l Check Always Present to preserve the Closed Toe at all times. When this is unchecked, the Closed Toe is removed where cabinets are side by side. Only available when Closed Toe is checked.   Options l Uncheck Diagonal Door to create double doors at right angles instead of a single diagonal door. This option is checked by default in the Cabinet Defaults dialog and is only available for Corner Cabinets. See Corner Cabinets on page 639. l Check Lazy Susan to indicate a lazy Susan in the cabinet’s label and its appearance in plan view. This option does not display in 3D views. l When Suppress Adjacent Room Moldings is checked, room moldings do not generate on walls where the selected cabinet touches them. Uncheck this box to allow room moldings to generate through the cabinet. See Room Moldings on page 436. Preview A preview of the selected cabinet displays on the right side of the panel. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22. 646 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Cabinet Specification Dialog BOX CONSTRUCTION PANEL Box Construction Define the Box Construction of the selected cabinet. Select Framed to create a traditional framed cabinet and enable the settings below, or choose Frameless for a European style cabinet.   l Specify the Separation value, which is the width of the horizontal face frame piece between doors, drawers, and other face items.   l The Left and Right Side Extend settings allow you to extend the front frame beyond the box sides. See Cabinet Filler Tools on page 624.   Top/Bottom Specify whether the selected cabinet box or filler has a Top/Bottom. l By default, base cabinets do not have tops while wall and full height cabinets do. l When the Bottom Auto option is selected and the selected cabinet's bottom-most face item is a Separation or a Blank Area, it will receive a bottom; if it is any other face Item Type, it will not. See Cabinet Face Items on page 637. Door/Drawer Overlay See Cabinet Construction on page 633.   l Select Traditional Overlay, then specify the Overlap value.   l Select Full Overlay, then specify the Reveal, which is the distance between door and drawer front items. This 647 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Cabinet Specification Dialog serves as the default for the Left and Right Reveal settings on THE FRONT/SIDES/BACK panel.   l Select Inset to produce doors and drawers that are flush with the rails and stiles rather than overlaying it.   Cabinet Corner Treatment Specify clipped or rounded corners for the selected cabinet’s box. These settings are only available for Standard and Bow Front cabinet types. Corner Treatments can also be assigned to Corner cabinets; however, if a cabinet has Diagonal Doors specified, no Treatment is applied.   l Select Rounded to create rounded cabinet corners, then specify their Radius.   l Select Clipped to create 45° angled edges at the cabinet corners, then specify the Corner Clip distance.   l Select None for cabinet corners that are neither clipped nor rounded.   l Specify the Corner Clip/Radius value. The Corner Clip is measured from the original location of the cabinet corner along an edge to the point at which a Clipped corner begins, while the Radius is the radius of a rounded corner's arc. Not available if None is selected.   l When Automatic Placement is checked, the selected corner treatment is applied to all corners except those positioned against a wall or another cabinet of the same type. Base and Full Height cabinets also suppress corner treatments on one another; and, Base cabinet corner treatments are suppressed by Partitions and free-standing appliances. Uncheck this box to suppress each corner's treatment individually, below.   l When Automatic Placement is unchecked, specify which corner(s) to apply the selected Treatment to: Back Left, Back Right, Front Left, and/or Front Right.   l Corner Pilaster - Select the default corner pilaster, a pilaster from the Library, or None from the drop-down list. Only available when Clipped is selected as the treatment, above. l Specify the Corner Pilaster Width value, measured across the front of the pilaster.   l Check Extend to Bottom to extend corner pilasters to the bottom of the toe kick. When unchecked, pilasters stop at the top of the toe kick. Front Pilasters are specified on the Accessories panel. See Accessories Panel on page 655. Preview A preview of the selected cabinet displays on the right side of the panel. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22. FRONT/SIDES/BACK PANEL If you click on a cabinet face item in the preview on the right side of the dialog, the FRONT/SIDES/BACK panel will become active and that face item will be selected and can be edited. 648 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Cabinet Specification Dialog Cabinet Side Select which Cabinet Side you would like to edit: the Front, Back, Left or Right side.   l Assign a Side Type to the selected Side. Only “Use Default” and “Custom Face” are available for the Front. The options are:   l Select “Use Default” to use the default configuration set in the Cabinet Defaults dialog. See Cabinet Defaults on page 618.   l Select “Finished” to specify the selected side as finished or “Unfinished” to specify it as unfinished. “Finished” and “Unfinished” are only used in Cabinet Schedules. See Columns to Include on page 689.   l Select “Auto Finished” to finish the side only when it is not adjacent to another cabinet or a wall.   l Select “Paneled” to apply a panel to the selected side.   l Select “Auto Paneled” to apply a panel to the side only when it is not adjacent to another cabinet or a wall.   l Select “Match Front” to apply the same face items as the cabinet front to the selected side.   l Select “Custom Face” to enable the Face Items settings below. l Select "None" to generate no face items on the selected side or back: including the frame, if specified.   Face Items Most of the Face Items settings are only active when a door, drawer, or other face item is selected. To select a face item, 649 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Cabinet Specification Dialog click on its name in the list or click on it in the preview on the right.   When a face item is selected, it is highlighted in the list as well as in the preview; its attributes can be edited and the list can be navigated using the arrow and number keys. The vertical frame pieces on the sides of the cabinet front are referred to as stiles and cannot be selected in the preview. See Cabinet Face Items on page 637. l A numbered tree list of face items displays here. Item numbers start at the top of the cabinet and go down the face to the bottom of the cabinet. Item 1 is usually the top face frame Separation, or rail. The selected face item is highlighted; if no item is selected, the “Vertical Layout Parent” heading will be highlighted.   l The name of inserted library objects associated with doors, drawers, and appliance items is stated in the list. If a door or drawer is using the default style, it s name will be preceded by "Default".   l Click Add New to add a new face item directly below the currently selected item. When a face item is added, the height of the lowest item on the cabinet front is reduced to make room for the new item. If you click Add New with no face item selected, the new item is added to the bottom of the cabinet face. l In the New Cabinet Face Item dialog, define the Item Type, Item Height, and click OK. If the Item Type is “Separation”, you can check Default to use the default Separation Height. l Click Delete to remove the selected face item. When an Auto Left, Auto Right, Left, Right, or Double Door is deleted, it is replaced by an Opening; when other face item types are deleted, the height of the lowest item is increased to make up the difference. You can also press the Delete key on the keyboard. The program tries to maintain a single separation between all face items. When you add or delete a face item, separations are usually added or deleted with them. l Click Move Up to move the currently selected item up one position, switching places with the item directly above.   l Click Move Down to move the currently selected item down one position, switching places with the item directly below.   l When the selected face item is part of a “Layout - Horizontal”, the Move Left and/or Move Right buttons will be available instead. Click either to have the selected item switch places with its neighbor.   l Click Split Vertical to divide the selected face item into two separate side-by-side items of the same Item Type and Height. A vertical separation is added between them and together the three new items have the same Width as the original item. Not available for Horizontal or Vertical Layouts, Appliances, Separations, or for items 1 1/2” (50 mm) wide or less.   l Click Split Horizontal to divide the selected face item into two separate items of the same Item Type and Width, stacked one above the other. A horizontal separation is added between them and together the three new items have the same Height as the original item. Not available for Horizontal or Vertical Layouts, Appliances, Separations, or for items 1 1/2” (51 mm) tall or less.   l Click Equalize to make the sizes of a face item’s sub-items equal in size. Only available if the selected item is a Vertical or Horizontal Layout with sub-items.   650 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Cabinet Specification Dialog Selected Item Properties l Choose the selected face item’s Item Type from the drop-down list:   Item Type Special Behaviors Blank Area Creates a solid, flat surface. Horizontal Layout Creates a group of identical, side-by-side items separated by vertical separations. Vertical Layout Creates a group of identical, stacked items separated by horizontal separations. False Drawer and False Double Drawer Assumes the appearance of specified the drawer style, including hardware. Drawer and Double Drawer Creates a single or double drawer of the specified drawer style, including hardware. Cutting Board Creates a cutting board. Auto Right and Auto Left Door Become double doors when the width of the opening is greater than the Auto Door Threshold. See General Cabinet Defaults on page 619. Left, Right, and Double Door As specified, regardless of opening width. Door Panel Assumes the appearance of the specified door style but with no hardware. Opening Creates an opening with shelves. Separation Creates a horizontal rail, or frame piece. Appliance Creates an opening with no shelves, for which an appliance can be specified. l Specify the selected face item’s Item Height. Fractional values are supported to 1/16th of an inch (1 mm). For doors and drawers, this is the height of the opening: the selected door or drawer's Front Height is reported to the right for reference. A door or drawer’s front height is equal to its Height plus its top and bottom Vertical Overlap. For best results, edit face item heights starting at the top of the cabinet and work down. See Cabinet Face Items on page 637.   l Specify the selected face item’s Item Width. Fractional values are supported to 1/16th of an inch (1 mm). For doors and drawers, this is the width of the opening: the selected door or drawer's Front Width is reported to the right for reference. Only available for components of a Horizontal Layout.   l Check Lock from Auto Resize to prevent the selected face item from resizing when the cabinet is resized, new face items are added, or when the Equalize button is clicked. 651 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Cabinet Specification Dialog l Shelves - Click the Specify button to open the Cabinet Shelves Specification dialog and specify the shelf configuration for a selected Door or Opening Face Item. See Cabinet Shelf Specification Dialog on page 658.   l When an Appliance/Door/Drawer or panel is selected, click the Specify button to choose an appliance from the Library or to customize the selected door, drawer, or panel’s front style and hardware. The options available depend on the type of face item currently selected. See Select Library Object Dialog on page 974 and Door/Drawer Panel on page 652.   l Click the Edit button to open the selected appliance's Fixture Specification dialog. See Symbol Object Specification Dialogs on page 986. l Click the Clear button to remove the selected appliance from the cabinet or to reset the selected door or drawer so it uses hardware and front style assigned to the cabinet.   l Check Reverse Appliance to reverse the selected face item from left to right: for example, to move a dishwasher’s controls from the left side to the right. Only available when an “Appliance” item is selected. See Inserted Objects on page 973.   l Specify the Percent Open of a selected drawer, which controls how far it is shown open in plan and 3D views. See Cabinet Doors and Drawers on page 629.   l Specify the Swing Angle of a selected door in plan and 3D views. An angle of 0° displays the door completely closed and an angle of 180° displays it as wide open.   Side Properties l Specify the widths of the Left Stile and Right Stile. Only available when the selected cabinet has Framed Box Construction specified. See Framed and Frameless Cabinets on page 637.   l Specify the Left Reveal and Right Reveal. For Framed cabinets, this is the reveal on the Left and Right Stiles; for Frameless cabinets, this is the reveal on the sides of cabinet box.   Options l Specify which types of front items you would like to Show Open in plan, 3D, and cross section/elevation views. See Cabinet Doors and Drawers on page 629.   Preview A preview of the selected cabinet displays on the right side of the panel. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22.   l Select Cabinet Face Item mode is active by default and allows you to click on a face item like a door, drawer, or separation in the preview to select it for editing. The selected face item is highlighted in grey. l Mouse-Orbit Camera mode allows you to orbit around the preview of the cabinet. When this is active, you can right-click on a front item to select it. l Face items identified as “Horizontal Layout” in the list on the left cannot be selected in the preview.   DOOR/DRAWER PANEL The settings on the DOOR/DRAWER panel allow you to control the appearance of the selected cabinet’s doors, drawers and hardware. Similar settings are also found in the Door, Drawer, and Side Panel Face Item Specification dialogs, which allow you to customize the door, drawer, and panel style as well as the hardware for individual cabinet face items. See Front/Sides/Back Panel on page 648. 652 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Cabinet Specification Dialog Door l Select a door Main Style from the drop-down list. See Doors, Drawers and Panels on page 637.   l Select “Use Default” to apply the door style specified in the defaults dialog for the selected cabinet’s type. See Cabinet Defaults on page 618.   l Select “Slab Doors” to apply a flat door front or “Framed Doors” to apply a door with a frame and flat panel front.   l Select “Library” or click the Library button to select a cabinet door from the library. If a library door has been previously selected, its name will display in the list. See Select Library Object Dialog on page 974.   l Check Glass Doors to use a glass material for the panel of Framed doors or for the entire door for Slab doors. Not available when “Library” is the selected door Style. l Check Stile Between Doors to separate double doors and double drawers with a stile. Other face items types are not affected by this setting.   Door Handle l Select a door handle Main Style from the drop-down list or choose one from the Library. l When a handle from the Library is selected, you can click the Edit button to customize the handle's size and angle. See Hardware Size/Orientation Dialog on page 659. l Specify the Vertical Position of the door handle: Choose Use Default to use the default position; Centered for a handle centered on the door face; or specify a Distance From Top. 653 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Cabinet Specification Dialog l Specify the Horizontal Position of the door handle: Choose Use Default to use the default position, Centered for a handle centered on the door face, or specify the handle’s Distance From Edge. Door Hinges l Select a door hinge Main Style from the drop-down list or choose one from the Library. l When a handle from the Library is selected, you can click the Edit button to customize the handle's size and angle. See Hardware Size/Orientation Dialog on page 659. l Specify the location of the hinges Up/Down From Edge, as measured from the door edge. If the cabinet door is more than 35 1/4” (880 mm) high, three hinges will be created instead of two. Drawer Select a drawer Main Style from the drop-down list or choose one from the Library. For best results, “Framed” drawers should be at least  6” (150 mm) high. Drawer Handle l Select a drawer handle Main Style from the drop-down list or choose one from the Library. l When a handle from the Library is selected, you can click the Edit button to customize the handle's size and angle. See Hardware Size/Orientation Dialog on page 659. l Specify the Horizontal Position of the drawer handle(s): Choose Use Default to use the default position; One Handle Centered for a single handle centered on the drawer face; or Two Handles In From Edge for two handles set in from the drawer sides by the value specified in the text field. l Specify the Vertical Position of the drawer handle(s): Choose Use Default to use the default position, Centered for handle(s) centered on the drawer face, or specify the handle’s Distance From Top. Options l Enter a Slab Bevel width to create beveled edges on Slab drawers and doors. The bevel width, as viewed from the front, has a maximum value of 3” (75 mm). Framed and Library doors are not affected by this setting.   Preview A preview of the selected cabinet displays on the right side of the panel. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22. DOOR AND DRAWER FACE ITEM SPECIFICATION DIALOGS Additional settings are available in the Door and Drawer Face Item Specification dialogs. See Storage and Organization Inserts on page 624.   The Door Back Inserts settings allow you to choose one or more storage items for the back of a selected door.   l A drop-down list of the inserts assigned to the selected door displays here. Select the name of an object to edit it or remove it from the list.   l Click the Add New button to open the Select Library Object dialog and add a new symbol to the list. See Select Library Object Dialog on page 974.   l Click the Replace button to remove the selected symbol and replace it with a new one from the library. Only available when an object is already selected.   l Click the Delete button to remove the currently selected symbol from the list.   654 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Cabinet Specification Dialog l Select Top to Bottom to place the first insert at the top of the selected door and place additional ones evenly spaced below it.   l Select Bottom to Top to place the first insert at the bottom of the selected door and place additional ones evenly spaced above it.   The Drawer Box/Pullout setting allows you to select an insert for a selected drawer from the library.   ACCESSORIES PANEL The settings on the ACCESSORIES panel let you apply pilasters, feet, and panels to the selected cabinet(s), as well as specify a fixture set into the countertop. The accessories specified here can be seen in 3D views, schedules, and the Materials List; however, with the exception of Top Appliance/Fixtures, they do not display in plan view. Pilasters Available for Standard and Corner cabinet(s). See Editing Cabinet Styles on page 636.   l Front Pilaster - Select the Default front pilaster, a pilaster from the Library, or None. l Specify how the Left and Right pilasters build: Select Auto, On, or Off. l When Auto is selected, adjacent cabinets with the same Front Pilaster specified will share a single pilaster centered along their line where they meet, instead of each having its own.   l Specify the Corner Pilaster Width of the selected cabinet’s pilasters. This value applies to both front and corner pilasters.   l Check Extend to Bottom to extend front and corner pilasters to the bottom of the toe kick. When this is unchecked, pilasters stop at the top of the toe kick.   655 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Cabinet Specification Dialog Corner Pilasters are specified on the Box Construction panel. See Box Construction Panel on page 647. Feet Available for Standard or Bow Front cabinet(s). Select the Default cabinet foot, a cabinet foot from the Library, or None. Not available for wall cabinets. See Editing Cabinet Styles on page 636.   l Specify the Width Offset, which is the offset of the cabinet feet relative to the sides of the cabinet box.   l Specify the Depth Offset, which is the offset of the cabinet feet relative to the front and back of the cabinet box.   l Check Always Present to place cabinet feet under the selected cabinet regardless of where it is located. When checked, any adjacent cabinet edges will display feet as well. When unchecked, the cabinet will only receive feet along its outside edge if it is an end cabinet.   l Check Stretch to Fit to resize the cabinet feet so that they extend from each corner to the midpoint of each edge. Only affects cabinet foot symbols with stretch planes defined. See Stretch Planes and Zones on page 983.   l Check Retain Toe Kick to place a toe kick under the cabinet. When unchecked, the toe kick is suppressed.   Panels See Front/Sides/Back Panel on page 648.   l Choose “Use Default” or select a Slab, Framed, or Library Panel Style from the drop-down list. You can specify whether a panel is applied or inset by selecting the desired Item Type.   l Click the Library button to select a panel style from the Library Browser. Cabinet doors are typically used, although drawers can be used, as well. See Select Library Object Dialog on page 974.   l Specify the selected panel’s Thickness.   Side Panel Options l Check Full Size Panel to apply a single panel to the entire side. When unchecked, the panel uses the same Style and Overlap values as the front. If the cabinet has multiple levels of doors on its front, the side will have matching panels.   l Check Full Overlay to extend Left and Right Side Panels to the outer surfaces of the cabinet’s front and back, including any doors, panels, or finishes that may be present.   l Check Extend to Bottom to extend panels on the Left, Right, or Back Sides to the bottom of the cabinet, including the toe kick.   Top Appliance/Fixture The Top Appliance/Fixture settings apply to a fixture inserted into a base cabinet’s countertop. These settings are not available in the Base Cabinet Defaults dialog. See Built-In Sinks and Appliances on page 623.   l Select a fixture Symbol from the drop-down list, or choose “None”. If a fixture is inserted into the countertop, its name will be listed. If no top fixture is present, you can select “Library” to select a fixture symbol from the Library.   l Specify the Front Offset, which is the distance from the front of the fixture to the front of the cabinet box. A positive value offsets the fixture towards the back of the cabinet while a negative value moves it forward. 656 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Cabinet Specification Dialog l Specify the Center Side Offset, which is the distance between the fixture’s center and that of the cabinet. A positive value offsets the fixture to the right while a negative value offsets it to the left.   l Check Reverse to reverse the selected fixture from left to right: for example, to move a cooktop’s controls from the left side to the right. See Inserted Objects on page 973. Preview A preview of the selected cabinet displays on the right side of the panel. To see the cabinet’s pilasters and feet, you may want to zoom in. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22. OPENING INDICATORS PANEL The settings on the OPENING INDICATORS panel allow you to control whether an opening indicator displays on the selected cabinet's door(s) in camera views. See Opening Indicators Panel on page 570. MOLDINGS PANEL The settings on the MOLDINGS panel allow you to assign one or more horizontal moldings around the selected cabinet. See Editing Cabinet Styles on page 636. For information about the settings here, see Moldings / / Profiles / Rails / Panels on page 927. LAYER PANEL The LAYER panel is found in the specification dialogs for many different objects. For more information, see Layer Panel on page 186. FILL STYLE PANEL The settings on the FILL STYLE panel affect the appearance of the selected cabinet in plan view. For more information, see Fill Style Panel and Dialogs on page 193. MATERIALS PANEL The settings on the MATERIALS panel affect the appearance of the selected cabinet in 3D views. For information about these settings, see Materials Panel on page 1055. Some material options may be disabled if the selected cabinet is a manufacturer symbol. LABEL PANEL Cabinet labels display in plan and cross section/elevation views when the “Cabinets, Labels” layer is turned on and use the Text Style assigned to that layer. See Cabinet Labels on page 630. For more information about the settings on this panel, see Label Panel on page 700. Note: If you choose Use Callout for Label in the Cabinet Schedule Specification dialog, the settings here are overridden and the schedule label is used instead. 657 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Cabinet Shelf Specification Dialog COMPONENTS PANEL The information on the COMPONENTS panel can be used in the materials list. For more information, see Components Panel on page 1330. OBJECT INFORMATION PANEL The information entered on the OBJECT INFORMATION panel can be used in schedules and the materials list. For more information, see Object Information Panel on page 1331.   SCHEDULE PANEL The settings on the SCHEDULE panel determine which schedule categories the selected cabinet is included in. See Schedule Panel on page 704. Cabinet Shelf Specification Dialog In the Base Cabinet, Wall Cabinet, or Full Height Cabinet Specification dialog, select a door or opening face item and click the Specify Shelves button to open the Cabinet Shelf Specification dialog.  See Front/Sides/Back Panel on page 648.   Shelf Management Specify how shelves in the selected face item are created. l By default, cabinet doors and openings receive Automatic cabinet shelves. The number of shelves, shelf type, thickness, spacing, and depth display below.   l Select the Manual radio button to specify the shelving for the selected door or opening. If the cabinet is resized after shelving has been manually edited, the specifications are maintained, but all shelves may not display in all situations.   658 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Hardware Size/Orientation Dialog Automatic Settings Displayed for reference only. Manual Shelf Specification The following settings are available when Manual is selected, above:   l Specify the total Number of Shelves in the selected door or opening front item.   l Select a Shelf from the drop-down list to customize its settings. To edit all shelves at once, choose “All Shelves”.   Note: If “All Shelves” is selected after changes are made to an individual shelf, “No Change” may display in the settings that follow. l Click the Library button to select a shelf, storage, or organization object from the Library Browser. See Inserted Objects on page 973.   l Click the Clear button to restore the default shelf style.   l Check Rollout, then specify the amount that the shelf rolls out when set to Show Open. Only available for Standard cabinets. See Rollout Shelves and Storage on page 629.   l Specify the Thickness/Height of the shelves or storage item.   l Specify the Spacing From Previous, which is the distance from the bottom of the selected shelf to the top of the shelf below it.   l If the Spacing From Previous value is changed, Equal Spacing will become unchecked. Check this box to produce evenly space the shelves within the selected cabinet front item.   l Specify the selected shelf’s Depth: choose Full, Half, or Specify a custom value in inches (mm).   Preview The preview shows shelf numbers and spacing. Shelf thickness and depth are also represented. Press the Tab key to update the preview as changes are made. Hardware Size/Orientation Dialog In the Base Cabinet, Wall Cabinet, or Full Height Cabinet Specification dialog, click the Edit button associated with either door/drawer handles or drawer hinges to open the Cabinet Shelf Specification dialog.  See Door/Drawer Panel on page 652.   659 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Shelf/Partition Specification Dialog Name The Name of the selected hardware symbol is reported here for reference. Size/Position l Specify the Width, Height, and Depth of the object.   l Check Retain Aspect Ratio to maintain the ratio between the object’s Height, Width, and Depth when it is resized in this dialog. l Click Reset Size to reset the symbol’s original, unmodified size. The symbol’s elevation is not affected by this option.   Rotation l Specify an exact Angle by typing it in the text field.   l Click the Rotate +90° or Rotate -90° button to add or subtract 90° from the Angle value.   Preview The preview shows the hardware's containing cabinet with the specified hardware. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22. Shelf/Partition Specification Dialog Select a shelf or partition and click the Open Object edit button to open the Shelf Specification or Partition Specification dialog. The options in these specification dialogs are similar to the corresponding defaults dialogs. See Cabinet Defaults on page 618. GENERAL PANEL Size/Position Specify the Height, Width, and Depth of the shelf or partition.   660 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Shelf/Partition Specification Dialog l Select the Elevation Reference from the drop-down list. This determines where the next two settings are measured from and also affects their setting labels. l Specify the to Top distance, measured from the Elevation Reference to the top of the shelf or partition. l Specify the to Bottom distance, measured from the Elevation Reference to the bottom of the shelf or partition. Toe Kick Specify the dimensions of a selected Partition's Toe Kick, or uncheck this box to prevent it from having a toe kick. Only available for Partitions.   l Specify the toe kick's Height and Depth. Changing the Height does not alter the Partition's height. l Check Flat Back to eliminate the toe kick on a Partition with an exposed back. This does not eliminate the toe kick on the Partition's front. Options l When Suppress Adjacent Room Moldings is checked, room moldings do not generate on walls where the selected object touches them. Uncheck this box to allow room moldings to generate through the object. Preview A preview of the selected object displays on the right side of the panel. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22.   FILL STYLE PANEL The settings on the FILL STYLE panel affect the appearance of the selected object in plan view.   MOLDINGS PANEL The settings on the MOLDINGS panel allow you to apply molding to the selected object. For information about these settings, see Moldings / / Profiles / Rails / Panels on page 927.   LAYER PANEL For information about the settings on this panel, see Layer Panel on page 186.   MATERIALS PANEL The settings on the MATERIALS panel affect the appearance of the selected object in 3D views. For information about these settings, see Materials Panel on page 1055. LABEL PANEL Shelf and Partition labels display in plan and cross section/elevation views when the “Cabinets, Labels” layer is turned on and use the Text Style assigned to that layer. The Automatic Labels for Shelves and Partitions are blank, but you can specify custom labels if you wish. See Cabinet Labels on page 630. For more information about the settings on this panel, see  Label Panel on page 700.   661 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Custom Countertop Specification Dialog COMPONENTS PANEL The information on the COMPONENTS panel can be used in the materials list. For more information, see Components Panel on page 1330.   OBJECT INFORMATION PANEL The information entered on the OBJECT INFORMATION panel can be used in schedules and the materials list. For more information, see Object Information Panel on page 1331.   SCHEDULE PANEL The settings on the SCHEDULE panel determine which schedule categories the selected cabinet is included in. See Schedule Panel on page 704.   Custom Countertop Specification Dialog Select a custom countertop and click the Open Object edit button to open the Custom Countertop Specification dialog.   GENERAL PANEL Options l Check Hole in Countertop to convert the selected countertop, which must be contained within another single Custom Countertop, into a countertop hole.   662 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Custom Countertop Specification Dialog l Check No Molding On Selected Edge to turn off the display of molding on the selected edge. Only has an effect when a molding is specified for the countertop on the MOLDINGS panel of this dialog.   l Check Display Molding Edges in Plan Views to display two edge lines instead of one, indicating the width of any molding applied to the countertop. Only has an effect when a molding profile is specified for the countertop.   Countertop Thickness l Uncheck Set Thickness From Cabinet, then specify the Thickness of the selected Custom Countertop below. When this is checked, the thickness is inherited from the cabinet below or from the Base Cabinet Defaults dialog if no cabinet is present below.   Countertop Height l Uncheck Set Height from Cabinet, then specify the height of the selected Custom Countertop using the settings below. When this is checked, Countertop height is determined by the cabinet below or by the default base cabinet counter thickness if no cabinet is present below.   l Select the Elevation Reference from the drop-down list. This determines where the next two settings are measured from and also affects their setting labels.   l Specify the height to Top, which is measured from the selected Elevation Reference to the top of the countertop.   l Specify the height to Bottom, which is measured from the selected Elevation Reference to the bottom of the countertop.   Waterfall Edge Control whether the selected countertop edge has a waterfall and specify its attributes. See Waterfall Countertops on page 628.   l Check Add Waterfall to Selected Edge to add a vertical extension to the selected edge of the countertop.   l Uncheck Mitre All Waterfall Edges to create butt joints with seams that may be visible in some views where the waterfall meets the horizontal countertop and any adjacent waterfall edges. When checked, these joints are mitered so the only visible seams are located at the corners.   l When Automatic Height is checked, the waterfall builds down to the floor height countertop’s room, or the default floor height for the current floor if it is not in a room. Uncheck this to specify the waterfall’s vertical height, below.   l Specify the Height from Counter Bottom, measured from the bottom of the horizontal countertop to the bottom of the waterfall.   Molding on Selected Edge An edge profile for the selected counter can be specified on the Moldings panel. See Selected Edge on page 212.   l Select Automatic to remove the edge profile from the selected edge when it is positioned against a wall and generate it otherwise.   l Select No Molding to remove the edge profile from the selected edge regardless of where it is positioned.   l Select Has Molding to generate the edge profile on the selected edge regardless of where it is positioned.   l Check Apply to All Edges to apply the option specified for the currently selected edge to all edges of the countertop. This is an action rather than a state: the next time this dialog is opened, this box will be unchecked. Preview A preview of the selected countertop displays on the right side of the panel. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22.   663 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Custom Countertop Specification Dialog POLYLINE PANEL The POLYLINE panel states the length of the countertop’s Perimeter, its Area, and its Volume. See Polyline Panel on page 317.   If the selected countertop has any Holes, they will be subtracted from the Area and Volume values. See Custom Counter Holes on page 622.   SELECTED LINE/ARC PANEL The SELECTED LINE panel is available when the selected edge is a line as opposed to an arc. For more information, see  Line Panel on page 304.   The SELECTED ARC panel is available when the selected edge has been converted to an arc. For more information, see Arc Panel on page 312.   See, too, Selected Edge on page 212 and Change Line/Arc on page 256.   MOLDINGS PANEL The settings on the MOLDINGS panel allow you to apply an edge profile to the selected countertop. For information about these settings, see Moldings / / Profiles / Rails / Panels on page 927. LINE STYLE PANEL For information about the settings on this panel, see Line Style Panel on page 305.   FILL STYLE PANEL The settings on the FILL STYLE panel affect the appearance of the selected countertop in plan view. For information about these settings, see Fill Style Panel and Dialogs on page 193.   MATERIALS PANEL The settings on the MATERIALS panel affect the appearance of the selected countertop in 3D views. For information about these settings, see Materials Panel on page 1055.   LABEL PANEL Custom Countertop labels display in plan and cross section/elevation views when the “Polylines 3D, Labels” layer is turned on and use the Text Style assigned to that layer. The Automatic Label for countertops is blank, but you can specify a custom label. See Cabinet Labels on page 630.   For information about the settings on this panel, see Label Panel on page 700.   COMPONENTS PANEL The information on the COMPONENTS panel can be used in the materials list. For more information, see Components Panel on page 1330.   664 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Custom Countertop Specification Dialog OBJECT INFORMATION PANEL The information entered on the OBJECT INFORMATION panel can be used in schedules and the materials list. See Object Information Panel on page 1331.   SCHEDULE PANEL The settings on the SCHEDULE panel determine which schedule categories the selected object is included in. See Schedule Panel on page 704.

Electrical Chapter 18 The electrical plan shows the location of all electrical objects such as lights, switches, outlets, smoke detectors and vent fans. Basic wiring diagrams show which objects share circuits and the locations of the controlling switches. Electrical objects can be displayed in 2D and 3D views. Some electrical light fixtures also add light sources to 3D and CPU Ray Trace views. See Lighting on page 1135. Usually, the electrical plan is one of the last additions to a plan since the position of most electrical objects is determined by the location of walls, cabinets and other objects. Building requirements vary throughout the country and around the world. It is your responsibility to comply with local codes. TOPICS Electrical Defaults 667 The Electrical Tools 668 Placing Electrical Objects 670 Auto Place Outlets 671 Creating Wiring Schematics 671 Electrical Library Content 672 Displaying Electrical Objects 673 Editing Electrical Objects 674 Light Data Panel 675 Rope Light Specification Dialog 678 666 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Electrical Defaults Electrical Defaults Default Settings for electrical objects control which symbols are placed in the current plan when the Electrical Tools are used. It can be accessed by selecting Edit> Default Settings or by double-clicking any of the electrical toolbar buttons, except Rope Light or Connect Electrical. See Default Settings on page 77. l Electrical Defaults Dialog on page 667 l Rope Light Defaults on page 668 l Set as Default on page 668 Default heights and other attributes of individual objects can be overridden in the Electrical Service Specification dialog. See Light Data Panel on page 675. ELECTRICAL DEFAULTS DIALOG Default Library Objects The Default Library Objects are the objects created using the Electrical Tools. Select an item in the scrollable list to see and edit its settings.   l The name of the object shown in the preview image displays here.   l Select an item in the Default Library Objects list and click the Library button to select a new default object from the library. See Select Library Object Dialog on page 974.   l Click the Edit button to open the specification dialog for the selected object. Any changes you make in the specification dialog are saved with the plan as long as the selected object is not replaced. See Light Data Panel on page 675.   Default Heights Specify the heights at which electrical outlets and switches are initially placed when the Switch or any of the Outlet tools 667 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - The Electrical Tools are used.   l Check Use Default Heights to apply the default heights specified here to electrical objects placed in plan view using the Electrical Tools. When this is unchecked, electrical objects use the height saved with their symbol. See Placing Library Objects on page 972.   l Outlet - Specify the default height for outlets, as well as phone, cable and TV jacks.   l Switch - Specify the default height for switches, doorbells and thermostats.   l Above Base Cabinet - Specify the default height for switches and outlets placed above base cabinets in plan view, as measured from the countertop. See Adjusting Electrical Object Heights on page 675.   l On Cabinet Side - Specify the default height for switches and outlets placed on the sides of cabinet boxes, measured relative to the side of the cabinet in question. See Placing Electrical Objects on page 670.   Preview A preview of the selected object displays here. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22.   ROPE LIGHT DEFAULTS Select Edit> Default Settings, then click the arrow beside “Electrical”. Select “Rope Light” and click the Edit button to open the Rope Light Defaults dialog. The settings in this dialog are also found in the Rope Light Specification dialog. See Rope Light Specification Dialog on page 678.   SET AS DEFAULT The Set as Default edit tool can be used to modify the current plan’s Electrical Defaults and Rope Light Defaults. Select an electrical symbol and click the Set as Default edit button. See Set as Default on page 79.   The default electrical object that is updated depends on the type of electrical object selected as well as its placement. An Outlet, for example, might be 110V, 220V, or GFCI; interior or exterior; wall or floor mounted.   The Electrical Tools Select Build> Electrical to access the Electrical Tools. Some electrical objects are designed to be inserted into walls, floors, ceilings or cabinets, although some can also be free-standing. With the exception of Rope Lights and Connect Electrical splines, they can be created with a single click in plan and camera views. See Placing Electrical Objects on page 670. The Electrical Tools place objects according to the settings in the Electrical Defaults dialog. The default heights for Outlets and Switches that follow can also be specified. See Electrical Defaults on page 667. Different outlet, switch, and light fixture symbols can be placed in different room types. To take advantage of the program’s capabilities, define room types properly before placing electrical objects. See Room Types and Functions on page 415. Once created, outlets, switches, and lights can be selected and edited. See Editing Electrical Objects on page 674. OUTLETS The outlet tools can place receptacles on walls, the floor, and on the sides of cabinets and soffits. Select Build> Electrical, then choose: 668 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - The Electrical Tools 110V Outlet to place 110 volt duplex outlets. GFCI Outlet to place ground fault circuit interrupter outlets. 220V Outlet to place 220 volt outlets. The type and height of an outlet will vary depending on  where it is placed. For example: l An outlet placed on a wall at the back of a base cabinet in plan view is positioned above the counter.   l An outlet placed on a wall at the back of a base cabinet containing a kitchen sink is placed at the standard 11 1/2" (300 mm) above the floor.   l An outlet placed on the side of a cabinet or soffit will be positioned 32” (800 mm) up from that object’s bottom.   l An outlet placed outside the building or in an exterior area such as a deck or porch will be weatherproof. l An outlet placed in the central area of a room in plan view will be positioned on the floor, with one exception: 110V Outlets placed in Garage or Slab rooms will be positioned on the ceiling. In camera views, 110V Outlets can be placed on ceilings in any room type. LIGHT FIXTURES Select Build> Electrical> Light to place light fixtures on walls, the ceiling, or on soffits. All light fixtures placed in a plan can also serve as light sources in most 3D and CPU Ray Trace views. To place a light fixture using the Light tool: l Click near a wall or the side of a soffit to place a wall-mounted fixture at that location. l Click away from a wall to place a ceiling mounted light. l Click inside a soffit in plan view or on its bottom surface in a camera view to place a ceiling mounted light on the soffit’s bottom surface. l Click outside a room and away from a wall to place a path light. l Some light symbols from the library can be mounted under wall cabinets, as well. The rendering characteristics of individual lights that control how they appear in  rendered and CPU Ray Trace views can be specified on the LIGHT DATA panel of the Electrical Service Specification dialog. See Light Data Panel on page 675. ROPE LIGHTS Select Build> Electrical> Rope Light, then click and drag to draw a rope light path with regularly-spaced light sources along its length. Rope Lights are a type of Molding Polyline so their rope profile can be customized. See Rope Light Specification Dialog on page 678.   SWITCHES Select Build> Electrical> Switch to place electrical switches on walls or on the sides of cabinets or soffits. Like outlets, the height of switches is measured from the floor to the center of the object. l A switch placed on the side of a cabinet or soffit will be positioned 32” (800 mm) up from that object’s bottom.   l Switches placed outside the building or in an exterior area such as a deck or porch will be weatherproof. 669 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Placing Electrical Objects If you connect two or more switches in a circuit, they update to 3-way or 4-way switches automatically. Switches placed from the Electrical Library do not automatically update by default, but can be specified to do so. See Light Data Panel on page 675.   AUTO PLACE OUTLETS Select Build> Electrical> Auto Place Outlets and click in a room tool to place outlets at regular intervals around the entire room. See Auto Place Outlets on page 671. CONNECT ELECTRICAL Select Build> Electrical> Connect Electrical, then click and drag to draw splines that snap to electrical switches, outlets, and lights to illustrate wiring circuits. See Creating Wiring Schematics on page 671. LIGHTING AND ELECTRICAL LIBRARY CATALOGS A selection of free-standing and ceiling-, wall- and cabinet-mounted light fixtures is available in the Library Browser at Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Architectural> Lighting. Special use outlets, switches, jacks and numerous other electrical items can be found at Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing> Electrical. See Placing Library Objects on page 972. Placing Electrical Objects Electrical switches, outlets, lights, and other symbols can be created with a single click in any view. They can also be placed from the Library. See Click-to-Create on page 164. When the Switch, Light, or an outlet tool is used, the type and height of the object that is created will vary depending on where it is placed. As you move your mouse pointer around the view, an object preview will display near the pointer whenever it is over a location where an object can be placed. Specific details for each tool are noted in The Electrical Tools on page 668. The electrical objects in the Library are typically designed for a specific use and can only be placed on a wall, on the floor, or on the ceiling. Some are instead free-standing and are designed to be placed on a table or the floor. See Placing Library Objects on page 972. Wall mounted outlets, switches, and Library symbols can also be placed on the sides of cabinets and soffits. They will snap to the outside of the cabinet box or to the outside of Side or Back Panels, but will ignore doors and drawers. When a light fixture is created using any method, including copying and pasting, it will always be turned On. This is the case even if the default symbol is turned Off. See Light Data Panel on page 675. ELECTRICAL OBJECT HEIGHTS When a wall-mounted electrical object is placed in plan view using one of the Electrical Tools, its initial height off the floor is based on settings in the Electrical Defaults dialog. See Electrical Defaults on page 667. Wall mounted electrical symbols placed directly from the Library derive their initial heights from specification settings saved with each object. See Light Data Panel on page 675. 670 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Auto Place Outlets Similarly, cabinet-mounted electrical objects are placed using height information set in either the Electrical Defaults dialog or the symbol’s specification dialog. If the default height is higher or lower than the cabinet it’s being placed on, the electrical object will be placed along the top or bottom edge of the cabinet box. In 3D views, an electrical object placed on a wall in a 3D view will snap to its default height provided that the mouse pointer is near that height when you click. If you move the mouse pointer away from the default height, the object will be positioned wherever you click on the wall, regardless of the height at that point. Auto Place Outlets Select Build> Electrical> Auto Place Outlets and click in a room to place 110 volt outlets on the walls around the entire room, spaced so that no wall position is farther than six feet (1800 mm) from the nearest outlet. 110 or 220 volt outlets are also placed behind large appliances. In addition, a light is placed above each sink. Outlets and sink lights are placed based on settings in the Electrical Defaults dialog. See Electrical Defaults on page 667.   It is important that a room’s Type be defined before Auto Place Outlets is used so that outlets are placed appropriately. For example, GFCI Outlets (Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter) are placed over cabinets in Kitchen, and Bath rooms.  See Room Types and Functions on page 415. Auto Place Outlets  does not work in rooms assigned an exterior room type such as Deck. To place outlets in an exterior room, place them from the Electrical Library or use the 110V Outlet tool. Railings and invisible walls are ignored by Auto Place Outlets. If it is used in a room defined by railings or invisible walls, outlets are automatically placed in any adjacent rooms on the other side of these wall types. See Room Definition on page 413. Once placed, any outlet can be moved, edited, or deleted. See Editing Electrical Objects on page 674. Creating Wiring Schematics Electrical schematics can be created in two ways. Using the Connect Electrical tool is quick and easy, but if you need detailed schematics, you can create your own wiring diagrams using the CAD tools. See CAD Objects on page 290.   CONNECT ELECTRICAL In plan view, select Build> Electrical> Connect Electrical, then click and drag to draw splines that snap to electrical switches, outlets, and lights to illustrate wiring circuits. See Splines on page 324. You can also draw a Connect Electrical spline using a selected Switch, Outlet, or Light fixture's Connect Electrical edit handle. When you move your mouse pointer over this diamond-shaped edit handle, the Connect Electrical icon will replace the default arrow and you can click and drag to draw a connection between the selected object and another electrical object. To create a new circuit or add to an existing circuit, click on a switch, outlet, or light while the Connect Electrical tool is active, drag to the next object and release. You can also draw electrical circuits using the Alternate continuous drawing mode. See Alternate on page 207. When a Connect Electrical spline is first drawn, it looks like an arc but actually consists of two segments that are defined by vertex points. When selected, its edit handles display at each of these vertices. If you click and drag one of these edit handles, the length, angle, and curvature of the spline will change but the other vertices will not move. 671 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Electrical Library Content Connect Electrical splines cannot be snapped to one another: they can only snap to electrical objects. Once drawn, though, additional vertices can be added and used to form complex curves. See Editing Spline-Based Objects on page 235. To remove a connection from a circuit, simply select and Delete it. If you remove an electrical object from a circuit, any Connect Electrical splines snapped to it will also be deleted. See Deleting Objects on page 284. THREE- AND FOUR-WAY SWITCHES Multiple switches can control an object or group of objects. l Two switches controlling the same objects are referred to as three-way switches. l Three switches controlling the same objects are called four-way switches. In plan view, a three- or four-way switch’s “way” number will automatically display in its 2D symbol. You can prevent a switch's symbol from changing by unchecking Automatically Change Switch Type When Wiring in its specification dialog. See Options Panel on page 994. Electrical Library Content Select View> Library Browser to accesses a variety of electrical symbols. See The Library Browser on page 946. Browse for electrical objects such as bath vent fans, an electrical panel, fluorescent lights, chandeliers, a smoke detector, thermostat, and more. Select a symbol, then click in your plan to place it on a wall, floor, or ceiling. You can specify which electrical object in the library is used by each of the Electrical Tools. See Electrical Defaults on page 667.   You can also assign electrical objects from the library to toolbar buttons for easy access and placement to frequently-used library objects. See Place Library Object Button on page 975.   ADDING ELECTRICAL CONTENT Any electrical symbol placed into a plan can be customized and added to the User Catalog in the Library Browser. See Add to Library on page 965. You can also create electrical symbols and save them in the User Catalog. See Symbol Objects on page 978.   672 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Displaying Electrical Objects Displaying Electrical Objects The display of electrical objects and connections is controlled in the Layer Display Options dialog. See Layer Attributes on page 177. When displayed in 3D views, light fixtures act as sources of light that help illuminate the 3D model. See Lighting on page 1135. IN PLAN VIEW In plan view, electrical objects are represented by commonly used CAD symbols that represent the type of object rather than its appearance in 3D. You can specify a different symbol for a selected electrical object in its Symbol Specification dialog if you wish. See 2D Block Panel on page 993. Like other objects, electrical objects are placed in Drawing Groups that affect whether they display in front of or behind other objects in plan view. You can modify a selected  object’s place in the drawing order by clicking the View Drawing Group Edit Tools edit button. See Drawing Group Edit Tools on page 190. By default, electrical symbols are placed on the “Electrical” layer. You can, however:   l Specify a different default layer for each type of object placed using the Electrical Tools by clicking the Edit button in the Electrical Defaults dialog. See Electrical Defaults on page 667.   l Specify a different layer for an individual object after it has been placed. See Layer Panel on page 186.   Connect Electrical splines are drawn on the “Electrical, Connections” layer by default. While the default layer for these objects cannot be changed, you can specify a different layer for a Connect Electrical spline after it has been drawn. See Line Style Panel on page 305.   ELECTRICAL LABELS Electrical labels display in plan and cross section/elevation views when the “Electrical, Labels” layer is turned on and use the Text Style assigned to their layer. See Label Panel on page 700. Customized labels  using text and Text Macros as well as label position and orientation  can be specified in the Electrical Service Specification dialog.  See Text Macros on page 540. Electrical objects can display callout labels as specified in the Electrical Schedule Specification dialog. See Label Panel on page 700.   Electrical labels have their own edit handles and can be moved and rotated when the electrical object is selected. Note: Some electrical objects are represented in plan view by a CAD block that includes text. This text is not part of the object’s label and does not use the Text Style assigned to the “Electrical, Labels” layer. IN THE MATERIALS LIST Electrical objects, including outlets, switches, lights, and symbols from the library such as jacks and fans, are listed under the Electrical Category in the Materials List. Connect Electrical splines are 2D objects only, however, and are not calculated. See Materials Lists on page 1303. 673 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Electrical Objects As with other objects, there are a number of ways to control how, or whether, electrical objects are included in the Materials List. See Organizing Materials Lists on page 1310.   You can add and edit information about an electrical object’s accessories and sub-accessories in specification dialog. See Components Panel on page 1330.   ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES The Electrical Schedule tool allows you to produce customizable electrical schedules as well as electrical labels that display schedule numbers. See The Schedule Tools on page 682. To create an electrical legend, you can create an Electrical Schedule, customize it to include the 2D Symbol exclude most other columns. See General Panel on page 692. Editing Electrical Objects Electrical objects can be selected individually as well as in a group in 2D and 3D views and edited using the edit handles, the Edit Toolbar and their specification dialog. See Symbol Object Specification Dialogs on page 986. Electrical objects can be marquee-selected by type when the drawing tool used to create them is active. The Marquee Select Similar edit tool can also be used to group-select electrical objects. See Selecting Multiple Objects on page 213. Light fixtures and Added Lights can be group-selected, but their light data cannot be edited unless each has the same number of light sources. See Lighting on page 1135.   Lights can also be edited using the Adjust Lights dialog. See Adjust Lights Dialog on page 1140.   USING THE EDIT HANDLES The edit handles for electrical objects vary depending on the location of the object. l In plan view, Switches, Outlets, and Lights have a special diamond-shaped Connect Electrical edit handle located below the object's symbol. Click and drag this handle to draw a Connect Electrical spline between the selected object and another electrical object. See Creating Wiring Schematics on page 671. l Wall mounted electrical objects cannot be rotated in plan view, so only the Move edit handle displays. l Electrical objects placed on floors and ceilings can be rotated in plan view. l In 3D views, some ceiling mounted and free-standing light fixtures can be resized. l Rope Lights are edited like open polylines. See Editing Open Polyline-Based Objects on page 224.   l Electrical connections are edited like splines. See Editing Spline-Based Objects on page 235. l When set to display in plan view, each electrical label has a small square Move edit handle and a small rectangular Rotate handle. l In cross section/elevation views, an electrical label will also display on an electrical object's front when that side is visible and their label is set to display, and will have the same edit handles as in plan view.   IN THE SPECIFICATION DIALOGS Electrical objects can be edited in the Electrical Service Specification dialog. See Symbol Object Specification Dialogs on page 986. 674 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Light Data Panel Rope Lights are a type of Molding Polyline with options for controlling the rope profile, light spacing, and more. See Rope Light Specification Dialog on page 678.   USING THE EDIT TOOLS A selected electrical symbol can be edited in a variety of ways using the buttons on the Edit Toolbar. See The Edit Toolbar on page 130. Change to GFCI Outlet changes a selected 110V Outlet to a GFCI Outlet, as specified in the Electrical Defaults dialog. Change to 110V Outlet changes a selected GFCI Outlet to a 110V Outlet. Turn Light(s) On in 3D toggles a selected light on so that it emits light in 3D views while Turn Light(s) Off in 3D toggles it off. See Displaying Lights on page 1138. Edit CAD Block allows you to edit the 2D CAD block associated with an electrical symbol. See Edit CAD Block on page 330. USING DIMENSIONS Electrical objects can be moved precisely using dimensions. See Moving Objects Using Dimensions on page 483. By default, electrical objects are not located by dimension lines as the lines are drawn. Once created, though, you can edit a dimension line’s extensions to locate the center of any electrical object. See Editing Extension Lines on page 478. In order to locate electrical objects by a dimension line as it is being drawn, first check the box beside Electrical on the LOCATE OBJECTS panel of the Dimension Defaults dialog. See Locate Manual Panel on page 454.   ADJUSTING ELECTRICAL OBJECT HEIGHTS When a wall- or cabinet-mounted electrical object is placed, its initial height is based on settings in the Electrical Defaults dialog. See Placing Electrical Objects on page 670. Once placed, a wall-mounted electrical object’s height can be edited in  three ways: l Specify the height in the Electrical Service Specification dialog. See Symbol Object Specification Dialogs on page 986. l In 3D views, the position of an electrical object can be adjusted using its edit handles. l In any view, use the Transform/Replicate Object tool. See Transform/Replicate Object Dialog on page 266.   DELETING ELECTRICAL OBJECTS An electrical object can be deleted by selecting it and clicking the Delete edit button or by pressing the Delete key. All electrical objects in a room, on a floor, or in the entire plan can also be deleted as a group using the Delete Objects dialog. See Deleting Objects on page 284. Light Data Panel Electrical objects as well as Added Lights include the LIGHT DATA panel in their specification dialog. Select one or 675 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Light Data Panel more electrical objects and/or Added Lights and click the Open Object edit button to open the Electrical Service Specification, Added Light, or Light Data dialog. The settings on this panel allow you to control the attributes of the light source(s) associated with the selected object. A number of the settings on this panel can also be edited in the Adjust Lights dialog. See Adjust Lights Dialog on page 1140. Light Sources Each fixture can have multiple Light Sources, listed here. See Lighting on page 1135.   l When Specify as Light is checked, the selected electrical symbol can have light sources associated with it, and the settings below are enabled. Not available for Added Lights. See Added Lights on page 1136. l Click on a line item in the table to select it for editing using either the settings in the table or those below. Multiple line items can also be selected and edited. See Shift and Ctrl Select on page 214. l The selected light source's Position Indicator displays in the preview on the right.   l Click Add Light, Copy Light, or Delete Light to add or delete light sources from the list. If the selected fixture has only one light source, Delete Light will not be available. These options are not available for Added Lights.   Light Characteristics l Select either Point Light or Spot Light as the light Source Type. The Type determines which options are enabled below. See Light Types on page 1137.   l Select an Intensity from the drop-down list. The available options are described using lumens and correspond to commonly used light bulb wattages. You can also use the text box or spin controls to make fine adjustments to the Intensity value. When a non-standard value is specified, the Intensity is described as “Custom Lumens”.   l Click the Color bar to define the color of the selected light source. Colored lights alter the appearance of textures and can be used to achieve special effects. See Color Chooser/Select Color Dialog on page 203.   676 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Light Data Panel The default color of light is pure white, which has the least effect on the appearance of material colors and textures. The Angle and Drop Off Rate settings below are only available for Spot Lights.   l The Tilt Angle controls the angle of the illumination with respect to the horizon. A value of -90° points the light straight down and a value of 90° points it straight up. 0° is parallel to the horizon.   l The Direction Angle defines the direction of the illumination relative to the ground. 0° is measured horizontally pointing to the right. Positive values rotate in a counter-clockwise direction from there. Enter a value up to 360°. If you enter a negative value, the program adds 360° to it when you click OK or press the Tab key.   l The Cut Off Angle controls the angle of the cone of illumination for Spot Lights only. A cone angle of 180° creates a spot light that shines in a half sphere on one side of the light source. A small cone angle, for example 10°, creates a very narrow cone of light.   l The Drop Off Rate affects how fast a Spot Light’s intensity drops off from the center of the cone to the outside edge. A value of 0 produces a cone of light with the same intensity from the center to the outside edge and a sharp distinction between lit areas within the cone and unlit areas outside it. As this value is increased, the light intensity decreases closer to the edge of the cone and the distinction between lit and unlit areas becomes softer. Only available for Spot Lights. Soft Shadows (CPU Ray Tracing) Only available when the selected light source is a Point Light, these settings affect the selected light source in CPU Ray Trace views only. See CPU Ray Tracing on page 1167.   l Check Soft Shadows (CPU Ray Tracing) to have the selected Point Light source cast shadows with soft edges in CPU Ray Trace views.   l Specify the Light Diameter, which is how big the source of illumination appears in CPU Ray Trace views.   Offset The Offset settings control the location of the selected Light Source relative to the fixture.   l From Base controls how far the light source is from the fixture base. The fixture base is determined by the surface that it is attached to (i.e. wall, floor, or ceiling).   l X Position and Y Position allow you to position the light source relative to the center of the fixture, along the floor/ceiling.   Options Additional Options that affect how the selected light source behaves are available.   l Select Use in Camera View to turn the selected light source on in regular 3D views only.   l Select Use in CPU Ray Tracing to turn the selected light source on in CPU Ray Trace views only.   l Select Use in Both to turn the selected light source on in both camera and CPU Ray Trace views.   Note: Some fixtures may have four or five lights for use in CPU Ray Trace views but only one in rendered views. See 3D Rendering on page 1131. 677 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Rope Light Specification Dialog l When multiple lights are selected, and they are set to be used in different types of views, No Change will be available. Leave this option selected unless you want the lights to all be used in the same types of views.   l The On check box’s label is followed by the name of a Light Set because each light source’s On status is saved on a per Light Set basis rather than with the light. When this dialog is opened in plan view, the light’s status in the Default Light Set will be used. If it is opened in a camera view, its status in the Light Set that is active that view will be used. See Light Sets on page 1139.   l Casts Shadows controls whether or not the selected light source casts shadows in camera and CPU Ray Trace views. See Shadows on page 1133. l Check Show Position in Camera View to indicate the position of a selected Point or Spot Light source in the preview pane and in  all 3D views  aside from Hand Drawn Lines renderings when it is turned On. This tool can be used to determine if your light source is positioned correctly. See In 3D Views on page 1139.   Preview A preview of the selected object displays here. The selected light source’s Position in Camera View displays in all views except Plan View. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22.   Rope Light Specification Dialog Select a Rope Light and click the Open Object edit button to open the Rope Light Specification dialog. The settings in this dialog are also found in the Rope Light Defaults dialog. See Electrical Defaults on page 667. The Rope Light Specification dialog has the following panels: GENERAL PANEL Elevation l Select the Elevation Reference from the drop-down list. This determines where the next setting is measured from, and also affects its setting label.   l Specify the Height of the rope light, measured from the Elevation Reference to the top of the rope profile.   678 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Rope Light Specification Dialog Light Spacing l Specify the Distance Between Lights, measured from the centers of the light sources. l When Center Lights is checked, the light sources are centered along the length of the rope light. Uncheck this to position a light source at the rope light's Start end and space additional lights along its length from there. Plan View Display l Check Show Lights to represent the light sources as circles inside the rope path. When unchecked, only the path is shown.   l Specify the Light Display Size, which is the diameter of the circles representing the light sources in plan view.   Preview A preview of the selected rope light displays here. The selected light sources' Position in Camera View display in all views but Plan View. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22. LIGHT DATA PANEL The settings on the LIGHT DATA panel are also found on the same panel of the Electrical Service Specification dialog. See Light Data Panel on page 675.   POLYLINE PANEL The POLYLINE panel states the Length of an open polyline, and the Perimeter and Area of a closed polyline. See Polyline Panel on page 317.   SELECTED LINE/ARC PANEL The SELECTED LINE panel is available when the selected segment of the Rope Molding polyline is a line as opposed to an arc. See Line Panel on page 304.   The SELECTED ARC panel is available when the selected segment of the polyline has been converted into an arc. See Arc Panel on page 312.   See, too, Selected Edge on page 212 and Change Line/Arc on page 256.   MOLDINGS PANEL The MOLDINGS panel is found in dialogs throughout the program. Here, its settings allow you to specify a rope profile. See Moldings / / Profiles / Rails / Panels on page 927.   LAYER PANEL The LAYER panel is found in the specification dialogs for a variety of objects, including electrical objects. For more information, see Layer Panel on page 186.   MATERIALS PANEL The MATERIALS panel is found in the specification dialogs for a variety of objects. For more information, see Materials Panel on page 1055.   679 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Rope Light Specification Dialog LABEL PANEL Labels for electrical fixtures display in plan view and cross section/elevation views when the “Electrical, Labels” layer is turned on and use the Text Style assigned to that layer. See Electrical Labels on page 673.   For information about the settings on this panel, see Label Panel on page 700.   COMPONENTS PANEL The information on the COMPONENTS panel can be used in the materials list. For more information, see Components Panel on page 1330.   OBJECT INFORMATION PANEL The information entered on the OBJECT INFORMATION panel can be used in Electrical Schedules and the materials list. See Object Information Panel on page 1331.   SCHEDULE PANEL The settings on the SCHEDULE panel determine which schedule categories the selected rope light is included in. See Schedule Panel on page 704.   680

Schedules and Object Labels Chapter 19 A schedule is similar to a simple Text object with grid lines separating rows and columns, but are dynamically linked to objects in your plan and automatically update whenever an object is created, deleted, moved, or altered. Schedules are available for doors, windows, cabinets, fixtures, framing objects, furniture, electrical items, plants, and the contents of rooms. You can also create custom schedules with a combination of these categories as well as create custom categories. Each schedule can contain information for one or all floors of your plan. Schedules are highly customizable, so you should check each schedule that you create to be sure it presents the information that you want it to.   A variety of objects in Chief Architect have labels that display information about them in plan and cross section/elevation views. Some of those objects also have schedules associated with them and may display schedule callout labels.   TOPICS Schedule Defaults 682 The Schedule Tools 682 Create Schedule from Room 683 Schedule Categories 684 Editing Schedules 685 Schedule Numbering 688 Columns to Include 689 Custom Object Fields 690 Find Object in Plan 691 Working with Multiple Schedules 691 Schedule Specification Dialog 692 Object Labels 699 Label Panel 700 Schedule Panel 704 681 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Schedule Defaults Schedule Defaults The initial settings for each type of schedule can be set in its Schedule Defaults dialog. Access Default Settings by selecting Edit> Default Settings, then clicking the arrow beside "Schedules". Select a subheading and click the Edit button to open the Schedule Defaults dialog associated with your selection. Multiple defaults can be selected at once by holding down the Shift or Control key. See Default Settings on page 77. Schedule defaults can also be accessed by double-clicking the Schedule Tools parent button or any of the child tools. When a schedule is created, its initial characteristics are determined by the settings in the Schedule Defaults dialog for its schedule type. Default settings for callout schedule labels are also set here. Each Schedule Defaults dialog looks the same as its corresponding Schedule Specification dialog. See Schedule Specification Dialog on page 692. The Schedule Tools Different types of schedules and tables can be created in plan and layout files for a variety of purposes. All schedules present in a file are listed in the Project Browser. See Project Browser on page 58. PLAN SCHEDULES In plan view, a cross section/elevation view, or a CAD Detail window, select Tools> Schedules to access the Schedule Tools. Select a Schedule Tool, then click in the view to place a schedule of the selected type at that location. You can continue clicking to place additional copies of the schedule if you wish. See Click-to-Create on page 164. While you can place schedules in plan view, you may find it helpful to place them in one or more CAD Detail windows instead. This allows you to send schedules to layout without including extra data or needing to resize the layout view box. See CAD Details on page 337. Cabinet Schedules on page 630 Door Schedules on page 550 Electrical Schedules on page 674 Fixture and Furnishing Schedules on page 980 Framing Schedules on page 882 Fixture and Furnishing Schedules on page 980 Notes, Note Types, and Note Schedules on page 533 Plant Schedules on page 1295 Room Finish Schedules on page 447 Wall Schedules on page 366 682 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Create Schedule from Room Window Schedules on page 588 Custom Schedule Categories on page 684 ROOM SCHEDULES Select a room and click the Create Schedule from Room edit button to create a schedule of that type showing only contents of the room. See Create Schedule from Room on page 683. CUSTOM SCHEDULE CATEGORIES Select Tools> Schedules> Manage Custom Categories to create, rename, and delete custom schedule categories in the current plan file. See Schedule Categories on page 684. LAYOUT SCHEDULES In addition to the Schedule Tools available in plan files, there are two that can be used in layout. See Layout Page and Revision Tables on page 1361. Select Tools> Layout> Layout Page Table, then click to create a Layout Page Table. Select Tools> Layout> Layout Revision Schedule, then click to create a Layout Revision Schedule. Create Schedule from Room Select a room and click the Create Schedule from Room edit button to create a schedule showing only objects of a particular type in the room. You can also turn any schedule into a Room Schedule using the Include Objects from Room setting in the Schedule Specification dialog. See General Panel on page 692. An object will be listed in a schedule if its center point is located inside the room. All objects associated with a Distribution Path or Region will be listed in a schedule if the center point of the path or region is located inside the room. If the center point of the path or region is not located in the room, none of its objects will be listed. See Distributed Objects on page 1042. Select a Schedule Type, then click OK and click in the drawing area to create a schedule of the selected type that lists objects located in the room that you selected. 683 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Schedule Categories Schedule Categories Chief Architect has a set of system schedule categories that correspond to the types of objects that can be included in a schedule. Examples of these object types include: l The object types created by the program’s Cabinet and Electrical Tools. l The various Door and Window Types. l Fixture and Furniture symbol Types. l The various types of framing members. l Millwork, Molding, and Roof Trim l Wall Types l Room Types l Note Types l CAD polylines l Plants and Sprinklers each have a single system category. l Architectural Blocks in legacy plans may be included in an “Other” category. You can find a complete list of categories and specify which is included in a given schedule in its specification dialog. See General Panel on page 692. You can also assign any object that can be listed in a schedule to one or more of these categories. See Schedule Panel on page 704. CUSTOM SCHEDULE CATEGORIES When the system categories do not meet your needs, you can use Custom Schedule Categories to include an object or group of specific objects in the schedule(s) of your choice regardless of their actual object type. For example: l To include a glass door along with windows in a glazing schedule. l To include a dishwasher in a cabinet schedule. To use a Custom Schedule Category, first create it; then assign one or more objects in your plan to that category; and finally, set one or more schedules to include that category. To create and use a custom category 1. Select  Tools> Schedules> Manage Custom Schedule Categories . 2. In the Manage Custom Schedule Categories dialog, click the New button and type a short, descriptive name for your new category. 3. Select an object that you would like to assign to your new custom category and click the Open Object edit button. 4. On the SCHEDULE panel of the object’s specification dialog, under the Categories to Include heading, check the box to the left of the new category’s name. See Schedule Panel on page 704. 5. Create a schedule and open its specification dialog. On the GENERAL panel, check the box to the left of the new category’s name. See General Panel on page 692. 684 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Schedules 6. When the custom category is for objects that insert into other objects, you may wish to specify a custom label in the containing object’s specification dialog. MANAGE CUSTOM SCHEDULE CATEGORIES DIALOG To open the Manage Custom Schedule Categories dialog, select Tools> Schedules> Manage Custom Categories. You can also access this dialog via Default Settings :  click the “+” next to “Schedules” to display the schedule sub-headings, then select “Custom Schedule Categories” and click the Edit button. Editing Schedules Schedules can be edited using the edit handles, the Edit Toolbar buttons, and the Schedule Specification dialog. USING THE EDIT HANDLES A selected schedule has edit handles similar to those of a CAD box. See Editing Box-Based Objects on page 232. In addition, schedules have edit handles that let you control the order of the rows and columns, as well as column width. Simple Text objects with tabbed contents also have some of these handles: A. Move l The Move handle is located at the center of the schedule. Click and drag this handle to change the schedule's position. B. Resize l The small circular Resize handles are located on the schedule's two vertical edges. Click and drag one of these handle to make the schedule wider or more narrow. The right-most column's width is affected by this change. C. Rotate l The triangular Rotate handle is located below the schedule. Click and drag this handle to rotate the schedule around its center point. D. Resize Column l The small circular Resize Column edit handles are located in the Title row, centered on the grid lines that divide the columns, and can be dragged left or right. If a column is resized sufficiently small, the text within will wrap to multiple rows. 685 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Schedules E. Move Row l The small circular Move Row edit handles are located in the first column, centered in each cell. Drag one of these handles to move the row associated with it up or down in the schedule.  See Editing Schedule Order on page 688. F. Move Column l Move Column edit handles are located in the Heading row, centered in each cell, and can be dragged left or right. G. Sort by Column l The small triangular Sort by Column edit handles are located in the Heading row, right of center in each cell. Click this button to sort the entire schedule according to the contents of its column. Click again to reverse the sorting direction. You can also sort by column in the Schedule Specification dialog. See General Panel on page 692 as well as Schedule Numbering on page 688. The behavior of edit handles may depend on the currently active Edit Behavior. See Defaults, Preferences, and Edit Behaviors on page 206. By default, the objects listed in the selected schedule are arranged in rows and information about them is presented in columns. You can Swap Rows/Columns to instead list objects in columns and information about those objects, in rows. See General Panel on page 692. IN THE SPECIFICATION DIALOG The contents, Text Styles, and other attributes of schedules can be modified in the Schedule Specification dialog. See Schedule Specification Dialog on page 692. You can control how objects are listed in a  schedule by specifying which Columns to Include. For example, if you were to include "Flower Color" but exclude “Common Names” and “Scientific Names” in the Schedule Specification dialog, the resulting plant schedule would list all red flowers in one line item, regardless of their species. See Columns to Include on page 689. You can also control the appearance of the callout labels associated with objects listed in a schedule. See Object Labels on page 699. USING THE EDIT TOOLS A schedule can be edited in a variety of ways using the buttons on the Edit Toolbar. See The Edit Toolbar on page 130. The Align Left, Align Right , Center , or Justify edit tools allow you to specify how the contents of schedule columns are aligned. See Aligning Text on page 513. The Spell Check edit tool checks the spelling of the selected schedule's title and column headers. Information about objects reported in the schedule body, however, is not checked. See Spell Check on page 517.   OPEN ROW OBJECT(S) Click the Open Row Object(s) edit button to open the specification dialog of the object or objects associated with the currently selected schedule row. See Specification Dialogs on page 21. Depending on the objects associated with the row, some settings may be reported as “No Change”, and some may not be available to edit. In some instances, this edit button may not be available: for example, if identical rooms on separate floors are associated with the same row of a Room Finish Schedule. 686 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Schedules CONVERTING SCHEDULES TO TEXT Click the Schedule to Text edit button to convert the selected schedule to a tabbed text object. You can then edit the schedule as text. When a schedule is converted to text, it no longer updates automatically. In addition, shaped labels displaying as specified in the schedule’s specification dialog will no longer be present. You can copy the text from the Text Specification dialog and paste it into other applications. EXPORT TEXT A selected schedule can be exported into one of several different file formats that can be opened by various programs. Select an individual schedule and click the Export Text edit button to open the Export Text dialog. File Type Specify the File Type that you would like to export to.   l Select Tab Delimited (TXT) to create a text file with a tab between each field entry in the Materials List, and a carriage return between each row.   l Select Comma Delimited (CSV) to create a text file with a comma between each field entry in the Materials List and a carriage return between each row.   l Select Spreadsheet (XML) to create a file that can be opened by Microsoft Excel.   Options l Uncheck Include Schedule Title to prevent the schedule's Main Title from being exported.   l Uncheck Include Column Headers to prevent column headings from appearing in the first row of the exported file. l Check Include Totals Row to export the "Totals" row from schedules that report door, window, or room finish information. See Columns to Include on page 689.   l Check Open in Default Spreadsheet Editor to open the exported file with the default program specified on our computer for that file type when you finish exporting.   When you click OK, the Write Export File dialog will open. This is a typical File Save dialog. See Exporting Files on page 41. 687 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Schedule Numbering Schedule Numbering When an object is listed in a schedule, its Schedule Number can be shown either in the Number column, or the Callout Symbol column which also displays the callout label shape, if using. See Columns to Include on page 689 and Object Labels on page 699. DEFAULT SCHEDULE NUMBERING By default, schedule numbering is dependent on the order in which objects are placed in the plan, as well as the floor they are on. l Any objects present in your plan before a schedule is created will be listed first in ascending alphanumeric order, according to their Label information. l Any new, unique objects placed in the plan after the schedule is created will be added to the bottom of the schedule in the order that they are placed, regardless of its Label information. When an object is edited, its schedule number may or may not change: l If an object with a Quantity of 1 in the schedule is edited, its position in the schedule will not change. l If a group of objects listed on the same row in a schedule are edited simultaneously, their position will not change. l If an object listed on the same row in a schedule with other similar objects is edited so that it is no longer similar enough to share the same row, it will move to the bottom of the schedule. See Columns and Quantity on page 689. AUTOMATIC SORTING An alternative to the default numbering behavior is Automatic Sorting. You can set all rows in a schedule to sort by a specific column regardless of the order in which the objects were created or their Label information. You can also choose whether to sort in ascending or descending order. See General Panel on page 692. If schedule order is manually edited, you will be prompted to turn off Automatic Sorting. EDITING SCHEDULE ORDER If a schedule’s order does not meet your needs, you can change it in either of two ways: l Using the schedule’s Move Row edit handles. See Using the Edit Handles on page 685. l Using an object’s Move Up in Schedule and Move Down in Schedule edit tools. When an item in a schedule is moved to a different row, its schedule Number will change, as will that of any other item whose position is affected by that move. When a given object is included in only one schedule, its position in that schedule can be modified using the   Move Up in Schedule and Move Down in Schedule edit tools. These edit tools are not available if the schedule has Use Label selected in its specification dialog. See Labels Panel on page 697. RENUMBER SCHEDULE To remove any gaps in numbering that might have been created when objects were edited or deleted, select the schedule and click the Renumber Schedule edit button. 688 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Columns to Include SCHEDULE NUMBER FORMAT The numbering for each schedule begins with 1 by default, and schedule number formatting includes a leading zero along with an optional prefix. You can choose a different Prefix, Schedule Number Start, and omit the leading zero if you wish in the Schedule Specification dialog. See Labels Panel on page 697. You can specify that an object’s Schedule Number be included as part of its Automatic Label in its specification dialog. See Label Panel on page 700. The Schedule Number can also be inserted into an object’s Label or Object Information fields using the %schedule_ number% text macro. Alternatively, you can use the %simple_schedule_number% macro, which excludes the leading zero and prefix and simply reports the number. See Text Macros on page 540. Columns to Include Every schedule has a selection of Columns to Include in its specification dialog. The columns that are available depend on the type of schedule selected. See General Panel on page 692. Information in the Code, Comment, Description, Manufacturer, and Supplier columns is drawn from an object’s specification dialog. See Object Information Panel on page 1331. Schedules also have a selection of Categories to Include, as well. For example, you can specify whether to include Plumbing, Appliances, and HVAC in a Fixture Schedule. Categories can be used to create a variety of special purpose schedules. See Working with Multiple Schedules on page 691. Note: Cabinet, Electrical, Fixture, and Furniture Schedules have an "Other" Objects to Include option that refers to architectural blocks set to be included in that schedule type. See Architectural Block Specification Dialog on page 1010. COLUMNS AND QUANTITY It is important to remember that the columns you choose to include in a schedule can influence the number of separate line items that will be listed in the schedule. For example, if you have three 30” wide doors and do not include the "Size" and "Description" columns, the three doors will be listed in the same line item - even if one is a hinged door, one a slider and one a pocket door. If you prefer, you can uncheck Group Similar Objects in the Schedule Specification dialog to place every object in its own row, regardless of any shared attributes. See General Panel on page 692. Note: The object preview columns do not affect whether or not objects are grouped in the same line. COLUMN AND ROW TOTALS If a Door, Window, or Room Finish Schedule includes an Area column, an additional “Totals” row will display at the bottom of the schedule for total area calculations. Room Finish Schedules will also include a “Totals” row if multiple rooms included in the schedule have identical objects in them. In addition, the "Total Length" column is available in schedules set to include wall types, moldings, or roof trim. 689 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Custom Object Fields OBJECT PREVIEWS Aside from those for Rooms and Layouts, schedules have a selection of Columns that display object preview images. With the exception of plant images, 3D object previews are drawn using plot lines. Each object preview inherits its line color, weight, and style from the object’s layer settings in the “Camera View Set” layer set.  See Layer Sets on page 182. The 2D Symbol preview uses the settings for the layer set that is currently active in plan view. The 2D Symbol column is not available for Doors, Windows, or Cabinets. CUSTOM COLUMNS In all schedules aside from Framing and Room Finish Schedules, there are two ways to create custom columns: by creating custom Sub Categories in the Preferences dialog and by creating Custom Fields. See Custom Object Fields on page 690.   Custom Sub Categories are assigned to an object on the COMPONENTS panel of its specification dialog. To make an object in a custom Sub Category available for use in other plans, add it to the library. See Adding Library Content on page 965.   Objects with Custom Fields can also be added to the library. In addition, Custom Fields are plan-specific and can be specified in many objects’ specification and defaults dialogs. See Custom Object Fields on page 690.   Both Sub Categories and Custom Fields are listed as columns in the Schedule Specification dialog. See General Panel on page 692.   Custom Object Fields Custom Object Fields allow you to create custom columns in schedules as well as specify the data that goes into those columns for each object. Custom Fields can be assigned to a wide variety of objects in their specification dialogs. A value for each Custom Field can also be specified for individual objects, as well. See Object Information Panel on page 1331. MANAGE CUSTOM FIELDS DIALOG To open the Manage Custom Fields dialog, select Edit> Default Settings and click the arrow next to “Schedules” to expand the category. Select “Custom Object Fields” and click the Edit button. l A list of Custom Fields present in the current plan displays on the left. Click on the name of a field in the list to select it. l Click the New button to open the Add New Field dialog, type a short descriptive name, and create a new Custom Field l Click the Rename button to rename the selected Custom Field. 690 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Find Object in Plan l Click the Delete button to delete the selected Custom Field from the current plan. A Custom Field can be deleted from a plan even if it is assigned to an object and included as a schedule column. Find Object in Plan To find out where a line item in a schedule or the Materials List is located in the model, select its row or any cell in its row and click the Find Object in Plan edit button. This tool opens a view window and selects the object or objects associated with that line item. If a plan view showing the floor that the object is on is open, that view will become active and the object will be selected. If no such view is open, a new unsaved view showing the object’s floor will be created. See View Windows on page 144. When a wall framing object is selected in a Framing Schedule, the Wall Detail of its parent wall will open instead. See In Wall Detail Views on page 880. If the selected item is a component of a complex object like an Auto Dormer, Mulled Unit, Bay Window, or Architectural Block, the parent object will be selected in the plan instead of the individual component. If the selected row or rows in a Materials List refer to objects on different floors, the Details dialog will open when you click the Find Object in Plan edit button. See Details Dialog on page 1312. SELECT LOCATION DIALOG The Select Location dialog will open if you click the Find Object in Plan edit button when the selected line item in a Materials List or the selected row in a schedule refers to objects located on more than one floor. Select a floor in the list and click the Find button or double-click on a floor in the list to open a plan view window showing the objects on the selected floor. Working with Multiple Schedules You can create multiple versions of any type of schedule for a variety of purposes. For example: l Multiple Fixture Schedules can be set up for use as Plumbing, Appliance or HVAC schedules. l Separate Electrical Schedules can be created for light fixtures and other electrical items. l Separate Cabinet Schedules can be set up for each floor of a plan, or even for individual rooms. l Special Door or Window Schedules can be prepared for Energy Ratings, Fire Doors or other information. You can also specify that any object be listed in multiple schedule categories, as well as create custom schedules that list multiple types of objects. See Custom Schedule Categories on page 684. If you intend to use schedule callout labels, it is best to avoid including a given object in more than one schedule. If you choose to do so, the object will display a separate callout label for each schedule it is included in. 691 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Schedule Specification Dialog If you create multiple schedules of the same type, bear in mind that it is possible for different objects in those schedules to be assigned the same callout number. To avoid this, consider specifying different callout prefixes and/or callout shapes. Schedule Specification Dialog Schedules and the object labels associated with them can be edited in the Schedule Specification dialog. To open this dialog, either select a schedule and click the Open Object edit button or double-click the schedule using the Select Objects tool.   The Schedule Specification dialog is similar to the specification dialogs for layout tables. See Layout Page and Revision Tables on page 1361. The options in these dialogs are also similar to those found in their corresponding Schedule Defaults dialogs. The Schedule Specification dialog has the following panels:   GENERAL PANEL 692 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Schedule Specification Dialog Main Title l Specify a Main Title for the selected schedule.   l Check Display to include the Main Title at the top of the schedule.   Include Options l To create a schedule of objects on a single floor, uncheck Include Objects from All Floors and then specify the floor. When this box is checked, objects from all floors are included. Not available in the Layout Table Specification dialog. l If Include Objects on All Floors is unchecked in the Schedule Defaults dialog, each schedule will include objects on the floor that it is created on by default.   l When Include Objects from All Floors is unchecked, you can further limit the schedule to an individual room on the specified floor. Select that room from the Include Objects from Room drop-down list. See Create Schedule from Room on page 683.   l When a Framing Schedule is placed in a Wall Detail or Truss Detail, the Only Include Objects from this Detail check box is available. Uncheck this to include objects from throughout the plan. When checked, only objects present in the current view are listed.   Categories to Include Check the box beside each type of object you want to include in the selected schedule. See Schedule Categories on page 684.   l Custom Note Types, Room Types, and Wall Types will be listed here, under their respective headings. By default, Room and Wall Schedules include newly created Room and Wall Types automatically, while Note Schedules do not.   l Click the New Custom Category button to new custom schedule category. See Custom Schedule Categories on page 684.   You can create multiple unique schedules using Categories and Columns to Include as filters. See Working with Multiple Schedules on page 691. Columns Specify which columns are included in the selected schedule.  See Columns to Include on page 689.   l Uncheck Display Column Headings to hide the selected schedule’s Heading row. When this is checked, each column has a heading at the top.   l An alphabetical list of Available Columns displays on the left.   l When Limit List to Included Categories is checked, the Available Columns will only list the columns that are available for the Categories selected above. Uncheck this box to list the columns available for all Categories. See Columns to Include on page 689.   l Select one or more names in the list of Available Columns, then click the Add button to add them to the Columns to Include list on the right. See Shift and Ctrl Select on page 214.   l You can also double-click on an item in the list to add it to the Columns to Include list on the right. 693 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Schedule Specification Dialog l A list of the Columns to Include in the selected schedule displays on the right. The top-to bottom order in this list corresponds to the columns’ left-to-right order in the schedule. At least one column must be included to create a schedule. l Select or double-click on an item in the list and click the Rename button to specify a new name.   l Click the Reset button to restore the default names for all Columns to Include in the current schedule. l Select one or more items in the list, then click the Remove button to remove those items from the list.   l Select one item in the list and click the Move Up button to adjust its position upward in the list.   l Select one item in the list and click the Move Down button to adjust its position downward in the list. Rows Not all of these options are available for layout tables. See Layout Page and Revision Tables on page 1361.   l Uncheck Group Similar Objects to list all objects in their own row, even when they share all attributes. When this is checked, objects that share the same attributes are counted in a single row. See Columns and Quantity on page 689.   l Uncheck Display Totals Row to suppress the bottom row stating the total area for all objects in the selected schedule. Only available in schedules set to include Door, Window, or Room categories, and only when one or more “Area” columns are included.   l Specify the Minimum Rows that the selected schedule displays, regardless of its actual content. If there are fewer line items in the schedule, blank rows will be added. This count does not include the Totals Row, if using.   l When Automatically Sort by is unchecked, the selected schedule's rows are sorted by their Label information in ascending order along with the order objects were placed in the plan. Check this box to sort all rows by a different column, choose that column from the drop-down list, and select whether to sort in Descending or Ascending order. Changing the column that a schedule is sorted by usually causes line items to be assigned different a Schedule Number. See Schedule Numbering on page 688.   l When Swap Rows/Columns is checked, the objects listed in the selected schedule are arranged in rows and information about them is presented in columns. Uncheck this box to instead list objects in columns and information about those objects, in rows.   Object Preview Options These options affect the appearance of previews in the 2D Symbol, 3D Elevation, and 3D Perspective Columns, when included in the schedule. Not available for layout tables. See Object Previews on page 690.   l Check Show Color to draw Callout Symbol, 2D Symbol, 3D Elevation, and 3D Perspective object previews using colored lines. When this is unchecked, lines are black and 3D plant previews are shown in grayscale. o Select From Plan to draw Callout Symbols and 2D Symbols using the color assigned to each object, and 3D Elevations and 3D Perspectives using black. o Select From Schedule to draw Callout Symbol, 2D Symbol, 3D Elevation, and 3D Perspective object previews using the color assigned to the schedule.   l Check Scale Images to display object previews at the same relative scale. When unchecked, each preview fills its cell to the extent possible.   l In Electrical, Fixture, Furniture, Note, Plant, and Wall Schedules, check Use Plan View Scale to apply the same scale used in plan view to the 2D Symbol column.   694 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Schedule Specification Dialog l Check Show Opening Indicators to show opening indicator symbols in 3D Elevation previews for doors, windows, and cabinets. Only available in schedules set to include Door, Window, and/or Cabinet categories.   l Check Show Casing, Lintel, Sill to include these items in 3D Elevations and 3D Perspectives for doors and windows. Only available in schedules set to include Door and/or Window categories.   l Check Show Treatments, Shutters to include these items in 3D Elevations and 3D Perspectives for doors and windows. Only available in schedules set to include Door and/or Window categories. NUMBER FORMATTING PANEL Format Column The Names of the selected schedule's columns that use formatted numbers as opposed to text are listed in a table, along with a Preview of its number formatting. When multiple schedules with different columns are selected, the information associated with the schedule selected first will display here, but may not be editable.   l Click in a row to select it and edit its format using the settings below. l Click the Reset button to reset all columns to the default format. Format l Select the Units of measurement to be used by the selected column(s) from the drop-down list. The choices in this list correspond to all units measuring length specified in the Preferences dialog. See Unit Conversions Panel on page 109. l Check Unit Indicators to display the unit of measurement in the selected column(s).   695 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Schedule Specification Dialog l Check Leading Zeros to include the zero before a decimal less than 1 or to display  0’ or 0” when the ft-in or ’-” unit formats is used.   l Check Trailing Zeros to display trailing zeros at the end of decimal values. When the ft-in or ’-” unit format is used and fractional inches are specified, 0” will be included.   l Check Thousands Separator to use a digit grouping symbol for values greater than 999.   o Select the Use Comma, Use Dot, or Use Non-Breaking Space radio button to specify the thousands separator used in the selected column(s). Which option is available will depend on your operating system settings. See Region and Language Settings on page 78. o Select the Use Space radio button to use a space as the thousands separator. Accuracy l Select the Decimal Places radio button for values in decimal format. In the text field, specify the number of decimal places to use, from 0 to 20. If 0 is used, no decimal places are used.   l Select the Smallest Fraction radio button for values using whole numbers and fractions. In the text field, specify the largest denominator to use, from 1 to 128. If 1 is entered, whole numbers are used.   l Uncheck Show Denominator to turn off the display of fraction denominators used by dimension lines. Typically, denominators are only turned off when eighths are desired.   l Uncheck Reduce Fractions to always use the denominator specified above. When checked, the lowest possible denominator will be used. When Smallest Fraction is selected, specify how fractions are reduced:   o Select Use Greatest Common Divisor to reduce fractions using the largest value that divides equally into the numerator and the denominator specified above. This option is best for fractional inches.   o Select Use Closest Fraction to reduce fractions without referring to the denominator specified above. For example, a value of 0.333 is represented by the fraction 5/16 when Greatest Common Divisor is used and the Smallest Fraction denominator is 16. When Closest Fraction is selected, this value is represented by 1/3.   ATTRIBUTES PANEL 696 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Schedule Specification Dialog Box/Grid Specify the appearance of the selected schedule’s border and grid.   l Check Display Border to display lines around the outside of the schedule. l Check Display Grid Lines to display lines around the rows and columns of schedule, forming boxes around each item, or cell. Alignment Specify the selected schedule’s text alignment within its columns by choosing an option from the drop-down list.   Position Define the position of the selected schedule. Not available in the Schedule Defaults dialogs.   l Specify the X and Y Positions of the schedule’s center point. l Specify the schedule’s Angle. Margins Specify the Left, Right, Top,  and Bottom Margins, which define the distance between the text and border of each schedule cell.   LINE STYLE PANEL The LINE STYLE panel is found in the specification dialogs for many different objects. For information about the settings on this panel, see Line Style Panel on page 305.   FILL STYLE PANEL The FILL STYLE panel is found in the specification dialogs for many different objects. For information about the settings on this panel, see Fill Style Panel and Dialogs on page 193.   TEXT STYLE PANELS The Schedule Specification dialog has three Text Style panels with settings that control the appearance of the selected schedule's text: l MAIN TEXT STYLE controls the text style used in the body of the schedule l TITLE TEXT STYLE controls the text style used in the schedule's title l HEADER TEXT STYLE controls the text style used in the schedule's column headers. For information about the settings on these panels, see Text Style Panel on page 538.   LABELS PANEL The LABELS panel of the Schedule Specification dialog controls the type, size and appearance of the labels that display in plan view.   697 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Schedule Specification Dialog Specify which type(s) of label objects in the selected schedule use.   l Select Use Both Callout and Label for objects listed in the schedule to display both regular labels and schedule callouts.   l Select Use Callout for objects to display schedule callouts but not their regular labels.   l Select Use Label for objects to display only their regular labels and no callouts. See Label Panel on page 700. Label Text l Schedule Number Prefix - Specify the leading characters used in callout labels or when Include Schedule Number is checked in the object’s specification dialog. See Label Panel on page 700.   l Schedule labels usually start with the number 1, but you can select a different Schedule Start Number if you wish.   l When Include Leading Zeroes is checked, single-digit callout labels include a zero in front of the callout number. Uncheck this box to remove these leading zeroes from the labels. Callout Shape When either Use Both Callout and Label or Use Callout is selected above, the callout shape can be selected here. There are ten shapes to choose from.   698 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Object Labels Size/Orientation l Uncheck Automatic to enable the Size field and specify a new value. When checked, the callout is sized so that it encompasses the Label Text that displays inside its shape.   l Specify the Shape Angle.   l Specify the Text Angle relative to the orientation of the callout shape. Not available when Ellipse, Capsule, or Rectangle is selected as the Callout Shape.   l When Automatic is checked, the Text Angle automatically matches the Shape Angle.   Callout Layer Specify the layer that the callouts associated with the selected schedule are placed on. See Layers on page 176.   l Select Use Object Label Layer to place each callout on the layer specified for that object's label.   l Select Use Object Layer to place the object's label on the same layer as the selected schedule. The name of this layer is reported here in parentheses for reference.   l Select Use Custom Layer to select any layer saved in the current file from the drop-down list.   l When Use Custom Layer is selected, you can click the Define button to open the Layer Display Options dialog and select, modify, or add a new layer. See Layer Display Options Dialog on page 179.   Like other object labels, callout labels use the Text Style assigned to the layer they are on. See Text Styles on page 538. Object Labels Object labels can display in plan and cross section/elevation views for a variety of different object types using one of several formats: l Automatic Labels provide basic information about the object, such as its type, size, or name. l You can create a custom label for an object in its specification dialog using text and/or Text Macros. See Label Panel on page 700. l Objects associated with a schedule can display a shaped callout label with each object’s schedule number instead of or in addition to their regular object label. See Schedule Specification Dialog on page 692. Object labels have their own edit handles that display when their object is selected, and can be both moved and rotated using edit handles as well as settings in the object's specification dialog. Schedule callout labels can be moved in the same manner but can only be rotated using settings in the Schedule Specification dialog. When an object has both label types displaying, they share a single Move handle and can only be rotated using settings in the object specification dialog and Schedule Specification dialog. See and Labels Panel on page 697 and Edit Handles on page 23. AUTOMATIC LABELS Most objects that can display labels have an Automatic Label created by the program that states basic information about it. l Native objects such as doors, windows, and cabinets dynamically derive their automatic label from their size and type. See Native Objects vs Symbols on page 971. l Symbol objects such as fixtures and furnishings derive their automatic label from the Symbol Name specified in the Symbol Specification dialog. See 3D Panel on page 990. When Automatic Label is selected in the object’s specification dialog, this is usually the label that will be used; however: 699 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Label Panel l If a user-defined label is specified in the object’s defaults dialog, that label will be used instead of the Automatic Label. l If the object is included in a schedule and callout labels are specified in that schedule, a callout label will be used. l Fixtures and appliances inserted into cabinets do not have labels of their own unless they are associated with a schedule set to use shaped callout labels. DEFAULT LABEL FORMATTING Custom labels can include a variety of macros that report size information about the object. This information can be reported in either of two ways: l Default Formatting includes the unit of measurement after each macro reporting size information. In files using US Units, sizes are described using fractional inches with up to 1/16” accuracy. l When Default Formatting is not used, units of measurement are not shown and decimal inches are used. You can specify whether to Use Default Formatting in the object’s specification dialog. See Label Panel on page 700. DISPLAYING LABELS The display of object labels in plan and cross section/elevation views can be controlled by layer in the Layer Display Options dialog. System Default label layer names begin with the object type, followed by the word Label: for example, cabinet labels are located on the “Cabinets, Labels” layer. See Layer Display Options Dialog on page 179. You can choose to place an object's label on a different layer if you wish, as well as suppress the label for an individual object on the LABEL panel of its specification dialog. This setting does not affect schedule callouts. See Label Panel on page 700. Object labels use the Text Style assigned to each label’s layer. For example, cabinet labels are placed on the “Cabinets, Labels” layer by default and use the Text Style assigned to that layer. The callouts associated with a schedule also use the Text Style associated with the layer they are placed on. See Text Styles on page 538. With the exception of those for rooms, roofs, and cameras, labels can also be included in the Materials List and Master List. Items in the Labels column of the Materials List are editable; however, any changes will not be applied to the actual objects’ labels. See Materials List Columns on page 1317. The minimum on-screen display size of labels can be specified in the Preferences dialog. See Appearance Panel on page 95. Label Panel The LABEL panel is found in the specification and defaults dialogs for a variety of different objects. The settings that are available will vary depending on the type of object that is selected. Note: If you choose a callout shape in the Schedule Specification dialog, the settings here are overridden and the schedule label is used instead. See Labels Panel on page 697. 700 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Label Panel Suppress Label Check this box to prevent the selected object’s label from displaying in plan and cross section-elevation views. This option does not affect the display of schedule callouts. See Object Labels on page 699. Most objects have this option; however, CAD blocks; Bay, Box, and Bow Windows; and Mulled Units instead have several settings for controlling Multiple Component labels. These settings also affect how Bay, Box and Bow Windows and Mulled Window units are counted in schedules and the Materials List. See Window Labels on page 587 and Displaying Mulled Units on page 584.   For CAD blocks; Bay, Box and Bow Windows; and Mulled Window units:   l Select Suppress All Labels to display no label in plan view. Individual components are counted in schedules and in the Materials List.   l Select Show Component Labels to produce labels for each component in plan view. Individual components are counted in schedules and in the Materials List.   l Select Show Single Label for Entire Unit to produce one label for the unit and suppress component labels. When this option is selected, the settings that follow on the LABEL panel become enabled.   Label Options Specify the information reported in the label. Not available for cameras. See Displaying 3D Views on page 1097. l Select Automatic Labels to use the default label for the selected object. See Automatic Labels on page 699. The Height/Width Display settings are only available for doors and windows. 701 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Label Panel l Select Width/Height to use a numeric format in which the width in inches (mm) is followed by the height.   l Select Height/Width to use a numeric format in which the height in inches (mm) is followed by the width.   l Select Width Only to use a numeric format in which only the width in inches (mm) is indicated.   The Additional Text options add extra information to the Automatic Label as well as any schedules that the selected object is listed in. See Columns to Include on page 689.   l Check Include Schedule Number to include the object’s Schedule Number at the beginning of its Automatic Label text, as well as in the Label and Size columns of any schedule that it is listed in. See Schedule Number Format on page 689.   l For a selected window, check Include Type to include the abbreviation for each window’s type in its Automatic Label. For example, 3050DH describes a 3050 double hung window. This also affects the Label column of any schedule the window is listed in.   l For a selected door, check Include Type to include the hinge side and whether each door is interior or exterior in the Size column of any schedule that the door is listed in. This also affects the Label column of the schedule, but does not affect the door’s Automatic Label itself. An alternative to displaying Type information in the Label and/or Size columns is to include the Type column in a schedule. See Columns to Include on page 689.   l Select Specify Label to replace the selected object’s Automatic Label with whatever you type in the text field below. Press the Enter key while the cursor is in the text field to begin a new line. When Specify Label is chosen, the text of the selected object’s Automatic Label initially populates the text field.   l Click the Insert Macro button to insert a Global, User Defined or Object Specific Text Macro into the custom label. See Text Macros on page 540.   l Only available for layout boxes, select Use Callout to replace the regular text label with a callout shape. Click the Edit button to specify the callout's attributes, including macros that report information about the view, in the Callout Specification dialog. See Callout Specification Dialog on page 526.   l Only available for layout boxes, select Use Marker to replace the regular text label with a marker. Click the Edit button to specify the marker's attributes, including macros that report information about the view, in the Marker Specification dialog. See Marker Specification Dialog on page 531.   l Specify whether to Use Default Formatting for any inserted macros that report size information. See Default Label Formatting on page 700.   l Check Display Border to turn on the display of a border polyline around the selected object's label.   l Select an Alignment option from the drop-down list to apply to the selected object's label text. 702 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Label Panel l When Auto Adjust Text Direction is checked, label text is oriented relative to the bottom or the right side of the view window, depending on the object's angle. When unchecked, label text is oriented relative to the object's front edge or interior side, regardless of the object's angle. Position and Orientation In plan files, these settings affect a selected object's label in either all plan views or the currently active cross section/elevation view. The defaults for these settings only affect plan views - in other types of views, labels are always initially placed at 0, 0, 0°. See Default Settings on page 77. Note: The type of view that is currently active is noted at the beginning of this heading label: Plan View, Camera View, Wall Detail, or CAD Detail. If an architectural object's specification dialog is accessed using the Open Row Object(s) edit tool in a CAD Detail, the Plan View settings will be available. See Open Row Object(s) on page 686. l Specify the X Offset value, moves the label side to side relative to the midpoint of the object’s front face.   l Specify the Y Offset value, which moves the label forward or backward relative to the object’s front face.   l Specify the Angle, which rotates the label either relative to the angle of its object’s front face or to an absolute angle.    l Select Relative Angle to measure the label’s Angle relative to its object’s front face.   l Select Absolute Angle to measure the label’s Angle relative to an imaginary horizontal line drawn in the positive X direction from the origin. See 3D Drafting on page 13.   l Regardless of which way the selected object is facing, in plan view the X Offset will move the label parallel with the object’s front face. The Y Offset value will move the label perpendicular to the object’s front.   l In cross section/elevation views, the Offset X will move the label side to side and the Offset Y will move it up or down. l Specify the Reference, which is the point on the selected object from which the X and Y Offset are measured from. Only available for layout boxes and, in plan view only, for cabinets, symbol objects, and architectural blocks. Camera View Display These settings are only active if you open an object’s specification dialog in a cross section/elevation view, and only affect the display of the selected object’s label in the current view. Not available for cameras or layout boxes.   l Select Automatic to display the object’s label when the surface at its center point is visible in the view. l Select Show in this View to display the object’s label regardless of whether its center point is visible. l Select Hide in this View to suppress the object’s label regardless of whether its center point is visible. Label Layer Specify which layer the object's label is placed on. See Layers on page 176. l Select Use System Layer to place the object's label on the system default layer for the selected object type's labels. The name of this layer is reported here in parentheses for reference. l Select Use Object Layer to place the object's label on the same layer as the object itself. The name of this layer is reported here in parentheses for reference. 703 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Schedule Panel l Select Use Custom Layer to select any layer saved in the current file from the drop-down list. l When Use Custom Layer is selected, you can click the Define button to open the Layer Display Options dialog and select, modify, or add a new layer. See Layer Display Options Dialog on page 179. Preview In most specification dialogs, a preview of the selected object displays here. In the preview pane, labels can be seen in Plan View only. Only the regular object label is shown: even when the object has a schedule callout label. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22. Schedule Panel The SCHEDULE panel is found in the specification and defaults dialogs for a variety of different objects. The settings on this panel let you assign the selected object to one or more schedule categories. See Schedule Categories on page 684. The settings on this panel are not active in for architectural blocks unless Treat as One Object is checked in the Architectural Block Specification dialog. See General Panel on page 1011. l Check Include in Schedule to list the selected object in any schedule that includes its Schedule Category. l Select Auto Schedule Category to assign the selected object to a schedule category based on its type. l Select Include in Schedule As to enable the settings that follow and assign the selected object to one or more categories in the list. In the list of schedule categories: l Click the arrow to the left of a heading to expand it and see the categories listed under it, or to collapse it again. l Check the box beside a category to list the selected object in any schedule set to include that category. l Heading level items often have a check box with a solid fill, indicating that some items listed under it are checked while others are not. If you click to check the box, all items under the heading will become selected; if you click again to clear the box, no items under it will be selected. l The “Custom” heading will not be available to select if no Custom Schedule Categories have been created. l Click the New Custom Category button to open the New Custom Category dialog. Type a short, descriptive name and click OK to have the new category display in the list under the “Custom” heading. See Custom Schedule Categories on page 684. 704

Foundations Chapter 20 There are three foundation types in Chief Architect Premier: stem walls with footings, grade beams on piers, and monolithic slab. All three can be generated automatically or manually. The foundation type can be specified in the Foundation Defaults dialog when the foundation is built on Floor 0. There can be only one foundation level in a plan, Floor 0; however, foundation structures can be drawn on any floor using the Foundation and Slab Tools.   Always consult registered geotechnical and civil engineers for information regarding the proper foundation for your site. TOPICS Foundation Defaults 706 Foundation Defaults Dialog 706 Building a Foundation 710 Displaying Foundations 711 Editing Foundations 713 Deleting Foundations 716 Foundations and Rooms 716 Foundations and the Terrain 717 The Slab Tools 719 Editing Slabs 720 Slab Specification Dialog 720 Editing Piers and Pads 722 Pier/Pad Specification Dialog 723 Fireplaces 724 Fireplace Specification Dialog 726 Library Fireplaces 728 Chimneys 728 705 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Foundation Defaults Foundation Defaults There are several defaults dialogs that affect the foundation. They can be accessed by selecting Edit> Default Settings. In the Default Settings dialog, select “Foundation” and click the Edit button to open the Foundation Defaults dialog. If a foundation has been built, it will have a Floor 0 Defaults dialog. The structural settings in this dialog are initially drawn from those in the Foundation Defaults dialog.  See Floor Defaults Dialog on page 731.   The Foundation Wall Defaults and Slab Footing Defaults dialogs control the default setup of Foundation Walls and Slab Footings. See Wall, Railing, and Fencing Defaults on page 343.   The default attributes for Slabs and Slabs with Footings can be set in the Slab Defaults dialogs. See The Slab Tools on page 719. The default attributes for Post footings can be set in the Framing Defaults/Build Framing dialog. See Build Framing Dialog on page 860. Foundation Defaults Dialog The Foundation Defaults dialog allows you to specify stem wall height, slab thickness, sill plates, and other   characteristics of an automatically-generated foundation. These values determine how a new foundation is generated as well as the sizes for manually drawn foundation walls added to an existing foundation. Select Edit> Default Settings, and in the Default Settings dialog, select "Foundation" and click the Edit button. The settings in the Foundation Defaults dialog are similar to those in the Build Foundation dialog, which opens when Build> Floor> Build Foundation is selected. The primary difference is that when you click OK in the Foundation Defaults dialog, no changes are made to the model. See Building a Foundation on page 710. 706 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Foundation Defaults Dialog FOUNDATION PANEL Automatically Rebuild Foundation Check Auto Rebuild Foundation to automatically rebuild the foundation whenever changes are made to Floor 1 that affect the structure of the foundation. See Rebuilding Foundations on page 713. Foundation Type Three different Foundation Types can be created in Chief Architect. Each type of foundation has different default settings, options, and behaviors. Select the radio button next to the desired type.   l Select Walls with Footings to produce a foundation composed of stem walls with footings that run continuously under the base of the walls.   l Select Grade Beams on Piers to generate a pier and grade beam foundation. The floor framing rests directly on top of the grade beams.   l Select Monolithic Slab to build a slab foundation defined by Slab Footings. The foundation forms the floor platform for Floor 1. It is visible on Floor 0 and can be selected and edited. See Foundation Walls on page 352. l Check Hang 1st Floor Platform Inside Foundation Walls to produce stem walls that build up to the top of the floor platform of Floor 1. When unchecked, the stem walls build to the bottom of the floor platform, which bears on top of them. Only available when Walls with Footings is selected, above.   707 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Foundation Defaults Dialog l Check Show “S” Markers on Step Foundation to include an “S” symbol in plan view anywhere there is a step in foundation wall height. Not available when Grade Beams on Piers is selected, above. See Displaying Foundations on page 711. Slab l The name of the Default Slab Footing Wall Type displays here for reference. Click the Edit Default Slab Footing button to open the Wall Type Definitions dialog and change the definition of the default wall type. Only available when Monolithic Slab is the selected Foundation Type.   l Specify the Slab Thickness, which is the thickness of the slab produced above the footing or at the top of the stem wall.   l Check Slab at top of Stem Wall to raise the slab so its top is flush with the top of the stem walls. Only available when Walls with Footings is the selected Foundation Type. If Slab at top of Stem Wall is selected, all rooms on the first floor are automatically set to Floor Supplied by the Foundation Room Below in the Room Specification dialog. See Structure Panel on page 439. Stem Walls l The name of the Default Foundation Wall Type displays here for reference.   l Click the Edit Default Foundation Wall button to open the Foundation Wall Defaults dialog and change the default settings for foundation walls. See Foundation Walls on page 352. l If Monolithic Slab is the selected Foundation Type, the Edit Garage Curb button will be available. Click it to open the Foundation Wall Defaults dialog and define the walls that form curbs around Garage and Slab rooms.   l Specify the Minimum Height, which is the minimum height for foundation stem walls and grade beams and includes the sill plates.   l The Basement Ceiling Height displays here as a reference. This is the distance from the top of the slab floor to the basement ceiling and is equal to the Minimum Wall Height minus the Slab Thickness. If the Minimum Wall Height is at least 76” (1900 mm), a Ceiling Finish is added to the foundation room automatically. A slab floor is also generated above the footing. The ceiling height and finish can be changed later. To remove this slab, specify the room areas in the basement as “Open Below”. See Room Specification Dialog on page 437. Piers These settings are only available when Grade Beams on Piers is the selected Foundation Type.   l Specify the Width, Depth, and Maximum Separation of the piers.   l Choose either Round or Square piers.   Garage Options These settings only apply to rooms defined as Garages. See Garages on page 716.   l Specify the Garage Floor to Stem Wall Top, which is the distance between the slab and the tops of the stem walls in both Garage and Slab rooms. Available for Walls with Footings and Grade Beams on Piers foundation types. See Foundation Defaults on page 706. 708 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Foundation Defaults Dialog Note: The Garage Floor to Stem Wall Top setting only affects Garage rooms that have a Floor Height of 0. See Structure Panel on page 439. l Specify the Lower Garage Floor height, which is the distance that Garage and Slab room floors are lowered when a Monolithic Slab foundation is  built. This value is also the height of the curbs around these rooms. l Specify the Minimum Garage Height, which is the minimum height that stem walls defining a Garage foundation will be, regardless of the Minimum Stem Wall Height for the rest of the foundation.   OPTIONS PANEL The OPTIONS panel allows you to include rebar and other materials related to the foundation in the Materials List. See Materials Lists on page 1303. Some options on this panel may be unavailable depending on the foundation type selected on the FOUNDATION panel.   Rebar Specify the Rebar used in the major foundation components: Footing, Wall Horizontal courses, Wall Vertical courses, Pier, and Slab. Rebar and mesh are calculated in the Materials List provided that the wall or footing they are associated with is the “Concrete” Structure Type; but, they do not display in any 2D or 3D views of the model. See The Materials List Tools on page 1304. l Bars per Course - Specify the number of bars of rebar to be used per course for each foundation component.   l Course Spacing - Define the spacing for Vertical and Horizontal Wall courses, and for Slabs. If slabs are to have rebar instead of mesh, this spacing value applies to both directions.   l Rebar size - Define the rebar size in 1/8th inches. 4 represents 4/8, or 1/2 inch.   l Specify the Overlap where sticks of rebar meet, in terms of the rebar’s Diameter. A value of 40.0, for example, equals 40 times the Rebar Size.   l Check Use Mesh to reinforce the slab floor with mesh instead of rebar, or uncheck it to use rebar.   Foundation Options Select either Foam Seal, Termite Flashing, or both. These options are added to the Materials List, but do not display in the model.   709 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Building a Foundation Building a Foundation Foundations can be generated automatically or drawn manually. A combination of the two methods can also be used.   Three foundation types are available: stem walls with footings, grade beams on piers, and monolithic slabs. The first two options are created using walls; the last creates concrete slabs with footings. Automatically built foundations are placed on Floor 0 and are based on wall positions and floor heights on Floor 1. Foundation walls or slab footings are generated under: l All exterior walls on Floor 1 that define a room that has Build Foundation Below specified. In order to automatically receive a foundation wall below, Exterior walls cannot be Railings or Invisible. See Room Definition on page 413. l Any Railings, Invisible Walls, and interior walls on Floor 1 that have Create Wall/Footing Below checked in the Wall Specification dialog. See Foundation Panel on page 400.   l Any interior walls on Floor 1 defining rooms with different floor heights. See Floor and Ceiling Heights on page 426. At least one room that has Build Foundation Below specified must be defined by visible, non-railing walls on Floor 1 for a foundation to be automatically generated. If no rooms are defined on Floor 1, a blank Floor 0 is created. There can be only one Floor 0 per plan. If your plan requires a foundation on more than one floor, you will need to draw the required foundation walls or slabs yourself.   To build an automatic foundation 1. Specify the desired floor heights for the rooms on Floor 1: particularly Porch and Garage rooms. 2. Select Build> Floor> Build Foundation . 3. Specify the desired foundation type and other information in the Build Foundation dialog. The settings in this dialog are similar to those in the Foundation Defaults dialog. See Foundation Defaults Dialog on page 706. 4. In the New Floor dialog, select Derive new Foundation plan from the 1st floor plan and click OK to build a foundation based on Floor 1. If you prefer, you can instead select Make new (blank) plan for the Foundation to create an empty foundation level where you can manually draw foundation walls or slabs. In most cases, it is preferable to base Floor 0 off the first floor plan and then manually edit the foundation as needed. See Editing Foundations on page 713. FOUNDATION WALL ALIGNMENT By default, foundation walls and slab footings will align with walls on the floor above along the outside surface of the Main Layer of both wall types.  If you prefer, you can specify that foundation walls align to a different part of the walls above. See Aligning Walls on page 375. MIXING FOUNDATION TYPES You can also create a foundation that combines stem walls, grade beams and piers, and/or monolithic slabs. 710 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Displaying Foundations To create a foundation of multiple types 1. Begin by specifying any rooms on Floor 1 that require a slab floor as either a Garage or Slab Room Type. See Foundations and Rooms on page 716. 2. Alternatively, or in addition, you can specify any rooms on Floor 1 as having a Monolithic Slab Foundation. See Structure Panel on page 439.   3. Build Foundation , as described above.   l If the foundation will include any grade beams and piers, specify Grade Beams on Piers as the Foundation Type and build the foundation.   l If the foundation will include a combination of stem walls and slabs, specify Walls with Footings as the Foundation Type.   4. Once the foundation walls have been generated, they can be moved or deleted, and new Foundation Walls , Slab Footings , and/or Slabs can be drawn. See Foundation Walls on page 352 and The Slab Tools on page 719.   OPENINGS IN FOUNDATION WALLS Any doors placed in walls around a Garage will receive cutouts in the garage stem wall or curb. The width of that cutout can be specified in the Door Specification dialog. See General Panel on page 559.   Displaying Foundations The objects associated with foundations can be displayed in a variety of ways in Chief Architect. FOUNDATION LAYERS The display of foundation walls, slabs, curbs, piers and footings is controlled in the Layer Display Options dialog. See Layer Display Options Dialog on page 179. l Foundation Walls, including grade beams, Slab Footings and Garage curbs, are placed on the “Walls, Foundation” layer by default. l Footings under Slab Footings and Foundation Walls are placed on the “Footings” layer by default, as are foundation piers. l Post footings and deck post footings are placed on the “Footings, Post” and “Footings, Deck Post” layers by default. l Slabs created using the Slab Tools are placed on the “Slabs, Custom” layer by default.   l Wall labels and slab labels are placed on the “Walls, Labels” and “Polylines 3D, Labels” layers, respectively.   l In stem wall and grade beam foundations, brick ledge lines in plan view are on the “Slabs” layer; in monolithic slab foundations, they are on the “Walls, Foundation” layer. See Brick Ledges on page 353. l The “Foundations” layer controls the display of all objects on Floor 0 in 3D views but does not affect plan view. IN PLAN VIEW The appearance of foundation wall types, including line weights, colors and fill styles, is specified in the Wall Type Definitions dialog. See Wall Type Definitions Dialog on page 387.   711 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Displaying Foundations The fill style for wall footings can be set in the Wall Specification dialog, while footing line style is controlled by the "Footings" layer. You can place footings on a custom layer if you wish. See Foundation Panel on page 400. Changes in stem wall and monolithic slab foundation heights are represented in plan view with S markers. These markers are located on the “Footings, Step Markers” layer and use the Text Style assigned to that layer. See Stepped Foundations on page 718.   If a door on Floor 1 extends into a stem wall or curb defining a Garage room, its location will be indicated on Floor 0. See Displaying Doors on page 548. WALL AND SLAB LABELS Foundation walls and Slabs can both display labels when the “Walls, Labels” and “Polylines 3D, Labels” layers are on. Unlike some objects, walls and slabs have blank Automatic Labels; however, you can specify a custom label in their specification dialogs. See Wall Specification Dialog on page 392 and Slab Specification Dialog on page 720.   Wall and Slab labels display in floor plan and cross section/elevation views when their respective layer is turned on and use the Text Style assigned to that layer. See Label Panel on page 700.   IN 3D VIEWS In 3D views, all objects on Floor 0 will only display when the “Foundation” layer is turned on. While the display of foundation walls and their footings can be controlled independent of one another in plan view, in 3D views this is not the case. If a foundation wall is set to display, its footing will as well - even if the “Footings” layer is turned off. The reverse is also true - if a foundation wall’s display is turned off, so will its footing’s. The display of monolithic slab foundations in 3D views is controlled by the “Foundation” layer. Slab Footings are located on the “Walls, Foundation” layer; but if this layer is turned off, any Slab Footings that define a foundation room will continue to display as long as the “Foundation” layer is on. IN CROSS SECTIONS When the Auto Detail tool is used in a cross section view, the fill style of each wall layer as set in its Wall Type Definition is used. See Detailing Cross Section/Elevation Views on page 1094. Foundation wall footings and Slabs use a concrete fill that cannot be specified beforehand but can be edited once Auto Detail has been generated. Monolithic slabs and their footings use the fill style specified for the slab room’s Floor Structure definition. See Floor and Ceiling Platform Definitions on page 429. You can choose to override the default line color, style, and weight of objects below grade in the Cross Section/Elevation Specification dialog. These settings do not affect any CAD objects created in the view: including those generated by Auto Detail. See Below Grade Panel on page 1127. IN THE MATERIALS LIST The materials that make up foundation walls, footings, and slab floors are listed under the Foundation category in the Materials List, including:   l Concrete for walls, slabs, and footings l Rebar for walls and footings l Rebar or mesh for slabs 712 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Foundations Slab Footings and the room areas that they define can be assigned Pour Numbers in their specification dialogs. Typically, a Slab Footing will have the same Pour Number as the room it defines, although it is possible for it to define multiple rooms with differing Pour Numbers. Pour Numbers are listed separately under the Foundation category of the Materials List. See Foundation Panel on page 400 and Structure Panel on page 439.   Other objects relevant to foundations can be found in these categories:   l Exterior Trim - Lists slabs drawn with the Slab tools that are located outside a structure.   l Interior Trim - Lists slabs drawn with the Slab tools that are located inside a structure.   See Materials Lists on page 1303.   IN SCHEDULES Foundation walls, Round Piers/Square Pads, Slabs, as well as holes in Slabs, can be included in schedules. See The Schedule Tools on page 682. Foundation walls are listed in the "Walls" category by default; Piers and Pads are listed in the "Piers/Pads" category; and Slabs and Slab Holes are listed in the "Slabs" category. You can, however, assign a selected object to the category of your choice in its specification dialog. See Schedule Panel on page 704. Editing Foundations Stem wall with footings, wall with piers and monolithic slab foundations are all created using walls which enclose room areas. l Foundation walls can be selected and edited much like other walls. See Editing Walls on page 368. l Footing size can be changed on a wall by wall basis. See Footing Width and Height on page 714.   l Foundation rooms can also be selected and edited like other rooms. See Foundations and Rooms on page 716. REBUILDING FOUNDATIONS By default, foundations do not update automatically when changes are made to the structure on Floor 1. For example, if exterior walls are moved or floor platforms are raised or lowered, the foundation must be rebuilt. You can direct the program to rebuild an automatically generated foundation whenever changes are made on Floor 1 that affect the foundation by checking Auto Rebuild Foundation in the Foundation Defaults dialog. See Foundation Defaults on page 706.   You can also rebuild an automatically generated foundation by selecting Build> Floor> Build Foundation from the menu. When Auto Rebuild Foundation is enabled, walls cannot be edited, manually drawn or deleted on Floor 0. When the foundation is rebuilt, any manually drawn or edited walls are deleted. Similarly, rooms on Floor 0 cannot be edited while this option is enabled. If you try to draw a wall or edit a room or a wall while Auto Rebuild Foundation is turned on, a warning message will display.   CHANGING FOUNDATION TYPES When a foundation is generated, the program creates Floor Defaults settings for Floor 0 based on the information in the Build Foundation dialog. If you specify a Monolithic Slab foundation, the default Floor Structure on Floor 1 will also be changed to a slab rather than a framed platform. See Floor Defaults Dialog on page 731.   713 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Foundations To avoid unexpected results, it is recommended that you not change the Foundation Type once the foundation is built. STEM WALL HEIGHT When a foundation is created, all of Floor 0 uses the stem wall height specified in the Foundation Defaults dialog, This height is measured from the bottom of floor platform of Floor 1 to top of the stem walls’ footings. If Floor 1 has multiple floor platform heights, the foundation stem walls will be stepped. Once a foundation is created, stem wall heights can be adjusted either on a room-by-room basis or for individual walls. To change a room’s stem wall height 1. Select a room on Floor 0 and click the Open Object edit button. 2. Specify the desired Stem Wall Height in the Room Specification dialog. See General Panel on page 438. 3. If you wish to reduce the Stem Wall Height, you will first need to reduce the Ceiling Height value by the same amount. If adjacent rooms have stem wall heights that differ by at least 1/16 of an inch, the stem wall separating them uses the larger of these two values. In 3D views, individual stem walls can be selected and edited. In most cases, this method should only be used for stepping the bottom of the foundation wall. See Stepped Walls and Footings on page 381.   FOOTING WIDTH AND HEIGHT Foundation Wall footings derive their Width, Height, and Offset from in the Foundation Wall Defaults dialog, Similarly, Slab Footings use the width and height specified in the Slab Footing Defaults dialog. Once a Foundation Wall or Slab Footing is created, its footing can be adjusted in its specification dialog. See Foundation Panel on page 400. Footing Width can be adjusted using the edit handles in both floor plan and 3D views. Each side of the footing can be edited independently, which means that the Offset can also be modified using the footing resize edit handles.   If the selected wall is a Slab Footing, the footing width can also be resized using dimensions and will resize the Wall Thickness, creating a new wall type if necessary. See Editing Walls on page 368.   714 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Foundations Stem wall footing heights can also be edited in 3D views just as the rest of the stem wall can. Slab  Footing heights, on the other hand, cannot be adjusted in 3D. See Stepped and Raked Walls on page 381. You can specify whether stepped stem walls have vertical footings on the FOUNDATION panel of the Foundation Wall Defaults and Specification dialogs.  You can also specify the chamfer width and height of monolithic slab foundation footings. INTERIOR FOOTINGS Slab foundations often have interior footings: to support posts, for example. You can specify that an interior footing be created under an interior wall on Floor 1 when the foundation is built by checking Create Wall/Footing Below. See Foundation Panel on page 400. You can also draw interior footings using the Slab Footing tool. See Foundation Walls on page 352. If an interior footing is inside a room with a slab foundation and a curb, as in a garage, specify the Slab Footing as Invisible to prevent a curb from generating inside the room. See Room Dividers and Invisible Walls on page 355.   THICKENED SLABS A thickened slab can be created by selecting a Slab Footing and specifying its Chamfer Height to equal the Footing Height. The Chamfer Width can be increased, as well.   l When the Slab Footing is drawn on the interior of a slab room, a thickened slab is created.   l When the Slab Footing defines the edge of a slab, a thickened slab edge results.   You can also specify the Chamfer Height and Width before the Slab Footings are created in the Slab Footing Defaults dialog. See Foundation Panel on page 400.   715 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Deleting Foundations Deleting Foundations Select Build> Floor> Delete Foundation to delete the entire foundation floor. You can also select and delete individual foundation walls and slabs by clicking the Delete edit button or pressing the Delete key. See Deleting Objects on page 284. Deleting and rebuilding the foundation is often the quickest way to update the model when substantial changes are made to Floor 1 after the foundation is built. Foundations and Rooms When a foundation plan is created, rooms included in the Living Area calculation generate a stem wall, grade beam, or slab foundation below them. Garage rooms generate slab foundations, but exterior rooms such as Decks, Courts and Balconies do not generate any foundation. See Room Types and Functions on page 415. Interior foundation walls are not generated unless: l They separate the area under a Slab or Garage room from the rest of the plan; l They separate the area under a room specified as having a slab foundation from the rest of the plan;   l They define areas under rooms with different floor heights. l A wall on Floor 1 is specified as a Bearing Wall in the Wall Specification dialog. See Foundation Panel on page 400.    Note: To remove all or part of the concrete slab in the basement area, select a basement room and define it as Open Below in the Room Specification dialog. GARAGES When a foundation is generated based on the floor plan of Floor 1, a room on the first floor specified as either a Garage or Slab type will receive a stem wall or pier foundation with a slab floor and stem walls. If a monolithic slab foundation is generated, the room will receive a slab floor with curbs. An opening placed in a wall defining a Garage will receive a cutout in the stem wall or curb that displays in plan view on the floor below provided that the stem wall or curb’s Main Layer has a Concrete or Brick material type.   The width of the concrete cutout can be defined and you can specify whether the cutout displays in the Door or Window Specification dialog. See Framing Panel on page 573.   By default, a room on Floor 1 specified as a Garage or a Slab will be assigned a lower floor height when the foundation is built. The amount that it is lowered depends on the foundation type: l The floor height will drop the default thickness of the floor platform for Floor 1 plus 12” (300 mm) in a Walls with Footings or Grade Beams on Piers foundation. l The floor height will drop 3 1/2” (88 mm) in a Monolithic Slab foundation. These values are set in the Foundation Defaults dialog. See Foundation Defaults on page 706.   716 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Foundations and the Terrain To build a Garage slab with stem walls 1. Before the foundation is generated, specify the room as a Garage or Slab. 2. Build an automatic Wall with Footings or Grade Beam on Piers foundation. In the Floor 1 Garage’s Room Specification dialog, Floor Supplied by the Foundation Room Below will now be checked. See Structure Panel on page 439.   By default, the program produces a  4" (100 mm) slab and 24” (600 mm) high stem walls around the garage. These stem walls are drawn on Floor 0 and will indicate the locations of any doors that extend into them.   To build a Garage slab with curbs 1. Before the foundation is generated, specify the room as a Garage or Slab. 2. Build an automatic Monolithic Slab foundation, specifying the required Lower Garage Floor value. By default, the program produces a  4" (100 mm) slab and 3 1/2” (88 mm) high curb around the garage. The curbs are drawn using Slab Footings on Floor 0, use the Default Foundation Wall type, and will indicate the locations of any doors that extend into them.   The floor height of the garage and the stem wall or curb height can then be adjusted, if necessary, in the Garage room’s Room Specification dialog. See Structure Panel on page 439.   BASEMENT ROOMS When a foundation’s type is Walls with Footings or Grade Beams on Piers, and it is assigned a Basement Ceiling Height of 48" (1200 mm) or greater, the resulting basement is automatically included in the Living Area calculation. It does not, however, have a floor or ceiling finish. When a foundation is assigned a Basement Ceiling Height of 72" (1800 mm) or greater, the resulting basement is automatically created with a 4” (100 mm) concrete slab floor and a default Floor Finish like that on Floor 1. Similarly, it is automatically given a painted drywall Ceiling Finish. See Foundation Defaults on page 706.   Regardless of its ceiling height, however, you can specify a floor or ceiling finish for any room in the Room Specification dialog. See Structure Panel on page 439. The resulting basement can be divided into separate rooms using Interior Walls or any wall type you wish. If the rooms in a basement have different floor heights, it is best to separate them using walls specified as Foundation Walls . Foundations and the Terrain Chief Architect automatically raises the structure in a plan a set distance above the terrain. See Terrain Height vs Floor Height on page 1245.   In a plan with a foundation present, the terrain will be:   l 6” (187 mm) below the top of the stem walls or grade beams in a Walls with Footings or Grade Beams on Piers foundation.   l 8” (200 mm) below the top of the slab in a Monolithic Slab foundation.   717 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Foundations and the Terrain By default, the program will also create a flattened pad under the building footprint.   Not all foundations have these requirements, of course, so you can customize your foundation and terrain to suit your needs.    DAYLIGHT BASEMENTS Daylight basements, also referred to as look-out basements, have walls that are tall enough for basement windows to be positioned above the terrain. They are often found in split level or split entry structures.   To create a daylight basement condition,  build a stem wall foundation and modify these settings in the Terrain Specification dialog:   l Uncheck Auto Calculate Elevation.   l Increase the Building Pad Elevation, which is the distance between the default floor height of Floor 1 and the terrain.   WALKOUT BASEMENTS Walkout basements are a type of daylight basement typically located on sloped terrain. They feature walls that are above ground at the lower end of the slope so that a door can be positioned above the terrain at that end.   To create a walkout basement, build a stem wall foundation and modify these settings in the Terrain Specification dialog:   l Uncheck Flatten Pad.   l Uncheck Auto Calculate Elevation.   You will also need to create sloped terrain and adjust the Building Pad Elevation and/or terrain data so that the terrain is at the appropriate height relative to the structure at both the high and low ends of the slope.   STEPPED FOUNDATIONS Stepped foundations are usually built on sloping terrain. A stepped foundation will be produced automatically if more than one floor height is present on Floor 1 when the foundation is built. In plan view, steps in stem wall and monolithic slab foundations are represented using S markers. See Displaying Foundations on page 711.   As with a walkout basement, you will need to build a stem wall foundation and modify these settings in the Terrain Specification dialog:   l Uncheck Flatten Pad.   l Uncheck Auto Calculate Elevation.   718 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - The Slab Tools You will also need to create sloped terrain and adjust the Building Pad Elevation and/or terrain data so that the terrain is at the appropriate height relative to the structure at both the high and low ends of the slope.   You can also create a stepped foundation by editing foundation rooms and walls. See Stem Wall Height on page 714. The Slab Tools Select Build> Slab to access the Slab Tools.   SLABS Select Build> Slab> Slab or Slab With Footing, then either click or click and drag a rectangle to draw a slab. The Slab Tools are intended for generic purposes than foundations and should not be substituted for a foundation plan. See Rectangular Polyline on page 319.   A newly drawn Slab or Slab With Footing inherits the settings in the Slab Defaults or Slab with Footing Defaults dialog. Once created, slabs can be edited like other closed polylines. See Editing Slabs on page 720.   A slab is also created when the Post with Footing tool is used. See Post with Footing on page 857.   SLAB HOLES A hole can be placed in a slab or in the floor of a foundation slab with footings. Select Build> Slab> Slab Hole or Build> Slab> Slab Hole With Footing, then either click or click and drag within an existing slab to create a hole.   You can also create a Slab Hole in a Slab, or a Slab Hole with Footing in a Slab with Footing, using the Create Hole edit tool. See Polyline Holes on page 232.   PIERS AND PADS Piers and pads can be manually placed under walls, railings, or beams on any floor. Select Build> Slab> Round Pier or Build> Slab> Square Pad and click in plan view to place a pier or pad.   For information about editing Round Piers and Square Pads, see Editing Piers and Pads on page 722.   EDITING SLABS AND PIERS/PADS Once created, slabs and Slab Holes can be selected in 2D and 3D views both individually and as a group and can be edited using the edit handles, the Edit Toolbar, and the Slab Specification dialog. See Slab Specification Dialog on page 720.   Slabs and Slab Holes can be edited like other closed-polyline base objects in both 2D and 3D views. See Editing Closed Polyline-Based Objects on page 228.   USING THE EDIT TOOLS One or more selected Slabs or Slab Holes can be edited in a variety of ways using the buttons on the Edit Toolbar. As with most objects, Slabs can be copied, replicated, moved, deleted, etc. See The Edit Toolbar on page 130.   You can set the attributes of a selected Slab or Slab with Footing as the defaults for that slab type by clicking the Set as Default edit button. This tool is not available for Post Footings. See Set as Default on page 79. 719 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Slabs SLABS AND THE MATERIALS LIST If a slab's material type is specified as Concrete or Volume, the materials list  calculates the total volume of the slab and all footings. See Define Material Dialog on page 1066.   Editing Slabs Slabs and Slab Holes can be selected in 2D and 3D views both individually and as a group and can be edited using the edit handles, the Edit Toolbar, and the Slab Specification dialog. See Slab Specification Dialog on page 720.   USING THE EDIT HANDLES Slabs and Slab Holes can be edited like other closed-polyline base objects in both 2D and 3D views. See Editing Closed Polyline-Based Objects on page 228.   USING THE EDIT TOOLS One or more selected Slabs or Slab Holes can be edited in a variety of ways using the buttons on the Edit Toolbar. As with most objects, Slabs can be copied, replicated, moved, deleted, etc. See The Edit Toolbar on page 130. You can set the attributes of a selected Slab or Slab with Footing as the defaults for that slab type by clicking the Set as Default edit button. This tool is not available for Post Footings. See Set as Default on page 79. Slab Specification Dialog Select one or more Slabs and click the Open Object edit button to open the Slab Specification dialog. The options in this dialog are similar to those in the Slab Defaults and Slab with Footing Defaults dialogs, but affect the selected slab(s) only. GENERAL PANEL 720 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Slab Specification Dialog Slab Specify the characteristics of the selected Slab.   l Check Hole in Slab to convert the selected slab into a slab hole. A slab hole must be contained within a larger slab. Not available in either Slab Defaults dialog. See Slab Holes on page 719.   l Specify the Thickness, which is the measurement from the slab’s top to bottom surfaces.   l Select the Elevation Reference, from the drop-down list. This determines where the next two settings are measured from and also affects their setting labels.   l Specify the slab’s height to Top, which is of its top surface measured from the selected Elevation Reference. l Specify the slab’s height to Bottom, which is the height of its bottom surface, measured from the Elevation Reference. l When the selected slab is a Post Footing or Deck Post Footing, specify whether it is Square or Round. Not available for manually drawn slabs or if the slab’s shape has been modified using the Change Line/Arc edit tool. See Post with Footing on page 857.   Footing Specify the characteristics of the selected slab’s Footing. Not available in the Slab Defaults dialog. l Check Has Footing if you would like the slab to have a footing around the inside of its perimeter.   l Specify the Height and Width for the footing.   l Specify the Footing Offset, which is the distance that the footing extends out past the edges of the slab. A value of 0 aligns the outside of the footing with the outside of the slab. Preview A preview of the selected slab displays on the right side of the panel. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22.   POLYLINE PANEL The POLYLINE panel states the length of the selected slab’s Perimeter, its enclosed Area, and its Volume See Polyline Panel on page 317.   If the selected Slab has any Holes in it, they will be subtracted from the Area and Volume values. See Slab Holes on page 719.   SELECTED LINE PANEL The SELECTED LINE panel is available when the selected edge is a line as opposed to an arc. For information about the settings on this panel, see Polyline Specification Dialog on page 317.   SELECTED ARC PANEL The SELECTED ARC panel is available when the selected edge is an arc as opposed to a line. See Change Line/Arc on page 256.   LINE STYLE PANEL For information about the settings on this panel, see Line Style Panel on page 305.   721 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Piers and Pads FILL STYLE PANEL The settings on the FILL STYLE panel affect the selected slab’s appearance in plan view. For information about these settings, see Fill Style Panel and Dialogs on page 193.   MATERIALS PANEL For information about the settings on this panel, see Materials Panel on page 1055.   LABEL PANEL Slab labels display in floor plan and cross section/elevation views when the “Polylines 3D, Labels” layer is turned on and use the Text Style assigned to that layer. The Automatic Label for slabs is blank, but you can specify a custom label.   For information about the settings on this panel, see Label Panel on page 700.   COMPONENTS PANEL The information on the COMPONENTS panel can be used in the materials list. For more information, see Components Panel on page 1330.   OBJECT INFORMATION PANEL The information entered on the OBJECT INFORMATION panel can be used in schedules and the materials list. For more information, see Object Information Panel on page 1331.   SCHEDULE PANEL The settings on the SCHEDULE panel determine which schedule categories the selected object is included in. See Schedule Panel on page 704. Editing Piers and Pads Round Piers and Square Pads can be selected individually and in groups in 2D and 3D views  and edited using their edit handles and edit toolbars. There are several ways to move piers and pads; however, they must always be positioned under a wall. A pier or pad can only be moved away from the wall it is placed beneath if it is moved to another wall. USING THE MOUSE In plan view, piers and pads can be edited like CAD lines. Three edit handles allow the pier or pad to be resized and moved along the wall it is placed beneath. See Editing Line-Based Objects on page 216. In 3D views, piers and pads can be edited like CAD boxes. See Editing Box-Based Objects on page 232. USING DIMENSIONS In plan view, piers and pads can also be moved using dimensions. See Moving Objects Using Dimensions on page 483. 722 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Pier/Pad Specification Dialog If you move a foundation wall or beam, any piers or pads it contains will move with it. USING THE EDIT TOOLS A selected pier or pad can be edited in a variety of ways using the buttons on the Edit Toolbar. As with most objects, piers and pads can be replicated, moved, deleted, etc. See The Edit Toolbar on page 130. Pier/Pad Specification Dialog Select a Round Pier or Square Pad and click the Open Object edit button to open the Pier/Pad Specification dialog.   GENERAL PANEL Type Specify whether the selected object is a Round Pier or Square Pad.   Size and Position Specify the Size and Position of the selected pier or pad.   l Specify the Top Height and Bottom Height, as measured from zero.   l Specify the selected pier or pad’s Width.   LAYER PANEL For information about the settings on this panel, see Layer Panel on page 186.   FILL STYLE PANEL The settings on the FILL STYLE panel affect the selected pier or pad’s appearance in plan view. For information about these settings, see Fill Style Panel and Dialogs on page 193.   MATERIALS PANEL For information about the settings on this panel, see Materials Panel on page 1055.   723 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Fireplaces LABEL PANEL Round Pier and Square Pad labels display in floor plan and cross section/elevation views when the “Footings” layer is turned on and use the Text Style assigned to that layer. The Automatic Label for these objects is blank, but you can specify a custom label.   For information about the settings on this panel, see Label Panel on page 700.   COMPONENTS PANEL The information on the COMPONENTS panel can be used in the materials list. For more information, see Components Panel on page 1330.   OBJECT INFORMATION PANEL The information entered on the OBJECT INFORMATION panel can be used in schedules and the materials list. For more information, see Object Information Panel on page 1331.   SCHEDULE PANEL The settings on the SCHEDULE panel determine which schedule categories the selected object is included in. See Schedule Panel on page 704. Fireplaces A selection of freestanding fireplace symbols is available in the Architectural Core Catalog. See The Library on page 945.   A masonry fireplace can be placed in or away from a wall by selecting the legacy Fireplace tool and then clicking in the drawing area.   l If created in a wall, it is considered a wall opening and can be moved or resized like a window or door.   l If created away from a wall, it moves and resizes similar to a cabinet.   The legacy Fireplace tool can be added to the toolbars. See Adding and Removing Buttons on page 132.   The display of fireplaces is controlled in the Layer Display Options dialog. See Layer Display Options Dialog on page 179.   Fireplaces can be edited, moved, resized, and deleted similar other objects. See Editing Objects on page 205.   BUILT INTO A WALL Flush and Mantle fireplace symbols are available in different styles in the Library Browser and can be positioned against a wall to create the front face of a built-in fireplace. For information about adding a chimney, see Chimneys on page 728. To place a masonry fireplace in a wall, click the Fireplace button, then click on a wall. A fireplace is created with the outside of the fireplace flush with the outside of the wall.   Fireplaces cannot be placed in a wall specified as Invisible or if the wall in question is on a locked layer. See Locking Layers on page 178. 724 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Fireplaces A selected masonry fireplace inserted into a wall has four edit handles, all located along the wall.   Click the diamond-shaped Depth handle and drag toward the outside of the wall. The fireplace will stop when the firebox front is flush with the inside edge of the wall.   In 3D views, fireplaces placed in walls have five edit handles: a Resize handle along each edge and a Move handle at the center.   Fireplaces always face the interior when placed on an exterior wall. When placing a fireplace in an interior wall, click on the edge of the wall that you want the fireplace to face. The fireplace is created with the firebox on the same side as the wall edge you clicked on to create it.   FREESTANDING FIREPLACES A selection of freestanding metal and adobe fireplace unit symbols is available in the Library Browser. To place a free-standing masonry fireplace, click the Fireplace button, then click in an open area away from a wall.   Both fireplace symbols and freestanding legacy masonry fireplace objects have ten edit handles when selected and may be rotated, resized, or moved in any direction, similar to the way CAD boxes can. See Editing Box-Based Objects on page 232.   Free-standing fireplaces can be selected and replaced with a symbol from the library by clicking the Replace From Library edit button. See Replace From Library on page 976.   725 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Fireplace Specification Dialog MASONRY FIREPLACE FOUNDATIONS When a Walls with Footings or Grade Beams on Piers foundation is built, a fireplace foundation will be generated under any Fireplaces present on Floor 1. See Building a Foundation on page 710.   Fireplace foundations are the same material type as the original fireplace, but do not have a firebox or a hearth. Fireplace foundations can be edited or deleted as needed. A firebox and hearth can be added in the Fireplace Specification dialog. See Fireplace Specification Dialog on page 726.   Fireplace Specification Dialog Select a legacy Fireplace and click the Open Object edit button to display the Fireplace Specification dialog. Multiple fireplaces can be group-selected, but all objects in selection group must be either placed in a wall or freestanding. GENERAL PANEL Size and Position l Specify the Height, Width, and Depth of the fireplace.   l Specify the Hearth Depth. This is measured from the front of the fireplace out into the room. To eliminate the hearth altogether, enter a zero for this value.   l Specify the Hearth Height, relative to the floor in the room that the fireplace faces.   l Select the Elevation Reference from the drop-down list. This determines where the next two settings are measured from and also affects their setting labels.   l Specify the height to Top, measured from the selected Elevation Reference.   l Specify the height to Bottom, measured from the selected Elevation Reference.   726 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Fireplace Specification Dialog Plan Display Check Suppress Dimensions to turn off the display of the selected fireplace’s width and firebox width dimensions in floor plan view.   Preview The preview of the fireplace updates as changes are made. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22.   FIREBOX PANEL No Firebox Check No Firebox to eliminate the firebox from the fireplace. This is checked by default for a fireplace object generated on Floor 0 to serve as a solid matching base for a fireplace on Floor 1.   Size l Specify the firebox’s Height and Width.   l Specify the Depth of the firebox.   Offset l Enter the offset Distance, which is how far the firebox is offset from the fireplace center. A value of 0 centers the firebox in the fireplace.   l Offset to Left/Right - Choose to offset the firebox to the left or to the right.   Preview The preview of the fireplace updates as changes are made. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22.   ROUGH OPENING PANEL The settings on the ROUGH OPENING panel are also found on the panel of the same name in the Door Specification dialog. See Rough Opening Panel on page 572.   LAYER PANEL For information about the settings on this panel, see Layer Panel on page 186.   727 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Library Fireplaces MATERIALS PANEL For information about the settings on this panel, see Materials Panel on page 1055.   COMPONENTS PANEL The information on the COMPONENTS panel can be used in the materials list. For more information, see Components Panel on page 1330.   Library Fireplaces A variety of fireplace symbols are available in the library. Flush fireplaces are designed to snap to wall surfaces. Some fireplace symbols can be enclosed by walls or positioned to project through a wall. See Placing Library Objects on page 972.   Always check the manufacturer’s product information for the framing and clearance requirements of the fireplace unit you plan to use, and design your plan accordingly Chimneys Chimneys can be created using a variety of methods. MASONRY FIREPLACE CHIMNEYS To create a chimney on a masonry fireplace 1. Select the fireplace in a 3D view. 2. Ctrl + drag the top edge of the chimney upward through all the floors and the roof until it is to the desired height. See Unrestricted Movement on page 244. 3. When the chimney is approximately the correct height, select the fireplace, click the Open Object edit button, and type in the exact height. CHIMNEY CHASES AND CAPS There are two ways to draw a chimney chase: l Place a 3D Solid, closed box Geometric Shape, or Soffit over the chimney chase, resize it to match, then increase its height either in its specification dialog or in a 3D view using the same method as extending a masonry fireplace. 728 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Chimneys l Use walls to define the chimney chase as a room area, making sure these walls are aligned between floors. The chimney chase “room” on the uppermost floor should have a much higher ceiling than the other rooms on that floor and should also have no ceiling or roof. See Room Specification Dialog on page 437. A selection of chimney tops is available in the library. In addition, custom chimney caps can be made using 3D Solids or other primitive objects, Geometric Shapes, and/or Soffits. See Other Objects on page 1014. 729

Multiple Floors Chapter 21 When a new plan file is opened in Chief Architect Premier, two floor levels are present: Floor 1 and the Attic Floor. You can add more floors whenever you like: up to 30  total. Once created, floors can also be copied, swapped, and deleted.   Chief Architect also supports special floors for foundations and attics. Only one foundation level and one attic can exist in a plan. Foundations are discussed in their own chapter. See Foundations on page 705.   TOPICS Floor Defaults Dialog 731 Floor Tools 731 Adding Floors 732 Displaying Floor Levels 734 Exchanging Floors 735 Copying Floors 735 Deleting Floors 735 Rebuilding Walls, Floors and Ceilings 735 Split Levels 736 The Current Floor 737 The Attic Floor 738 The Reference Display 738 730 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Floor Defaults Dialog Floor Defaults Dialog There is a Floor Defaults dialog for each floor in a plan file aside from the Attic floor, which can be accessed by selecting Edit> Default Settings. Click the arrow to the left of “Floors and Rooms” to expand the category, then expand the “Floor Levels” subcategory. Select  one or more floor levels and click the Edit button to open the Floor Defaults dialog for that floor. See Default Settings vs Preferences on page 77.   l Floor Defaults can also be accessed by double-clicking the Floor Tools parent button.   l In addition, the Floor Defaults button can be added to the toolbars. See Toolbar Customization Dialog on page 134.   The Floor Defaults dialog also opens whenever you add a new floor to the plan. See Adding Floors on page 732.   The Floor Defaults dialog does not open when you build a foundation; however, the Floor 0 Default settings are created based on the current Foundation Defaults. See  Foundation Defaults on page 706.   The Floor Defaults dialog is similar to the Room Specification dialog, but controls the default settings for all rooms on the floor in question. The settings here also control the height of individual walls as they are drawn on that floor. See Room Specification Dialog on page 437.   Note: The default floor height for Floor 1 is 0. It can be modified in the Room Specification dialog, but not in the Floor 1 Defaults dialog. See Floor and Room Defaults on page 413. STRUCTURE PANEL The settings on the STRUCTURE panel are similar to those in the Room Specification dialog. See Structure Panel on page 439.   MOLDINGS PANEL The settings on the MOLDINGS panel are similar to those in the Room Specification dialog. See  Moldings / / Profiles / Rails / Panels on page 927.   FILL STYLE PANEL The settings on the FILL STYLE panel are similar to those in the specification dialogs for many objects throughout the program. See Fill Style Panel and Dialogs on page 193.   MATERIALS PANEL The settings on the MATERIALS panel are similar to those in the specification dialogs for many objects throughout the program. See Materials Panel on page 1055.   Floor Tools Select Build> Floor to access the following floor tools:   731 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Adding Floors Build New Floor builds a new floor; a new floor can be generated based upon the perimeter of the floor below or a blank floor can be created and drawn from scratch. See Adding Floors on page 732.   Insert New Floor inserts a new floor below the Current Floor. See Adding Floors on page 732.   Delete Current Floor removes the Current Floor from the plan. For more information, see Deleting Floors on page 735.   Exchange With Floor Above moves the Current Floor up one floor and the floor above it down. See Exchanging Floors on page 735.   Exchange With Floor Below moves the Current Floor down one floor and the floor below it, up. See Exchanging Floors on page 735.   Build Foundation opens the Foundation Defaults dialog and build a foundation floor. See Building a Foundation on page 710.   Delete Foundation removes the foundation from the plan. See Deleting Foundations on page 716.   Hole in Floor Platform allows you to draw a hole in a floor platform on the Current Floor. See Floor and Ceiling Platforms on page 428.   Hole in Ceiling Platform allows you to draw a hole in a ceiling platform on the Current Floor. See Floor and Ceiling Platforms on page 428.   Floor Material Region allows you to create an area within a floor platform that uses different materials than the floor. See Floor and Wall Material Regions on page 1037.   Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings forces Chief Architect to recalculate the relationship between the walls, floors, and ceilings in your model. See Rebuilding Walls, Floors and Ceilings on page 735.   Adding Floors When a new plan file is opened in Chief Architect Premier, two floor levels are present: Floor 1 and the Attic Floor. You can add up to 30 total living floors, as well as create a foundation below Floor 1.   Floors can be added whenever you like; and once created, they can also be copied, swapped, and deleted.   Note: Chief Architect allows only one floor, the foundation/basement, below Floor 1. See Foundations on page 705. BUILD NEW FLOOR New floors can be created in plan view as well as in 3D views, and are always added above the top living floor. To create a new floor, select Build> Floor> Build New Floor.   l Derive new 2nd floor plan from the 1st floor plan creates a new top floor with exterior walls generated directly over the exterior walls of the floor below. Wall types and roof directives associated with the walls on the floor below are duplicated; however, interior walls are not. See Roof Panel on page 398.   732 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Adding Floors l Check Move Highest Floor’s Roof Up to move any roof planes displaying on the highest floor in the plan up one floor when the new floor is created. Roof planes displaying on floors other than the top floor are unaffected. This option is only available if there are roof planes built on the top floor and is not available when Auto Rebuild Roofs is enabled. See Build Roof Dialog on page 797.   When Move highest floor roof up is checked, roof planes on the top floor will move even if the “Roof Planes” layer is locked and manually edited roof planes are set to be retained. See Roof Panel on page 798. l Check Step floor/ceiling elevations to match existing floor to maintain all ceiling heights on the existing floor by stepping floor heights on the new floor to match. Ceiling heights on the new floor also become stepped accordingly. See Floor and Ceiling Platforms on page 428.   l Make new (blank) plan for the # floor creates a new top floor that is blank. This option is typically useful only if none of the exterior walls on the new floor will be directly above the exterior walls on the floor below. If you choose this method, it may be helpful to turn on the Reference Floor when drawing walls on the new floor. See The Reference Display on page 738.   When you click OK, the Floor Defaults dialog for the newly created floor opens. Make any necessary changes to the floor structure, moldings, or materials and click OK. See Floor Defaults Dialog on page 731.   The new floor becomes the Current Floor in plan view. If, however, the new floor is created in a 3D view, the camera remains on its original floor and does not move.   INSERT NEW FLOOR A floor level can also be inserted beneath the Current Floor in both plan and 3D views. Begin by going to the floor level you would like to insert a floor under to make it the Current Floor, then select Build> Floor> Insert New Floor.  See The Current Floor on page 737.   l Select Derive new # Floor plan from the # Floor plan to insert a new floor below the Current Floor, with exterior walls based on those of the Current Floor.   l Check Move Highest Floor’s Roof Up to move any roof planes displaying on the highest floor in the plan up one floor when the new floor is created. Roof planes displaying on floors other than the top floor are unaffected. This option is only available if there are roof planes built on the top floor and is not available when Auto Rebuild Roofs is enabled. See Build Roof Dialog on page 797.   When Move highest floor roof up is checked, roof planes on the top floor will move even if the “Roof Planes” layer is locked and manually edited roof planes are set to be retained. See Roof Panel on page 798. l Check Step floor/ceiling elevations to match existing floor to maintain the floor and ceiling heights on the existing floors by stepping floor and ceiling heights on the new floor to match. See Floor and Ceiling Platforms on page 428.   l Select Make new (blank) plan to insert a blank floor below the Current Floor.   733 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Displaying Floor Levels ADDING A FOUNDATION To add a foundation, select Build> Floor> Build Foundation . See Building a Foundation on page 710.   Displaying Floor Levels Chief Architect allows you to view the floor levels in a plan in a variety of ways. IN PLAN VIEW In plan view, only one floor level can be active for editing at a time. This is referred to as the Current Floor. See The Current Floor on page 737. In addition to the Current Floor, one or more other floors can be displayed for reference purposes: the Reference Floor. Objects on the Current Floor can snap to those on the Reference Floor, helping you align objects. See The Reference Display on page 738. Floor and ceiling platforms do not display in plan view. When floor and/or ceiling framing is present, its display can be turned on; however, other components of floor and ceiling platforms like sheathing, drywall, and finish materials, cannot.   IN 3D VIEWS In 3D views, all floor levels in a plan are visible, from the foundation up to the attic. There are two exceptions: Orthographic and Perspective Floor Overviews, which show the Current Floor, not including its ceiling, plus any floors beneath it. Wall Elevation views, which show a wall on a single floor, in a single room.   See 3D View Tools on page 1084. IN THE MATERIALS LIST The materials that make up floor and ceiling platform assemblies are listed under different Categories in the Materials List:   l Subfloor - Lists floor framing and structural subflooring materials specified in all Floor Structure Definitions in the current plan. See Floor and Ceiling Platform Definitions on page 429.   l Flooring - Lists flooring and subflooring materials specified in all Floor Finish Definitions in the current plan.   l Framing - Lists ceiling framing and any other materials specified in all Ceiling Structure Definitions in the current plan.   l Wall Board - Lists ceiling finish materials specified in all Ceiling Finish Definitions in the current plan.   l Insulation - Floor insulation is calculated for all rooms that have a floor, and ceiling insulation is calculated for all rooms that have a ceiling - regardless of the Floor or Ceiling Structure Definition. When a ceiling is not present, insulation is calculated for the roof. See Structure Panel on page 439.   l Foundation - Lists the concrete and mesh for all Floor Structure Definitions in the current plan with a layer of concrete material. See Materials and the Materials List on page 1063.   See Materials Lists on page 1303.   734 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Exchanging Floors Exchanging Floors Select Build> Floor> Exchange With Floor Above or Exchange With Floor Below to swap the Current Floor with the floor above or below.   The floor that was moved becomes the Current Floor at its new location. You can easily move a floor up or down several floors by using either one of these buttons repeatedly.   Copying Floors The Edit Area tools can be used to make copies of entire floors in a plan. See Edit Area Tools on page 269.  You can use these tools to:   l Make a copy of an existing floor to be pasted onto a new floor.   l Make a copy of all existing floors in a plan to be pasted into a different plan.   You can also copy the information on a floor by pressing Ctrl + A (Select All), then using Copy and Paste Hold Position . See Paste Hold Position on page 171.   COPYING BETWEEN PLANS While you can copy and paste floors from one plan file to another, this is not always the best approach.   l To make a copy of the plan for backup or your records, use Save As to save the file using a new name. See Saving Plan and Layout Files on page 40.   l To copy the model into another plan with multiple structures, consider exporting it as a symbol and importing it into the new plan. See Symbol Objects on page 978.   Deleting Floors Select Build> Floor> Delete Current Floor to remove the Current Floor from the plan. If there is a floor above, it becomes the Current Floor; if there is no floor below, the floor beneath becomes the Current Floor. To delete Floor 0, select Build> Floor> Delete Foundation. You can delete the foundation without actually being on Floor 0. Floor 0 cannot be deleted while Auto Rebuild Foundation is turned on. See Deleting Foundations on page 716.   When a floor is deleted, all objects on that floor are deleted with it, including locked roof planes and any other objects on locked layers. See Locking Layers on page 178. Rebuilding Walls, Floors and Ceilings When you make a change to the walls or to the floor or ceiling platforms in your plan, they may not immediately resize or move in the 3D model. The program does detect such changes, though, and the next time you generate a 3D 735 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Split Levels or section/elevation view, walls,  floors and ceilings are rebuilt.   By default, walls, floors and ceilings are also rebuilt when an automatic roof is generated. See Build Roof Dialog on page 797.   You can direct the program to rebuild walls, floors, and ceilings at any time by selecting Build> Floor> Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings .   If you do not want the program to rebuild walls, floors and ceilings when a 3D view is created, uncheck Auto Rebuild Floors and Ceilings in the 3D View Defaults dialog. This may speed up plan view editing for very large plans. When this is unchecked and the structure is not up-to-date, the Rebuild Walls, Floors, Ceilings icon displays near your mouse pointer. See 3D View Defaults Dialog on page 1083.   Split Levels Both split level floor plans and split level entries can be created by controlling the floor and ceiling heights of individual rooms in a multiple story structure.   For more detailed information about both types of structure, visit chiefarchitect.com. SPLIT LEVEL FLOOR PLANS A split level, or tri-level, structure is a building where the floor level in one part of the plan is located approximately halfway between the floor and ceiling levels of another part of the plan.   To create a simple split level plan 1. Draw a simple rectangular structure divided into two separate halves by an interior wall.   2. Select one of the rooms and click the Open Object edit button. See Room Specification Dialog on page 437.   3. Raise the Floor Height then press the Tab key.   4. Restore the Relative Rough Ceiling to the default value, then click OK.   5. Build a stem wall foundation. See Foundations on page 705.   l The foundation under the room with the lower floor height will have the specified Min Stem Wall Height.   l The foundation under the room with the raised floor will have taller stem walls.   l Both can be edited in the Room Specification dialog.   6. If you add a Floor 2, note that the Ceiling Height in the room on Floor 1 will be reset to the default value.   l To maintain a stepped condition on multiple floors, return to this room and set the Relative Rough Ceiling back to using the default.   736 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - The Current Floor SPLIT LEVEL ENTRIES A split level entry, or divided entry, is characterized by an entry door that opens onto a landing positioned halfway between the basement floor and first floor levels.   To create a simple split level entry 1. Create a plan file with a full basement at the location of the entry door. See Basement Rooms on page 717.   2. Go to Floor 0 and draw a stair Landing at the location of the entry. See Landings on page 755.   3. Specify the desired height of the landing. See Stair Landing Specification Dialog on page 787.   4. Draw stairs upward from the basement floor to the landing.   5. Draw a second stair section from the landing upward.   6. Select the stairs and click the Auto Stairwell edit button. See Creating a Stairwell on page 769.   Split level entries are often associated with daylight basements. See Daylight Basements on page 718.   The Current Floor In a given plan view window, only one floor level can be active at any given time. The active floor is referred to as the Current Floor, and it is the only floor on which objects can be edited. If you would like to view two different floor levels side by side, open a second plan view, navigate to the desired floor, and then tile the two views. Although both are visible, only one of these view windows is active. See Working in Multiple Views on page 150.   FLOOR UP / FLOOR DOWN If you are working with more than one floor, you can select Tools> Floor/Reference Display> Up One Floor or Down One Floor to switch from one floor to another. You can change the Current Floor in floor plan, cross section/elevation and 3D views. The Current Floor displays on the Change Floor/Reference button, which can be found between the Down One Floor and the Up One Floor buttons. Floors become available once they have been built. The Attic and foundation levels are also accessible using these tools. CHANGE FLOOR / REFERENCE If there are multiple floors, select Tools> Floor/Reference Display> Change Floor/Reference to open the Change Floor/Reference dialog, where you can select both the Current Floor and which floor is used in the Reference Floor, 737 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - The Attic Floor as well as control the appearance of the Reference Floor. See The Reference Display on page 738. The Attic Floor Chief Architect automatically creates a floor above the top numbered floor level of each plan. This floor is called the Attic floor and has only one purpose: to provide a space for automatically generated Attic walls. See Attic Walls on page 380.   In some situations, you may find it necessary to draw one or more walls on the Attic floor; however, even if you enclose an area with walls, rooms cannot be created on this floor level. If you wish to create an attic loft or bonus room in your plan, you must do so on a numbered floor level.   Because the Attic floor is not meant to be a living area, a warning message will display if you try to draw walls or other objects on this floor level.   The Reference Display Objects  on the Current Floor can snap to objects on the Reference Floor; however, objects on the Reference Floor cannot be selected or edited.   The Reference Display allows you to show the positions of objects on a different floor or even in a different plan file in the current view. This allows you to confirm correct placement of objects; show an as-built structure in the same view as a remodel drawing; compare different options; and more. The Reference Display can be used in plan, camera, and cross section/elevation views. REFERENCING A FLOOR PLAN In plan view, the Reference Display can show one or more Reference Floors from the current plan or from another plan file or files.   l By default, the current plan file is used, the Reference Floor is the floor below the Current Floor, and the Reference Display uses the “Reference Display Layer Set”. l If you specify that the Reference Display refer to another plan file, it will show the same floor level as the current plan by default, if possible, and will use the “Reference Display Layer Set” as defined in that other plan file. While the default “Reference Display Layer Set” is sufficient for most purposes, you can create additional reference layer sets and use any of them individually or in combination in the Reference Floor Display. See Layer Set Management on page 184.   Any layer set can be used as in the Reference Floor Display; however, for best results you should use a layer set designed specifically for this purpose. See Layer Sets on page 182. Reference Floor Display settings, including whether its display is toggled on, which floor level or levels are shown, and which layer set or sets it uses, are plan view specific and can be customized in the Saved Plan View Specification dialog. See Layout Box Specification Dialog on page 1349.   These settings can also be customized in plan views sent to layout. See Layout Box Specification Dialog on page 1349.   738 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - The Reference Display REFERENCING A 3D MODEL In camera and cross section/elevation views, the Reference Display can show objects from another plan file, as well as specify whether they are shown using Standard or Glass House Rendering.   In camera and cross section/elevation views, the default layer set for the current view type as set in the current plan is used. The actual layer set is saved in the referenced plan, and can be changed to use any other layer set saved in that plan. See Layer Set Management on page 184. CHANGE FLOOR / REFERENCE DIALOG Select Tools> Floor/Reference Display> Change Floor/Reference or click the toolbar button that reports the current floor level. See The Current Floor on page 737. In the Change Floor/Reference dialog, you can specify which floor level is the Current Floor. You can also specify a Reference Floor from one or more different plan files, multiple Reference Floors, and Reference Floor layer sets and drawing order here, as well.   When this dialog is accessed from a camera view, the Reference Display settings instead allow you to specify one or more referenced plan files, layer sets, and Rendering Techniques.   Current Floor The Current Floor is highlighted here. Select another floor from the list to make it the Current Floor instead. Reference Display These settings control the display and appearance of the Reference Floor or Reference Model in the current plan, camera, or cross section/elevation view. l Check Show Reference Floor(s) to turn on the Reference Floor Display in the current plan view. When a camera view is active, this option is instead Show Reference Model(s). l The table lists the Current Floor or Plan along with one or more Reference Floors or Models in the order that they are drawn. Line items at the top of the table are drawn in front of line items further down in the table.   l Click on a line item in the table to select and edit it. Items with an arrow on the right side are drop-down lists.   739 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - The Reference Display l In plan view, the Current column indicates which line item in the table is the either the Current Floor, selected above, or the currently active plan file. In camera and cross section/elevation views it indicates which line item is the Current Plan. The Current line item’s attributes cannot be edited in this table. l In all views, you can select a Plan file to show in the Reference Display. o In plan view, the default plan is the Current Plan; in camera and cross section/elevation views, a different plan must be selected for use as the Reference Model. o All currently open plan files are listed in the drop-down list. o Select "Choose Existing Plan" to choose any available plan file. If it is not currently open, it will be opened when you select it. l In plan view only, specify which Floor level is associated with each line item. o The floor levels in the drop-down list are listed in the order that they are drawn in plan view: The floor in row 1 is drawn on top of the floor in row 2, which is drawn on top of the floor in row 3, and so on. Drawing order can be edited using the buttons to the right of the table.   o When “Automatic” is selected, the floor level below the Current Floor is always used; if there is no floor below, the floor above is used instead. If you instead choose a specific floor level from the list, it will be used, regardless of which floor level is the Current Floor. Not available for camera or cross section/elevation views. o When a plan other than the Current Plan is selected for reference, "Match Current" is the default option that ensures that the Current Plan and Reference Plan always show the same floor level.   l Specify which Layer Set each line item uses. See Layer Sets on page 182.   o Click in the Define column to open the Layer Display Options dialog and edit the Layer Set assigned to the selected line item. Not an option for the Current Floor level or Current Plan.   l In camera views, specify which Rendering Technique each referenced plan uses. Select Standard, Glass House, Technical Illustration, or Vector View from the drop-down list. See Rendering Techniques on page 1150.   l Click to place a check in the Details column and include fill patterns in the Reference Floor Display. When unchecked, only object edge lines are drawn. Details are always included in the Current Floor. l When a different plan has been selected for a Reference Plan, you can: o Offset it along the X, Y, and Z axes to bring it intoalignment with the Current Plan. See 3D Drafting on page 13. o Specify the Reference Plan's Angle. See Edit Reference Document Offset, below.   l XOR drawing changes the color of lines in the Reference Floor Display when they are drawn on top of lines on the Current Floor. If the lines have identical properties, they are not drawn at all. When this is unchecked, the Reference Display color does not change, and identical lines are not suppressed.   Use the buttons on the right to manage the list of Reference Floors in the table. New Reference Floors use the Automatic floor behavior and Reference Floor Layer Set by default.   l Click the Insert Above button to add a new Reference Floor directly above the selected line item.   l Click the Insert Below button to add a new Reference Floor directly below the selected line item.   l Click the Move Up button to move the selected line item up one place in the list and in the display order.   l Click the Move Down button to move the selected line item down one place in the list and in the display order.   l Click the Delete button to remove the selected Reference Floor from the list. Not available if only one Reference Floor is present in the list, or if the Current Floor is selected.   740 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - The Reference Display EDIT REFERENCE DOCUMENT OFFSET When a different plan has been specified for the Reference Display, you can select Tools> Floor/Reference Display> Edit Reference Document Offset to toggle on the display of a selection marquee around it. The marquee has two edit handles: Move, and Rotate. The Move handle lets you adjust the X and Y offset, while the Rotate handle allows you to change the Angle. 741

Stairs, Ramps, and Landings Chapter 22 Staircases can be composed of one or more straight or curved stair sections, ramps, and landings. Stairs and ramps can be drawn, selected and edited in 2D and 3D views. Starter treads can be defined, stair sections can be flared, treads can be wrapped, and curved sections can be turned into winders.   Landings can be created automatically or manually and their shape customized. You can edit an existing landing, or create a landing from a closed CAD polyline. Landing heights can be defined or you can let them automatically adjust as needed.   Stairwells can be created automatically or manually and can be seen in 3D views. Local building and fire authorities must be consulted for specific stair construction codes and access requirements. TOPICS Stair and Ramp Defaults 743 The Stair Tools 743 Anatomy of a Staircase 745 Drawing Stairs and Ramps 746 L- and U-Shaped Stairs 747 Displaying Stairs, Ramps, and Landings 749 Editing Stairs and Ramps 750 Stair and Ramp Sections and Subsections 752 Landings 755 Maintaining Tread Depth 756 Flared Stairs and Curved Treads 757 Starter Treads 761 Winders 762 Wrapped Stairs 763 Other Special Railings and Stairs 765 Creating a Stairwell 769 Rooms Below Staircases 770 Staircase Specification Dialog 771 Ramp Specification Dialog 784 Stair Landing Specification Dialog 787 742 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Stair and Ramp Defaults Stair and Ramp Defaults Default settings for stairs and ramps determine the initial attributes of these objects when they are first created. Access the defaults by selecting Edit> Default Settings, then clicking the + beside Stairs and Ramps. Select an item and click the Edit button to open the defaults dialog associated with your selection. See Default Settings vs Preferences on page 77.   The Stair and Ramp Defaults dialogs can also be accessed by double-clicking the Stair Tools parent button or any child tool aside from the Landing tool.   Both interior and exterior stairs have default definitions for size, style, materials and much more. In fact, the default dialogs for stairs and ramps are similar to the Staircase and Ramp Specification dialogs. See Staircase Specification Dialog on page 771 and Ramp Specification Dialog on page 784.   Interior and Exterior stairs are drawn using the same tools: stairs created inside a room are considered Interior while those drawn outside a structure are considered Exterior.   Landings do not have a defaults dialog. Instead, they get their initial attributes from the stairs or ramps that they are connected to.   STRUCTURAL DEFAULTS The purpose of interior stairs is to provide passage from one floor platform to another, so the attributes that influence floor heights - including ceiling heights, floor platform thicknesses, and floor finish materials - also influence the structure of stairs. When considering a staircase’s structure, bear in mind that riser height is directly dependent on the distance from one floor platform to another. When Automatic Heights are used, stairs are built so that they rest on the top of the floor structure of the floor where they are drawn, and build up to the top of the floor structure on the floor above. Risers are measured to the floor finish surfaces on both floors. See Floor and Ceiling Platform Definitions on page 429.   Ramps are built in a similar manner: interior ramps bear on the floor structure, and when Automatic Heights are used, the top surface of both interior and exterior ramps locates floor finish surfaces.   The Stair Tools Select Build> Stairs to access the Stair Tools. DRAW STAIRS To draw a straight staircase select Build> Stairs> Draw Stairs, then click and drag in floor plan or a 3D view. You can also click once to place a staircase that extends from the current floor up to the next floor. See Drawing Stairs and Ramps on page 746. 743 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - The Stair Tools STRAIGHT STAIRS Select Build> Stairs> Straight Stairs, then click to create stairs between the current floor and the floor above. To create stairs between two floor platforms on the current floor, click on the low side, within a few feet of where the floor changes height. l If you click on the low side of a floor platform defined by a railing, a doorway will be created in the railing, adjacent to the stairs. l If you click on the low side of a floor platform defined by a wall, stairs will be created but a doorway will not. l If you click at a location that is not near the edge of a floor platform, a full height staircase will be created. CURVED STAIRS Select Build> Stairs> Curve to Left or Curve to Right and click once in plan view to place a curved staircase. See Curved Stairs and Ramps on page 746. L-SHAPED STAIRS Select Build> Stairs> L-Shaped Stairs, then click to create two equal stair sections that form a 90° corner and are connected by a landing. See L- and U-Shaped Stairs on page 747. U-SHAPED STAIRS Select Build> Stairs> U-Shaped Stairs, then click to create two stair sections that form a 180° turn and are connected by a landing. LANDING Select Build> Stairs> Landing to draw a landing, which is a platform connecting two or more stair sections. See Landings on page 755. There are two ways to create a landing using this tool: l Click once to place a landing measuring 39” (975 mm) on each side. l Click and drag to draw a rectangular landing sized as needed. See Polylines on page 316. You can also create a landing by converting a CAD polyline. See Convert Polyline on page 262.   RAMP Select Build> Stairs> Ramp to draw a sloped ramp. By default, ramps are drawn at a 1:12 slope to a maximum height of 30” (760 mm). See Drawing Stairs and Ramps on page 746. SPIRAL STAIRS In the Library Browser, browse to Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Architectural> Spiral Stairs to access a selection of spiral staircase fixtures. Select the object that you want, then click in any view to place it in the plan. See The Library on page 945. Because spiral staircase symbols are fixture symbols, they do not have an Auto Stairwell edit tool. An opening in the floor above a spiral staircase must be created manually. See Creating a Stairwell on page 769. 744 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Anatomy of a Staircase Anatomy of a Staircase Stairs as well as ramps are often described in terms of rise and run. Rise is typically between 6" and 8", and the run between 10" and 12". In metric plans,  rise is 177 to 190 mm, and the run is about 250 mm. Whenever possible, Chief Architect will automatically apply reasonable rise and run values that meet most building codes to stairs and ramps as they are drawn. In Chief Architect, staircases automatically have a consistent rise and run along their length because this is also a typical requirement of most building codes. When this is not desired, however, stairs and ramps can be divided into multiple sections subsections. See Stair and Ramp Sections and Subsections on page 752. STAIRCASE TERMINOLOGY Balusters - The vertical members that run between the handrail and the treads or bottom rail. Bracket - Decorative L-shaped supports on the exposed side of stairs below each tread. Landing - A platform connecting two or more stair sections. Newels - The end post of a stair railing located at landings and the beginnings and endings of new stair sections. Rise - The height of a riser, measured from tread surface to tread surface, Also referred to as Unit Rise. Rise Angle - The angle of the staircase or stair section, defined by a line drawn through the back surfaces of its treads. Riser - The vertical stair member located between the treads. Risers may be solid or open. When open, the front surfaces of the stringers are considered the risers. Run - The depth of a tread, measured from riser surface to riser surface. Run does not include the Tread Overhang. Also referred to as Unit Run. Runner - The carpet that runs down the center of the staircase. Shoe - The bottom railing, placed on the landing floor, that anchors the balusters at landings. Stringer - The inclined support member of a staircase that supports the treads and risers. Tread - The horizontal member of a stair that the foot is placed on. Tread Overhang - The portion of a tread extending past the front surface of the riser and over the tread below. Also referred to as Nosing or Nosing Extension, it is not included in the Run or Tread Depth measurements. Tread Thickness - The vertical depth of the tread material. Winder - A wedge-shaped stair tread used where curved or angled stairways change direction. STAIR STRUCTURE AND THE MODEL By default, stairs locate the height of the floor platform that they are drawn on and seek the next level, which may be the floor platform of the floor above or a landing. The stringers locate the subfloor of the floor platforms and maintain consistent riser height. If the stairs are long enough to reach the next level at a reasonable rise angle, their tread depth and number of treads are automatically calculated to create a staircase with consistent tread and riser dimensions along its entire length. You can modify this behavior or turn off it off altogether in the Staircase Specification dialog and specify your own rise and run values. Bear in mind, though, that if you turn it off, you will need to specify the correct Top and Bottom Heights to make sure that the stairs actually meet both floor platforms correctly. See General Panel on page 771.   745 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Drawing Stairs and Ramps Drawing Stairs and Ramps Stairs and ramps can be drawn in floor plan and 3D views but not in cross section/elevation views. There are a few things to keep in mind when drawing stairs: l Before stairs are created, make sure that the heights for both the lower and upper floors are correctly defined. l Stairs are drawn going UP, so they should be drawn from the lower of the two floors they connect. l By default, stairs adjust their riser and tread dimensions to connect two floor heights if possible. The rise and run are calculated so that the steps are consistent in size. l Stairs drawn within 1” (25 mm) of a wall will snap to the outer surface of the wall. l Stairs will snap to the Reference Display , if you have it turned on. See The Reference Display on page 738. l Hold down the Ctrl key to suppress these snapping behaviors. l If a stairwell room has been defined on the floor above, the top of the stairs can be dragged until it stops at the railing or wall defining the stairwell. l When drawing stairs or a ramp up from the terrain, it is a good idea to make sure the terrain is up-to-date. See Building the Terrain on page 1256. STRAIGHT STAIRS AND RAMPS The Draw Stairs tool can be used in two different ways: l Click and drag in a straight line to draw stairs that are the length that you drag. l Click once to place stairs that go from the current floor up to the height of the next floor level. You can also click once using the Straight Stairs tool to create stairs between rooms on the same floor with different floor heights or between exterior rooms and the terrain. When the Straight Stairs tool is active, a preview outline of the stairs will follow the mouse pointer. Hold down the Alt key to reverse the direction of the Up arrow in the preview. Similarly, Ramps can be created by either clicking and dragging or by clicking. A ramp created with a single click will be 30” (760 mm) high, have a slope of 1:12, and be 360” (9120 mm) long. An individual stair or ramp section must be between 6” (150 mm) and 100’ (30 m) in length. If a greater length is needed, connect two sections using a landing. CURVED STAIRS AND RAMPS You can make a straight stair or ramp section curved, or vice versa: l Select the stairs or ramp and click the Change Line/Arc edit button. See Change Line/Arc on page 256. l Select the stairs or ramp, hold down the Alt key (or right-click), and drag an end edit handle. See Alternate on page 207.   746 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - L- and U-Shaped Stairs You can also curve straight stairs and ramps by drawing them against a curved wall. Curved Stairs can also be created in plan view by selecting Build> Stairs> Curve to Left or Curve to Right. Click to place a 90º curved stair section that can then be edited. You can continue clicking to place additional curved staircases until another tool is selected. Once drawn, the radius of a curved stair section can be specified in the Staircase Specification dialog. See General Panel on page 771. DRAWING STAIRS AND RAMPS DOWNWARD Stairs  and ramps can be drawn from the current floor level downward; however, drawing stairs or ramps between floors in this manner is not recommended. Drawing downward should only be used to create a staircase or ramp between a porch or deck and the terrain when you require the direction arrow to say “DN” instead of “UP”. See Displaying Stairs, Ramps, and Landings on page 749.   To draw stairs going downward 1. Select Build> Stairs> Draw Stairs . 2. Hold down the Alt key or the right mouse button.   3. Click and drag to create straight stairs.   When drawing stairs or ramps from a floor platform to the terrain, or vice versa, they will locate the height of the terrain as long as it is lower than the floor height. You can also create a landing or “room” outside the structure and use it to establish the bottom height of the stairs or ramp. Then, draw in an upward direction from the lower platform to the upper platform. L- and U-Shaped Stairs The L-Shaped Stairs and U-Shaped Stairs tools allow you to place staircases composed of two stair sections connected by one or more landings with a single click. 747 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - L- and U-Shaped Stairs The staircases created with these tools build from the current floor to the floor above. If you need a staircase that builds between platforms on the same floor level, or in a downward direction, you will need to draw it manually. See Landings on page 755. When you select either tool, the New Shaped Staircase dialog opens. NEW SHAPED STAIRCASE DIALOG The settings in this dialog retained between sessions in the software and are global, affecting all plans. l Check Only Show This Dialog on Double Click to suppress this dialog unless the L-Shaped Stairs or U-Shaped Stairs is double-clicked. l Specify the Default Direction of the stairs as they build upward: Clockwise, or Counterclockwise. These settings only apply to staircases when they are not placed next to a wall. l Check Make Winders to create multiple landings with angled edges between the two stair sections When unchecked, a single rectangular landing is produced. U-Shaped Stairs l Specify the width of the Gap between the two stair sections. l Check Split Landing to create two rectangular landings instead of one. When Make Winders is also checked, each of these two landings is further divided into triangular shaped winders. When you click OK, a preview outline will follow the mouse pointer. PLACING L- AND U-SHAPED STAIRS You can control the staircase’s orientation and direction prior to placing it by moving the mouse pointer towards a wall. In the case of a L-Shaped staircase with Clockwise set as the Default Direction: l As you move the mouse pointer close to a wall, the upper stair section in the preview outline will snap to the wall first. l As you move the mouse pointer closer to the wall, the preview outline will rotate so that the bottom stair section snaps to the wall instead.   l If you move the mouse pointer into a wall corner, the preview outline will rotate so the landing is in the corner and the Default Direction is used. In the case of a U-Shaped staircase with Clockwise set as the Default Direction: 748 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Displaying Stairs, Ramps, and Landings l As you move the mouse pointer close to a wall, the back of the landing in the preview outline will snap to the wall first. l As you move the mouse pointer closer to the wall, the preview outline will rotate so that the upper stair section snaps to the wall.   l If you continue to move the mouse closer, the lower stair section will snap to the wall instead.   l If you move the mouse pointer into a wall corner, the preview outline will rotate so that the bottom stair section snaps to the wall that is nearest to the mouse pointer. When an L- or U-Shaped Staircase preview outline is in a wall corner, you can use the mouse to further control position and direction: l When an L-Shaped staircase preview is in a wall corner, move the mouse pointer over the stair sections to control which is the bottom section. l When a U-Shaped staircase preview is in a wall corner, move the mouse pointer within the landing area to control which wall the back of the landing snaps to. l With the landing in place, move the mouse pointer over the two stair sections to control which is the bottom section. You can use keyboard hotkeys to override these behaviors: l Press the Alt key to reverse these snapping behaviors and the stairs’ direction.   l Hold down the Ctrl key to prevent the stairs from rotating or snapping to walls. Displaying Stairs, Ramps, and Landings The display of stairs, ramps, and landings in all views is controlled in the Layer Display Options dialog. Stairs, ramps, and landings are placed on the “Stairs & Ramps” layer by default but, once created, can be placed on any layer. See Layer Attributes on page 177. IN PLAN VIEW In plan view, stairs, ramps and landings display on the floor they were drawn on and are only visible from the floor above if there is a stairwell. See Creating a Stairwell on page 769. Stairs and ramps have an arrow indicating the direction they run. Interior stairs and ramps have an UP arrow on the floor they were created on and a DN arrow when viewed from the floor above. See Drawing Stairs and Ramps on page 746. The style and size of the direction arrow can be specified in the Staircase or Ramp Specification dialog. The Text Style, color, and display are controlled by the “Stairs & Ramps, Up/Down Arrows” layer. See Arrowheads on page 327. In addition, staircases can use and display a Walk Line in plan views. The Walk Line is drawn on the same layer as its staircase and can be specified in the Staircase Specification dialog. See Style Panel on page 774.   Stair landings can also display labels in plan and cross section/elevation views when the “Polylines 3D, Labels” layer is turned on.  Landings do not have an automatic label; however, you can specify a custom label in the Landing Specification dialog. See Label Panel on page 700.   You can specify whether newels, balusters, and/or rails display in plan view in the Staircase Specification dialog. See Newels/Balusters Panel on page 781.   The display of stair and ramp overhangs and tread nosing in plan view can be controlled using the “Stairs & Ramps, Details” layer. The display of stair stringers in plan view is controlled using the “Stairs & Ramps, Stringers” layer.   749 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Stairs and Ramps You can create custom labels for stairs, ramps, and landings using the Text Tools and custom text macros. See Creating User Defined Macros on page 1387.   When a staircase is selected in plan view, the numbers associated with each of its sections and subsections display. Stair sections are assigned a single number, while subsection numbers have two parts: a section number and subsection number separated by a hyphen. To see the center of a stair section curve in plan view, click Show Arc Centers and Ends . See Arc Centers and Ends on page 223. ON MULTIPLE FLOORS Stairs and ramps display on the floor level on which they are drawn.  If they are located beneath an Open Below room, they will be visible within the area of that room on the floor level above, as well. To display exterior stairs on multiple floors, you can create a custom Reference Display Layer Set with just the stairs in question set to display. See The Reference Display on page 738.   STAIR BREAKLINES In plan view, staircases can display a breakline symbol. The portion of the staircase located above the breakline can display as either a dashed outline with transparency or it can be suppressed altogether. See Breakline Panel on page 778.   A breakline can be added to a selected staircase in either of two ways:   l Click the Add Breakline edit button.   l Check Has Breakline in the Staircase Specification dialog.   A breakline’s position along the staircase can be adjusted using the small, circular Move Breakline edit handle that displays along the breakline, as well as in the Staircase Specification dialog.   To remove a breakline from a staircase, click the Remove Breakline edit button or uncheck Has Breakline.   IN 3D VIEWS Although stairs span between two floors, they can only belong to one floor. As a result, only multi-floor views show the upper floor with the platform opening and the lower floor with the staircase simultaneously. In Floor Overviews, stairwells may appear as an empty spaces. See 3D View Tools on page 1084. Editing Stairs and Ramps Staircases and ramps can be selected and edited in plan view and 3D views. See Selecting Objects on page 210. To select a single section of a staircase, hold down the Shift key before clicking on it. When selected in this manner, a stair section can be edited independent of any other connected stair sections.   750 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Stairs and Ramps USING THE EDIT HANDLES When a staircase or ramp is selected, its edit handles display. These edit handles can be used to customize the selected object in many ways. See Editing Objects on page 205. l Straight stair sections and ramps are edited along their centerlines like CAD lines. They have additional edit handles for resizing the width of the section. See Editing Line-Based Objects on page 216. l Curved stair sections and ramps are edited along their centerlines like CAD arcs and also include edit handles for resizing the stair’s width. See Editing Arc-Based Objects on page 219. l Ramps can be resized to a maximum top height of  30” (760 mm). If you extend a ramp’s length to greater than 360” (9120 mm), its slope will decrease. For a taller ramp and control over the slope, uncheck Automatic Heights in the Ramp Specification dialog and specify the values you need. See General Panel on page 785.   l When stair sections are merged, the edit handles display differently depending on what subsection is currently selected. See Merging Stair and Ramp Sections on page 753. l When moving merged stair or ramp sections, all merged sections and landings move as one unless Stair Sections Move Independently is checked in the Preferences dialog. To temporarily enable this behavior, hold down the Alt key on the keyboard. See Architectural Panel on page 113 and Alternate on page 207. l Additional edit handles display on the first two treads of a staircase if the Starter Tread edit button is clicked. See Starter Treads on page 761. l Several additional edit handles display on a staircase if the Flare/Curve Stairs edit button has been clicked. See Flared Stairs and Curved Treads on page 757.   IN THE SPECIFICATION DIALOG Stairs and ramps can be customized and their structure precisely defined in the Staircase and Ramp Specification dialogs. See Staircase Specification Dialog on page 771, Ramp Specification Dialog on page 784, and Stair Landing Specification Dialog on page 787. Stair, ramp, and landing railings can also be customized. See Railing Panel on page 779, Newels/Balusters Panel on page 781, and Rails Panel on page 783. USING THE EDIT TOOLS A selected staircase or ramp can be edited in a variety of ways using the buttons on the Edit Toolbar. See The Edit Toolbar on page 130. Starter Tread allows you to create one or two rounded starter treads at the base of a selected staircase. See Starter Treads on page 761. Flare/Curve Stairs allow you to flare or curve the sides of the selected staircase's base. See Flared Stairs and Curved Treads on page 757. Add Stair Breakline adds a breakline to the selected staircase while Remove Stair Breakline removes it. See Stair Breaklines on page 750. Auto Stairwell creates a Stairwell room on the floor above the selected staircase. See Creating a Stairwell on page 769. 751 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Stair and Ramp Sections and Subsections ADJUSTING THE RADIUS OF CURVED STAIRS The easiest way to match the radius of a stair  section to the radius of a curved wall is to draw a staircase near one side of the curved wall using the Draw Stairs tool. The stairs snap to the wall, and the radius of the new staircase is defined. See Curved Stairs and Ramps on page 746.   Existing curved stairs can be aligned with an existing curved wall by aligning their centers, much the same way that curved stairs on different floors can be aligned. See Aligning Objects on page 246.   If there is no curved wall, the radius of a stair section can be aligned to a CAD arc or circle.   To align curved stairs to an object 1. Align the centers of the CAD object and the staircase.   2. Select the curved stairs and move the side nearest to the arc or circle edge using the Resize edit handle.   Finally, restore the stair width by dragging from the other side handle or using the Stair Specification dialog.   Stair and Ramp Sections and Subsections In Chief Architect, staircases and ramps can be composed of multiple sections. In addition, each section can be broken into multiple subsections. l Both sections and subsections can be curved while their neighbors are straight and can have different tread depths. l Stair sections can also have different tread widths, can be disconnected from adjacent sections using the edit handles, and are usually separated from other sections by landings. l Subsections both move and rotate as a single object, while sections move with other sections but rotate separately. You can identify sections and subsections by clicking on a stair or ramp to select it: sections are identified with labels using whole numbers (1, 2, etc), while subsections are identified using hyphens (1-1, 1-2, etc). In addition, when a stair or ramp is selected, only the selected section will have edit handles. The selected section or subsection can be identified by the Move edit handle, which is red by default. See Selected Edge on page 212. CREATING STAIR AND RAMP SUBSECTIONS There are several ways to create a stair section with multiple subsections: l Draw one section, then draw a second section that begins at the first one’s endpoint. l Draw two separate segments, then snap the start point of one segment to the endpoint of the other using the edit handles. l Draw one segment and use the Add Break edit tool to divide it into two subsections. See Add Break on page 254. 752 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Stair and Ramp Sections and Subsections CREATING STAIR AND RAMP SECTIONS There are also three ways to create multiple stair sections: l Draw two separate stair sections and join them using a landing. l Use the Complete Break edit tool to divide a section into two sections. See To create a complete break on page 255. l Use the Disconnect Selected Subsection edit tool to change a subsection into a section. MERGING STAIR AND RAMP SECTIONS Any combination of straight and curved stair sections or straight and curved ramps using Automatic Heights can be merged. The resulting staircase or ramp section is made up of subsections and, if there are no landings, functions as a single unit. Stair and ramp subsections must be drawn in the same direction if they are to be merged: l The top edge of a stair section or ramp cannot merge with the bottom edge of another section or ramp. l Combinations of stairs drawn in the UP and DOWN directions cannot be merged. Stair subsections merge at the center points of their upper and lower edges. Stair sections and ramps cannot be merged directly. If a combination of stairs and a ramp is required, connect them with a landing. See Landings on page 755. To merge stair or ramp sections 1. Confirm that the stairs or ramps that you wish to merge are using Automatic Heights. See General Panel on page 771. 2. Position the sections so they are in the desired relationship to each other. l In order to merge stair sections correctly, they must be parallel to one another. l To create merged subsections that change direction, make one of the merged sections curved and then specify Winders. See Winders on page 762. 3. Select either stair or ramp section so that its edit handles display. 4. Click the Extend handle on the end to be merged and drag it to the point where the two stairs or ramps are to meet. A staircase consisting of merged subsections resembles a single stair section in plan view. The UP (or DN) arrows join, becoming a single direction arrow. 753 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Stair and Ramp Sections and Subsections When a subsection is selected, the entire staircase is selected. Additional edit handles, indicating the presence of multiple subsections and allowing you to reposition the line along which they join.  See Using the Edit Handles on page 751. LOCK TREAD DEPTH If a staircase with Lock Tread Depth selected in the Staircase Specification dialog is resized, its length increases or decreases one full tread at a time. See General Panel on page 771.   When Lock Tread Depth is checked, it can be difficult to merge the section with another section or landing. If this is a problem, you can temporarily uncheck Lock Tread Depth. After the stairs are merged, the tread depth can be locked again.   CURVED SUBSECTIONS Stair subsections attached at both ends by other sections do not have a free end that can be dragged into a curve. In this situation, change the middle sub-section to a curve using the Change Line/Arc edit button. See Change Line/Arc on page 256. To curve an enclosed stair subsection 1. Draw three straight stair sections and connect them end to end. 2. Select the middle subsection. 3. Click the Change Line/Arc edit button. The center section turns into a curved stair section. 4. Use the triangular Change Curve edit handle to adjust the curvature of the middle section as needed. Stairs joined in this manner can be turned into winders, which are steps located where a staircase turns and are narrower on the inside of the turn than they are on the outside. See Winders on page 762. 754 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Landings Landings Stair landings are platforms between stair sections and/or ramps, and can be created in either of five ways: l Click and drag using the Landing tool. l Single-click using the Landing tool to create a 3’-3” (975 mm) square landing. l Click between two stair sections using the Draw Stairs tool. l Convert a closed CAD polyline into a landing. See Convert Polyline on page 262.   l One or more landings are also created when the L-Shaped Stairs or U-Shaped Stairs tool is used. To create a landing between stair sections 1. Draw two stair sections going UP. They can be at any angle. 2. Click between the two sections using the Draw Stairs tool to create a landing. Notice that only one direction arrow displays after the sections are joined by a landing. Similarly, a landing can be created between two ramps by clicking between them with the Ramp tool active. Multiple stair sections and/or ramps can be connected to one landing. For example, two or three stair sections might meet at a landing with a single stair section continuing to the next level. To be linked by a landing, all sections must be drawn in the same UP direction and the top of one section should be near the bottom of the next. Stair sections connected with a landing will move together as a single unit unless Stair Sections Move Independently is checked in the Preferences dialog. See Architectural Panel on page 113. A landing formed between two stair sections having less than a 90º angle between them are created with a short edge not less than 6” (150 mm). This is because most building codes require the shortest tread to be at least 6” wide. This edge can be manually edited to less than 6” if needed. ADJACENT LANDINGS Some staircases have more than one landing adjacent to one another. When Auto Adjust Height is used, landings in Chief Architect recognize other nearby landings and will automatically adjust their heights and railings when their edges are sufficiently close to one another. To create adjacent landings, draw two landings and then position them so that their edges are within 1” (25 mm) of one another. The landing that was drawn first will maintain its position while the height of the one drawn later will be the equivalent of one riser higher than the first. The railings on adjacent edges are suppressed, as well. Adjacent landings can be used to represent winders. See Winders on page 762.   755 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Maintaining Tread Depth EDITING LANDINGS Once created, landings can be selected in 2D and 3D views and edited like other closed-polyline based objects. See Editing Closed Polyline-Based Objects on page 228. Landings derive their initial materials, height, thickness, and railings  from the stairs and/or ramps attached to them. You can assign a unique railing or material to a landing in the Stair Landing Specification dialog. See Stair Landing Specification Dialog on page 787. When moving a landing, all stair or ramp sections connected to it move as one unless Stair Sections Move Independently is checked in the Preferences dialog. To temporarily enable this behavior, hold down the Alt key on the keyboard. See Architectural Panel on page 113 and Alternate on page 207. LANDING HEIGHT AND THICKNESS A landing’s height and thickness can either be dynamically controlled by the program or user-defined and static. By default, landing top height and thickness are both set to Auto Adjust. This means that if the structure of the attached stairs is edited so that their length or riser height is affected, the landing’s height and thickness will adjust automatically to maintain consistent riser height in all connected stair sections. If you uncheck either Auto Adjust box in the Stair Landing Specification dialog, the landing will maintain the specified height and/or thickness no matter how the attached stairs or ramps are modified. This can result in stairs that have inconsistent risers. See General Panel on page 788. LANDING RAILINGS By default, landings have railings on all edges, but will automatically suppress the railing along any portion of an edge that connects to a stair or ramp section or has an adjacent landing. You can specify whether this automatic behavior is used, the railing is suppressed, or the railing is always applied in the Stair Landing Specification dialog. See General Panel on page 788. You can  also suppress the railing on a selected edge by clicking the Remove Railing from Selected Edge edit button. To always generate the railing on a selected edge, click the Add Railing to Selected Edge edit button. See Selected Edge on page 212. Landings can be edited into a wide variety of shapes. So that the railings of stair sections connect properly to the landing railings, you may find it helpful to use the Add Break edit tool to create a break in a landing edge if it is longer than the connecting stairs are wide. See Add Break on page 254. Maintaining Tread Depth Most building codes require staircases to maintain a consistent tread depth. WALK LINE By default, Chief Architect measures a stair section’s length and tread depth along a Walk Line located 12" (30 cm) from the right edge of the stair section. On curved stairs, it is located 12” (30 cm) from the inside edge of the curve. The distance of the Walk Line from the staircase edge can be specified in the Staircase Specification dialog. See Style Panel on page 774.   756 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Flared Stairs and Curved Treads Alternatively, you can turn the Walk Line feature off and tread depth will be measured at the tread center.   When a curved stair section has Automatic Treads specified in the Staircase Specification dialog and the Walk Line is used, the number and/or width of treads in a section or subsection changes when the inner edge is moved. For this reason, it is best to finalize stair section width as early as possible. There are two ways to keep tread depth even throughout a stair section made of multiple subsections.   LOCK TREAD DEPTH The first way to maintain tread depth is to Lock Tread Depth to a specified value in the Staircase Specification dialog. See General Panel on page 771.   Once locked, any changes to the length of the stair section are achieved by keeping the specified tread depth and changing the number of treads.   IGNORE SUBSECTION BOUNDARIES Curved stair sections typically have treads that are wider on one side than on the other. When they are connected to other stair sections, as with winders, it is possible to have treads that are too narrow at the Walk Line. See Winders on page 762.   Uniform tread depth in a stair section with subsections can be maintained by checking Ignore Subsection Boundaries in the Staircase Specification dialog. See General Panel on page 771.   When Ignore Subsection Boundaries is checked, the Tread Depth value may change when the stair section is edited, but will remain consistent throughout all subsections.   Because the boundaries between stair sections are being ignored, the treads where a straight section joins a curved section may shift position or change angle to accommodate the adjustment.   Flared Stairs and Curved Treads Any stair section can be flared and/or its treads curved using the Flare/Curve Stairs edit button. Only exposed sides of a stair section can be flared. If one side of a stair section is against a wall or wrapped (see Wrapped Stairs on page 763), only the exposed end can be flared. 757 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Flared Stairs and Curved Treads Flaring, curved treads, and special treads should be the last changes that you make to any stairs. CREATING A FLARED STAIR Flared stairs grow wider near one end, typically sweeping outward at the bottom. Stairs can also be flared at the top or on both ends. To create flared stairs 1. Create the stairs and connect them to a landing, floor platform edge, or another stair section. 2. Specify the section width, tread depth, and any other needed information. 3. Select the stairs and click the Flare/Curve Stairs edit button. New Flare edit handles display on all four corners of the stairs. 4. Drag one of the corner handles to flare that corner. As you drag the flare, the Status Bar shows the distance the side handle moves. This allows you to move the opposite handle the same amount. 5. When you are finished editing the flare, click the Main Edit Mode to restore the stairs’ regular edit handles and toolbar buttons. SYMMETRICALLY FLARED STAIRS Use the dimension information that displays in the Status Bar as a reference to create symmetric flares on both sides. 758 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Flared Stairs and Curved Treads ADJUSTING THE FLARE RADIUS After a flared staircase has been created, you may want to soften the radius of the flare. The four handles at the sides and the four handles at the corners flare the stair section when dragged outward. The two handles in the center of the section move the starting point for flaring along the stair section. To adjust the flare radius First, adjust the curvature of the flared section. 1. Select the flared stair and click the Flare/Curve Stairs edit button to access the flare handles again. 2. Select the handle along the flared edge of the stair. Drag this handle outward very slightly. This forms a more gradual flare. Then, adjust the starting point of the flare: 1. Select the flared stair and click the Flare/Curve Stairs edit button to access the flare handles again. 2. This time, drag the lower of the two central handles upward. The handle above it moves with it. This moves the start point for the bottom flare from the middle of the section toward its top, making the flare even more gradual. TREADS PERPENDICULAR TO FLARE Flared stairs often look best when the treads curve to meet the flared side perpendicular to the radius. 759 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Flared Stairs and Curved Treads To curve the edges of flared treads 1. Select the flared stair and click the Flare/Curve Stairs edit button to access the flare handles again. 2. Drag a corner edit handle upward one tread depth or less. 3. When you are finished editing the curve, click the Main Edit Mode to restore the stairs’ regular edit handles and toolbar buttons. This type of tread curving works only on flared edges and concentrates the curvature at that edge. Flared treads can also be curved using the Curve edit handle, which curves the treads more uniformly. CURVING THE TREADS When treads are curved, all treads in the section show some degree of curvature. Treads close to the curved end have a greater curve than those at the opposite end, but both ends can be curved. To curve stair treads 1. Select the staircase, then click the Flare/Curve Stairs edit button. 2. Drag the edit handle at the center of the bottom edge a small distance to curve the treads. 760 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Starter Treads 3. When you are finished editing the curve, click the Main Edit Mode to restore the stairs’ regular edit handles and toolbar buttons. Starter Treads The first and second treads of a staircase can be turned into starter treads by clicking the Starter Tread edit button. Starter treads extend to the side of the staircase, have rounded edges and are common on traditional staircases. A starter tread can be added only to open sides of a stair section. If one side of a stair section is against a wall or wrapped (see Wrapped Stairs on page 763), only the exposed tread end can become a starter tread. To create starter treads 1. Click on a staircase to select it. 2. Click the Starter Tread edit button. An edit handle displays on each end of both the first and second treads. 3. Drag either of the handles on the first tread outward from the stair section. If the stair section is against a wall, only one handle displays on the side opposite the wall. 4. As you drag, the ends of the tread become rounded. 761 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Winders 5. Two additional edit handles display on each side of the tread, along the back edge. 6. Drag either of the two square handles upward to increase the width of the rounded ends of the tread. 7. Drag the edit handle on the second tread outward from the stair section to create a second starter tread. 8. To make changes to existing starter treads, select the stairs, click the Starter Tread edit button and repeat the above steps as needed. 9. When you are finished editing the starter treads, click the Main Edit Mode to restore the stairs’ regular edit handles and toolbar buttons. Winders Winders are steps located where a staircase turns and are narrower on the inside of the turn than they are on the outside. A staircase defined as a winder expands to fill in any gaps between the side of the stairs and nearby walls.   Curved stair sections are typically used to create winders, although straight stairs can also be used. See Curved Stairs and Ramps on page 746.   To create winders 1. In an enclosed room area, place and connect the stair sections that you want to be winders. For best results:   l The stairs should be two straight sections connected by a curved section between them;   l The curved section should be adjacent to a 90° corner, as illustrated.   It is often easiest to create the staircase configuration in an open space, away from walls, then move it into position in a wall corner before specifying it as Winders. 2. Select the staircase and click the Open Object edit button to open the Staircase Specification dialog.   3. On the GENERAL panel, place a check in the Winders check box and click OK.   l The stairs should be two straight sections connected by a curved section between them;   l The curved section should be adjacent to a 90° corner, as illustrated.   762 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Wrapped Stairs It is often easiest to create the staircase configuration in an open space, away from walls, then move it into position in a wall corner before specifying it as Winders. 4. Select the staircase and click the Open Object edit button to open the Staircase Specification dialog.   5. On the GENERAL panel, place a check in the Winders check box and click OK.   6. The steps nearest the wall corner adjust their shapes and extend into the corner after the stair is changed to a winder.   Winders must be in a room with valid room definition. You cannot create winders in an area composed of only 2 corner walls. If this configuration is needed, enclose the area in with Invisible walls so that a room area is defined. The Winders attribute directs the stair section to expand or contract to meet  nearby walls, and can also be used to create a partial railing. See Partial Railings on page 766.   Winders sometimes have treads that are too narrow at the inside curve. The Ignore Subsection Boundaries option can address this issue. See Ignore Subsection Boundaries on page 757.   In situations where the conditions for stair winders cannot be met, you can use adjacent landings. See Landings on page 755.   Wrapped Stairs Check Allow Wrap on the STYLE panel of the Staircase Specification dialog and the selected stairs can be wrapped around the corner of a deck or landing. Curved stairs and stairs with multiple subsections cannot be wrapped. See Style Panel on page 774. Stair sections that wrap around a corner to meet one another must have identical attributes. As a result, edits made to one wrapped stair section apply to all adjacent, wrapped sections.   To wrap stairs around a deck 1. Begin by drawing a deck. See Decks on page 425. 2. Use the Straight Stairs tool to place a stair section on each side of the corner around which you want them to wrap. 3. Move the stair sections toward the corner of the deck. When the two sections are sufficiently close to the corner, 763 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Wrapped Stairs they will merge to form wrapped steps. You can also draw stairs down from a deck by right-clicking to draw them or by pressing the Alt key while you drag. See To draw stairs going downward on page 747. To wrap stairs around a landing 1. Use the Draw Stairs tool to create two perpendicular stair sections with top ends that share a corner. 2. Click between them to create a landing. 3. Rotate one stair section 180°. 4. The stairs wrap around the corner. Notice that the Up arrow displays on the most recently edited stair section. 764 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Other Special Railings and Stairs Other Special Railings and Stairs Stairs can be customized to meet a variety of needs. SOLID RAILINGS To create a solid rail along a staircase, position a solid Railing against, but not underneath, the stairs. Specify it as Solid and that it Follow Stairs. See Rail Style Panel on page 407. The solid railing recognizes the adjacent stairs and climbs alongside them. If any balusters extend beyond the railing, eliminate them by unchecking Left Railing or Right Railing in the Staircase Specification dialog. See Style Panel on page 774. FULLY HOUSED STRINGERS WITH BALUSTERS Fully housed stringers with balusters can also be created by positioning a pony wall next to the stairs.   To create fully housed stringers 1. Create a staircase, then select the stairs and click the Open Object edit button.   2. On the STYLE panel of the Staircase Specification dialog, uncheck Stringer at Wall and click OK.   765 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Other Special Railings and Stairs 3. Draw an Interior Wall or Half Wall against, but not underneath, the stairs.   4. Select the wall and click the Open Object edit button.   5. On the GENERAL panel of the Wall or Railing Specification dialog, make sure Railing is checked.   6. On the WALL TYPES panel:   l Check Pony Wall.   l Specify the Lower Wall Type as the same interior wall as the upper wall.   l Specify the Elevation of Lower Wall Top. This value should equal the stairs’ riser height plus the height above the treads.   7. On the RAIL STYLE panel:   l Check Follow Stairs.   l Specify desired Railing Height.   l Click OK.   Note: To create housed stringers, check Trim Against Wall in the Staircase Specification dialog. See Stringers Panel on page 776. PARTIAL RAILINGS A staircase can be enclosed on one side by a combination of wall and railing.   Partial railings can be created by creating a staircase composed of two sections, each with a different tread width. See Stair and Ramp Sections and Subsections on page 752.   To create a partial stair railing 1. Create a staircase and draw an Interior Wall against, but not underneath, the stairs.   2. In plan view, select the stairs and click the Add Break edit button. See Add Break on page 254.   3. Next, click the Complete Break edit button. 4. With Object Snaps enabled, click once on the stairs where they meet the end of the interior wall to add a complete break to the stairs at that location. The staircase is broken into two separate sections. See Object Snaps on page 160.   766 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Other Special Railings and Stairs 5. Select the stair section that is not adjacent to the interior wall and, using either its edit handles or its specification dialog, increase its tread width.   6. You may need to Zoom in on the stairs and wall to move the stair edge.   RAILING PANELS You can specify panels, including glass panels or cables, as a stair or ramp’s railing in the Staircase and Ramp Specification dialogs. See Railing Panel on page 779.   INSET OR MIDDLE RAILING You can use a Railing to create inset stair railings or a middle railing.   To use railing panels with stairs 1. Create a staircase and draw a Railing under the stairs.   l Make sure that the railing is located entirely within a single stair section.   l Position it so that it is aligned with the left edge.   2. Select the railing and click the Open Object edit button. See Wall Specification Dialog on page 392.   3. On the RAIL STYLE panel of the Railing Specification dialog:   l Select the Panels radio button.   l Check Follow Stairs.   4. On the NEWELS/BALUSTERS panel, click the Browse button to the right of Panel Type and select the railing panel you want to use on the stairs, then click OK.   5. Select the staircase and click the Open Object edit button.   6. On the NEWELS/BALUSTERS panel of the Railing Specification dialog, uncheck Left Railing to prevent the default stair railing from generating in addition to the railing panel.   7. Repeat these steps if you want railing panels under the right side of the stairs, as well.   767 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Other Special Railings and Stairs CONCRETE STAIRS To make a solid concrete staircase 1. Select the stairs and click the Open Object edit button.   2. On the STYLE panel of the Staircase Specification dialog:   l Set the Tread Overhang to zero.   l Set the Tread Thickness to zero.   l Uncheck Open Risers. l Uncheck Open Underneath. 3. On the STRINGERS panel, you can also check Large Stringer Base.   4. On the MATERIALS panel, specify the “Riser/Trim”, “Support Wall”, and “Tread” materials as concrete.   MASONRY STAIRS To make a set of masonry stairs 1. On the STYLE panel of the Staircase Specification dialog:   l Set the Tread Overhang to zero.   l Set the Tread Thickness to the thickness of the masonry material.   2. On the MATERIALS panel, assign the desired masonry material to the “Tread” component and specify the “Riser/Trim” material as concrete.   STEEL STRINGER 768 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Creating a Stairwell To make a steel stringer with concrete treads 1. On the STYLE panel of the Staircase Specification dialog:   l Check Open Underneath.   l Set the Tread Thickness to 2 inches or more.   2. On the STRINGERS panel, select 1 Center Stringer.   3. On the MATERIALS panel, specify the “Tread” material as concrete and the “Riser/Trim” material as steel.   Creating a Stairwell An interior staircase must be located in a stairwell, an opening to the floor above. A stairwell is an Open Below room type on the floor above. See Room Types and Functions on page 415. If you create a stairwell away from other walls so the Open Below is created in the center of another room, connect a wall of the Open Below room to another wall using an invisible wall. CREATING A STAIRWELL AUTOMATICALLY To create a stairwell that matches the perimeter of a selected staircase, click the Auto Stairwell edit button. This button is only available when a living space exists above the staircase. It will not be available if the space above is Open Below or on the Attic Floor. Auto Stairwell automatically creates a room on the floor above enclosed by railings, defined as Open Below in the Room Specification dialog, and given a Stairwell room label. This room can be selected and edited like any other room. CREATING A STAIRWELL MANUALLY Stairwells can also be created manually. To create a manual stairwell 1. Draw a two-story building. Create the staircase on the first floor. 2. Make the second floor the Current Floor and the first floor the Reference Floor. See The Reference Display on page 738. 3. Select Tools> Floor/Reference Display> Reference Display to show the Reference Floor, including the stairs. 4. On the upper floor, use the Railing tool to create a room around the stairs. Use the edit handles to position the railings as needed. 5. Select the railings one at a time and move them into position. 769 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Rooms Below Staircases l When a railing is selected, its bounding box shows the location of the outer surface of the railing’s drywall layer. For best results, this outer surface (which does not display when the railing is not selected) should meet the top edge of the stairs. See Wall Types and Railings on page 350. l If you prefer, you can also go Down One Floor and adjust the top edge of the staircase to snap it to the surface of the railing on the floor above. 6. When the railings are positioned properly, select Tools> Floor/Reference Display> Reference Display to turn off the display of the Reference Floor. 7. Click inside the room using the Select Objects tool to select it, then click the Open Object edit button. 8. On the GENERAL panel of the Room Specification dialog, select “Open Below” from the Room Type list. Click OK to close the dialog. 9. Place a Doorway in the railing at the top step for an opening. 10. Select the doorway and define a large width in the Door Specification dialog. If the doorway is specified wider than the railing, its width adjusts to fit the available space. Rooms Below Staircases Rooms such as closets or storage areas are commonly located beneath staircases.   To create a room below a staircase 1. Draw a staircase, select it, and click the Open Object edit button to open the Staircase Specification dialog. See Staircase Specification Dialog on page 771.   l If Winders are specified for this staircase, set Max Tread Contraction to 2" on the STYLE panel to allow walls to be built entirely under the staircase.   l On the FILL STYLE panel, select “No Pattern” so the walls and other objects under the stairs can be seen.   2. On the same floor as the staircase, draw the Interior Walls under them, following their shape. 3. Reposition the walls as needed, making sure that each is entirely under the stairs.   770 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Staircase Specification Dialog 4. The wall at the foot of the stairs should be placed no closer to the bottom than the second step.   5. Add a door and specify the Room Type.   Staircase Specification Dialog Staircases can be defined with the greatest accuracy in the Staircase Specification dialog. To open this dialog, select one or more staircases and click the Open Object edit button, or double-click a stair section using the Draw Stairs , Straight Stairs , or Select Objects tool. If a staircase is composed of multiple stair sections, the section that you clicked on to select the staircase is the Selected Section; however, information about all the sections is available and can be edited in the dialog. The settings in the Staircase Specification dialog are similar to those in the Interior and Exterior Stair Defaults dialogs, but affect the selected staircase only. See Stair and Ramp Defaults on page 743.   The Staircase Specification dialog has the following panels:   It is recommended that all floor heights, ceiling heights and platform thicknesses be established before using the Staircase Specification dialog. GENERAL PANEL 771 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Staircase Specification Dialog Staircase Information Structural information about the selected staircase displays here for reference and updates as changes are made on the GENERAL panel.   l The first comment tells whether or not the staircase reaches the next level, which may be a floor platform or locked landing. It also indicates whether its rise angle is either steeper or more shallow than the Best Fit, described below. If Automatic Heights is unchecked, this comment instead says “Start and end heights are set manually”.   l The second comment, Best fit riser height of ___ requires ___ total risers to reach ___ to next level, describes the ideal rise and run for the selected staircase. The program defines the Best Fit Riser Height as the riser height closest to 6 3/4” (168.75 mm) that allows the selected staircase to meet the next level precisely.  This comment is only active if Automatic Heights is checked, below. If the staircase includes a landing with a user-specified height, that height is used to calculate this information. See Landing Height and Thickness on page 756.   l The total number of stair Sections, Landings, and Risers associated with the selected staircase also display here.   l The Rise Angle of the currently active stair section also displays here. l Click the Make Best Fit button to add or remove risers to the Selected Section. Only available when Automatic Heights is checked and the staircase does not currently use the Best Fit Riser Height. Make Best Fit will also extend stairs drawn in a downward direction until they reach the terrain. See Terrain Perimeter on page 1244.   A diagram of a sample staircase’s structure displays here for reference, as well. Advanced Options The Advanced Options apply to all sections and subsections. l Specify how Tread Depth is determined:   o Select Automatic Treads to have the program define the depth and number of stair treads. If the staircase has multiple sections, each may have different tread depths.   o Select Lock Tread Depth to specify the Tread Depth for each stair section, below, and prevent them from changing. When Lock Tread Depth is selected and the length of the stairs is changed, the number of treads will change. o Select Lock Number of Treads to specify the number of treads in each stair section and prevent it from changing. When Lock Number of Treads is selected and the length of the stairs is changed, the tread depths will change.   o If multiple staircases or a staircase with multiple sections is selected, No Change may be an option as well. Select this to maintain the multiple sections’ individual settings.   o Check Ignore Subsection Boundaries to maintain tread depth throughout a stair section composed of merged subsections, regardless of whether the subsections have different tread depths assigned to them. See Ignore Subsection Boundaries on page 757.   772 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Staircase Specification Dialog l The Section Heights settings control how the top and bottom heights of each stair section is determined:   o Uncheck Automatic Heights if you would like to specify the bottom and top heights of each stair section, as measured from the default floor height of Floor 1, 0” (mm). When checked, the program automatically defines the top and bottom heights by precisely locating floor platforms and landings.  This option cannot be disabled in the Interior and Exterior Stair Defaults dialogs. o The Top Height Reference values control what point on the staircase the Top Height value, below, describes.   o Select Floor/Landing for the Top Height value to describe the height of the top tread plus the stated Riser Height.   o Select Top Riser for the Top Height value to describe the height of the top riser.   l If you make changes in this dialog that will affect the Selected Section's length, first use the Lock End settings to control which end moves. The height of the Selected Section’s locked end is not affected by these settings: only its position in plan view. These settings are actions rather than settings and are not available in the Stair Defaults dialogs:   o Select Lock Top to prevent the selected stair section’s top end from moving. Sections and landings above the selected section do not move when you click OK, while those below do move.   o Select Lock Bottom to prevent the selected stair section’s bottom end from moving. Sections and landings below the selected section do not move when you click OK, while those above do move.   If you select a staircase by clicking near its bottom end, Lock Top will be selected; if you select it near its top end, Lock Bottom will be selected. l The Radius Reference options control where the radius of curved stair sections, specified below, is measured from.   o Outer Arc measures the radius from the outer surface of the curved stair section's structure.   o Centerline measures the radius from the curved stair section's centerline.   o Walkline measures the radius from the curved stair section's walkline. See Walk Line on page 756.   o Inner Arc measures the radius from the inner surface of the curved stair section's structure. Specifications The specifications for each stair section and subsection are listed as line items and can be edited here. Up to ten line items total can display. A change in one value usually affects other values. You may need to reposition the staircase after making changes.   l The Section Number column identifies the Selected Section and the number of each section of the selected staircase. If Ignore Subsection Boundaries is unchecked, subsection numbers are also identified. The radio button to the left indicates which section or subsection is selected. See Displaying Stairs, Ramps, and Landings on page 749. l Define the Length, or run, of each section or subsection measured along the Walk Line. The length is equal to the number of treads multiplied by the tread depth. See Walk Line on page 756. When the length of a section changes, other sections and landings in the staircase unit move in response. You can specify whether the bottom or top edge of the Selected Section moves when you resize it by selecting either the Lock Bottom or Lock Top radio button, above. 773 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Staircase Specification Dialog l Define the Width of each section. Only one width can be defined for a section, so all subsections in the same section have the same width. If a section is connected to a landing, its width should equal the length of the landing edge that it connects to. See Landings on page 755.   l Specify the Tread Depth, or run, of each stair tread in the selected section. To lock this value, check Lock Tread Depth, above. If a landing is created between two stair sections and one of them has locked tread depth, the resulting staircase also has locked tread depth. Any landings or sections connected to this new staircase adjust to meet it and then have locked tread depth as well. l Define the number of Treads in a stair section or subsection. To lock this value, select Lock Number of Treads, above. l Define the Bottom Height, the height of the stair section’s bottom edge. To lock this value, click the radio button to the left of the section’s number, then click the Lock Bottom radio button, above, and click OK.   l Define the Top Height, the height of the stair section’s top edge. To lock this value, click the radio button to the left of the section’s number, then click the Lock Top radio button, above, and click OK. l Define the Riser Height, the height of the risers in each stair section. l Define the Radius of a curved stair section. The location on the stairs where the radius is measured from can be specified above. Not available if the selected staircase does not have a curved section. l Check Winders to specify the Selected Section, including subsections, as winders. See Winders on page 762.   Preview A preview of the selected staircase displays on the right side of the panel. If the staircase includes any landings, only the section that was selected when the dialog was opened will display. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22. STYLE PANEL 774 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Staircase Specification Dialog Tread See Anatomy of a Staircase on page 745. l Specify the Tread Overhang, which is the distance that each tread overhangs the riser. l Specify the Tread Thickness. Open Options The Open Options control whether the selected stairs have open risers or an open underside. l Check Open Risers to eliminate the riser face under each tread and expose the stringers. l Uncheck Open Underneath to add a skirt below the staircase along the two sides. It looks like a wall in 3D, but only has a single face. Base molding does not generate along the bottom of the skirt, and doors cannot be placed in it. In most cases, the recommended way to enclose the area beneath stairs is to use walls. See Rooms Below Staircases on page 770. l Specify the Side Inset of the skirt below the staircase. The default value of 0 aligns the skirt with the outside of the surface of the stringers. Only available when Open Underneath is unchecked.   Runner Specify the attributes of the staircase’s carpet Runner. Only available when Open Risers is unchecked, above. l Specify the Runner Width. The default value of 0 does not create a runner. l Uncheck Runner Tucked to have the runner drop straight down from the tread front to the riser below. This is checked by default. Winder Define the Max Tread Contraction, which is the amount a tread’s width may be reduced when it meets a wall. See Partial Railings on page 766. This option only takes effect when the stairs are specified as Winders on the GENERAL panel. See General Panel on page 771. Use Walk Line See Walk Line on page 756.   l Check Use Walk Line to have the program calculate the tread depth based on a Walk Line. Uncheck the box to disable this function.   l Specify the distance of the Walk Line from Edge. The default value is 12” (300 mm).   l Check Show Walk Line to show the Walk Line in plan view.   Top Landing Specify the appearance of the staircase where it meets the next floor platform. These options do not affect the edges of landings.   l Check Nosing at Top Landing to produce tread nosing attached to platform edge at the top of stairs.   l Check Riser Surface at Top Landing to produce a riser surface against the platform edge at the top of the stairs. This allows stair risers to match all the way to the top of the platform.   775 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Staircase Specification Dialog Options l Check Automatic Railing Openings to automatically create a doorway opening when the selected stairs are snapped to a railing drawn on the same floor as the stairs. This is checked by default.   l Check Allow Wrap to wrap the selected stairs around the corner of a deck or landing where another, identical stair section is present. See Wrapped Stairs on page 763.   Preview A preview of the selected staircase displays on the right side of the panel. If the staircase includes any landings, only the section that was selected when the dialog was opened will display. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22. STRINGERS PANEL The settings on the STRINGERS panel affect all sections of a selected staircase.   Stringer Style l Click a radio button to specify the number of stringers assigned to the staircase.  Select Custom Stringers to enable the Left, Middle, and Right settings below. l Specify the Height Above Tread, measured straight down from the top outer edge of the tread nosing to the top of the stringer. Only available when 2 Closed Side Stringers is selected, above.   l Specify the Height Below Tread, measured straight down from the back bottom edge of the tread to the bottom of the stringer. Not available when Custom Stringers is selected, above.   The Left, Middle, and Right settings are enabled when Custom Stringers is selected. For each of these:   l Specify the Count for each stringer location. Multiple Left and Right stringers are butted side to side while multiple Middle stringers are evenly spaced between them.   l Specify the Thickness, measured horizontally.   776 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Staircase Specification Dialog l Specify the Offset of each stringer from its default location. A positive value offsets the stringer(s) to the right; a negative value offsets them to the left.   l Specify the Height Below the treads, measured straight down from the back bottom edge of the tread to the bottom of the stringer.   l Check Ext to specify the stringer(s) as Exterior and allow them to extend up past the top of the stair treads.   l Specify the Height Above the stair treads, measured straight down from the top outer edge of the tread nosing to the top of the stringer.   l The vertical Depth of the stringers is reported here for reference. This value is affected by the Heights above and below the treads, as well as the stairs Rise Angle.   Trim Against Wall Specify the attributes of the Trim Against Wall that generates when the staircase is positioned against a wall.   l Specify the Height Above Tread, measured straight down from the top outer edge of the tread nosing to the top of the tread.   l Specify the Height Below Tread, measured straight down from the back bottom edge of the tread to the bottom of the trim.   l Specify the Thickness of the trim, measured horizontally.   l Clip Top - Specify whether to clip the top of the trim where it meets the upper floor level. Trim can be clipped on the Left and/or Right sides of the staircase.   Options l Extend Stringer Top is checked by default and extends a triangular portion of the stringer under the landing or platform at the top of the stairs.   l Check Large Stringer Base to widen the stringers at the foot of the staircase. This is helpful when walls are created below the stairs.   Preview A preview of the selected staircase displays on the right side of the panel. To see the stringers, click in the preview and drag upward to rotate. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22. 777 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Staircase Specification Dialog BREAKLINE PANEL Has Breakline Check Has Breakline to display a breakline on the selected stairs and enable the settings that follow.   l Select the breakline symbol Style from the drop-down list.   l Specify the Distance from Start, which is the distance from the front of the stairs to the breakline, measured from the staircase’s center line.   l Specify the Breakline Angle. An angle of 0° produces a breakline that is perpendicular to the sides of a straight stairwell.   l Specify the Gap After Break, which is the gap between the section of the stairs located below the breakline and that located above it. A value of 0 produces no gap.   l Specify the Break Symbol Size, which is the total height of the break symbol measured from top corner to bottom corner.   Current Floor Display The Current Floor Display settings control the appearance of the portion of the staircase located After the Breakline, or upslope from it, on the floor where the stairs were drawn.   l Select Normal to display the staircase after the breakline using the same Line and Fill Styles as the portion located before the breakline.   l Select Outline to display the staircase after the breakline using the Line Style assigned to the “Stairs & Ramps, Details” layer and a transparent fill.   l Select Nothing to hide the display of the staircase after the breakline entirely.   Floor Above Display The Floor Above Display settings control the appearance of the portion of the staircase located Before the Breakline, as seen from the floor above the stairs.   778 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Staircase Specification Dialog l Select Normal to display the staircase before the breakline using the same Line and Fill Styles as the portion located after the breakline.   l Select Outline to display the staircase before the breakline using the Line Style assigned to the “Stairs & Ramps, Details” layer and a transparent fill.   l Select Nothing to hide the display of the staircase before the breakline entirely.   Note: Stairs located on the floor below can only be seen if a Stairwell room is defined above them. See Creating a Stairwell on page 769. Preview A preview of the selected staircase displays on the right side of the panel. If the staircase includes any landings, only the section that was selected when the dialog was opened will display. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22.   RAILING PANEL By default, the settings on the RAILING panel also affect the railings on any landings attached to the selected staircase or ramp. See Landings on page 755.   This panel is also found in the Ramp and Landing Specification dialogs. Railing l Stair Rail Height defines the height from tread surface directly over the riser to railing top.   l Landing Rail Height defines the height of the landing rail top from the landing surface.   779 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Staircase Specification Dialog l Horizontal Offset allows you to place the railings either inside or outside their default location aligned with the edge of the stairs. A positive value offsets the railings inward while a negative value offsets them outward.   l Railing On - Select Left and/or Right to specify placement of railings on stair sections.   l Railing at Wall - Select Left and/or Right to specify the placement of wall railings. Not available for ramps.   l Check Railing Transitions on Left and/or Right to create “gooseneck” connections between stair and landing railings. This option only has an effect when Rail Passes Over Newel is checked. Not available for ramps.   l Check Smooth Transitions on Left and/or Right to specify the placement of smooth connections between stair and landing railings. Not available for ramps.   l Check both Railing Transitions and Smooth Transitions to produce a handrail like this:   780 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Staircase Specification Dialog Style l Select Balusters to create regularly spaced balusters between larger newel posts.   l Select Open to create with only newels posts.   l Select Open with Middle Rail to create railings with newel posts and a middle rail.   l Select Panels to create railings composed of panels. The panel style is specified on the NEWELS/BALUSTERS panel. See Newels/Balusters Panel on page 781.   Top/Bottom Rail l Check Include Handrail/Top Rail to produce a top rail on the stair railings that receives the top baluster ends and typically acts as a handrail.   l Check Include Bottom Rail to place a low rail on the landing surface that receives the balusters ends.   l Check Raise Bottom, then specify the distance to raise the bottom rail or panel from the stair tread.   Handrail Options l Specify the Extend Top End value, which is the distance that the top of each railing section extends past the top riser of its corresponding stair section.   l Specify the Extend Bottom End value, which is the distance that the bottom of each railing section extends past the bottom riser of its corresponding stair section.   l Specify where to Add Return to Wall:   o Check Top End to add a return to the wall at the top end of all railing sections that are against a wall.   o Check Bottom End to add a return to the wall at the bottom end of all railing sections that are against a wall.   Brackets Click the Library button to apply a 1/4” (2 mm) thick decorative bracket to the exposed sides of the stringers, under each riser. A side stringer with brackets will be moved in 1/4” (2 mm) to accommodate the bracket. See Select Library Object Dialog on page 974. Preview A preview of the selected staircase displays on the right side of the panel. If the staircase includes any landings, only the section that was selected when the dialog was opened will display. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22.   NEWELS/BALUSTERS PANEL The settings on the NEWELS/BALUSTERS panel will also affect the appearance of railings on any landings attached to the selected staircase. See Landings on page 755.   781 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Staircase Specification Dialog These settings are similar to those found on the same panel of the Ramp and Landing Specification dialogs. See Ramp Specification Dialog on page 784.   Newels l Uncheck Has Newel Posts to prevent newels from generating in the selected staircase’s railings. When this box is checked, newels are generated and can be edited using the settings that follow. l Type - Select Square, Round, or newels from the Library. Selecting Library from the drop-down list is the same as clicking the Library button to the right and allows selection of a newel from the library. l Specify the Width, which is the width or diameter of each newel. For Library newels, this is the width at its widest point. l Specify the Height, which is the height from the landing surface to the top of the newel. Only available when Rail Passes Over Newel is unchecked below. l Specify the Horizontal Offset, which is the amount each newel is offset from the center of the railing. l Specify the Bottom Offset, which is the amount each newel's bottom is offset from the tread or floor surface beneath it. l Check Clipped to clip any newels that extend down to or past the floor level at the floor surface. l Specify the on-center Spacing of the newel posts. Balusters The first three Balusters settings are similar to the Newels options of the same names, above.   782 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Staircase Specification Dialog l Cut Baluster Top - Each tread normally has two to three balusters, growing longer toward its back. The default is to use the same baluster and cut it off at the bottom to shorten it toward the tread front. Check this box to cut the balusters at the top instead.   Panels These settings are only available when the railing Style specified as “Panels” on the Railing Panel on page 779. l Specify the panel’s Thickness.   l Select “Solid” or “Library” from the Type drop-down list.   You can also apply newels, balusters, and panels onto stair or ramp railing directly from the Library Browser. See Inserted Objects on page 973.   Plan Display These settings the display of newels, balusters, and rails in plan view. See In Plan View on page 749.   l Uncheck Use Defaults to enable the settings that follow. When this is checked, the options set in the Staircase Defaults dialog are used. l Check Draw Newels to display newel posts in plan view. Note that newels at the top of the staircase are associated with the railings defining the stairwell. See Creating a Stairwell on page 769. l Check Draw Balusters to display balusters in plan view. l Check Draw Rails to display the handrails in plan view. l Click the Fill Style button to open the Fill Style dialog and specify the fill style for newels, balusters, and/or rails, when set to display. To display newels/balusters under the handrails, specify a Fill Style of “None”. Preview   A preview of the selected staircase displays on the right side of the panel. If the staircase includes any landings, only the section that was selected when the dialog was opened will display. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22.   RAILS PANEL The settings on the RAILS panel are similar to those on the RAILS panel of the Wall Specification dialog as well as the MOLDINGS panel of a variety of other dialogs. See Moldings / / Profiles / Rails / Panels on page 927. By default, the settings on the RAILS panel will also affect the appearance of railings on any landings attached to the selected staircase. See Landings on page 755. LINE STYLE PANEL The settings on the LINE STYLE panel are available for a variety of other objects in the program. For information about these settings, see Line Style Panel on page 305. FILL STYLE PANEL The settings on the FILL STYLE panel affect the appearance of the selected staircase in plan view. For information about these settings, see Fill Style Panel and Dialogs on page 193. 783 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Ramp Specification Dialog MATERIALS PANEL The settings on the MATERIALS panel affect the appearance of the selected staircase in 3D views and are available for a variety of objects throughout the program. For information about these settings, see Materials Panel on page 1055. The settings on this panel will also affect the materials applied to any landings attached to the selected staircase. See Landings on page 755. ARROW PANEL The settings on the ARROW panel control the appearance of the selected staircase’s direction arrow in plan view. See In Plan View on page 749.   For information about these settings, see Arrowheads on page 327.   COMPONENTS PANEL The information on the COMPONENTS panel can be used in the materials list. See Components Panel on page 1330.   Ramp Specification Dialog Ramps can be defined with the greatest accuracy using the Ramp Specification dialog. To open this dialog, select one or more ramps and click the Open Object edit button or double-click a ramp section using the Ramp or Select Objects tool. The Ramp Specification dialog has the following panels:   784 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Ramp Specification Dialog GENERAL PANEL Diagram A diagram of a sample ramp’s structure displays here for reference. Size Specify the Ramp Length and Width. Heights Specify the Heights of various key locations on the selected ramp.   l Uncheck Automatic Heights/Slope to activate the settings below, then specify the height and slope of the ramp. l Specify the Top Height, which is the height of the ramp at its high end. l Specify the Bottom Height, which is the height of the ramp at its low end. l Specify the Base Height, which is the height of the bottom surface of the ramp. 785 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Ramp Specification Dialog Slope Specify the ramp’s Slope by typing its Rise value in the first field, and the Run value in the second field. See Anatomy of a Staircase on page 745. Options l Check Automatic Railing Openings to automatically create a doorway opening when the selected ramp is snapped to a railing drawn on the same floor as the ramp. This is checked by default. l Check Open Underneath to remove the skirt around the bottom of the ramp so that it has a uniform, sloped thickness that may not reach the floor or terrain at the high end. This is unchecked by default. l Specify the Max Thickness, which is the ramp’s maximum thickness. At the low end of the ramp where it meets the floor or terrain, its thickness may be less than this value. Tread Specify the structure of the ramp’s Tread, which an optional surface layer placed over the top of the ramp. l Check Has Tread Surface to apply a top tread surface to the ramp and enable the settings below. l Specify the Tread Overhang, which is the distance the tread surface extends past the ramp’s edges. l Specify the Tread Thickness, which is the tread surface’s vertical depth. Preview   A preview of the selected ramp displays on the right side of the panel. If the ramp is composed of multiple sections separated by landings, only the section that was selected when the dialog was opened will display. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22.   SELECTED LINE/ARC PANEL The SELECTED LINE panel is available when the selected ramp segment is a line as opposed to an arc. For more information, see  Line Panel on page 304.   The SELECTED ARC panel is available when the selected ramp segment has been converted to an arc. For more information, see Arc Panel on page 312.   See, too, Selected Edge on page 212 and Change Line/Arc on page 256.   RAILING PANEL The settings on the RAILING panel are similar to those on the same panel in the Staircase Specification dialog. For information about these settings, see Railing Panel on page 779.   By default, the settings on this panel will also affect the appearance of railings on any landings attached to the selected ramp. See Landings on page 755.   NEWELS/BALUSTERS PANEL The settings on the NEWELS/BALUSTERS panel are similar to those on the same panel in the Staircase Specification dialog. For more information, see Newels/Balusters Panel on page 781.   By default, the settings on this panel will also affect the appearance of railings on any landings attached to the selected ramp. See Landings on page 755.   786 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Stair Landing Specification Dialog RAILS PANEL The settings on the RAILS panel are similar to those on the RAILS panel of the Staircase Specification dialog as well as the MOLDINGS panel of a variety of other dialogs. See Moldings / / Profiles / Rails / Panels on page 927.   By default, the settings on this panel will also affect the appearance of railings on any landings attached to the selected ramp. See Landings on page 755.   LINE STYLE PANEL The settings on the LINE STYLE panel are available for a variety of other objects in the program. For information about these settings, see Line Style Panel on page 305.   FILL STYLE PANEL The settings on the FILL STYLE panel affect the appearance of the selected ramp in plan view. For information about these settings, see Fill Style Panel and Dialogs on page 193.   MATERIALS PANEL The settings on the MATERIALS panel affect the appearance of the selected ramp in 3D views and are available for a variety of objects throughout the program. For information about these settings, see Materials Panel on page 1055.   The settings on this panel will also affect the materials applied to any landings attached to the selected ramp. See Landings on page 755.   ARROW PANEL The settings on the ARROW panel control the appearance of the selected ramp’s direction arrow in plan view. See In Plan View on page 749.   For information about these settings, see Arrowheads on page 327.   COMPONENTS PANEL The information on the COMPONENTS panel can be used in the materials list. For more information, see Components Panel on page 1330.   Stair Landing Specification Dialog Select a landing and click the Open Object edit button to open the Stair Landing Specification dialog. See Landings on page 755. The Stair Landing Specification dialog has the following panels: 787 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Stair Landing Specification Dialog GENERAL PANEL Landing Uncheck Auto Adjust Height to specify the selected landing’s Top Height. l A free-standing interior landing will have a default Top Height equal to one riser plus the thickness of the default floor finish. A free-standing exterior landing will have a default top height equal to its thickness. When this box is checked, the landing height may adjust as needed to maintain consistent riser height in all connected stair sections, ramp sections, or adjacent landings. l The Top Height field is only active when Auto Adjust Height is unchecked. See Landing Height and Thickness on page 756. Note: A network of adjacent landings can only be created when Auto Adjust Height is checked. See Adjacent Landings on page 755. Uncheck Auto Adjust Thickness to specify the selected landing’s Thickness. l A free-standing landing will have a default thickness of 6 3/4” (169 mm). When checked, the thickness is based on the riser height of the stair sections it is attached to, or the thickness of the ramps it is attached to. l The Thickness field is only active when Auto Adjust Thickness is unchecked. Selected Edge Specify how railings are applied to the landing’s Selected Edge. See Selected Edge on page 212.   l Select Automatic to suppress the railing on any portion of the selected edge that either connects to a stair or ramp section or has an adjacent landing, but to produce a railing where that is not the case. See Landing Railings on page 756.   l Select No Railing to suppress the railing on the selected edge of this landing.   l Select Has Railing to produce a railing along the selected edge, even where it connects to a stair or ramp section or has an adjacent landing.   l Check Apply to All Edges to apply your selection to all edges of the landing. This is an action rather than a state - the next time this dialog is opened, this box will be unchecked. Preview A preview of the selected landing displays on the right side of the panel. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22. 788 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Stair Landing Specification Dialog POLYLINE PANEL The POLYLINE panel states the length of the landing’s Perimeter, its enclosed Area, and its Volume. The settings on this panel are available for a variety of other objects in the program. See Polyline Panel on page 317. SELECTED LINE/ARC PANEL The SELECTED LINE panel is available when the selected edge is a line as opposed to an arc. For more information, see  Line Panel on page 304. The SELECTED ARC panel is available when the selected edge has been converted to an arc. For more information, see Arc Panel on page 312. See, too, Selected Edge on page 212 and Change Line/Arc on page 256. RAILING PANEL The settings on the RAILING panel are similar to those on the same panel in the Staircase Specification dialog. For information about these settings, see Railing Panel on page 779.   There is one setting that is unique to the Landing Specification dialog:   Uncheck Use Connected Stair or Ramp Railing to enable the settings on this panel, the NEWELS/BALUSTERS panel, and the RAILS panel. When checked, the selected landing derives all railing settings from the connected stairs or ramp. If the selected landing is not connected to a stair or ramp, this check box will be named Use Default Interior or Exterior Stair Railing, depending on where the landing is located.   NEWELS/BALUSTERS PANEL The settings on the NEWELS/BALUSTERS panel are similar to those on the same panel in the Staircase Specification dialog. For more information, see Newels/Balusters Panel on page 781.   By default, the settings on this panel will also affect the appearance of railings on any landings attached to the selected ramp. See Landings on page 755.   RAILS PANEL The settings on the RAILS panel are similar to those on the RAILS panel of the Staircase Specification dialog as well as the MOLDINGS panel of a variety of other dialogs. See Moldings / / Profiles / Rails / Panels on page 927.   LINE STYLE PANEL The settings on the LINE STYLE panel are available for a variety of objects throughout the program. See Line Style Panel on page 305. 789 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Stair Landing Specification Dialog FILL STYLE PANEL The settings on the FILL STYLE panel affect the appearance of the selected landing in plan view. See Fill Style Panel and Dialogs on page 193.   MATERIALS PANEL When a landing is attached to stairs or a ramp, its initial materials are derived from the stairs or ramp. When the landing is attached to a ramp, its top surface material is defined by the Landing Sides component unless the ramp is using a Tread material. The settings on this are available for a variety of objects throughout the program. For information about these settings, see Materials Panel on page 1055. LABEL PANEL Labels for stair landings display in plan view and cross section/elevation views when the “Polylines 3D, Labels” layer is turned on and use the Text Style assigned to that layer. See Displaying Stairs, Ramps, and Landings on page 749.   For information about the settings on this panel, see Label Panel on page 700.   COMPONENTS PANEL The information on the COMPONENTS panel can be used in the materials list. For more information, see Components Panel on page 1330.   790

Roofs Chapter 23 Chief Architect’s manual and automatic Roof Tools allow you to draw almost any roof style. Verify that all roof planes join as intended. The program does not confirm correct geometry between manually designed or edited roof planes. It is possible to design and edit roof planes with hips and valleys that do not meet properly. TOPICS Automatic vs. Manual Roofs 792 Roof Defaults 792 The Roof Tools 793 Automatic Roofs 795 Build Roof Dialog 797 Roof Planes 804 Displaying Roofs 806 Editing Roof and Ceiling Planes 808 Connecting Roof and Ceiling Planes 811 Roof Plane Specification Dialog 814 Roof Baseline Polylines 819 Roof Baseline Specification Dialog 821 Roof and Ceiling Framing 822 Curved Roof Planes 823 Ceiling Planes 826 Ceiling Plane Specification Dialog 828 Gable/Roof Lines 830 Gable Line Specification Dialog 833 Skylights and Roof Holes 834 Skylight/Roof Hole Specification Dialog 835 Dormers and Crickets 838 Editing Auto Dormers 840 Dormer Specification Dialog 841 Roof Returns and Other Details 844 Roof Pitches in Degrees 849 791 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Automatic vs. Manual Roofs Automatic vs. Manual Roofs Chief Architect can create just about any roof style. Most common roof styles such as hips and gables can easily be generated automatically. More complex roof styles, including curved roof planes, can be created manually. The manual roof tools allow you to create any roof system that can be represented using roof planes.   AUTOMATICALLY GENERATED ROOFS The quickest and easiest way to create a roof over a structure is automatically. By default, a roof plane is generated over each exterior wall, creating a hip roof. The program automatically joins the roof planes at ridges, hips, and valleys and tries to create roof planes that join together to form a single, integrated system. See Automatic Roofs on page 795.   Any deviations from the default hip roof can be specified on the ROOF panel of the Wall Specification dialog for any exterior wall. Here, you can specify a Full Gable Wall, High/Shed Gable Wall, or other options instead of a default hip roof. You can also specify a different overhang, pitch, an upper pitch, and the elevation where the upper pitch begins for the roof plane that rests on the selected wall. See Roof Directives in Walls on page 378.   When you need the roof planes over an area of a plan to be entirely separate from those over the rest of the structure, you can assign those areas to a non-default Roof Group. See Roof Groups on page 795.   Roofs can also be automatically generated based on a Roof Baseline Polyline. When a Roof Baseline Polyline is used, information that determines where and how roof planes are generated is contained in the Roof Baseline Specification dialog. See Roof Baseline Polylines on page 819.   Bay, bow, and box windows also produce roof planes automatically. For information about these windows and the roof styles that can be used with them, see Bay, Box, Bow Windows and Roofs on page 610.   MANUALLY DRAWN ROOFS Any roof system that can be created automatically can also be created manually. Each roof plane is drawn and edited individually, offering full control over the process and limiting the possibilities only to your imagination.   Note: You cannot manually draw or edit roof planes when Auto Rebuild Roofs is enabled in the Build Roof dialog. See Roof Panel on page 798. USING BOTH TECHNIQUES Another useful option is to start with an automatically generated roof and use manual design techniques to finish it. Using both automatic roof generation and the manual roof drawing and editing techniques, you can quickly design highly customized roof systems.   Roof Defaults Select Edit> Default Settings, to open the Default Settings dialog for a variety of drawing tools, several of which directly affect roof generation. 792 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - The Roof Tools ROOF DEFAULTS DIALOG The Build Roof and Roof Defaults dialogs are nearly identical in appearance and function. The only difference is that the Build Roof dialog has a number of check boxes that allow you to automatically generate roof planes and related objects. See Build Roof Dialog on page 797. If changes are made to the settings in this dialog after the roof has been built, you will need to rebuild the roof in order for your changes to take effect.   ROOF FRAMING DEFAULTS Default settings for framing can be specified in either the Build Roof, Framing Defaults, or the Framing Defaults dialog. Framing defaults control the depth of roof planes as well as the depth of floor and ceiling platforms, which influence roof plane heights. See Framing Defaults on page 851.   To create roof planes with a particular assembly of layers, begin by setting up the desired roof framing defaults, then build the roof. If you later need to change the structure of the roof planes, make the needed change to the Framing Defaults, and then rebuild the roof. You can also edit the structure of individual roof planes.   FLOOR AND CEILING HEIGHTS The initial heights of floors and ceilings, which influence roof heights, are specified in the Floor Defaults dialog for each floor. See Floor Defaults Dialog on page 731.   The floor and ceiling heights in individual rooms also influence roof heights and are specified in the Room Specification dialog. See Structure Panel on page 439. If Auto Rebuild Roofs is checked in the Build Roof dialog and you change floor or ceiling heights, floor or ceiling platform depths, wall positions or roof directives in walls, the roof rebuilds to reflect your changes. See Rebuilding Roofs on page 796. WALL SPECIFICATION DIALOG By default, when an automatic roof is built, a roof plane is generated over each exterior wall, creating a hip roof. Any deviations from this default hip roof, such as a gable or a different pitch, can be specified in the Wall Specification dialog for any exterior wall. See Roof Panel on page 398. DORMER DEFAULTS The settings in the Dormer Defaults dialog determine the initial settings for automatic dormers and are much like those in the Dormer Specification dialog. See Dormer Specification Dialog on page 841.   The Dormer Defaults dialog can be opened from the Default Settings dialog or by double-clicking either of the Auto Dormer tools.   The Roof Tools Select Build> Roof to access the Roof Tools. 793 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - The Roof Tools BUILD ROOF Select Build> Roof> Build Roof to open the Build Roof dialog, specify the settings for automatically generated and manually drawn roof planes as well as manually drawn ceiling planes, and build or rebuild a roof. See Build Roof Dialog on page 797. When roofs are automatically generated, a roof plane is created over each exterior wall by default, resulting in a hip roof, and the program tries to join them together to form a single, integrated system. To automatically generate a roof plane using values other than the defaults or to not generate a roof plane bearing on a particular wall (as with a gable or the sides of a shed roof), you can change the settings in the Wall Specification dialog. See Roof Panel on page 398. ROOF PLANE Select Build> Roof> Roof Plane to draw a roof plane manually. See Roof Planes on page 804. You can also doubleclick the Roof Plane button to open the Build Roof dialog.   Note: You cannot use the Roof Plane tool when Auto Rebuild Roofs is enabled in the Build Roof dialog. See Manually Drawn Roofs on page 792. CEILING PLANE Select Build> Roof> Ceiling Plane to draw a ceiling plane manually. Ceiling planes are drawn and behave much like roof planes. See Ceiling Planes on page 826.   TRAY CEILING POLYLINE Select Build> Roof> Tray Ceiling Polyline, then click and drag to draw a closed polyline within a room. See Tray and Coffered Ceilings on page 430.   GABLE/ROOF LINE Select Build> Roof> Gable/Roof Line to draw a gable line that generates a gable along a baseline edge when roofs are automatically generated. See Gable/Roof Lines on page 830.   SKYLIGHT Select Build> Roof> Skylight, then draw a rectangle over an existing roof plane to create a skylight. The skylight, skylight shaft, and ceiling hole (if a ceiling exists) are drawn at the same time. See Skylights and Roof Holes on page 834.   AUTO FLOATING DORMER Select Build> Roof> Auto Floating Dormer and click within an existing roof plane to place an auto floating dormer. See Dormers and Crickets on page 838. AUTO DORMER Select Build> Roof> Auto Dormer and click within a roof plane to place a dormer. See Dormers and Crickets on page 838.   794 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Automatic Roofs EDIT ALL ROOF PLANES Select Build> Roof> Edit All Roof Planes to open the Roof Plane Specification dialog and edit all roof planes in the entire plan at once. See Roof Plane Specification Dialog on page 814.   DELETE ROOF PLANES Select Build> Roof> Delete Roof Planes to delete all roof planes in the plan. See Deleting Roof Planes on page 811. DELETE CEILING PLANES Select Build> Roof> Delete Ceiling Planes to delete all manually drawn ceiling planes in the plan. See Ceiling Planes on page 826.   FIX ROOFS Select Build> Roof> Fix Roofs to remove breaks where a single edge of one roof plane meets the broken edge of another along a ridge, hip or valley. Fix Roofs does not affect eave edges. See Roof Edges and Walls on page 810.   Automatic Roofs When roofs are automatically generated, a roof plane is created over each exterior wall by default, resulting in a hip roof, and the program tries to join them together to form a single, integrated system. There are a number of options available to produce variations in this default roof style. ROOF DIRECTIVES IN WALLS To automatically generate a roof plane using values other than the defaults or to not generate a roof plane bearing on a particular wall (as with a gable or the sides of a shed roof), you can change the settings in the Wall Specification dialog for that wall. See Roof Panel on page 398. ROOF GROUPS When an automatic roof is generated, the program tries to create roof planes that join together to form a single, integrated system. Different parts of the structure influence how the roof is generated over the whole.   When you need the roof planes over an area of a plan to be entirely separate from those over the rest of the structure, you can assign those areas to a non-default Roof Group. The program treats different Roof Groups as separate buildings for the purpose of automatic roof generation, preventing their roofs from influencing one another.   Bear in mind that the use of Roof Groups typically involves using a combination of both automatic roof generation and manual roof editing, and that changes to Attic walls may also be necessary. See Using Both Techniques on page 792.   Roof Groups are assigned using numbers. The Default Roof Group is always 0, and you can assign rooms to other roof groups in the Room Specification dialog. See General Panel on page 438.   795 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Automatic Roofs CURVED WALLS AND ROOFS Automatically generated roof planes are placed over curved walls at specified increments. In the Build Roof dialog, you can specify the degree increments for the roof over curved walls, from 6° to 90°. The lower the number, the more roof sections are created over the curved wall.   The following  illustrations show a roof created at two different curved increments: 30° and 15°.   CONCAVE CURVED WALLS AND ROOFS Regular roof plane sections can also generate over concave curved walls. For roof sections to generate over a concave curved wall, the sections’ baselines must be longer than the Minimum Alcove Size value on the BUILD panel of the Build Roof dialog.   If the baselines are shorter, the automatically generated roofs are simplified by either:   l Ignoring the curved wall, as if the walls on either side extended to their meeting point.   l Spanning the concave curved wall with a straight Baseline and produce a roof plane for it from that.   REBUILDING ROOFS When Auto Rebuild Roofs is unchecked in the Build Roofs dialog and changes are made to the model, the roof will not update to reflect these changes. This is the case even if the roof was automatically built. On the other hand, when Auto Rebuild Roofs is checked, any changes made to the position of an exterior wall or to its roof directives will prompt the roof to regenerate to reflect these changes. See Roof Panel on page 798.   796 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Build Roof Dialog Changes made to floor heights, ceiling heights, or floor or ceiling platform thicknesses will also cause the roof to be automatically rebuilt. See Editing Rooms on page 419.   You can also rebuild the roof at any time to reflect the current state of the model by opening the Build Roof dialog, checking Build Roof Planes, and clicking OK. Manually dawn roof planes are specified as such in the Roof Plane Specification dialog. If a roof plane was automatically generated, it will instead have a Mark as Edited check box. See Roof Plane Specification Dialog on page 814.   When the roof is rebuilt using Auto Rebuild Roof or Build Roof Planes in the Build Roof dialog, all roof planes in the plan, both automatically generated and manually drawn, are deleted and replaced.   l To preserve any manually drawn roof planes, check Retain Manually Drawn Roof Planes on the BUILD panel of the Build Roof dialog before the roof is rebuilt.   l To preserve any automatically generated roof planes that you have edited, check Retain Edited Roof Planes on the BUILD panel of the Build Roof dialog before the roof is rebuilt.   Note: Under some conditions, when the roof is rebuilt new roof planes may be generated in the same location as retained manually drawn or automatic roof planes. Roof planes cannot be edited or manually drawn when Auto Rebuild Roofs is turned on. If you try to either edit or draw a roof plane using the Roof Plane tool, a question message will display.   Build Roof Dialog The Build Roof dialog is used to automatically build or rebuild roof planes and generate Roof Baseline Polylines. The settings in this dialog act as defaults for both manually drawn and automatic roofs. See Roof Defaults on page 792.   To open the Build Roof dialog, select Build> Roof> Build Roof . You can also double-click the Roof Tools button or the Roof Plane button to open this dialog. Roof planes and Roof Baseline Polylines are generated based on the positions and roof directive settings for each exterior wall in the plan. If you make changes to any of these walls or to any of the settings in this dialog, you will need to build the roof again for them to take effect. See Roof Panel on page 398. Aside from a number of check boxes on the ROOF panel that allow you to automatically generate roof planes and related objects, the settings in this dialog are also found in the Roof Defaults dialog. See Roof Defaults on page 792. The settings in this dialog are similar to those found in the Roof Plane Specification dialog, but affect all subsequently created roof planes rather than one or more selected  roof planes. See Roof Plane Specification Dialog on page 814.   The Build Roof dialog has the following panels: 797 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Build Roof Dialog ROOF PANEL Build l Check Build Roof Planes to build a new roof structure over the entire model. Unless you specify otherwise, the program discards the existing roof planes  and produces new ones.   l If you check Auto Rebuild Roofs, the program automatically rebuilds the roof  whenever you make a change that affects the generation of roofs, such as changes to exterior walls or ceiling heights.   l Check Make Roof Baseline Polylines to delete the existing roof and to create Roof Baseline Polyline(s) based on the exterior wall layout and roof information defined in those walls. Not available when Build Roof Planes is checked. See Roof Baseline Polylines on page 819.   l You can also specify how manually drawn or edited roof planes are handled when the roof is rebuilt automatically. These options are only available when Build Roof Planes is checked. See Rebuilding Roofs on page 796.   l Check Retain Manually Drawn Roof Planes to prevent manually drawn roof planes from being deleted when roof planes are rebuilt. Automatic roof planes may be generated in the same location. Also available if Make Roof Baseline Polylines is checked.   798 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Build Roof Dialog l Check Retain Edited Automatic Roof Planes to prevent automatic roof planes that have been manually edited - including roof planes over exploded dormers - from being deleted when roof planes are rebuilt. Also available if Make Roof Baseline Polylines is checked. If a newly generated roof plane is coplanar with a retained plane, and the area where they overlap is at least half the area of either of them, the new roof plane is deleted and only the retained plane is kept.   Note: Under some conditions, new roof planes may be generated in the same location as manually drawn or automatic roof planes that have been retained. l Check Use Existing Roof Baselines to produce a roof plan based on your Roof Baseline Polyline(s) instead of the exterior wall layout.   Specifications l Specify the roof Framing Method: either Trusses or Rafters. When Trusses is selected, roof plane Structure Thickness is derived from the default Top Chord Depth for roof trusses set in the Framing Defaults dialog; when Rafters is selected, the Structure Thickness is derived from the default Structure Definition. See Trusses Panel on page 872 and Roof Panel on page 869. l Enter a value to describe the Pitch. In plans using U.S. units of measurement, pitch is described as a ratio over 12 by default; in metric plans, it is measured in degrees. For a conversion to degrees, see Roof Pitches in Degrees on page 849.   l Check Pitch in Degrees to display the pitch value in degrees in all dialogs as well as in roof plane labels. Values between -89° and 89° can be entered. When Pitch in Degrees is unchecked, Pitch is described in terms of rise and run: x inches in 12 or x mm in 1000. l Check Trusses (no Birdsmouth) if you wish to frame the roof using trusses rather than rafters. The roof height will be set so that the bottom edge of the truss top chord is flush with the top of the wall. See Roof Trusses on page 895.   l If you plan to use both trusses with rafters, leave Trusses (no Birdsmouth) unchecked so that the rafters’ depth can be accommodated. See Mixing Trusses with Stick Framing on page 902.   Roof Height l Specify the Heel Height, which the height that the roof is raised off the wall top plates to accommodate an Energy Heel. Only available when Trusses is the selected Framing Method. See Energy Heels on page 909. l Uncheck Automatic Birdsmouth Cut to enable the settings below. When checked, the birdsmouth is calculated based on the pitch and rafter depth and its values are listed here for reference. Only available when Rafters is the selected Framing Method. See Birdsmouth Cut on page 809.   l The Raise Off Plate and Birdsmouth settings do not affect the bearing wall heights.   o Enter a positive Raise Off Plate value in this field to build the roof to bear on Attic knee walls. A value of 6" builds the roof 6" above the wall top plates, bearing on short Attic walls.   o Enter a negative Birdsmouth Cut value to control the birdsmouth depth. For a birdsmouth depth of 3”, enter -3”. The location of the Baseline may change if you use the Raise Off Plate setting to specify the birdsmouth depth. See Birdsmouth Cut on page 809.   l Specify the Birdsmouth Seat, which is the horizontal depth of the birdsmouth cut. If you change this value, the Raise Off Plate/Birdsmouth Cut value will automatically adjust.   799 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Build Roof Dialog l To control the Birdsmouth Cut, you should also check Same Roof Height at Exterior Walls, above.   l The Vertical Structure Depth is reported here for reference. It can be changed on the STRUCTURE panel. See Structure Panel on page 803.   l Specify the amount to Raise/Lower All Roof Planes, which controls the height of roof planes relative to the ceiling height specified for the rooms below. See Floor and Ceiling Heights on page 426.   o The default value is 0, which creates roof planes that bear on the wall top plates at the Ceiling Height of the room below.   o Increase this value to raise roof planes so they do not bear directly on the wall top plates. If roofs are raised sufficiently, Attic walls will automatically generate to support them. The exact height depends on the roof pitch.   o Decrease this value to drop roof planes downward and decrease the height of the bearing walls. If roofs are lowered sufficiently, they may extend into rooms, producing areas with angled ceilings.   l Check Ignore Top Floor to ignore the top living floor when roof planes are generated. Roof planes are built on the top plates of the walls below the top floor.   l Specify how you would like the eaves of roof planes with different pitches to meet. See Aligning Eaves on page 813.   l Check Same Roof Height at Exterior Walls to keep bearing walls the same height and change horizontal roof overhang distances as needed so that eaves meet correctly. o When checked, this option ignores any overhang values you may have entered in the Wall Specification dialog. See Aligning Eaves on page 813. o Uncheck this option to raise or lower some roof planes relative to the wall’s top plate, allowing all horizontal overhangs to be the same unless a non-default value has been entered in the Wall Specification dialog. See Roof Directives in Walls on page 378.   l Check Same Height Eaves to keep the eave height for all roof planes the same. Roof planes are raised and lowered as needed so that eaves meet correctly. o The eave height used when this box is checked is that of a roof plane using the default Pitch and Overhang values. When this box is checked, all roof planes are affected, including those that do not need adjustment in order to align with adjacent planes. o When Same Height Eaves is checked, any non-default overhang values specified in the Wall Specification dialog are used. Roof planes are raised or lowered so that the eave height is the same, regardless of the horizontal overhang.    l Uncheck Allow Low Roof Planes only when an upper floor overhangs roof planes below.   Roof Overhang An overhang is measured horizontally from the outside Main Layer of exterior walls to the top outside edge of the fascia or shadow boards or, if no fascia or shadow boards are present, the end of the top of the rafter. The overhang does not include frieze molding or gutters. See The Main Layer on page 385.   l Eave is the overhang distance outside bearing walls for roof planes using the default Pitch. If a particular roof plane has a different Pitch, its overhang will adjust to keep its fascia at the same height. Overhang may be greater for a shallower pitch, lesser for a greater pitch.   l Gable is the overhang distance at gable ends or rake walls.   800 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Build Roof Dialog If the roof overhang values are not sufficient to extend past the outer surface of exterior walls, the walls may not generate correctly in 3D views. Options l Enter the Segment Angle at Curved Wall, which is the angle for roof segments automatically generated to cover a curved wall. A smaller angle produces more roof planes. Note that in some instances, slightly smaller or larger values will be used instead of the specified angle.   l Specify the Minimum Alcove Size, which is the minimum depth and width of an alcove in an otherwise straight exterior wall. Alcoves with both a depth and width less than this value are roofed over, while alcoves that are either wider or deeper than this value do not receive a roof.   OPTIONS PANEL Eaves l Specify how the rafter and truss ends are Cut by selecting either Square Cut or Plumb Cut.   l Check Boxed Eave to produce horizontal boxed eaves or uncheck it for sloping eaves. You can also change this for individual roof planes in the Roof Plane Specification dialog. See Boxed Eaves on page 845.   801 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Build Roof Dialog l Check Flush Eave to produce box eaves that build flush with the adjacent exterior wall. When unchecked, boxed eaves build to the gable fascia.   l Higher Eaves Boxed - If the selected roof plane contains more than one eave, check this box to box the higher eaves as well as the lower ones.   l By default, Boxed Eaves extend from the inside edge of the roof fascia to the exterior Main Layer of the wall, enclosing the overhang area. If an exterior room with Use Soffit Surface for Ceiling checked is located between the roof’s baseline and an interior room, the Boxed Eave will extend across that room, as well. You can instead uncheck Default to Overhang and specify the Length of the boxed eaves. Not available if Flush Eave is checked.   Ceiling Break Lines See Special Ceilings on page 434.   l Display At Finish Intersection positions ceiling break lines where the ceiling finish surfaces intersect. l Select Display At Framing Intersection to position ceiling break lines where the ceiling framing surfaces intersect. l When Use Room Ceiling Finish is checked, the ceiling finish thickness and material on the undersides of roof planes are defined by the room below. Uncheck this box to enable the two settings that follow and define the ceiling finish as part of the roof planes instead. When this is unchecked, you can specify the Ceiling Surface material on the Materials Panel on page 804.   l Check Has Ceiling to enable the Ceiling Thickness option. When this box is unchecked, the selected roof plane will have no ceiling surface at all and the “Ceiling Surface” component will not be available on the MATERIALS panel.   l Specify the Ceiling Thickness, which is the thickness of the bottom surface of the ceiling plane.   Supply Specify which material components to calculate in the Materials List. See Materials Lists on page 1303. l Uncheck Gutter to not include gutters on subsequently-built roof planes. This option affects both the Materials List and 3D views.   l Check Edge Flashing to calculate edge flashing in the Materials List when one or more roof planes is against a wall.    802 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Build Roof Dialog l Check Ridge Vent to calculate ridge venting in the Materials List.   l Check Metal Drip Edge at Eave to calculate metal drip edge along the eaves in the Materials List.   l Check Metal Drip Edge at Gable to calculate metal drip edge along any gable eaves in the Materials List.   l Check Valley Flashing to calculate valley flashing in the Materials List when two or more roof planes form a valley.    3D Display l When Show All Ridges is checked, a line along each hip between roof planes forming the conical roof above a curved wall displays in Vector Views. Uncheck this box to suppress these lines. See Rendered and Vector Views on page 1080.   STRUCTURE PANEL The settings on the STRUCTURE panel of the Build Roof dialog are the same as those on the ROOF panel of the Build Framing dialog. Changes made in one dialog are also applied in the other. See Roof Panel on page 869.   Note: Changes made on the Structure panel will not affect the structure of existing roof planes. To make changes take effect, rebuild the roof. RAFTER TAILS PANEL The settings on the RAFTER TAILS panel allow you to specify a rafter tail profile for exposed rafter ends under roof eaves. See Rafter Tails on page 847.   The settings on this panel are like those on the MOLDINGS panel found in a variety of dialogs in the program. See Moldings / / Profiles / Rails / Panels on page 927.   A few things about the RAFTER TAILS panel are unique:   l Only one rafter tail profile can be specified at a time, so the Add New button is only available when no profile is currently selected.   l Uncheck Stretch to Fit Rafter to use the rafter tail profile’s default size or to specify its Height and Width, below. When checked, the profile is sized by the program to match the roof rafters.   l Specify the distance that the rafter tail profile should Extend past the inside surface of the subfascia. This distance is measured along the top of the rafter tail, so it is greater than the length as measured in plan view.   RIDGE CAPS PANEL The settings on the RIDGE CAPS panel allow you to specify a profile for ridge caps. See Ridge Caps on page 848.   The settings on this panel are like those on the MOLDINGS panel found in many dialogs in the program. See Moldings / / Profiles / Rails / Panels on page 927.   GUTTER PANEL The settings on the GUTTER panel allow you to specify a gutter profile for the eaves of roof planes. See Gutters on page 846.   The settings on this panel are like those on the MOLDINGS panel found in many dialogs in the program. See Moldings / / Profiles / Rails / Panels on page 927.   803 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Roof Planes FRIEZE PANEL The settings on the FRIEZE panel allow you to specify one or more frieze molding profiles to generate under the eaves and/or gable overhangs of roof planes. See Frieze Molding on page 847.   The settings on this panel are like those on the MOLDINGS panel found in many dialogs in the program. See Moldings / / Profiles / Rails / Panels on page 927.   SHADOW BOARDS PANEL The settings on the SHADOW BOARDS panel allow you to specify one or more shadow board profiles that follow the fascia on eaves and/or gable eaves. See Shadow Boards on page 846.   The settings on this panel are like those on the MOLDINGS panel found in many dialogs in the program. See Moldings / / Profiles / Rails / Panels on page 927.   ARROW PANEL The settings on this panel allow you to control the appearance of roof plane slope direction arrows. See Displaying Roofs on page 806.   For information about these settings, see Arrowheads on page 327.   MATERIALS PANEL The settings on this panel allow you to specify the default materials for the roof’s various components. Some of these materials, as well as their thicknesses, can be specified on the STRUCTURE panel. See Materials Panel on page 1055. ROOF STYLES PANEL The ROOF STYLES panel provides links to tutorial information about creating different roof styles automatically. Click on a roof style to launch the online Help to a page with information about the roof style you selected.   COMPONENTS PANEL The information on the COMPONENTS panel can be used in the materials list. For more information, see Components Panel on page 1330.   Roof Planes When creating a roof, it is helpful to know how to draw a roof plane manually and be familiar with its parts.   DRAWING ROOF PLANES Roof planes are CAD-based objects that are created and edited like much closed polylines, and also have pitch, elevation and structural properties.   Before drawing roof planes, you should set your roof defaults so that the 3D attributes of your roof planes are correct. See Roof Defaults on page 792.   804 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Roof Planes To draw a roof plane 1. Select Build> Roof> Roof Plane .   2. Click and drag a Baseline from point 1 to point 2, as in the following example:   Most roof planes are drawn over a wall, and the Baseline should be located directly above the outer edge of the wall’s Main Layer. See The Main Layer on page 385. 3. Release the mouse button at point 2 and move your cursor in the upslope direction. As you move the cursor, a preview outline of the roof plane displays.   4. Click at point 3 to build the roof plane. Point 3 is located on the ridge edge of the roof plane.   Note: You cannot manually draw roof planes when Auto Rebuild Roofs is enabled in the Build Roof dialog. See Roof Panel on page 798. THE BASELINE The pitch direction and initial height of any roof plane - manual or automatic - is determined by its Baseline.   The Baseline of the roof plane is normally located over the outer main layer of the wall and is used as the pivot point for the roof plane when the pitch is changed.   The Baseline height is determined by the following formula:   Elevation of the wall top plate + (Vertical Structure Depth - Vertical Birdsmouth Depth) = Baseline Height In a cross section, the Baseline is located directly above the outer surface of the main wall layer, at the top surface of the roof framing.   A roof Baseline displays as a separate line within its roof plane when the “Roofs, Baselines” layer is turned on. In 3D views, it can only be seen if the roof plane is selected.   805 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Displaying Roofs A Baseline has a tick mark at its center point which indicates the direction that the roof plane slopes upward. If the upslope tick is pointing the wrong direction, either rotate the entire roof plane or delete it and draw a new one.   When drawing the Baseline of a roof plane, here are some things to consider:   l A Baseline does not have to be drawn over a wall, although it often is.   l A Baseline drawn along a wall should be drawn over the outer edge of the wall’s main layer. It tries to snap to that layer.   l The elevation of the top plate is defined by the ceiling height in the room. If the roof plane is not drawn over a wall, its height is based on the default ceiling height value for the current floor.   l If a Baseline is drawn over the top of any other roof plane, the Baseline height equals the height of the existing roof plane at the point where you started drawing.   Once drawn, a Baseline can be selected in plan view and edited independent of the roof plane. See Editing Roof Baselines on page 810.   EAVE AND GABLE OVERHANGS Roof overhangs are measured horizontally from the outside Main Layer of exterior walls to the top outside edge of the fascia or shadow boards or, if no fascia or shadow boards are present, the end of the top of the rafter. The overhang does not include frieze molding or gutters. See The Main Layer on page 385. The location of a roof plane’s fascia and shadow boards also determines its area and the size of its polyline in plan view. See Polyline Panel on page 818.   ROOF LAYERS Each roof plane is composed of Surface, Structure, and Ceiling Finish layers. These can be specified in the Build Roof dialog. See Structure Panel on page 803.   Displaying Roofs The display of roof planes, their labels, and attributes such as gutters and ridge caps is controlled in the Layer Display Options dialog or Active Layer Display Options side window. See Layer Display Options Dialog on page 179. Roof planes are drawn on the "Roof Planes" layer by default. If this layer is turned off and Auto Rebuild Roofs feature is turned on, changes made to the plan that cause the roof to rebuild will not automatically turn on its display. See Rebuilding Roofs on page 796. 806 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Displaying Roofs IN PLAN VIEW A number of layers associated with roof planes only display information in plan view, including "Roofs, Baselines" and "Roofs, Gable Lines".   If the bottom surface of the roof extends below the ceiling height of a room, Ceiling Break lines will display, indicating where the flat ceiling ends and sloped ceiling begins. Ceiling Break lines are drawn on the “Ceiling Break Lines” layer in plan view only.   The Roof Plan View is set up for efficient drawing and printing of roof plans. See Plan Views on page 146.   In plan view, roof planes can display on any floor without affecting their height in 3D. To move the display of a roof plane to a new floor, select it in plan view and click either the Display on Floor Above or Display on Floor Below edit button. The display of group-selected roof planes can also be controlled in this manner.   Any skylights or roof holes placed in a roof plane moved in this manner will move, as well. Other associated objects like Auto Dormers or gutters will not move, however.   ROOF PLANE LABELS Roof plane labels indicating the pitch and slope direction are located on the “Roofs, Labels” layer and can be set to display in floor plan  and cross section/elevation views. When a roof plane or a ceiling plane with a label specified is selected, its label will have a small square Move handle and small rectangular Rotate handle for the text only. You can specify whether roof plane labels display the pitch in terms of rise and run or in decimal degrees by checking or unchecking Pitch in Degrees in the Build Roof dialog. See Roof Panel on page 798.   A roof plane’s label can be customized in its specification dialog. See Label Panel on page 700. Roof planes have named value pairs associated with them, so you can create custom labels using Text Macros. See Text Macros on page 540. Manually drawn Ceiling Planes and Skylights can also display labels when the “Roofs, Labels” layer is on. Unlike roof planes, these objects’ labels do not include a slope indicator and their Automatic Labels are blank; however, you can specify a custom label using text in their specification dialogs. See Ceiling Planes on page 826 and Skylights and Roof Holes on page 834.   When a roof plane, ceiling plane or roof hole/skylight is selected in a 3D view, its label will display on a temporary basis if the “Roofs, Labels” layer is turned on.   IN CROSS SECTION AND CAMERA VIEWS When a roof or ceiling plane is viewed in a cross section, the layers that compose it can be seen, including the roof surface, sheathing, and the ceiling surface:   l If roof framing has been built, its display can be turned on, as well. See Displaying Framing on page 879.   l If a roof or ceiling plane is located over a room with Flat Ceiling Over this Room checked, the ceiling surface will not generate. See Vaulted and Cathedral Ceilings on page 435.   l The layers of roof and ceiling planes can be detailed using the Auto Detail tool. See Detailing Cross Section/Elevation Views on page 1094.   In camera views and overviews, the appearance of curved roof planes can be controlled by adjusting the Facet Angle in the Roof Plane Specification dialog. See General Panel on page 814.   807 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Roof and Ceiling Planes IN THE MATERIALS LIST The materials that make up roof and ceiling plane assemblies are listed under different Categories in the Materials List:   l Roofing - Lists most materials associated with roofs, including roofing, sheathing, rafters and trusses, gutters, and skylights.   l Exterior Trim - Lists automatically generated frieze molding and shadow boards. See Roof Returns and Other Details on page 844.   l Insulation - Insulation is calculated for roof and ceiling planes above rooms that do not have Flat Ceiling Over This Room checked. See Structure Panel on page 439.   l Wallboard - Lists ceiling materials for all rooms, including those that use the underside of the roof as their ceiling.   l Framing - Lists ceiling framing for manually drawn ceiling planes.   See Materials Lists on page 1303.   IN SCHEDULES Roof Planes, Roof Holes, Skylights, and a selection of Roof Trim items can be included in schedules. See The Schedule Tools on page 682. Roof Holes and Skylights are listed in the "Windows" category by default, while Frieze, Gutter, Ridge Cap, and Shadow Boards are listed in the "Roof Trim" category. You can, however, assign a selected roof object to the category of your choice in its specification dialog. See Schedule Panel on page 704.   Editing Roof and Ceiling Planes A selected roof or ceiling plane can be edited in 2D and 3D using edit handles, edit toolbar buttons, and its specification dialog. In 3D views, you can also use the Material Painter .  See Material Painter Tools on page 1052.   A roof or ceiling plane’s Baseline can also be selected and edited. To select it, first select the roof plane and then click the Select Next Object edit button. See The Baseline on page 805.   The appearance and display of roof and ceiling planes can also be customized. See Displaying Roofs on page 806 and Roof Plane Specification Dialog on page 814.   By default, all roof planes are deleted and replaced whenever the roof is rebuilt using the Build Roof dialog. If you have manually edited roof planes and do not want them to be replaced, be sure to check Retain Edited Roof Planes. See Roof Panel on page 798.   Roof planes cannot be edited while Auto Rebuild Roofs is turned on. If you try to do so, the program will prompt you to turn it off. If you use the Material Painter to edit a component of a roof plane while Auto Rebuild Roofs is on, you will be prompted to either turn it off or update the default material for that component. 2D SHAPE AND 3D ORIENTATION There are two basic aspects to editing roof planes: 2D shape and 3D orientation.   808 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Roof and Ceiling Planes l The 2D shape of a roof or ceiling plane can be edited much like a closed CAD polyline. As a plane's perimeter is reshaped in 2D, the program maintains its height and pitch in 3D. See Editing Closed Polyline-Based Objects on page 228.   l The 3D orientation of a roof or ceiling plane is defined by its height, pitch, and its structure: all of which can be edited in its specification dialog.   An understanding of these two concepts allows you to design almost any kind of roof system.   RAISING/LOWERING ROOF AND CEILING PLANES The default height of a roof or ceiling plane is based on the ceiling height of the room below. See Floor and Ceiling Heights on page 793. Roof planes can be raised or lowered in the Roof Plane Specification dialog. Begin by locking the Pitch, then change one of the Height values. See General Panel on page 814. Ceiling planes can be edited in a similar manner in their specification dialog. See General Panel on page 828.   You can also raise or lower roof and ceiling planes using the Transform/Replicate Object edit tool. See Transform/Replicate Object Dialog on page 266.   In addition, when a new floor is added to a plan, you can choose to move any roof planes displaying on the top floor up to the newly added floor level. Ceiling planes are not affected when a new floor is added. See Adding Floors on page 732.   CHANGING A ROOF OR CEILING PLANE'S PITCH The default pitch for a roof system as well as for manually-drawn ceiling planes is set in the Build Roof dialog. Non-default pitches can be set in the specification dialog of each exterior bearing wall defining a room on the top floor level of the plan. See Roof Directives in Walls on page 378. Just as with its height, the pitch of a roof or ceiling plane can be modified on the GENERAL panel of its specification dialog. Begin by locking one of the Height values and then change the Pitch. If you choose to lock the Top of Plate height of a roof plane, the point about which the plane will pivot depends on whether Automatic Birdsmouth Cut is checked in the Build Roof dialog. l When it is checked, the roof plane will pivot about the top inside edge of the bearing wall's top plate. l When it is unchecked, it will pivot about the top outside edge of the top plate. Changing a roof plane's pitch can affect how it connects to adjacent roof planes. See Connecting Roof and Ceiling Planes on page 811. EDITING ROOF PLANE STRUCTURE To create roof planes of a particular depth, begin by setting up the desired roof framing defaults, then build the roof. See Framing Defaults on page 851.   If you later need to change the structure of the roof planes, make the needed change to the Framing Defaults, and then rebuild the roof. You can also edit roof structure on an individual roof plane basis. See Roof Plane Specification Dialog on page 814.   BIRDSMOUTH CUT The birdsmouth is the notch cut into a rafter where it rests on the wall top plate. You can control its vertical depth and the width of the birdsmouth seat in the Build Roof dialog. See Roof Panel on page 798.   809 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Roof and Ceiling Planes There are two ways to create a roof plane with no birdsmouth:   l Check Trusses (No Birdsmouth) in the Build Roof dialog before drawing the roof plane.   l Specify a Raise Off Plate value of at least 1/16” in the Build Roof dialog.   To change the birdsmouth depth after the roof is built, you can move the roof planes up or down, or change the pitch. For example, if you lock the pitch and raise the roof plane by one inch, you decrease the birdsmouth depth by one inch.   EDITING ROOF BASELINES The pitch direction and initial height of any roof plane - manual or automatic - is determined by its Baseline. See The Baseline on page 805.   In plan view, a Baseline can be selected and edited independent of the roof plane. To select it, click on the roof plane at the location of the Baseline and then click the Select Next Object edit button. The Status Bar tells you when the roof plane Baseline is selected. See Select Next Object on page 211.   If a roof plane Baseline is moved, its height will not change. Instead, the height of the roof plane will be affected. In most cases, therefore, moving a roof plane’s Baseline independent of the roof plane itself is not recommended.   If the angle of a roof plane’s Baseline is changed, the direction of the roof plane’s pitch will be modified. The Baseline Angle can be modified in either of two ways:   l In the Roof Plane Specification dialog. This will change its angle relative to the floor, and will tilt the roof plane along an axis perpendicular to its Baseline. This method is helpful when a specific eave angle is needed. See General Panel on page 814.   l Using its Rotate edit handle in plan view. This will change its angle relative to the roof plane’s eave or ridge and will modify the direction of the pitch. This method is best when the pitch direction matters more than the angle of the eave.   l Both of these methods can be used to modify the same roof plane, although the second approach makes it difficult to control both the pitch direction and eave angle, and is not recommended.   The length of a roof plane Baseline can be lengthened or shortened using its edit handles without changing any of the roof plane’s attributes.   ROOF EDGES AND WALLS By default, the edges of a roof plane will automatically snap to the outer surface of a nearby parallel wall. You can disable this Special Snapping behavior for a selected roof plane in its specification dialog. See General Panel on page 814.   After moving a corner edit handle, it may be difficult to make an edge parallel to an eave or a wall. Use the Make Parallel/Perpendicular edit button to align a roof or ceiling plane edge with a wall, another roof plane edge, or another object with a straight edge. See Make Parallel/Perpendicular on page 250.   If opposite sides of a roof plane are parallel, Temporary Dimensions will display between them when one side is selected. Sometimes, what appears to be a single, straight roof plane edge may actually be broken into two or more edges, which can affect your ability to align the edge properly.   A single edge will have three edit handles; if more than three display, more than one edge is present. An extra handle can be removed manually by dragging it into an adjacent handle. You can also use Build> Roof> Fix Roofs . See Fix Roofs on page 795.   810 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Connecting Roof and Ceiling Planes When Bumping/Pushing is enabled and CAD Stops Move is checked in the Roof Plane Specification dialog, a roof plane will bump against another roof plane, CAD or CAD based object as it is moved. Roof planes cannot push these objects, however. See Bumping/Pushing on page 243.   LOCKING ROOF PLANES When the roof plan is correct, roof planes can be locked to prevent accidental changes. To do this, lock the “Roof Planes” layer in all layer sets. See Layer Display Options Dialog on page 179. Locking roof planes will not prevent roof planes from being deleted if the floor they are on is deleted.   DELETING ROOF PLANES There are several ways to delete roof planes. Delete the entire roof quickly by selecting Build> Roof> Delete Roof Planes. You can also delete all roof planes at once in the Delete Objects dialog. See Delete Objects Dialog on page 285. In addition, you can select any roof plane or group of roof planes, then press the Delete key or click the Delete edit button to delete it from the plan. See Deleting Objects on page 284.   Generally speaking, roof planes cannot be deleted if they are locked. An exception to this rule occurs when an entire floor of a plan is deleted. Any roof planes present on a floor will be deleted when the floor is deleted, locked or not. See Deleting Floors on page 735.   When a roof plane is deleted, any roof framing associated with it is automatically deleted, as well.   Connecting Roof and Ceiling Planes When a roof system is drawn correctly, roof planes will meet along geometrically correct lines to form ridges, hips, and valleys. There are a number of tools to help you achieve this when manually drawing or editing roofs.   To generate roof planes that do not form a single, integrated system, consider using Roof Groups. See Roof Groups on page 795.   By default, all roof planes are deleted and replaced whenever the roof is rebuilt using the Build Roof dialog. If you have manually edited roof planes and do not want them to be replaced, be sure to check Retain Edited Roof Planes in the Roof Plane Specification dialog. See Roof Panel on page 798.   Roof planes cannot be edited while Auto Rebuild Roofs is turned on. If you try to do so, the program will prompt you to turn it off. JOIN ROOF PLANES Two roof or ceiling planes can be joined at adjacent edges in both 2D and 3D using the Join Roof Planes edit button. To use this tool, first identify which edges of the roof planes can extend to meet at a ridge, hip, or valley. The program will join the two planes along the line where they intersect whenever possible.   811 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Connecting Roof and Ceiling Planes To use Join Roof Planes 1. Select a roof or ceiling plane on the edge to be joined to another plane.   2. Click the Join Roof Planes edit button (or press 2 on the keyboard).   3. Move your pointer to the edge of the second roof or ceiling plane that the first one needs to join to. When your pointer is over the second plane, this plane will highlight.   4. Click on the edge of the second roof or ceiling plane to join it to the first plane.   Note: Join Roof Planes cannot be used to join a roof plane and ceiling plane. Only planes of the same type can be joined using this tool. If the planes are not close enough, or their shape is not correct, you may need to align their edges, remove extra edges, or move them closer.   When roof or ceiling planes adjust, the program joins them at the proper location and the adjacent edges extend or contract to remain connected. If the joining of the two will completely eliminate or reverse an adjacent edge, the connection cannot be made.   LOCATING INTERSECTIONS When roof planes of differing slopes meet, they create a ridge, hip, or valley. The Join Roof Planes edit tool is the easiest way to move roof plane edges so that they meet correctly; but you can also locate roof plane intersection points where the ridge, hip or valley should be. Once you know where the planes will meet, you can drag edges or corners to those points.   To find roof plane intersection points 1. Select the roof plane you would like to place intersection points on. 2. Click the Place Roof Plane Intersection Point edit button.   3. Click the edge of another roof plane to place a temporary CAD Point at the geometrically accurate location where that edge would meet the selected roof plane.   4. Repeat these steps for additional edges as needed.   5. Once these intersection points are identified, you can snap the corners of the second roof plane to them.   812 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Connecting Roof and Ceiling Planes ALIGNING EAVES It is not uncommon for roof plans to feature more than one pitch. In order for the eaves of roof planes with different pitches to meet correctly at ridges and hips, you must control the roof planes’ heights and their horizontal overhang distances. Two options in the Build Roof dialog allow you to control how the eaves of automatically generated roof planes align. See Roof Panel on page 798.   l Same Roof Height at Exterior Walls maintains the default height of roof planes where they bear on exterior walls. The horizontal overhang distances of any non-default roof planes are adjusted so that they continue to join correctly with default roof planes.   l Same Eave Heights maintains the default roof plane height at the eaves as well as any non-default horizontal overhang distances. All roof planes are raised or lowered so that they all have the same height at the eaves as default roof planes.   Roof planes that do not join other roof planes with different pitches at ridges or hips are referred to as Independent.   l When Same Roof Height at Exterior Walls is checked, Independent roof planes are not affected and will maintain any non-default overhang values.   l When both Same Roof Height at Exterior Walls and Same Eave Heights are checked, the overhangs of Independent roof planes will be adjusted to preserve their heights at both the exterior walls and the eaves.   MOVE TO BE COPLANAR The Move to be Coplanar edit button allows you to move the selected roof plane to be coplanar (in the same plane) with the next selected roof plane. You can use this tool in both 2D and 3D views. The results can be easily seen in a cross section view. The two roof planes must have parallel Baselines for this to work.   SET BASELINE HEIGHT DIALOG If you manually draw a roof plane so that it bears on a wall at its Baseline, and is placed in the same location as an existing roof plane, the Set Baseline Height dialog will display. See The Baseline on page 805.   l Select Over Wall Top to create a roof plane that bears on the wall it is drawn over and has an overhang as specified in the Build Roof dialog. This option would be appropriate to produce a full height dormer. See Manually Drawn Dormers on page 839.   l Select Over the Existing Roof Plane to produce a roof plane with a height based on that of the roof plane below it rather than the wall. The Baseline height equals the top height of the existing roof at the point where you began drawing the new roof plane Baseline, and has no overhang. This option would be appropriate to create a dormer vent or cricket. See Crickets on page 840.   813 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Roof Plane Specification Dialog Roof Plane Specification Dialog Select one or more roof planes and click the Open Object edit button to open the Roof Plane Specification dialog. You can also open this dialog for all roof planes in the entire plan by selecting Build> Roof> Edit All Roof Planes .   The Roof Plane Specification dialog has the following panels: GENERAL PANEL There are four values that define the 3D orientation of a roof plane: Ridge Top Height, Baseline Height, Fascia Top Height, and Pitch.   Locking any of the Height values defines that value as the pivot point for the selected roof plane. Each of these dimensions is measured from the first floor default elevation of 0' - 0".   If you lock the Pitch and change a Height value, the roof plane moves vertically, keeping the same slope. It will not pivot.   For a conversion to degrees, see Roof Pitches in Degrees on page 849. 814 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Roof Plane Specification Dialog Changing these values does not affect the 2D representation of the roof plane.   General l Specify the selected roof plane's Framing Method: either Trusses or Rafters. When Trusses is selected, the roof plane's Structure Thickness is derived from the default Top Chord Depth for roof trusses set in the Framing Defaults dialog; when Rafters is selected, the Structure Thickness is derived from the dialog. See Roof Panel on page 869 and Trusses Panel on page 872. Height/Pitch Specify the Height and Pitch of the selected roof plane(s). Heights are measured from the top surface of the roof plane(s) rafters or trusses. See Roof Planes on page 804.   l The Top of Plate is defined by the ceiling height of the room below and is reported here for reference. N/A displays if no room is below the roof plane.   l Define the Ridge Top Height, or lock this value to make it the roof plane’s pivot point. If the roof plane's has multiple ridge lines, this setting is associated with the highest ridge. l Define the Baseline Height, or lock this value to make it the pivot point.   l Define the Fascia Top Height, or lock this value to make it the pivot point.   Note: The Fascia Top height will decrease slightly if the fascia edge is aligned with the ridge top of another roof plane. l Define the Shadow Board Top height, or lock this value to make it the pivot point. Only available when Shadow Boards are present on the selected roof plane. See Fascia and Shadow Boards on page 845. l Specify the Pitch for the selected roof plane, or lock this value to move the roof plane vertically when a Height value is changed. l Check Pitch in Degrees to display the pitch value in degrees in all dialogs as well as in roof plane labels. Values between -89° and 89° can be entered. When Pitch in Degrees in unchecked, Pitch is described in terms of rise and run: x inches in 12 or x mm in 1000. The diagram to the right of the Height/Pitch settings shows the location of the Lock point. If a Height/Pitch setting is currently selected for editing, its location will also be indicated using an arrow. l By default, the selected Show Diagram for option is determined by whether Trusses (no Birdsmouth) was checked in the Build Roof dialog when the selected roof plane was created. l Select a radio button to choose whether to Show Diagram for Rafters or Trusses. The structure of the roof and location of the Top of Plate Lock point vary between these two options. 815 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Roof Plane Specification Dialog Measurements Information about the structure of the selected roof plane(s) displays here for reference.   l The Structure Thickness of the selected roof plane(s) is reported here for reference but is specified on the Structure panel. The default Structure Thickness is defined in the Build Framing dialog. See Build Framing Dialog on page 860.   l The Birdsmouth Depth is the plumb or vertical depth of the birdsmouth cut. To change it, move the roof plane some way. For example, if you lock the pitch and raise the roof plane by one inch, you will decrease the birdsmouth depth by one inch. See Birdsmouth Cut on page 809.   l The Birdsmouth Seat is the horizontal width of the birdsmouth cut. This value is dynamically linked to the birdsmouth depth - if one changes, so does the other.   l The Vertical Structure Depth is defined by measuring a plumb line across the roof plane structure. The degree of pitch affects the Vertical rafter width. The greater the pitch, the greater the vertical structure depth.   l Overhang from Baseline is the horizontal overhang measured from the Baseline to the eave.   l Mark as Edited - When an automatically generated roof plane is modified, the program marks it as "edited", giving you the option of retaining it when the roof is rebuilt. Uncheck this box to remove this status from the selected roof plane. See Rebuilding Roofs on page 796.   l Mark as Edited is only available for automatically generated roof planes. If a manually drawn roof plane is selected, the words Manual Roof Plane will display here instead. l When Use Special Snapping is checked, the selected roof plane's edges will automatically snap to the outside surface of walls that it may butt against. Uncheck this to prevent the roof plane from snapping to any nearby walls. Curved Roof Check Curved Roof to specify the selected roof plane as curved. See Curved Roof Planes on page 823. l Specify the roof plane’s Angle at Eave, Angle at Ridge and Radius to Roof Surface. l These three values are interrelated - when one is changed, the other two adjust accordingly. You may find it helpful to first specify the Radius value, then the Angle values. l A flat roof plane with a pitch of 0 has angles of 0 at both the ridge and eave, as well as a radius of 0. l Uncheck Automatic Facet Angle to specify the Facet Angle, which is the angle at which curved roof surfaces are broken in 3D views. The default value is 7.5°; a smaller value produces a smoother curve while a larger value may generate more quickly in 3D views. The Facet Angle value must divide into 360° evenly; if it does not, the program will choose the nearest value that does. Baseline Specify the angle of the selected roof plane’s Baseline, relative to the XY axis. See Editing Roof Baselines on page 810.   l A positive Baseline Angle value causes the Baseline to tilt upward from its default height. A negative value causes it to tilt downward. The top heights of any walls under the selected roof plane will become angled, as well.   l The Baseline Height defined above can be maintained at either the Start or End point. In plan view, the Baseline direction is clockwise around the house. 816 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Roof Plane Specification Dialog OPTIONS PANEL The settings on the OPTIONS panel are the same as those on the panel of the same name in the Build Roof dialog, but affect the selected roof plane only. See Options Panel on page 801.   STRUCTURE PANEL The settings on the STRUCTURE panel are similar to those on the ROOF panel of the Build Framing dialog, but apply to the selected roof plane only. See Roof Panel on page 869.   One check box is unique to the STRUCTURE panel of the Roof Plane Specification dialog: check Retain Roof Framing to keep the selected roof plane’s framing from being deleted and replaced when roof framing is rebuilt.   RAFTER TAILS PANEL The settings on the RAFTER TAILS panel are the same as those on the same panel of the Build Roof dialog, but affect the selected roof plane only. See Rafter Tails Panel on page 803.   Most of the settings on this panel are also like those on the MOLDINGS panel found in a variety of dialogs in the program. See Moldings / / Profiles / Rails / Panels on page 927.   RIDGE CAPS PANEL The settings on the RIDGE CAPS panel allow you to specify one or more ridge cap profiles on the ridge and hip edges of the selected roof plane and are the same as those on the same panel of the Build Roof dialog. See Ridge Caps on page 848.   If you customize the settings on this panel, bear in mind that your changes may only take effect in the model if the same changes are also made to adjacent roof planes.   Most of the settings on this panel are like those on the MOLDINGS panel found in many dialogs in the program. See Moldings / / Profiles / Rails / Panels on page 927.   GUTTER PANEL The settings on the GUTTER panel allow you to specify a gutter profile for the eaves of roof planes. See Gutters on page 846.   The settings on this panel are like those on the MOLDINGS panel found in many dialogs in the program. See Moldings / / Profiles / Rails / Panels on page 927.   FRIEZE PANEL The settings on the FRIEZE panel allow you to specify a frieze molding profile to generate under the eaves of the selected roof plane and are the same as those on the same panel of the Build Roof dialog. See Frieze Molding on page 847.   The settings on this panel are  like those on the MOLDINGS panel found in many dialogs in the program. See Moldings / / Profiles / Rails / Panels on page 927. SHADOW BOARDS PANEL The settings on the SHADOW BOARDS panel allow you to specify one or more fascia shadow board profiles that follow the selected roof plane’s eaves. See Shadow Boards on page 846.   817 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Roof Plane Specification Dialog The settings on this panel are like those on the MOLDINGS panel found in many dialogs in the program. See Moldings / / Profiles / Rails / Panels on page 927.   POLYLINE PANEL The POLYLINE panel states the length of the roof plane’s Perimeter and its enclosed Area, calculated using several different methods.   l The Perimeter is the total length of the roof plane’s sides, not including fascia and shadow boards, with its pitch taken into account. It does not equal the perimeter as measured in plan view unless the roof plane has no fascia or shadow boards and the pitch is 0.   l The Framing Area is the area of the roof plane’s framing, not including the fascia or shadow boards, with the pitch taken into account. It is slightly smaller than the Roof Surface Area as roofing typically overhangs the framing by a small amount.   l The Projected Area is the area of the roof plane polyline, including fascia and shadow boards, as seen in plan view. It does not equal the Roof Surface Area unless the pitch is 0.   l The Roof Surface Area is the area of the roof plane’s top surface, which covers the fascia and shadow boards, with the pitch taken into account.   l The Overhang Area is the area of the roof plane’s overhang, including fascia and shadow boards, with its pitch taken into account.   l The Projected Overhang Area is the area of the roof plane’s overhang, including fascia and shadow boards, as seen in plan view.   SELECTED LINE PANEL The SELECTED LINE panel is similar to the Line panel of the Line Specification dialog. See Line Panel on page 304.   LINE STYLE PANEL For information about the settings on this panel, see Line Style Panel on page 305.   FILL STYLE PANEL The settings on the FILL STYLE panel control the appearance of the selected roof plane in plan view. For information about these settings, see Fill Style Panel and Dialogs on page 193.   ARROW PANEL The settings on the ARROW panel allow you to control the appearance of the selected roof plane’s slope direction arrow. See Displaying Roofs on page 806.   For information about these settings, see Arrowheads on page 327.   818 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Roof Baseline Polylines MATERIALS PANEL The settings on the MATERIALS panel allow you to specify materials for the selected roof plane’s various components. For more information, see Materials Panel on page 1055.   The “Ceiling Surface” component is only available when Use Room Ceiling Finish is unchecked  on the STRUCTURE panel. LABEL PANEL Roof plane labels display when the “Roofs, Labels” layer is turned on and use the Text Style assigned to that layer. See Roof Plane Labels on page 807.   For information about the settings on this panel, see  Label Panel on page 700.   COMPONENTS PANEL The information on the COMPONENTS panel can be used in the materials list. See Components Panel on page 1330.   OBJECT INFORMATION PANEL The information entered on the OBJECT INFORMATION panel can be used in schedules and the materials list. For more information, see Object Information Panel on page 1331.   SCHEDULE PANEL The settings on the SCHEDULE panel determine which schedule categories the selected roof plane is included in. See Schedule Panel on page 704. Roof Baseline Polylines Typically, the program builds an automatic roof based on the settings in the Build Roof dialog and on the ROOF panel of the Wall Specification dialog, along with the layout of the exterior walls and floor and ceiling heights.   If you want to build a roof that diverges from the footprint of your building as well as the roof directives in the exterior walls, you can use Roof Baseline Polylines.   To create roof baseline polylines 1. Select Build> Roof> Build Roof .   2. On the BUILD panel of the Build Roof dialog, check Make Roof Baseline Polylines.   3. Click OK. A set of roof Baselines is created along the outside edge of the Main Layer of the exterior walls, forming one or more closed polylines.   As with roof planes, the heights of Roof Baseline Polylines are determined by ceiling heights in the plan. If roof planes will be built at more than one height, a separate baseline polyline is created for each height.   Once created, a Roof Baseline Polyline can be edited in a variety of ways, then used as the basis for the roof then next time it is built automatically.   To create a new roof using the directives in your Roof Baseline Polyline(s), check Use Existing Roof Baselines in the Build Roof dialog and click OK. See Roof Panel on page 798.   819 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Roof Baseline Polylines DISPLAYING ROOF BASELINE POLYLINES Roof Baseline Polylines are placed on the “Roofs, Baseline Polylines” layer  by default and use the Text Style assigned to that layer. See Layer Attributes on page 177. Roof directive information displays along each edge of the polyline, including:   l V - vertical (against wall);   l G -gable/shed;   l K - knee wall;   l L - lower (extend slope downward).   If the directive information includes the pitch, the roof plane slopes toward that edge; if it includes the word (vert), it does not.   EDITING ROOF BASELINE POLYLINES A Roof Baseline Polyline’s shape can be edited much like a CAD polyline using its edit handles and edit toolbar buttons. See Editing Closed Polyline-Based Objects on page 228.   Roof Baseline Polylines always form a closed area with straight sides only. They cannot be severed or curved, but additional joints or corners can be added.   In addition to length and direction, each Roof Baseline Polyline edge has roof directives associated with it, much like the roof directives in individual walls. See Roof Directives in Walls on page 378.   AN EXAMPLE In order for it to reflect any changes that you make to a Roof Baseline Polyline, the roof must be rebuilt. For a simple example of Roof Baseline Polyline editing, consider an L-shaped house, with a rectangular roof. The inner part of the ’L’ is a patio that is covered under the same roof.   On the left is the baseline polyline as it was originally produced and the roof plan it creates.   820 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Roof Baseline Specification Dialog To model the roof plan shown on the right 1. Select the Roof Baseline Polyline along its bottom-most edge.   2. Click the Intersect/Join Two Lines edit button. See Reshaping Objects on page 254.   3. Click the left-most edge to remove the two intervening edges.   4. A message box informs you that “The system must delete intervening lines (those on the inside of the L) to join the two selected lines.” Click OK.   5. Open the Build Roof dialog and select the Build Roof Planes and Use Existing Roof Baseline check boxes to model the roof plan shown on the right side of the image above.   Roof Baseline Specification Dialog Like walls, each line of a Roof Baseline Polyline contains roof directives that affect automatic roof generation. Select any edge of a Roof Baseline Polyline click the Open Object edit button open the Roof Baseline Specification dialog. ROOF BASELINE PANEL The settings on the ROOF BASELINE panel control the roof directives associated with the selected edge of the Roof Baseline Polyline. See Selected Edge on page 212. Baseline Height See The Baseline on page 805. Roof Options l The first six options: Hip Wall, Full Gable Wall, Dutch Gable Wall, High Shed/Gable Wall, Knee Wall, and Extend Slope Downward are the same as those in the Wall Specification dialog. See Roof Panel on page 398.   l Select Against Wall if the roof plane rising from this baseline butts against an exterior wall. This is similar to checking High Shed/Gable Wall.   821 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Roof and Ceiling Framing Pitch Options These settings are also found in the Wall Specification dialog. See Roof Panel on page 398.   l Unlike the Pitch value elsewhere, this value is not a Dynamic Default here; however, you can click on the Default icon to load the current default Pitch. See Build Roof Dialog on page 797.   POLYLINE PANEL The POLYLINE panel reports general information about the size and shape of the selected Roof Baseline Polyline. See Polyline Panel on page 818.   SELECTED LINE PANEL This panel is similar to the LINE panel of the Line Specification dialog. See Line Panel on page 304.   LINE STYLE PANEL For information about the settings on this panel, see Line Style Panel on page 305.   FILL STYLE PANEL The settings on the FILL STYLE panel control the appearance of the selected Roof Baseline Polyline in plan view. See Fill Style Panel and Dialogs on page 193.   Roof and Ceiling Framing Roof framing can be both drawn manually and generated automatically. You can also combine the two techniques. As with other kinds of framing, it is often easiest to begin by generating roof framing automatically and then editing it as needed. See Manual vs. Automatic Framing on page 854. Roof Trusses cannot be generated automatically - they must be drawn manually and then replicated. If you intend to use Roof Trusses, make sure the settings in the Build Roof dialog are properly defined before you build the roof. See Roof Trusses on page 895. When using a combination of Roof Trusses and stick framing, begin by drawing the roof planes and ceiling planes. When they are in place, draw and replicate the Roof Trusses.  Finally, automatically generate or manually draw the stick framing and edit it as needed. See Mixing Rafters and Trusses on page 855. Framing for manually drawn Ceiling Planes cannot be drawn manually - it must be automatically generated. The framing for manually drawn Ceiling Planes is generated when roof framing is built and uses the settings in the Build Roof dialog as defaults. Once it has been created, it can be edited. See Ceiling Planes on page 826. Similarly, purlins that run perpendicular to rafters can be automatically generated in the Surface and Ceiling layers for roof and ceiling planes but cannot be drawn manually. See Material Layers Definition Dialogs on page 1040. REBUILDING ROOF FRAMING If roof framing defaults are modified after the roof and roof framing are built, neither will update automatically. In order to update the model you need to rebuild the roof, then rebuild the roof framing. You can also modify the roof framing settings for individual roof planes, and then either build roof framing or click the Build Framing for Selected Object edit button. See Keeping Framing Current on page 884. 822 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Curved Roof Planes Curved Roof Planes Any roof plane can be turned into a curved roof plane in the Roof Plane Specification dialog. See Roof Plane Specification Dialog on page 814.   One way to produce a barrel roof is using a single roof plane that starts out flat (zero pitch) and covers the entire building.   CURVING A SINGLE ROOF PLANE To curve a roof plane 1. Draw a simple four wall structure with a 4 in 12 pitch shed roof.   2. Select the roof plane and click the Open Object edit button to open the Roof Plane Specification dialog.   3. On the GENERAL panel, change the Pitch to 0 in 12.   4. Check Curved Roof and notice that the Angle values below are both at 0.0°.   5. Change the Angle at Eave from 0° to 45° and press the Tab key. Notice that the other values update and that in order to maintain the 0 in 12 pitch, the Angle at Ridge becomes -45°.   823 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Curved Roof Planes CURVING TWO ROOF PLANES You can also create a barrel roof using  two roof planes. A 12 in 12 pitch is used because it allows the curved roof to be nearly vertical at the eave and nearly flat at its peak.   To curve two roof planes 1. Draw a simple four wall structure with a 12 in 12 pitch gable roof.   2. Select one of the roof planes and click the Open Object edit button to open the Roof Plane Specification dialog.   3. Check Curved Roof and notice that the Angle values below are identical.   4. Change the Angle at Ridge from 45° to 1°. This makes the roof plane nearly flat at the ridge. The Angle At Eave updates to maintain the 12 in 12 pitch.   824 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Curved Roof Planes 5. Repeat this process with the other roof plane.   COMPOUND CURVED ROOF PLANES Compound curves can be created using two or more curved roof planes or a combination of straight and curved roof planes.   Before curving roof planes or joining the edges of any curved plane, make sure all flat roof planes are correctly joined. See Join Roof Planes on page 811. To create a compound curved roof 1. Draw a simple four wall structure with a 4 in 12 pitch gable roof.   2. In plan view, select one of the roof planes and pull its ridge edge back so that it is 4 feet from the wall. Do the same to the other roof plane.   3. Select both roof planes and check Curved Roof in the Roof Plane Specification dialog. Set the Angle at Ridge to 33.6901°, which is the same as 8 in 12. Notice that the Angle at Eave is almost flat.   825 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Ceiling Planes 4. Use the Roof Plane tool to draw the two high roof planes. As you create each one, draw its Baseline along to the ridge edge of one of the low roof plane. See To draw a roof plane on page 805.   5. Select the two new roof planes, click the Open Object edit button, and change their Pitch to 33.6901° - or 8 in 12. Viewed in 3D, the planes appear to join together into one.   CURVED ROOF PLANE INTERSECTIONS Curved roof planes can be joined to other roof planes using the Join Roof Planes edit tool. Often, the result is a curved roof valley or hip.   In many instances, a curved roof plane can only be joined to another roof plane if its Angle at Ridge or Radius to Roof Surface setting is changed. See General Panel on page 814.   When that is the case, the Join Curved Roof Plane dialog will open when the Join Roof Planes tool is used.   l Choose Lock the Radius to Roof Surface to maintain the roof plane’s curvature but change its angle at the ridge edge.   l Choose Lock the Angle at Ridge to maintain the roof plane’s angle at its ridge edge but change its curvature.   In order to straighten a curved roof edge, select the edge in question and click the Straighten Curved Edge edit button.   Ceiling Planes Ceiling planes are drawn the same way as roof planes and are edited using the same tools. They are useful for creating custom vaulted ceilings. See Vaulted and Cathedral Ceilings on page 435.   Ceiling planes are drawn using the same default pitch as roof planes, specified in the Build Roof dialog. See Build Roof Dialog on page 797.   826 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Ceiling Planes If you wish, you can specify the desired pitch in the Build Roof dialog before drawing a ceiling plane, or you can change the pitch after it is drawn in the Ceiling Plane Specification dialog. See Ceiling Plane Specification Dialog on page 828.   There are a few things to remember when drawing ceiling planes.   l Ceiling planes should be created over rooms that have Flat Ceiling Over this Room unchecked in the Room Specification dialog. See Structure Panel on page 439.   l The Baseline of a ceiling plane should be drawn along the outer surface of the bearing wall’s Main Layer. This allows the ceiling plane to extend over and be supported by the wall. See The Main Layer on page 385.   l The sloping edge at the side of a ceiling plane should butt to the inside of the wall.   l Ceiling planes act independent of the roof planes above.   l Usually, the pitch of a ceiling plane is lower than the pitch of the corresponding roof plane.   l Ceiling planes can be joined together using the Join Roof Planes edit button. See Join Roof Planes on page 811.   l Select a ceiling plane and click the Open Object edit button to open the Ceiling Plane Specification dialog. See Ceiling Plane Specification Dialog on page 828.   DISPLAYING CEILING PLANES Ceiling planes are drawn on the “Ceiling Planes” layer by default, although you can place a ceiling plane on any layer. See Line Style Panel on page 830.   Manually drawn Ceiling Planes can also display labels when the “Roofs, Labels” layer is on. See Roof Plane Labels on page 807.   EDITING CEILING PLANES Ceiling planes can be edited much like roof planes using their edit handles and edit toolbar buttons. See Editing Roof and Ceiling Planes on page 808.   Ceiling planes can also be edited in their specification dialog. See Roof Plane Specification Dialog on page 814.   As with roof planes, the ceiling planes layer can be locked to prevent them from being selected.   827 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Ceiling Plane Specification Dialog DELETING CEILING PLANES There are several ways to delete ceiling planes. See Deleting Objects on page 284.   Select Build> Roof> Delete Ceiling Planes to delete all ceiling planes in the current plan.   Ceiling planes can also be deleted at once in the Delete Objects dialog. See Delete Objects Dialog on page 285.   Select a ceiling plane or group of ceiling planes, then click the Delete edit button or press the Delete key.   Ceiling Plane Specification Dialog Select a ceiling plane and click the Open Object edit button to open the Ceiling Plane Specification dialog. The Ceiling Plane Specification dialog is similar to the Roof Plane Specification dialog. See Roof Plane Specification Dialog on page 814. The Ceiling Plane Specification dialog has the following panels: GENERAL PANEL There are four values that define the 3D orientation of a ceiling plane: Ridge Height, Height Inside Wall, Height Outside Wall, and Pitch.   Locking any of the Height values defines that value as the pivot point for the selected ceiling plane. Each of these dimensions is measured from the first floor default elevation of 0' - 0".   828 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Ceiling Plane Specification Dialog If you lock the Pitch and change a Height value, the ceiling plane moves vertically, keeping the same slope. It will not pivot.   Changing these values does not affect the 2D representation of the ceiling plane.   Height/Pitch Specify the Height and Pitch of the selected ceiling plane. Heights are measured to the bottom surface of the ceiling plane’s rafters or trusses, at the center point of the ceiling plane’s baseline. See The Baseline on page 805.   l Select the Elevation Reference, which is where the Height values below are measured from.   l Define the Ridge Height, or lock this value to make it the ceiling plane’s pivot point.   l Define the Height Inside Wall, or lock this value to make it the ceiling plane’s pivot point. If the plane is drawn over a wall, this is located at the inside surface of the wall’s Main Layer.   l Define the Height Outside Wall, or lock this value to make it the ceiling plane’s pivot point. Only available when a ceiling plane is drawn over a wall, this is the height of the lower edge of the ceiling rafters, were they not clipped by the wall below.   l Specify the selected ceiling plane’s Pitch, or lock this value to move the plane vertically when a Height value is changed.   l Check Pitch in Degrees to display the Pitch value in degrees  in all dialogs as well as in roof plane labels.  Values between -89° and 89° can be entered. When Pitch in Degrees in unchecked, Pitch is described in terms of rise and run: x inches in 12 or x mm in 1000. See Roof Pitches in Degrees on page 849. Measurements Information about the structure of the selected ceiling plane(s) displays here for reference. l The Structure Thickness is reported here for reference but is specified on the STRUCTURE panel. The default Structure Thickness is the same as that for roof planes and is set in the Build Framing dialog. See Build Framing Dialog on page 860.   l The Vertical Rafter Depth is defined by measuring a plumb line through the ceiling structure. The greater the pitch, the greater the vertical structure depth.   l The Top of Plate value is the top plate height of the bearing wall, and is also the ceiling height of the room.   l Overhang From Wall Inside - Only appearing when a ceiling plane is drawn over a bearing wall, this is the horizontal distance from the Baseline to the inside Main Layer surface of the wall. The Baseline is typically drawn over the outside Main Layer surface, so this value is equal to the wall’s Main Layer thickness.   l Clip End - This is the amount a ceiling rafter’s underside must be clipped at its lower end to rest on the wall top plate, and is zero if the ceiling plane was not drawn over a bearing wall. This value is equal to the ceiling plane’s rise in slope over the distance of the Overhang from Inside Bottom. The Outside Bottom value plus the Clip end value equals the Top of Plate value.   Curved Ceiling Check Curved Ceiling to specify the selected ceiling plane as curved. See Curved Roof Planes on page 823.   l Specify the ceiling plane’s Angle at Eave, Angle at Ridge and Radius to Framing Bottom.   l These three values are interrelated - when one is changed, the other two adjust accordingly. You may find it helpful to first specify the Radius value, then the Angle values.   829 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Gable/Roof Lines A flat ceiling plane with a pitch of 0 has angles of 0 at both the ridge and eave, as well as a radius of 0.   STRUCTURE PANEL The settings on the STRUCTURE panel of the Ceiling Plane Specification dialog are a subset of those found on the ROOF panel of the Build Framing dialog. See Roof Panel on page 869.   POLYLINE PANEL The POLYLINE panel states the length of the ceiling plane’s Perimeter, its Framing Area, and its Projected Area. See Polyline Panel on page 818.   SELECTED LINE PANEL This panel is similar to the LINE panel of the Line Specification dialog. See Line Panel on page 304.   LINE STYLE PANEL For information about the settings on this panel, see Line Style Panel on page 305.   FILL STYLE PANEL The settings on the FILL STYLE panel affect the appearance of the selected ceiling plane in plan view. For information about these settings, see Fill Style Panel and Dialogs on page 193.   MATERIALS PANEL For more information about the settings on this panel, see Materials Panel on page 1055.   LABEL PANEL Ceiling plane labels display when the “Roofs, Labels” layer is turned on and use the Text Style assigned to that layer. The Automatic Label for ceiling planes is blank, but you can specify a custom label. See Roof Plane Labels on page 807.   For information about the settings on this panel, see Label Panel on page 700.   COMPONENTS PANEL The information on the COMPONENTS panel can be used in the materials list. See Components Panel on page 1330.   Gable/Roof Lines The Gable/Roof Line tool can be used to automatically generate a gable above the bearing wall of a hip roof plane. It is best used in situations where roof directives in walls are not possible. For example:   l Where a wall is not present, such as across the front of an alcove;   l Over a Bay, Box, or Bow Window.   See Roof Directives in Walls on page 378.   In addition, the Gable Over Door/Window edit button allows you to add a small Gable/Roof Line over one or more selected doors or windows the next time automatic roof planes are built. 830 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Gable/Roof Lines Gable/Roof Lines display in plan view when the “Roofs, Gable Lines” layer is set to display and can be selected and edited much like regular CAD lines. See Editing Line-Based Objects on page 216.   CREATING A GABLE To create a gable using a Gable/Roof Line 1. Select Build> Roof> Gable/Roof Line , then click and drag to draw a line outside the exterior wall that you want to create a gable over.   2. Position the Gable/Roof Line within 10 feet (2260 mm) of the wall’s Main Layer but not touching it. See The Main Layer on page 385.   l Make sure that the Gable/Roof Line is exactly parallel to the exterior wall.   3. Resize the Gable/Roof Line so that it is the length of the desired gable.   l The length of the Gable/Roof Line determines the gable width at the wall Main Layer, not at the overhang.   l At the larger roof eave, a gable roof is wider than the gable line by twice the overhang distance.   4. You can specify the pitch of the gable roof planes and their overhang in the Gable Line Specification dialog. See Gable Line Specification Dialog on page 833.   5. Select Build> Roof> Build Roof and regenerate the roof. See Build Roof Dialog on page 797.   To use the Gable Over Door/Window tool 1. Select one or more doors or windows.   2. Click the Gable Over Door/Window edit button.   l Gable Over Door/Window is not available for openings placed in Full Gable Walls or for Bay, Box or Bow Windows. See Bay, Box, Bow Windows and Roofs on page 610.   3. In the Gable Line Specification dialog, specify the desired Pitch and Overhang for the gable roof. See Gable Line Specification Dialog on page 833.   4. The next time automatic roof planes are built, gables will be created over each of these doors and windows.   831 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Gable/Roof Lines l Each gable will extend 12” (300 mm) on either side of its door or window.   l If two of these openings are within 30” (750 mm) of each other on the same wall, a single gable will be created.   l If you move or resize the door or window(s), the associated Gable/Roof Line will not update until the roof is built again.   5. There are several ways to remove a Gable Over Door/Window: l Select the door(s) or window(s) and click the Delete Gable Over Opening edit button. l Select the gable line and click the Delete edit button. l All Gable/Roof Lines can be deleted using the Reset to Defaults dialog. See Reset to Defaults on page 91. l The next time the roof is built, the gable or gables will be removed.   COVERING AN ALCOVE A Gable/Roof Line can also be used to maintain a roof plane baseline where there is no wall below. For example, you can use it to extend a roof plane across an alcove, rather than wrap into it.   In order for a Gable/Roof Line to direct the roof to extend over an alcove or other area where no wall is present, it must be aligned with the exterior walls’ Main Layer.   COVERING A BAY A Gable/Roof Line drawn across a bay causes a gable to be built above the bay when roofs are automatically generated.   832 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Gable Line Specification Dialog In order for the gable to be built, at least one end of the Gable/Roof Line must extend past the side walls of the bay.   If the Gable/Roof Line is drawn along the outer edge of the bay’s outer wall’s Main Layer, the resulting gable will extend only to the eave of the larger roof. Draw the Gable/Roof Line beyond the bay’s outer wall to extend out past the larger roof’s eave.   Gable Line Specification Dialog Select a gable line and click the Open Object edit button to open the Gable Line Specification dialog. This dialog also opens whenever the Gable Over Door/Window edit button is clicked. See Gable/Roof Lines on page 830.   GABLE LINE PANEL The settings on this panel affect the structure of the two roof planes associated with the selected Gable/Roof Line.   The defaults for these settings are set in the Build Roof dialog. See Roof Panel on page 798.   833 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Skylights and Roof Holes l Specify the Pitch of the roof planes that form the gable.   l Specify the Overhang of the roof planes that form the gable.   LINE PANEL The settings on the LINE panel are available for a variety of other objects in the program. See Line Panel on page 304.   LINE STYLE PANEL The settings on the LINE STYLE panel are available for a variety of other objects in the program. See Line Style Panel on page 305.   ARROW PANEL The settings on the ARROW panel are available for a variety of other objects in the program. See Arrowheads on page 327.   Skylights and Roof Holes Select Build> Roof> Skylight to insert a flat panel skylight with a frame into a single roof plane, create a hole in the roof and the ceiling below, and also a shaft between the roof and ceiling holes. Select Build> Roof> Roof Hole to create a hole in the roof and the ceiling below as well as a shaft between the two holes. A skylight and roof hole in plan view and Glass House rendering.   A hole can also be created in a selected roof plane using the Create Hole edit tool. This edit tool produces a hole in the roof plane only: no shaft is generated and the ceiling below is unaffected. See Polyline Holes on page 232.   CREATING SKYLIGHTS AND ROOF HOLES To create a Skylight or a Roof Hole, select either tool and then click and drag to draw a rectangular polyline within a single roof plane. With either tool active, you can also click once within a roof plane to place an object measuring 2' x 2', as measured in plan view with the roof pitch not taken into account. To place a skylight in a vaulted ceiling, uncheck Flat Ceiling Over This Room in the Room Specification dialog, draw the Ceiling Planes to produce the vault and edit them as needed, and then draw the skylight. See Structure Panel on page 439. 834 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Skylight/Roof Hole Specification Dialog Note: If a sloped ceiling plane is present under the skylight, a hole in this ceiling plane is automatically produced. This hole is visible, and may be located directly under the roof hole. It can be moved and edited separately. DISPLAYING SKYLIGHTS AND ROOF HOLES Skylights and roof holes are placed on the "Roofs, Openings" layer by default. See Displaying Objects on page 176. Although inserted into roof planes, skylights and roof holes are able to display in plan view when their containing roofs do not. Skylights are also able to display independent of their containing roofs in 3D views. By default, a skylight's flat ceiling hole does not display separately; however, it can be set to do so in plan view. It can then be edited separately, and even deleted entirely. See Skylight/Roof Hole Specification Dialog on page 835.   In plan view, the true size and shape of skylights and roof holes is only represented when they are inserted into a roof plane with a pitch of 0. The steeper the pitch of the roof, the more affected a skylight or roof hole's appearance in plan view may be affected by it. To create a skylight of a particular size, therefore, its size must be set in its specification dialog or using the Edit Skylight Shape tool. See Edit Skylight Shape on page 835, below. Both skylights and roof holes can display labels in plan and cross section/elevation views when the "Roofs, Labels" layer is turned on. Automatic skylight and roof hole labels report the object's size using the same format that window labels use. See Window Labels on page 587. EDITING SKYLIGHTS AND ROOF HOLES Skylights can be selected individually or in groups and moved using their edit handle, and edited using the edit toolbar buttons and the Skylight/Roof Hole Specification dialog. See Skylight/Roof Hole Specification Dialog on page 835. Skylights must always be contained by a single roof plane. If the roof plane is deleted, any skylights or holes it contains are also deleted. EDIT SKYLIGHT SHAPE The Edit Skylight Shape edit tool lets you make changes to a selected skylight's actual shape. Not available when skylights are group-selected. When you click this edit button, a Skylight Detail Window opens, showing the shape of the skylight's hole represented by a closed CAD polyline. This polyline can be edited to produce the desired shape, or it can be deleted and replaced with a new closed polyline created using a selection of CAD drawing tools. Only one CAD object can be present in a Skylight Detail Window, and only a closed polyline shape can be saved as a Skylight Detail. When you close this view window, the program will give you an opportunity to save your changes and apply them to the selected skylight. You can also select Tools> Active View> Save Active View . See Editing Closed Polyline-Based Objects on page 228 and Special CAD Details on page 337. Skylight/Roof Hole Specification Dialog Select a skylight or a roof hole and click the Open Object edit button to open the Skylight/Roof Hole Specification dialogs. See Skylights and Roof Holes on page 834.   835 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Skylight/Roof Hole Specification Dialog GENERAL PANEL Skylight Not available when a roof hole is selected.   l Select a Shape from the drop-down list: "Circle", "Ellipse", "Oval", or "Rectangle". If the Skylight's shape has been edited using the Edit Skylight Shape edit tool, "Custom" will be the selected Shape. See Edit Skylight Shape on page 835. l Specify the Width and Height of the selected Ellipse, Oval, or Rectangle-shaped skylight. These values describe the skylight’s projected size, as measured in plan view: roof pitch is not taken into account. l When the selected skylight is a Circle, specify its Diameter. l Select which part of the skylight to Lock when it is resized: its Top, Center, or Bottom. Frame Not available when a roof hole is selected.   l Check Display in Plan View to draw the selected skylight's frame in plan view. l Specify the Width and Height of the skylight's Frame. Inside Hole Rim Specify how the hole for the skylight is framed as well as the shape of the skylight well where it passes through the roof plane.   l Select Square Sides to cut the framing for the skylight square to the pitch of the roof. l Select Plumb Sides to produce framing for the skylight that is plumb-cut. l Select Plumb/Square to produce framing with the bottom edge plumb-cut and the top edge, square-cut. 836 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Skylight/Roof Hole Specification Dialog Ceiling Hole Control how the hole in a room’s Flat Ceiling is created below the skylight or roof hole. These options do not affect the hole in a manually drawn Ceiling Plane. See Structure Panel on page 439.   l Select Automatically generate ceiling hole to automatically generate and maintain the skylight’s ceiling hole.   Note: The hole produced in a sloping ceiling plane by a skylight must be always manually maintained if the skylight is moved or resized. l Select Manually edit ceiling hole polyline to display the editable ceiling hole polyline in plan view in addition to the polyline in the roof plane.   l Select Do not generate ceiling hole to generate a hole through the roof plane but not the flat ceiling.   l Uncheck Generate shaft to ceiling hole to generate a roof hole and a hole in the flat ceiling, but no vertical surfaces connecting them. When checked, a shaft between the two is produced. Not available if Do not generate ceiling hole is selected, above.   Preview A preview of the selected skylight displays here. Not available when a roof hole is selected. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22.   POLYLINE PANEL The POLYLINE panel states the roof hole/skylight’s Perimeter, its Framing Area, and its Projected Area. See Polyline Panel on page 818. SELECTED LINE PANEL This panel is similar to the LINE panel of the Line Specification dialog. See Line Panel on page 304.   LINE STYLE PANEL For information about the settings on this panel, see Line Style Panel on page 305. FILL STYLE PANEL The settings on the FILL STYLE panel control the appearance of the selected roof hole or skylight in plan view. See Fill Style Panel and Dialogs on page 193. MATERIALS PANEL For information about the MATERIALS panel, see Materials Panel on page 1055. LABEL PANEL Roof hole and skylight labels display when the “Roofs, Labels” layer is turned on and use the Text Style assigned to that layer. The Automatic Label for these objects is blank, but you can specify a custom label. See Roof Plane Labels on page 807. For information about the settings on this panel, see Label Panel on page 700.   837 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Dormers and Crickets COMPONENTS PANEL The information on the COMPONENTS panel can be used in the materials list. See Components Panel on page 1330.   OBJECT INFORMATION PANEL The information entered on the OBJECT INFORMATION panel can be used in schedules and the materials list. See Object Information Panel on page 1331.   SCHEDULE PANEL The information on the SCHEDULE panel determine which schedule categories the selected skylight is included in. See Schedule Panel on page 704.   Dormers and Crickets Dormers can be drawn manually or placed automatically using the Auto Dormer tools. Automatic Dormers can be placed only under certain conditions:   l Automatic Dormers can only be placed entirely within a single roof plane. They cannot extend past the eaves or ridge of this roof plane.   l Automatic Dormer side walls cannot be positioned above other walls in the plan.   If you click within a roof plane to place an automatic dormer, but click too close to an eave or the ridge, a dormer will not be created; however, its outline will. Move this outline box to a location that meets the dormer’s requirements and it will be created.   Automatic dormers reside by default on their own layer, “Roofs, Dormers” by default. The display of automatic dormer components is not controlled by this layer; however, you can lock this layer to prevent unintended editing. See Layer Display Options Dialog on page 179.   The initial width, height, roof style and other settings of Auto Dormers are set in the Dormer Defaults dialog. See Dormer Defaults on page 793.   AUTO FLOATING DORMER Select Build> Roof> Auto Floating Dormer and click the roof plane where you would like to place the center of the dormer's front wall. The bottom edges of all floating dormer walls are cut off by the underlying roof plane.  To produce such a dormer manually, check Roof Cuts Wall at Bottom for the dormer walls on the ROOF panel of the Wall Specification dialog. Usually, no room is defined by the walls of this type of dormer.   The images below show both the outside and inside of a typical  floating dormer.   838 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Dormers and Crickets A floating  dormer can be placed in plan view on the same floor that its underlying roof plane displays on, or it can be placed on the floor above. Normally, it does not matter what floor the dormer is on; but in some cases, it may need to be on the floor above so that the dormer walls do not interfere with walls or railings in the room below.   Regardless of which floor it is placed on, a dormer must always fit within a single roof plane. When placing a dormer on the floor above, you may find it helpful to turn on the Reference Display . See The Reference Display on page 738.   You may also find it helpful to display the underlying roof plane on the floor above using the Roof Plane Specification dialog. See Roof Plane Specification Dialog on page 814.   If the dormer is placed on the same floor as the underlying roof plane and the room below, and if the room has a flat ceiling, then a hole will be produced in the ceiling under the dormer.   AUTO DORMER Select Build> Roof> Auto Dormer and click on a roof plane where you want the center of the dormer's front wall to be.   The walls of an auto dormer go to the floor and meet a knee wall on either side on the back of the dormer. This knee wall must run parallel to the underlying roof plane’s Baseline.   l If you are creating a (non-floating) auto dormer, a knee wall must already exist. The dormer side walls run back to the knee wall and the knee wall is broken where the dormer walls meet it.   l The knee wall does not have to be designated as such in the Wall Specification dialog unless you are generating an automatic roof. See Knee Walls on page 380.   l A non-floating dormer must always be created on the same floor as the knee walls.   MANUALLY DRAWN DORMERS Once you are familiar with Chief Architect’s roof tools, drawing dormers manually can be quite simple. There are several different ways to draw dormers; some methods work better in certain applications.   839 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Auto Dormers A variety of resources with information about drawing dormers manually is available at chiefarchitect.com.   There are a few things to keep in mind.   l Walls extend upward until they meet an overlying roof plane.   l A wall can also be cut by underlying roof planes if Roof Cuts Wall at Bottom is checked in the Wall Specification dialog. For this to work properly, the edge of the roof plane must extend completely through the width of the wall. See Clerestory and Dormer Walls on page 379.   l Polylines can be converted into a Hole in Roof/Ceiling that allows walls to extend above or below the roof line. See Convert Polyline on page 262.   CRICKETS When a room's ceiling height is such that it extends above the roof of surrounding rooms, the automatic roof generator will create a cricket against any walls that face up-slope of an adjacent roof. You can also manually draw a cricket using the Roof Plane tool and the Place Roof Plane Intersection Point edit tool. See Connecting Roof and Ceiling Planes on page 811. Editing Auto Dormers Auto Dormers are a collection of objects that behave as one. When a dormer is selected, it can be edited using its edit handles, edit tools, and specification dialog. See Dormer Specification Dialog on page 841.   If you click the Explode Dormer edit button, the dormer’s individual components can be edited.   USING THE EDIT HANDLES When selected, an auto dormer displays three edit handles. The Move handle displays over the front wall and allows you to relocate the dormer. Two resize handles display on the side walls and allow you to change the width of the dormer.   There are some things to keep in mind when editing auto dormers and auto floating dormers using the mouse.   l Dormers move at 90° angles unless the Ctrl key is pressed before moving them.   l The dormer must be contained within one underlying roof plane.   l Auto dormers cannot be moved beyond the required knee wall.   EDITING THE WINDOW Dormer windows can be selected, edited, deleted and replaced just like other windows. See Editing Windows on page 588. You can place several windows in the front wall.   Unless the dormer's window has been edited or changed in the Window Specification dialog, when the dormer width is changed, its width changes automatically to fill the front dormer wall. If the window has been edited, its width stays fixed. If a change to the dormer makes its front wall too short to hold the window, the window reverts to auto width.   840 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Dormer Specification Dialog EXPLODE AUTO DORMER Click the Explode Auto Dormer edit button to explode a selected auto dormer into its component parts. The dormer walls, roof planes, window, and hole in the roof/ceiling can be edited individually. The program treats roof planes over an exploded auto dormer as though they were manually drawn, allowing you to protect them from being rebuilt in the Build Roof dialog. See Roof Panel on page 798.   Once exploded, it is not possible to block the components into a Dormer object again.   Dormer Specification Dialog Select a dormer or dormers and click the Open Object edit button to open the Dormer Specification dialog.   The settings in this dialog are also found in the Dormer Defaults dialog, where they apply to all dormers as they are created rather than to a selected dormer.   ROOF PANEL 841 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Dormer Specification Dialog Roof Style l Choose a roof Type from the drop-down list.  You can choose from Hip, Gable, Shed, Gambrel, Mansard, Barrel, Curved Eave, Hip Curved Eave or Eyebrow.   Pitch l Specify the Pitch of the dormer roof planes. The default dormer pitch applies to all dormer roof types except Shed, which has a default 3 in 12 pitch. For Gambrel and Mansard types, this applies to the lowest, or eave, roof planes.   l Check Pitch in Degrees to display the Pitch value in degrees in all dialogs as well as in roof plane labels; uncheck it to display the pitch in terms of rise and run. See Roof Pitches in Degrees on page 849.   l The Second Pitch specifies the upper roof of a Gambrel, Mansard, curved eave, and hip curved eave.   l When a Second Pitch is used, specify the In from Eave distance, measured from the lower roof plane eave to where the upper roof plane starts.   Roof Overhang Specify the depth of the selected dormer’s Eave and Gable Overhangs.   Framing l Select the dormer roof's Framing Method: either Trusses or Rafters. l Specify the Fascia Depth for gable fascia and the Eave Fascia Depth.   l Specify the Rafter Depth.   l The Vertical Rafter Depth is reported here for reference.   l Specify whether to Include Boxed Eaves, Gutters, Frieze, and/or Shadow Boards. l Select either Plumb or Square Rafter Cut.   Auto Roof Return See Roof Returns on page 844.   l Check Auto Roof Returns to generate roof returns on the selected dormer. Roof Returns can be only specified for Gable dormers. l Specify the horizontal Length of the roof return in inches (mm).   l Enter a value in inches (mm) to Extend the roof returns past the dormer overhang.   842 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Dormer Specification Dialog l Specify a Gable, Hip, or Full roof return.   l Specify a Sloping or Flat roof return.   l Check the boxes to Include Shadow Boards, Ridge Caps, and/or Frieze molding on the roof returns.   WALLS PANEL Walls l Select a Wall Type for the dormer walls from the drop-down list. l Click the Define button to open the Wall Type Definitions dialog to create or modify existing wall types. See Wall Type Definitions Dialog on page 387. l Specify the Height of the dormer, as measured from where the top of the underlying roof plane meets the dormer front wall exterior to the top plate of the dormer roof’s bearing walls. This top height is called the dormer ceiling height, even if the ceiling in the dormer is not flat. The top dormer window casing is usually close to this height. o Check Set to Existing Ceiling to assign the ceiling height of the room behind the dormer to the dormer. Not available in the Dormer Defaults dialog.   l Height to Reach Existing shows the difference between the dormer height where the inside of the wall meets the underside of the roof and the ceiling of the room behind it.   l Specify the dormer’s Width, measured from the outside surfaces of the dormer side walls. l The Dormer Room options are only available for Floating Dormers and are intended for use with dormers on an upper floor level: o Select Create Shaft to Room Below to create an opening in the floor platform to the floor below, and enclose the inside of the dormer with walls that form a room. o Select Form Room Inside Dormer to create an opening in the floor platform below that is defined as a room using the dormer walls plus an invisible Room Divider.   o Select Neither Room nor Shaft to make no changes to the structure below the dormer.   843 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Roof Returns and Other Details l Dormer windows can appear too narrow on the outside due to the space required for interior casing to clear the inside surfaces of the side walls. Two additional settings are available in the Dormer Defaults dialog to help address this.   o When Set Inside Window Trim Width is checked, you can set the Inside Window Trim value, which is the default interior casing width for dormer windows. When unchecked, dormer windows use the default interior casing width set in the Window Defaults dialog.   Windows l When Auto Resize Windows is checked, the selected dormer's window will resize when the dormer's height or width are adjusted. Uncheck this box to keep the window teh same when the dormer is resized. LINE STYLE PANEL For information about the settings on this panel, see Line Style Panel on page 305.   Roof Returns and Other Details Chief Architect offers a selection of tools to add architectural details to your roof design. ROOF RETURNS A roof return is a small decorative roof plane that connects to the low side of a gable roof overhang and extends below the upper triangular portion of the gable wall. Three styles of roof returns that can be produced automatically.   The first two styles are called Gable and Hip returns since the return ends in a gable or hip.   Hip and Gable Roof Returns The third is called a Full return because it extends under the entire gable to connect both sides and is sometimes referred to as a water table. In order for a Full return to be created, the roof planes on each side must have the same  Fascia Top Height.    844 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Roof Returns and Other Details Full Roof Return It is not difficult to manually draw roof returns using small roof planes, but it is quicker to produce them automatically. Roof returns are generated automatically on a wall by wall basis using settings in the Wall Specification dialog. See Roof Panel on page 398.   These roof return settings are also found in the Dormer Specification dialog for gable roof dormers and function similarly. See Roof Panel on page 841.   The pitch of an automatically generated roof return is the same as that of the roof plane above it. Its structure is the same as that of the subfascia and eaves of the roof plane above. See Structure Panel on page 817. BOXED EAVES Boxed eaves have a flat, horizontal soffit surface instead of one that follows the underside of the rafter ends. Boxed eaves can either extend out to the gable fascia or build flush with the adjacent exterior wall.   Boxed Eave at a gable end You can specify Boxed Eaves for all roof planes in the Build Roof dialog and for individual roof planes in the Roof Plane Specification dialog. See Options Panel on page 801.   The flush eave end uses the wall’s surface material by default; however, you can specify a different material if you wish. See Materials Panel on page 804.   FASCIA AND SHADOW BOARDS Fascia  and shadow boards can be added to both automatic and manually drawn roof planes. They can be specified in the Build Roof dialog and added to roof planes as they are created, and they can be added to or removed from individual roof planes and roof plane edges in the Roof Plane Specification dialog. l Fascia and eave fascia can be specified in the Build Framing and Build Roof dialogs. See Roof Panel on page 869.   l One or more shadow boards profiles can be specified in the Build Roof dialog. See Shadow Boards Panel on page 804.   845 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Roof Returns and Other Details l Fascia and shadow boards are generated whenever the roof is built or rebuilt. l Fascia and shadow board materials can be specified separately. See Materials Panel on page 804. Fascia and shadow boards display in 3D views and are included in the materials list. Fascia The material specified for fascia in the Build Roof dialog displays as part of the roof plane rather than as a separate object. It displays in 3D views but not plan view.   In addition, sub fascia boards are created when roof framing is generated and are placed on the “Framing, Roof Rafters” layer. The fascia material is not applied to these framing members, however.   The width and depth of fascia and eave fascia can be specified in the Build Framing dialog. See Roof Panel on page 869.   Shadow Boards Shadow boards are added to both automatic and manually drawn roof planes when one more shadow board profile is specified in the Build Roof dialog. They can also be added to, removed from, or customized for individual roof planes in the Roof Plane Specification dialog. See Shadow Boards Panel on page 804.   Automatically generated shadow boards are 3D Molding Polylines that follow the eaves of the roof. You can specify whether each profile is applied along eaves, along gable eaves, or along both. You can also use the same shadow board profile multiple times and adjust the offsets for each to suit different conditions. See Molding Polylines on page 935.   Shadow boards are placed on the “Roofs, Trim” layer.  By default, this layer is locked, turned on in 3D views but not in plan view.   If a shadow board polyline is manually edited, it will no longer be considered an Automatic shadow board, and will not be deleted and replaced when the roof is rebuilt.   You can modify individual edges of an Automatic shadow board polyline indirectly by changing settings on the SHADOW BOARDS panel of the Roof Plane Specification dialog.   Note: In order to generate shadow boards, you must also specify that fascia be used. SOFFITS Soffits are the layer of material that covers the rafter ends on the underside of roof eaves and can be constructed in  several ways: l By default, soffits follow the underside of the rafter ends and butt against the inside edge of the fascia. The rafter end depth and thus the soffit height is controlled by the Gable Sub Fascia Depth. See Roof Panel on page 869.   l Check Flat Under Eave Sub Fascia for soffits that follow the underside of the rafter ends until they reach the eave subfascia, at which point they flatten out until the butt against the inside of the fascia.   l Boxed eaves can be specified in the Build Roof and Roof Plane Specification dialogs. Boxed eave height is controlled by the Eave Sub Fascia Depth. See Options Panel on page 801.   GUTTERS Gutters are added to non-sloping eaves on both automatic and manually drawn roof planes when a profile is specified in the Build Roof dialog. They can also be added to, removed from, or customized for individual roof planes and roof plane edges in the Roof Plane Specification dialog. If two roof planes are assigned different gutter profile or materials, however, the gutters will not merge. See Gutter Panel on page 803.   846 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Roof Returns and Other Details Automatically generated gutters are basically Molding Polylines that follow the eaves of the roof but are not created on sloped gable eaves.   l Gutters are regenerated or removed whenever the roof is built. See Roof Panel on page 798.   l A gutter profile can be specified. See Gutter Panel on page 803.   l The gutter material can be specified. See Materials Panel on page 804.   Gutters are placed on the “Roofs, Gutters” layer. By default, this layer is turned on in 3D views but not in plan view, is included in the materials list, and is locked. See Layer Display Options Dialog on page 179.   If a gutter polyline is manually edited, it will no longer be considered an Automatic gutter, and will not be deleted and replaced when the roof is rebuilt.   You can modify individual edges of an Automatic gutter polyline indirectly by changing settings on the GUTTER panel of the Roof Plane Specification dialog.   FRIEZE MOLDING Frieze moldings are added to both automatic and manually drawn roof planes when one or more frieze profile is specified in the Build Roof dialog. They can also be added to, removed from, or customized for individual roof planes in the Roof Plane Specification dialog.   Automatically generated frieze boards are placed along all exterior walls directly under the eaves. Frieze does not generate along railings; however, if an attic wall is built above a railing, it can generate along that wall.   l Frieze moldings are generated whenever the roof is rebuilt.   l You can specify whether each profile is applied under eaves, under gable eaves, or under both. You can also use the same profile multiple times and adjust the offsets for each to suit different conditions. See Frieze Panel on page 804.   l The materials used for frieze moldings can be specified. See Materials Panel on page 804.   Automatically generated frieze moldings are 3D Molding Polylines placed on the “Roofs, Trim” layer. By default, this layer is turned on in 3D views but not in plan view, and is locked. See Locking Layers on page 178.   If a frieze molding polyline is manually edited, it will no longer be considered an Automatic frieze, and will not be deleted and replaced when the roof is rebuilt. See Frieze Moldings on page 943.   RAFTER TAILS Rafter tails are rafter ends that overhang the bearing walls and are located under the eaves. They can be the full rafter depth or trimmed to the depth of the soffits. Rafter tails can also be partially enclosed by soffits, and sometimes feature decorative profiles.   To produce a particular type of rafter tail, set the correct defaults on the STRUCTURE panel of the Build Roof dialog before you build both the roof planes and the roof framing. See Roof Panel on page 869.   To create full-depth exposed rafter ends l Uncheck Soffits.   l Uncheck Eave Sub Fascia.   l Uncheck Eave Fascia.   To create hidden, trimmed rafter ends l Check Trim Framing To Soffits.   l Check Soffits.   847 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Roof Returns and Other Details To create full-depth, partially-exposed rafter ends l Uncheck Trim Framing To Soffits.   l Check Soffits.   l Specify the desired Gable Sub Fascia Depth, which controls the soffit height.   Soffit height is determined by the Gable Sub Fascia depth, which is set in the Build Roof dialog. See Structure Panel on page 803. To add a decorative profile to rafter tails l Set soffits and fascia as needed to produce the desired rafter tail exposure, as described above.   l Select a rafter tail profile on the RAFTER TAILS panel of the Build Roof dialog. See Rafter Tails Panel on page 803.   l Decorative rafter tail profiles are molding profiles, which means that you can create your own custom profiles if you want. See Molding Profiles on page 932.   RIDGE CAPS Ridge caps are roofing components that straddle the tops of roof ridges and hips. To generate ridge caps in Chief Architect Premier, specify one or more ridge cap profiles in the Build Roof dialog, and then build or rebuild the roof. Ridge caps will be produced on both automatically generated and manually drawn roof planes. See Ridge Caps Panel on page 803.   Like shadow boards and frieze molding, automatically generated ridge caps are 3D Molding Polylines placed along the ridges and hips. Ridge Caps are created on the “Roofs, Ridge Caps” layer. By default, this layer is locked, displays in 3D views but does not display in plan view.   Ridge caps are essentially molding profiles, so you can apply the profile of your choice on the RIDGE CAPS panel. In most cases, a simple rectangular profile like the Default Ridge Cap works well: specify the desired Width and Height and make sure Bend to Roof Pitch is checked, all on the Ridge caps panel. You can also use a custom ridge cap profile if you wish. See Molding Profiles on page 932.   Custom Symbol Moldings can also be used as ridge caps, but bear in mind that symbols cannot adjust their shape to match different pitches. As a result, different symbols will be required for different roof pitches. See Symbol Moldings on page 934.   If a ridge cap 3D Molding Polyline is manually edited, it will no longer be considered an Automatic ridge cap, and will not be deleted and replaced if the roof is rebuilt.   You can modify individual edges of an Automatic ridge cap 3D Molding Polyline indirectly by changing settings on the RIDGE CAPS panel of the Roof Plane Specification dialog. Bear in mind, though, that your changes may only be reflected in the model if you make the same changes to adjacent roof planes, as well.   848 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Roof Pitches in Degrees Roof Pitches in Degrees 849

Framing Chapter 24 In Chief Architect Premier, framing can be produced both manually and automatically, calculated in the Materials List, as well as listed in a schedule. Manual framing members are drawn by clicking and dragging, like drawing a CAD line. Automatic framing for the major components of a 3D model (floors, ceilings, walls and roofs) can be generated using the Build Framing dialog. Both manually drawn and automatically generated framing members can be selected and edited in 2D and 3D views.   Trusses are covered in their own chapter, Trusses on page 894. TOPICS Framing Defaults 851 Manual vs. Automatic Framing 854 Framing Tools 856 Build Framing Dialog 860 Framing Reference Markers 875 Joist Direction Lines 876 Joist Direction Specification Dialog 877 Bearing Lines 878 Displaying Framing 879 Editing Framing 882 Keeping Framing Current 884 Build Framing for Selected Object(s) 885 Framing and the Materials List 886 Framing Specification Dialog 887 Export to EasyFrame 890 850 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Framing Defaults Framing Defaults Select Edit> Default Settings to open the Default Settings dialog. Select Framing from the list, then click the Edit button to open the Framing Defaults dialog. Both automatic and manually-drawn framing are generated according to the settings in the Framing Defaults dialog. This dialog is nearly identical to the Build Framing dialog in both appearance and function. The only difference is that the Build Framing dialog has check boxes that allow you to generate different types of framing automatically. See Build Framing Dialog on page 860. Any changes made in the Framing Defaults or Build Framing dialog will affect subsequently drawn or generated framing, but not framing already present in the plan. The settings in the Framing Defaults dialog directly affect a variety of important structural elements in each plan which determine floor, ceiling and roof heights; so it is best to set your Framing Defaults before building your model. See Drawing a Plan on page 27. FLOOR AND CEILING FRAMING Floor and ceiling platform depths contribute to the overall height of a structure, so their default values should be set as early as possible. See Floor Panels on page 860. If you plan to draw floor trusses, also see Trusses Panel on page 872. The default floor and ceiling platform settings for a given floor can be overridden on a room by room basis in the Room Specification dialog, or for individual platforms using Joist Direction lines. See Structure Panel on page 439. By default, automatically-generated floor and ceiling joists run in the direction that results in the shortest span between exterior walls, bearing walls, and/or beams. Joist Direction lines also allow you to define the direction that joists in a particular floor or ceiling platform. See Joist Direction Lines on page 876. Ceiling joists do not automatically generate in areas where the bottom chords of roof trusses are already present. See Roof Trusses on page 895. In standard light frame construction, floor and ceiling platforms are built to pass over or bear on the wall framing; however, this is not always desired. You can specify that joists bear on a selected wall, that platforms hang on it, or that a wall build through platforms in the Wall Specification dialog. See Structure Panel on page 395. FRAMING GROUPS When floor or ceiling framing is automatically generated, the program tries to create a single platform that spans as much of the structure as possible. If you need separate floor and ceiling framing in an area of your plan, as you might for an addition to an existing structure, assign the rooms in that area to a non-default Framing Group.   The program treats different Framing Groups as though they were built at different times. Wall framing builds through and divides the floor framing in different Groups, while ceiling framing butts against a ledger attached to the ceiling framing of an adjacent Group.   Framing Groups are assigned using numbers. The Default Framing Group is 1, which is built “first”. Each subsequently numbered group is framed as though it were added to the structure later.   851 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Framing Defaults Although Framing Groups affect how both floor and ceiling framing is generated, the Build Framing for Selected Object (s) edit tool only builds floor framing. See Build Framing for Selected Object(s) on page 885.   WALL FRAMING Like other types of framing, wall framing is generated based on settings in the Framing Defaults dialog. See Wall Panel on page 863 and Openings Panel on page 865. In addition, wall framing is dependent on settings from other sources: l Framing Type, Spacing, Width, Plate Count and size, and more can be specified for each Wall Type in the Wall Type Definitions dialog. See Wall Type Definitions Dialog on page 387. l Horizontal wall framing, or Girts, can be specified for each Wall Type, as well. l The structural specifications for individual walls can be set in the Wall Specification dialog. See Structure Panel on page 395. l Stud layout can be pulled from a Framing Reference Marker or from the Start or End of each wall. See Framing Reference Markers on page 875. DOOR AND WINDOW FRAMING The rough openings, trimmers, and sills for doors and windows and legacy fireplace objects are set in their respective defaults and specification dialogs. See: l Door Specification Dialog on page 558 l Window Specification Dialog on page 591 l Fireplace Specification Dialog on page 726 Note: Door and window bucks do not automatically generate in concrete or block walls. HEADERS The size, position, and composition of door and window headers can also be set in their respective defaults and specification dialogs. In addition, a range of header depths for openings of different widths can be specified in the Framing Defaults dialog. Check Calculate from Width in the Door and Window Defaults dialogs to assign header depths to openings based on their width. See Openings Panel on page 865. Like other framing members, headers are assigned a Structure Type such as “Lumber” or “LVL”. By default, the program will try to ensure that an opening’s Header Type agrees with the framing material used by the wall it is inserted into. To do this, it compares the Header Type to the wall’s framing material: l Wood framing types: Lumber, I-Joist, Glulam, Engineered Lumber, LVL, PSL, and VSL. l Steel framing types: Steel I, Steel Box, C Channel, and U Channel. If the Header Type agrees with the wall framing material, it will be unchanged; however, if it does not agree it will change to either “Lumber” in a wood-framed wall or “C-Channel” in a steel-framed wall. To prevent this from occurring and use the specified Header Type regardless of wall material, uncheck Automatic. See Structure Types on page 886. Box headers with top and bottom rails can also be specified. See Framing Panel on page 573. 852 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Framing Defaults SILL PLATES Sill plates are created when floor framing is generated. They are created over all exterior walls that have either Concrete or Brick material type as their Main Layer material and support a framed floor platform directly above. See The Main Layer on page 385 and Materials and the Materials List on page 1063. Sill plate size and number can be specified in the Wall Specification dialog of the supporting masonry wall. Only the bottommost plate that comes into contact with masonry is specified as Treated. See Foundation Panel on page 400. These sill plates are placed on the “Framing, Sill Plates” layer by default. See Displaying Framing on page 879. When a monolithic slab foundation is created, the bottom plates of framed walls built on the slab are specified as Treated and are placed on the “Framing, Wall” layer by default. As with sill plates, multiple bottom plates can be specified in the Framing Defaults dialog, but only the bottommost plate is specified as Treated. See Wall Panel on page 863. POSTS AND BEAMS The Post, Floor Beam, and Roof Beam Defaults dialogs can be accessed via the BEAMS and POSTS panels of the Framing Defaults dialog. These defaults can also be accessed by double-clicking the respective drawing tools. In addition, the Deck Post and Deck Beam Defaults dialogs are similar, and can be accessed from the Deck Room Defaults dialog. See Room Type Defaults on page 414. ROOF FRAMING Roofs can be framed using either rafters or trusses. You can select the Framing Method that you want in the Build Roof dialog. See Build Roof Dialog on page 797. Settings on the ROOF and TRUSSES panels of the Framing Defaults dialog determine the structure of roof planes and manually drawn ceiling planes as well as how they rest on bearing walls, so it is important that their default values be set before building the roof. See Roof Panel on page 869 and Trusses Panel on page 872. You can add non-structural purlins to the Roof Surface Definition and/or Roof Ceiling Finish Definition. Structural purlins can be added to the Roof Structure Definition. See Material Layers Definition Dialogs on page 1040. If changes are made to these defaults that you need to apply to the entire roof plan, you will need to either manually edit or rebuild the entire roof - not just the roof framing. See Roofs on page 791. DECK FRAMING Deck rooms have special automatically generated framing and are not affected by the settings in the Framing Defaults or Build Framing dialogs. Deck framing defaults are set in the Deck Room Defaults dialog. See Decks on page 425. FRAMING TYPES AND ROLES By default, most framing is set to use “Lumber” as the material type. You can select from a number of other types, however, such as I-Joist and Glulam. See Structure Types on page 886. Each framing member also has a Role, which refers to its purpose and position in the structure. Examples include Floor Joist, Header, Plate, and Rafter. A framing member's initial Role is determined when it is created: either automatically generated or drawn manually. Once created, you can specify a different Role for any framing member in its specification dialog. See General Panel on page 887. 853 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Manual vs. Automatic Framing Manual vs. Automatic Framing Platform, roof, and wall framing can be produced manually or automatically. In most cases, automatically-generated framing is preferable because it is faster than manually placing, replicating and editing numerous individual framing members. In many plans, though, framing is drawn using both approaches. For example, a combination of automatically generated rafters and manually drawn trusses can be used to model a roof framing plan. See Mixing Trusses with Stick Framing on page 902. Regardless of how it is created, individual framing members can be selected and edited. See Editing Framing on page 882. l Automatic Framing on page 854 l Manual Framing on page 854 l Framing with Beams on page 856 l Mixing Manual and Automatic Framing on page 855 l Mixing Rafters and Trusses on page 855 AUTOMATIC FRAMING Automatic framing of floor and ceiling platforms, walls and roofs can be generated using the Build Framing dialog. The settings in this dialog control the size, spacing, and type of framing drawn in a plan, and related structural information for the major components of the 3D model. See Build Framing Dialog on page 860. Automatic framing of a particular structural component is not generated until the Build Framing dialog is opened to the appropriate panel and one of two check boxes selected:   l Select the Build check box to build automatic framing once. For example, check Build Wall Framing on the WALL panel, then click OK to build wall framing once based on the current state of the model. l Select the Automatic check box, then click OK to build automatic framing every time a change is made to that structural component in the plan. For example, check Automatic Wall Framing on the WALL panel to rebuild all wall framing any time a wall is affected by changes to the model. Note: When Automatic framing of a particular type is enabled, framing of that type cannot be manually edited or deleted. In order for framing to generate in a particular layer of a structural component such as a wall assembly or floor platform, that layer must have the Framing specification. See Wall Type Definitions Dialog on page 387 and Material Layers Definition Dialogs on page 1040.   By default, joists automatically generate in the direction that results in the shortest span; however, you can produce different results using interior walls specified as Bearing Walls, Bearing Lines , Floor/Ceiling Beams , and/or Joist Direction lines. See Bearing Lines on page 878 and Joist Direction Lines on page 876. MANUAL FRAMING Framing objects can also be drawn manually. With the exception of Posts, framing objects are drawn by clicking and dragging in a straight line, the way other line-based objects are. See Line Tools on page 300. The manual framing tools are organized into families: general framing, floor and ceiling framing and roof framing. The family that a drawing tool belongs to determines where it can be used: 854 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Manual vs. Automatic Framing l Roof framing objects can only be drawn within the area of one or more roof planes. l Floor and ceiling framing objects can only be drawn within one or more floor or ceiling platforms. l General Framing objects and Posts can be drawn anywhere in a model. l General Framing objects can also be drawn in CAD Details. See CAD Details on page 337. l Wall Bridging can only be drawn in a Wall Detail window. See In Wall Detail Views on page 880.   REBUILDING AND RETAINING FRAMING It is important to remember that framing does not update automatically when changes are made to the model unless it is set to do so. You can direct the program to rebuild the automatic framing of floors/ceilings, walls and/or roofs every time a change to the model affects one of these components. To do this, select the Automatic check box on  the FLOOR, WALL, and/or ROOF panels of the Build Framing dialog. See Build Framing Dialog on page 860. You can also rebuild the framing of a single wall, roof plane, or ceiling plane by clicking the Build Framing for Selected Object edit button. The floor framing for a selected room can also be rebuilt using this tool.   To learn more, see Keeping Framing Current on page 884. When automatic framing associated with a particular panel in the Build Framing dialog is generated, any existing automatically produced framing of that type is deleted and replaced. You can prevent this from happening to a selected wall, room, or roof or ceiling plane by checking Retain Wall Framing or Retain Roof Framing in the object’s specification dialog. Although their framing is not generated with other ceiling framing, Tray Ceiling Polylines also have a Retain Framing check box in their specification dialog. MIXING MANUAL AND AUTOMATIC FRAMING Floor and ceiling platforms can be framed with a combination of manually-drawn and automatically generated joists. Similarly, roof planes can be framed with a combination of manually drawn and automatic rafters. If you plan to use this approach, bear in mind that automatically generated joists and rafters will not be created in the same location as an existing, manually drawn joist or rafter; but, they will not necessarily use the same layout. For consistent layout, consider using a Framing Reference Marker . See Framing Reference Markers on page 875. Manually drawn floor, ceiling, and roof framing is unaffected when automatic framing is rebuilt and remains along with the newly produced automatic framing. In contrast, manually drawn wall framing is deleted when automatic framing is rebuilt. You can, however, prevent this from happening by checking Retain Wall Framing in the Wall Specification dialog. MIXING RAFTERS AND TRUSSES l Roofs can be framed with rafters, trusses, or a combination of the two. If you plan to combine roof trusses with rafters and/or ceiling joists, you can save time by: l Check Trusses (No birdsmouth) in the Build Roof dialog before automatically building or manually drawing a roof. See Build Roof Dialog on page 797. l Draw and position all roof trusses before automatically generating framing to produce rafters and ceiling joists. See Roof Trusses on page 895. For more information, see Mixing Trusses with Stick Framing on page 902. 855 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Framing Tools FRAMING WITH BEAMS Floor/Ceiling Beams can be drawn in a plan either before or after automatic framing has been generated. Default settings for beams can be set in the Framing Defaults dialog. See Beams Panel on page 867. If a Floor/Ceiling Beam is present and wall framing is generated, posts will be placed under the beam in any walls that pass under it and studs and top plates will build around the beam as necessary. If a Floor/Ceiling Beam is created before automatic floor or ceiling framing, you can specify whether joists bear on the beam or hang on its sides. To build joists that bear on a beam 1. Draw a Floor/Ceiling Beam at the desired location in your plan. 2. Select the beam and click the Open Object edit button. On the GENERAL panel of the Beam Specification dialog, confirm that: l The Top Height value is equal to the Ceiling Height of the room(s) over which the beam is placed. l Bearing Beam is checked. 3. Click OK, then select Build> Framing> Build Framing and build the appropriate floor or ceiling framing. See Floor Panels on page 860. To build joists that butt against a beam 1. Draw a Floor/Ceiling Beam at the desired location in your plan. 2. Select the beam and click the Open Object edit button. On the GENERAL panel of the Beam Specification dialog: l Specify the desired Depth value and then lock it. l Specify the Bottom Height value so that it is equal to the Ceiling Height of the room(s) over which the beam is placed. 3. Uncheck Bearing Beam. 4. If necessary, select Build> Framing> Joist Direction and draw a line perpendicular to the beam and within the floor or ceiling platform. 5. Click OK, then select Build> Framing> Build Framing and build the appropriate floor or ceiling framing. See Floor Panels on page 860. Framing Tools Select Build> Framing to access the automatic and manual Framing Tools. The Framing Tools family has three separate parent buttons: General Framing Tools , Floor/Ceiling Framing Tools , and Roof Framing Tools . The default settings for framing members are derived from their respective panels in the Framing Defaults dialog. See Framing Defaults on page 851. 856 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Framing Tools Most types of framing can be created both manually and automatically. Once created, both automatically generated and manually drawn framing members can be selected and edited. See Editing Framing on page 882. Horizontal floor/ceiling platform framing members are referred to as "joists"; vertical wall framing members are referred to as "studs"; and sloped roof framing members are referred to as “rafters”. BUILD FRAMING Select Build> Framing> Build Framing to open the Build Framing dialog. Here, you can define settings that control how framing is drawn and generate automatic framing. See Build Framing Dialog on page 860. Select Build> Framing> Build All Framing to build or rebuild all floor, ceiling, wall, and roof framing throughout the current plan. See Automatic Framing on page 854. GENERAL FRAMING General Framing objects are generic, framing members that can be drawn outside a floor or ceiling platform or roof plane. Select Build> Framing> General Framing, then click and drag in a straight line to create one of these objects. In plan view, a horizontal framing member is created; in a Wall Detail, vertical members can also be drawn. See In Wall Detail Views on page 880.   WALL BRIDGING Wall Bridging, or blocking, can be created both automatically and manually, but can only be drawn manually in a Wall Detail. To do so, open a Wall Detail and select Build> Framing> Wall Bridging, then click and drag in a straight line across the wall in the view. See In Wall Detail Views on page 880.   Each run of bridging has gaps where it crosses studs, but behaves as a single object.   Automatic wall bridging can be created when wall framing is built or rebuilt. See Wall Panel on page 863.   POST Posts can only be placed manually. To do so, select Build> Framing> Post and click in plan view. POST WITH FOOTING Posts can also be created with footings  beneath them. Select Build> Framing> Post and click in plan view to place a post centered over a footing. Post footings are Slab objects and can be selected independent of their posts. See The Slab Tools on page 719. RAFTER Rafters can be drawn both manually and automatically. To draw a rafter manually, select Build> Framing> Rafter in plan view, then click and drag in a straight line within a roof plane. Rafters are edited like other framing members, except that you cannot set the height. If a rafter is moved, its height and slope are automatically reset to fit under the roof plane at its new position. 857 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Framing Tools ROOF BLOCKING Roof Blocking is automatically generated in the eaves if a soffit is not present; otherwise, blocking is drawn manually. In plan view, select Build> Framing> Roof Blocking and click and drag in a straight line within a roof plane. Blocking is typically drawn perpendicular to the rafters, but at the same pitch. Each run of blocking behaves as a single object but has gaps where it crosses rafters, trusses or other blocking. Before drawing Roof Blocking: l Specify whether you want In Line, Stagger blocking, or Cross bridging in the Framing Defaults dialog. l Build the roof framing. See Roof Panel on page 869. In 3D, roof blocking is tilted to follow the pitch of the roof plane in which it is drawn. ROOF TRUSS Roof trusses can only be drawn manually. To do so, select Build> Framing> Roof Truss in plan view and click and drag  in a straight line within one or more roof planes. Roof planes and either a default or manually drawn ceiling must be present before a roof truss can be drawn. See Roof Trusses on page 895. ROOF BEAM Roof beams can only be drawn manually. To do so, select Build> Framing> Roof Beam in plan view and click and drag in a straight line. Roof beams are normally drawn across rafters and placed directly under them. ROOF PURLIN Roof purlins can be both drawn manually and generated automatically. To draw a purlin, select Build> Framing> Roof Purlin in plan view and click and drag in a straight line. In order to create purlins, they must be drawn: l Within a roof plane that has a Purlins layer defined in its Roof Surface Definition. See Material Layers Definition Dialogs on page 1040. l Perpendicular to the pitch of the roof plane. JOIST Floor and ceiling joists can be both drawn manually and generated automatically. To draw a joist, select Build> Framing> Joist in plan view, then click and drag in a straight line within a floor or ceiling platform. Joists are always drawn as the ceiling framing for the current floor. See The Current Floor on page 737. Whether a floor or ceiling joist is drawn is determined by the presence of a floor platform above. l If there is no floor platform above, a ceiling joist is drawn. l If there is a floor platform above, a floor joist is drawn. If you want to draw floor joists for Floor 1, for example, you must do so on Floor 0. See Foundations on page 705. Joists can be automatically generated for multiple floors in the Build Framing dialog. See Floor Panels on page 860. Ceiling joists, floor joists and rafters have their own layers. Proper layer assignment maximizes display and materials flexibility. 858 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Framing Tools JOIST BLOCKING Joist blocking can only be drawn manually in plan view. To do so, select Build> Framing> Joist Blocking, then   click and drag in a straight line within a floor or ceiling platform. Before drawing Joist Blocking: l Specify whether you want In Line, Stagger blocking, or Cross bridging in the Framing Defaults dialog. l Build the floor and/or ceiling platform. See Floor Panels on page 860. Regardless of how many joists or other objects it crosses, each run of blocking behaves as a single object. FLOOR/CEILING TRUSS Floor and ceiling trusses can only be drawn manually in plan view. Select Build> Framing> Floor/Ceiling Truss, then click and drag in a straight line within a floor or ceiling platform. See Floor and Ceiling Trusses on page 895.   FLOOR/CEILING BEAM Floor and ceiling beams can only be drawn manually in plan view. Select Build> Framing> Floor/Ceiling Beam, then click and drag in a straight line within a floor or ceiling platform. Beams can be drawn in two different ways: l Under Joists places the beam underneath the joists so the joists can bear on it. l With Joists places the top of the beam even with the tops of the joists it supports. The joist then butts against it. See Beams Panel on page 867. FRAMING REFERENCE MARKER Framing Reference Markers are manually-placed reference points that specify how automatically-generated framing is laid out. To place one, select Build> Framing> Framing Reference Marker in plan view and click to place a Framing Reference Marker. A Framing Reference Marker can also be created by placing a Marker and then specifying its type. See Markers on page 529 and Framing Reference Markers on page 875. BEARING LINE Bearing Lines direct the program to lap or butt joists and/or rafters where they cross the line instead of spanning from wall to wall, and can only be drawn in plan view. To draw one, select Build> Framing> Bearing Line and click and drag in a straight line. See Bearing Lines on page 878. JOIST DIRECTION Joist Direction lines define the direction in which joists run in a floor or ceiling platform and can only be drawn in plan view. To draw one, select Build> Framing> Joist Direction and click and drag within a floor or ceiling platform. See Joist Direction Lines on page 876. 859 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Build Framing Dialog Build Framing Dialog Automatic framing can be generated by selecting Build> Framing> Build Framing to open the Build Framing dialog. This dialog can also be accessed by double-clicking the General Framing button or any of the Floor/Ceiling Framing Tools , or Roof Framing Tools buttons. The settings in this dialog are similar to those found in the Framing Defaults dialog. Each major structural component of the model has its own panel or panels in the Build Roof dialog. The number of panels in the dialog varies depending on how many floors are in your model. There will be a panel called  “1st” for the first floor, “2nd” for the second floor, and so on. l Floor and ceiling framing settings are found on the Floor panels. See Floor Panels on page 860. l Wall framing settings are located on the WALL, OPENINGS, and FIREPLACES panels. See Wall Panel on page 863, Openings Panel on page 865, and Fireplaces Panel on page 866. l Floor/Ceiling Beam and Roof Beam settings are found on the BEAMS panel. See Build Framing Dialog on page 860. l Post, floor/ceiling beam and roof beam settings are found on the POSTS panel. See Posts Panel on page 868. l Roof framing settings are located on the ROOF and TRUSSES panels. See Roof Panel on page 869 and Trusses Panel on page 872. l The settings on the ROOF panel are the same as those on the STRUCTURE panel of the Build Roof dialog. See Roof Panel on page 869. l You can specify how framing looks in plan view on the PLAN VIEW panel. See Plan View Panel on page 874. l You can set the default materials used for framing on the MATERIALS panel. See Materials Panel on page 875. For best results, create roof framing before or at the same time that ceiling joists are generated. FLOOR PANELS The default floor and ceiling framing for individual floor levels is set here. The defaults for all floor levels, however, is set in the Floor/Ceiling Platform Defaults dialog. See Floor and Room Defaults on page 413. The floor framing for a given floor level is always generated or manually drawn on the floor below. As such, the floor framing settings for a given floor level are found on the FLOOR panel for the floor below it. For example, the floor framing settings for Floor 2 are found on the 1ST panel, while the floor framing settings for Floor 1 are found on the FOUNDATION panel. See Floor and Ceiling Platforms on page 428. In order to create the floor framing for Floor 1, a Floor 0 must be present. If a Floor 0 has not been built, the Build Floor Framing check box on the FOUNDATION panel will not be available. See Foundations on page 705. 860 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Build Framing Dialog Automatic Floor/Ceiling Framing Check Automatic Floor/Ceiling Framing to regenerate floor and ceiling framing whenever changes are made to the model. See Automatic Framing on page 854. l Check Use Framing Reference to use a Framing Reference Marker as the starting point for joist layout. If a Framing Reference Marker is present, the center of the first joist is placed at this point and spacing goes from there. If joists are lapped, the surface is placed at this point. When this is unchecked, the program tries to position ceiling joists so that they coincide with rafters. See Framing Reference Markers on page 875. Ceiling Above Floor X Ceiling platforms are only present above rooms that do not have living space above them. Ceiling platforms that already have the bottom chords of roof trusses present in them do not receive automatically generated joists. See Roof Trusses on page 895.   l Check Build Ceiling Framing to generate or regenerate ceiling framing when the OK button is clicked. Only available when there is no living space above at least part of the current floor. Not available in the Framing Defaults dialog.   861 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Build Framing Dialog l The Ceiling Structure depth displays here for reference. Click the Edit button to open the Ceiling Structure Definition dialog and define the layers of materials that form the ceiling platform. See Material Layers Definition Dialogs on page 1040.   l Check Default to use the Ceiling Structure Definition set in the Floor/Ceiling Platform Defaults dialog. See Floor and Room Defaults on page 413.   l Enter a value for the On Center Spacing of joists generated in ceiling platforms on Floor X.   l Specify the Width, which is the horizontal thickness of the ceiling's joists or trusses.   l Specify how the ceiling framing members Bear on Beams and Bearing Walls: they can either Lap side by side or Butt end to end. The lap is 8” (200 mm) and centered over the support.   l Specify what style of Blocking or bridging is produced for the ceiling when Joist Blocking is manually drawn after joists are in place. See Joist Blocking on page 859.   o In Line produces blocking pieces that align with each other. o Stagger produces blocking that alternates on either side of the line you draw.   o Cross produces cross bridging that looks like in line blocking in plan view, but shows as cross bridging in 3D views and the materials list. Subfloor of Floor Y If a room has a living space above it, its ceiling will be supplied by the floor platform of the room(s) above instead of a ceiling platform.   l Check Build Floor Framing to generate or regenerate floor framing when the OK button is clicked. Not available in the Framing Defaults dialog or if there is no floor level located below Floor Y.   l The Floor Structure depth displays here for reference. Click the Edit button to open the Floor Structure Definition dialog and define the layers of materials that form the floor platform. Only available if there is living space above at least part of the current floor.   l Check Default to use the Floor Structure Definition set in the Floor/Ceiling Platform Defaults dialog.   l Enter a value for the on center Spacing of floor joists above the current floor.   l Specify the Width, which is the horizontal thickness of the floor's joists or trusses.   l Check Rim Joist to create rim joists across the ends of the floor joists when floor framing is generated. If this is unchecked, line blocking across the ends of the floor joists is usually drawn in manually later.   l Check Max Rim Joist Length, then specify the maximum allowable length for rim joist boards. When unchecked, rim joists run the full length of each platform edge where joist ends are found.   l Specify the Rim Joist Width, which is the horizontal thickness.   l Select the Rim Joist Type from the drop-down list.   l Specify how the floor framing members Bear on Beams and Bearing Walls: they can either Lap side to side or Butt end to end. The lap is 8” (200 mm) and centered over the support.   l Specify what style of Blocking or bridging is produced for the floor when Joist Blocking is manually drawn after joists are in place. See #2, above. 862 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Build Framing Dialog WALL PANEL The Thickness, Spacing, Count, and Length settings on this panel serve as the defaults for framed wall types. See Wall Type Definitions Dialog on page 387. Automatically Build Wall Framing Check this box to regenerate wall framing whenever changes are made to the model. See Automatic Framing on page 854. Wall Specify how wall studs are created.   l Check Build Wall Framing to build wall framing for the entire model. Framing is built in walls with one or more layers specified as Framing. Not available in the Framing Defaults dialog. See Wall Type Definitions on page 384.   863 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Build Framing Dialog l Specify the Stud Thickness for all wall Framing layers in the plan. Stud depth is equal to the thickness of each wall layer that has a Framing material.   Note: If the Stud Thickness is equal to the stud depth, only one stud will be created at wall corners.   l Specify the Stud Spacing for all wall Framing layers in the plan, starting from the Framing Reference Marker, if one is present. See Framing Reference Markers on page 875.   l Stud Depth - The depth of each wall stud is determined by the thickness of its wall layer, which is set in the Wall Type Definitions dialog. See Wall Type Definitions Dialog on page 387.   l When Allow Automatic Balloon Framing is checked, walls adjacent to Open Below rooms are balloon-framed. Uncheck this box to instead produce wall plates separated by rim joists instead. See Effects of Room Functions on page 416. Wall Connections Specify how the framing at Wall Corners and Wall Intersections is generated.   l Select "Standard" to produce corners or intersections composed of three studs.   l Select "Reduced Stud" to produce corners or intersections composed of two studs.   l Select "Laddered" to add horizontal ladder blocking at corners or intersections. l Select "U Shaped" to produce corners composed of three studs in a U-shaped configuration. Only available for Wall Corners.   Plates Define how top and bottom plates are generated. l Specify the Top Plate Count, as well as their vertical Thickness.   l Specify the Bottom Plate Count, as well as their vertical Thickness.   l Specify the Max Plate Length, which is the maximum allowed length for the boards that make up the top and bottom plates. This value is only applicable for wall types that are set to use a maximum plate length. Blocking Specify where and how horizontal blocking is created. Each run of blocking behaves as a single object but has gaps where it crosses studs. See Wall Bridging on page 857. l Check Exterior to automatically produce blocking on exterior walls when wall framing is built.   l Check Interior to automatically produce blocking on internal walls when wall framing is built.   l In Line produces blocking pieces that align with each other.   l Stagger produces blocking that alternates on either side of a center line along the wall.   l Wall blocking is generated exactly half-way up each wall’s total height. Once created, it can be selected in a Framing Overview or Wall Detail.   Girts Specify the Max Girt Length, which is the maximum allowed length for horizontal girt boards. This value is only applicable for wall types that are set to use a maximum girt length.   864 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Build Framing Dialog Mitre Ends of Angle Walls Specify how wall corners that are not right angles are framed. 90° corners are not affected by these settings.   l Select Mitre Plate Ends to mitre the ends of the top and bottom plates. If unchecked, top and bottom plates will be butted together.   l Select Rotate End Studs to rotate the studs closest to mitre ends to the angle of the mitre. If unchecked, studs will remain perpendicular to the angle of the walls.   l Select Horizontal Frame Through to frame through the horizontal walls in plan view, butting vertical walls against them. If unchecked, walls that are vertical in plan view will frame through.   Wall Detail Views l Check Build Wall Framing Details from Exterior to have Wall Detail views display from the exterior of the plan rather than the interior. See In Wall Detail Views on page 880.   l Specify the Fill Style for wall framing members in Wall Detail views by clicking the Fill Style button to open the Default Wall Detail Fill Style dialog. See Displaying Framing on page 879.   OPENINGS PANEL Various defaults for door and window headers as well as the trimmers for bay/box/bow windows can be set here. The rough openings for doors and windows can be specified in the Door and Window Defaults and Specification dialogs. See Door and Window Framing on page 852. Header Sizes Specify default Header Sizes, dependent on width of the door or window, including its Rough Opening. These values should be set so that the wider the opening, the deeper the header. 865 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Build Framing Dialog l If the top of an opening’s Rough Opening is closer to the top plate than the Maximum Depth, a solid header is produced to fill the entire space. Short cripple studs between the header and top plate are not produced. Bay/Box/Bow Trimmers Specify how Bay/Box/Bow Trimmers, are generated. l Specify the Maximum Number of trimmers that a Bay, Box, or Bow Window with a lowered top height can have on each side of the opening. l Specify the Component Thickness, which is the thickness of a thinner trimmer for manually resized Bay/Box/Bow Window components if a standard trimmer does not fit. See Component Windows on page 609. Materials List Check List Cut Header Lengths in Mixed Reporting to show precut headers in the Materials List. Precut headers are shown only if the walls have been framed and Mixed Reported is selected as the reporting method. See Structural Member Reporting on page 1306. If this is unchecked, the Materials List produces a total footage for all headers. When checked, each different length of precut header is listed separately. Note that the total number of headers is affected by the Count value of each door and window. Plan Views Specify the default Header Fill Style for door and window headers by clicking the Fill Style button to open the Wall Header Fill Style dialog. See Displaying Framing on page 879. FIREPLACES PANEL The rough openings for legacy Fireplaces placed in walls can be set on the FIREPLACES panel. See Fireplaces on page 724. Headers Specify the characteristics of fireplace Headers. l Specify the Type of material used for fireplace headers. l Specify the Thickness of fireplace headers. l Specify the Count of boards used to form a fireplace header. 866 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Build Framing Dialog Trimmers Specify when to generate multiple Trimmers on each side of a fireplace. These values include the fireplace’s Rough Opening. See Door and Window Framing on page 852. l Double Trimmer At - Fireplace openings of this width or greater receive two trimmers on each side when framed. l Triple Trimmer At - Fireplace openings of this width or greater receive three trimmers on each side when framed. Sills Specify the characteristics of fireplace Sills. A sill is only generated if a fireplace is raised sufficiently off the floor. l Specify the Thickness of fireplace sills. l Check Double Sills to specify a double sill for all fireplaces. BEAMS PANEL Floor/Ceiling Beams and Roof Beams are not automatically generated: they can only be drawn manually. See Manual Framing on page 854. Posts and beams may be created under a Deck room automatically, depending on its size, location, and other variables. Deck Framing defaults are set in the Deck Room Defaults dialog. See Deck Framing and Planking on page 425. Floor/Ceiling Beams Click the Edit Floor Beam Defaults to open the Floor/Ceiling Beam Defaults dialog. This dialog is similar to the Framing Specification dialog. See Framing Specification Dialog on page 887. Roof Beams Click the Edit Roof Beam Defaults to open the Roof Beam Defaults dialog. This dialog is also similar to the Framing Specification dialog. Options The Options settings affect the positioning of Floor/Ceiling Beams. 867 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Build Framing Dialog l Specify the Placement of Floor/Ceiling Beams relative to the joists. With Joists places beams at the same height as the joists so they hang on the beams; Under Joists places beams below joists so they bear on the beams. See Bearing Lines on page 878. l Align Exterior with Outer Layer/Main Layer - When a Floor/Ceiling Beam is drawn along and over an exterior wall, its exterior surface can snap to either the wall’s outer layer or outer Main Layer, as specified here. See The Main Layer on page 385. POSTS PANEL Posts are not automatically generated: they can only be drawn manually. See Manual Framing on page 854. Posts and beams may be created under a Deck room automatically, depending on its size, location, and other variables. Deck Framing defaults are set in the Deck Room Defaults dialog. See Deck Framing and Planking on page 425. Posts Click the Edit Post Defaults to open the Post Defaults dialog. This dialog is similar to the Framing Specification dialog for posts. See Framing Specification Dialog on page 887. Post Footings The Post Footings settings control the initial attributes of footings created with the Post with Footing tool. l Specify the Height Above Floor value, measured from the top of the subfloor of the room in which the post is placed. l Specify the top to bottom Thickness of the footing. l Specify the Width of the footing. This is the length of each side of a square footing and the diameter of a round footing. l Select the Square or Round radio button to specify the initial shape of post footings. Once created, a post footing can be edited like other closed polylines. See Editing Closed Polyline-Based Objects on page 228. 868 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Build Framing Dialog l Specify the Rebar Size Number for post footing Rebar.   l Specify the Rebar Count, or number of bars, for Post Footings.   ROOF PANEL The settings on the ROOF panel of the Build Framing dialog are exactly the same as those on the STRUCTURE panel of the Build Roof dialog. See Build Roof Dialog on page 797. These settings are also found on the STRUCTURE panel of the Roof Plane Specification dialog. Those settings that apply to ceiling planes are available in the Ceiling Plane Specification dialog. See Roof Plane Specification Dialog on page 814. Note: Changes made on the Roof panel will not affect the structure of existing roof planes. To make changes take effect, rebuild the roof. 869 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Build Framing Dialog Automatic Roof Framing Check Automatic Roof Framing to automatically rebuild roof framing if changes are made to the roof plan. See Automatic Framing on page 854. l Check Use Framing Reference to use a Framing Reference Marker as the starting point for rafter layout. See Framing Reference Markers on page 875. Note: Use Framing Reference is useful when framing a gable roof, but not necessarily a hip roof. See Framing References and Roof Framing on page 876. Roof l Check Build Roof Framing to build roof framing for the entire model. Not available in the Framing Defaults dialog. See Roofs on page 791. l Uncheck Angled Dormer Hole to frame dormers using rafters under the dormer valleys and a double header where the peak of the dormer roof meets the main roof plane. When checked, a five-sided hole is framed with two angled double rafters located under the dormer valleys. If a double header does not fit within the main roof plane, an angled dormer hole is produced regardless of this setting. l Uncheck Trim Framing To Soffits to generate full-depth rafters all the way to the subfascia. If checked, rafter depths are trimmed to the top surface of the soffits in the eave area. Does not affect decorative rafter tail ends. See Rafter Tails Panel on page 803. l Specify the Spacing of automatically generated rafters. This also sets the initial offset value for laying out rafters using the Multiple Copy edit button. See Multiple Copy on page 172. l Specify the Maximum Lookout Spacing. Depending on a roof plane’s length, its lookouts may be spaced closer than this value, but not further. l Uncheck Trim Framing To Soffits to generate full-depth rafters all the way to the subfascia. If checked, rafter depths are trimmed to the top surface of the soffits in the eave area. Does not affect decorative rafter tail ends. See Rafter Tails Panel on page 803. 870 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Build Framing Dialog l Specify the Spacing of automatically generated rafters. This also sets the initial offset value for laying out rafters using the Multiple Copy edit button. See Multiple Copy on page 172. l Specify the Maximum Lookout Spacing. Depending on a roof plane’s length, its lookouts may be spaced closer than this value, but not further. Specify the Blocking Style. See Roof Blocking on page 858. l Check Vertical to generate blocking that is oriented vertically, or plumb. When unchecked, blocking is perpendicular to the roof framing. l In Line produces blocking pieces that align with each other. l Stagger produces blocking that alternates on either side of the line you draw. l Cross/Bridging produces cross bridging that looks like in line blocking in plan view, but shows as cross bridging in 3D views and the materials list. Roof Layers Define the layers of materials that together form the default roof plane assembly.   l The roof Surface depth displays here for reference. Click the Edit button to open the Roof Surface Definition dialog and define the layers of materials located above the structural layers. See Material Layers Definition Dialogs on page 1040.   l The roof Structure depth displays here for reference. Click the Edit button to open the Roof Structure Definition dialog and define the layers of materials that form the roof structure.   When a roof plane or ceiling plane is located over a room with Flat Ceiling Over This Room unchecked, a ceiling surface on the underside of the plane will generate. l When Use Room Ceiling Finish is checked, the ceiling finish layer is based on the specifications of the room(s) below. See To create a cathedral ceiling on page 435.   l When Use Room Ceiling Finish is unchecked, the depth of the Ceiling finish depth displays for reference and can be edited here. Click the Edit button to define the material layers located below the structural layers in the Roof Ceiling Finish Definition dialog.   l Check Soffits to include soffits under the eaves and specify their Thickness. When Soffits is unchecked, rafter ends are exposed under the eaves and will display in 3D views when their layer is turned on. When this is the case, rafters will be assigned the same material as the Fascia when roof framing is generated. See Rafter Tails on page 847.   l Check Flat Under Eave Sub Fascia to extend soffits downward until they meet the subfascia. When unchecked, soffits slope downward to the fascia, if the fascia depth is sufficient.   Roof Size Specify the desired Width and Depth for Rafters, the Ridge, Lookouts, Gable Sub Fascia Eave Sub Fascia, Gable Fascia, Eave Fascia, Blocking, and the Shoe Plate.   l The Gable Sub Fascia setting controls the height of both gable and eave soffits, and thus the depth of rafter tails when Trim Framing to Soffits is checked, above. l Uncheck the boxes beside Ridge, Lookout, Eave Sub Fascia, Gable Fascia and/or Eave Fascia to prevent these framing members from generating when roof framing is built. When these boxes are checked, these items will generate as specified here. 871 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Build Framing Dialog l In the Ceiling Plane Specification dialog only, check Include Ridges to create ridge boards for the selected ceiling plane(s) when roof framing is generated. Girder Trusses Specify how hip-end girder trusses are generated. l Specify the Count, which is how many trusses are generated side by side to produce a girder truss. l Specify the Distance from Wall Main Layer, which is the distance from the outermost girder truss to the outside of the Main Layer of the wall that support the sub-girder trusses. When Automatic is checked, hip-end girder trusses are generated on layout, and approximately 4' (1200 mm) from the outside of the exterior of the wall's Main Layer. Roof Overframing These settings affect how roof framing is generated at locations where roof planes are drawn to represent an overbuild situation.   l Check Roof Overframing to generate shoe plates for the upper roof's rafters to join to in overbuild situations. When unchecked, no shoe plates are created.   l Specify the Overframe Layer, which is the layer of the lower roof assembly that the shoe plate snaps to when roof framing is generated.   o Select Roof Finish to generate overbuild framing on top of the topmost layer of the roof's Surface Definition.   o Select Sheathing to generate overbuild framing on top of the lowermost layer of the roof's Surface Definition.   o Select Structural to generate overbuild framing on top of the roof's Structure Definition. TRUSSES PANEL Changes to the settings on this panel do not affect any trusses that are already present in the current plan. See Trusses on page 894. Chief Architect Premier does not engineer trusses. Always consult an engineer or truss company to have your trusses professionally designed. 872 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Build Framing Dialog Roof Truss Member Depth Roof trusses use the default Width setting for Rafters. See Roof Panel on page 869.   l Specify the depth of the Top Chord. This value is the default roof plane Structure Thickness when the Framing Method is Trusses. l Specify the depth of the Bottom Chord. l Specify the depth of the Webbing. Roof Truss Maximum Horizontal Span These settings control the maximum distance between the junctions where webbing meets the Top Chord and Bottom Chord. Changing these values can create different truss configurations such as kingpost, queenpost, fink, double fink, fan, howe, or double howe. These distances are measured horizontally for both roof and floor and ceiling trusses. In some instances, especially in more complex trusses, making these spans equal may result in the webbing appearing more normal or standard. See Trusses on page 894. Roof Truss Options l Check Require Kingpost to include a central vertical webbing member. If this is unchecked, a vertical member may still be created, depending on the Maximum Horizontal Span settings and the length of the truss. l Check Energy Heel to remove the bottom chord from the overhang area. For an energy heel to be modeled, the roof should also be raised off the top plates by at least 7”, depending on the roof pitch. See Energy Heels on page 909. 873 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Build Framing Dialog Floor/Ceiling Truss Member Depth l Specify the depth of the Top Chord. l Specify the depth of the Bottom Chord. l Specify the depth of the Webbing. Floor/Ceiling Truss Options The Maximum Horizontal Span setting controls the maximum distance between the junctions where webbing meets the Top Chord and Bottom Chord. TRUSS SPACING Trusses are always drawn manually, so while their depth, span and kingpost defaults are specified in the Build Framing dialog, their spacing is not.   Trusses are typically replicated using the Multiple Copy edit button, and their spacing can be set in the Multiple Copy dialog. See Multiple Copy Dialog on page 173.   PLAN VIEW PANEL The settings on the PLAN VIEW panel affect the appearance of Joists, Rafters, Trusses, and General Framing members in plan view. See Displaying Framing on page 879. l Specify the Default Fill Style for joists, rafters, and General Framing members by clicking the Fill Style button to open the Default Framing Fill Style dialog. See Displaying Framing on page 879. l The Default Fill Style is not a dynamic default setting. Any framing already present in the plan will not be affected if you change it. l Check Use Line for Framing to show joists, rafters, and General Framing members as single lines rather than as closed polylines. See Displaying Framing on page 879. Note: The Use Line for Framing setting is dynamic but affects the current floor only. The Default Fill Style setting affects all framing as it is created but is not dynamic. 874 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Framing Reference Markers MATERIALS PANEL The default materials that display on General Framing objects are specified on the MATERIALS panel. These materials are used in 3D views only and are not used in the Materials List. Materials List information is derived from the structure Type of each framing object. See Framing and the Materials List on page 886. Changes made on the MATERIALS panel of the Build Framing dialog only affect subsequently created framing: both manually drawn and automatically generated. The settings on this panel of the Build Framing dialog are the same as in many other specification dialogs. See Materials Panel on page 1055. Framing Reference Markers Framing Reference Markers are markers that specify the starting point for the layout of automatically-produced framing. See Markers on page 529. In order for framing to be laid out relative to a Framing Reference Marker, it must be set to do so: l Floor and ceiling framing as well as deck joists can be set to Use Framing Reference on a floor-by-floor basis in the Build Framing dialog. See Floor Panels on page 860. l Roof framing can be set to Use Framing Reference plan-wide in the Build Framing dialog. See Roof Panel on page 869. l Wall framing for individual walls can be set to Use Framing Reference in the Wall Specification dialog. See Structure Panel on page 395. Each floor level can have its own Framing Reference Marker, which affects the layout of all framing members generated on that floor. If multiple markers are present on a given floor, the one that was created first is used and those created later are ignored. See In Plan Views on page 879. In many cases, a single Framing Reference Marker can be used for the entire model. When this is the case, it must be placed on Floor 1. Note: If no Framing Reference Markers exist in your plan, the point at 0,0 is used as the Framing Reference location for joists, while the framing for roof planes and walls generate relative to their parent object. USING FRAMING REFERENCE MARKERS To place a Framing Reference Marker, select Build> Framing> Framing Reference Marker . Click in plan view to place the Framing Reference Marker and then build or rebuild some or all framing in the plan. Although Framing Reference Markers can be placed anywhere, a typical location is the corner of two exterior walls, at the exterior of their framing layer. See Wall Type Definitions on page 384. When Object Snaps are enabled, Framing Reference Markers snap to framing members and other CAD-based objects first, and then to a wall Main Layer surface or corner if possible. See Object Snaps on page 160. Once placed, Framing Reference Markers can be modified just like other markers. See Markers on page 529. When framing is generated using a Framing Reference Marker, the first framing member of a given type snaps to this point and all other framing members are laid out from there. 875 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Joist Direction Lines l Wall and roof framing snap to the Framing Reference Marker at their centers. l Floor and ceiling framing snaps to the Framing Reference Marker at their centers when it is set to Butt Over Support in the Build Framing dialog. See Floor Panels on page 860. l Floor and ceiling framing snaps to the Framing Reference Marker along an edge when it is set to Lap over a supporting beam or wall. If Lap is selected, the surfaces where the joists lap are placed at reference spacing, so that joists are placed on either side of the framing reference locations. MOVE TO FRAMING REFERENCE Manually drawn or edited framing as well as automatic framing that was not generated using a Framing Reference Marker can be moved relative to a Framing Reference Marker using the Move to Framing Ref edit button. A group of selected framing objects that are all parallel to each other can be moved using the Move to Framing Ref edit button. Only one of the objects in the group is compared to the Framing Reference Marker and moved; the remaining objects are simply moved the same amount as the first object. Ideally, therefore, the group should have proper spacing relative to each other before the move. To move framing objects to a framing reference marker 1. Group select the framing objects. 2. Click the Move to Framing Ref edit button. 3. The framing members are moved to the nearest Framing Reference Marker. To determine placement, the Move to Framing Ref edit tool uses: l For wall studs, the default On Center Spacing for wall framing, which is set in the Build Framing/Framing Defaults dialog. See Wall Panel on page 863. l For roof rafters, the On Center Spacing of the selected object's parent roof plane. See Structure Panel on page 817. l For floor and ceiling joists, the default On Center Spacing for the current floor set in the Build Framing/Framing Defaults dialog. They may instead reference spacing specific to a particular floor or ceiling platform. See Joist Direction Lines on page 876. FRAMING REFERENCES AND ROOF FRAMING Framing Reference Markers are useful when framing a gable roof, but not necessarily a hip roof. When a Framing Reference is used, common rafters on either side of a hip rafter will not meet in the same place. If a Framing Reference Marker is not used, the automatic framing utility starts common rafter spacing from each end of the horizontal ridges, which results in common rafters on either side of hip jacks meeting each other. Joist Direction Lines By default, automatically-generated floor and ceiling joists will run in the direction that results in the shortest span between bearing walls and/or beams. A Joist Direction line allows you to define the direction that joists in a particular floor or ceiling platform run, regardless of span. To draw a Joist Direction line, select Build> Framing> Joist Direction , then click and drag as you would draw a CAD line. In order to have any effect, a Joist Direction line must be drawn within the area of a single floor or ceiling platform. To avoid unexpected results, only one Joist Direction line should be present in a given floor or ceiling platform, and it should not extend outside the extents of that platform. 876 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Joist Direction Specification Dialog Joist Direction lines are located on the “Framing, Bearing Lines” layer by default and use the Text Style assigned to the layer that the Joist Direction line is on. See Text Styles on page 538. MULTIPLE JOIST DIRECTIONS By default, all of the rooms on each living floor share a single floor platform and a single ceiling platform. If you require joists that run in two directions in either of these platforms, begin by dividing the platform in question in two. There are a number of ways to do this: l Divide the living area into separate rooms with different platform thicknesses and/or heights. See Floor and Ceiling Platforms on page 428. l Specify one or more interior walls as Bearing Walls. See Structure Panel on page 395. l Draw a Floor/Ceiling Beam specified as a Bearing Beam. See Floor/Ceiling Beam on page 859. l Draw a Bearing Line . See Bearing Lines on page 878. Bearing Walls, Floor/Ceiling Beams, and Bearing Lines should be drawn on the same living floor as the joists they will interact with. Floor framing for a living floor is created on the floor below, while ceiling framing for a living floor is created on that floor. See Floor and Ceiling Framing on page 851.   JOIST SIZE AND SPACING The text of a Joist Direction line states the platform framing’s Structure Type and size, and the spacing. By default, these values reflect the settings in the Framing Defaults dialog. See Floor Panels on page 860. In plans using US Units, when the Structure Type is “Lumber”, the nominal size will be reported for the joists. For all other Structure Types, fractional inches are used. It is important to note that if a Joist Direction line is set to use non-default Spacing and Depth values, they will override the settings in both the Framing Defaults and Room Specification dialogs. It will not, however, change the settings in either dialog. Joist Direction Specification Dialog A Joist Direction line can control the joist depth and spacing in the floor or ceiling platform in which it is drawn. To change these values, select a Joist Direction line and click the Open Object edit button. The Joist Direction Specification dialog opens. See Joist Direction Lines on page 876. Any changes made in the Joist Direction Specification dialog will not affect any joists present in its floor or ceiling platform. Only subsequently produced framing in its platform will be affected. FLOOR JOIST PANEL l Define the Spacing of the joists in the platform associated with the selected Joist Direction line. l Define the Depth of these joists. 877 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Bearing Lines Note: This is not the recommended method for specifying joist depth and spacing in most cases. You should instead use the settings in the Room Specification dialog. See Room Specification Dialog on page 437. LINE STYLE PANEL For information about the settings on this panel, see Line Style Panel on page 305. ARROW PANEL Joist Direction Lines do not use the Attach or Auto Position options for arrows. For information about the settings on this panel, see Arrowheads on page 327. Bearing Lines It is not unusual for joists to lap or butt in the middle of a span rather than build across a platform. When they do, they typically bear on a wall or beam at that point. To produce joists that break over a support, specify the wall or beam in question as Bearing in its specification dialog: l Check Bearing Wall in the Wall Specification dialog. See Structure Panel on page 395. l Check Bearing Beam in the Framing Specification dialog. See General Panel on page 887. Joists lap or butt over the support depending on the option selected in the Build Framing dialog. See Floor Panels on page 860. In either case, the joists’ overlap or butted ends are centered over the support. When an offset from the center is required, do not specify the wall or beam as Bearing and instead draw a Bearing Line. A Bearing Line directs the program to lap or butt joists where they cross the line instead of framing across to a wall. Select Build> Framing> Bearing Line , then click and drag to draw a Bearing Line as you would draw a CAD line. A Bearing Line should start outside the floor or ceiling platform and end outside it, passing completely through the building. Bearing Lines are edited just like CAD lines, and can be connected to form polylines. See Editing Line-Based Objects on page 216 or Editing Open Polyline-Based Objects on page 224. Bearing Lines are one of the ways that a floor or ceiling platform can be divided into separate smaller platforms with different Joist Directions . See Joist Direction Lines on page 876. 878 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Displaying Framing Displaying Framing The display of framing members is controlled in the Layer Display Options dialog. By default, framing objects are created on one of over twenty layers with names that begin with “Framing,”: Ceiling Beams, for example, are placed on the “Framing, Ceiling Beams” layer. Once created, though, framing objects can be placed on any layer you wish. See Layer Attributes on page 177. IN PLAN VIEWS In plan views, wall studs and posts are represented by box-based CAD objects that look like Cross Boxes. See Cross Box on page 320 and Editing Box-Based Objects on page 232. Joists, rafters, trusses,  General Framing, and headers are represented in plan view by line-based CAD objects that are look like long, thin rectangles. See Editing Line-Based Objects on page 216. Note: The framing for the floor platform of a given floor level is drawn on the floor level below. See Floor Panels on page 860. You can specify a default fill style for line-based framing members in the Build Framing dialog. See Plan View Panel on page 874, Openings Panel on page 865, and Fill Styles on page 192. By default, newly drawn line-based framing members of a given type display in front of older ones. Posts, meanwhile, display in front of beams, but behind joists. You can specify the drawing order of framing members in their specification dialogs. See Line Style Panel on page 889. If you prefer, joists, rafters, trusses, and General Framing can instead be represented by a single line. The Use Line for Framing setting can be set differently for each floor in a plan. See Plan View Panel on page 874. FRAMING LABELS Framing labels are located on the “Framing, Labels” and “Framing Header Labels” layers and can be set to display in plan view, Wall Details, and cross section/elevation views. When a framing member with a label is selected, the label has a small square Move edit handle and a small rectangular Rotate handle.   l Headers, posts, and beams have automatic labels consisting of the object’s depth and width followed by the member type. In U.S. Unit plans, the nominal size is used when the framing Type is “lumber”.   l Automatic header labels include the total number of headers for the associated opening in parentheses. By default, only one header for a given opening displays a label while the other(s) are suppressed.   l Joists, rafters, studs, plates, and wall blocking do not have automatic labels; however, you can specify a custom label in their specification dialog. See Label Panel on page 700.   Header label defaults can be set in the Door and Window Defaults dialogs, and can be preset for each door or window in its specification dialog. See Framing Panel on page 573.   Framing objects have named value pairs associated with them, so you can create custom labels using Text Macros. See Text Macros on page 540.   IN 3D VIEWS The easiest way to view framing in 3D is to use either the Orthographic Framing Overview or Perspective Framing Overview tool, which display the model using the "3D Framing Layer Set". See Framing Overview on page 1088. 879 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Displaying Framing Framing objects can display in other 3D and cross section/elevation views, although by default they are not set to do so. If you wish to see framing in these views, turn on the framing layers in the appropriate layer set. To reveal framing covered by other objects or wall layers, use the Delete Surface tool. See Delete 3D Surface on page 1099. IN CROSS SECTION/ELEVATION VIEWS To display framing in a cross section/elevation view, make sure the framing layers are turned on in that view. See Layer Display Options Dialog on page 179. You can also use the Delete Surface tool to temporarily delete the surfaces of wall layers or other objects that block the view. In cross section/elevation views, horizontal framing objects that are cut by the cross section plane display as boxes containing an ’X’. Wall Blocking , Joist Blocking , and Roof Blocking cut by the cross section plane displays as a box containing a single diagonal line. See  Cross Section/Elevation Views on page 1089. IN WALL DETAIL VIEWS Wall Details are a special type of elevation view in which only the studs, plates, girts, headers, and bridging used to frame an individual wall display. Each Wall Detail is created with a text object that  reports which wall layer owns the framing as well as from which side of the wall the framing is being viewed. If the wall has more than one framing layer, they will all be drawn in the same Wall Detail view but will display separately, each described by its own text object. A Wall Detail view for each framed wall in your plan is automatically created by the program when its wall framing is built.   They are listed in the Project Browser, and the name of each Wall Detail is the same as the Automatic Label of the wall it is associated with. There are several ways to open the Wall Detail associated with a wall: l Select the wall and click the Wall Detail edit button. See Editing Walls on page 368. l Right-click on the name of the detail in the Project Browser and select Open View from the contextual menu.  See Project Browser on page 58.   l Select a wall framing member in the Materials List and click the Find Object in Plan edit button. See Find Object in Plan on page 691.   To locate the owner wall of a selected wall framing member in the Wall Detail, a Framing Overview, or other 3D view in which wall framing can be seen, click the Find Wall edit button. See Selecting Walls on page 368.   The framing members of an individual wall can be selected and edited in its Wall Detail. If you rebuild wall framing after manually editing in a Wall Detail, your changes will be lost. To protect changes made to a wall’s framing, check Retain Wall Framing in the Wall Specification dialog. See General Panel on page 392.   880 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Displaying Framing Wall Details are the only views in which Wall Bridging can be created. See Wall Bridging on page 857.   Most wall framing members occupy the entire thickness of its wall layer. Some, notably doubled headers or corner sheetrock nailers, may be turned sideways. If a wall has multiple framing layers, they will display in the same Wall Detail view, but in separate locations. Double or triple headers display one behind the other in a Wall Detail. You can select them using the Select Next Object edit button. See Select Next Object on page 211.   By default, Wall Details show walls as viewed from the exterior. You can specify whether Wall Details are viewed from the interior or exterior in the Build Framing dialog. You can also specify the default fill style for framing objects in Wall Details. See Wall Panel on page 863.   As with regular 3D views, Wall Details can be sent to layout and printed. See Layout on page 1333 and Printing and Plotting on page 1363.   FRAMING MATERIALS AND TYPES The appearance of a framing member in 3D and cross section/elevation views is affected by the material assigned to it and also by its Type. The material specified for a framing member determines what it looks like in camera views by applying a texture, pattern, or color to its surface. Materials have no effect on how the framing is calculated in the Materials List, however. The default materials for framing are set: l In the Floor and Ceiling Structure Definition dialogs for floor and ceiling framing. See Floor and Ceiling Platform Definitions on page 429. l In the Wall Type Definitions dialog for wall framing. See Wall Type Definitions Dialog on page 387. l In the Framing Defaults dialog for General Framing, Posts, and Rafters. See Materials Panel on page 875. Framing Types can also influence how a framing member looks in camera views because some types have special profiles - for example, I-Joist, Steel-I, and C-Channel. Framing Types are also stated in the Description column in the Materials List. See Structure Types on page 886. In the Floor and Ceiling Structure Definition dialogs for floor and ceiling framing, the Framing Type provides an additional option: Truss, which allows you to automatically generated floor and ceiling trusses. See Floor and Ceiling Trusses on page 895. IN THE MATERIALS LIST When framing is calculated in the materials list, its dimensions and type are noted. Treated lumber is also counted separately form regular lumber. See Structure Types on page 886. Framing lengths can be counted using one of several methods to produce, for example, cut lists and buy lists. See Structural Member Reporting on page 1306. If framing is not present in a plan when a Materials List is created, it will not be calculated.  See Framing and the Materials List on page 886. 881 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Framing FRAMING SCHEDULES The Framing Schedule tool allows you to produce customizable framing schedules as well as framing labels that display schedule numbers. See Schedules and Object Labels on page 681. Schedules of particular types of framing can be created by controlling which Objects to Include in the schedule. For example, a Deck Framing Schedule can be created by including “Deck” Objects while excluding all other Object types. See General Panel on page 692. In plans using US Units, when a board’s Structure Type is “Lumber”, its nominal size will be reported in the Nominal column of a Framing Schedule. For all other Structure Types, fractional inches are used. Framing schedules created in Wall Detail views use a special Only Include Objects from this Detail setting and a selection of Objects to Include that report only wall framing members present in the current view. See In Wall Detail Views on page 880. If placed into a Truss Detail, a framing schedule’s Objects to Include will be restricted to floor, ceiling, and roof trusses. Only Include Objects from this Detail is also used. See Truss Details on page 901. Editing Framing Framing can be edited much like other line-based objects can using the edit handles, edit toolbar buttons, or the Framing Specification dialog. See Framing Specification Dialog on page 887. Framing is organized into families which determine where it is generated and where it can be manually drawn. See Manual vs. Automatic Framing on page 854. Once framing has been created, however, it can be moved out of its structural component. In order to move roof framing above or below a roof plane, you must first check Manual Rafter Height in the Framing Specification dialog. See Framing Specification Dialog on page 887. When Start and End Indicators are enabled in the Preferences dialog, a selected framing member will display an S and an E at its start and end points. This makes it easier to choose which end to lock when specifying its Length or Angle. See Edit Panel on page 115. Roof and floor/ceiling trusses cannot be edited like regular framing members can and are discussed in their own chapter. See Editing Truss Envelopes on page 900. SELECTING FRAMING Before a framing member can be edited, it must be selected. Framing can be individually selected in all views, and some types can be group-selected. To group-select framing in plan view, first select any of the Framing Tools. See Marquee Select on page 213. To select framing objects of a particular type, use the Marquee Select Similar tool’s Restrictive Selection option. Wall framing can only be selected in this way in a Wall Detail view. See Marquee Select Similar on page 214. USING THE EDIT HANDLES In plan view, framing members can be drawn, edited, and moved much the way CAD lines can. See Editing Line-Based Objects on page 216. 882 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Framing In cross section/elevation views, joists and rafters cut by the cross section and displaying a cross box can also be edited. See Editing Box-Based Objects on page 232. Also, in cross section/elevation views headers can be edited like closed polylines. See Editing Closed Polyline-Based Objects on page 228. In a camera view or overview, the handles that display on a framing member depend on where it is clicked for selection and your current zoom factor. l Click the top surface to display the same edit handles as in plan view, allowing you to rotate, move, and extend or shorten the length of the member. l Click a side surface to display the same edit handles as in an elevation view, one at each end and one at the center. l Zoom in and click on the appropriate edge to display edit handles that control the width and depth of framing members. USING THE EDIT TOOLS A selected framing member can be edited in a variety of ways using the buttons on the Edit Toolbar. See The Edit Toolbar on page 130. Move to Framing Reference moves the selection into alignment with a Framing Reference Marker. See Framing Reference Markers on page 875. Join and Lap Ends and Join and Mitre Ends join horizontal framing members at either a lapped or mitered joint. See Lapped and Mitered Joints on page 883, below. USING DIMENSIONS Framing members can be both moved and resized using dimensions in plan view, elevation views, and Wall Details. See Moving Objects Using Dimensions on page 483. In order for a manually drawn Dimension Tool to locate framing objects as a dimension line is drawn, it must be set to do so in the Dimension Defaults dialog. See Locate Manual Panel on page 454. LAPPED AND MITERED JOINTS You can make two horizontal framing members meet at a lapped intersection using the Join and Lap Ends edit button. To join and lap framing members 1. Select a horizontal framing member such as a joist, rafter, beam, or General Framing object. 2. Click the Join and Lap Ends edit button. 3. Click on a second horizontal framing member that is not parallel to the initially selected member. 4. The two members now meet at a lapped joint. The initially selected framing member butts against the second one, which laps the end of the first. Alternatively, mitered joints can be created using the Join and Mitre Ends edit button. This edit tool is used in the same way as the Join and Lap Ends tool. The Join and Mitre Ends and Join and Lap Ends tools not available for wall studs, Posts, Floor/Ceiling Trusses, or Roof Trusses. Multiple framing objects can also be trimmed to length using the Trim Object(s) and Extend Objects edit tools. See Trim and Extend on page 272.   883 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Keeping Framing Current STEEL AND CONCRETE You can set framing defaults to generate steel framing and concrete structural members as well as lumber and other framing types. Individual framing members can also be specified as concrete or steel, as well.   When setting up defaults or modifying an individual object, make sure you specify both the desired framing Type and the material. See Framing Materials and Types on page 881. END PROFILES AND RAFTER TAILS End profile cuts can be specified for rafters, beams, joists, and General Framing objects in the Framing Specification dialog. See End Profile Panel on page 889. DELETING FRAMING Individual and group-selected framing members can be deleted the way other objects in the program are. See Deleting Objects on page 284. Categories of framing, such as wall framing or floor and ceiling framing, can also be deleted in the Delete Objects dialog. See Delete Objects Dialog on page 285. Keeping Framing Current When you modify your plan, move walls, raise or lower platforms or redesign the roof, any framing present in the plan will not update to reflect your changes. In order for the framing to be updated, you must regenerate automatically produced framing and either edit or delete and replace manual framing. For this reason, it is recommended that you wait until your model is finished, or nearly finished, before creating framing. See Drawing a Plan on page 27. AUTOMATIC FRAMING Automatically-generated framing can be rebuilt using either of two check boxes in the Build Framing dialog: l Select a Build check box to build automatic framing once. For example, check Build Wall Framing on the WALL panel to build wall framing once based on the current state of the model. If the model is changed later, you may need to do this again. l Select an Automatic check box to build automatic framing every time a change is made to that structural component in the plan. For example, check Automatic Wall Framing on the WALL panel to rebuild all wall framing any time a wall is affected by changes to the model. When floor, ceiling or roof framing is regenerated, all automatically produced framing objects and any copies of them are deleted and new framing is calculated. See Rebuilding and Retaining Framing on page 855. MANUAL FRAMING It is vital to remember that manually drawn framing objects and copies of them are not retained when automatic framing is rebuilt. If a plan is not final, therefore, do not spend a lot of time altering or copying automatically produced framing objects. It is best to wait until your design is final before doing manual framing work. 884 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Build Framing for Selected Object(s) BUILD FRAMING FOR SELECTED OBJECT If changes are made to a wall, floor platform, roof plane, or ceiling plane that require its framing to be rebuilt, you do not have to rebuild all of the framing in that object’s category.  Instead, select the object and click the Build Framing for Selected Object edit button. The floor framing for a selected room can be rebuilt in this matter, as well. See Build Framing for Selected Object(s) on page 885.   Build Framing for Selected Object(s) The Build Framing for Selected Object(s) edit tool allows you to build or rebuild the framing for a selected wall, floor platform, Roof Plane, Ceiling Plane, or Tray Ceiling Polyline. It also allows you to ensure that a truss's envelope and webbing are up-to-date. Note: The Build Framing for Selected Object(s) edit tool is not available if the selected object has Retain Framing specified. See Rebuilding and Retaining Framing on page 855.   FRAMING FOR WALLS The Build Framing for Selected Object(s) edit tool is available for walls using a framed wall type and for railings specified as Solid, but not for other types of walls and railings. See Wall Type Definitions on page 384. FRAMING FOR ROOMS The Build Framing for Selected Object(s) edit tool is only available for rooms that have Floor Under This Room checked, Monolithic Slab Foundation unchecked, and a framing material specified in its Floor Structure Definition. See Structure Panel on page 439.   If the selected room is adjacent to other rooms that are in the same Framing Group, the program will ask whether you would like to create a new Framing Group for the selected room:   l Click Yes to create a new Framing Group, assign the selected room to it, and generate floor framing for that room.   l Click No to generate floor framing across the entire platform using the existing Framing Group assignments.   See Framing Groups on page 851.   TRAY CEILING POLYLINES The Build Framing for Selected Object(s) edit tool will generate framing for the side walls and ceilings of a selected Tray Ceiling Polyline. This button is not available, however, if the selected Tray Ceiling Polyline has a Caution symbol indicating that its shape or position is not supported. See Tray and Coffered Ceilings on page 430. REBUILDING TRUSSES If you make changes to a selected truss that affect its envelope or webbing, click the Rebuild Framing for Selected Object (s) edit button to ensure that its configuration is up-to-date. This performs the same action as checking Force Truss Rebuild in the Truss Specification dialog. See Editing Truss Envelopes on page 900. 885 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Framing and the Materials List Framing and the Materials List Each framing member created in a plan is counted in the Materials List. See Materials Lists on page 1303. Framing can be calculated using one of several reporting methods. See Structural Member Reporting on page 1306.   Depending on what a framing member is used for, it may be listed in the Framing (F), Subfloor (SF), or Roofing (R) category. See Categories on page 1311. l Framing includes all wall framing, posts, and General Framing objects. l Sub Floor lists floor and ceiling framing joists as well as sheathing. l Roofing includes trusses, rafters, and sheathing. It is important to note that the floor, ceiling, and roof framing counted in the Materials List may vary considerably depending on whether framing of those types is actually present in the plan: l If no framing is present in the model, then the required floor, ceiling, and roof framing is estimated. Total linear footage for various depths of rafters and joists is estimated, rather than a quantity of specific lumber lengths and sizes. Wall framing is not estimated. l If even one floor, ceiling, or roof framing object exists in the plan, then objects in that category are counted instead of estimated for the Materials List. STRUCTURE TYPES A variety of structural member Types is available for use in Chief Architect Premier. They fall into four categories: l Wood framing types: Lumber, I-Joist, Glulam, Engineered Lumber, LVL, PSL, and VSL. l Steel framing types: Steel I, Steel Box, C Channel, and U Channel. l Solid Concrete. l Round (Posts only). You can select any of these Types as the default for floor and ceiling framing, headers, roof framing, beams, and posts. See Build Framing Dialog on page 860. You can also specify the Type for individual framing members in their specification dialog. See General Panel on page 887. Changing the framing member Type does not affect how framing is placed, but it may change its profile in cross section and 3D views and will affect its description in the Materials List. The framing member Type does not affect the appearance of the material used by a framing member in 3D views. See Framing Materials and Types on page 881. STRUCTURAL MEMBER REPORTING You can specify whether framing materials are calculated by linear foot, as a cut list, or as a buy list. See Structural Member Reporting on page 1306. FRAMING MATERIALS AND THE MATERIALS PANEL The materials applied to framing objects in 3D views are not used in the Materials List. Materials List information is derived from the structural use of each framing object and its Type - not the material seen on its surfaces in 3D views. See Materials Panel on page 875. 886 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Framing Specification Dialog Framing Specification Dialog Select a framing member and click the Open Object edit button to open the Framing Specification dialog for the type of framing member selected. The settings in this dialog are similar to those in the Post and Beam Specification and Defaults dialogs. See Framing with Beams on page 856. You can also open the specification dialog for the framing objects(s) associated with a schedule row. See Open Row Object (s) on page 686.   The panels available in the Framing Specification dialog will vary, depending on the type of framing object that is selected. GENERAL PANEL The options available in on the GENERAL panel will vary depending on the type of framing member selected. Automatic Height l When Automatic Height is checked, the selected Roof Rafter, Roof Beam, or Roof Blocking object generates within the structural layer of the roof plane(s) it is drawn in. Uncheck this box to enable the Manual Height settings 887 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Framing Specification Dialog that follow. l If the selected object’s height is edited outside this dialog, Automatic Height will become unchecked automatically. Depth and Height l Check the box beside Raise/Lower, then enter a positive value to raise or negative value to lower the framing object from its current position. The amount is added to both the Top and Bottom Heights when you click either Apply or OK, and does not affect the Depth. When Raise/Lower is checked, the other Depth and Height settings are disabled. l Select the radio button beside one of the height values to Lock it, then change a value that remains available. l Specify the Top Height of the post, as measured from the first floor subfloor at 0”. For a rafter, this is the top height at its low end. l Specify the Bottom Height of the post, as measured from the first floor subfloor at 0”. For a rafter, this is the bottom height its low end. l Specify the Depth of the framing object. For a rafter, this is the depth measured perpendicular to the roof plane. l Manual Rafter Height - Normally, the height of each Rafter or Roof Beam end is reset after any move or edit so that it is located just under the roof surface. Check this box to allow the height of the object to be changed. Only available for Rafters and Roof Beams. Options l Set the framing member’s Width, as seen in plan view. l Specify a selected wall framing member’s Thickness, as seen in plan view. Only available for wall framing. l Select the selected framing member's structural Role from the drop-down list. See Framing Types and Roles on page 853. l Select a structural member Type from the drop-down list. The Round Type is unique to Posts. See Structure Types on page 886. l Check Show Cross to display the selected Post as a cross box in plan view. Only available for Posts. See Displaying Framing on page 879. Note: Instead of counting individual concrete posts and beams in the Materials List, the total volume of their concrete is calculated. The square footage for beam and post forms is also listed. l Check Bearing Beam to specify the selected Floor/Ceiling Beam as a load-bearing beam. When checked, automatically generated joists run perpendicular to the selected beam and either lap or butt over it, as specified in the Build Framing dialog. If the beam’s Top Height is at least 1” higher than the joists’ bottom height, the joists will instead butt against the sides of the beam. See Framing with Beams on page 856. Only available for Floor/Ceiling Beams. l Check Treated to specify that the selected framing member be counted as treated in framing schedules and the Materials List. l The Rotate options let you rotate and align a selected wall stud, blocking, or header within the wall’s framing layer. Select None for the framing member’s Thickness to span the depth of the framing layer; select Flat to Outside to rotate the member 90° and align it with the outside of the framing layer; select Flat to Inside to rotate the member 90° and align it with the inside of the framing layer. 888 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Framing Specification Dialog Length and Angle Lock the point about which you want like the selected object to resize and/or rotate, then specify its exact length and angle. See Editing Framing on page 882. l Specify the Length of the framing object. Rafter length is measured along the top of the rafter, and so is greater than the length measured in plan view. Not available for Posts. l Width 1 and 2 - Specify the Post width in each dimension. When a Round Post is specified, Width 1 refers to its diameter and Width 2 is not available. l Specify the Angle of the framing object in plan view. Changing this rotates the object about the location specified by the radio buttons described below. l Select Lock Center to resize or rotate the object about its center point. l Select Lock Start to resize or rotate the object about the location from which you started drawing the framing object. l Select Lock End to resize or rotate the object about the location where you stopped drawing it. Concrete Beam Options Specify the Rebar and Stirrups for concrete Posts and Beams. These settings are only available when the selected object is a Post or Beam and “Solid Concrete” is selected from the Type drop-down list.   l Specify the Size Number for both Rebar and Stirrups.   l Specify the Count, or number of bars, for both Rebar and Stirrups.   l Specify the length of Rebar Extensions.   l Specify the distance that Stirrups Overlap.   RAFTER TAILS PANEL The RAFTER TAILS panel is only available for rafters, rafter lookouts, and subfascia. The settings here allow you to specify a rafter tail profile for exposed end rafter ends under roof eaves. The default Rafter Tail profile can be specified in the Build Roof dialog. See Rafter Tails Panel on page 803.   END PROFILE PANEL The END PROFILE panel is available for joists, beams, and General Framing members. The settings here allow you to specify a decorative profile for one or both ends of these objects. The default profile for beams can be set in the Floor Beam, Roof Beam, and Deck Beam Defaults dialogs. See Moldings / / Profiles / Rails / Panels on page 927.   LINE STYLE PANEL The settings on the LINE STYLE panel affect the selected object’s line style, its bumping behaviors, and its drawing order. See Line Style Panel on page 305. 889 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Export to EasyFrame FILL STYLE PANEL For floor, ceiling, and roof framing, and General Framing, the settings on the FILL STYLE panel affect the selected object’s appearance in plan view. See Fill Style Panel and Dialogs on page 193. For studs and other wall framing that displays as a cross box in plan view, the settings on this panel affect the selected object’s appearance in Wall Details. See In Wall Detail Views on page 880.   For headers only, the FILL STYLE panel allows you to control the appearance of the selected object in both plan view and Wall Details. Click either of the Fill Style buttons to open the Plan View Fill Style or Wall Detail Fill Style dialog.   MATERIALS PANEL The default materials on this panel are set in the Build Framing dialog. If you change the selected object’s framing Type, the material here may update - unless you have previously specified a non-default material. See Materials Panel on page 1055. LABEL PANEL Framing labels can display in plan view and cross section/elevation views when the “Framing, Labels” layer is turned on and use the Text Style assigned to that layer. See Text Styles on page 538.   Automatically generated wall framing can also display in Wall Detail views. When accessed from a Wall Detail, this panel will have Wall Detail Position and Orientation settings.   For more information about the settings on this panel, see Label Panel on page 700.   Note: If a framing member is listed in a schedule using callout labels, the settings here are overridden and the schedule label is used instead. COMPONENTS PANEL The information on the COMPONENTS panel can be used in the materials list. For more information, see Components Panel on page 1330.   OBJECT INFORMATION PANEL The information entered on the OBJECT INFORMATION panel can be used in schedules and the materials list. For more information, see Object Information Panel on page 1331.   SCHEDULE PANEL The settings on the SCHEDULE panel determine which schedule categories the selected object is included in. See Schedule Panel on page 704.   Export to EasyFrame The EasyFrame Automated Marking System is a machine used for cutting construction framing parts and putting layout markings on those parts. You can export wall framing information from a Chief Architect plan for use in this system. For more information, visit: www.easyframesaw.com. 890 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Export to EasyFrame BEFORE EXPORTING Before exporting to Easy Frame, you need to prepare your plan so the exported data meets your needs. To prepare wall framing for export to EasyFrame 1. Draw the plan as you normally would. 2. Uncheck Auto Merge Collinear Walls in the General Wall Defaults dialog. See General Wall Defaults on page 343. 3. Use the Add Break edit tool to create wall segments that correspond to the panels or plate lengths you want. See Add Break on page 254. 4. Build wall framing. See Build Framing Dialog on page 860. 5. Inspect the framing and make any changes that you may need. See Editing Framing on page 882. 6. Export the wall framing information to EasyFrame: l Select File> Export> Export All Wall Framing to EasyFrame to export information about all wall framing in the plan. l Select one or more walls that you would like to export the framing information for and click the Export All Wall Framing to EasyFrame edit button. See The Edit Toolbar on page 130. EXPORT TO EASYFRAME DIALOG To export a plan’s wall framing information for use with EasyFrame, select File> Export> Export All Wall Framing to EasyFrame . Chief Architect Premier exports using the .ezf file format. You can also select one or more walls in a plan and click the Export Selected Wall Framing to EasyFrame edit button. The Export to EasyFrame dialog reports any wall framing boards that either cannot be exported to EasyFrame or may be too long to cut from a longer board. 891 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Export to EasyFrame Allowed Board Lengths l Select a Buy List from the Allowed Board Length (Buy List) drop-down list to specify the available board lengths that wall framing can be cut from. See Structural Member Reporting on page 1306.   l Click the Add button to create a new Buy List based on the one that is currently selected. Type a short, descriptive name for the new Buy List, then modify its settings as needed.   l Click the Edit button to open the Structural Member Reporting dialog for the selected Buy List and make any changes you may need.   l Click the Rename button to type a new name for the selected Buy List.   l Click the Delete button to remove the selected Buy List from the list of those available in the current plan. If a Buy List is either set as the default or in use by a Materials List, it cannot be deleted. Boards Too Long to Cut Boards that are too long to be cut from available lengths can be exported to EasyFrame, but are not set to do so by default.   l Click the Add, Edit, Rename, or Delete button to manage the list of available Buy Lists in the current plan.   l The Labels of any walls in the plan with boards that are too long to be cut from any of the boards in the selected Allowed Board Length Buy List are listed here. See Wall Labels on page 364.   l By default, no walls in this list will be included in the export. Click on a line item to select it, then click in the Export Anyway column to add a check mark and include it in the export.   l With a line item selected, click the Find in Plan button to close the dialog and select the wall in question in plan view. See Finding Objects on page 211. 892 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Export to EasyFrame l Click the Skip All button to clear remove all check marks from the Export Anyway column. l Click the Include All button to add check marks in the Export Anyway column for all line items.   Curved Wall Framing Framing in curved walls cannot be exported to EasyFrame. This section will only be present in the dialog if there are one or more curved walls in the plan. See Drawing Curved Walls on page 360.   l The Labels of any curved walls in the plan are listed here.   l Select a line item in the list and click the Find in Plan button to close the dialog and select the wall in question in plan view.   Not Orthogonal Framing Framing that is not orthogonal to the direction of its parent wall cannot be exported to EasyFrame. This section will only be present in the dialog if there are one or more walls in the plan that have non-orthogonal framing members. See Editing Framing on page 882.   l The Labels of any walls in the plan that have non-orthogonal framing members are listed here.   l Select a line item in the list and click the Find in Plan button to close the dialog and select the wall in question in plan view. See Finding Objects on page 211.   When you click OK, the Save EasyFrame File dialog opens. This is a typical Save File dialog. See Saving, Exporting, and Backing Up Files on page 39. If any excluded boards are listed in this dialog when you click OK, a Confirmation message will first ask whether you want to continue. 893

Trusses Chapter 25 There are two basic ways to frame a roof. The first is commonly called “stick framing,” or sometimes “handstacking” or “cut-and-stack.” This type of roof incorporates framing such as rafters, ridges, and ceiling joists. See Framing on page 850. The other method is to use prefabricated, engineered roof trusses. Chief Architect allows you to design and display a wide variety of trusses. DISCLAIMER Chief Architect does not engineer trusses. The trusses displayed by Chief Architect are for illustrative purposes only. They can show how trusses are used in your plan, and help you communicate to the licensed engineer who produces your final truss design where you want your trusses and how you would like them to work. Always have your truss designs approved by a licensed engineer. TOPICS Truss Defaults 895 Floor and Ceiling Trusses 895 Roof Trusses 895 Drawing Trusses 896 Displaying Trusses 897 Editing Trusses 898 Editing Truss Envelopes 900 Truss Details 901 Truss Labels 902 Mixing Trusses with Stick Framing 902 Truss Bases 903 Truss Base Specification Dialog 907 Hip Trusses 908 Special Roof Trusses 909 Roof Truss Specification Dialog 912 Floor/Ceiling Truss Specification Dialog 916 Framing and Truss Schedules 919 894 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Truss Defaults Truss Defaults The default settings for floor, ceiling and roof trusses are set in the Framing Defaults dialog. Select Edit> Default Settings and in the Default Settings dialog, select Framing and click the Edit button. l The default settings for truss chord and webbing depth, maximum span, and kingpost are set in the Framing Defaults dialog. See Trusses Panel on page 872. l The overall depth of individual Floor/Ceiling Trusses are based on the thicknesses of the platforms in which they are drawn. See Floor Panels on page 860. l The structure of Roof Trusses is determined by the position of the roof plane(s) above and the ceiling plane(s) below. See Roof Planes on page 804 and Ceiling Planes on page 826. You can also set the Heel Height for Roof Trusses in the Build Roof dialog. See Roof Panel on page 798. Floor and Ceiling Trusses Floor and ceiling trusses can be used instead of joists to frame platforms. As with floor and ceiling joists, the presence of a room above determines whether a platform is a floor or a ceiling and thus, whether a floor or ceiling truss is drawn. For example, a truss drawn on the first floor of a single story home will be a ceiling truss, while a truss drawn on the first floor of a two-story building will be a floor truss for the 2nd floor. A floor or ceiling truss can only exist in a floor or ceiling platform. The vertical depth of the truss is defined by the Thickness of the platform's framing layer, so if you intend to use floor/ceiling trusses you should set your platform depths accordingly. See Floor and Ceiling Platforms on page 428. To generate floor and/or ceiling trusses automatically in a platform, select "Truss" as the Structure Type for the platform structure's Framing layer and then use the Build Framing dialog to generate floor/ceiling framing. See Floor Panels on page 860. To draw a floor or ceiling truss manually, select Build> Framing> Floor/Ceiling Truss , then click and drag within a floor or ceiling platform in plan view. A Framing layer in the platform structure is required; however, its Structure Type does not have to be "Truss". See Drawing Trusses on page 896. To create a sloped ceiling truss, draw a Roof Truss and specify it as a Sloping Flat Truss. See General Panel on page 912. The TRUSSES panel of the Build Framing dialog contains default settings for floor and ceiling trusses. See Trusses Panel on page 872. These default settings can be overridden by the settings in the Floor/Ceiling Truss Specification dialog. See Floor/Ceiling Truss Specification Dialog on page 916. Roof Trusses Roof trusses can be used instead of or in combination with rafters to frame roofs and ceilings. Roof trusses can be automatically generated or drawn manually, and can only be created where a roof and ceiling are already present. To draw a roof truss, select Build> Framing> Roof Truss, then click and drag in plan view within one or more roof planes. See Drawing Trusses on page 896. If you intend to use roof trusses, you should build your roof planes with this in mind: 895 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Drawing Trusses l Before building the roof, select Trusses as the roof Framing Method in the Build Roof dialog. When this is selected, roof plane Structure Thickness is based on the default Top Chord Depth set in the Framing Defaults dialog. See Trusses Panel on page 872. l If Rafters is selected as the Framing Method, roof Structure Thickness is determined by the rafter Depth setting on the ROOF panel of the Framing Defaults dialog. l If you plan to use both trusses and rafters, build the roof using Rafters as the Framing Method and then manually edit the roof planes that will receive trusses. You can specify a roof plane's Framing Method in its specification dialog. See General Panel on page 814. Bear in mind that if the bottom chords of trusses form the framing for a ceiling platform, ceiling joists in that platform will not automatically generate. See Floor and Ceiling Framing on page 851. ROOF TRUSS PLACEMENT A roof truss can only exist in a space defined by the roof planes above it and the ceiling or manually drawn Ceiling Plane below it.  Roof trusses can also be created over a room with Flat Ceiling Over This Room specified provided that there is a roof directly above. This is because the shape of a truss is defined by the space between the roof above and the ceiling below. If the program either does not find both roof and ceiling planes, or if there is not enough room between them to model a truss, a warning message displays. For example, if you draw a truss in a roof overhang where there is no ceiling, this message displays: “Roof and ceiling surfaces too close together or cannot be found, so cannot make truss.” The problem truss may still display in plan view with a label of the form “TR-*”. If it does, it should be either moved or deleted. See Editing Trusses on page 898. One or both ends of a truss may be truncated if they are drawn across another truss. If this happens, it will end exactly on the surface of the existing truss, producing a girder truss. See Girder Trusses on page 911. Trusses can end on interior walls. You can draw a truss that partially crosses the building by starting and/or ending it within 24” (600mm) of an interior wall. The truss extends over the wall’s Main Layer. Its end lines up with the Main Layer surface on the far side of the wall. ROOF TRUSS WEBBING The webbing in a newly drawn truss is controlled by the Top Chord and Bottom Chord settings in the Framing Defaults dialog. See Trusses Panel on page 872. Changing these default values may cause different truss configurations such as kingpost, queenpost, fink, double fink, fan, howe, or double howe to be represented. Drawing Trusses Trusses can be generated automatically or drawn manually and replicated. Trusses are drawn similar to the way CAD lines are and can be drawn in plan view only. See Draw Line on page 300. 896 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Displaying Trusses To draw and replicate trusses 1. Select either the Floor/Ceiling Truss or Roof Truss tool, then click and drag within either a floor/ceiling platform or one or more roof planes. l As they are drawn, roof trusses will snap to any walls that they cross. l When a roof truss ends over an exterior wall, it will extend into the roof eave, stopping at the inside edge of the Eave Sub Fascia. l When a roof truss is drawn over a Full Gable Wall, it will have End Truss and Reduced Gable checked automatically. l Floor/Ceiling trusses will snap to the wall surfaces, the exterior surface of a wall’s Main Layer, as well as to a variety of CAD-based objects, and can be drawn to any length. 2. Reposition the truss: l Floor/ceiling trusses are often positioned relative to an exterior wall or Framing Reference Marker . See Framing Reference Markers on page 875. l Roof trusses are can be positioned over a gable end wall or at the ridge end of a hip. 3. Open the truss’s specification dialog and edit its settings to meet your needs. See Roof Truss Specification Dialog on page 912 or Floor/Ceiling Truss Specification Dialog on page 916. 4. Make multiple copies of the truss at specified intervals using the Multiple Copy edit tool. The copies of Roof Trusses automatically conform to the structural conditions in their new locations. As a result, replicated Roof Trusses and their labels may be different from the original. See Truss Labels on page 902. Unlike Roof Trusses, Floor/Ceiling Trusses do not conform to new structural conditions when they are either moved or copied. See Moving Trusses on page 899. To replicate trusses using Multiple Copy 1. Select the truss to be copied in plan view.   2. Click the Multiple Copy edit button.   3. Click the Multiple Copy Interval edit button to open the Multiple Copy dialog. See Multiple Copy on page 172.    4. Enter the correct spacing in the All Trusses box. Once set, click OK.   5. Select the truss and use the Move edit handle to drag it perpendicularly. The pointer becomes a four-headed arrow when it is over the Move handle.   6. New trusses appear as you drag. Drag as far as necessary to produce all desired trusses. Each truss is created according to the particular Roof/Ceiling/Truss Base planes above and below it.   Displaying Trusses The display of trusses and their labels is controlled in the Layer Display Options dialog. See Layer Display Options Dialog on page 179. Truss labels display in plan view, cross section/elevation views, and the Truss Detail, and are used in the Materials List as well as in schedules. See Truss Labels on page 902. 897 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Trusses IN 3D VIEWS The easiest way to view trusses in 3D is to use either the Orthographic Framing Overview or Perspective Framing Overview tool, which display the model using the 3D Framing Set layer set. See Framing Overview on page 1088. Trusses can display in other 3D and cross section/elevation views, although by default they are not set to do so. If you wish to see trusses in these views, turn on the “Framing, Trusses” layer in the appropriate layer set. You can create exposed trusses by placing roof and ceiling planes to produce the desired truss structure, drawing the trusses, and then removing the ceiling. See Vaulted and Cathedral Ceilings on page 435. To reveal trusses covered by other objects, you can use the Delete Surface tool. See Delete 3D Surface on page 1099. IN THE TRUSS DETAIL All the floor, ceiling and roof trusses present in the current plan display in the Truss Detail, which is a special CAD Detail window in which a diagram of each truss configuration present in the plan is automatically generated. See Truss Details on page 901.   IN THE MATERIALS LIST All trusses are listed under the Roofing category in the Materials List. Their labels appear in the Size column, along with their length. See The Materials List Tools on page 1304. IN SCHEDULES Floor, ceiling and roof trusses can be listed in schedules. See Schedules and Object Labels on page 681.   Editing Trusses Trusses can be edited much like other objects can using the edit handles, edit toolbar buttons, or the Truss Specification dialogs. See Roof Truss Specification Dialog on page 912 and Floor/Ceiling Truss Specification Dialog on page 916. SELECTING TRUSSES Before a truss can be edited, it must be selected. Like other architectural objects, Trusses can be individually and groupselected selected in all views. See Selecting Objects on page 210. To group-select trusses of a particular type, use the Marquee Select Similar tool. See Marquee Select Similar on page 214. When Start and End Indicators are enabled in the Preferences dialog, a truss selected in plan view will display an S and an E at its start and end points. See Edit Panel on page 115. Trusses can be deleted individually, or all at once in the Delete Objects dialog. See Delete Objects Dialog on page 285.   898 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Trusses USING THE EDIT HANDLES In plan view, trusses can be drawn, edited, and moved much the way CAD lines can. See Editing Line-Based Objects on page 216. When editing a roof truss’s length, bear in mind that if you position either of its ends at a location that doesn’t correspond to a roof plane edge, interior wall, or another truss, Use Special Snapping will automatically become unchecked in its specification dialog. When selected in a camera view, a truss can be edited like a closed polyline. This is not always recommended, though, because the truss may no longer match the space in the structure that it is meant to occupy. See Editing Truss Envelopes on page 900. The depth of truss chords can be changed in the truss’s specification dialog, but not using the edit handles.   USING THE EDIT TOOLS A selected truss can be edited in a variety of ways using the buttons on the Edit Toolbar. See The Edit Toolbar on page 130. Build Framing for Selected Object(s) rebuilds the envelope and webbing of the selected truss. See Editing Truss Envelopes on page 900. Move to Framing Reference moves the selection into alignment with a Framing Reference Marker. See Framing Reference Markers on page 875. Open Truss Detail opens the Truss Detail with the selected truss centered in the view. See Displaying Trusses on page 897.   USING DIMENSIONS Trusses can be repositioned precisely as well as resized using dimensions. See Moving Objects Using Dimensions on page 483. In order for a dimension tool to locate trusses as dimensions are drawn, that tool needs to be set to do so in the Dimension Defaults dialog. See Locate Manual Panel on page 454. MOVING TRUSSES Trusses can be moved using either their Move edit handle or the Transform/Replicate Object edit tool. It’s important to note that Roof and Floor/Ceiling Trusses may behave differently when they are moved: l When a Roof Truss is moved, its shape updates to conform to the structural conditions defined by the roof and ceiling in its new location. To prevent this from occurring, check Lock Truss Envelope and Webbing in the Roof Truss Specification dialog before moving the truss. See Lock Truss Envelope and Webbing on page 901. l This is not the case with Floor/Ceiling Trusses : when moved to a location with a different platform structure, a Floor/Ceiling Truss will not update to conform to its new surroundings. It is important to draw, position, and copy them within the same floor or ceiling platform structure. If a different Floor/Ceiling Truss depth is needed, a new truss should be drawn. SPECIAL TRUSS SNAPPING By default, Roof Trusses have a number of special snapping behaviors that are used even when Object Snaps are toggled off. See Object Snaps on page 160. 899 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Truss Envelopes These special behaviors include: l As they are drawn, Roof Trusses will snap to any walls that they cross. l When drawn along an exterior wall, a Roof Truss will snap so that its outer surface is flush with the outer surface of the wall's Main Layer. l When drawn along a roof plane edge, a Roof Truss will snap to the roof plane’s edge or corner. l The center line Roof Trusses will snap to the line along which two roof planes meet. l When a Roof Truss ends over an exterior wall, it will extend into the roof eave, stopping at the inside edge of the Eave Sub Fascia. Floor/Ceiling Trusses can be drawn to any length but also have special snapping: l Floor/Ceiling trusses will snap to the wall surfaces, the exterior surface of a wall’s Main Layer, as well as to a variety of CAD-based objects. If you edit a truss in such a way that its ends do not correspond to a special snapping location, Use Special Snapping will automatically become unchecked in its specification dialog. This allows you to easily customize a truss but may make it difficult to snap to commonly used locations. You can check or uncheck Use Special Snapping in the Roof Truss Specification dialog. See General Panel on page 912. DELETING TRUSSES Individual and group-selected trusses can be deleted the way other objects in the program can. See Deleting Objects on page 284. Trusses can also be deleted by category as well as floor in the Delete Objects dialog. See Delete Objects Dialog on page 285. You can also delete all instances of a particular truss by deleting its representation from the Truss Detail. See Truss Details on page 901. Editing Truss Envelopes A truss envelope is the shape defined by a truss’s top and bottom chords.  When a truss is drawn, the envelope is derived from the floor platform, ceiling platform, or roof that the truss is drawn in. When a truss is viewed in a 3D view, its envelope can be edited like a closed polyline. See Editing Closed Polyline-Based Objects on page 228. This function can be used to change a roof truss end or overhang as well as the overall truss shape. Changing the truss envelope does not change the structure that it is drawn in, however. In addition, when a Roof Truss is moved, its shape updates to conform to the structural conditions defined by the roof and ceiling in its new location. As a result, a Roof Truss’s label can change when the truss is moved to a new location. Floor/Ceiling Trusses do not update when moved to a location with different structural conditions. FORCE TRUSS REBUILD If you make changes to a selected truss that affect its envelope or webbing, click the Build Framing for Selected Object(s) edit button to ensure that its configuration is up-to-date. You can also achieve this by checking Force Truss Rebuild in the truss's specification dialog. See General Panel on page 912. 900 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Truss Details LOCK TRUSS ENVELOPE AND WEBBING The Lock Truss Envelope and Webbing attribute can be used to prevent a Roof Truss envelope from updating when it is moved or replicated. See Roof Truss Specification Dialog on page 912. Truss Details A Truss Detail is a special CAD Detail window in which a diagram of each truss configuration present in the plan is drawn. To open a plan’s Truss Detail, select CAD> CAD Detail Management . See CAD Details on page 337.   You can also select a Floor/Ceiling or Roof Truss and click the Open Truss Detail edit button. The Truss Detail will open centered on the selected truss.   A Truss Detail is created automatically when a truss is created, and displays all trusses present in the current plan. If multiple trusses are identical, they share a single diagram. Each truss’s label displays centered below the truss diagram. When automatic or custom labels are in use, the quantity of each truss configuration is also listed. See Truss Labels on page 902.   In a Truss Detail, individual chords and webbing are represented using framing members. The truss label information is presented in a Text object.   The trusses in a Truss Detail are linked to the actual trusses in the plan. If you move a truss in a Truss Detail, it will move in the model as well. Similarly, if you delete a truss from the Truss Detail, all instances of that truss will also be deleted from the model. To modify the information in a Truss Detail without affecting the model, use CAD Detail From View to create a linedrawn copy first. See CAD Detail from View on page 338.   To locate a selected truss in plan view, click the Find Trusses edit button.   Note: The Truss Detail is for display of trusses only. Editing the members that make up the trusses in the Truss Detail is possible but not recommended. 901 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Truss Labels To restore an edited Truss Detail diagram 1. Delete any new members you have drawn in the detail view.   2. In plan view, select the truss and click the Open Object edit button to open the Roof Truss Specification dialog.   3. Check Force Truss Rebuild and click OK and the truss regenerates along with its Truss Detail diagram.   Truss Labels Labels for roof  trusses display when the “Framing, Roof Truss Labels” layer is turned on in the current view. Similarly, floor and ceiling trusses display when the “Framing, Floor/Ceiling Truss Labels” is turned on. See Layer Display Options Dialog on page 179. Truss labels are available in three formats: automatic, user-specified, and schedule callouts. See Label Panel on page 700. Truss labels can display in plan view, cross section/elevation views, and the Truss Detail. Automatic and user-specified labels are used in the Label column of the Materials List. See Displaying Trusses on page 897. Truss labels use the Text Style specified for their layer in the current view. See Text Styles on page 538. By default, truss labels are centered on the truss that they identify. If the truss is moved or deleted, the label is moved or deleted as well. With the exception of those in the Truss Detail, truss labels have their own Move and Rotate edit handles which display when the truss is selected. See Editing Trusses on page 898. Truss labels obey the Minimum Display Size for labels set in the Preferences dialog. See Appearance Panel on page 95. If two or more trusses share the same configuration with identical chords and webbing, they will also share the same truss label. In the Truss Detail, automatic and user-specified labels shared by multiple trusses will be followed by the total number of those trusses, in parentheses. AUTOMATIC TRUSS LABELS Automatic roof truss labels use the format TR-X, where X is a number indicating the order in which each distinct truss configuration was created. For example, the first truss type created in a plan is labeled TR-1; the second, TR-2; and so on. Floor and ceiling trusses are labeled FTR-X and use the same numbering convention. Mixing Trusses with Stick Framing After the trusses for your roof are in place, additional roof framing can be added. See Roof Framing on page 853. FRAMING DEFAULTS Roof planes created using defaults set up for trusses will continue to use those defaults when stick framing is added. If you intend to add rafters, the roof planes should be created while Trusses (no Birdsmouth) is unchecked in the Build Roof dialog. See Roof Panel on page 798. Leaving Trusses (no Birdsmouth) unchecked has a similar effect on roof trusses to that of Raise Off Plate: roof truss bottom chords may be longer than expected and their top chords, higher. This is necessary to create the space needed to accommodate the rafter’s depth. 902 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Truss Bases AUTOMATIC FRAMING The Build Framing dialog can be used to generate roof framing in areas not framed by the trusses, including gable eaves and the ends of hips. Note that rafters will not generate closer than 14” (350mm) to an existing, parallel truss. Automatically generated roof framing will not extend through an existing roof truss. Instead: l Automatically produced rafters generate inward from the eave until they butt into a truss. l Blocking for standard and hip ridges generates as individual rafter objects between trusses. l Lookouts will pass over Reduced Gable trusses and will end at the next truss in. See Roof Truss Specification Dialog on page 912. l Hip ridges and common rafters at the end of a hip roof will pass over a Drop Hip Truss. See Drop Hip or California Hip on page 908. MANUALLY DRAWN FRAMING Unlike automatically generated roof framing, manually drawn rafters will extend through trusses. Rafters can also snap to truss edges as they are being drawn or when they are being edited. See Manual Framing on page 854. Truss Bases A Truss Base is a closed polyline that defines the area in which valley fill roof trusses are to be built across and above the tops of normal, full size roof trusses.   Valley fill trusses are often used in reverse gable conditions, where a roof ridge builds onto a roof plane that has a ridge running at a different angle. A classic example of this is an “L” shaped house with a gable roof. The main portion of the house is trussed through from end to end with normal trusses. Starting at its outside end, the smaller wing is trussed with normal trusses until the main house is reached. Where the wing’s roof builds over the main house, valley fill trusses are used.   903 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Truss Bases Normal roof trusses are built between roof planes and ceiling planes. See Roof Trusses on page 895. Valley fill roof trusses created using a Truss Base, on the other hand, are built between a larger, supporting roof plane below and overbuilt roof planes above.   Truss bases are drawn and can be edited much like roof planes, with some limitations. See Truss Base Specification Dialog on page 907.   To work correctly, a truss base must be in the same plane with the underlying roof plane, so their baselines should be collinear.   To create a truss base 1. Create an L-shaped house with a reverse gable roof.   The triangular area of overlap between the main roof and the gable must be defined as a Truss Base.   2. Select Build> Roof> Truss Base , then draw a baseline that is collinear with the baseline of the roof plane that will support the overbuild. See The Baseline on page 805.   904 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Truss Bases 3. Move the pointer and click on the point where the gable intersects the main roof.   4. A rectangular Truss Base is created. Use its edit handles to reposition it and change its shape as needed.   l The two angled sides should be collinear with the roof valleys.   l The straight bottom edge must remain collinear with the Truss Base baseline and that of the underlying roof plane.   5. Draw the normal Roof Trusses across the length of the main portion of the house. See Roof Trusses on page 895.   l The trusses of the underlying roof generate through the Truss Base, but stop at the Truss Base’s bottom edge so that no overhang is produced in that area.   905 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Truss Bases 6. When the trusses of the underlying roof are in place, draw the first truss of the reverse gable and position it over the outer wall.   7. With this truss selected, click the Multiple Copy edit button and drag the Move edit handle up to the peak of the Truss Base.   l Copies of the truss appear as you drag the pointer.   l The truss copies all appear to be full length until you release the mouse.   Trusses drawn perpendicular to the baseline of a Truss Base go under the Truss Base. Trusses drawn parallel to the baseline of the Truss Base become valley fill trusses drawn over it. 8. When you release the mouse button, any copies drawn in the Truss Base are clipped by it.   906 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Truss Base Specification Dialog EDITING TRUSS BASES A selected truss base can be edited in plan view using edit handles, edit toolbar buttons, and the Truss Base Specification dialog.   Truss bases can be edited much the way roof planes can, with some limitations. They are not actual 3D objects, so they cannot be assigned materials, moldings or other design attributes; however, their shape, height, pitch and display can be edited.  See Editing Roof and Ceiling Planes on page 808.   Truss Base Specification Dialog Select a truss base and click the Open Object edit button to open the Truss Base Specification dialog. See Truss Bases on page 903. This dialog  is almost identical to the Roof Plane Specification dialog. Although truss bases are not the same as roof planes, Chief Architect handles the positioning of the two in a similar manner.   GENERAL PANEL Four values define 3D orientation of a truss base: Ridge/Top Height, Baseline Height, Fascia Top Height, and Pitch. These values are related; if one is changed, the others change as well. These values are measured from the first floor elevation of 0’ 0". Baseline Height and Pitch should be set identical to those of the roof plane that surrounds the truss base. Click the radio button to the right of a value to define it as the pivot point for the truss base and prevent it from being changed. Changing these values does not affect the 2D representation of the truss base. Specify the Height/Pivot of the selected truss base. l Specify the Ridge/Top height, which is the truss base’s highest point. l Specify the Baseline height. l Specify the Fascia top height, which is the truss base’s lowest point. Usually, this is the same height as the Baseline. l Specify the Pitch of the selected truss base. If you lock the pitch and change one of the Height values, the truss base moves vertically keeping the same slope. l Check Pitch in Degrees to display the Pitch value in degrees rather than run-and-rise units. 907 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Hip Trusses POLYLINE PANEL The POLYLINE panel states the length of the truss base’s Perimeter and its enclosed Area. Truss bases have no thickness, so they do not have a Volume. See Polyline Panel on page 317.   SELECTED LINE PANEL For information about the SELECTED LINE panel, see Line Panel on page 304.   LINE STYLE PANEL The settings on the LINE STYLE panel affect the appearance of the selected Truss Base in plan view. For information about these settings, see Line Style Panel on page 305.   FILL STYLE PANEL The settings on the FILL STYLE panel affect the appearance of the selected Truss Base in plan view. For information about the settings on this panel, see Fill Style Panel and Dialogs on page 193.   Hip Trusses A variety of different hip truss configurations can be created, including: STEP DOWN HIP Step Down hip roofs are the quickest style of hip truss framing to produce. To create a step down hip truss system 1. First, draw a Roof Truss at the apex of the triangular hip roof plane. When Object Snaps are enabled, it will snap into position. See Object Snaps on page 160. 2. Select the truss; click the Multiple Copy edit button; and click and drag the Move handle down into the hip to create copies at regular intervals. See To replicate trusses using Multiple Copy on page 897.   3. Stop when the height of the hip truss reaches a reasonable minimum.   4. Using the Roof Truss tool, draw hip jacks along the hip ridge from the last truss out into the overhang. 5. Using the Roof Truss tool, draw a jack truss from the intersection of the last hip truss and the hip jack to the eave. 6. Select the jack truss; click the Multiple Copy   edit button; and lay out jack trusses up to the other hip jack. DROP HIP OR CALIFORNIA HIP A Drop Hip, or California Hip, system uses trusses with lowered top chords to support stick frame hip ridges and common rafters. 908 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Special Roof Trusses To create a drop hip truss system 1. Start a drop hip truss system as you would a step down hip system. See Step Down Hip on page 908. 2. When the hip trusses are drawn, group select them, open the Truss Specification dialog, and select the Drop Hip Truss check box. See General Panel on page 912. 3. Use the Build Framing dialog to produce the common rafters, and the short joists at the hip end. See Build Framing Dialog on page 860. The amount that the top chord is lowered is derived from the rafter Depth on the ROOF panel of the Framing Defaults dialog. Because both common rafters and hip ridges must pass over this truss, the ridge depth should be set equal to that of the rafter depth. SUBGIRDER HIP Sub-girders are the partial trusses that butt into a reinforced girder truss at the end of the main run. Girder trusses and subgirders can be generated automatically, and you can specify the girder count as well as its distance from the end wall. See Roof Panel on page 869. Girder trusses and subgirders can also be drawn manually. To create a subgirder truss system manually 1. Draw a Roof Truss and position it as needed: for example, where the hip apex meets the ridge. 2. Double it by drawing a second truss on the far side from the hip section. 3. Using the Roof Truss tool, draw the first subgirder from the hip apex out to the eaves. 4. Select it and use the Multiple Copy edit button to make copies in both directions. Stop when the height of the subgirders reach a reasonable minimum. 5. Finish off with hip jacks and jack trusses as in a step down hip system. Special Roof Trusses A number of special purpose roof trusses can be created in Chief Architect. ENERGY HEELS An energy heel or raised heel truss is created when the roof is raised off of the wall top plates, creating space for additional insulation. When this is the case, a vertical member positioned over the supporting exterior wall is added to the truss. Energy Heel Truss 909 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Special Roof Trusses To create an energy heel 1. In the Build Roof dialog: l Specify the Framing Type as Trusses; l Specify the desired Heel Height; 2. Automatically generate or manually draw the roof planes. 3. Automatically generate roof framing or manually draw Roof Trusses. See To draw and replicate trusses on page 897. 4. By default, the bottom chord extends out to the subfascia. If a truss is moved or replicated into a position where an Energy Heel is required, open the truss’s specification dialog, check Energy Heel and Force Truss Rebuild, then click OK. See General Panel on page 912. Energy Heel Truss with shortened bottom chord 5. Use the Multiple Copy edit tool to make additional copies of that truss as needed. ATTIC TRUSSES Attic trusses, a variation of roof trusses, can be drawn if a plan contains an Attic area on both sides and above an upstairs room, such as in a Cape Cod style home. The following is a typical cross section view of a building with attic trusses: Structure that meets requirements for Attic Trusses Certain conditions must be met before an attic truss can be built: l The structure should be sufficiently wide to allow for a loft and attic spaces. l The loft area must be on a living floor. It cannot be on the Attic floor. See The Attic Floor on page 738. l The loft area must have Attic rooms on both sides. See Room Types and Functions on page 415. l The loft area must be separated from the Attic rooms on both sides by Knee Walls. See Knee Walls on page 380. l A flat ceiling in the loft area and a floor below must be present. l The roof pitch must be steep enough to provide appropriate ceiling height for the loft area. Typical pitches for such a condition are 8 in 12 or greater. l The roof should bear on the walls of the floor below the loft area and form continuous planes from ridge to baselines. 910 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Special Roof Trusses Once these conditions are met, a roof truss is ready to be designated as an attic truss. 1. Select the roof truss in plan view and click the Open Object edit button to display the GENERAL panel of the Roof Truss Specification dialog. 2. Check the box beside Attic Truss and click OK. See Roof Truss Specification Dialog on page 912. Attic Truss The final product can be viewed in a framing overview or in the Truss Detail. See Truss Details on page 901.   SCISSORS TRUSSES Trusses drawn between roof planes and sloping ceiling planes of a different pitch than the roof are called  Scissor trusses. See Ceiling Planes on page 826. The following is an example of a scissors truss drawn beneath an 8 in 12 pitch gable roof and above 4 in 12 pitch ceiling planes. Scissor Truss GIRDER TRUSSES Girder trusses provide extra support for various purposes. Hip end girder trusses consisting of two or more trusses side by side can be generated automatically. See Hip Trusses on page 908. Other types of girder trusses can be drawn manually. Draw a new truss from an existing truss to the roof edge, as you would to draw a hip or end jack truss; or draw a truss between two trusses, forming a girder. This may be necessary for a large opening, such as a skylight. 911 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Roof Truss Specification Dialog Girder Trusses reinforcing a skylight hole Trusses cannot be drawn through each other. If a truss is drawn through an existing truss, the program automatically shortens it so that it butts into the existing truss. SLOPING FLAT TRUSSES A sloping flat truss is a roof truss that builds within the structural layer of the roof plane(s) it is drawn in. In order to create one, the roof plane(s) must have a structural layer deep enough to accommodate its chords and webbing. Sloping Flat Truss To create a sloping flat truss 1. Select the roof plane in which you would like to draw sloping flat trusses and click the Open Object edit button. 2. On the STRUCTURE panel of the Roof Plane Specification dialog, specify the roof Structure depth as the desired depth of the sloping flat truss. See Structure Panel on page 817. 3. Select the roof truss and click the Open Object edit button. 4. On the GENERAL panel of the Roof Truss Specification dialog, check the boxes beside Sloping Flat Truss and Force Truss Rebuild, then click OK. See General Panel on page 912. 5. Use the Multiple Copy edit tool to replicate the truss within the area of the roof plane(s) edited in step 2. Roof Truss Specification Dialog Select a roof truss or group of roof trusses and click the Open Object edit button to open the Roof Truss Specification dialog. The Roof Truss Specification dialog allows you to redefine parts of an existing truss or group of trusses. Some settings affect only individual trusses, such as gable trusses, while others affect the whole group. The shape or volume of a roof truss is controlled by the roof planes above it and the ceiling planes below it. It cannot be changed from this dialog. Truss webbing is drawn for representational purposes only and as with trusses in Chief Architect in general, is not engineered. The Roof Truss Specification dialog has the following panels:   GENERAL PANEL The defaults for many of the settings on the GENERAL panel are set in the Build Framing dialog. See Trusses Panel on page 872. 912 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Roof Truss Specification Dialog Member Sizing Specify the sizes of the different members that form the selected truss.   l Specify the depths of the Top Chord and Bottom Chord. l Specify the depth of the Webbing. l Specify the Thickness, which is the width of the truss in plan view. A. Top Chord B. Webbing C. Bottom Chord Maximum Span Specify the Maximum Span, which is the maximum horizontal distance between supports along the Top and Bottom Chords. When these values are equal, the truss webbing often appears more regular. Options Additional Options allow you to create special truss types. 913 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Roof Truss Specification Dialog l Check Require Kingpost to require a vertical webbing member from the roof peak to the bottom chord. Roof Truss with Kingpost l If Require Kingpost is unchecked, a kingpost may still be supplied, depending on the truss length and the specified maximum spans.   l Check End Truss to replace the webbing with vertical members positioned and spaced the same as the wall studs below. End Truss l If an End Truss is in the same position as an Attic wall, it replaces the framing that would otherwise be produced for that wall when Include Automatic End Truss Above is checked in the specification dialog for the wall below. See Roof Panel on page 398.   l Check Energy Heel to remove the bottom chord from the overhang area. For an energy heel to be modeled and for this setting to have an effect, the roof should also be raised off the top plates by at least 7”, depending on the roof pitch. See Energy Heels on page 909.   Energy Heel Truss with shortened bottom chord l Check Drop Hip Truss to lower the flat top of a truss in the hip area of a roof so that common rafters and hip ridges can pass over and be supported by it. See Drop Hip or California Hip on page 908.   l Check Reduced Gable to lower the top chord of an End Truss so that lookouts can pass over the truss. Reduced trusses do not have overhangs, but you can draw short rafters drawn at the ends of the truss. 914 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Roof Truss Specification Dialog The Insert End Truss in Attic Wall option in the Wall Specification dialog automatically produces a Reduced Gable End Truss above a selected wall. See Structure Panel on page 395. l Check Attic Truss to specify an attic truss. See Attic Trusses on page 910.   l Check Sloping Flat Truss to create a truss with a bottom chord that follows the underside of the roof plane(s) it is drawn in. When this is unchecked, the bottom chord follows the ceiling of the room or manually drawn ceiling plane below. See Sloping Flat Trusses on page 912.   l Check Force Truss Rebuild to rebuild the truss envelope based on the current state of the ceiling and roof when you click OK. See Force Truss Rebuild on page 900.   l Check Lock Truss Envelope and Webbing to lock the size and configuration of the selected truss. If a locked truss is moved, it will maintain its original settings and will not fit properly if the new roof and ceiling conditions are different from the original. See Lock Truss Envelope and Webbing on page 901.   l Uncheck Use Special Snapping to prevent the selected truss from using special truss snapping behavior. This box may become unchecked automatically if you edit a truss using its edit handles. When unchecked, Object Snaps may still occur. See Special Truss Snapping on page 899. Preview A preview of the selected truss displays on the right side of the panel. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22. LINE STYLE PANEL The settings on this panel affect the appearance of the selected truss in plan view only. See Line Style Panel on page 305. FILL STYLE PANEL The settings on this panel affect the appearance of the selected truss in plan view. See Fill Style Panel and Dialogs on page 193. MATERIALS PANEL The settings on the MATERIALS panel affect the appearance of the selected truss in 3D views. See Materials Panel on page 1055. 915 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Floor/Ceiling Truss Specification Dialog LABEL PANEL Roof truss labels can display in plan view and cross section/elevation views when the “Framing, Roof Truss Labels” layer is turned on and use the Text Style assigned to that layer. See Text Styles on page 538. Truss labels also display in the Truss Detail. See Truss Details on page 901.   For more information about the settings on this panel, see  Label Panel on page 700.   Note: If a truss is listed in a schedule using callout labels, the settings here are overridden and the schedule label is used instead. COMPONENTS PANEL The information on the COMPONENTS panel can be used in the materials list. For more information, see Components Panel on page 1330.   OBJECT INFORMATION PANEL The information entered on the OBJECT INFORMATION panel can be used in schedules and the materials list. For more information, see Object Information Panel on page 1331.   SCHEDULE PANEL The settings on the SCHEDULE panel determine which schedule categories the selected object is included in. See Schedule Panel on page 704.   Floor/Ceiling Truss Specification Dialog To open the Floor or Ceiling Truss Specification dialog, select one or more floor or ceiling trusses and click the Open Object edit button. See Floor and Ceiling Trusses on page 895. Default values for trusses are set in the Build Framing dialog. See Build Framing Dialog on page 860. The Floor/Ceiling Truss Specification dialogs have the following panels: 916 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Floor/Ceiling Truss Specification Dialog GENERAL PANEL Member Depth Specify the Member Depth of the different components of the selected truss. l Specify the depth of the Top Chord. l Specify the depth of the Bottom Chord. l Specify the depth of the Webbing. Thickness Specify the Thickness of the truss’s chords and webbing. l Specify the Overall Thickness of the selected truss. l Specify the thickness of the Webbing. Maximum Span Specify the Maximum Span, which is the maximum horizontal distance between supports along the Top and Bottom Chord.   Options l Check Vertical Supports to use vertical supports in the selected truss. l Check Force Truss Rebuild to rebuild the truss envelope based on the existing floor or ceiling platform when you click OK. Not available if Lock Truss Envelope and Webbing is checked, below. See Force Truss Rebuild on page 900. 917 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Floor/Ceiling Truss Specification Dialog l Check Lock Truss Envelope and Webbing to lock the size and configuration of the truss. A locked truss which has been relocated will maintain its original settings. See Lock Truss Envelope and Webbing on page 901. l Uncheck Use Special Snapping to prevent the selected truss from snapping along its long edge to a wall’s Main Layer or to the corner of a roof plane. If disabled, Object Snaps may still occur. See Special Truss Snapping on page 899. Preview A preview of the selected truss displays on the right side of the panel. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22. LINE STYLE PANEL The settings on this panel affect the appearance of the selected truss in plan view only. See Line Style Panel on page 305.   FILL STYLE PANEL The settings on this panel affect the appearance of the selected truss in plan view only. See Fill Style Panel and Dialogs on page 193.   MATERIALS PANEL The settings on the MATERIALS panel affect the appearance of the selected truss in 3D views. See Materials Panel on page 1055.   LABEL PANEL Floor and ceiling truss labels can display in plan view and cross section/elevation views when the “Framing, Floor/Ceiling Truss Labels” layer is turned on and use the Text Style assigned to that layer. See Text Styles on page 538.   Truss labels also display in the Truss Detail. See Truss Details on page 901.   For more information about the settings on this panel, see  Label Panel on page 700.   Note: If a truss is listed in a schedule using callout labels, the settings here are overridden and the schedule label is used instead. COMPONENTS PANEL The information on the COMPONENTS panel can be used in the materials list. For more information, see Components Panel on page 1330.   OBJECT INFORMATION PANEL The information entered on the OBJECT INFORMATION panel can be used in schedules and the materials list. For more information, see Object Information Panel on page 1331.   SCHEDULE PANEL The settings on the SCHEDULE panel determine which schedule categories the selected object is included in. See Schedule Panel on page 704.   918 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Framing and Truss Schedules Framing and Truss Schedules The Framing Schedule tool allows you to produce customizable framing and truss schedules as well as object labels that display schedule numbers. See Schedules and Object Labels on page 681. Framing schedules created in a Truss Detail use a special Only Include Objects from this Detail setting and a selection of Objects to Include that report only floor, ceiling, and roof trusses. See Truss Details on page 901. 919

Trim and Moldings Chapter 26 Chief Architect offers a wide selection of trim and molding options. Corner boards, quoins, and frieze moldings can be added to a building’s exterior. Molding polylines and 3D molding polylines can be edited as 2D CAD objects using the CAD editing tools, then extruded to display in 3D for a variety of powerful applications. In addition, Chief Architect offers a wide selection of trim and molding options for doors, windows, rooms, and many interior objects. See The Library on page 945. You can also assign moldings to a variety of objects, such as rooms and cabinets, in those objects’ specification dialogs. See Specification Dialogs on page 21. TOPICS Trim and Molding Defaults 921 Corner Boards 921 Corner Board Specification Dialog 922 Quoins 923 Quoin Specification Dialog 923 Editing Corner Boards and Quoins 925 Moldings and Millwork 926 Moldings / / Profiles / Rails / Panels 927 Molding Specification Dialog 931 Molding Profiles 932 Symbol Moldings 934 Molding Polylines 935 Displaying Molding Polylines 937 Editing Molding Polylines 937 Molding Polyline Specification Dialog 938 3D Molding Polyline Specification Dialog 939 Frieze Moldings 943 920 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Trim and Molding Defaults Trim and Molding Defaults Select Edit> Default Settings to open the Default Settings dialog where you can access the defaults for a variety of drawing tools, including a number that affect trim and moldings. l Click the + beside “Corner Trim” to access the defaults for Corner Boards and Quoins. See Corner Boards on page 921 and Quoins on page 923.   l Click the + beside “Floors and Rooms”, then beside “Floor Levels”. Select a floor level and click the Edit button to specify the default moldings for rooms on that floor. See Floor Level Defaults on page 413.   l Click the + beside “Door” to access the defaults for Interior and Exterior Doors. See Door Defaults on page 544. l Select “Window” and click the Edit button to specify the default casing for windows. See Window Defaults on page 577. l Click the + beside “Cabinet” to access the defaults for the Cabinet Tools, where you can specify default crown and other moldings. See Cabinet Defaults on page 618.   Corner Boards Corner boards are added to a building exterior in any view by selecting Build> Trim> Corner Boards. Click at a wall corner where you want to add trim. Be sure to click where the outside wall surfaces meet. If you click where the inside surfaces meet, corner trim will be created inside the room. You can also add Corner Boards to all exterior corners at once by selecting Build> Trim> Auto Place Corner Boards .    By default, Auto Place Corner Boards adds Corner Boards to outside corners only. If you prefer, you can specify that inside corners receive corner boards in the Corner Board Defaults dialog. See General Panel on page 922. Note: The Auto Place Corner Boards tool does not place corner boards on manually drawn dormers or at intersections with Attic Walls. See Attic Walls on page 380. Corner boards extend from the top plate down to the bottom of the floor platform of the floor on which it is placed, but do not extend to other floors. You must add corner boards to all floors of the building that you want to have corner boards. A selected corner board or boards can be moved, but only to another wall corner or corners.  In 3D views, corner boards can be lengthened or shortened using the edit handles. Corner boards can be copied, deleted and resized similar to other objects using the Edit Toolbar or the Corner Board Specification dialog. See Corner Board Specification Dialog on page 922. The default material for corner boards is defined by the Exterior Trim entry in the Material Defaults dialog. See Material Defaults on page 1051. 921 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Corner Board Specification Dialog Corner Board Specification Dialog Select one or more corner boards and click the Open Object edit button to open the Corner Board Specification dialog. The settings in this dialog are similar to those in the Corner Board Defaults dialog, but affect the selected corner boards rather than all subsequently created corner boards.   GENERAL PANEL Specify the Width and Thickness of the selected corner board(s).   Check Set Top/Set Bottom to specify the top and bottom heights of the corner board(s).   l If Set Top is unchecked, the top of the corner board automatically extends to the top plate.   l If Set Bottom is unchecked, the bottom of the corner board automatically extends to the bottom of the floor platform.   In the Corner Board Defaults dialog, an additional Auto Place Option is available.   l Check Include Inside Corners to place Corner Boards on inside corners when the Auto Place Corner Boards tool is used. When unchecked, only outside corners receive corner boards.   LAYER PANEL For information about the LAYER panel, see Layer Panel on page 186.   MATERIALS PANEL The settings on the MATERIALS panel are available for a wide variety of objects in the program. For information about these settings, see Materials Panel on page 1055. COMPONENTS PANEL The information on the COMPONENTS panel can be used in the materials list. For more information, see Components Panel on page 1330.   922 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Quoins Quoins Select Build> Trim> Quoins in any view and click at a wall corner where you want to place quoins. You can also add Quoins to all exterior corners at once by selecting Build> Trim> Auto Place Quoins .   By default, Auto Place Quoins adds Quoins to outside corners only. If you prefer, you can specify that inside corners receive quoins in the Quoin Defaults dialog. See General Panel on page 922. Note: The Auto Place Quoins tool does not place quoins on manually drawn dormers or at intersections with Attic Walls. See Attic Walls on page 380. A selected quoin or quoins can be moved, but only to another wall corner or corners. In 3D views, quoins can be lengthened or shortened using the edit handles. Quoins can be copied, deleted and resized similar to other objects using the Edit Toolbar or  the Quoin Specification dialog. See Quoin Specification Dialog on page 923. The size of quoins in plan view is relative on their size in 3D. Initially, quoins use the same material as the default material of the wall surface they are placed against. This material is specified in the Wall Type Definitions dialog. See Wall Specification Dialog on page 392. Quoin Specification Dialog Select one or more quoins and click the Open Object edit button to open the Quoin Specification dialog. The settings in this dialog are the same as those in the Quoin Defaults dialog, but affect the selected quoins rather than all subsequently created quoins.   923 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Quoin Specification Dialog GENERAL PANEL Size and Position l Specify the Width, which is the horizontal dimension of each quoin in the selected Quoin object. The dimension along the other wall is half this value when they are staggered or mirrored. l Specify the Thickness, which is the amount that the quoin protrudes from the exterior surface of the wall.   l Specify the Quoin Height for individual quoins in the selected Quoin object. l Specify the Quoin Gap, which is the distance between successive quoins.   l Check Set Top/Set Bottom to specify the top and bottom heights of the quoin(s) in the text fields.   l If Set Top is unchecked, the top of the corner board automatically extends to the top plate.   l If Set Bottom is unchecked, the bottom of the quoin automatically extends to the bottom of the floor platform.   Style l Uniform - Produce quoins that are of equal length on both sides of the corner. l Staggered - Produce quoins that have one long side and one short side staggered on opposite sides of the corner. l Mirrored - Produce quoins that alternate having either two long sides or two short sides. l When Staggered or Mirrored is selected, check Swap Start Block to switch the starting order for the quoins.   In the Quoin Defaults dialog, an additional Auto Place Option is available.   924 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Corner Boards and Quoins l Check Include Inside Corners to place Quoins on inside corners when the Auto Place Quoins tool is used. When unchecked, only outside corners receive quoins.   LAYER PANEL For information about the LAYER panel, see Layer Panel on page 186.   MATERIALS PANEL The settings on the MATERIALS panel are available for a wide variety of objects in the program. For information about these settings, see Materials Panel on page 1055. COMPONENTS PANEL The information on the COMPONENTS panel can be used in the materials list. For more information, see Components Panel on page 1330.   Editing Corner Boards and Quoins Before a corner board or quoin can be edited, it must be selected. Click on a trim object when the Select Objects tool is active. Corner boards and quoins can also be group selected and edited. See Selecting Objects on page 210. Corner boards and quoins can be edited using their edit handles, the Edit Toolbar buttons, and their specification dialogs. See Corner Board Specification Dialog on page 922 and Quoin Specification Dialog on page 923. USING THE EDIT HANDLES Depending on the type of view, a corner board or quoin displays a different set of edit handles when selected. l In plan view, corner boards and quoins display one edit handle and can be moved from one eligible location at a wall corner to another. l In 3D views, corner boards and quoins can be moved, lengthened, and shorted much the other line-based objects are. See Editing Line-Based Objects on page 216. USING THE EDIT BUTTONS A selected corner board or quoin can be edited in a variety of ways using the buttons on the Edit Toolbar. See The Edit Toolbar on page 130. 925 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Moldings and Millwork DELETING CORNER TRIM Corner boards and quoins can be selected individually or in groups and deleted using the Delete edit button or the Delete key on the keyboard. They can also be removed using the Delete Objects dialog. See Deleting Objects on page 284. Moldings and Millwork Moldings and millwork are often used to enhance both the interior and exterior of designs. MILLWORK A selection of various types of millwork objects including columns, corbels and finials is available in the Library Browser. See The Library Browser on page 946. Most millwork objects are designed to be placed in a plan as free-standing objects. Some -  notably, newels and balusters - can be assigned to objects such as railings and stairs.  Other examples of millwork that can be assigned to objects include millwork on window exteriors and pilasters and feet on cabinets. See Placing Library Objects on page 972.   Both free-standing millwork and that assigned to an object can be replaced from the library in 3D views. See Replace From Library on page 976.   MOLDINGS, RAILS, AND OTHER PROFILES Molding profiles and symbols can be applied to a variety of different types of objects in Chief Architect, including rooms, doors, windows, cabinets, tray ceilings, and molding polylines. See Assigned Items on page 974 and Molding Profiles on page 932. Moldings are assigned to their containing object in that object’s specification dialog. See Moldings / / Profiles / Rails / Panels on page 927. Moldings assigned to these objects can be listed in both the materials list and in schedules. See Materials Lists on page 1303 and The Schedule Tools on page 682. A number of other objects, including roof planes, rope lights, railings, stairs, and ramps have features like ridge caps and handrails that are applied in a similar manner that moldings are applied to other objects.   REPLACING AN EXISTING MOLDING If a molding profile or symbol has already been applied to an object, it can be replaced by another directly from the library in a 3D view. Select Build> Trim> Replace Moldings, select a molding profile or symbol from the Select Library Object dialog, then move the mouse pointer into the view window and click on a molding in the view. See Select Library Object Dialog on page 974 and Replace From Library on page 976.   You can also select a molding profile or symbol directly from the Library Browser while a 3D view is active and move your mouse pointer into the view window. When a molding is selected, the pointer displays the Moldings icon. When the mouse pointer is moved over a molding in the view, the Replace From Library icon displays instead. Click on the molding's surface to change its molding profile.   926 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Moldings / / Profiles / Rails / Panels Moldings / / Profiles / Rails / Panels The specification dialogs for a variety of objects in the program include a MOLDINGS panel. Select an object or group of similar objects and click the Open Object edit button to open the specification dialog for that selection. The settings available on this panel will vary depending on the type of object selected.   The RAILS panel of the Railing, Fencing, Staircase, Ramp, and Stair Landing Specification dialogs is similar to the MOLDINGS panel, as is the WALL CAPS panel of the Wall Specification dialog. See Railing and Fencing Specification Dialogs on page 406 and Staircase Specification Dialog on page 771.   A number of roof attributes are also assigned the way moldings are. Rafter tails, ridge caps, gutters, frieze molding, and shadow boards are all created by specifying a profile and extruding it down a predetermined path. As a result, the settings on the RAFTER TAILS, RIDGE CAPS, GUTTER, FRIEZE, and SHADOW BOARDS panels function the same as those on the MOLDINGS panel. See Build Roof Dialog on page 797.   927 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Moldings / / Profiles / Rails / Panels At the top of the dialog, one or more settings may be present.   l Only available for rooms, uncheck Use Floor Default to make the settings that follow active. Check this box to use the defaults set in the Floor Defaults dialog for the current floor. In the Room Type Defaults dialogs, the settings for Floor 1 are shown in the preview when this is checked. See Floor Level Defaults on page 413.   l If multiple objects with different moldings assigned to them are selected, a No Change check box will be available. Uncheck this box to make the settings that follow active but note that only moldings that all selected objects have in common will be retained. Note: If multiple rooms are selected and only some of them have Use Default checked, these settings on this panel will not be editable.   l In the Tray Ceiling Specification dialog, specify the Layer that any Molding Polylines associated with the tray ceiling are assigned to. See Layers on page 176.   Selected Edge The On Selected Edge settings are available on the RIDGE CAPS, GUTTERS, and SHADOW BOARDS panels of the Roof Plane Specification dialog when an individual roof plane is selected. They determine whether the profile(s) specified on the current panel generate along the selected roof plane edge. See Roof Plane Specification Dialog on page 814 and Selected Edge on page 212.   Select Automatic (On/Off) to use the default behaviors for ridge caps, which generate on ridges and hips by default; gutters, which generate on eaves by default; and shadow boards, which generate on eaves and/or gables, as specified in the Build Roof dialog.   Select On to generate the profile in question on the selected roof plane edge whenever possible.   Select Off to suppress the profile in question on the selected roof plane edge regardless of its location. Molding/Rail Profiles The selected object’s molding profiles, symbol molding(s), roof trim profiles, or rail profiles are listed in a table and can be edited here.  Depending on the type of profile being edited, not all options will be available in the table. On the RAILS panel of the Staircase, Ramp, and Stair Landing Specification dialogs, the table is divided into three sections: Top Rail, Middle Rail, Bottom Rail, and Beam.   l Select the name of a molding to edit it or remove it from the object.   l Click in the Width and/or Height column and type to specify the selected molding’s size.   l When a Symbol Molding is selected, click in the Repeat Distance column and type the desired value. See Symbol Moldings on page 934.   l Specify the Horizontal Offset, which is how close the molding is to the perimeter of the selected object. Increase this value to create a gap between the selected object and the molding. See Stacked and Recessed Moldings on page 933.   l Specify the Vertical Offset of the selected molding, measured relative to the default molding location on the object it is assigned to.   l A check mark in the To Top column means that the Vertical Offset value is measured from the top of the molding. When unchecked, this value is measured from the bottom of the molding. Click to place or remove a check mark.   928 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Moldings / / Profiles / Rails / Panels l Specify the distance that a selected rafter tail profile should Extend past the inside surface of the subfascia. This distance is measured along the top of the rafter tail, so it is greater than the length as measured in plan view.   Depending on the type of object selected, one or more check boxes will be found under the Molding Profiles table.   l When Retain Aspect Ratio is checked, if you change either the Height or Width, the other value changes to maintain their original ratio. When this is unchecked, the two values can be edited independently.  This option also affects the Repeat Distance of a symbol molding, and is not available when Full Wall Width is checked, below. l Check Auto Offset to have the program apply Horizontal and Vertical Offset values to the selected moldings based on their Widths and Heights.   l On the RAILS panel, check Full Wall Width to make the rail Width equal to the Thickness of the selected railing wall. Not available for stairs or ramps.   l On the WALL CAP panel of the Wall Specification dialog, when Full Wall Width is checked, the wall cap extends the width of the lower wall. When unchecked, it extends out from the exterior surface of the upper wall.   l Also on the WALL CAP panel, check Split Pony Wall to build a cap the between the upper and lower walls, centered on the lower wall. This becomes checked automatically when Full Wall Width is checked, above.   The buttons on the right allow you to manage the moldings listed in the table.   l Add New opens the Select Library Object dialog and add a new molding profile or symbol to the selected object. See Select Library Object Dialog on page 974. l Click the Make Copy button to add a copy of the selected molding profile, symbol, or stacked profile at the bottom of the list.   l Click the Edit button to customize the selected molding's Object Information and Schedule settings. See Molding Specification Dialog on page 931. l Replace removes the selected profile, symbol, or stacked profile and replace it with a new profile or symbol from the Library.   l Default resets the Default Rail, Ridge Cap, Gutter, or Rope Light profile. l Click the  Delete button to remove the currently selected profile, symbol, or stacked profile from the table.   l Make Stack groups two or more selected profiles in the list  profiles under a “Stacked Profile” line item. Changes made to a Stacked Profile affect all profiles in the stack. Not available for moldings with different To Top settings or different Types. See Stacked and Recessed Moldings on page 933.   l Explode Stack separates a selected stacked profile so they are no longer associated with one another.   l Move Up and Move Down change the order of the line items in the table. This does not change a selected item’s Height, Offset, To Top setting, or Type: only its position in the table.   l Click the Add to Library button to save a copy of the molding as specified here in the User Catalog. See Adding Library Content on page 965.   Selected Profile Options The Selected Profile Options only apply to the molding profile or symbol selected above. The options available will vary depending on the type of object that is selected. See below. 929 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Moldings / / Profiles / Rails / Panels l A preview of the molding profile(s) and/or symbol(s) displays here. When multiple moldings of the same Type, To Top setting, or similar Height are specified, they will display together here, even when only one is selected. The selected profile is identified by thicker edge lines than the others. When multiple moldings of different Types, To Top, or Height settings are selected, no preview will display.   l Specify the desired Profile Rotation. Not available for moldings in a stacked molding assembly or for molding symbols.   l Click the Reflect Horizontal button to reflect the selected profile from left to right, so its outward facing side becomes the profile's back.   l Click the Reflect Vertical button to flip the selected profile so its top becomes its bottom.   l When Count Components in Materials List is checked, the individual components of stacked profiles are counted separately in the Materials List. When unchecked, they are treated as a single profile. Only available when stacked profiles are specified above. See Stacked and Recessed Moldings on page 933. Cabinet Moldings and Counter Profiles l Select a molding Type from the drop-down list. For base cabinets, the choices are "Edge Profile" and "Base Molding"; for wall cabinets, "Crown Molding" and "Light Rail"; for full height cabinets, "Crown Molding" and "Base Molding". Cabinet molding Type is reported in schedules and the Materials List. When a molding's Type is changed, its To Top setting may also change, above. See Materials Lists on page 1303. l Check Offset Molding For Face Items to measure the selected profile's Horizontal Offset from the cabinet's front, side, and/or back face items. When unchecked, the molding is offset from the cabinet box. See Pilasters, Feet, and Moldings on page 638. Room Moldings l Choose the currently selected molding’s Type from the drop-down list: Base Molding, Chair Rail, or Crown Molding. When a molding's Type is changed, its To Top setting may also change, above. If no Type is selected, the molding will not be listed in the Room Finish Schedule. See Room Moldings on page 436 and Schedules and Object Labels on page 681.   Note: The Default Base Molding is a basic rectangular stock profile rather than a profile from the library. Molding Polylines l When Extrude Inside Polyline is checked, the selected molding profile generates on the inside of the molding polyline. Uncheck this box to generate the profile on the exterior of the polyline instead. Only available for Molding Polylines and 3D Molding Polylines. See Molding Polylines on page 935.   Roofs l On the FRIEZE MOLDING and SHADOW BOARDS panels, select a Type from the drop-down list: Eave and Gable, Eave only, and Gable only. See Roof Returns and Other Details on page 844.   l On the RAFTER TAILS panel, uncheck Stretch to Fit Rafter to use the rafter tail profile’s default size or to specify its Height and Width, below. When this is checked, the profile is sized by the program to match the selected roof rafter.   l On the RIDGE CAPS panel, check Bend to Roof Pitch to adjust the shape of the selected ridge cap profile to match the pitch of the roof. This box should be unchecked if you are using a custom profile designed to follow a specific pitch or pitches.   930 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Molding Specification Dialog Walls and Railings l On the WALL CAP panel of the Wall Specification dialog, check Extrude Inside Wall to position a wall cap on the interior side of a pony wall instead of on the exterior side. See Lower Pony Wall Caps on page 355. Framing l On the END PROFILE panel of the Framing Specification dialog for joists, beams, and General Framing, uncheck Stretch to Fit Framing to use the end profile’s default size or to specify its Height and Width, below. When this is checked, the profile is sized by the program to match the selected framing member. Many specification and defaults dialogs have previews of the selected object in which the moldings assigned to it can be seen. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22. Some specification and defaults dialogs have previews of the selected object in which the moldings assigned to it can be seen. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22. When Use Floor Default is checked in the Room Type Defaults dialog, this preview always shows the default moldings for Floor 1. Molding Specification Dialog Right-click on a molding profile in the Library Browser and select Open Object from the contextual menu to open the Molding Specification dialog. When accessed in this manner, the item in the library can be edited but no moldings already present in any plans will be affected. See Using the Contextual Menu on page 951. You can also open this dialog by clicking the Edit button on the MOLDINGS panel of various object specification dialogs. When accessed in this manner, only the molding on the selected object is affected. See Moldings / / Profiles / Rails / Panels on page 927. GENERAL PANEL Specify the selected molding's Height and Width. Specify the selected molding's Rotation in degrees, measured in a counterclockwise direction. Not available for symbol moldings.   MATERIALS PANEL The settings on the MATERIALS panel are available for a wide variety of objects in the program. For information about these settings, see Materials Panel on page 1055. If the selected molding is a stacked profile or molding symbol, multiple materials can be specified. See Stacked and Recessed Moldings on page 933 and Symbol Moldings on page 934.   931 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Molding Profiles OBJECT INFORMATION PANEL The information entered on the OBJECT INFORMATION panel can be used in schedules and the materials list. For more information, see Object Information Panel on page 1331.   SCHEDULE PANEL The settings on the SCHEDULE panel determine which schedule categories the selected molding is included in. See Schedule Panel on page 704. Molding Profiles A molding profile is a representation of  a 2D cross section of a particular style of molding created using one or more CAD polylines. A molding profile does not display in 3D on its own; it must be applied to an object like a room, a cabinet, or a molding polyline. See Moldings / / Profiles / Rails / Panels on page 927 and Molding Polylines on page 935.   The library contains a selection of moldings, as well as curbs, gutters, handrails and rafter tails, which function much like molding profiles. You can customize library molding profiles and also create your own custom profiles and add them to the library. See Adding Library Content on page 965. CREATING A MOLDING PROFILE You can easily create custom molding profiles using the CAD drawing and edit tools by following a few basic guidelines.   l Draw a molding profile at its actual, unscaled size.   l The profile must be drawn with the proper orientation. The back of most profiles, or the side facing the wall, must be drawn as a vertical edge on the left side of the polyline.   l Similarly, curbs and gutters are drawn with the back of the profile as a vertical edge on the left side of the polyline.   l Open polylines should be used for gutter and rafter tail profiles. Gutter profiles attach to the roof on the left side, and rafter tail profiles should be open on the left side.   l Ridge cap profiles must be closed polylines and should have a bottom edge that is either horizontal or drawn so that it aligns with the surface of the roof at a particular pitch. In   l Rail, handrail, and railing beam profiles should be drawn with the bottom edge facing downward.   ADDING MOLDING PROFILES TO THE LIBRARY When a CAD polyline meets your needs as a molding profile, select it and click the Add to Library edit button.   If you have drawn a molding profile using multiple closed polylines, select them as a group and click the Add to Library as Stacked Molding edit button. A molding created in this manner can have more than one material assigned to it.   932 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Molding Profiles A molding that has been assigned to an object can also be added to the library by clicking the Add to Library button in the object’s specification dialog. The Width and Height of the molding, as specified in the specification dialog, are retained; Offset values, however, are not. See Moldings / / Profiles / Rails / Panels on page 927.   EDITING A MOLDING PROFILE Once created, the height, width, molding profile can be edited in a limited number of ways. l Right-click on a molding profile in the Library Browser and select Open Object from the contextual menu to open the Molding Specification dialog. See Molding Specification Dialog on page 931.   l The height, width, rotation, and material of a molding assigned to another object can also be edited in that object's specification dialog. See Moldings / / Profiles / Rails / Panels on page 927. There is not a way to edit the shape of an existing molding profile. You can, however, create a new profile either from scratch using the CAD tools or using the Place Molding Profile option. PLACE MOLDING PROFILE An existing molding profile can be placed in plan view or a CAD Detail, edited, and added to the library as a new profile.   Right-click on a molding profile in the library and select Place Molding Profile from the contextual menu. Move your pointer into the drawing area and click once to place a closed CAD polyline identical to the selected profile at that location. The polyline can then be edited to suit your needs. See Editing Closed Polyline-Based Objects on page 228.   Note: Place Molding Profile cannot be used to apply a molding profile to an object - it is only used to place a profile polyline. STACKED AND RECESSED MOLDINGS There are several ways to create stacked or built up moldings:   l Draw the entire build-up using a single polyline, then select it and click the Add to Library edit button.   l Draw the build-up using multiple polylines, then select them as a group and click the Add to Library as Stacked Molding edit button. A molding created in this manner can have more than one material assigned to it.   l Apply multiple moldings to an object, then specify their horizontal and vertical offsets, making sure they all have the same To Top setting. Finally, group-select the moldings and click the Make Stack button. Only room moldings of the same Type can be stacked in this manner. See Moldings / / Profiles / Rails / Panels on page 927.   To build up molding profiles 1. On the MOLDINGS panel of the specification dialog of any object that molding can be applied to, click the Add New button   2. Add a molding profile to the object and specify its Height, Width, and Vertical and Horizontal Offset values. Make a note of these values.   3. Click the Add New button and add a second molding profile to the object.   4. Specify the second molding profile’s Height, Width and Offset values.   l To define the Vertical Offset, add the first profile’s Height and Vertical Offset values.   l To define the Horizontal Offset, add the first profile’s Width and Horizontal Offset values.   933 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Symbol Moldings Similarly, molding can be recessed by specifying a negative Horizontal Offset - for example, to create an under cabinet light rail. See Editing Cabinet Styles on page 636.   An alternative to molding profiles are symbol moldings. Molding symbols are different from molding profiles because they are replicated 3D symbols instead of extruded 2D shapes. See Symbol Moldings on page 934.   Symbol Moldings Symbol Moldings are 3D symbols that are repeated along a path to form molding. Molding symbols are different from molding profiles because they are replicated 3D symbols instead of extruded 2D shapes.   CREATING A SYMBOL MOLDING Begin by opening a new, blank plan and creating a single instance of the molding symbol using the Primitive Tools . See Primitive Tools on page 1015. For example, to create the molding shown in the illustration above, make an object that looks like this:   When you are satisfied with its appearance, convert it to a 3D symbol. See Convert to Symbol on page 1002.   You can also import a 3D symbol from another application. See Importing 3D Symbols on page 998.   To import a molding symbol 1. Select File> Import> 3D Symbol from the menu. See Import 3D Symbol Dialog on page 999.   2. In the Import 3D Symbol dialog, specify the symbol as Molding and click the Advanced button.   l If you plan to use the molding symbol more than once, check the box beside Add to Library. See Add to Library on page 965.   1. On the 3D panel of the Symbol Specification dialog, rotate the symbol as needed so that it faces you in the preview image.   Symbol moldings work best if you make them symmetrical. 934 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Molding Polylines Once created, a symbol molding can be assigned to an object or replicated along a molding polyline. See Molding Polylines on page 935.   Symbol moldings are center aligned. Both ends have a 45° miter, so the end instances may appear chopped. You can specify the Repeat Distance of a symbol molding applied to an object to control the width of each instance of the symbol on the object. See Moldings / / Profiles / Rails / Panels on page 927.   Molding Polylines A molding polyline is a 3D path that either a 2D molding profile is extruded along or a series of molding symbols is repeated along. Molding polylines can be used to create custom room moldings and decorations anywhere in your 3D model. The Molding Polyline tools are accessed by selecting Build> Trim from the menu.   There are four types of molding polylines:   Molding Polylines Molding Lines 3D Molding Polylines 3D Molding Lines To create a  molding polyline, first select the desired Molding Polyline tool. The Select Library Object dialog will open. Select a molding profile or symbol from the library, then click and drag to draw the path for the selected molding profile or symbol.   If a molding profile or symbol has been previously selected during the current session in the program, you can begin drawing using this molding without selecting anything from the library.   Molding polylines can also be created using the Make Room Molding Polyline , Make Cabinet Molding Polyline , and Convert Polyline edit tools.   MOLDING POLYLINE Select Build> Trim> Molding Polyline in plan view, a camera view or overview to create a rectangular molding polyline with a closed shape and a single height off the floor along its entire perimeter.   In  plan view, Molding Polylines can also be created by selecting a profile from the Library Browser. Single-click to place a 2’x2’ closed polyline or click and drag to draw a rectangular polyline.   MOLDING LINE Select Build> Trim> Molding Line in plan view, a camera view, or overview to create a molding line with a single height off the floor along its entire length. Multiple Molding Lines can be connected to form open or closed polylines as long as they share the same height.   935 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Molding Polylines 3D MOLDING POLYLINE Select Build> Trim> 3D Molding Polyline in floor plan or cross section/elevation view to create a closed molding polyline.   l When drawn in a cross section/elevation view, a 3D Molding Polyline’s top and bottom edges have two different heights. Its sides have different heights at their start and end points.   l If drawn in plan view, a camera view, or an overview, a 3D Molding Polyline has a single height along its perimeter.   In either case, then lengths and angles of its edges can be edited in three dimensions. Although they are polyline-based objects, 3D Molding Polylines do not always have the same set of edit handles as other polylines. Depending on the angles of the various segments of a selected 3D Molding Polyline, which edge is selected, and the current view, some or all corner edit handles may not be available.   3D MOLDING LINE Select Build> Trim> 3D Molding Line in floor plan or cross section/elevation view to create a molding line.   l If drawn in a cross section/elevation view, a 3D Molding Line’s start and end points can have two different heights.   l If drawn in plan view, a camera view, or an overview, a 3D Molding Line has a single height along its length.   3D Molding Lines can be connected to form polylines as long as the ends at which two segments connect have identical heights.   Once drawn, a 3D Molding Line can be edited so that it travels in three dimensions.   MOLDINGS LIBRARY In the plan view, select a molding profile from the library. The Molding Polyline tool becomes active, allowing you to draw a molding polyline with using the selected profile.   CONVERTING ROOM AND CABINET MOLDINGS Select a room and click the Make Room Molding Polyline edit button. This opens the Make Room Molding Polyline dialog, allowing you to select which type of room molding to convert to a molding polyline. See Room Polylines on page 436.   Select a cabinet and click the Make Cabinet Molding Polyline edit button. The Make Cabinet Molding Polyline dialog allows you to select a cabinet molding to convert to a molding polyline. See Pilasters, Feet, and Moldings on page 638.   936 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Displaying Molding Polylines CONVERTING A CAD POLYLINE Select a CAD polyline and click the Convert Polyline edit button to convert it into either a Molding or 3D Molding Polyline. See Convert Polyline on page 262.   Displaying Molding Polylines As with other objects, the display of molding polylines in 2D and 3D views is controlled in the Layer Display Options dialog. See Layer Attributes on page 177. There are a number of different types of molding polyline objects. By default: l Molding polylines are placed on the “Moldings” layer. l Roof ridge caps, gutters, frieze molding, and shadow boards are placed on the “Roofs, Ridge Caps”, “Roofs, Gutters”, and “Roofs, Trim” layers, respectively. In plan view, manually drawn Molding and 3D Molding Polylines display as two sets of lines: one representing the molding’s front and one its back. The distance between them is determined by the Width of the molding profile.  If a Horizontal offset is specified, that value is added to the distance between the two lines. See Moldings / / Profiles / Rails / Panels on page 927. Molding Polylines are listed in the "Interior Trim" category of the Materials List by default and can also be included in schedules. See Materials Lists on page 1303 and The Schedule Tools on page 682. PROFILES ON THE SELECTED EDGE By default, the molding(s) assigned to a molding polyline display along all of its edges in 3D views. If you wish, you can suppress the display of moldings on the Selected Edge by clicking the Remove Molding from Selected Edge edit button or checking No Molding on Selected Edge in the molding polyline’s specification dialog. See Selected Edge on page 212. Suppressed moldings can be restored to the selected edge by clicking the Add Molding to Selected Edge edit button or by unchecking No Molding on Selected Edge. These edit buttons are also available for a selected Gutter, Ridge Cap, or Shadow Board polyline and for Custom Countertops. They are not, however, available for Rope Moldings. See Roof Returns and Other Details on page 844, Countertops on page 627, and Rope Lights on page 669. Editing Molding Polylines Molding polylines can be edited much the way CAD polylines are. See Editing Open Polyline-Based Objects on page 224 and Editing Closed Polyline-Based Objects on page 228. Note: 3D Molding Polyline edges that slope rather than having a single height are best edited in a camera or elevation view. See 3D Views on page 1079. Molding lines and polylines also can be edited in their specification dialogs. See Molding Polyline Specification Dialog on page 938 and  3D Molding Polyline Specification Dialog on page 939. 937 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Molding Polyline Specification Dialog DELETING MOLDING POLYLINES Molding polylines can be deleted like other objects using the Delete edit button or the Delete key on your keyboard. Molding Polylines are also deleted when the Delete Objects dialog is used to delete CAD objects. See Deleting Objects on page 284. Molding Polyline Specification Dialog To open the Molding Polyline Specification dialog, select a molding polyline or group of molding polylines and click the Open Object edit button. The Molding Polyline Specification dialog has the following panels:   GENERAL PANEL l Specify the Molding Polyline’s Height, relative to 0.   l Check No Molding on Selected Edge to create blank section in the molding polyline along the selected line segment.   POLYLINE PANEL The POLYLINE panel states the Length of an open molding polyline, and the Perimeter and Area of a closed molding polyline. See Polyline Panel on page 317.   SELECTED LINE/ARC PANEL The SELECTED LINE panel is available when the selected segment of the molding polyline is a line, as opposed to an arc. For more information, see Line Style Panel on page 305.   The SELECTED ARC panel is available when the selected segment of the molding polyline is an arc, as opposed to a line. See Arc Panel on page 312.   See, too, Selected Edge on page 212 and Change Line/Arc on page 256.   MOLDINGS PANEL The MOLDINGS panel can be found in dialogs throughout the program. See Moldings / / Profiles / Rails / Panels on page 927.   One setting on this panel is unique to the Molding Polyline and 3D Molding Polyline Specification dialogs:   938 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - 3D Molding Polyline Specification Dialog l Check Inside to extrude the molding profile on the inside of closed polyline or right side of an open polyline.   l When unchecked, the molding profile extrudes on the outside or left side of the polyline.   LINE STYLE PANEL The LINE STYLE panel can be found in dialogs throughout the program. For information about the settings on this panel, see Line Style Panel on page 305.   FILL STYLE PANEL The settings on the FILL STYLE panel affect the appearance of the selected Molding Polyline in plan view. For more information, see Fill Style Panel and Dialogs on page 193.   MATERIALS PANEL The MATERIALS panel can be found in dialogs throughout the program. For information about the settings on this panel, see Materials Panel on page 1055.   LABEL PANEL Molding Polyline labels display when the “Polylines 3D, Labels” layer is turned on and use the Text Style assigned to that layer. See Text Styles on page 538.   For more information about the settings on this panel, see Label Panel on page 700.   COMPONENTS PANEL The information on the COMPONENTS panel can be used in the materials list. For more information, see Components Panel on page 1330.   3D Molding Polyline Specification Dialog Select a 3D molding polyline and click the Open Object edit button to open the 3D Molding Polyline Specification dialog. The 3D Molding Polyline Specification dialog has the following panels:   939 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - 3D Molding Polyline Specification Dialog GENERAL PANEL l Uncheck Molding on Selected Edge to turn off the display of the specified molding on the selected edge of the polyline. See Selecting Objects on page 210.   l If the selected object is an automatically generated ridge cap, frieze molding, or shadow boards polyline, this check box’s label will reflect the object type. See Roof Returns and Other Details on page 844.   An Automatically Generated check box will be present if a ridge cap, frieze molding, or shadow boards polyline is selected. This check box is for reference only and cannot be edited. See Roof Returns and Other Details on page 844.   l When this box is checked, the selected roof trim is updated whenever you rebuild the roof.   l If the selected object is edited, this box will become permanently unchecked. To restore the automatic updating behavior, the frieze, shadow boards, or ridge caps must be deleted and regenerated.   SELECTED LINE PANEL The SELECTED LINE panel is available when the selected edge of the 3D Molding Polyline is a line as opposed to an arc. Most of the settings here are the same as those on the LINE panel of the Line Specification dialog. See Line Panel on page 304.   The Length/Angle settings in the 3D Molding Polyline Specification dialog are unique to this dialog.   l Length specifies the 3D length of the selected edge of the 3D Molding Polyline.   l Angle in XY Plane specifies the counter-clockwise angle that the selected edge makes with the positive X axis when viewed from above, as in plan view.   l Angle from XY Plane specifies the angle that the selected edge makes with the horizontal XY plane when viewed from the side, as in a cross section/elevation view. A positive value means that the line slopes up; a negative value means that it slopes down.   SELECTED ARC PANEL The SELECTED ARC panel is available when the selected segment of the 3D molding polyline is an arc as opposed to a line.   Other specification dialogs have a SELECTED ARC panel; however, most of the settings work differently for 3D Molding Polylines than they do for other objects in the program.   940 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - 3D Molding Polyline Specification Dialog Lock The Lock options specify how changing one value affects other values.   l Select Start to keep the start and center of the arc fixed and move the end.   l Select End to keep the end and center of the arc fixed and move the start.   l Select Center to keep the center of the arc fixed and move the start or end.   l Select Arc to keep the arc geometry fixed and translate the arc.   l Select Chord to keep the start and end fixed and change the radius.   Start Specify the coordinates of the selected arc’s Start point. Only available when Lock End or Lock Arc is selected.   End Specify the coordinates of the selected arc’s End point. Only available when either Lock Start or Lock Arc is selected.   Chord Specify the length and angle of the selected arc’s Chord. Only available when Lock Start or Lock End is selected.   941 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - 3D Molding Polyline Specification Dialog l Specify the Chord Length, which is the 3D distance between arc start and end.   l Specify the Chord Angle: the angle created by the chord and the positive X axis.   Arc The Arc options specify radius, angle and length values of the selected arc:   l Radius - The distance from the arc to the arc center.   l Start Angle - The angle created by a line from the arc center to the start and the positive X axis.   l End Angle - The angle that a line from the center to the end   l Arc Angle - The angle created by a line from the arc center to the start and a line from the center to the end.   l Arc Length - The length of the arc.   Center Specify the coordinates of the selected arc’s Center point. Only available when Lock Arc is selected.   Normal The items under the Normal heading state the coordinates of the normal of the plane that the arc exists in. The normal is a vector that is parallel to that plane and is expressed as a line between two points: (0,0) and the point defined in the dialog.   l The arc direction in plan view is counter clockwise if the normal has a positive value on the z axis (0,1) and clockwise if the value on the z axis is negative (0,-1).   MOLDINGS PANEL The MOLDINGS panel can be found in the specification dialogs for a variety of different objects in the program. See Moldings / / Profiles / Rails / Panels on page 927.   One setting on this panel is unique to the Molding Polyline and 3D Molding Polyline Specification dialogs:   l Check Inside to extrude the profile on the inside or right side of the polyline.   l When unchecked, the profile extrudes on the outside or left side of the polyline.   942 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Frieze Moldings LINE STYLE PANEL The LINE STYLE panel can be found in dialogs throughout the program. See Line Style Panel on page 305.   If an automatic frieze or shadow board polyline is edited, it will no longer be considered Automatic and the Default Layer check box on this panel will be unchecked.   MATERIALS PANEL The MATERIALS panel is found in dialogs throughout the program. See Materials Panel on page 1055.   COMPONENTS PANEL The information on the COMPONENTS panel can be used in the materials list. For more information, see Components Panel on page 1330.   Frieze Moldings Frieze moldings, also known as frieze boards, are mounted below the eaves of roof planes and can be generated automatically using the Build Roof dialog. CREATING FRIEZE MOLDINGS To create automatic frieze moldings, specify a molding profile on the FRIEZE panel of the Build Roof dialog and then build the roof. See Frieze Molding on page 847. DISPLAYING FRIEZE MOLDINGS By default, frieze molding displays in 3D views but not in plan view and its default layer, “Roofs, Trim”, is locked. See Layer Display Options Dialog on page 179. SELECTING FRIEZE MOLDINGS To select a frieze molding, its layer must first be unlocked and turned on. See Locking Layers on page 178. In floor plan or a cross section/elevation view, click on a frieze molding. If the wall behind it is selected, click the Select Next Object edit button or press the Tab key until the frieze molding is selected. When the frieze molding is selected, the Status Bar says “3D Molding Polyline.” See The Status Bar on page 24. 943 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Frieze Moldings EDITING FRIEZE MOLDINGS Like other 3D Molding Polylines, frieze molding can be edited much the way CAD polylines are in floor plan and cross section/elevation views. See Editing Molding Polylines on page 937. Frieze molding can also be edited in the 3D Molding Polyline Specification dialog. See 3D Molding Polyline Specification Dialog on page 939. If you edit a frieze molding, it is no longer considered an Automatic frieze and will not be deleted and replaced when the roof is rebuilt. Once Automatic is unchecked, it cannot be checked again. To restore the automatic updating behavior of frieze molding, it must be regenerated. 944

The Library Chapter 27 Chief Architect Premier’s library offers thousands of symbols, materials, and images that can enhance any plan. New library catalogs and enhancements are  made available by Chief Architect Software on a continuing basis and are available for download for the current program version. You can also customize items from the library or import new items from outside the program and then save them in the library for future use. The Library Browser shares its window with the Project Browser, which is discussed separately. See Project Browser on page 58. TOPICS The Library Browser 946 Searching and Filtering the Library 953 Find in Library 960 Library Content 961 Downloading Library Content 963 Importing Library Catalogs 964 Adding Library Content 965 Organizing the Library 967 Editing Library Objects 970 Exporting Library Catalogs 972 Placing Library Objects 972 Select Library Object Dialog 974 Place Library Object Button 975 Replace From Library 976 945 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - The Library Browser The Library Browser The Chief Architect Library Browser side window allows you to manage the contents of the library as well as add library content to your drawings. To open or close the Library Browser: l Select View> Library Browser. l Click the Library Browser button. l Press Ctrl + L on your keyboard. When Double-Click Closes Browser is checked in the Preferences dialog, you can also close the Library Browser by double-clicking on an item in the Filter Results. Doing this will also close any other side windows that the Library Browser is docked with. See Library Browser Panel on page 100. By default, the Library Browser is docked to the right side of the program window, but it can be undocked or docked to another side if you wish. See Side Windows on page 17. The Library Browser has six panels: l Filters and search options l Folders tree list l Filter Results l Details l Preview 946 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - The Library Browser Filters Search or filter the library to find the content you need. Filter Results are reported below. See Searching and Filtering the 947 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - The Library Browser Library on page 953.   l Type in the text field. A drop-down list of search results will appear below the field that updates as you type. o Click on a line item to use that item as a search parameter.   o You can also type and press the Enter key to use your text as a search parameter. l Click the Advanced Search button to refine the current search parameters as well as create custom filters. See Advanced Search Dialog on page 956. l When Include Web Results is toggled on, content that is available for download will be included in the Filter Results. Turn this option off to only include content already present in the library in the Filter Results. l All currently active search parameters are listed immediately below, each in a rectangle border. o You can also add search parameters to the current filter by selecting Folders and/or Tags. o Click on an item here to stop using it. l Click the Go Back in History and Go Forward in History buttons to cycle between filters that have been active during the current program session.   l The tree list in the Folders panel is filtered to only show content that matches your search criteria, and the Filter Results panel below is populated with all items that match the active search parameters.   l Click the arrow to the right of the Advanced Search button to select a filter from the drop-down list. “Not Filtered” will be the only available option until you either specify a search parameter, select a folder in the Folders panel, or create a custom filter. Folders The contents of the Library are listed in a directory tree and can be browsed here. When you select a folder, it will be listed as a search parameter under Filters, above, and its contents will be listed under Filter Results, below.   l The Folders tree list has five categories: Chief Architect Core Catalogs, Chief Architect Bonus Catalogs, Manufacturer Catalogs, User Catalog and Trash. See Library Content on page 961 and Deleting Library Items on page 970.   If the Chief Architect Core Catalogs, Bonus Catalogs, or Manufacturer Catalogs are empty, they will not be listed in the Folders tree list. See Downloading Library Content on page 963. l The basic structure of the directory tree is:   l Library items are always placed in alphabetical order within their hierarchy.   948 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - The Library Browser l Navigate the Folders panel tree list using the mouse and/or keyboard:   o Click the gray Expand arrow pointing to a catalog or folder to display its contents. Once expanded, you can click the black Collapse arrow pointing downward to close it again. Scroll through the list using either the scroll bar on the right or the mouse scroll wheel.   o You can also browse the list using the arrow keys on your keyboard. The up and down arrow keys navigate up and down in the list, while the left and right arrow keys expand and contract a selected catalog or folder.   l Click on an item to select it. When you select an individual item, information about it will be shown in the Details and Preview panels below and you can place or apply it in your drawing. Filter Results All library items that match the currently active search parameters listed in the Filters panel are listed here. Their total number is reported in parentheses.   l Like the Folders list, the Filter Results can be navigated using the mouse and/or keyboard. l Click on an item to select it: information about it will be shown in the Details and Preview panels below, and you can place or apply it in your drawing. Basic information about it also displays in the program’s Status Bar. See The Status Bar on page 24. l Multiple items can be selected for organization and limited editing purposes but cannot be placed in a drawing.   Tags Tags allow you to create custom categories which you can then assign library items to. Tags can be used as filters themselves, or as search attributes in more complex filters. The Tags panel does not display by default: click the Settings button in the Toolbar panel below to control which panels display.   l All available Tags are listed in this panel. Click on one to use it as a search parameter listed in the Filters panel, above. The currently selected Tag has a dashed outline. l Favorites is the installed system Tag. l Click the Create New button to open the New Library Tag dialog and type a short, descriptive name for a new Tag. l Right-click on a custom Tag to select Rename, Change Color, or Delete from the contextual menu. Details Information about the selected library item is reported here, including: l Type - See Symbol Categories on page 1003. l Catalog - See Library Content on page 961. l Folders - See Organizing the Library on page 967. l Tags - See Creating and Using Tags on page 955. l Notes - You can add a Note to any unlocked library item by clicking the Edit Notes button in this panel. A text field becomes available and you can choose to Save Notes as well as Insert Hyperlink . Preview When an item is selected either the Folders or Filter Results panel, a representation of the item displays in the Preview 949 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - The Library Browser panel. If the selected object is a 3D symbol, you can  rotate and zoom in or out on the Preview using the mouse. Twodimensional objects, such as CAD Blocks or Line Styles cannot be adjusted in this manner in the Preview panel. Options above the preview pane vary depending on the type of object selected: The Standard, Vector View, and Glass House Rendering Techniques can be applied to the preview for architectural objects, as can Plan View. See Rendering Techniques on page 1150. You can specify whether Standard or Vector View is used by default in the Preferences dialog. See Appearance Panel on page 95. The Physically Based, Standard, and Vector View Rendering Techniques can be applied to the preview for materials. Fill Window sizes and positions the selected object so that it fills the preview pane as much as possible. The display of Color can be toggled on and off in the preview for all item types except CAD Details and Line Styles. The display of Line Weights can be toggled on and off for Fill Patterns. A selected material will display on a shape in the Preview panel. The initial shape is a Teapot, but you can select a Cube, Sphere, or 2D Plane instead if you prefer. The object shape selection is also shared with the Define Material dialog. See Define Material Dialog on page 1066. Toolbar The toolbar at the bottom of the browser aids in searching, displaying panels, and managing library content. The settings here are saved between program sessions.   The Settings menu lets you select which Library Browser panes are presented and which are hidden.   List Mode displays items in the Filter Results pane in a scrollable horizontal list with item name and preview thumbnail. Grid Mode displays items in the Filter Results pane as a grid of thumbnail images.   Open the Plant Chooser dialog. See Plant Chooser Dialog on page 1295.   Update Library Catalogs downloads and installs updates to your installed catalogs to include the latest content. See Updating Library Catalogs on page 962.   Open the Preferences dialog, where display properties for the Library Browser can be controlled. See Library Browser Panel on page 100. Search Subfolders includes the contents of subfolders when a folder is an active search parameter. Turn this off to only include items saved in the folder itself, at the folder level: not in subfolders. CUSTOMIZING THE BROWSER The Library Browser can be resized, moved, as well as docked with other Side Windows in the configuration of your choice. To return the Library Browser to its original position and size, click the Reset Side Windows button in the Preferences dialog. See Side Windows on page 17. The panels in the Library Browser are customizable: 950 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - The Library Browser l You can control which Library Browser panels display by clicking the Settings button. l To adjust the height or width of a panel, place the pointer over the split bar you want to move. When the splitter cursor displays, click and drag. See Dialog Panel Splitters on page 22. l Panels can be rearranged within the Library Browser side window. Click and drag a panel's title bar: When a highlighted space is created at the location you want, release the mouse button. l When your panel arrangement meets your needs, you can lock it: click the Settings button, then select Lock Panels . l To return the Library Browser's panels to their original configuration, click the Reset Panel Layout button in the Preferences dialog. See Library Browser Panel on page 100. USING THE CONTEXTUAL MENU A number of important library functions can be accessed using the contextual menu. Right-click on an item in the Folders or Filter Results panel to open a contextual menu displaying options related to that item. See Contextual Menus on page 19. 951 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - The Library Browser The options in the contextual menu vary depending on the item selected, but may include: l Update l Cut/Copy/Paste l Copy to User Catalog l Copy Item List 952 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Searching and Filtering the Library l Search in Folder(s) l New l Rename l Delete l Move to Folder(s) l Tags l Export Library l Open Object/Open Symbol l Edit CAD Block l Manage Folders l Search Attributes l Text Macro Management   l Place Molding Profile   l Expand All/Collapse All l Show in Folder l Vacuum l Restore from Trash KEYBOARD COMMANDS The Library Browser can be navigated using the arrow keys on your keyboard. l The right and left arrow keys expand and collapse folders. l The up and down keys change which library object is currently selected. l Select an item and press F2 to rename it. l Select an item and press the Delete key to delete it. EXPAND/COLLAPSE ALL When a library category or folder is selected in the Folders pane, Expand All and Collapse All are available in the contextual menu, allowing you to expand or contract its contents in the tree list. All folders located within the selected folder are expanded or contracted, as well. Searching and Filtering the Library Depending on how much library content you have imported or customized, the tree list in the Folders panel can be extensive. The Library Browser filtering options let you focus your searches using parameters that you define. There are several approaches to finding content. SEARCHING THE LIBRARY The most straight-forward way to find content in the Library Browser is to search for it. You can search for item names, folder names, object types, tags, and other search attributes. When Include Web Results is enabled, content available for download from the Chief Architect 3D Library is also included in the Search results. Be sure to scroll down the Search drop-down list as well as the Filter Results. 953 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Searching and Filtering the Library To search the Library Browser 1. Click in the Search text field at the top of the Filters panel and begin typing a keyword to search for. 2. As you type, a list will drop down below the text field, showing search results that update as you type.   The Library Filter drop-down list with search results. l Use the keyboard Arrow keys or scroll bar to scroll through the drop-down list.   l Click on a line item to use that item as a search parameter that influences how the Folders and Filter Results panels are populated, below.   When Include Web Results is enabled, the search results include downloadable content available in the Chief Architect 3D Library. See Library Content on page 961. 3. You can use Boolean keywords and quotation marks to refine your search: l Boolean keywords (NOT, AND, OR), capitalized and with spaces, can be used. Shortcuts (!, +, |) can be used, as well. l Boolean keywords' are prioritized from highest to lowest in this order: not, and, or. Parentheses can also be used. l Use quotation marks “” to search for an exact word or phrase. Quotation marks around a Boolean keyword will treat the keyword as a normal search term. l Press the Enter key on the keyboard to populate the Filter Results panel with items that match your search text. 4. You can also search for Object Attributes, which are listed in the Advanced Search dialog: l Type l Style l Manufacturer l Symbol Type l Symbol Options 954 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Searching and Filtering the Library l Symbol Placement l Hardware Options l Has (Material Maps) l Plant is 3D 5. To combine an attribute with a keyword, use this format: Attribute: keyword. 6. To restrict your search to one or more folders, select them in the Folders panel, then right-click on the selection and select Search in Folder(s). The selected folder(s) will act as filters until they are actively removed or another filter is selected. 7. Repeat steps 2 - 5 to add additional parameters to the current filter if you wish. 8. Click the Advanced Search button to further refine your search as well as create a Custom Filter. See below. 9. You can click the Clear button on the right side of the Search text field to remove anything typed in this field. 10. Right-click on an item in the Search Results list and select Show in Folder to view the item’s location in the Folders list. You can use the Go Back and Go Forward in History buttons in the Filter panel of the Library Browser to cycle between filters that have been active during the current program session. CREATING AND USING TAGS Tags let you group library items into categories that make library filtering more efficient for you. There are numerous uses for Tags, for example: to group items that you use often by drawing task, design style, or a particular project. Chief Architect has a single system tag, Favorites , but you can create your own by clicking the Create New button in the Tags panel of the Library Browser. See The Library Browser on page 946. To add a tag to an item, right-click on it and select Tags> from the contextual menu. In the submenu, check the box beside each Tag that you would like to add to the selected item and then select Apply. See Using the Contextual Menu on page 951. You can also select Tags> Manage Tags from the contextual menu for one or more selected objects to open the Manage Library Tags dialog. 955 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Searching and Filtering the Library Search If you have created a large number of Tags, you can type in this field to search for a particular Tag name.   l A drop-down list of search results will appear below the field that updates as you type: click on an item in that list to select and apply it to the selected objects. l You can also create a new Tag using what you have typed as its name. Tags for Item/Common Tags for Items The names of Tags assigned to the selected object(s) are reported here. l When multiple objects are selected, only the Tags assigned to all objects will be named here.   l Click on a name to remove that Tag from the selected object(s). Tags The names of all available Tags are listed here. l Click on the name of a Tag to assign it to the selected object(s). l As in the Tags panel of the Library Browser, you can Create New Tags as well as right-click on a Tag's name here and Rename, Change Color, or Delete. To use a tag to find items in the Library Browser, simply click on its name in the Tags panel. All library items that have been assigned that tag will be listed in the Filter Results, where you can select them for use in your drawing. You can also include Tags in custom saved Filters. FILTERING THE LIBRARY A Library Filter is a set of one or more search parameters that allows you to search for specific content by restricting what is listed in the Folders and Filter Results panels. Library Filters can include plain text, a Symbol Type, an object Type, a Folder, and/or one or more Tags. You can add items to a filter by typing in the Search field, selecting a folder in the Folders panel, or selecting a Tag. Depending on which parameters are already in use, it is possible that a parameter may be removed when a new one is added. To fine-tune a set of search parameters, or to save a set of parameters for future use, click the Advanced Search button. Any filters that you create will be in the Active Filter drop-down list at the top of the Library Browser. Select a filter from the list to display content in the library tree list according to its settings. See The Library Browser on page 946. ADVANCED SEARCH DIALOG Click the Advanced Search button in the Library Browser to refine your search results. You can also create custom filters in this dialog. 956 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Searching and Filtering the Library Saved Filters A list of all saved filters is found here. See Creating Custom Filters, below.   l Click on a saved filter to select it and edit its search parameters using the options on the right. l Click the New button to create a new filter using the currently selected parameters. In the New Library Filter dialog, type a short, descriptive, unique name for the new filter. l Click the Copy button to create a new filter with search parameters that are identical to the selected filter. l Click the Rename button to rename the currently selected saved filter. l Click the Delete button to delete the currently selected saved filter. l Click the Save button to save any changes made to the selected filter. Filters with unsaved changes are can be identified by an asterisk after their names. Names/Keywords l Text Contains - Type the text you would like to use as a search parameter. When you press the Enter key, it will be added to the Selected Parameters list. o Check Match Whole Word to match the entire keyword or words with the complete name of an item. o Check Exclude Keywords to ignore search attribute keywords when searching. See Search Attributes, below. l Tags - When you begin typing in the text field, a drop-down list of available Tags will appear below the field and will update as you type. Click on a line item to add it to the Selected Parameters list. 957 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Searching and Filtering the Library l In Folder - When you begin typing in the text field, a drop-down list of folder names that match what you typed will appear below the field and will update as you type. Click on a line item to add to the Selected Parameters list. Exclude Catalogs Click this button to open the Exclude Catalogs dialog, where you can select catalog-level library items to exclude from your search. Attribute Parameters Select various object attributes to include in your search.   l Check the box beside an option to use it as a search parameter. For Material Maps and Plants, a "no change" state allows you to include items in your search regardless of whether they have a particular attribute. l Click the arrow beside an attribute category to expand it: o Type - A variety of library item types is listed here.   o Style - A selection of architectural and design styles is listed here. See Search Attributes, below. o Manufacturer - A list of brands with Chief Architect Manufacturer Catalogs is listed here. If Include Web Results is toggled on, all available manufacturers are listed; if not, only those actually installed in the Library Browser are listed. See Manufacturer Catalogs on page 961.   o Symbol Type - The different types of symbol objects are listed here. See Symbol Categories on page 1003. o Symbol Options and Symbol Placement - These options correspond to settings in the Symbol Object Specification dialogs. See Options Panel on page 994.   o Hardware Options - Options specific to hardware symbols are listed here. See Door Hardware on page 553 and Cabinet Hardware on page 638.   o Material Maps - These options let you search for materials based on the types of material maps they have. A "no change" state searches for materials regardless of whether it has a particular map file. See Material Maps on page 1050. l Plant is 3D - This option lets you search for either 3D plant symbols or 2D plant images. A "no change" state searches for both. See Plant Tools on page 1294. Selected Search Parameters The currently selected parameters are listed here.   l Parameters have icons that indicate which type of data they restrict. l Click on a parameter from the list. EXCLUDE CATALOGS DIALOG Click the Edit button beside Exclude Catalogs in the Advanced Search dialog to open this dialog and select library catalogs to exclude from the current Filter, regardless of the active search parameters. 958 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Searching and Filtering the Library The contents of the tree list in the Folders panel of the Library Browser are listed here. Check the box beside any catalog's name to exclude it from the currently active filter. SEARCH ATTRIBUTES The Search Attributes dialog lists the keywords and styles associated with a selected library object. Keywords and styles can be used to locate the object when performing a library search. See The Library Browser on page 946.   To open the Search Attributes dialog, right-click on an individual item and select Search Attributes from the contextual menu. See Using the Contextual Menu on page 951. While the Search Attributes for items in the User Catalog can be edited, those belonging to items in the Core, Bonus, or Manufacturer Catalogs can only be viewed. 959 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Find in Library Keywords Any searchable keywords associated with the object display in the list. Click in the list box and type in any additional keywords that you would like to use. Each keyword should be on its own line in the list.   Styles Check the box beside any architectural or design styles that you want to associate with the object.   Find in Library You can find out whether a selected object is saved in the library and if so, where, using the Find Original in Library edit tool. The Find Original in Library edit tool also allows you to locate any objects inserted  into the selected object as well as any materials or moldings assigned to it. See Inserted Objects on page 973. In addition, this tool provides a means of adding your choice of the object and/or any inserted and assigned objects to the library. See Add to Library As on page 966.   FIND IN LIBRARY DIALOG The Find in Library dialog opens when you select one or more objects and click the Find Original in Library edit button This dialog lists all of the selected objects as well as all objects assigned to and inserted into them. Highlighted line items are categories that may have multiple components beneath them. l Check the box beside a line item to find that object in the library. l Check the box beside a category heading to select all items in that category. When you click OK, the dialog will close and one of three things will happen: l If a single line item was selected in the Find in Library dialog was clicked, that item will be selected in the tree list of the Library Browser. l If the single line item is not found in the library, a message box will inform you of this and give you the option of adding it to the library. l If multiple line items were selected, the Show in Library Results dialog will open, summarizing the status of each. SHOW IN LIBRARY RESULTS If multiple line items are selected in the Find in Library dialog, the Show in Library Results dialog will report where, or if, they are found in the library. Each line item selected in the Find in Library dialog is listed here. l Click on a line item to select it. Multiple lines can also be selected. See Shift and Ctrl Select on page 214. l Click the Show in Library button to locate and select the selected line item in the tree list of the Library Browser. Not available if the selected item is “Not Found in Library Browser”, or if multiple line items are selected. l Click the Add to Library button to add the selected line item(s) to the User Catalog in the library. See Add to Library As on page 966. l Click the Done button to close the dialog. 960 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Library Content Library Content The Chief Architect Premier library has five categories: Chief Architect Core Catalogs, Chief Architect Bonus Catalogs, Manufacturer Catalogs, User Catalog and Trash. CHIEF ARCHITECT CORE CATALOGS The Chief Architect Core Catalogs category contains a wide selection of 3D symbols, images, CAD objects, and materials. If you install the program from USB drive, this library content will also be installed; if you download the software, you will be able to download the Core Catalogs separately, after the program is installed. When you launch the program for the first time, it will ask if you want to download the Core Catalogs. Click Yes to begin the download. If you click No, you can download at any time by selecting Library> Install Core Content from the menu. CHIEF ARCHITECT BONUS CATALOGS Chief Architect regularly posts new library catalogs available for download. Select  Library> Get Additional Content Online from the menu to access the bonus catalogs and content. Most Bonus Catalogs can be purchased for a nominal fee, while others are available free of charge. In addition, some Bonus Catalogs are only available to Chief Architect Support and Software Assurance program members. For more information, visit  chiefarchitect.com. MANUFACTURER CATALOGS A variety of name brand library catalogs is available for download on the Chief Architect website with content ranging from materials to fixtures to CAD blocks.   Select Library> Get Additional Content Online to access these Manufacturer Catalogs.   As with the Bonus Catalogs, some Manufacturer Catalogs are available free of charge while others can be purchased, and some are available for Support and Software Assurance members only.   THE USER CATALOG The User Catalog is the location for items that you add to the library either from a drawing or by importing. See Adding Library Content on page 965. You can create and organize custom library folders and imported items such as symbols, images, backdrops, CAD blocks, line styles, and materials. See Organizing the Library on page 967. COPY ITEM LIST Copy Item List is available in the contextual menu when a library category or folder is selected in the Library Browser Directory Pane. Select this option to copy a list of all objects in the selected library item to the system clipboard. You can then paste this list into a text application such as Notepad. See To Copy, Cut and Paste text on page 515.   961 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Library Content UPDATING LIBRARY CATALOGS The Chief Architect Core Catalogs, Bonus Catalogs, and Manufacturer Catalogs are updated periodically to include new and improved content. The program automatically checks for updates when it is launched and will indicate that updated content is available by displaying the Update icon to the right of the Core, Bonus and/or Manufacturer Catalog categories. This icon is also stamped onto the folder for individual Bonus and Manufacturer catalogs with updated content available: . To update the an individual catalog or all catalogs in a category, right-click on its name in the Folders list and select Update from the contextual menu. See Using the Contextual Menu on page 951. You can update all of your installed catalogs at once by selecting Library> Update Library Catalogs at any time. The program will gather information about the content in each of these three categories, and then download and replace any content that is not up-to-date. As catalogs are updated, you may see a progress indicator at the bottom of the Library Browser. When the process is finished, the Catalog Update Summary dialog will report which catalogs were updated and the status of each update. See Download Progress on page 963. LIBRARY CONTENT LOCATION All library content aside from your User Catalog is stored in the System Library Database Folder. By default, this folder is created in the directory intended for shared application data in your operating system (C:\ProgramData in Windows; /Library/Application Support in macOS). The Chief Architect User Catalog File, User_Library.calib, is saved in the User Library Folder, which is located in the Chief Architect Premier X15 Data folder by default. See Chief Architect Premier Data on page 37. You can specify a different location for both if you wish in the Preferences dialog. If you choose a removable drive or network location, library slowness may result. See Folders Panel on page 106. If you choose to use a different location for your User Catalog, your existing User Library content as well as your Backdrops, Images, Patterns, and Textures folders will be moved there, as well. It is important that you specify a directory on a hard drive with sufficient space to hold these files. Library catalogs are not designed to be shared between program titles or versions. Items designed for use in Chief Architect Premier X15 are not compatible with earlier program versions. BACKING UP CUSTOM CONTENT The best way to back up your custom library content is to export the items in your User Catalog, as this will ensure that the textures used by custom materials or imported symbols are not lost. See Backing Up Your Files on page 42. Exported libraries use the .calibz file format: a zipped file type that can include textures and images along with other library data. To back up your custom library content 1. Launch Chief Architect and open a plan file. 2. If the Library Browser is not open, select View> Library Browser from the menu. 3. Right-click on a folder or item in the User Catalog. 962 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Downloading Library Content 4. Select Export Library from the contextual menu. 5. The Export Library Data dialog is a typical Save dialog. See Exporting Files on page 41. l Notice that the file type in the Save as type field is “Library File with Textures/Images (*.calibz)”. Downloading Library Content The Chief Architect Core Catalogs, Chief Architect Bonus Catalogs, Manufacturer Catalogs are all available for internet download.   CORE CATALOGS When you launch Chief Architect for the first time, you will be asked if you want to download the Core Catalogs. Click Yes to begin the download. If you click No, you can download at any time by selecting Library> Install Core Content from the menu. BONUS AND MANUFACTURER CATALOGS Bonus  and Manufacturer Catalogs can be downloaded from our website, www.chiefarchitect.com. Select Library> Get Additional Content Online to launch your default internet browser to our Content Resources page. When Include Web Results is toggled on, content that is available for download will be included in the Filter Results. Items in the Filter Results that are not downloaded will have the Available Online watermark. Right-click on one these items and select Download Catalog from the contextual menu to download it. If you are not logged in to your online Chief Architect account, you will be prompted to do so. See Chief Architect Account Login on page 1223. DOWNLOAD PROGRESS When library content is downloading, a green progress bar will display at the bottom of the Library Browser. If you choose to download the Core Catalogs while the library is not open, the Browser will open so the progress indicator can display. Click on the progress bar to display the name of the current file being downloaded, the total amount of data to be downloaded in KB, and the amount downloaded so far. PAUSING AND RESUMING Library downloads can only take place while Chief Architect is running. If you close the program while a download is in progress, a dialog will confirm whether you wish to stop the download. l Click Stop Download and Close Program to stop the download and close the program. l Click Cancel to leave the program open and continue downloading. Most catalogs are composed of a single file. If you stop the download midway, none of the downloaded data will be retained. 963 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Importing Library Catalogs The Core Catalogs, on the other hand, contain a large volume of data saved in multiple files. If you close the program and stop the Core Catalogs download midway, only data associated with the file currently being downloaded will be lost. You can resume the download beginning with that file at a later time by selecting Library> Install Core Content. DOWNLOAD ERRORS If any problems occur during the library download process, a dialog box will notify you at the end of the download. Click Retry Download to repeat the download and correct any errors or click Cancel to discard the downloaded catalog. Importing Library Catalogs Chief Architect library files have two different file extensions: .calib and .calibz. Both files can include any combination of Chief Architect library items; in addition, .calibz files are able to save data associated with textures and images. Both file types can be imported into the Chief Architect library. There are several ways to import a .calib or .calibz file into the program library: l Double-click on the file in an operating system window while a plan or layout file is open. l Drag the file from an operating system window and drop it into the Chief Architect program window. l Select Library> Import Library from the program menu. Although multiple versions of Chief Architect can be installed on a computer, the operating system will only associate .calib and .calibz library files with one version. If they are not associated with Chief Architect Premier X15, click the Associate Files with this Program button in the Preferences dialog. See File Management Panel on page 104.   Note: Library files cannot be imported if no plan or layout file is open, or when a Materials List or Ray Trace view window is active. To import library files into the library 1. Select Library> Import Library to display the Import Library Data dialog. 2. Browse to the .calib or .calibz file(s) that you want to import and either single or group-select the files so that their names display in the File Name field. l To select a group of files, click on the first one, hold down the Shift key, then click on another file. The two files plus all files in between are selected. l To select multiple files individually, click on one, hold down the Ctrl key, then click on additional files. Only the files you click on are selected. l To select all files in the directory, click on one and press Ctrl + A. Only do this if you wish to import all files in the folder. 3. Click the Open button. 4. A progress bar will display, telling you the progress of each library data file as it is imported. 5. Once imported, each file will be listed in and selected in the Library Browser tree list. See Library Content on page 961. l If the catalog is a Bonus or Manufacturer catalog, it will be added to the corresponding library catalog. l Otherwise, the catalog's contents will be added to the User Catalog. The catalog's folder structure will be preserved, and if any duplicate objects are found, you will be notified. 964 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Adding Library Content When a .calibz file is imported into the program, any images or textures saved in it will be copied into the Chief Architect Premier X15 Data\ Images and Textures folders for backup purposes. The program will only reference these copies if it cannot locate the files in their original locations. See Chief Architect Premier Data on page 37. LIBRARY CATALOG MIGRATION If you have library catalogs from Chief Architect Premier X5 through X14 installed on your computer, the initial startup of Chief Architect Premier X15 will give you the opportunity to migrate that content into the Version X15 Library. LEGACY LIBRARY CONVERSION You can also import  legacy .calib and .calibz files created in Chief Architect X4, X3, or X2 for use in Version X15 at any time. See Exporting Library Catalogs on page 972.   Note: Library content exported from Chief Architect X3 will not include catalog names. Any subscribed content from Version X3 that has not been downloaded will not be included, either. In addition, legacy .alb files created in Chief Architect Versions X1 and 10  and prior can be converted for use in Version X15. Conversion of legacy .alb files from Versions 9 and 8 is not supported.   To convert legacy library files 1. Select Library> Convert Legacy (.alb) Library Files.   2. In the Select a Legacy Library File Folder dialog, select  one or more .alb files that you want to bring in to Chief Architect X15.   3. The selected files’ names will display in the File name: field.   4. Click the Open button to import these legacy library files into the User Catalog.   5. Organize the imported content to suit your needs. See Organizing the Library on page 967.   Adding Library Content In addition to downloading Chief Architect Content and importing entire catalogs into the library, you can also add a variety of individual objects to the library. ADD TO LIBRARY Nearly any object imported into a plan, converted into a symbol, or placed from the Library Browser can be added to the User Catalog in the library. l Select one or more objects in your plan and click the Add to Library edit button. l Check Add to Library in the Import 3D Symbol dialog. See Importing 3D Symbols on page 998.   l Check Add to Library in the Convert to Symbol dialog. See Convert to Symbol on page 1002. l Custom Patterns can also be added to the Library when they are created or edited. See Custom Patterns on page 196.   A few objects cannot be added to the library: notably imported pictures, metafiles, and PDF files. With the exception of closed polylines, which are added to the library as Molding Profiles, CAD objects cannot be added to the library either. These objects can be added, though, if they are part of a CAD block. See CAD Blocks on page 329. 965 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Adding Library Content Any object created using a drawing tool in Chief Architect will automatically be added to the User Catalog using the name of that tool, whereas a symbol will automatically use the Symbol Name. See Native Objects vs Symbols on page 971. If multiple identical objects are selected when the Add to Library button is clicked, only one instance will be added to the User Catalog. Once added to the library, objects in the User Catalog can be renamed and edited. See Renaming Library Items on page 968. ADD TO LIBRARY AS Some objects have library items assigned to or inserted into them. Cabinets, for example, have door panels inserted into them and materials assigned to them. You can choose to add the containing object to the library, the inserted or assigned items, or any combination of the two using the Add to Library As edit tool. See Placing Library Objects on page 972.   To use Add to Library As 1. Select an object that has another item inserted into it and click the Add to Library As edit button.   2. In the Add to Library As dialog, check the box beside each line item that you would like to add to the User Catalog.   l The top line item is the selected object while those that follow are components of that object.   l Highlighted items are categories that may have multiple components beneath them. Check the box beside a category to add all of its components to the library.   l The line items under each category are components which can be added to the library by checking their boxes individually.   l Check Save Objects in Subfolders to create a new folder in the User Catalog in which the selected line items are saved. If the line items are associated with multiple parent objects, a folder is created for each parent and placed in an “Exported Objects” folder in the User Catalog.   USING THE CONTEXTUAL MENU A variety of new content can be added to the User Catalog by right-clicking on it or on a folder within it and selecting New> from the contextual menu: l Backdrops - See 3D Backdrops on page 1204.   l Fill Styles - See Fill Styles on page 192.   l Patterns - See Custom Patterns on page 196. 966 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Organizing the Library l Style Palettes - See Style Palettes on page 279.   l Images - See Images on page 1185.   l Line Styles - See Line Style Specification Dialog on page 201.   l Materials - See Creating Materials on page 1060. l Plant Image - See Plant Image Specification Dialog on page 1297. l 3D Symbols - See Importing 3D Symbols on page 998. See also Using the Contextual Menu on page 951 and Adding New Folders on page 967.   CREATING A CUSTOMIZED LIBRARY ITEM You can customize an existing library item and save your changes for future use by first copying the item into the User Catalog.   To customize a library object 1. Right-click on a library item and select Copy to User Catalog from the contextual menu. 2. If the library item is already located in the User Catalog, instead select Duplicate from the contextual menu. 3. Right-click on the copied item and select Open Object from the menu.   4. The item’s specification dialog opens, and you can make any changes that you wish to the item.   5. Make any needed changes to the item, then click OK. Your changes will be saved with this item for use in any plan.   Organizing the Library Library folders and objects can be copied, pasted, moved, and deleted: allowing you to organize your User Catalog to best suit your work style and needs. See The User Catalog on page 961. ADDING NEW FOLDERS New folders can be added to the User Catalog or to any folder located within it. To add a new folder, right-click on User Catalog or one of its sub-folders and select New> Folder from the contextual menu. See Using the Contextual Menu on page 951. The new folder is created inside the library item you right-clicked on and is initially named “Untitled”. Right-click on it and select Rename from the contextual menu, then type a short, descriptive name and press Enter. 967 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Organizing the Library SELECTING LIBRARY ITEMS To select a library object, folder, or category, simply click on it in the Folders tree list. You can also multiple-select library items. See Shift and Ctrl Select on page 214. l To select a group of items, click on the first one, hold down the Shift key, then click on another item. The two items plus all items in between are selected.   l To select multiple items individually, click on one, hold down the Ctrl key, then click on additional items. Only the items you click on are selected.   When an object is selected, a thumbnail displays in the Filter Results and Preview panels and basic information about it also displays in the program’s Status Bar. See The Status Bar on page 24. A selected library item can be modified in a number of ways to help meet your organizational needs. When multiple items are selected, these options may be limited depending on the specific selection set. RENAMING LIBRARY ITEMS Only folders and objects in the User Catalog can be renamed. There are several ways to do this in the tree list: l Right-click on the item, select Rename from the contextual menu, and type a new name. l Click once on the item, press F2 on your keyboard and type a new name. l Click once on the item, pause for a moment, then click a second time and type a new name. You can change this behavior in the Preferences dialog. See Library Browser Panel on page 100. Library names are case-sensitive. While you can have more than one library item that uses the same name, it is best to use short, descriptive and unique names. Some objects, notably CAD blocks, must have unique names and will have numbers appended to their names if different blocks with the same name are placed in a plan. When an object's name is changed in the User Catalog, its name is also changed in its specification dialog. MOVING LIBRARY ITEMS Folders and objects in the User Catalog can be moved to new locations within the User Catalog. There are several ways to do this: l Select one or more items in the Folders tree list, then click and drag it to the new location in the list. An icon that follows the mouse pointer indicates when it is over supported and unsupported locations, and any folder able to accept the new content highlights as your mouse pointer moves over it. Release the mouse button to relocate the selection in the highlighted location. l Cut one or more selected items from their current location, right-click on the folder where you want to move them, and Paste them there. Cut is found in the selected items' contextual menu while Paste is found in the contextual menu for the destination folder. See Cut, Copy, and Paste on page 168. l Using Move to Folder, which is available in the contextual menu for library objects, but not for folders. See Using the Contextual Menu on page 951. Folders and library objects are always organized alphabetically within each hierarchy. COPYING AND LINKING LIBRARY ITEMS All library folders and objects can be copied and pasted to new locations in the User Catalog using options in their contextual menus. There are two types of copies in the library: 968 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Organizing the Library l Independent copies of objects that can then be customized without affecting the original. Both folders and objects can be copied to the User Catalog. l Linked copies, which are actually representations of the same object shown in different locations in the User Catalog. If one copy is edited, all linked copies are affected. Only library objects can have linked copies: folders cannot. There are two ways to create independent copies of folders and/or objects: l Copy one or more selected folders and/or objects in their current location, right-click on the User Catalog or the subfolder where you want to copy them, and Paste them there. Copy is found in the selected items' contextual menu while Paste is found in the contextual menu for the destination folder. See Cut, Copy, and Paste on page 168. l Copy to User Catalog pastes copies of the selected object(s) in the User Catalog automatically, without requiring you to choose the location or the Paste command. Not available for folders. There are also two ways to create linked copies of objects in the User Catalog: l Copy copies a selected object or objects to the system Clipboard. Right-click on the User Catalog or the subfolder where you want to want a linked copy and select Paste Link from the contextual menu. l Move to Folder allows you to select multiple folders to list a selected object or objects in. MOVE TO FOLDER(S) DIALOG The Move to Folder(s) dialog allows you to specify which User Catalog folder(s) a selected object or group of objects is listed in. When multiple folders are selected, linked copies of the selected object(s) are created. 969 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Library Objects Search If your User Catalog contains many folder or subfolders, you can type in this field to search for a particular folder name. A drop-down list of search results will appear below the field that updates as you type: click on an item in that list to select it. Folders for Item/Common Folders for Items The names of folders the selected object(s) are listed in are reported here. l When multiple objects are selected, only the folders that all objects are listed in will be named here. l Click on a name to remove the selected object(s) from that folder. User Catalog Folders The names of all folders and subfolders in the User Catalog are listed here. l Check the box beside the User Catalog, a folder, or a subfolder to list the selected objects in that location. DELETING LIBRARY ITEMS The five installed library categories: Chief Architect Core Catalogs, Chief Architect Bonus Catalogs, Manufacturer Catalogs, User Catalog, and Trash cannot be deleted. Catalog level folders in all categories can be deleted; however, individual subfolders and objects can only be deleted out of the User Catalog. Items in the library that are eligible for deletion can be deleted in either of two ways: l Right-click on it and choose Delete from the contextual menu. l Select it and press the Delete key on your keyboard. When items from the User Catalog are deleted, they are moved to the Library Browser Trash . Items in the Trash can be retrieved by right-clicking on them and selecting Restore from the contextual menu. To empty the Trash, right-click on it and select Empty Trash from the contextual menu. Depending on how much content is in the Trash, emptying it can be time consuming. You can click the Cancel button to end the process if you wish. The Empty Trash command is both immediate and permanent. It cannot be undone, so use care when using it. You should back up all your library files regularly. See Backing up Custom Content on page 962. When content is deleted from the Library Browser, data associated with that content may remain in the library database. If you delete library content for the purpose of increasing available disk space, you can right-click on the User Catalog as well as the Trash and select Vacuum from the contextual menu. See The Library Browser on page 946. Editing Library Objects The Core, Manufacturer, and Bonus Catalogs and the objects within them cannot be edited. Library objects can, however, be customized to suit your design needs. There are three approaches to doing so:   970 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Library Objects l Select an object in the User Catalog, edit it using any of the options in its contextual menu, and your changes will be reflected when you next place this library object in a drawing. See Using the Contextual Menu on page 951. l Place an object in a drawing and then edit it using the various edit tools available for it. This will not affect the original object still saved in the library.   l Place an object in a drawing, edit it using the available edit tools, and then add it back to the library for future use. This will not replace the original object still saved in the library. See Add to Library on page 965.   To customize an object in the Core, Manufacturer, or Bonus Catalog, right-click on it and select Copy to User Catalog from the contextual menu. NATIVE OBJECTS VS SYMBOLS In Chief Architect, objects created using the program’s standard tools, such as the Door Tools and Cabinet Tools , are referred to as native objects. On the other hand, objects placed from the library, such as fixtures and furnishings, are symbols. Symbols are typically more limited than native objects in how they can be edited. In addition to the symbols available in the library, you can import additional symbols into the program from 3D .dxf, .dwg, .obj, .3ds, .skp, or .dae files. See Importing 3D Symbols on page 998. Any changes made to objects like fixtures and furniture will not be reflected in their Materials List Description, although they may be seen in other columns, such as Size. See Materials Lists on page 1303. You can change a symbol’s name, which is used in its Materials List Description, in the Symbol Specification dialog. You can also change the names of its components. See 3D Panel on page 990 and Materials Panel on page 997.   USING THE EDIT TOOLS In addition, items saved in the User Catalog can be edited. If you right-click on a line item in the Library Browser Directory Pane, one or more edit tools may be available in the contextual menu: Right-click on the name of an individual symbol, Text or Rich Text object, Callout, Marker, Note, Elevation Point, image, or plant image and select Open Object to open that item's specification dialog. Open Object is also available for multiple selected items of the same type. See Specification Dialogs on page 21. Right-click on the name of a cabinet with a fixture inserted in its top and select Open Symbol to open that item's Symbol Specification dialog. See Symbol Object Specification Dialogs on page 986. Right-click on the name of a CAD block or a symbol object represented by a CAD Block in plan view and select Edit CAD Block to open a CAD Block Window where that block can be edited. See Edit CAD Block on page 330. Individual or multiple group-selected materials can be edited by right-clicking and selecting Open Object as well. See Define Material Dialog on page 1066.   EDITING BUILT-IN FIXTURES AND APPLIANCES A fixture inserted into the top of a cabinet can be selected by clicking on it, then clicking the Select Next Object edit tool. See Select Next Object on page 211. In addition, items saved in the User Catalog can be edited. If you right-click on a line item in the Library Browser Directory Pane, one or more edit tools may be available in the contextual menu: 971 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Exporting Library Catalogs Select Open Object to open the cabinet's specification dialog. See Cabinet Specification Dialog on page 643. Select Open Symbol to open the fixture's Symbol Specification dialog. See Symbol Object Specification Dialogs on page 986. A fixture installed into the front of a cabinet becomes a cabinet face item, like a door or drawer. It can be resized or deleted like other face items in the Cabinet Specification dialog. See Front/Sides/Back Panel on page 648. SEARCH ATTRIBUTES Objects in the library all have one or more search attributes, which are keywords and architectural styles that can be used to find them in a library search. The Search Attributes dialog lists these attributes for each library object. See Search Attributes on page 959.   Exporting Library Catalogs Exporting library files allows you to: l Back up your custom library content. l Transfer library content between computers. l Share custom library content with colleagues.   Exporting is often preferable to simply copying library files because it allows you to include images and textures in the exported library. To export content from the library 1. Locate an object, folder, or catalog that you want to export, right click on it, and select Export Library. 2. In the Export Library Data dialog: l Choose the appropriate Save in: location for your exported library file. l Type a short, descriptive name for your library file in the File Name field. l Click the Save as type: drop-down list and select whether or not you want the library to include Textures/Images. If any of the items being exported are images or use textures, be sure to select the .calibz file type. l Click Save. 3. Your exported library file can now be copied to a network location or storage device in an operating system window. Placing Library Objects Library objects are subject to placement restrictions based upon typical real-life placement. Most library objects require sufficient free space at the location where they are placed, for example, and some library objects have additional requirements. Library windows and doors, for example, must be placed in a wall just like standard windows and doors, and some fixtures are designed to be placed in cabinets. Library symbols have placement restrictions that are determined when the symbol is created but can be changed later. See Native Objects vs Symbols on page 971 and Symbol Object Specification Dialogs on page 986.   972 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Placing Library Objects There are three main categories of items available in the Library Browser: l Stand-alone objects that can be placed directly into a plan. Examples include cabinet modules, furnishings and images. l 3D objects designed to be inserted into another 3D object. Examples include cabinet fixtures, windows and doors. Some items, such as cabinet doors, railing balusters, and fence panels, can be inserted into another object or placed as stand-alone objects. l Materials, line styles, fill styles, and molding profiles, which cannot stand alone and must be assigned or applied to another object. If a warning message displays when placing a library object or symbol, it will indicate where the object can be placed. STAND-ALONE OBJECTS Most library categories contain objects that can be selected in the Library Browser and placed directly in a 2D or 3D view. l Most stand-alone objects are designed to rest on the floor or terrain. l Some objects will rest on top of a cabinet or countertop, shelf, furniture, or roof plane object if one is located at the point where they are first placed. l A few objects, notably some light fixtures, will mount on the bottom of a wall cabinet or on the ceiling. l In addition, some objects will attach to a wall if one is nearby. To place a stand-alone library object 1. Click on an object in the Folders tree list or Filter Results list in the Library Browser to select it for placement. See The Library Browser on page 946. 2. Move your mouse pointer into the view area and notice that it displays an icon indicating the type of object selected instead of an arrow. 3. Click to place the selected object at that location. 4. Continue clicking to place as many instances of the selected object as needed. When you are finished, click the Select Objects button. Once a stand-alone object has been placed, it can be edited in a variety of ways. See Editing Library Objects on page 970. INSERTED OBJECTS Some objects cannot stand alone and must be placed into other objects in a plan. For example, doors and windows must be inserted into a wall, while some appliances and plumbing fixtures are designed be placed inside a base cabinet. See Doors on page 543, Windows on page 576 and Cabinets on page 617. With the exceptions of doors, windows, and skylights, an inserted library object can only display in a 2D or 3D view if the object that contains it is set to display. This is the case even if the inserted object’s layer is turned on. See Displaying Symbol Objects on page 979. To insert a library object 1. Click on an item in the Folders tree list or Filter Results list of the Library Browser to select it for placement. See The Library Browser on page 946. 2. Move your pointer into the drawing area. 3. Click on the object into which you wish to insert the selected library item. If the selected library item is designed to be inserted into that type of object, it will be placed into it. 973 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Select Library Object Dialog 4. Continue clicking on other objects to place as many instances of the selected item as needed. When you are finished, click the Select Objects button. When an object has been inserted into another object, it can be replaced directly from the library. See Replace From Library on page 976. If you try to insert an object into another object that is on a locked layer, nothing will be created. See Object Creation and Layers on page 167.   ASSIGNED ITEMS Some library items, such as line styles, fill styles, materials and moldings, are not objects in themselves but can be applied to objects in a variety of ways. l Using the specification dialog of the containing object. See Select Library Object Dialog on page 974. l By selecting the item in the library and then clicking on the containing object.   l Fill styles, materials and moldings can be assigned to objects directly from the library in 3D views by selecting the library item and then clicking on an object.  See Eyedropper and Painter Tools on page 277 and Replace From Library on page 976. l An entire collection of properties can be applied to multiple objects by selecting a Style Palette in the library and then clicking on an eligible object. See Style Palettes on page 279.   l Moldings and line styles can also be added to a plan by selecting the desired library item, then clicking and dragging a line in the drawing area. The result is either a Molding Line or CAD Line, depending on the selected library item. See Molding Polylines on page 935 and Line Styles on page 199.   PLACE LIBRARY OBJECT BUTTON The Place Library Object button can be added to your toolbar and used for quick access and placement of frequently used library items. See Place Library Object Button on page 975.   Once a library object has been assigned, click the button and then click in a view to place or apply the assigned item.   Select Library Object Dialog The Select Library Object dialog is a modal version of the Library Browser that is accessible from many object specification dialogs. See Specification Dialogs on page 21. This dialog also opens when you select the Fill Style Painter tool. See Painter Tools on page 278.   974 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Place Library Object Button The Select Library Object dialog only displays categories of items that are related to the object component being edited. For example, if this dialog is accessed from the DOOR/DRAWER panel of the Cabinet Specification dialog, only cabinet door and drawer symbols will be listed. If it is accessed from the Moldings panel, only moldings will be listed. The Select Library Object dialog is similar to the LIBRARY MATERIALS panel of the Select Material dialog. See Select Material/Library Object Dialog on page 1056. Place Library Object Button The Place Library Object button can be added to your toolbar and used for quick access and placement of frequently used library items.   If the Place Library Object button has not yet been assigned a library object, click it once to open the Library Object Button Specification dialog.   Double-click a Place Library Object button that has been assigned a library object to open the Library Object Button Specification dialog.   Library Object Click the Library button to open the Select Library Object dialog and assign a library object to the button. If a library object has already been assigned, click this button to assign a new library object. See Select Library Object Dialog on page 974.   Button Name When a library object has been selected, type a Button Name in the text field.   975 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Replace From Library Button Icon Choices When a library object has been selected, assign a Button Icon. Choose from two automatically generated button icons or click Browse to browse your computer for a different icon.   Up to 398 Place Library Object buttons can be added to the same toolbar, each assigned a different object.   The library object assigned to the Place Library Object button is actually saved with that particular button. If you move or delete the library item from the library, the button will continue to function.   Replace From Library There are two different ways to replace an object in a plan with another object from the library.   An inserted object or a molding profile can be replaced by a different item from the library with a single click. This approach is particularly effective in 3D views, where the results can immediately be seen. See Inserted Objects on page 973. To replace an inserted object 1. Open the Library Browser, browse to an object of a type similar to the one you wish to replace, and click on it to select it. 2. Select a Replace from Library Scoping Mode from the Edit Toolbar: l Component Mode is the default mode and replaces a single instance of a molding or an inserted object on the target object. Most object types have a list of components in their specification dialog, on the MATERIALS panel. See Materials Panel on page 1055. l Object Mode replaces all instances of an item inserted into the target object. l Room Mode replaces all instances of an item inserted into objects in the room where the target object is located. l Floor Mode replaces all instances of an item inserted into objects on the floor where the target object is located. l Plan Mode replaces all instances of an item inserted into objects in the entire plan. l Toggle Library Replacement Mode allows you to place a free-standing object instead of replacing anything. 3. Move the mouse pointer into the view window. The Replace from Library icon will display near the mouse pointer when it passes over an object that can be replaced by the selection from the library. 4. Click once to replace the object in the plan as well as to any other identical objects, depending on which Painter Scoping Mode is active, with the selected object from the library. Some types of inserted objects - notably, plants assigned to Garden Beds, cabinet doors and drawers, and doors - can also be replaced in this manner in plan view provided that the Alternate Edit Behavior is not active. The Replace from Library icon does not display in plan view, however. In the Windows version of the program, you can temporarily override this replacement behavior in plan view by holding down the Alt key. A free-standing object will be created if there is space for it instead of an inserted object being replaced. 976 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Replace From Library The Replace From Library edit button is available for nearly any stand-alone object that can be added to the library and can be used in 2D and 3D views. Click this button to open the Replace From Library dialog and replace the selected object, and others like it if you choose, with an object of the same type from the library.   Replacement Options l Replace Selected Object replaces only the currently selected object.   l Replace Identical Objects in Room replaces all objects that are in the same room as, and are identical to, the currently selected object. Not available for doors or windows.   l Replace Identical Objects on Floor replaces all objects that are on the same floor as, and are identical to, the currently selected object.   Replace With Click the Library button to open the Select Library Object dialog and select an object to use as a replacement. The name of the object that is currently selected as a replacement displays above.   Replace From Library   cannot be used to replace a selected wall or a selected cabinet with a cabinet of a larger size. In addition, it is not available for backdrops and items assigned to other objects, such as materials. If the Replace from Library edit tool is used to replace an electrical object, any Connect Electrical splines attached to it will be deleted. See Connect Electrical on page 671. 977

Symbol Objects Chapter 28 Symbol objects play a variety of important roles in Chief Architect. Chief Architect provides a complete set of architectural tools for creating highly customized designs, as well as a large selection of objects in the Library Browser that can be used to add more detail to a plan. In addition, if you don’t find precisely what you need, you can either import symbols from third party sources or create your own symbols in Chief Architect. See Importing 3D Symbols on page 998. Custom symbols can also be edited and added to the library. See The Library on page 945. TOPICS Displaying Symbol Objects 979 Editing Symbol Objects 980 Symbol Object Specification Dialogs 986 Importing 3D Symbols 998 3D Data Import Requirements 999 3D Symbols and Materials 1000 Get Last Symbol 1002 Convert to Symbol 1002 Symbol Categories 1003 Exporting a 3D Model 1004 978 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Displaying Symbol Objects Displaying Symbol Objects The display options available for symbol objects depend on the type of object in question, as well as the view. If the display of an object is turned off in a 2D or 3D view, any objects inserted into it will not display in that view, either - even if the inserted object’s layer is turned on. See Inserted Objects on page 973. IN PLAN VIEW All symbol objects except doors and drawers applied to cabinets and hardware applied to doors or cabinets can display in plan view. Symbol objects are represented in plan view by 2D CAD Blocks that resemble the size and shape of the object when viewed from above. The CAD Block representing a symbol object can be specified in the Symbol Specification dialog. See 2D Block Panel on page 993. As with other architectural objects, the display of symbol objects is controlled by layer in the Layer Display Options dialog. Each category of objects has its own layer.  See Layer Display Options Dialog on page 179. Like other objects, each symbol object is  placed in a Drawing Group that affects whether it displays in front of or behind other objects. You can modify a selected symbol’s place in the drawing order by clicking the View Drawing Group Edit Tools edit button. See Drawing Group Edit Tools on page 190. OBJECT LABELS Free-standing symbol objects, including those in Architectural Blocks, can display labels in plan and cross section/elevation views when the appropriate layer is set to display in the Layer Display Options dialog. Fixture labels, for example, are located on the “Fixtures, Labels” layer. See Label Panel on page 700. Object labels have their own edit handles and can be moved and rotated when the object is selected. Library object labels use the Text Style assigned to their layer. See Text Styles on page 538.   You can specify a custom label for symbol objects in their specification dialog. See Symbol Object Specification Dialogs on page 986.   IN 3D VIEWS All symbol objects can display in 3D views when their layers are turned on. IN THE MATERIALS LIST Most objects placed from the library are counted in the Materials List. These architectural objects have a COMPONENTS panel in their specification dialog that lets you control how that object displays in the Materials List. See Components Panel on page 1330.   Note: Although the size and materials of many library objects can be edited, these changes are not reflected in the Materials List. See Materials Lists on page 1303. Some library items such as CAD blocks, line styles, and backdrops do not display in the Materials List.   979 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Symbol Objects FIXTURE AND FURNISHING SCHEDULES The Fixture and Furnishing Schedule tools allow you to produce customizable fixture and furnishing schedules as well as fixture and furnishing labels that display schedule numbers. See The Schedule Tools on page 682.   Although not all symbol object types have a schedule tool, they can be included in schedules, as well. See Schedule Panel on page 704. Schedules can be customized for specific purposes: for example, to create appliance, plumbing, or HVAC schedules. See Working with Multiple Schedules on page 691.   The fixtures or furnishings located in an individual room can be listed in their own schedule. See Create Schedule from Room on page 683.   Editing Symbol Objects Symbol objects can be selected and edited much like other objects in the program. A symbol’s category determines exactly what editing options are available; however, most symbols can be edited using the edit handles, edit toolbar, and specification dialog. See Editing Objects on page 205. Symbols have some additional options that allow you to control how the symbol behaves when it is placed, selected, moved and resized. Stand-alone library symbols placed in a plan can be selected individually or as a group, like other objects in Chief Architect. To select a symbol object inserted into the top of a cabinet, select that cabinet and click the Select Next Object edit button. See Selecting Objects on page 210. Once selected, a library object can be edited in a variety of ways using dimensions, the edit handles, the Edit Toolbar buttons and its specification dialog. See Symbol Object Specification Dialogs on page 986. A selected library object placed in a plan will have a variety of edit tools available. See The Edit Toolbar on page 130. NATIVE OBJECTS VS SYMBOLS In Chief Architect, objects created using the program’s standard tools, such as the Door Tools and Cabinet Tools , are referred to as native objects. On the other hand, objects placed from the library, such as fixtures and furnishings, are symbols. Symbols are typically more limited than native objects in how they can be edited. In addition to the symbols available in the library, you can import additional symbols into the program from 3D .dxf, .dwg, .obj, .3ds, .skp, or .dae files. See Importing 3D Symbols on page 998. Any changes made to objects like fixtures and furniture will not be reflected in their Materials List Description, although they may be seen in other columns, such as Size. See Materials Lists on page 1303. You can change a symbol’s name, which is used in its Materials List Description, in the Symbol Specification dialog. You can also change the names of its components. See 3D Panel on page 990 and Materials Panel on page 997.   USING EDIT HANDLES Most free-standing library symbols are box-based objects and can be edited as such once placed in a drawing. See Editing Box-Based Objects on page 232. Depending on the type of view and the surface selected, the edit handles a symbol displays 980 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Symbol Objects will vary. When a typical symbol is selected in plan view or on the top surface in a 3D view, up to ten edit handles display. They are the Move handle at the center, the Rotate handle just outside the front indicator (a V) and a Resize handle on each edge and at each corner. In plan view, symbol object labels also have a small square Move edit handle and small rectangular Rotate handle. If the selected symbol object has a Stretch Plane defined and you resize it using its edit handles in plan view, the program will give you an opportunity to generate a new 2D CAD Block for it. See Stretch Planes and Zones on page 983. When a symbol is selected on a side in a cross section/elevation or 3D view, it displays six edit handles: the Move handle, a Rotate handle, and a Resize handle on each edge. See Selected Side on page 213 and Rotating Symbols on page 985. When a free-standing symbol is selected on its side and rotated, you will be prompted to choose whether to update its plan view symbol to reflect its new orientation, as viewed from above. See In Plan View on page 979. Symbols cannot be concentrically resized, even when the Concentric edit behavior is enabled. See Defaults, Preferences, and Edit Behaviors on page 206.   The labels of library objects, when displayed, have a separate Move edit handle that displays when the object is selected. See Label Panel on page 700.   Fixtures and furniture placed in a plan are subject to bumping/pushing behavior when moved. See Bumping/Pushing on page 243. EDITING BUILT-IN FIXTURES AND APPLIANCES A fixture symbol inserted into the top of a cabinet can be selected by clicking on it, then clicking the Select Next Object edit tool. Once selected, the fixture can be moved, rotated, and resized using its edit handles. See Inserted Objects on page 973 and Select Next Object on page 211. The specification dialog for a fixture symbol inserted into a cabinet can be accessed in either of two ways: With the fixture selected, click the Open Object edit button to open its specification dialog. Select the cabinet and click the Open Symbol edit button to open the fixture's Symbol Object Specification dialog. A fixture installed into the front of a cabinet becomes a cabinet face item, like a door or drawer. It can be resized or deleted like other face items in the Cabinet Specification dialog. See Front/Sides/Back Panel on page 648. SYMBOL ORIGIN All symbols have an origin point, which determines how the object is positioned when it is placed in a plan. The origin point also determines the location of a symbol’s bounding box and 2D block. The location of a symbol’s origin point is typically on its back surface, at the bottom center; however, this may vary, depending on the symbol’s category. You can see the location of a selected symbol’s origin in preview pane of the Symbol Object Specification dialog. See 3D Panel on page 990. 981 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Symbol Objects The following table lists these default origins by symbol type: Symbol Type Origin location Cabinet (legacy) Bottom, Back, Center Cabinet Door Bottom, Back, Center Doors Bottom, Back, Center Doorways Bottom, Outside, Center Electrical, Ceiling Mounted Center Top Electrical, Wall Mounted Back, Center Electrical, Floor Mounted Center, Bottom Electrical, Wall Mounted Center, Back Furniture Bottom, Back, Center Fixture Bottom, Back, Center Geometric Shapes Bottom, Back, Center Hardware Bottom, Back, Center Millwork Bottom, Back, Center Molding N/A Plant Bottom, Back, Center Sprinkler Back, Center; Height varies Windows Bottom, Exterior, Center of sill You can offset a symbol from its origin point. This can make it easy to insert the object inside another object, but does not affect the location of the bounding box or the 2D block that displays in plan view. 982 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Symbol Objects To create an insertable symbol 1. Make a note of the symbol’s actual size on the GENERAL panel of its specification dialog. 2. Click the Open Symbol edit button to open the Symbol Specification dialog. 3. On the 3D panel, check Specify Origin. 4. Adjust the X, Y and/or Z values as needed: l To insert the back of the symbol into the side of another object at a particular distance, specify that distance in the Y field as a positive value. l To insert the bottom of the symbol into the top of another object, specify the distance that it should be dropped as a negative value in the Z field. BOUNDING BOXES An object’s bounding box determines the amount of space it requires in 3D and thus how close it can be moved to other objects before it bumps into them. For most symbol objects, the bounding box corresponds to the extents of the object's geometry. Some objects have an enlarged bounding box to create required clearances. The bounding box also defines the selectable area around a symbol: when you click within an object’s bounding box, it will become selected. Similarly, the bounding box affects whether an object is included in a selection marquee. See Selecting Objects on page 210. When a symbol is selected, its edit handles display around the perimeter of its bounding box. See Edit Handles on page 23. You can create setback space for a symbol by increasing its bounding box size on the SIZING panel of the Symbol Specification dialog. See Sizing Panel on page 988. To create setback space for a symbol 1. Make a note of the symbol’s actual size on the GENERAL panel of its specification dialog. 2. Select a symbol object and click the Open Symbol edit button to open the Symbol Specification dialog. 3. On the SIZING panel, click the Show Advanced Controls button. 4. Increase the Bounding Box Spacing values by the amount of the desired setback space. You can also allow a symbol to set into another object by reducing its bounding box size. Unlike the symbol itself, the bounding box and 2D block cannot be offset from the origin. STRETCH PLANES AND ZONES Stretch Planes and Stretch Zones define where a symbol stretches when resized. If a symbol has no Stretch Planes or Zones, its surfaces will all resize uniformly; if, on the other hand, a Stretch Plane or Zone is defined, the object will resize only within the plane or zone. Any portions of the symbol located outside the plane or zone will not resize at all. l A Stretch Plane is a two dimensional plane within a symbol which increases or decreases in thickness as the symbol is resized. l A Stretch Zone defines an area between two Stretch Planes that resizes uniformly, leaving the area outside unaffected. Stretch Plane coordinates are relative to the symbol’s origin point. For many object types, the origin is located at the bottom center of its back surface. 983 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Symbol Objects When one or more Stretch Planes are specified and the symbol is resized using its edit handles in plan view, the program will present you with the option of updating its 2D CAD Block. See 2D Block Panel on page 993. To define a Width stretch plane 1. Open a symbol’s Symbol Specification dialog using any of the available methods. See Symbol Object Specification Dialogs on page 986. 2. On the SIZING panel, under the Stretch Planes heading, check the box beside 1 to the left of the Width column. The field to its right becomes active. 3. The new plane has an initial value of 0. l Leave it at 0” to run the plane through the object’s default origin point. l Specify a negative number to define a plane to the left of the origin. l Specify a positive number to define a plane to the right of the origin. 4. Click OK. When the symbol’s width is changed, only the cross section defined by the Stretch Plane will be affected. To define a Depth or Height stretch plane 1. On the SIZING panel of the Symbol Object Specification dialogs, under the Stretch Planes heading, check the box beside 1 to the left either the Depth or Height column. The field to its right becomes active. 2. The new plane has an initial value of 0. l To define a Height stretch plane, specify a positive number between 0 and the overall height of the symbol. l To define a Depth stretch plane, specify a negative number. 3. Click OK. When the symbol’s depth or height is changed, only the cross section defined by the Stretch Plane will be affected. A symbol can have up to three Stretch Planes in each direction, for a total of nine. 984 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Symbol Objects To define two stretch planes 1. Open a symbol’s Symbol Object Specification dialog. 2. On the SIZING panel, check the boxes beside 1 and 2 to the left of a column under Stretch Planes. The fields to their right becomes active. 3. Specify the desired values to define each Stretch Plane within the symbol. 4. Click OK. When the symbol is resized, the two cross sections defined by the Stretch Plane will be affected. To define a stretch zone 1. Open a symbol’s Symbol Specification dialog. 2. On the SIZING panel, under the Stretch Planes heading, check the boxes beside 1 and 2 to the left of a column under Stretch Planes. The fields to their right becomes active. 3. Specify values for both planes. 4. Check the box beside the corresponding option in the Stretch Zones section of the panel. 5. Click OK. When the symbol is resized, only the area within the Stretch Zone will be affected. ROTATING SYMBOLS Symbol objects can be rotated in all three dimensions in the Symbol Object Specification dialog. Free-standing symbols can also be rotated in 3D views using the Rotate edit handle: select the symbol on different surfaces to rotate it along its different axes. See Selected Side on page 213. In either case, the symbol’s bounding box will not rotate with the symbol’s geometry. Instead, it will resize as needed to contain the symbol’s surfaces and its sides will remain orthogonal to the X, Y, and Z axes in the drawing space. See 3D Drafting on page 13. Similarly, the symbol origin will not rotate with the symbol geometry. Instead, its position on the bounding box will remain constant and its position relative to the symbol’s surfaces will change. In contrast, stretch zones and planes do rotate with the symbol’s geometry, so if a symbol is rotated and then resized, it will stretch appropriately rather than become misshapen. When a symbol is rotated in 3D, its 2D representation in plan view may need to change. The first time you rotate a symbol, the program will ask if you want the 2D plan view symbol to be regenerated to reflect its new orientation.  If you click Yes, it will be automatically regenerated every time you rotate it. You can enable or disable Auto Generate in the Symbol Object Specification dialog. See 2D Block Panel on page 993.   EDIT WALL CUTOUT POLYLINE The Edit Wall Cutout Polyline edit tool is available in camera views when a selected symbol has Inserts into Wall checked in the Symbol Specification dialog. See Options Panel on page 994. 985 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Symbol Object Specification Dialogs Click this button to enable edit handles on the symbol’s wall cutout polyline so that its shape can be edited. See Editing Closed Polyline-Based Objects on page 228. To restore the original shape of the cutout polyline, click the Reset Wall Cutout Polyline edit button while the cutout polyline is active for editing. Symbol Object Specification Dialogs Select a symbol object and click the Open Object edit button to open that object's Symbol Object Specification dialog. This dialog can also be opened when multiple symbol objects are selected as long as the objects are of the same type. The names of these dialogs vary and are determined by the type of object being edited: l Electrical Service Specification l Fixture Specification l Furniture Specification l Geometric Shape Specification l Hardware Specification l Millwork Specification l Plant Specification l Sprinkler Specification l Symbol Specification dialog for Window Symbols The panels that are available in this dialog depend on the Category that the selected symbol is assigned to. There are a number of other ways to access these dialogs:   l Right-click on a symbol object in the library User Catalog and select Open Object . Editing a symbol in the library changes does not affect any instances of the symbol already placed in a plan. Legacy cabinet symbols cannot be edited in this manner. See Editing Library Objects on page 970.   l Select a base cabinet with a fixture symbol inserted into its top and click the Open Symbol edit button. See Inserted Objects on page 973. l Select a Window Symbol and click the Open Symbol edit button. See Window Symbols on page 581. l Click the Appliance/Door/Drawer Edit button in the specification dialog for a cabinet with a fixture symbol inserted into its front. See Front/Sides/Back Panel on page 648. l Click the Edit button in the Electrical Defaults dialog. See Electrical Defaults on page 667. l Select a schedule row that lists a symbol object and click the Open Row Object(s) edit button. See Open Row Object(s) on page 686.   l Check Show Advanced Options in the Import 3D Symbol dialog. Editing a symbol as it is imported determines the initial attributes that it will have once brought into a plan or saved in the library. See Importing 3D Symbols on page 998. l Check Show Advanced Options in the Convert to Symbol dialog. See Convert to Symbol on page 1002. l The settings in the Hardware Size/Orientation dialog for cabinet hardware are also found on the GENERAL panel of this dialog. See Cabinet Hardware on page 638.   986 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Symbol Object Specification Dialogs GENERAL PANEL The General panel is not available for Window Symbols. Name A symbol object's Name is used in its automatic Description, automatic Label, and when added to the library.   l Specify the selected symbol object's Name. When a symbol is imported into the program, it is given the same name as its file name. See Importing 3D Symbols on page 998.   l Select an option from the drop-down list to Include Size information along with the Name wherever it is used.   Position l Select the Elevation Reference from the drop-down list. This determines where the next two settings are measured from and also affects their setting labels. Not available in the Electrical Service Specification or Hardware Size/Orientation dialog. See Elevation References on page 20. l Specify the height to Top, measured from the selected Elevation Reference to the top of the object. l Specify the height to Bottom, measured from the selected Elevation Reference to the bottom of the object. l The options available for electrical objects differ from other symbol objects, and vary depending on where the selected object is set to be mounted:   o For Ceiling Mounted objects and those set to Mount Under Wall Cabinet, specify the Offset from Ceiling. A negative value recesses the selected object into the surface it is mounted on.   o For Floor Mounted objects, specify the Offset from Floor.   o For Wall Mounted and Cabinet Mounted objects, specify the Height to Center, measured from the object's center to the floor or terrain.   o For Wall Mounted and Cabinet Mounted objects, you can also specify the symbol's horizontal Distance from Wall or Distance from Cabinet. A negative value recesses the object into the surface it is mounted on. Sprinkler Settings The Sprinkler Settings are only available if the selected object is a sprinkler. See Sprinkler Tools on page 1301. 987 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Symbol Object Specification Dialogs l Specify the Spray Angle, which is the angle within which the sprinkler sprays. An angle of 360° forms a complete circle. l Specify the Spray Radius, which is the distance from the sprinkler head that the spray reaches. Options Not available in the Electrical Service Specification dialog.   l When Suppress Adjacent Room Moldings is checked, room moldings do not generate on walls where the selected object touches them. When it is unchecked, room moldings generate through the object. Copyright If the selected object has a copyright, information about it displays here. Preview A preview of the selected library object displays here and updates with changes. If the selected symbol is inserted into another object, such as an appliance in a cabinet, the parent object will also display. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22. SIZING PANEL The settings on the SIZING panel allow you to control the size of a symbol’s bounding box and how the symbol behaves when resized. Object Dimensions These values describe the total size of the selected object's bounding box. For some objects, such as those that insert into cabinets or have special clearance requirements, the bounding box will not match the symbol's geometry.   988 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Symbol Object Specification Dialogs l Specify the total Width, Depth, and Height of the object's bounding box.   l Click the Reset Object Size button to reset the original Width, Depth, and Height values.   l When Retain Aspect Ratio is unchecked, the Width, Depth, and Height can be edited independent of one another, potentially changing the object's shape. Check this box to maintain the ratio between these settings when the object is resized in this dialog. This box does not affect editing performed outside this dialog and is an action rather than a state: the next time you open this dialog, it will be unchecked.   l Click the Show Advanced Options button to access settings that control the object's bounding box size and how it behaves when resized, below. Not available when multiple objects are selected. 3D Geometry Dimensions These values describe the size of the selected symbol's geometry.   l When Update When Object Dimensions Change is checked, the object's geometry will update when its Object Dimensions settings are modified.   l Specify the total Width, Depth, and Height of the object's 3D geometry.   Bounding Box Spacing These values describe how far the selected object's bounding box extends beyond its surfaces on each side. See Bounding Boxes on page 983.   l When Update When Object Dimensions Change is checked, the object's bounding box spacing will update when its Object Dimensions settings are modified.   l Specify the Left, Right, Front, Back, Top, and Bottom bounding box spacing. A positive value creates a space between the object's geometry and its bounding box; a negative value recesses the bounding box into the object's geometry; a value of 0 positions the bounding box against the object. Stretch Planes Define where a symbol stretches when resized. If no stretch planes are used, the symbol resizes uniformly. See Stretch Planes and Zones on page 983.   l Width planes are oriented vertically and run from the back of the symbol to its front, or along the symbol’s X axis. l Depth planes are oriented vertically and run from one side of the symbol to the other, or along the symbol’s Y axis. l Height planes are oriented horizontally, or along the symbol’s Z axis. Uniform Stretch Zones Between Define an area between two planes that stretches uniformly when the object is resized, leaving the area outside the zone unaffected.   Note: Stretch Planes and Stretch Zones do not affect a symbol’s 2D CAD block, which always resizes in a uniform manner. If you resize a symbol using custom Stretch Planes and Zones, consider generating a new CAD Block. See 2D Block Panel on page 993. Preview A preview of the selected symbol displays on the left. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22.   989 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Symbol Object Specification Dialogs l Click the Select Stretch Plane Item button, then click on a stretch plane in the preview to select it. A selected Stretch plane can be moved using its edit handle. Only available when Show Stretch Planes is also toggled on.   l Click the Show Origin button to toggle the display of blue, red, and green lines showing the directions of the symbol’s X, Y, and Z axes and its origin. See Symbol Origin on page 981.   l Click the Show Stretch Planes button to toggle the display of any stretch planes that the symbol may have. Stretch planes only display when the SIZING panel is active.   l Click the Show Bounding Box button to toggle the display of the symbol’s bounding box. This setting off by default but is retained during the current program session. LIGHT DATA PANEL The LIGHT DATA panel is only available for Electrical symbol objects. The settings on this panel allow you to control the attributes of the light source(s) associated with the selected object. See Light Data Panel on page 675. 3D PANEL The options on the 3D panel primarily affect the symbol’s appearance in 3D views. This panel is only available when a symbol is in the process of being imported. See Importing 3D Symbols on page 998. Name Specify how the symbol’s Name should appear in its object specification dialog, its label, in the Materials List, and in schedules. See Materials Lists on page 1303. 990 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Symbol Object Specification Dialogs l Enter a Symbol Name. When imported into the program, a 3D symbol is given the same name as its file name. Not available when multiple symbols are selected. See Importing 3D Symbols on page 998. l Select a Display Size format from the drop-down list to append the name of the symbol with size information. 3D Geometry l When a symbol is being imported, the pathname of the file being imported is reported here for reference. If multiple symbols are being imported, only one file displays. If the symbol is not in the process of being imported, “Embedded Geometry” displays instead. l Click the Replace Geometry button to choose a file to associate with the selected symbol. Not available when a symbol is being imported or converted. l Select the Drawing Unit that was used to create the symbol. If any units other than inches or mm are selected, the program will convert the data into units appropriate for Chief Architect. Only available when a symbol is being imported. To apply a change to this setting, you must also click the Browse button and reload the symbol data from the original file. Note: SKP files are always imported using inches, regardless of the default units used in the plan file. l Click the Use Imported Origin Offset button to use the symbol origin saved in the file being imported rather than use an origin based on the symbol’s type. Only available when a symbol is being imported. See Symbol Origin on page 981. l Check Reflect Geometry to reverse the object’s appearance, so that features on its left are positioned on its right, and vice versa. This turns a right-hand refrigerator, for example, into a left-hand refrigerator. This option has no effect on objects that are symmetrical. Origin Offset Specify the Origin Offset, which affects how the selected symbol is positioned when placed in a Chief Architect plan. Specifying a particular origin is helpful if the selected symbol will be inserted into another object, such as a sink to be placed in a cabinet. See Symbol Origin on page 981.   l Leave these values at 0 to use Chief Architect’s default origin for the symbol. For most symbols, this is the appropriate option.   l Enter new values to manually adjust the origin. The values in the X, Y, and Z fields represent the offset of the symbol’s origin point from the default Chief Architect origin. This option is appropriate for symbols that will be placed within other objects. Rotation These settings allow you to rotate the selected symbol(s) about the X, Y, and Z axes. Note that rotating a symbol will affect the location of its top, bottom, front, and /or back - and thus the location of its default origin. It may affect the size of the bounding box, as well; however, it does not affect the bounding box’s orientation. See Bounding Boxes on page 983.   l Select the X, Y, or Z Axis that you wish to rotate the symbol about.   l Specify the Angle to rotate the symbol in the text field. An angle of 90° is set by default.   991 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Symbol Object Specification Dialogs l Click the Rotate + button to rotate the symbol around the selected axis in a clockwise direction.   l Click the Rotate - button to rotate the symbol around the selected axis in a counterclockwise direction.   Faces Specify how the selected symbol’s 3D Faces are generated. l The Number Of Faces that a selected symbol has displays here for reference. When multiple symbols are being imported, nothing displays. Although there is no limit to the number of faces, large numbers can increase rendering time significantly. l Specify the Smoothing Angle, which determines whether two adjacent surfaces are shown with a smooth or sharp angle between them in rendered views. If the angle between two surface normals is less than this angle, normal averaging is used to give the effect of a curved surface. This value also effects the generation of automatic edge lines. A good example is a hexagonal cylinder. The angle between adjacent surfaces is 360/8, or 45°. If you want it to look cylindrical, set the Surface Smoothing Angle to something greater than 45°. If you want to make the cylinder look hexagonal, set it to less than 45°. l Automatic Edge Lines is checked by default so the program can choose an appropriate Smoothing Angle for legacy symbols migrated into version X15. It applies specifically to legacy symbols as they are brought into the program and in most cases, should remain checked. l Reverse Surface Direction will be either checked or unchecked by the program automatically, depending on where the selected symbol was created: it is checked for symbols created in the program or imported from an .skp file, and typically unchecked for symbols imported from other file types. In most cases, this setting should not be changed; however, if you export a symbol and encounter problems with its surfaces, changing this setting may help. Note that Chief Architect imports the front side of faces in .skp files; however, it does not support faces with different textures on the front and back and will import the back side as a separate face. l Check Draw Self Intersection Lines to display lines where parts of the selected symbol are drawn in such a manner that they occupy the same 3D space as other parts of the same symbol. In most cases, this box should be unchecked; and if the selected symbol does not have self intersection lines, it will not be available. l Check Cull Layered Transparent Surfaces to if you need to troubleshoot the appearance of a transparent symbol. Generally, this box should be left unchecked. l When a symbol is being imported, check Use Imported UV Map to preserve the UV map that was created for it. When unchecked, the symbol’s textures are mapped using a modified version of its UV map that assumes square shaped texture images. If the symbol uses a “decal sheet” style texture or one that is not square in shape, this box should be checked. Preview A preview of the symbol’s appearance displays here and updates as changes are made to the settings in this dialog. When multiple symbols are selected, the most recently selected symbol displays. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22. l Click the Show Origin button to display the location of the selected symbol’s origin in the preview. Not available if Show Plan View is selected. See Symbol Origin on page 981. 992 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Symbol Object Specification Dialogs If changes are made to an existing symbol in a plan or the Library Browser, you may also want to generate a new 2D Block to represent it in plan view. 2D BLOCK PANEL The 2D BLOCK panel allows you to select a 2D CAD block to represent the selected symbol in plan view. See CAD Blocks on page 329. This panel is not available for Doors, Doorways, or Cabinet Doors, nor is it available when multiple symbols are being imported. Selected CAD Block l The CAD block associated with the selected symbol is selected in the list of Available CAD Blocks and displays in the preview. l The CAD block name of an imported symbol will be based on the symbol’s original file name. See Importing 3D Symbols on page 998. l You can select a different CAD block from the list if you wish. l Check Auto Generate to create a new CAD block to represent the selected symbol any time the symbol is rotated in a way that affects the appearance of its overhead projection. l Click the Generate Block button to automatically generate a CAD block based on an overhead projection of the selected symbol and add it to the list. 993 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Symbol Object Specification Dialogs If you do not see a CAD block in this list that suits your needs, you can create your own. See Custom 2D Symbols on page 332. l Enter a Rotation Angle to rotate the 2D CAD block from its original angle of 0°. The orientation of the 2D CAD block in floor plan view does not affect the symbol’s orientation in 3D views. Fill In order to apply a specified fill, you may need to click the Generate Block button, above.   l Check Fill to specify a fill color in selected symbol’s CAD block and enable the settings that follow. l Click the Color bar to select a fill color for the 2D block. See Color Chooser/Select Color Dialog on page 203. l Use the Transparency slider bar or text field to control how transparent the fill color is. l Check Use Original Plan Colors to make the symbol’s fill color white. Preview A preview of the selected CAD Block displays here when Show Plan View is selected. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22. OPTIONS PANEL The settings on the OPTIONS panel affect how a symbol behaves and can be placed. The available options on this panel vary, depending on the selected symbol’s category. Not available for Geometric Shapes or Sprinklers. Special Placement The Special Placement options add placement restrictions and abilities to the selected symbol. Once placed, its height or offset can be adjusted. See Placing Library Objects on page 972. l When an electrical object is specified as Ceiling Mounted, check Flush Mounted to specify that it follow the pitch of either the ceiling or roof.   994 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Symbol Object Specification Dialogs Requirements Specify whether the selected fixture symbol requires Natural Gas, Water/Drain, Standard Voltage, and/or High Voltage. This information can be reported in fixture schedules. See Columns to Include on page 689. Options Additional Options specify the selected symbol’s purpose. l Select a symbol Type from the drop-down list. The selection will vary depending on the symbol’s Category. l A variety of check boxes may be available, depending on the selected symbol’s Category and Type. MATERIALS PANEL The MATERIALS panel allows you to assign materials to the symbol’s components and is similar to the Materials panel in many specification dialogs. See Materials Panel on page 1055. If the selected symbol is in the process of being imported, bear in mind that .dxf/.dwg files do not include material information, so the symbol’s components will not have materials assigned to them. See 3D Symbols and Materials on page 1000. OPENING PANEL The settings on the OPENING panel define the selected Window or Doorway symbol’s rough opening when placed in a wall. The OPENING panel is only available for Windows and Doorways. Opening Diagram An editable diagram of the symbol’s wall opening displays here. 995 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Symbol Object Specification Dialogs Edit the symbol’s opening size and shape by clicking on a dimension number and typing the desired value. To update the preview, press the Tab key. Opening Sections If the Window or Doorway has an angled or arched top, click the Opening Sections drop-down and choose the section diagram that most closely resembles the rough opening shape that you want. You can then edit the section as needed. The size and shape of a symbol’s opening is independent of the symbol’s size. Make sure that the two are compatible. PLAN VIEW PANEL The PLAN VIEW panel controls the appearance of Window and Doorway symbols in floor plan view. The PLAN VIEW panel is only available for Windows and Doorways. Plan View Diagram An editable diagram of the symbol’s representation in plan view displays here. The settings here also affect how many units the symbol contains as well as their size in both 2D and 3D views. l To change the size of the symbol’s units in floor plan view, click on a dimension number and type the desired value. Press the Tab key to update the diagram. l To change a unit in the preview from a window to a door swing, click on the unit in the diagram. The size of a symbol’s units is entirely independent of the size of the symbol itself. Make sure that the total width of the symbol’s units in plan view equals the width of the 3D symbol. Plan View Sections Click the Plan View Sections drop-down and choose the number of units contained by the Doorway or Window symbol. Up to five units are possible. PLANT INFORMATION PANEL This panel is available when the Symbol Specification dialog is opened for a plant. The options are the same as the Plant Information panel of the Plant Symbol Specification dialog. See Plant Information Panel on page 1299. 996 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Symbol Object Specification Dialogs PLANT DESCRIPTION PANEL This panel is available when the Symbol Specification dialog is opened for a plant. The options are the same as the Plant Description panel of the Plant Symbol Specification dialog. See Plant Description Panel on page 1300. LAYER PANEL The LAYER panel is found in the specification dialogs for many different objects. For more information, see Layer Panel on page 186.   FILL STYLE PANEL The FILL STYLE panel is available when the selected object is a sprinkler and controls how the area within its spray radius displays in plan view. It is similar to the FILL STYLE panel found in many dialogs. See Fill Style Panel and Dialogs on page 193.   MATERIALS PANEL The MATERIALS panel allows you to assign materials to the symbol's components and is similar to the MATERIALS panel in many specification dialogs. See Materials Panel on page 1055. If the selected symbol is in the process of being imported, bear in mind that .dxf/.dwg files do not include material information, so the symbol's components will not initially have materials assigned to them. See 3D Symbols and Materials on page 1000. In the Symbol Object Specification dialogs only, the names of the Components listed here can be customized: simply click on the Name of a selected component and type a short, descriptive name that better meets your needs. These names are not used elsewhere in the program. LABEL PANEL A variety of library objects can display labels in plan view and cross section/elevation views. Labels use the Text Style assigned to the layer they are on.   For information about the settings on this tab, see Label Panel on page 700.   COMPONENTS PANEL The information on the COMPONENTS panel can be used in the materials list. For more information, see Components Panel on page 1330.   OBJECT INFORMATION PANEL The information entered on the OBJECT INFORMATION panel can be used in schedules and the materials list. For more information, see Object Information Panel on page 1331.   SCHEDULE PANEL The settings on the SCHEDULE panel determine which schedule categories the selected object is included in. See Schedule Panel on page 704.   997 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Importing 3D Symbols MANUFACTURER PANEL The MANUFACTURER panel provides contact information for the selected object’s manufacturer. Only available for symbols from Manufacturer library catalogs. See Manufacturer Catalogs on page 961.   Importing 3D Symbols Chief Architect supports the import of 3D surface and 3D solid objects saved in .dwg, .dxf, .3ds, .obj, .stl, .dae, and .skp formats. See 3D Data Import Requirements on page 999. For most file types, there are four ways to import a 3D symbol into Chief Architect: l By selecting File> Import> Import 3D Symbol. l By selecting New> 3D Symbol from the contextual menu in the Library Browser. See Using the Contextual Menu on page 951. l By dragging and dropping the file from an operating system window into plan view. l Some types of symbols can also be imported via the Select Library Object dialog. See Select Library Object Dialog on page 974. 3D .dxf/.dwg files can only be imported by selecting File> Import> Import 3D Symbol. Symbols imported by clicking and dragging are imported for use in the current plan, while those imported using the Import 3D Symbol dialog can also be saved in the library. See The Library on page 945. To drag and drop a 3D symbol file 1. Open the plan in which you would like to import a 3D symbol and remain in plan view. 2. Open an operating system window in front of the Chief Architect program window. 3. Resize and position the window so that the Chief Architect program window can be seen behind it. 4. Click on the desired  .3ds, .obj .stl, .dae, or .skp file and drag it into the Chief Architect program window. 5. When your cursor changes to a +, click in the drawing area to place as many copies of the symbol as desired. When you are finished, select a different tool. Symbols imported by clicking and dragging are imported as generic stand-alone interior fixtures. If you wish to assign the symbol to a different category, use the Import 3D Symbol dialog to import it.   IMPORTING MULTIPLE SYMBOLS More than one symbol can be imported into the Chief Architect library at a time provided that the following requirements are met:   l The symbols are located in the same folder on your computer.   l Multiple symbols can only be imported using the Import 3D Symbol dialog. If you try to drag and drop group-selected files in an operating system window, only the file that was selected first is imported.   l When imported as a group, symbols must be assigned to the same symbol category. If you wish to assign them to different categories, they must be imported separately.   Symbols that are imported as a group are assigned names based on their original file names with the file extension omitted.   998 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - 3D Data Import Requirements IMPORT 3D SYMBOL DIALOG The Import 3D Symbol dialog, which opens next, allows you to specify additional information about the symbol.   l The Files Selected for Import display here for reference.   l Choose a symbol Category from the drop-down list. The category affects how and where the symbol can be used, and cannot be changed after it is imported. See Symbol Categories on page 1003. l Check Add Symbol to Library to save the symbol in the User Catalog. This is always checked when multiple symbols files are selected. See Add to Library on page 965.   l Check Show Advanced Options to open the symbol’s specification dialog. See Symbol Object Specification Dialogs on page 986.   l Click OK to import the symbol, then click in plan view to place the symbol at that location. Continue clicking to place as many copies of the symbol as needed. Select another tool when finished.   If you import a .obj, .3ds or .skp file with textures that are already present in your library, the Texture Filename Conflict dialog opens. See Texture Filename Conflict on page 1001.   If the symbol you are importing has a high surface count, it may impact program performance. When this is a possibility, the program will warn you and present you with an option to cancel the import operation. 3D Data Import Requirements Importing a symbol that can be used by Chief Architect is a relatively simple process that begins with previously created 3D data. This 3D data often comes from a program other than Chief Architect. If you use another 3D modeling program to create the 3D data, be aware of the following requirements before attempting to create symbols. Chief Architect does not provide support for any third party software. There are a number of requirements that must be met before any 3D data can be used to create a symbol in Chief Architect Premier: l The 3D data must be stored in a standard Drawing Exchange File (.dxf), AutoCAD® Drawing (.dwg), object (.obj), 3D Studio® Mesh (.3ds), stereolithography (.stl), COLLADA (.dae), or SketchUp version 2021 and prior (.skp) file format. If you have 3D data in another format, you must convert it into one these formats first. l Geometry and material information stored in .3ds files are imported; cameras and lights are not. 999 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - 3D Symbols and Materials l The 3D model must be composed of 3D DWG or 3DSOLID solid entities, or face data. Faces are typically referred to as 3D faces, polygonal faces, or poly meshes. Other types of entities such as lines, curves, circles, polylines, and free form surfaces can exist in the file but are not imported when the symbol is created. This is true for all (.dxf/.dwg/.obj/.3ds/.skp) file types. l The face data should be assigned to different layers so that you can map them to the correct materials when viewing them in 3D. It is helpful to name your layers using a convention that identifies that materials should be assigned to each sub-component. l Pay attention to the origin and orientation of the 3D data when designing symbols. Chief Architect allows some adjustment when creating the symbol, but it is easier to build the 3D data correctly before importing it into Chief Architect. For more information about defining the origin, see Symbol Origin on page 981. l If a symbol with faces that have more than four vertices is imported, the faces are truncated, resulting in an object that appears to have holes. The best remedy is to re-export the model from the original application using only triangular or quadrilateral faces. l Chief Architect does not support grouped objects in symbols imported from .3ds files. SURFACE NORMALS If you use third party software to create a .dxf/.dwg/.obj/.3ds./skp file that will be imported as a symbol, you should be familiar with the concept of surface normals. A surface normal is a vector that is perpendicular to the plane of a surface. This vector points in one direction, determined by the way the face is drawn. If a face is drawn clockwise, the surface normals are directed outward; if a face is drawn counter-clockwise, the surface normals point inward. Chief Architect assumes that the face on the positive side of the normal vector is the outside face. Many objects can be drawn using only one side of each face. A cube is a good example: the inside of a cube is not visible, so it is not necessary to create its inside faces. When inside faces are not calculated, 3D views in Chief Architect can generate more quickly. 3D Symbols and Materials When a symbol is imported into Chief Architect, material definitions may be included with it. Whether and how material information is included depends on the symbol’s file format. See About Materials on page 1050. DXF/DWG and STL Files .dxf/.dwg and .stl files do not include information about material definitions. When imported, default materials for the selected symbol type will be assigned. If the .dxf/.dwg or .stl file associated with a symbol is changed, all previously specified material information for the symbol will be lost. All layers, layer names, solids and instances of blocked solids from the .dxf/.dwg or .stl file display in the list of components on the left side of the MATERIALS panel of its specification dialog. See Materials Panel on page 1055. 1000 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - 3D Symbols and Materials OBJ Files Material definitions for most .obj files are saved in a separate file with the .mtl file extension. If such a file exists, the materials associated with the .obj file display in the list on the left side of the MATERIALS panel of its specification dialog. If Chief Architect does not receive material definition information in an accompanying .mtl file, default material properties are assigned. Material definitions for .obj files can also include texture information in the form of image files (.jpg, .png, etc). In order to properly import an .obj file, Chief Architect needs the .obj file, the .mtl file, and any referenced texture files. If a texture file is not available, the material it is associated with is created without a texture. The material definitions associated with an imported .obj symbol are not available for use by other objects in Chief Architect until that symbol has been placed into a plan. The associated texture files are then copied to the user’s Textures folder. See Chief Architect Premier Data on page 37. 3DS and DAE Files Material definitions for .3ds and .dae files refer to texture information in separate image files. In order to properly import a .3ds and .dae file, Chief Architect needs these referenced image files. If a texture file is not available, the material it is associated with will be created without it. The associated texture files are copied to the user’s Textures folder. SKP Files The textures associated with a .skp file are saved in the file. After you import a symbol and either place it in a plan or add it to the Library, these textures are saved in the user's Textures folder. Chief Architect does not support deformed textures. If a texture associated with a .skp file is deformed, it will be imported without the deformations. TEXTURE FILENAME CONFLICT If a texture of the same name already exists in the plan when an .obj, .3ds, or .skp file is imported, the Texture Filename Conflict dialog displays. l Select Rename the imported texture, then click the Browse button to create a copy of the texture’s image file with a new name that you specify. l Select Use the existing texture instead of the imported texture to keep the existing texture. l Select Replace the existing texture with the imported texture to replace the texture already present in the plan with the new, imported one. l Check Do this for all remaining textures in this object to use the same selection for all textures with filename conflicts associated with this symbol. 1001 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Get Last Symbol Get Last Symbol If you import or convert a symbol that cannot be placed in the current view or must be contained by another object that is not present in the view, you can quickly select it for placement once the needed conditions are met using the Get Last Symbol command. Open a view in which the symbol can be placed or create an object to place the symbol into, then select Tools> Symbol> Get Last Symbol to retrieve the last symbol created and click in your plan to place the symbol. Convert to Symbol Most objects in Chief Architect can be converted into symbols. To do this, select one or more architectural objects in floor plan, camera, or cross section/elevation view and click the Convert to Symbol edit button. See Architectural vs CAD Objects on page 158.   Note: Image objects cannot be converted into symbols. See Images on page 1185. You can create custom symbols in Chief Architect using any combination of architectural objects. Particularly if you are designing a custom object using generic objects like Primitives, it is helpful to begin by opening a new, blank plan. Then, place any combination of architectural objects to produce a model of what you would like your custom symbol to look like. When the objects are configured as desired, select them and then use the Convert Selected to Symbol edit tool to create a single symbol that is assigned to a category that reflects how the object will be used. For example, if you design a cabinet door, select Cabinet Door/Drawer as the symbol’s category so that the resulting symbol can be assigned to a cabinet. When you want to convert a large number of objects into a single symbol, it may be easier to do so in a 3D view. To convert a 3D model to a symbol 1. Create a camera view or overview in which the only objects displaying are those that you wish to convert to a single symbol. 2. Select Tools> Symbol> Convert to Symbol . 3. In the Convert to Symbol dialog: l Type a short, descriptive Symbol Name. The Symbol Category will populate this field unless a custom name is specified. 1002 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Symbol Categories l Choose a Symbol Category from the drop-down list. When you select a category, the Symbol Name will automatically update to use that category. See Symbol Categories on page 1003. l Check Add to Library if you would like the symbol to be added to the library. See Add to Library on page 965. l Check Show Advanced Options to open the Symbol Specification dialog when you click OK, where you have more extensive control over the symbol’s settings. See Symbol Object Specification Dialogs on page 986. 4. Click OK to close the dialog and convert your custom object to a symbol. Depending on the size of the symbol, a Progress dialog may display during this process. Note: Some proprietary 3D data provided in Manufacturer catalogs cannot be converted to a symbol. The program will notify you if this protected data is included in the symbol you are trying to create. See Manufacturer Catalogs on page 961. Symbol Categories The category that you assign to a symbol will influence how the symbol can be placed in a plan and how it will appear in the Materials List and in schedules. See Materials Lists on page 1303 and Schedules and Object Labels on page 681. Category Placement Schedules and Materials Lists Cabinet Door/Drawer Can be assigned to a cabinet or free-standing. See Cabinets on page 617. When free-standing, listed in Cabinets category of Materials Lists. When assigned to a cabinet, listed as a component of the cabinet in Materials Lists and Cabinet Schedules. Door Can only be placed in a wall or assigned to a doorway. See Doors on page 543. Listed in Doors category of Materials Lists; can be included in Door Schedules. Doorway Can only be placed in a wall. See Doorways on page 546. Listed in Doors category of Materials Lists; can be included in Door Schedules. Electrical Can be specified as a variety of free-standing electrical items and may be ceiling-, floor-, wall- or cabinet-mounted. See Electrical on page 666. Listed in Electrical category of Materials Lists; can be included in Electrical Schedules. Fixture (Exterior) Exterior Fixtures can act as plumbing items or appliances and have many different options. They may be free-standing, inserted into a cabinet, mounted on the ceiling, a wall, under a cabinet or on a roof. Listed in Fixtures category of Materials Lists; can be included in Fixture Schedules. Fixture (Interior) Interior Fixtures can act as plumbing items or appliances and, like Exterior Fixtures, have many different options. Listed in Fixtures category of Materials Lists; can be included in Fixture Schedules. Furnishings (Exterior) Can only be placed as a free-standing object but can be ceiling-, floor- or roof-mounted. Listed in Furniture category of Materials Lists; can be included in Furniture Schedules. Furnishings (Interior) Can only be placed as a free-standing object but can be ceiling-, floor- or roof-mounted. Listed in Furniture category of Materials Lists; can be included in Furniture Schedules. Geometric Shapes Can only be placed as free-standing object. See General Shapes on page 1033. Listed in General category of Materials Lists. 1003 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Exporting a 3D Model Category Placement Schedules and Materials Lists Hardware Can be specified as a hinge, handle or lock and assigned to a cabinet, to a door, or freestanding. Listed as a component of the object it is assigned to in Materials Lists or in Hardware category when freestanding; can be included in schedules as a component of the object it is assigned to. Millwork Can be free-standing or assigned to an object such as a railing or cabinet. See Moldings and Millwork on page 926. Listed in Exterior Trim, Interior Trim, or Fixtures category of Materials Lists. May be included in Fixtures Schedules. Molding Can only be assigned to a room, cabinet, countertop or molding polyline. See Trim and Moldings on page 920. Listed in Exterior Trim or Interior Trim category of Materials Lists. Plant Can only be placed as a free-standing object. See Plant Tools on page 1294. Listed in Landscaping category of Materials Lists; can be included in Plant Schedules. Sprinkler Can only be placed as a free-standing object. See Sprinkler Tools on page 1301. Listed in Landscaping category of Materials Lists. Window Can only be placed in a wall. See Windows on page 576. Listed in Windows category of Materials Lists; can be included in Window Schedules. Exporting a 3D Model The entire 3D model, or any part that you choose, can be exported from Chief Architect into  one of four formats: l 3DS Format on page 1005 l DAE Format on page 1005 l STL Format on page 1005 l DXF/DWG Format on page 1005 To export a 3D model 1. A camera view or overview must be active. See Types of 3D Views on page 1080.   2. Make sure that everything that you want to export is set to display in the current view, and everything you do not want to export is not set to display. See Layers on page 176.   l Any surfaces removed using the Delete Surfaces tool will not be exported. See Displaying 3D Views on page 1097.   3. When the model is ready, select File> Export> and choose the file format that you want to use.   4. Give the file a name, making sure to save it in the desired location. See Exporting Files on page 41. Note: Some proprietary 3D data provided in Manufacturer catalogs cannot be exported. The program will notify you if this protected data is included in the model you are trying to export. See Manufacturer Catalogs on page 961. 1004 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Exporting a 3D Model 3DS FORMAT A .3ds file can be opened by any program that uses 3D Studio®’s .3ds format. When the model is ready, select File> Export> 3D Model (3DS) to export to this format.   The Export 3D Studio (3DS) Mesh dialog opens:   l Check Truncate Texture Names to 8.3 format to truncate material and object names to an eight character file name with a three character extension. This allows import into applications that support only legacy .3ds files.   The Export 3D Studio® (3DS) Mesh dialog, which opens next, is a typical File Save dialog.   Any material textures used in the model are saved as image files in the same location as the saved .3ds file. You may find it helpful to export the .3ds file to an empty folder created for this purpose.   DAE FORMAT A .dae file can be opened by any program that uses COLLADA™’s .dae format. When the model is ready, select File> Export> 3D COLLADA Model to export to this format.   The Export COLLADA Model dialog is a typical File Save dialog.   With the exception of Rope Lights, any light sources that are On in the current view, as well as ambient light, will be exported to a .dae file along with the model. See Lighting on page 1135.   Any material textures used in the model are saved as image files in a folder in the same location as the saved .dae file. The folder has the same name as the .dae file, appended with “_textures”.   STL FORMAT An .stl file can be opened by any program that uses Stereolithography format, and can be printed using a stereolithography machine, or 3D printer. When the model is ready, select File> Export> 3D Model (STL).   The Export STL Model dialog is a typical File Save dialog.   A 3D model exported to an .stl file does not include any material or texture information.   DXF/DWG FORMAT A .dxf or .dwg file can be opened by any program that uses AutoCAD®’s 3D .dxf or .dwg format. When the model is ready, select File> Export> 3D Model (DWG/DXF) to export to this format.   The entire 3D model, including geometry, is exported.   3D models exported to .dxf/.dwg do not include material or texture information. 1005 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Exporting a 3D Model 3D DXF/DWG LAYER NAMES When you export a 3D model to .dxf/.dwg format, all surfaces are exported as 3DFACE entities. These entities are placed on layers that are named by Chief Architect.   A complete list of the layer names and associated objects is found in the program’s Help by browsing to Importing and Exporting> Exporting a 3D Model. See Contextual Help on page 31.   1006

Architectural Blocks Chapter 29 An architectural block is a collection of individual 3D objects that are grouped together so that they can be placed and moved as a single object. Although blocked together, these objects retain many of their own attributes, such as materials. Architectural blocks can also be exploded so that the individual sub-objects become independent of one another. TOPICS Architectural vs CAD Blocks 1008 Creating Architectural Blocks 1008 Displaying Architectural Blocks 1008 Editing Architectural Blocks 1009 Architectural Block Specification Dialog 1010 Architectural Blocks, Sub-Objects, and Components 1012 1007 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Architectural vs CAD Blocks Architectural vs CAD Blocks Just as there are two types of objects in Chief Architect, architectural and CAD, there are two types of blocks. See Architectural vs CAD Objects on page 158.   Architectural objects such as cabinets and fixtures can be included in architectural blocks, while CAD objects such as lines, arcs, text and dimensions can be included in CAD blocks. See CAD Blocks on page 329.   Knowing the differences between these two types of blocks helps you decide which type of block can best meet your needs.   A CAD block can include and also be nested in a larger block with CAD objects, text and dimensions, but cannot include or be blocked with architectural objects.   An architectural block can include and also be nested in a larger block with architectural objects, but cannot include or be blocked with CAD objects, text or dimensions.   Creating Architectural Blocks To create an architectural block, group-select multiple architectural objects, then click the Make Architectural Block edit button. Architectural blocks can be created in any view. See Architectural vs CAD Objects on page 158.   The following is a list of objects that can be included in architectural blocks:   l Cabinets (Base, Wall, Full Height)   l Custom Countertops and Counter Holes l Soffits, Shelves, Partitions   l Fixture and Furniture symbols   l Hardware symbols   l Millwork symbols   l Geometric Shapes   l Electrical objects   l Images   l Slabs and Foundation Slabs   l Primitives and 3D Solids   l Molding Polylines   l Roads, Driveways, Sidewalks   l Terrain Features and Terrain Modifiers   l Distribution Paths and Regions that have architectural objects as their distributed object.   Once blocked, the set of blocked objects is contained in a bounding box, indicating that they are now an architectural block.   Displaying Architectural Blocks As with individual objects, the display of architectural blocks is controlled in the Layer Display Options dialog. See Layer Attributes on page 177.   1008 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Architectural Blocks l If an architectural block is composed of objects that are on the same layer, the block will be placed on that layer, as well. l If an architectural block is composed of objects on different layers, the block will be placed on the “Architectural Blocks” layer. l Once created, an architectural block can be placed on any layer you wish.   IN PLAN VIEW The sub-objects of a block can use the layer attributes assigned to their current layer or the layer attributes assigned to the block. See General Panel on page 1011.   You can control the appearance of the bounding box by changing the display properties of the architectural block’s layer or you can turn off its display in the Architectural Block Specification dialog. See General Panel on page 1011.   Like other objects, an architectural block is placed in a Drawing Group that affects whether it displays in front of or behind other objects. You can modify a selected  architectural block’s place in the drawing order by clicking the View Drawing Group Edit Tools edit button. See Drawing Group Edit Tools on page 190.   ARCHITECTURAL BLOCK LABELS Architectural blocks can display labels for both the block and any component objects that have labels in plan  and cross section/elevation views. As with the objects they are associated with, you can turn off the display of component labels by layer. Labels  for architectural blocks are placed on the “Architectural Blocks, Labels” layer and use the Text Style assigned to that layer. See  Label Panel on page 700.   The label for an architectural block can be generated automatically, user-specified, or suppressed. See Architectural Block Specification Dialog on page 1010.   IN MATERIALS LISTS AND SCHEDULES An architectural block can appear as a single unit or its sub-objects and components can be listed separately in materials lists and schedules. As with other objects, you can choose whether to include architectural blocks in materials lists and schedules. See Materials Lists on page 1303 and Schedules and Object Labels on page 681.   Editing Architectural Blocks Architectural blocks can be selected and edited in 2D and 3D views. See Selecting Objects on page 210. Note: Moving an architectural block in 3D view regenerates the view. If the architectural block contains terrain objects, the terrain is rebuilt. Once selected, an architectural block can be edited using its edit handles, edit toolbar buttons, and specification dialog. See Architectural Block Specification Dialog on page 1010. USING THE EDIT HANDLES A selected architectural block displays a Move handle and a Rotate handle. If the block has a label, it also has its own Move and Rotate handles. 1009 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Architectural Block Specification Dialog Architectural blocks cannot be resized, but the individual objects in a block can be. IN THE SPECIFICATION DIALOG Architectural blocks can be edited in their specification dialog. See Architectural Block Specification Dialog on page 1010.   USING THE EDIT TOOLS A selected architectural block or blocks can be edited in a variety of ways using the buttons on the Edit Toolbar. See The Edit Toolbar on page 130.   EDITING SUB-OBJECTS The individual objects included in an architectural block can also be selected and edited. See To select a sub-object on page 1013. EXPLODE ARCHITECTURAL BLOCK You can break an architectural block to make its objects independent. Select the architectural block and click the Explode Architectural Block edit button.   Note: If you open a plan created in the Premier version of Chief Architect and an architectural block includes an object that you cannot create in your version of the software, you cannot unblock it or edit its components. ADDING ARCHITECTURAL BLOCKS TO THE LIBRARY You can create your own architectural blocks and save them in the library. See Add to Library on page 965.   Architectural blocks, their component objects, as well as inserted symbols or assigned attributes like materials or moldings associated with those component objects can be added to the library using the Add to Library As edit tool. See Add to Library As on page 966.   Architectural Block Specification Dialog The Architectural Block Specification dialog controls the way architectural blocks display in plan view, in schedules, and in materials lists. Select one or more architectural blocks and click the Open Object edit button to open this dialog.   1010 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Architectural Block Specification Dialog GENERAL PANEL Display Options These settings control the appearance of the selected architectural block in plan view. See Displaying Architectural Blocks on page 1008.   l Check Display Bounding Box to show the bounding box of the objects in the architectural block.   l Uncheck Display Sub-Objects to suppress the display of the sub-objects and display only the bounding box. If Display Bounding Box is unchecked, it will become checked.   l Check Display Sub-Objects Using Block Layer to apply the display properties of the architectural block’s layer to its sub-objects. When this box is unchecked, sub-objects use the display properties set for their layers.   l Check Display Sub-Objects Using Block Draw Order to display all component objects of the selected block using the block’s drawing order. When unchecked, each component displays according to its individual drawing order. See Drawing Groups on page 190.   Schedule and Materials List These settings control how the selected architectural block appears in schedules and the materials list.   l Check Treat as One Object to treat the architectural block as a single unit in materials lists and schedules. This box must be checked in order for the settings on the SCHEDULE PANEL to be available for use.   Size/Position These settings are not available if the selected block includes any objects such as electrical objects that do not have these settings in their individual specification dialogs.   l Select the Elevation Reference from the drop-down list. This determines where the next two settings are measured from and also affects their setting labels.   l Specify the height to Top, measured from the selected Elevation Reference to the top of the architectural block.   l Specify the height to Bottom, measured from the selected Elevation Reference to the bottom of the architectural block.   1011 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Architectural Blocks, Sub-Objects, and Components Options l When Suppress Adjacent Room Moldings is checked, a room's base, chair, and/or crown moldings will not generate where the selected block's bounding box crosses them when positioned against a wall. When unchecked, room moldings are not affected by the block and generate normally. See Room Moldings on page 436. Preview A preview of the selected cabinet displays on the right side of the panel. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22. LAYER PANEL For information about the LAYER panel, see Layer Panel on page 186.   LABEL PANEL Labels for Architectural Blocks display in plan view when the “Architectural Blocks, Labels” layer is turned on and use the Text Style assigned to that layer. See Architectural Block Labels on page 1009.   The LABEL panel is available for a variety of different objects. For more information, see  Label Panel on page 700.   COMPONENTS PANEL The information on the COMPONENTS panel can be used in the materials list. For more information, see Components Panel on page 1330.   OBJECT INFORMATION PANEL The information entered on the OBJECT INFORMATION panel can be used in schedules and the materials list. For more information, see Object Information Panel on page 1331.   SCHEDULE PANEL The settings on the SCHEDULE panel determine which schedule categories the selected architectural block is included in. These settings are only available when Treat as One Object is checked on the GENERAL panel. See Schedule Panel on page 704.   Architectural Blocks, Sub-Objects, and Components An architectural block is composed of a group of sub-objects that have been blocked together. For example, a kitchen island architectural block may consist of cabinets, appliances, a custom countertop, and other accessories. Each of the sub-objects in an architectural block may contain additional parts called  components. The cabinets in a kitchen island, for example, may contain handles, hinges, and drawer glide.   Architectural blocks can be treated as a single unit in materials lists and schedules, ignoring sub-objects and their components. See General Panel on page 1011.   1012 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Architectural Blocks, Sub-Objects, and Components SUB-OBJECTS Certain attributes of an architectural block can be edited at the sub-object level. A sub-object can be edited by accessing its specification dialog in either of two ways: l Explode the architectural block, select the sub-object, and click the Open Object edit button. l Select the sub-object while it is part of the architectural block and click the Open Object edit button. Some attributes may not be editable while the object is part of a block. See Editing Architectural Blocks on page 1009. To select a sub-object 1. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the sub-object that you would like to edit. 2. With the architectural block selected, click the Select Next Object edit button or press the Tab key.   The selection switches to the individual object and it can be edited using its edit handles, edit toolbar and specification dialog. The options for editing a sub-object may be more restricted than if the object were independent. If more extensive editing is required, the architectural block must be exploded. See Explode Architectural Block on page 1010. COMPONENTS You can view and modify the components of an architectural block or group of blocks in the Architectural Block Specification dialog. The COMPONENTS panel lists all the sub-objects that comprise an architectural block, as well as the components that make up each sub-object. See Components Panel on page 1330.   1013 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Other Objects Other Objects Chapter 30 Chief Architect has additional objects that can be used to customize your design. TOPICS Primitive Tools 1015 Creating Primitives 1015 Editing Primitives and 3D Solids 1017 Creating Complex Structures with Primitives 1021 3D Solid Specification Dialog 1022 Sphere Specification Dialog 1025 Cylinder Specification Dialog 1026 Cone Specification Dialog 1028 Pyramid Specification Dialog 1030 General Shapes 1033 Soffits 1033 Soffit Specification Dialog 1034 Floor and Wall Material Regions 1037 Material Region Specification Dialog 1038 Material Layers Definition Dialogs 1040 Distributed Objects 1042 Distribution Region/Path Specification Dialogs 1043 1014 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Primitive Tools Primitive Tools The Primitive Tools allow you to create basic solid geometric shapes, which can be combined to create a wide variety of custom solid objects. Select Build> Primitive to access the Primitive Tools.   With the exception of Faces, objects made with the Primitive Tools are included in materials list calculations. For best results, a Volume type material should be used. See Define Material Dialog on page 1066.   3D SOLID The 3D Solid tool can be used to create rectangular solid objects in plan, cross section/elevation, and camera views. See Creating Primitives on page 1015. SPHERE The Sphere tool can be used to create solid 3D spheres in plan and camera views.   CYLINDER The Cylinder tool can be used to create solid 3D cylinders in plan and camera views.   CONE The Cone tool can be used to create solid 3D cones in plan and camera views.   PYRAMID The Pyramid tool can be used to create solid 3D pyramids in plan and camera views.   FACE The Face tool can be used to create two-dimensional surfaces in plan, cross section/elevation, and camera views. Face objects are two-sided and be revolved or extruded to create custom Solid objects. See Face Objects on page 1016.   Creating Primitives Primitive solids are drawn similar to the way CAD boxes are. Depending on the view in which they are created, however, the method may differ somewhat. IN PLAN VIEW In plan view, Primitives are drawn much the way closed CAD polylines are. Select a tool, then click and drag to define an area. 1015 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Creating Primitives l To create 3D Solid , click and drag to define the width and depth of the box’s base. Its initial Height is 1” (25 mm). l To create a Sphere , Cylinder , Cone , or Pyramid , click and drag to define the radius. l As it is drawn, the height of a Cylinder, Cone, or Pyramid is equal to its radius. l To create a spline-shaped 3D Solid, draw a  3D Solid and click the Convert to Spline edit button. This tool is not available if the selected object has been extruded along more than one axis. See Convert to Spline on page 258. Initially, the bottom surface of Boxes, Cylinders and Cones, and the center point of Spheres, are all set at 0” on the Z axis. See Entering Coordinates on page 166. IN 3D VIEWS In 3D views, the height of boxes, pyramids, cylinders and cones can be defined as they are drawn. l To create a 3D Solid , Cylinder or Cone , click and drag to define the width and depth of the box’s base. Release the mouse button, then drag upward or downward to define its height. l Drag upward to set the height of the bottom surface at 0”, or drag downward to set the top surface at 0”. l A 3D Solid can also be drawn with its base against a wall instead of facing downward. When drawn in this manner, the default Height value of 1" (25 mm) is applied to the object's Depth instead. l To create a Sphere or Pyramid , click and drag in any direction to define its radius. IN CROSS SECTION/ELEVATION VIEWS With the exception of 3D Solids and Faces , primitives cannot be created in cross section/elevation views. See Cross Section/Elevation Views on page 1089. CONVERT TO 3D SOLID Click the Convert To 3D Solid edit button to convert a selected Primitive, Custom Countertop, or Slab into a 3D Solid so that it can be used with other Solids to create complex structures. FACE OBJECTS Regardless of the view, Faces are drawn the way line-based objects are when the Alternate edit behavior is active. See Alternate on page 207.   To draw a Face 1. Select Build> Primitive> Face , then click, drag and release the mouse button to draw the first edge. 2. Click to define the endpoints of additional edges. A Face must have at least three edges. 3. To finish drawing, click at the original starting point. This is easiest to do when Endpoint snapping is enabled. See Object Snaps on page 160. Once drawn, Faces can be revolved or extruded to create Solid objects. See Extrude Object on page 1018. 1016
Editing Primitives and 3D Solids Primitives can be selected individually and as a group and edited using the edit handles, the Edit Toolbar, dimensions, and their respective specification dialogs. See Creating Complex Structures with Primitives on page 1021. USING THE EDIT HANDLES The edit handles that are available on a selected Primitive depend on its object type. In plan view: l 3D Solids are selected on their top edges and edited like closed polylines. If one of these objects has been rotated in 3D, more than one top surface may be visible in plan view; however, only one of these surfaces will be editable. Regardless of the orientation of the object or its surface angles, when it is rotated in plan view, it will rotate relative to the horizontal XY plane. If you want to rotate the object relative to one of its top faces, you can do so in a 3D view. See Editing Closed Polyline-Based Objects on page 228. l Faces are edited like much like other closed polylines. l Pyramids have a more limited set of edit handles and can be moved, resized, and rotated. l Spheres, cylinders, and cones are more limited still and can be moved and resized only. l In plan and cross section/elevation views, 3D Solid labels also have a small square Move edit handle and small rectangular Rotate handle. In 3D views: l Faces, as well as each surface of a 3D Solid can be selected and edited like a closed polyline. l Pyramids, cylinders, and cones can be moved, resized, and rotated. The axis of rotation will vary depending on where you click to select the object. l Spheres can be moved and resized only. In 3D views, most Primitives have a different set of edit handles for each selected edge, allowing you to rotate them in along more than one axis. These edit handles correspond to the object’s Rotation settings in its specification dialog. To rotate a Primitive, it is often easiest to use its edit handles in a 3D view to orient it approximately the way you want it, then use the Rotation settings in its specification dialog to fine-tune its angles. USING THE EDIT TOOLS A selected Primitive can be edited in a variety of ways using the buttons on the Edit Toolbar. See The Edit Toolbar on page 130. The Union, Intersection, and Subtraction edit tools are particularly useful edit tools for creating custom shapes. See Union, Intersection, and Subtraction on page 274. 3D Solids and Faces have a number of edit tools that other Primitive tools do not, including Convert to Plain Polyline, Convert to Spline, Fillet Lines, and Chamfer Lines. See Converting Objects on page 262, Reshaping Objects on page 254, and Polyline Holes on page 232. 3D SOLID FEATURE The 3D Solid Feature edit tool allows you to either create a hole in a selected 3D Solid or Face or, in 3D views, add an extrusion that extends out of a selected 3D Solid. 1017 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Primitives and 3D Solids In plan view, this tool is used the same way the Make Hole edit tool is: simply draw a shape located entirely within a 3D Solid or Face. See Polyline Holes on page 232. To create an extrusion in a 3D view 1. In a camera view, select a 3D Solid. 2. Click the 3D Solid Feature edit button. 3. Click and drag to draw a rectangular polyline at least partially located within the area of one surface of the object. 4. Release the mouse button and then drag the mouse pointer: l Towards the object surface to create a hole. l Away from the object surface to create an extrusion. EXTRUDE OBJECT The Extrude Object edit tool allows you to produce a Solid object by extruding a selected Face or 3D Solid in any direction. See 3D Drafting on page 13. To use Extrude Object 1. Select a Face or 3D Solid and click the Extrude Object edit button. 2. In the Extrude Object dialog, specify the Extrusion Delta, which is the direction and distance that the object is extruded. l Specify the distances that the object should extrude in the directions of each of the three axes. 3. Click OK. REVOLVE OBJECT The Revolve Object edit tool allows you to produce a Solid object by extruding a selected Face or 3D Solid around an axis or point that you specify. To use Revolve Object 1. Select a 3D Solid or Face. 2. Click the Revolve Object edit button. 3. In the Revolve Object dialog, specify the Axis of Rotation, which determines the direction that the object will rotate. The Axis of Rotation is a line that is perpendicular to the direction in which the object will rotate. See Coordinate System Indicators on page 145. 1018 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Primitives and 3D Solids l Select X-Axis to revolve the object around a line that runs parallel to the X Axis in the current plan. The object will revolve in the Y and Z axes. l Select Y-Axis to revolve the object around a line that runs parallel to the Y Axis in the current plan. The object will revolve in the X and Z axes. l Select Z-Axis to revolve the object around a line that runs parallel to the Z Axis in the current plan. The object will revolve in the X and Y axes. l Select User Defined to define the axis around which the object will revolve. The Axis of Rotation cannot be normal, or perpendicular, to the plane of the selected Face object. If it is, a warning message will display and the object will not be revolved. 1019 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Primitives and 3D Solids 4. When User Defined is selected, the X, Y and Z Direction fields become active. Type a length value in each field to specify the direction of a custom Axis of Rotation. All three values cannot be 0. No specific unit is used: instead, the ratio between these numbers is used to define an axis of rotation. 5. Specify the Rotate About Point, which is the point around which the object will rotate. 6. Specify the Angle of Rotation, which is how far around the axis of rotation that the object will rotate. A value of 180° will rotate the object half-way around the axis, while 360° will rotate it in a complete circle. 7. Click OK. FILLET/CHAMFER EDGES The Fillet Edges edit tool allows you to replace an angled edge on a 3D Solid with a curved edge, while the Fillet All Edges edit tool replaces all angled edges on a 3D Solid with curved edges. See Fillet Lines on page 257. The Chamfer Edges edit tool allows you to replace an angled edge on a 3D Solid with a straight beveled edge, while the Chamfer All Edges edit tool replaces all angled edges on a 3D Solid with beveled edges. See Chamfer Lines on page 257. The Fillet Edges and Chamfer Edges edit tools are used in much the same way. To fillet an edge 1. Create a camera view of the 3D Solid object you would like to edit. 2. Click on a surface of a 3D Solid and click the Fillet Lines edit button 3. Next, click the Fillet Radius edit button. In the Set Fillet Radius dialog, specify the desired Fillet Radius and click OK. If the value is 0, no fillet will be created.   4. To apply the specified radius to all straight edges on the selected 3D Solid, click the Fillet All Edges edit button.    5. To apply a fillet to individual edges of the selected 3D solid, click the Fillet Edges edit button.   6. Move your mouse pointer over a surface edge that you would like to curve. A preview will display, showing the fillet that will be created if you click on that edge. 7. Click on additional surface edges to make them curved, as needed.   8. When you are finished, click the Main Edit Mode edit button or press the Esc key to return to the selected object’s main edit toolbar.   Once two lines are filleted, the arc between them can be edited. See Editing Arc-Based Objects on page 219.   EXPLODE 3D SOLID The Explode 3D Solid edit tool allows you to explode a selected 3D Solid or Pyramid into a collection of faces. See Face Objects on page 1016. 1020 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Creating Complex Structures with Primitives USING DIMENSIONS Like various other objects, Primitives can be moved using dimensions.  3D Solids, Pyramids, and Faces can also be resized using dimensions. See Moving Objects Using Dimensions on page 483. In order for a particular Dimension Tool to locate Primitives as dimensions are drawn, its defaults must be set to do so. See Locate Manual Panel on page 454. Creating Complex Structures with Primitives Objects created using the Primitive Tools can be manipulated and combined to produce complex structures. Use the Union , Intersection and Subtract edit tools to create unique 3D shapes and combine shapes into Architectural Blocks or use them to create a custom symbol. See Architectural Blocks on page 1007, Union, Intersection, and Subtraction on page 274, and Convert to Symbol on page 1002. You can also add your custom creations to the library for future use. See Add to Library on page 965. A simple fireplace, for example, can be created by arranging 3D Solids . Decorative stone columns can be modeled using 3D Solids and the Union , and Subtract edit tools. A custom chimney can be designed using 3D Solids and Cylinders and the Union and Subtract edit tools. 1021 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - 3D Solid Specification Dialog A detailed model truck can be created using 3D Solids and Cylinders and the Union , Intersection , and Subtract edit tools. When a primitive has been manipulated using the Union , Intersection and Subtract edit tools, it is no longer a primitive that retains its specific shape when edited. Instead, it is a considered a 3D Solid. See 3D Solid Specification Dialog on page 1022. Structures created using the Primitive Tools can be converted to symbols. See Convert to Symbol on page 1002. 3D Solid Specification Dialog To open the 3D Solid Specification dialog, select one or more 3D Solids and click the Open Object edit button.   The settings in this dialog are similar to those in the 3D Solid Defaults dialog. See Default Settings on page 77. When you first draw a 3D Solid, the origin of the box is the point where you start drawing it; the width of the box is the X axis dimension. 1022 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - 3D Solid Specification Dialog 3D SOLID PANEL Size l Specify the Width, Depth, and Height of the selected object. l When the selected object was drawn with the Face tool, the Height will be 0" (mm) and will not be editable. In the 3D Solid Defaults dialog, the Width and Height settings are not available while the Height setting determines the initial height of 3D Solids drawn in plan view.   l When Retain Aspect Ratio is checked, the ratio between the shape's Width, Height, and Depth is maintained when it is resized in the specification dialog. Uncheck this box to change these values independently and potentially distort the object's overall shape. This setting is retained when you click OK but does not affect the behavior of the object's edit handles.   l A 3D Solid's bounding box controls the position of its origin point and the orientation of its Y, X, and Z axes (width, depth, and height, respectively). If a 3D Solid is rotated, its bounding box also rotates, affecting how it is reshaped when resized. Click the Recalculate Bounding Box button to align the selected 3D Solid's bounding box with the current plan's Cartesian grid and position its origin point at a bottom corner of the bounding box. Elevation l Select the Elevation Reference from the drop-down list. This determines where the next two settings are measured from and also affects their setting labels.   l Specify the to Top distance, measured from the Elevation Reference to the top of the object.   l Specify the to Bottom distance, measured from the Elevation Reference to the bottom of the object.   Rotation These settings allow you to rotate the selected shape(s) about the X, Y, and Z axes.   l Select the X, Y, or Z Axis that you want to rotate the shape about. l Specify the Angle to rotate the shape in the text field. 90° is set by default.   1023 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - 3D Solid Specification Dialog l Click the Rotate + button to rotate the object around the selected axis in a clockwise direction.   l Click the Rotate - button to rotate the object around the selected axis in a counterclockwise direction.   3D Surface Quality These settings control how any curved surfaces on the selected object are rendered in 3D views. l Check Automatic to have the program define the Maximum Deflection, which is the amount each flat, triangular surface used to represent a curved surface in 3D can deviate from the true curvature of the object. For more information about triangles, see Edge Smoothing on page 1134. l Specify the Maximum Deflection in plan inches (mm). This value is the maximum distance that a point on a triangle can be from the true location of the curved surface. Lower values produce more triangles and a smoother appearance in 3D views. Preview A preview of the object displays on the right side of the dialog box. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22. POLYLINE PANEL The POLYLINE panel states the length of the object’s Perimeter, its Area, and its Volume. See Polyline Panel on page 317. If the selected solid has any Holes, they will be subtracted from the Area and Volume values. See Polyline Holes on page 232. SELECTED LINE/ARC PANEL The SELECTED LINE panel is available when the selected edge is a line as opposed to an arc. For more information, see Line Panel on page 304. The SELECTED ARC panel is available when the selected edge has been converted to an arc. For more information, see Arc Panel on page 312. See, too, Selected Edge on page 212 and Change Line/Arc on page 256. LINE STYLE PANEL For information about the settings on this panel, see Line Style Panel on page 305. FILL STYLE PANEL The settings on the FILL STYLE panel affect the appearance of the selected shape in plan view. See Fill Style Panel and Dialogs on page 193.   MATERIALS PANEL For information about the settings on this panel, see Materials Panel on page 1055. LABEL PANEL 3D Solid labels display when the “Polylines 3D, Labels” layer is turned on and use the Text Style assigned to that layer. The Automatic Label for 3D solids is blank, but you can specify a custom label. For information about the settings on this panel, see Label Panel on page 700. 1024 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Sphere Specification Dialog COMPONENTS PANEL The information on the COMPONENTS panel can be used in the materials list. For more information, see Components Panel on page 1330. Sphere Specification Dialog Select a sphere and click the Open Object edit button to open the Sphere Specification dialog. Center Point Specify the Center Point of the selected sphere in relation to the origin point of your plan. See Entering Coordinates on page 166.   l Enter the X, Y, and Z Position coordinates of the sphere’s center point. Size Specify the Radius of the selected sphere. Elevation l Select the Elevation Reference from the drop-down list. This determines where the next two settings are measured from and also affects their setting labels.   l Specify the to Top distance, measured from the Elevation Reference to the top of the sphere.   l Specify the to Bottom distance, measured from the Elevation Reference to the bottom of the sphere.   3D Surface Quality These settings control how any curved surfaces on the selected object are rendered in 3D views. l Check Automatic to have the program define the Maximum Deflection, which is the amount each flat, triangular surface used to represent a curved surface in 3D can deviate from the true curvature of the object. For more information about triangles, see Edge Smoothing on page 1134. 1025 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Cylinder Specification Dialog l Specify the Maximum Deflection in plan inches (mm). This value is the maximum distance that a point on a triangle can be from the true location of the curved surface. Lower values produce more triangles and a smoother appearance in 3D views. Preview A preview of the sphere displays on the right side of the dialog box. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22. LINE STYLE PANEL For information about the settings on this panel, see Line Style Panel on page 305. FILL STYLE PANEL The settings on the FILL STYLE panel affect the appearance of the selected sphere in plan view. See Fill Style Panel and Dialogs on page 193.   MATERIALS PANEL For information about the settings on this panel, see Materials Panel on page 1055. LABEL PANEL Primitive labels display when the “Polylines 3D, Labels” layer is turned on and use the Text Style assigned to that layer. The Automatic Label for Primitives is blank, but you can specify a custom label. For information about the settings on this panel, see Label Panel on page 700. COMPONENTS PANEL The information on the COMPONENTS panel can be used in the materials list. For more information, see Components Panel on page 1330. Cylinder Specification Dialog Select a cylinder and click the Open Object edit button to open the Cylinder Specification dialog. 1026 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Cylinder Specification Dialog Center Point Specify the Center Point of the selected cylinder’s base in relation to the origin point of your plan. See Entering Coordinates on page 166. l Enter the X, Y, and Z Position coordinates of the cylinder’s center point. Size Specify the Radius and Height of the selected cylinder. Elevation l Select the Elevation Reference from the drop-down list. This determines where the next two settings are measured from and also affects their setting labels.   l Specify the to Top distance, measured from the Elevation Reference to the top of the object.   l Specify the to Bottom distance, measured from the Elevation Reference to the bottom of the object.   Rotation The Rotation settings allow you to rotate the selected cylinder about the X, Y, and Z axes. See 3D Drafting on page 13.   l Select the X, Y, or Z Axis as the axis around which the cylinder will rotate.   l Specify the Angle to rotate the cylinder in the text field. The default value is 90°.   l Click the Rotate + button to rotate the cylinder around the selected axis in a clockwise direction.   l Click the Rotate - button to rotate the cylinder around the selected axis in a counterclockwise direction. 3D Surface Quality These settings control how any curved surfaces on the selected object are rendered in 3D views.   1027 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Cone Specification Dialog l Check Automatic to have the program define the Maximum Deflection, which is the amount each flat, triangular surface used to represent a curved surface in 3D can deviate from the true curvature of the object. For more information about triangles, see Edge Smoothing on page 1134.   l Specify the Maximum Deflection in plan inches (mm). This value is the maximum distance that a point on a triangle can be from the true location of the curved surface. Lower values produce more triangles and a smoother appearance in 3D views. Preview A preview of the cylinder displays on the right side of the dialog box. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22. LINE STYLE PANEL For information about the settings on this panel, see Line Style Panel on page 305. FILL STYLE PANEL The settings on the FILL STYLE panel affect the appearance of the selected cylinder in plan view. See Fill Style Panel and Dialogs on page 193.   MATERIALS PANEL For information about the settings on this panel, see Materials Panel on page 1055. LABEL PANEL Primitive labels display when the “Polylines 3D, Labels” layer is turned on and use the Text Style assigned to that layer. The Automatic Label for Primitives is blank, but you can specify a custom label. For information about the settings on this panel, see Label Panel on page 700. COMPONENTS PANEL The information on the COMPONENTS panel can be used in the materials list. For more information, see Components Panel on page 1330. Cone Specification Dialog Select a cone and click the Open Object edit button to open the Cone Specification dialog. 1028 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Cone Specification Dialog Base Center Point Specify the Base Center Point of the selected cone in relation to the origin point of your plan. See Entering Coordinates on page 166. l Enter the X, Y, and Z Position coordinates of the center point of the cone’s base. Size Specify the Radius and Height of the selected cone. Elevation l Select the Elevation Reference from the drop-down list. This determines where the next two settings are measured from and also affects their setting labels.   l Specify the to Top distance, measured from the Elevation Reference to the top of the object.   l Specify the to Bottom distance, measured from the Elevation Reference to the bottom of the object.   Rotation The Rotation settings allow you to rotate the selected cone about the X, Y, and Z axes. See 3D Drafting on page 13.   l Select the X, Y, or Z Axis as the axis around which the cone will rotate.   l Specify the Angle to rotate the cone in the text field. The default value is 90°.   l Click the Rotate + button to rotate the cone around the selected axis in a clockwise direction.   l Click the Rotate - button to rotate the cone around the selected axis in a counterclockwise direction. 3D Surface Quality These settings control how any curved surfaces on the selected object are rendered in 3D views. 1029 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Pyramid Specification Dialog l Check Automatic to have the program define the Maximum Deflection, which is the amount each flat, triangular surface used to represent a curved surface in 3D can deviate from the true curvature of the object. For more information about triangles, see Edge Smoothing on page 1134. l Specify the Maximum Deflection in plan inches (mm). This value is the maximum distance that a point on a triangle can be from the true location of the curved surface. Lower values produce more triangles and a smoother appearance in 3D views. Preview A preview of the cone displays on the right side of the dialog box. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22. LINE STYLE PANEL For information about the settings on this panel, see Line Style Panel on page 305. FILL STYLE PANEL The settings on the FILL STYLE panel affect the appearance of the selected cone in plan view. See Fill Style Panel and Dialogs on page 193.   MATERIALS PANEL For information about the settings on this panel, see Materials Panel on page 1055. LABEL PANEL Primitive labels display when the “Polylines 3D, Labels” layer is turned on and use the Text Style assigned to that layer. The Automatic Label for Primitives is blank, but you can specify a custom label. For information about the settings on this panel, see Label Panel on page 700. COMPONENTS PANEL The information on the COMPONENTS panel can be used in the materials list. For more information, see Components Panel on page 1330. Pyramid Specification Dialog Select a pyramid and click the Open Object edit button to open the Pyramid Specification dialog. 1030 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Pyramid Specification Dialog Base Center Point Specify the Base Center Point of the selected pyramid in relation to the origin point of your plan. See Entering Coordinates on page 166. l Enter the X, Y, and Z Position coordinates of the center point of the pyramid’s base. Height Specify the Height of the selected pyramid.   l Specify the height of the Apex, measured from the base to the peak. l Check Truncated to cut off the top of the pyramid and create a flat top.   l Specify the Height of a truncated pyramid, measured from the base to the flat truncated top. Base Shape Specify the selected pyramid’s Base Shape. l Specify what you would like the pyramid’s size to be Defined By: l Select Side Length to enable the Side Length field to the right and specify the length of each side of the pyramid’s base. l Select Radius to Corner to define the distance from the center point of the pyramid’s base to any of its corners. l Select Radius to Side to define the distance from the center point of the pyramid’s base to the midpoint of any of its edges. l Specify the Number of Sides that the selected pyramid has. The default value is 4. 1031 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Pyramid Specification Dialog l Specify the Side Length, which is the corner to corner length of one each side of the pyramid’s base. Only available when Define Polyline by Side Length is selected to the left. l Specify the Radius of the pyramid’s base, as measured from its center point to a corner or to the midpoint of a side. Only available when Define Polygon by Radius to Corner or Radius to Side is selected. Elevation l Select the Elevation Reference from the drop-down list. This determines where the next two settings are measured from and also affects their setting labels.   l Specify the to Top distance, measured from the Elevation Reference to the top of the object.   l Specify the to Bottom distance, measured from the Elevation Reference to the bottom of the object.   Rotation The Rotation settings allow you to rotate the selected pyramid about the X, Y, and Z axes. See 3D Drafting on page 13.   l Select the X, Y, or Z Axis as the axis around which the pyramid will rotate.   l Specify the Angle to rotate the pyramid in the text field. The default value is 90°.   l Click the Rotate + button to rotate the pyramid around the selected axis in a clockwise direction.   l Click the Rotate - button to rotate the pyramid around the selected axis in a counterclockwise direction. Preview A preview of the pyramid displays on the right side of the dialog box. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22. LINE STYLE PANEL For information about the settings on this panel, see Line Style Panel on page 305. FILL STYLE PANEL The settings on the FILL STYLE panel affect the appearance of the selected pyramid in plan view. See Fill Style Panel and Dialogs on page 193.   MATERIALS PANEL For information about the settings on this panel, see Materials Panel on page 1055. LABEL PANEL Primitive labels display when the “Polylines 3D, Labels” layer is turned on and use the Text Style assigned to that layer. The Automatic Label for Primitives is blank, but you can specify a custom label. For information about the settings on this panel, see Label Panel on page 700. COMPONENTS PANEL The information on the COMPONENTS panel can be used in the materials list. For more information, see Components Panel on page 1330. 1032 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - General Shapes General Shapes Items in the Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Shapes library catalog allow you to create a variety of custom objects using basic geometric shapes. These shapes can be used individually or combined to create a wide variety of custom objects. General Shape objects are placed and edited much like other library objects. See Editing Box-Based Objects on page 232. Soffits Soffits typically fill the space between the tops of wall cabinets and the ceiling, but they are very versatile and can be used to create almost any other object that can be modeled as a 3D box. Select Build> Cabinet> Soffit to activate this tool.   SOFFIT DEFAULTS The default settings for soffits are set in the Soffit Defaults dialog. The settings in this dialog are similar to those in the Soffit Specification dialog. See Soffit Specification Dialog on page 1034.   When a soffit is created, it is placed on the “Cabinets, Soffits” layer. See Layer Attributes on page 177.   For best results when placing soffits above wall cabinets:   l The default soffit should be the same width as and 1" (20mm) deeper than the default wall cabinet. See Cabinet Defaults on page 618.   l The default soffit Floor to Bottom value should equal the sum of the default wall cabinet’s Floor to Bottom value plus its Height. See General Panel on page 1034.   l The default soffit Height should be equal to or greater than the space between the ceiling and the top of the wall cabinets.   If the sum of the default soffit’s Floor to Bottom value and Height is larger than the ceiling height of the room in which a soffit is placed, the Floor to Bottom value will be retained and its Height will be adjusted so that it fits under the ceiling.   The maximum soffit width is 250 feet (48m), and the minimum width is 1/16" (1 mm).   Once a soffit is placed in a plan, you can change its size and position to meet a variety of needs. See Editing Box-Based Objects on page 232.   PLACING SOFFITS Soffits can be created in both 2D and 3D views by simply clicking with the Soffit tool active. See Click-to-Create on page 164.   To create a corner soffit, click as close to an inside wall corner as possible. A corner soffit retains its shape when it is moved, edited, or copied.   When positioned against a wall in a room, soffits will automatically display any moldings present in that room that are at the same height as the soffit. Soffits can also have custom molding profiles assigned to them. See Moldings Panel on page 446.   When positioned against the ceiling in a room, a soffit will prevent the Ceiling Finish layers directly above it from generating in 3D. See Lowered Ceilings on page 434.   1033 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Soffit Specification Dialog CALCULATING MATERIALS ON SOFFITS The number of bricks, tiles, shingles, shakes or other materials applied to a soffit is calculated using the following rules:   l If the soffit depth is less than the larger of 4 inches (10 mm) or 1 ½ times the material thickness, then only the front area of the soffit is used. Thus if a soffit is 48"x48"x4" thick, and the Dark Red brick material is used (3"x 8" with 3/8" mortar joint), the front of the soffit is 48"x48"=2304 square inches. Including the mortar joint, each brick requires 3 3/8" x 8 3/8" = 28.26 square inches. 2304 sq. in. divided by 28.26 sq. in. per brick gives 81.5 bricks.   l If the soffit depth is greater than both 4 inches (10 mm) and 1 ½ times the material thickness, then the surface areas of the soffit back, sides and top are used in addition to the front, if these surfaces are not attached to a wall or other soffit. However, only those portions of the sides, top and bottom remaining after subtracting twice the material thickness are used. So, for Dark Red brick, which has a depth of 4", the sides, top and bottom surface areas cannot contribute to the brick count unless the soffit depth is greater than 8 inches.   l If surface materials such as brick are applied to a large soffit, the soffit center is assumed to be hollow, with only a single layer of the material applied to each applicable face.   l For shingles and shakes, the overlap amount should be subtracted from the height, as opposed to brick or tile, where the joint width is added to the size.   l For materials in the area category, the soffit area calculation above is used, with the material thickness treated as zero.   l For materials in the volume, concrete or earth categories, the true volume of the soffit is used.   Soffit Specification Dialog To open the Soffit Specification dialog, select the soffit and click the Open Object edit button or double-click on a soffit using the Soffit   tool.   The settings in this dialog are similar to those in the Soffit Defaults dialog, but affect only the selected object(s).   The Soffit Specification dialog has the following panels: GENERAL PANEL Size/Position Define the Size and Position of the selected soffit relative to the floor  or terrain.   1034 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Soffit Specification Dialog l Specify the Width of the soffit.   l Define the vertical Height of the soffit.   l Define the Depth, which is the distance between the front and the back of the soffit. When selected in plan view, the front of a soffit has a “V,” and the back of the soffit has a triangular rotation handle.   l If the selected soffit is a corner soffit, the Width controls its left side width, and Depth controls its right side width.   l Specify the distance from Floor to Top of the soffit.   l Specify the distance from Floor to Bottom of the soffit.   l When the selected soffit is outside a room, its Floor to Bottom height is measured relative to the terrain. Check Auto Adjust Height to maintain the same distance above the terrain if the soffit is moved to a location with different terrain height. Uncheck this to maintain the same absolute height regardless of the terrain below. When Auto Adjust Height is checked, the Floor to Bottom value may automatically adjust if the soffit is moved.   l Check Use Floor Finish to measure the Floor to Bottom distance from the surface of the floor finish. When unchecked, this height is measured from the subfloor. Only available when Auto Adjust Height is checked.   l Check Sloped Soffit to slope the soffit vertically from the back up towards the front. This may become checked automatically if you check Place Under Ceiling or Place Under Roof, below. When you specify a soffit as sloped, the available options on this panel change. See General Panel - Sloped Soffits on page 1035, below. l The Height at Back Face and Front Face settings become enabled when Sloped Soffit is checked. See General Panel - Sloped Soffits on page 1035, below.   Options l Check Place Under Ceiling to adjust the soffit’s height so its top contacts the ceiling above.  If the soffit is below a sloped ceiling plane, Sloped Soffit will become checked and the Height at Back and Front Face will adjust to match the pitch. Not available in the Soffit Defaults dialog, or if the soffit is not below a ceiling.   l Check Place Under Roof to adjust the soffit’s height so its top contacts the bottom of the roof above.  Provided that the roof above does not have a pitch of 0, Sloped Soffit will become checked and the Height at Back and Front Face will adjust to match the pitch. Not available in the Soffit Defaults dialog, or if there is no roof above the soffit.   l Check Ignore Room Moldings to prevent the selected soffit from displaying moldings assigned to the room that it is placed in. See Room Moldings on page 436.   l Check Include in Schedule to include the selected soffit in a Cabinet Schedule. See Cabinet Schedules on page 630.   Preview A preview of the soffit displays on the right side of the dialog box. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22.   GENERAL PANEL - SLOPED SOFFITS When a soffit is specified as sloped, the available options on the GENERAL panel of the Soffit Specification dialog change.   1035 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Soffit Specification Dialog l Width is measured left to right across the soffit, parallel to the front of the soffit.   l Thickness is the top-to-bottom height of the front and back faces of the soffit.   l Horizontal Length is measured from back to front in plan view. When a soffit is sloped, this measurement is not the actual length of the soffit’s bottom or top edge. It cannot, for example, be used to determine the length of a sloped beam.   Both the front and back heights of a sloped soffit must be defined. Checking Place Under Ceiling or Place Under Roof will automatically adjust these values to match the slope of the ceiling or roof plane above. l Height at Back Face is measured from the finished floor to the lowest point at the back of the soffit.   l Height at Front Face is measured from the finished floor to the underside of the soffit at the upper end.   MOLDINGS PANEL The settings on the MOLDINGS panel allow you to assign one or more horizontal moldings around the selected soffit.   For information about the settings on this panel, see Moldings / / Profiles / Rails / Panels on page 927.   LAYER PANEL For information about the settings on this panel, see Layer Panel on page 186.   FILL STYLE PANEL The settings on the FILL STYLE panel affect the selected soffit’s appearance in plan view. For information about the settings on this panel, see Fill Style Panel and Dialogs on page 193.   MATERIALS PANEL For information about the settings on this panel, see Materials Panel on page 1055.   LABEL PANEL Soffit labels display in plan view when the “Cabinets, Labels” layer is turned on and use the Text Style assigned to that layer. The Automatic Label for Soffits is blank, but you can specify a custom label.  See Cabinet Labels on page 630. For more information about the settings on this panel, see  Label Panel on page 700.   1036 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Floor and Wall Material Regions COMPONENTS PANEL The information on the COMPONENTS panel can be used in the materials list. For more information, see Components Panel on page 1330.   OBJECT INFORMATION PANEL The information entered on the OBJECT INFORMATION panel can be used in schedules and the materials list. For more information, see Object Information Panel on page 1331.   SCHEDULE PANEL The settings on the SCHEDULE panel determine which schedule categories the selected soffit is included in. See Schedule Panel on page 704.   Floor and Wall Material Regions Floor and Wall Material Regions allow you to create areas within a wall or floor that use different materials than the parent object. There are three types of Material Regions:   Material Regions are CAD-based objects composed of one or more layers. The thickness of these layers and their materials can be set in the Material Region Specification dialog. See Material Region Specification Dialog on page 1038.   By default, Material Regions use the materials specified in the Floor and Wall Material Region Defaults dialogs. See Default Settings on page 77.   By default, a Material Region cuts into the finish layers of its parent object and replaces those layers with its own within its perimeter; it can, however, can be affixed to the parent’s surface instead if you prefer.   In general, Material Regions are created and edited in the same manner that other closed polylines are. Bear in mind that their shapes can only be edited in the view type in which they were created and that Floor Material Regions cannot be moved in cross section/elevation views. See Polylines on page 316 and Editing Closed Polyline-Based Objects on page 228.   You can also convert a closed CAD polyline into a Material Region in floor plan and cross section/elevation views. See Convert Polyline on page 262. Like most other architectural objects, a Material Region can be added to the library. Its material layers and the information in its specification dialog are saved; however, the shape of its polyline is not. See Add to Library on page 965.   Material Regions can span multiple parent objects; however, for best results the parent objects should have structural, or Main, layer surfaces that are in alignment.   CUSTOM BACKSPLASHES To create a Custom Backsplash, select Build> Cabinet> Custom Backsplash. Custom Backsplashes are drawn on the vertical surface of a wall and are always drawn in camera or elevation views. If you create one by clicking once, it will behave the way a Wall Material Region would, provided that no cabinets or appliances are positioned against the wall.   The initial attributes of Custom Backsplashes are set in the Custom Backsplash Defaults dialog. See Cabinet Defaults on page 618.   1037 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Material Region Specification Dialog If any cabinets and/or appliances are present, a Custom Backsplash will:   l Seek to fill the area between any base cabinets or floor appliances against that wall surface and any wall cabinets and/or windows above them.   l If nothing is above any base cabinets, it will fill the area between the cabinets and the ceiling; if nothing is below any wall cabinets, it will fill the area between the cabinets and the floor.   l Replace the backsplash associated with any base or wall cabinets.   Like Wall Material Regions, Custom Backsplashes set to cut the finish layers of their parent object will replace the layers of the wall between itself and the wall’s Main Layer with its own layers.   FLOOR MATERIAL REGIONS To create a Floor Material Region, select Build> Floor> Material Region. Floor Material Regions must be drawn within a room area and are always drawn in plan view. If you create one by clicking once, it will fill the extents of the room.   Floor Material Regions set to cut the finish layers of their parent object will replace the layers of that floor’s Finish Definition with its own layers. See Floor and Ceiling Platform Definitions on page 429.   WALL MATERIAL REGIONS To create a Wall Material Region, select Build> Wall> Material Region. Wall Material Regions are drawn on the vertical surface of a wall and are always drawn in camera or elevation views. If you create one by clicking once, it will cut around doors, windows, and fireplaces but will otherwise fill the entire surface of the parent wall.   Wall Material Regions set to cut the finish layers of their parent object will replace the layers of the wall between itself and the wall’s Main Layer with its own layers. See Wall Type Definitions on page 384.   Material Region Specification Dialog Select a Material Region or a Custom Backsplash and click the Open Object edit button to open the Material Region or Custom Backsplash Specification dialog. The settings in these two dialogs are also found in the Material Region Defaults dialogs, and most of its panels are also found in the specification dialogs for a variety of other CAD-based objects. STRUCTURE PANEL 1038 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Material Region Specification Dialog l The total thickness of the Material Layers displays here for reference. l Click the Edit button to open the Material Layers Definition dialog. See Material Layers Definition Dialogs on page 1040. l Uncheck Cut Finish Layers of Parent Object to fix the selected Material Region to the surface of its parent floor platform or wall. When checked, it cuts into the finish layers of the polyline’s parent object and replaces those layers with its own within its perimeter. POLYLINE PANEL The POLYLINE panel indicates the length of the region’s Perimeter and its enclosed Area. See Polyline Panel on page 317. If the selected region has any Holes in it, they will be subtracted from the Area and Volume values. See Polyline Holes on page 232. SELECTED LINE/ARC PANEL The SELECTED LINE panel is available when the selected edge is a line as opposed to an arc. See Line Panel on page 304. The SELECTED ARC panel is available when the selected edge has been converted into an arc. See Arc Panel on page 312. See, too, Selected Edge on page 212 and Change Line/Arc on page 256. LINE STYLE PANEL For information about the settings on this panel, see Line Style Panel on page 305. FILL STYLE PANEL The FILL STYLE panel is only available for Floor Material Regions. For information about the settings on this panel, see Fill Style Panel and Dialogs on page 193. LABEL PANEL Material Region labels display in floor plan and cross section/elevation views when the “Polylines 3D, Labels” layer is turned on and use the Text Style assigned to that layer. The Automatic Label for Material Regions is blank, but you can specify a custom label. For information about the settings on this panel, see Label Panel on page 700. COMPONENTS PANEL The information on the COMPONENTS panel can be used in the materials list. For more information, see Components Panel on page 1330. OBJECT INFORMATION PANEL The information entered on the OBJECT INFORMATION panel can be used in schedules and the materials list. For more information, see Object Information Panel on page 1331.   SCHEDULE PANEL The settings on the SCHEDULE panel determine which schedule categories the selected object is included in. See Schedule Panel on page 704. 1039 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Material Layers Definition Dialogs Material Layers Definition Dialogs The Material Layers Definition dialogs allow you to define the layers that make up wall, floor, ceiling, slab, and roof assemblies. The names of these dialogs vary and are determined by the type of object or component being edited. They include: l Backsplash Layers Definition l Ceiling Structure Definition l Ceiling Finish Definition   l Floor Structure Definition l Floor Finish Definition   l Roof Surface Definition   l Roof Structure Definition   l Roof Ceiling Finish Definition   See Floor and Wall Material Regions on page 1037, Floor and Ceiling Platforms on page 428, and Roof Planes on page 804.   Layers The selected assembly’s layers are numbered and listed from the top of the structure to its bottom. To select a layer for editing, click in its row. l Click in the Material, Pattern, or Texture column to open the Select Material dialog and choose a material for the selected layer. See Select Material/Library Object Dialog on page 1056.   l Click in the Fill column to open the Layer Fill Style dialog and define a fill style for the selected layer. This fill style is applied when the Auto Detail tool is used in a cross section view. See Fill Styles on page 192.   1040 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Material Layers Definition Dialogs l Click in the Thickness column to type the selected layer’s thickness or depth. Very thin layers can be created, but for best results avoid using a thickness of 0. For very small values, it can be helpful to temporarily change the dialog number format: click the Number Style button.   l The Total Thickness of the assembly displays to the right as a reference.   l Select a Structure Type from the drop-down list. Only available when the selected material is a Framing type. See Framing Materials and Types on page 881.   The buttons to the right of the table allow you to reorganize the assembly’s layers.   l Click the Insert Above button to create a new layer directly above the currently selected layer in the assembly.   l Click the Insert Below button to create a new layer directly below the currently selected layer in the assembly.   l Click the Move Up button to swap the selected layer’s position with that of the layer above it. Not available for the top-most layer of the assembly.   l Click the Move Down button to swap the selected layer’s position with that of the layer below it. Not available for the bottom-most layer of the assembly.   l Click Delete to remove the selected layer.   Energy Values Specify the selected Floor Structure or Ceiling Structure’s energy values, which are used when exporting to REScheck. Only available for Floor Structure and Ceiling Structure Definitions. See Export to REScheck on page 1240.   l Specify the structure’s Cavity R-Value, which is the R-value of its cavity insulator: most commonly, the insulation between wood or metal joists.   l Specify the Continuous R-Value, which is the R-value of continuous insulators such as rigid foam sheets.   Structure Specify whether the selected layer has special structural attributes.   l Check Framing to produce framing in the selected layer when framing is generated for the selected structural assembly's type. See Build Framing Dialog on page 860.   l Select the framing Type from the drop-down list. See Displaying Framing on page 879.   l In the Roof Structure Definition dialog, you can also check Include Structural Purlins to include structural purlins that run between and perpendicular to the rafters. Only available when Framing is checked, above. 1041 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Distributed Objects l  In the Roof Surface and Roof Ceiling Finish Definition dialogs, you can instead check Include Purlins to produce non-structural framing that runs perpendicular to the roof or ceiling plane's rafters. In either case:   o Select the purlin framing Type from the drop-down list. See Displaying Framing on page 879.   o Specify the on-center Spacing of purlins, measured along the direction of the pitch. o Specify the vertical Thickness and the Width of the purlins.   o Check Max Length, then specify the maximum allowed length for non-structural purlins used in Roof Surface and Ceiling Finish Definitions only.   o Specify the Bottom Run Offset, which is the distance of from the lowest purlin to the rafter ends, measured along the pitch of the roof or ceiling rather than horizontally.   o Specify the Top Run Offset, which is the distance from the highest purlin to the ridge, measured along the pitch of the roof or ceiling.   o Check Use Equal Spacing to space purlins equally between the bottom and top runs, using as close to the Spacing value specified above as possible.   o Select whether Structural Purlins are Flush Against the Exterior or top edge of the rafters, or the Interior or bottom edge of the rafters. Only available in the Roof Structure Definition dialog.   l Check Auto Detail as Insulation to generate Insulation boxes in the selected layer when Auto Detail is used in cross section views. See Detailing Cross Section/Elevation Views on page 1094.   l Check Air Gap to prevent the selected layer from displaying in 3D views or being calculated in the Materials List. See Creating an Accurate Materials List on page 1305.   Preview A preview of the selected assembly displays here. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22.   l By default, a gap is shown between each of the assembly layers. Click the Explode Layers button to remove or restore these gaps.   Distributed Objects The Distributed Object tools allow you to place multiple copies of an object in an evenly spaced array, either within a region or along a path. Select Build> Distributed Object to access these tools.   To create distributed objects 1. Select Build> Distributed Object and choose the desired Distributed Object tool.   2. Distribution regions are drawn like other closed polyline and spline-based objects.   1042 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Distribution Region/Path Specification Dialogs l Click once to place a region with endpoints that form a 10’ (4 m) square.   l Click and drag from end to end to draw a region sized as needed.   3. Distribution paths are drawn like other open polyline and spline-based objects.   l Click and drag from end to end to draw one or more connected lines or spline segments.   4. Select the region and click the Open Object edit button.   5. In the Distribution Region Specification dialog:   l Select the object to be distributed within the region.   l Specify the distributed objects’ spacing, orientation and positioning.   l Click OK to close the dialog. See Distribution Region/Path Specification Dialogs on page 1043.   Once created, Distribution Regions and Paths can be edited into nearly any shape you require. See Editing Closed PolylineBased Objects on page 228 and Editing Spline-Based Objects on page 235.   You can replace the object assigned to a Distribution Region or Path by applying a new one directly from the library. See Replace From Library on page 976.   All objects associated with a Distribution Path or Region will be listed in a schedule or materials list for a particular room if the center point of the path or region is located inside the room. If the center point of the path or region is not located in the room, none of its objects will be listed. See Create Schedule from Room on page 683 and Calculate Materials in Room on page 1304.   EXPLODE DISTRIBUTED OBJECTS Objects grouped in a Distribution Region or Path cannot be individually selected. You can, however, click the Explode Distributed Object edit button to separate a region or path into its individual components.  Once exploded, a Distribution Region or Path cannot be regrouped.   Distribution Region/Path Specification Dialogs Select a Distribution Region or Path and click the Open Object edit button to open the Distribution Region or Distribution Path Specification dialog. The settings in these two dialogs are similar and most panels are also found in the specification dialogs for a variety of other CAD-based objects. 1043 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Distribution Region/Path Specification Dialogs DISTRIBUTED OBJECT PANEL - DISTRIBUTION REGION Current Object Specify the Current Object assigned to the selected region. When an object is assigned, its name and a preview of a single instance of it display here.   l Click the Select button to choose an object from the library. See Select Library Object Dialog on page 974.   l Click the Delete button to unassign the Current Object from the selected region.   l Click the Edit button to open the Current Object’s specification dialog. Changes made here affect all objects generated within the region. See Specification Dialogs on page 21.   You can replace the object assigned to a Distribution Region or Path by applying a new one directly from the library. See Replace From Library on page 976. Display Options l Check Show Objects to display the distributed objects in plan view. l Check Show Region to display the distribution region outline in plan view. Object Spacing Specify how the objects in the region are spaced. 1044 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Distribution Region/Path Specification Dialogs l Specify the Distance between the objects in the region, as measured from their center points. l Objects in the region can be randomly offset from their default positions if you wish. Specify their Maximum Offset, measured from their center points. Not available when Evenly Scattered is selected, below. l Select Standard Grid to position the objects in rows and columns based on the standard X/Y grid in the program. This grid is affected by Rotate Plan View. See Rotate Plan View on page 147. l Select Alternate Grid to position the objects in rows and columns based on the shape of the region. l Select Evenly Scattered to distribute the objects evenly but not on a grid layout. Object Orientation Specify how or if the objects in the region are rotated. These settings do not affect the region itself or its edges. l Specify the Angle that the distributed objects should be placed at. l Select Absolute Angle to rotate the objects relative to an imaginary horizontal line drawn in the positive X direction from the origin. See 3D Drafting on page 13. l Select Relative Angle to rotate the objects relative to the angle of the region’s first edge or, if that edge is curved, to the angle of its chord. The first edge is typically located at the top of the region when it is first created; however, this can change as the region is edited. l Select Random Angle to rotate the objects in the region at a variety of random angles. Object Positioning Specify the positioning of the distributed objects relative to a point of origin within the region. l Specify the X Offset, the horizontal distance in plan view from the region’s specified point of origin. l Specify the Y Offset, the vertical distance in plan view from the region’s specified point of origin. l Select Offset From Polyline Start to measure the offset from the region’s start point. This start point is typically located at the top left of the region when it is first created; however, this can change as the region is edited. l Select Offset From Polyline Center to measure the offset from the region’s center point. Object Scaling Check Object Scaling to specify a range of size variation of the objects in the region. l Specify the Minimum Scale, which is the smallest resize of the objects allowed. l Specify the Maximum Scale, which is the largest resize of the objects allowed. Preview A preview of the region displays on the right side of the dialog box. If no object has been assigned to the selected region, Plan View will be the default preview type. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22. 1045 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Distribution Region/Path Specification Dialogs DISTRIBUTED OBJECT PANEL - DISTRIBUTION PATH Current Object Specify the object assigned to the selected path. When an object is assigned, its name and a preview of a single instance of it display here. l Click the Select button to choose an object from the library. See Select Library Object Dialog on page 974. l Click the Delete button to unassign the Current Object from the selected path. l Click the Edit button to open the Current Object’s specification dialog. Changes made here affect all objects distributed along the path. See Specification Dialogs on page 21. Display Options l Check Show Objects to display the distributed objects in plan view. l Check Show Path to display the distribution path in plan view. Object Spacing Specify how the objects along the path are spaced.   l Select Distance Between Object Centers, then specify the distance between all object centers. If the path is resized, the total number of objects may change. l Specify the Minimum Distance between object centers.   1046 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Distribution Region/Path Specification Dialogs l Specify the Maximum Distance between object centers.   l When Center Objects is checked, the objects are centered along the length of the path. Uncheck this to position an object at the path's Start end and space additional objects along its length from there. l Select Number of Evenly Distributed Objects, then specify the number of objects. If the path is resized, the spacing between objects may change. Object Orientation Specify how or if the objects on the path are rotated. l Specify the Angle that the distributed objects should be placed at. l Select Absolute Angle to rotate the objects to the specified Angle as measured from an imaginary horizontal line drawn from the origin towards the right. l Select Relative Angle to rotate each object relative to the edge of the polyline or spline that it is located on. l Select Random Angle to rotate the objects in the region at a variety of random angles. Object Positioning Specify the positioning of the distributed objects relative to the path itself. l Specify the Minimum Side Offset, which is the smallest distance objects can be offset from the path. l Specify the Maximum Side Offset, which is the largest distance objects can be offset from the path. l The Side Offset Options control which side or sides of the path objects offset to. l Select One Sided to offset objects on the left side of the path, as viewed from its starting point. l Select Alternate Sides to position objects on alternating sides of the path, creating a stepped pattern. l Select Random Sides to position objects on both sides in a random pattern. l Specify the Start Offset, the distance that the first object on the path is offset from the path’s starting point. Object Scaling Check Object Scaling to specify a range of size variation of the objects along the path. l Specify the Minimum Scale, which is the smallest resize of the objects allowed. l Specify the Maximum Scale, which is the largest resize of the objects allowed. Preview A preview of the path displays on the right side of the dialog box. If no object has been assigned to the selected path, Plan View will be the default preview type. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22. POLYLINE PANEL The POLYLINE panel states the length of the region’s Perimeter and its enclosed Area. See Polyline Panel on page 317. SPLINE PANEL The SPLINE panel has a single option and is only available when the selected object is spline-based. See Splines on page 324. 1047 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Distribution Region/Path Specification Dialogs New Segment Angle - Specify the angle between line segments that are used to draw the spline. Specifying a smaller angle makes the spline smoother. Specify a larger angle to draw the spline faster. SELECTED LINE PANEL The SELECTED LINE panel is available when the selected edge of the region or path is a line as opposed to an arc. See Selected Edge on page 212. Moving the Start of a line segment moves the end of the previous connected line, if there is one. Similarly, moving the End of a line segment moves the start of the next connected line, if there is one. The settings this panel are found in a variety of specification dialogs throughout the program. See Line Panel on page 304. SELECTED ARC PANEL The SELECTED ARC panel is available when the selected edge of the region or path is an arc as opposed to a line. See Change Line/Arc on page 256. The settings on this panel are found in a variety of specification dialogs throughout the program. See Arc Panel on page 312. LINE STYLE PANEL For information about the settings on this panel, see Line Style Panel on page 305. FILL STYLE PANEL The FILL STYLE panel is only available for a selected Distribution Path if it forms a closed shape. For information about the settings on this panel, see Fill Style Panel and Dialogs on page 193. ARROW PANEL The ARROW panel is only available for Distribution Paths that do not form a closed shape. For information about the settings on this panel, see Arrowheads on page 327. LABEL PANEL Distribution Path labels display in floor plan and cross section/elevation views when the “Polylines 3D, Labels” layer is turned on and use the Text Style assigned to that layer. For more information, see Label Panel on page 700. OBJECT INFORMATION PANEL The information entered on the OBJECT INFORMATION panel can be used in schedules and the materials list. For more information, see Object Information Panel on page 1331.   SCHEDULE PANEL The settings on the SCHEDULE panel determine which schedule categories the selected object is included in. See Schedule Panel on page 704. 1048

Materials Chapter 31 The objects used in Chief Architect have a variety of 3D properties. These objects - walls, windows, doors, cabinets, roof planes, lot perimeters, etc. - can have materials assigned to them so that they look realistic in 3D views. These materials can also be used to generate materials lists that can help with cost estimations. Designing with objects that look correct in 3D and calculate properly in the Materials List requires that you use realistic material definitions and apply them appropriately to objects in your plan. Chief Architect comes with many materials that are ready for use. From siding, roofing, flooring, masonry, tile, and paneling, to road surfaces, grass, water, and wood materials, Chief Architect has materials for every application, inside and out. If you cannot find a material that suits your needs, you can customize the materials provided or create your own. Learning how to create, manage, apply, and edit materials saves time and adds that professional touch to your designs.   Redefining only the visual properties of a material may create unexpected results. For example, changing the image of a brick material to represent siding does not cause the material to be considered as siding during material calculations. TOPICS About Materials 1050 Material Defaults 1051 Material Painter Tools 1052 Materials Panel 1055 Select Material/Library Object Dialog 1056 Editing Materials 1058 Creating Materials 1060 Mapping Patterns and Textures 1062 Materials and the Materials List 1063 Managing Plan Materials 1064 Define Material Dialog 1066 Pattern from Texture Dialog 1077 1049 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - About Materials About Materials The materials that are assigned to objects in Chief Architect perform two important roles: l They determine what the surfaces of objects look like in 3D views. l They influence how objects are calculated in the Materials List. See Materials Lists on page 1303. Materials are stored in the Library Browser and can be applied to objects in either of two ways: l Using the Material Painter . See Material Painter Tools on page 1052. l In an object’s specification dialog. See Materials Panel on page 1055. PATTERNS AND TEXTURES In Chief Architect, materials have two attributes that determine what they look like in 3D views: Textures and Patterns.   l Textures are created using special image files that tile seamlessly when applied to surfaces and are visible in ray trace views and most Rendering Techniques. See In Rendered Views on page 1099.   l Patterns are composed of CAD lines and are seen in Technical Illustration, Watercolor, Hand Drawn Lines, and Vector Views. Pattern lines are also represented when Hand Drawn Lines on Top is used in most other Rendering Techniques, as well. Select 3D> Toggle Patterns to toggle the display of patterns on or off in these views in the current plan. See Rendering Techniques on page 1150. l Materials also have a solid Material Color, which is the pattern field color and is also used if a material has no texture. Often, the texture and pattern for a given material are both set up to represent the characteristics of the material in the real world and have similar sizing and angles. When customizing such a material, check Keep Pattern/Texture in Sync before making changes to maintain this consistency. See Define Material Dialog on page 1066.   MATERIAL MAPS Material maps are specially produced image files that can add realism to a material’s appearance in rendered and CPU Ray Trace views by making it appear contoured instead of flat, or rough instead of smooth or glossy.   Materials seen in the Standard, Physically Based, Clay, Duotone, and Watercolor Rendering Techniques may be affected by these material maps:   l Bump maps add the appearance of height differences to a material - for example, on bricks, stone, or textiles. In a bump map, dark areas of the image correspond to low points in the bump map, and light areas correspond to high points.   l Normal maps assign three dimensional data to the material on a surface, allowing lighting effects to be created - for example, along mortar or grout lines. In normal maps, multiple colors are used to indicate surface direction.   l Ambient Occlusion maps indicate which parts of a texture receive more ambient light and which parts receive less. In occlusion maps, light areas receive more ambient light while dark areas receive less.   l Roughness maps define areas of varying roughness or glossiness that affect how light reflects off those areas. Roughness maps are grayscale where white is very rough, black very smooth.   l Metal maps define areas within a single texture that are metallic. Metal maps are grayscale images in which black is not metallic but every other shade is.   You can choose to ignore any or all of these maps in Clay renderings as well as override material roughness in the Rendering Technique Options dialog. See Clay Panel on page 1158. 1050 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Material Defaults All of these map types can be assigned to a material in the Define Material dialog. See Texture Panel on page 1069 and Properties Panel on page 1072.   MATERIALS LIST CALCULATION METHODS Every material can be assigned a Calculation method which defines how the material is calculated in the Materials List: for example, by piece, area, or volume. See Materials and the Materials List on page 1063.   Material Defaults Most objects in the program have defaults dialogs which allow you to set up a variety of attributes, including materials, before the objects are created. These defaults dialogs are accessed by selecting Edit> Default Settings. See Preferences and Default Settings on page 76. The Material Defaults dialog serves two purposes. It allows you to: l Set the default materials for objects that do not have a defaults dialog: for example, fireplaces and furnishings from the library. l Set the initial materials that can then populate a variety of defaults dialogs. Door, Window, and Cabinet Defaults are examples of defaults dialogs that can draw their material assignments from the Material Defaults dialog. Material defaults are dynamic, which means that if you change a particular default material, all objects that are set to use that default will automatically update to use the new material. See Dynamic Defaults on page 79. Because material defaults are dynamic, you can use the Material Defaults dialog to apply a material to multiple objects that share similar components. For example: l The “Room Moldings” Material Default applies to the base, crown, and chair rail moldings that can be assigned to rooms, as well as to interior door and window casing. If you change this Material Default, all of these objects in the plan can be affected. l The “Cabinet”, “Cabinet Door/Drawer”, “Countertop”, and “Hardware” Material Defaults can be used in your Cabinet Defaults dialogs to ensure that all cabinets use the same materials. See Dynamic Cabinet Defaults on page 618. MATERIAL DEFAULTS DIALOG Select Edit> Default Settings from the menu, select “Materials”, and click the Edit button to open the Material Defaults dialog. 1051 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Material Painter Tools l Select a material category from the scrollable list. Select multiple line items using the Shift or Ctrl key. See Shift and Ctrl Select on page 214. l Click the Select Material button or either material preview box to open the Select Material dialog. See Select Material/Library Object Dialog on page 1056. Material Painter Tools In a 3D view, select 3D> Material Painter to access the Material Painter Tools, which are used to apply materials to object surfaces. The Material Painter tools are available in all Rendering Techniques except Glass House views. See Glass House on page 1152. If you use the Material Painter to change a room’s floor or ceiling finish material, it will add that material to the room’s Floor or Ceiling Finish Definition. Changes to a Deck room’s planking or framing will affect its floor structure definition. See Floor and Ceiling Platform Definitions on page 429. MATERIAL PAINTER The Material Painter tool allows you to apply a selected material to other objects in 3D views. It can be activated in several ways: l Select 3D> Material Painter> Material Painter . l Select a material in the Library Browser while a 3D view is active. l The Material Painter also becomes active when the Material Eyedropper is used. The Material Painter is similar to the other Painter tools but has some additional considerations. See Painter Tools on page 278. 1052 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Material Painter Tools To use the Material Painter tool 1. In a 3D view, select 3D> Material Painter> Material Painter . 2. Choose a material from the Select Material dialog. See Select Material/Library Object Dialog on page 1056.   l Check Use Default Material at the bottom left of the LIBRARY MATERIALS panel or select “Use Default” from the top of the list on the PLAN MATERIALS panel to apply the default material to any object that has a defaults dialog. See Material Defaults on page 1051. 3. If you click the Copy Selected Material button, a copy of the selected material is created and the Define Material dialog will open, allowing you to customize that copy. See Copy Selected Material on page 1054.   4. Select one of the Material Painter Scoping Modes from the Edit Toolbar. See Material Painter Scoping Modes on page 1053, below. 5. If you selected a solid color material, choose whether to use the Blend Colors with Materials option and click the edit button to turn this feature on or off. See Blend Colors With Materials on page 1054, below. l The mouse pointer displays a paint roller icon   when Blend Colors With Textures is active. l The mouse pointer displays a spray can icon   when the Material Painter is active and Blend Colors With Textures is not. 6. Note that the name of the material being painted displays on the left side of the Status Bar at the bottom of the program window. See The Status Bar on page 24. l Move your pointer over a surface in the 3D view. The Status Bar now states both the material being painted and the current material on the target surface. 7. Click on a surface to apply the selected material to that surface. The material is applied to surfaces in the model based on the active Material Painter Scoping Mode.   8. If either the Component or Object Mode is active, you can continue to click on surfaces to apply the selected material. When you are finished, select a different tool. MATERIAL EYEDROPPER The Material Eyedropper tool allows you to load the material assigned to an existing object into the Material Painter and apply that material to other objects and is similar to other Eyedropper tools. See Eyedropper Tools on page 277. MATERIAL PAINTER SCOPING MODES There are five Material Painter Scoping Modes, each specifying how broadly or narrowly the selected material will be applied to surfaces in your plan. They are similar to other Painter Scoping Modes in the program, but rather than modify instances of an object type, the Material Painter Scoping Modes replace instances of a material based on the selected scope. See Painter Scoping Modes on page 278. These Painter Scoping Modes are also available when the Adjust Material Definition tool is used, allowing you to control how extensively a change to a material is applied throughout the current plan. See Adjust Material Definition on page 1058. 1053 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Material Painter Tools Material Painter Component Mode is the default mode and applies the selected material to a single component on the target object. For most object types, using this tool is the same as opening an object’s specification dialog and changing the material of one of its components on the MATERIALS panel. See Materials Panel on page 1055. Material Painter Object Mode replaces all instances of a material on the target object. Material Painter Room Mode replaces all instances of a material in the room where the target object is located. Material Painter Floor Mode replaces all instances of a material on the floor where the target object is located. Material Painter Plan Mode replaces all instances of a material in the entire plan. BLEND COLORS WITH MATERIALS The Blend Colors With Materials option allows you to apply a solid color to a surface displaying a texture or pattern and blend the two. Blend Colors With Materials works in all five Material Painter Scoping Modes. See Blending Materials on page 1061. COPY SELECTED MATERIAL The Copy Selected Material tool creates a copy of the selected material, gives you an opportunity to customize it as needed, and then lets you apply the new material to surfaces in the model. This option is helpful if you need slightly different versions of the same material - for example, to orient wood planks or tile in different directions.   When you click the Copy Selected Material button, the Define Material dialog will open, allowing you to customize the new material. When you click OK, the customized material is loaded into the Material Painter. See Define Material Dialog on page 1066. Once you apply the material to one or more surfaces in the model, it will be listed in the Plan Materials dialog. See Managing Plan Materials on page 1064.   MATERIAL PAINTER AND WALLS Painting walls is an obvious use for the Material Painter ; however, it is important to note that the Material Painter Scoping Modes affect walls and rooms somewhat differently than they do other objects: particularly if a wall defines multiple rooms on the side that is being painted. Component and Object Modes only paint the section of the wall that defines the room located where you click to apply a new material. Sections of the same wall that define other rooms are unaffected. Room Mode applies the material to all walls and solid railings that define the room where you click provided that they have the same original surface material as the one being painted. Any other objects in the room with that original material are also affected, but railings are not unless they are specified as Solid. Floor and Plan Modes apply the material to all walls, all railings, and any other objects with the same original surface material as the one being painted: either on the current floor, or throughout the plan. Note: Wall materials applied using the Material Painter tool are not calculated in the Materials List. See In the Materials List on page 365. 1054 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Materials Panel Materials Panel The specification dialogs for most objects include a MATERIALS panel. Select an object or a group of similar objects and click the Open Object edit button to open the specification dialog for that selection. On the MATERIALS panel, you can specify material assignments for the components that make up that object. When a new material is assigned, the appearance of the preview image on the right side of the dialog updates. If the selected object is using a material that is missing its texture, a Caution symbol will display next to the Materials panel name in the list on the left side of the object’s specification dialog. See Linked and Referenced Files on page 51. Object Components The table on the left side of the panel lists the components of the selected object that can be assigned unique materials, along with the names of those materials and whether or not the default materials are used. Some objects may have only one component while more complex objects may have many. As changes are made to the selected object, components may be added to or removed from this table.   l Click on a Component in the table to select it. Multiple line items can be added to the selection set by holding down the Shift or Ctrl key. See Shift and Ctrl Select on page 214.   l The selected component’s Material is stated in the list, to the right of the component name. If the component is using the default material, the name will be preceded by the word “Default:”. If it is using a Material Default, it will be preceded by the word “Default” followed by the name of an object type. See Material Defaults on page 1051.   l If the selected component belongs to a symbol object from the library, you can click on it a second time to rename it. See Native Objects vs Symbols on page 971.   Note: If the selected object is a wall or a room modified using the Material Painter, a component’s Material may be described as “No Change”. See Material Painter and Walls on page 1054. Material Preview The two boxes to the right of the table display previews of the color, pattern, and texture of the material assigned to the selected component. If “No Texture” displays in the preview window, the material has no texture assigned to it; if a Caution symbol and the words,“Texture Missing” display, the texture file could not be found on the system. 1055 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Select Material/Library Object Dialog There are several ways to open the Select Material dialog and choose a different material for one or more selected line items:   l Double-click on a line item in the table.   l Select one or more line items and click the Select Material button.   l Select one or more line items and click on either of the preview boxes. See Select Material/Library Object Dialog on page 1056. Preview A preview of the selected object displays on the right side of the panel. To view material textures, select Standard as the View Type; to view material patterns, select Vector View. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22.   Select Material/Library Object Dialog The Select Material dialog allows you to select a material to apply to one or more objects and is opened by clicking the Select Material button on the MATERIALS panel of most specification dialogs or by using the Material Painter . See Materials Panel on page 1055 and Material Painter Tools on page 1052. The similar Select Library Object dialog allows you to select an item from the library to either apply or insert into a currently selected object. See Placing Library Objects on page 972. The Select Library Object dialog has a single panel; however, depending on how it is accessed, the Select Material dialog will have either two or three panels:   l The Library Materials Panel on page 1056 allows you to select materials from the Library Browser.   l The Plan Materials Panel on page 1058 lets you select materials from the Plan Materials dialog.   l The Material Defaults Panel on page 1058 lets you associate an object component with a Material Defaults category rather than a specific material and is only available when the component of a library symbol is selected on the MATERIALS panel of the object’s specification dialog.   LIBRARY MATERIALS PANEL The LIBRARY MATERIALS panel is a modal version of the Library Browser that lists only materials. See The Library Browser on page 946. Most of the settings on this panel are also found in the Select Library Object dialog. See Select Library Object Dialog on page 974. 1056 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Select Material/Library Object Dialog The LIBRARY MATERIALS panel has most of the functionality that the Library Browser has, including the search, search filtering options, and preview options. l To locate a material, you can search, apply a Library Filter or Tag, or browse the Folders tree list. See Searching and Filtering the Library on page 953. l Located below the tree list, check Use default material to apply the default material to the selected object component (s), if one exists. See Material Defaults on page 1051. l A preview of the selected material displays on the right. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22. l To apply a material to an object, select it in the Filter Results panel and click OK. A selection of buttons below the tree list allows you to control the appearance of the panes in this dialog. The Selection and Preview panes are always present when the dialog is first opened. See The Library Browser on page 946. l For materials, select an object shape to display the material on in the preview on the far right: Cube, Sphere, Teapot, or Plane.   An additional button allows you to add new content to the User Catalog. The available option varies depending on the type of library item being assigned or inserted into another object. l Click the Add New Symbol button to import a 3D symbol into the User Catalog and select it. The symbol's category corresponds to the object component being edited, and cannot be changed. See Importing 3D Symbols on page 998. l Click the Add New Line Style button to open the Line Style Specification dialog. See Line Style Specification Dialog on page 201. l Click the Add New Fill Style button to open the Fill Style Specification dialog. See Fill Style Panel and Dialogs on page 193. 1057 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Materials l Click the Add New Backdrop button to open the Import Backdrop File dialog. See 3D Backdrops on page 1204. l Click the Add New Material button to open the Define Material dialog and create a new material saved in the User Catalog. See Define Material Dialog on page 1066. The OK button is only active when a library item is selected. If a library folder or catalog is selected, the OK button cannot be clicked. PLAN MATERIALS PANEL The PLAN MATERIALS panel is similar to the Plan Materials dialog and lets you select from a list of materials already present in the plan as well as manage that list. See Managing Plan Materials on page 1064.   Select “Use Default” from the top of the list to apply the default material to the selected object, if applicable.   MATERIAL DEFAULTS PANEL The MATERIAL DEFAULTS panel will only be present if the Select Material dialog was accessed via an object specification dialog where a component of an inserted library symbol was selected. Rather than apply a specific material to the selected component, you can dynamically associate it with a Material Default category. See Material Defaults on page 1051. Editing Materials Much like objects, materials in Chief Architect can be edited so that they better suit your design needs. There are several ways to customize a material: l Edit the original material and replace all instances of it in the current plan; l Create and edit a copy of the original material and replace only some instances of the original in the current plan; l Edit a material in the Library Browser and apply it in any plan as needed. Editing the material applied to an object is not the same as applying a different material to that object. See Material Painter Tools on page 1052. ADJUST MATERIAL DEFINITION The Adjust Material Definition tool lets you make changes to the materials seen in camera views. Adjust Material Definition has five Painter Scoping Modes that allow you to control how extensively your changes to a given material are applied: Material Painter Component Mode allows you to edit the material applied to a single component on a target object. If any other instances of the original material are present in the current plan, including on other components of the same object, you will be presented with the option of editing a copy of the original material on that component so those other instances can remain unchanged. Material Painter Object Mode allows you to edit all instances of the material on a target object. If any other instances of the original material are present on other objects in the current plan, you will be presented with the option of editing a copy of the original material on the target object so those other instances can remain unchanged. 1058 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing Materials Material Painter Room Mode allows you to edit all instances of the material located in the same room as the target object. If any other instances of the original material are present in other rooms in the current plan, you will be presented with the option of editing a copy of the original material so those other instances can remain unchanged. Material Painter Floor Mode allows you to edit all instances of the material located on the same floor level as the target object. If any other instances of the original material are present on other floors in the current plan, you will be presented with the option of editing a copy of the original material so those other instances can remain unchanged. Material Painter Plan Mode allows you to edit all instances of the material in the current plan. When Plan Mode is selected, the original material is modified and creating a copy of it is not an option. To use the Adjust Material Definition tool 1. Create a camera view in which a material that you would like to modify can be seen. 2. While the camera view is active, select 3D> Adjust Materials> Adjust Material Definition . 3. Notice that the  Adjust Materials Painter Scoping Mode buttons become available on the Edit Toolbar, and click on the Mode that suits your needs. 4. Select the material that you want to edit: l Move your mouse pointer over a surface and notice the Status Bar reports that material's name. l Click on a surface displaying the material you want to edit. 5. If the material is assigned to any objects outside the scope set by the selected Mode, the Create Copy of Material dialog will open. l Select Create a Copy of the Material to make a copy of the material and leave the original unchanged, then type a name for the new material in the Copy Name text field. l Select Edit the Source Material to modify the original material and apply your changes plan-wide. 6. The Define Material dialog opens next, allowing you to edit either the original material or a copy of it. See Define Material Dialog on page 1066. 7. When you click OK, your customized material will be applied in the current plan according to the selected Mode. Changing a material definition using the Adjust Material Definition tool only affects objects in the current plan that are using that material. It does not affect any materials saved in the library or materials used in other plans. See Adding Library Content on page 965. PLAN MATERIALS You can also edit, copy, and create new materials in the Plan Materials dialog. Select 3D> Materials> Plan Materials to open this dialog for the current plan. You can add a newly defined material to the library from the Plan Materials dialog by selecting it and clicking the Add to Library button. See Managing Plan Materials on page 1064. 1059 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Creating Materials IN THE LIBRARY BROWSER Materials saved in the User Catalog of the Library Browser are editable: right-click on one and select Open Object from the contextual menu to open the Define Material dialog for that material. See Editing Library Objects on page 970. Creating Materials Chief Architect provides a wide variety of materials - including numerous name brand material catalogs - that are ready to download and use. If you cannot find a suitable material, you can edit an existing material or create a new one. See Editing Materials on page 1058. TEXTURE FILE MANAGEMENT Materials often have a texture and one or more material maps, which are images files that add realism to the material's appearance. In order to display a material’s texture and material maps, Chief Architect needs to be able to locate the image files associated with them on your computer. See Linked and Referenced Files on page 51. If a texture or material map referenced by a newly created material is not located in either the Chief Architect Premier X15 Data folder or the installation folder for the program’s library textures, a copy of the file will be made in Chief Architect Premier X15 Data\Textures\Material Data and the material will reference that copy. See Chief Architect Premier Data on page 37. IN THE PLAN MATERIALS DIALOG There are two ways to create a new material in the Plan Materials dialog. See Managing Plan Materials on page 1064.   l Click the New button to create a new material for use in the current plan file.   l Select a material and click the Copy button to make a new material based on the original, which can then be edited and used in the current plan.   To make a plan material available for use in other plans, select it and click the Add to Library button. See Adding Library Content on page 965.   IN THE LIBRARY BROWSER Materials can be created in the Library Browser, making them available for use in any plan. See Adding Library Content on page 965. In the directory pane of the Library Browser, right-click on an unlocked folder and select New> Material from the contextual menu. See Using the Contextual Menu on page 951. The Define Material dialog opens, allowing you to specify the new material’s attributes. See Define Material Dialog on page 1066. USING PASTE IMAGE A new material can be created by copying an image that will serve as its texture to the system clipboard, then navigating to a Chief Architect window and selecting Edit> Paste> Paste from the menu. See Cut, Copy, and Paste on page 168.   1060 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Creating Materials FROM A SCREEN CAPTURE You can use the Screen Capture tools to create a texture based on a screen capture from any application and use it to create a new material in the User Catalog in the library. See Creating Screen Captures on page 1203.   By default, materials created from a screen capture will be set to Stretch to Fit. If you would like the texture to tile instead, uncheck this box. See Stretch to Fit on page 1063.   COPYING MATERIALS When the Adjust Material Definition tool is used with any scoping mode other than Plan Mode, the program will prompt you to choose whether to edit the original material or create a copy of it. See Adjust Material Definition on page 1058. BLENDING MATERIALS In 3D views, you can create a new material by blending a solid color such as a paint color with a textured and/or patterned material. Select 3D> Material Painter> Blend Colors With Materials to toggle this feature on or off. See Blend Colors With Materials on page 1054. The result is a new material that is saved in the current plan. It can be found in the Plan Materials dialog, edited as needed, and added to the library if desired. See Managing Plan Materials on page 1064. Materials created using the Blend Colors With Materials tool are given the name of the patterned/textured material with the extension “--PAINTED:” followed by the name of the solid color material. CONVERT TEXTURES TO MATERIALS An entire folder of textures can be converted into a library of materials. Select 3D> Materials> Convert Textures to Materials and then browse to a folder of textures on your computer. The converted library folder assumes the same file structure as the original folder.   Materials created using this tool do not refer to the original folder of texture files. Instead, they refer to files copied into the Data folder like individually-created materials do. See Texture File Management on page 1060, above.   CREATE PLAN MATERIALS LIBRARY Select 3D> Materials> Create Plan Materials Library to create a library of materials based on the materials used in the current plan. This is useful for converting material template plans, a common way to store material definitions in prior versions of Chief Architect, into a materials library. This command creates a new library in the Materials category using the same name as the plan. Adding materials to the library individually allows you to store the material within the existing directory structure.   1061 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Mapping Patterns and Textures Mapping Patterns and Textures Materials have two attributes that determine what they look like in 3D views: patterns and textures. See About Materials on page 1050.   Both patterns and textures have points of origin, which determine where the pattern or texture begins on an X/Y axis. By default, this origin is 0,0; however, you can specify a different origin for each in the Define Material dialog. See Define Material Dialog on page 1066.   You can also specify whether a material’s pattern and texture origins are set globally or independently for each object. By default, this mapping is per object; check Global Symbol Mapping on either the TEXTURE or PATTERN panel of the Define Material dialog to map all instances of the material throughout the plan from the same origins.   If a material has any material maps assigned to it, they use the same Offset settings as the texture. See Material Maps on page 1050.   If a material is set to map globally, it may not look right on some surfaces in 3D views. If this is the case and you do not wish to map the material independently on each object, you can create a copy of the material for each surface that requires modification and specify its texture’s origin.   The fill styles of CAD objects are similar to material patterns and can also be mapped on an individual object basis. See Fill Style Panel and Dialogs on page 193. DETERMINING THE ORIGIN Before a new origin can be specified, the display of coordinates in the Status Bar should be enabled. See The Status Bar on page 24.   To determine origin coordinates on the horizontal plane, place your cursor over the origin location in floor plan view. When the pointer is in the position you want to establish as the material origin, take note of the coordinates that display in the Status Bar.   1062 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Materials and the Materials List To determine origin coordinates on the vertical plane, place your cursor over the origin location in a cross section/elevation view.   Once you have taken note of the new origin coordinates, enter them as Horizontal and Vertical Offsets on either the PATTERN or TEXTURE panel of the Define Material dialog. See Define Material Dialog on page 1066.   A texture or pattern origin is a property of the material rather than of the object that the material is assigned to. When an object is moved, the pattern or texture maintains its absolute position and may not look right. It is a good idea to assign pattern or texture origins only after the position of the object has been finalized.   STRETCH TO FIT Some special textures, often used for artwork, do not tile. Instead, these textures resize to stretch across any surfaces that they are applied to. Materials that behave this way are specified as Stretch to Fit in the Define Material dialog. See Define Material Dialog on page 1066.   To display an artwork texture, first place a wall or desk frame in your plan. A selection of both are available in the library. See Placing Library Objects on page 972.   Next, simply apply a material specified as Stretch to Fit to the center portion of the frame. See Material Painter Tools on page 1052.   Materials and the Materials List When applied to structural components like slabs or wall, floor and ceiling, or roof layers, materials determine how or whether those components are calculated in the Materials List. Each material’s Structure Type and its Calculation Method are specified in the Define Material dialog. See Materials List Panel on page 1075.   MATERIAL STRUCTURE TYPES The Material Structure Type controls how or whether certain structural features generate in the model.   l The Concrete type must be assigned to a wall type in order for a brick ledge to be cut into it.  This type is also required to produce rebar, steel mesh, and pour number calculations in the Materials List. It is recommended for concrete walls, footings, monolithic slabs, and Slab Footings. See Foundations on page 705 and Brick Ledges on page 353.   l The Masonry type must be assigned to the exterior layer of a wall type in order to generate a brick ledge in the wall below. l The Other type is useful for other structural applications such as framing, sheathing, and siding.   CALCULATION METHODS A material’s Calculation method controls how it is counted in the Materials List when it is applied to structural components like wall, ceiling, floor, ceiling, or roof layers; slabs; or to generic objects like Primitive objects.   For walls, structural assembly layers, and slabs,  "Area", "Count" and "Linear" calculations are based on the area of the assembly or the top of the slab. If a material is calculated by "Count", its Depth is not used; however, the thickness of the layer or slab is noted in the Size column of the Materials List.   For Primitives as well as Soffits, "Area", "Count" and "Linear" calculations are made for all sides of the object. The Depth of materials calculated by "Count" is used, but thickness is otherwise not noted.   l "Area" calculates the total area of a material in  structural  layers, slabs, and Primitives  in square feet (m).   l "Count" calculates a piece count based the material’s Width, Height, and Depth.   1063 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Managing Plan Materials l "Linear" calculates the total length of strips required to cover the area in feet (m).   l "Volume" calculates the total volume of a material in  structural  layers, slabs, and Primitives  in cubic yards (m)   l "None" prevents the material from being calculated in the materials list at all.   To prevent a structural layer from being counted in the materials list as well as from displaying in the 3D model, specify it as an Air Gap. See Wall Type Definitions Dialog on page 387 and Material Layers Definition Dialogs on page 1040. Once a Materials List has been created, the unit of measurement can be changed. See Changing Count Units on page 1319.   REPRESENTING OVERLAP Any material using the Count or Linear Calculation method can be set up to account for material overlap in the Define Material dialog. To do this:   l On the PATTERN panel, set up the material’s pattern so that it accurately represents the size and shape of the exposed portion of an individual piece or strip.   l On the TEXTURE panel, set the Scale to represent the appearance of the exposed material in rendered 3D views.   l On the MATERIALS LIST panel, specify the full size of the actual material, including the overlapped portion.   If a material is set up to represent overlapping pieces, it is important that you not click the Update from Pattern button. See Materials List Panel on page 1075.   Managing Plan Materials The Plan Materials dialog allows you to manage the materials used in the current plan. Select 3D> Materials> Plan Materials to open this dialog. You can also access its settings in the Select Material dialog. See Select Material/Library Object Dialog on page 1056.   When a material is applied to an object in a plan, a copy of that material is created and saved with the plan. If you use the Define Materials dialog to modify that material, your changes affect it wherever it is found throughout that plan. All objects in that plan that use that material are affected, but objects placed in other plans are not.   All materials that come with Chief Architect are stored in the Library Browser. You can create your own materials and save them there, as well. See Creating Materials on page 1060. 1064 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Managing Plan Materials PLAN MATERIALS DIALOG Search Begin typing in the text field. As you type, the list below will be filtered to show only materials with names that contain your text. Plan Materials A sortable, scrollable list of the materials referenced by the current plan displays here. Click on the name of a material to select it. Select multiple materials by holding down the Shift or Ctrl key.   l If there is a check mark in the In Use column, the material is used by one or more objects in your plan or is defined as a default material for one or more objects in your plan.   l If the In Use column is empty, the material was used at one time but is no longer assigned to any objects or used as a default.   Management Options The buttons on the right allow you to modify the selected material and manage the items in the list.   l Click Edit to open the Define Material dialog for the selected material. See Define Material Dialog on page 1066.   l Click New to open the Define Material dialog to create a new material.   l Click Copy to create a copy of the selected material and open the Define Material dialog where you can make changes to the copied material.   l Click Purge to remove all unused materials from the plan.   l Click Delete to remove the selected material from the plan. If the material is used in the model, you cannot delete it.   l Click the Merge button to merge multiple selected materials into one. The material that is listed first is retained and all other materials in the selection set are deleted. Any instances of the deleted materials in the plan are replaced by the first material. Only available when multiple materials are selected.   l Click Add to Library to add the selected material to the Library Browser, making it available for use in other plans. See Adding Library Content on page 965.   1065 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Define Material Dialog l Click the Replace button to replace the selected material with a new one from the library. Materials assigned to objects as well as those set in object defaults dialogs are affected. See Select Library Object Dialog on page 974.   Preview A preview of the material applied to an object displays here. If multiple materials are selected at once, the first one in the list will display. Various options allow you to view different aspects of the material’s attributes:   l Display the material in Physically Based, Standard rendering, Vector View, or in a CPU Ray Trace view.   l Zoom and orbit the object in the view.   l Toggle Color on or off.   l Click the Restore Original View button to reset the material preview to its original perspective.   l Select an object shape: Cube, Sphere, Teapot, or Plane.   The Rendering Technique and object shape selections in this dialog’s preview are shared with the Define Material dialog. Unlike other dialog previews, these are retained when you close the dialog. The object shape selection is also shared with the Library Browser. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22 and The Library Browser on page 946.   You can create a folder containing all of the current plan’s Plan Materials in the Library Browser User Catalog. See Create Plan Materials Library on page 1061. Define Material Dialog The Define Material dialog allows you to adjust how materials look in 3D views as well as how they are calculated in the Materials List. The Define Material dialog can be accessed in a number of ways: l Use the Adjust Material Definition tool. See Adjust Material Definition on page 1058. l Select a material from the Plan Materials dialog and click Edit, New, or Copy. See Managing Plan Materials on page 1064.   l Right-click on a material in the User Catalog in the Library Browser and select Open Object from the contextual menu. When multiple materials are selected, some settings will not be available. See Using the Contextual Menu on page 951. l You can also right-click on the User Catalog and select New> Material. If you select a material from a Manufacturer Catalog, some options in the Define Material dialog may not be available and the panels may vary. See Manufacturer Catalogs on page 961.   If you access the Define Material dialog through a menu or specification dialog, any changes you make will affect that material wherever it is found in the current plan. Other objects in that plan using that material will also be affected, but objects outside the current plan will not. You can click the Add to Library button at the bottom of the dialog to add the material to the User Catalog for future use in any plan. See Adding Library Content on page 965. The Rendering Technique and object shape selections in this dialog’s preview are shared with the Plan Materials dialog and, unlike other dialog previews, are remembered during the current program session. See Dialog Preview Panes on page 22.   The Define Material dialog has the following panels: 1066 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Define Material Dialog PATTERN PANEL Patterns are used to represent materials in Technical Illustration, Hand Drawn Lines, and Vector Views. See Patterns and Textures on page 1050. Material Name The Material Name displays here. You can type a different name if you wish. Renaming the material does not create a new material: it redefines the existing material. See Creating Materials on page 1060.   l Check Keep Pattern/Texture in Sync to maintain consistent Scale and Offset and Angle settings for both the selected material’s pattern and its texture if any of these settings are modified.   Colors Specify the Colors used to represent the material’s pattern in Vector Views. Click either color box to open the Select Color dialog and select a color. See Color Chooser/Select Color Dialog on page 203.   l The Material Color displays in Vector Views and is also used if a material has no texture specified. See In Vector Views on page 1099. This color also affects Transparent materials in rendered and CPU Ray Trace views: choose white for a fully transparent material or black for one that is completely opaque. See Properties Panel on page 1072. l The pattern Line Color displays in Vector Views only.   l Specify the Line Weight, which is the thickness of the pattern lines.   l Specify the Shading Contrast, which is the amount of contrast between surfaces at different angles to each other in Vector Views. See Vector View on page 1150.   1067 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Define Material Dialog The following shows a curved wall with three different Shading Contrasts (created in a separate graphics program). Notice how the lowest contrast at the top appears almost flat.   Pattern When “No Pattern” is selected as the Pattern Type, the Scale, Offset and Angle settings are disabled.   l Select a Pattern Type from the drop-down list. Select “Library” or click the Library button to select a pattern from the library. When a pattern is selected from the library, its name will display in the list. See Select Library Object Dialog on page 974.   l Click the Pattern from Texture button to create a custom pattern based on the material’s texture. When a pattern is created using this option, the name of the material’s texture file will display in the Type drop-down list. Only available if the material has a texture assigned to it. See Pattern from Texture Dialog on page 1077.   You can also create custom patterns using the CAD drawing tools. See Custom Patterns on page 196. Scale l Specify the Width of the selected pattern. For Concrete and Sand materials, instead adjust the overall pattern Spacing.  Not available if Pattern from Texture has been used. l Specify the selected pattern’s Height. Only available for Brick, Tile, Shingles, and U’s patterns.   l Specify the pattern’s Scale. If the pattern appears black in the square preview pane, this value should be increased. Only available for imported patterns and some patterns from the library.   Offset and Angle l Specify the Horizontal and Vertical Offsets, if needed, so the pattern displays correctly on surfaces. See Mapping Patterns and Textures on page 1062.   l Specify the Angle, measured counterclockwise, in degrees.   1068 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Define Material Dialog l Check Global Symbol Mapping to map the pattern and texture using the same origin on all objects. When unchecked, the origin is defined individually for each object.   Copyright If the selected pattern has a Copyright, information about it displays here.   Pattern Preview A preview of the material’s pattern displays in the square pane. It updates as you change the pattern’s specifications.   Preview A preview of the material applied to an object displays here and updates as changes are made to the material definition. Various options allow you to view different aspects of the material’s attributes:   l Display the material in  Physically Based or Standard rendering, Vector View, or in a CPU Ray Trace view. l Zoom and orbit the object in the view.   l Toggle Color on or off.   l Click the Restore Original View button to reset the material preview to its original perspective. l Select an object shape: Cube, Sphere, Teapot, or Plane.   The Rendering Technique and object shape selections in this dialog’s preview are shared with  the Plan Materials dialog. Unlike other dialog previews, these are retained when you close the dialog. The object shape selection is also shared with the Library Browser. See Managing Plan Materials on page 1064. TEXTURE PANEL In most Rendering Techniques as well as in CPU Ray Trace views, materials are represented using textures and other material maps. See Material Maps on page 1050 and Rendering Techniques on page 1150. Transparency information may be contained on the alpha channel of a texture; if so, it is used in rendered and CPU Ray Trace views. If a texture or material map referenced by a newly created material is not located in either the Chief Architect Premier X15 Data folder or the installation folder for the program’s library textures, a copy of the file will be made in Chief Architect Premier X15 Data\Textures\Material Data and the material will reference that copy. See Chief Architect Premier Data on page 37.   1069 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Define Material Dialog Material Name The Material Name displays here and can be changed if you wish. Renaming the material does not create a new material: it redefines the existing material.   l Check Keep Pattern/Texture in Sync to maintain consistent Scale and Offset and Angle settings for both the selected material’s pattern and its texture if any of these settings are modified.   Texture Source Displays the path and file name of the selected texture.   l Click the Browse button to browse to a texture file saved on your computer. Supported file formats are .jpg, .bmp, .png, .gif, and .tif. See Creating Materials on page 1060.   l You can also type or paste the full path name of a texture in the text field. To remove the file, click the Remove button.   l Textures saved in .zip files can also be used. See To use an image saved in a .zip file on page 1072, below.   Scale These settings affect both the selected material’s texture and any material maps assigned to it. See Material Maps on page 1050. 1070 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Define Material Dialog l Adjust the X Scale and Y Scale, or height and width, of the selected texture.   If a rendered surface is larger than the area described by the Scale, the surface has “tiles” of the texture image. If it is smaller, only a portion of the texture is shown. l Check Stretch to Fit to stretch the texture image to cover each surface it is applied to. Stretch to Fit is typically used for artwork or photography in a frame.   Note: Changing the scale or selecting Stretch to Fit can cause textures to appear distorted if applied to a surface with a different aspect ratio than the original texture image. l Check Retain Aspect Ratio to maintain the ratio between the texture image’s height and width and prevent distortion when either its X or Y Scale value is adjusted.   Offset and Angle These settings affect the material's texture as well as any material maps assigned to it. See Mapping Patterns and Textures on page 1062.   l Specify the X and Y Positions of the texture’s origin, if needed, to adjust its layout on surfaces.   l Specify the Angle of the texture on the surfaces of objects, in degrees.   l Check Global Symbol Mapping to map the texture and pattern using the same origin on all objects. When unchecked, the origin is defined individually for each object.   Material Color Material Color can also be set on the PATTERN panel. See Pattern Panel on page 1067.   l Check Blend with Texture to apply the Material Color over the material’s texture. When a new material is created using the Blend Colors With Materials tool, the resulting material has this box checked. See Blend Colors With Materials on page 1054.   l Click the Color button to specify the Material Color.   l Click the Set Material Color Using Texture button to use the predominant color of the material’s texture. See Patterns and Textures on page 1050.   Bump Map A Bump Map is an image file that makes a material look rough or textured. See Material Maps on page 1050.   l The full path name of the selected bump map image File displays here. To remove the file, click the Remove button.   l Click the Browse button to browse to a bump map image file saved on your computer. Bump maps saved in .zip files can also be used. See To use an image saved in a .zip file on page 1072, below.   l The Scale setting allows you to specify how drastic the effect of the bump map is. The default value is 0.01, but larger or smaller values may give better results, depending on the bump map. Values can be typed to 0.001 accuracy.   l Check Invert to correspond light areas in the image with low points in the bump map and dark areas with high points. When unchecked, the opposite occurs.   Normal Map A Normal Map is an image file that makes a material appear to have depth.   1071 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Define Material Dialog l The full path name of the selected normal map image File displays here. To remove the file, click the Remove button.   l Click the Browse button to browse to a normal map image file saved on your computer. Normal maps saved in .zip files can also be used. See To use an image saved in a .zip file on page 1072, below.   Ambient Occlusion Map An  Ambient Occlusion Map is an image file that affects how much ambient light each part of the material receives.   l The full path name of the selected ambient occlusion map image File displays here. To remove the file, click the Remove button.   l Click the Browse button to browse to a file saved on your computer. Ambient occlusion maps saved in .zip files can also be used. See To use an image saved in a .zip file on page 1072, below.   Texture Preview A preview of the material’s texture displays in the square pane. It updates as you change the material definition. Preview A preview of the material applied to an object displays here and updates as changes are made to the material definition. Various options allow you to view different aspects of the material’s attributes:   l Display the material in  Physically Based or Standard rendering, Vector View, or in a CPU Ray Trace view. l Zoom and orbit the object in the view.   l Toggle Color on or off.   l Click the Restore Original View button to reset the material preview to its original perspective.   l Select an object shape: Cube, Sphere, Teapot, or Plane.   To use an image saved in a .zip file 1. Type or copy the full path name of the .zip file in the text field.   2. Directly after the path name, type #zip:, followed immediately by the name of the bump map file including its file extension.   PROPERTIES PANEL The PROPERTIES panel controls how the material appears in most rendered 3D views and in CPU Ray Trace views.   A material’s rendered appearance is also affected by the Render settings in the Preferences dialog and the lights that have been placed in the model. See Light Types on page 1137.   For special lighting effects on an object, use at least one point or spot light.   If a Roughness or Metal Map file referenced by a newly created material is not located in either the Chief Architect Premier X15 Data folder or the installation folder for the program’s library textures, a copy of the file will be made in Chief Architect Premier X15 Data\Textures\Material Data and the material will reference that copy. See Chief Architect Premier Data on page 37.   1072 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Define Material Dialog Material Name The Material Name displays here. You can type a different name if you wish. Renaming the material does not create a new material: it redefines the existing material.   Material Class Select a Material Class from the drop-down list. Each has its own set of characteristics that affects its appearance in rendered and CPU Ray Trace views.   l General Material - Most materials fall into this category, which gives you control over a number of properties.   l Matte materials are also limited for a specific purpose. They are not specular, emissive, transparent, or reflective.   l Mirror materials are limited to a specific purpose. They are not diffusive, specular, rough, emissive, or transparent and do not use the material’s texture when ray traced. When Reflections are enabled in a camera view, flat surfaces with a Mirror material display reflections. See Reflections on page 1133.   l Plastic materials are limited in that they are not specular, emissive, transparent, or reflective.   l Polished materials represent surfaces with multiple layers, such as those that are glazed, varnished, or buffed. They are not emissive, transparent, or reflective, but are specular and have additional control over Roughness.   l Predefined Metal use scientifically measured physical properties of a selection of real-world metals. Predefined metals do not use the material’s pattern or texture when ray traced, and their editing options are limited to Roughness and metal type.   l Shiny Metal is also limited for a specific purpose and are not diffuse, emissive, or transparent. When ray traced, they do not use the material’s texture.   1073 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Define Material Dialog l Translucent - Similar to General Materials, Translucent materials are not emissive or reflective. Contrary to the name, Translucent materials are not transparent, either. They do have a Translucency setting, but it only applies to light coming directly from a light fixture and only takes effect in CPU Ray Trace views. Ambient light or reflected light cannot pass through Translucent materials so objects cannot be seen through Translucent materials at all - even in CPU Ray Trace views.   l Transparent is another material class limited for a specific purpose. Transparent materials are not diffusive, specular, rough, or emissive, but do allow you to specify how light bends when passing through the material.   Adjust the settings associated with the selected Material Class using the slide bar or by entering a value in the text box to specify the appearance of the material in 3D views in which textures are used.   l Check Metallic to give the material the appearance of metal in Physically Based renderings and in CPU Ray Trace views. Only available for General materials.   l Diffuse controls the degree to which the material’s main color contributes to its appearance. Not available for Metal, Mirror, or Transparent materials, or when Metallic is checked.   l Specular controls how bright the material appears when illuminated by a point or spot light. It simulates the reflection of light off a surface. Not available for Reflective, Predefined Metal, Mirror, or Transparent materials.   l Roughness controls how shiny a material is when illuminated by a point or spot light. A material with a low Roughness value has a bright, round spot of light when rendered with a point or spot light shining on it. Not available for Polished, Mirror, or Transparent materials, or when a Roughness Map is specified, below.   l Transparency controls how opaque or transparent a material is. Most materials are opaque while some materials, such as glass, are partially transparent. In some situations, materials with transparency can slow down rendering speed. Only available for Transparent and General materials, this option is not available when Metallic is checked and does not affect the appearance of Transparent materials in ray traced views.   For maximum Transparency, specify the Material Color as white on the Pattern panel of this dialog. A black material will be opaque regardless of its transparency setting. l Emissive controls how bright a material appears independent of the lighting in the scene. It can be used to simulate surfaces that are glowing with their own light, such as the glass on a light fixture. Choose a level of brightness from the drop-down list and customize it using the spin control arrows or text field. Only available for General materials, this option is not available when Metallic is checked.   l Reflection controls how reflective a material appears in CPU Ray Trace views. See CPU Ray Trace Views on page 1168. Click the Color button to specify the color of light reflecting off a Mirror or Shiny Metal material. For most material classes, Reflection is best seen at glancing angles to the surface. For reflectivity from all angles, use a Mirror material. Not available for General, Matte, Plastic, Polished, or Predefined Metal materials.   l Translucency controls the degree to which light coming directly from a light fixture shines through the material. Only available for Translucent materials, this setting only affect CPU Ray Trace views.   l Select a Metal from the drop-down list. Only available for Predefined Metals.   l Brushed Metal creates a brushed appearance for Predefined Metal materials.   Polished and Brushed Predefined Metals can have different amounts of roughness running in different directions on a given surface. These surfaces look different depending on the viewing angle.   l U Roughness produces reflective highlights oriented horizontally. Only available for Polished materials and Brushed Predefined Metal materials.   1074 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Define Material Dialog l V Roughness produces reflective highlights oriented vertically. Only available for Polished materials and Brushed Predefined Metal materials.   l Index of Refraction controls how much light bends when it passes through the material in GPU and CPU Ray Trace views. A value of 1 is the lowest possible value and produces no light bending. Only available for Transparent materials.   Roughness Map A Roughness Map defines areas of varying roughness and glossiness. Not available for Mirror or Transparent materials. See Material Maps on page 1050.   l The full path name of the selected roughness map image File displays here. To remove the file, click the Remove button.   l Click the Browse button to select a file saved on your computer. Roughness maps saved in .zip files can be used. See To use an image saved in a .zip file on page 1072.   Metal Map A Metal Map defines areas within a texture that are metallic. Only available for General materials.   l The full path name of the selected metal map image File displays here. To remove the file, click the Remove button.   l Click the Browse button to select a file saved on your computer. Metal maps saved in .zip files can be used. See To use an image saved in a .zip file on page 1072.   Preview A preview of the material applied to an object displays here and updates as changes are made to the material definition. Various options allow you to view different aspects of the material’s attributes:   l Display the material in Physically Based rendering, Standard rendering, Vector View, or in a CPU Ray Trace view.   l Zoom and orbit the object in the view.   l Toggle Color on or off.   l Click the Restore Original View button to reset the material preview to its original perspective.   l Select an object shape: Cube, Sphere, Teapot, or Plane.   l Select a Ray Trace Configuration from the drop-down list to use in the preview. Only available when CPU Ray Trace is the selected preview view type.   MATERIALS LIST PANEL The settings on the MATERIALS LIST panel control how the selected material is counted in the Materials List. See Materials and the Materials List on page 1063.   1075 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Define Material Dialog Material Name The Material Name displays here. You can type a different name if you wish. Renaming the material does not create a new material: it redefines the existing material.   Specifications l Select a Material Structure Type from the drop-down list. The selected Type defines how - or whether - the material is calculated in the Materials List. See Material Structure Types on page 1063.   l Select a Materials List Calculation method. When “Framing” is the selected Structure Type, the only available Calculation Method will be “Framing". See Calculation Methods on page 1063.   l The settings that are available below depend on which Calculation method is selected.   l Specify the material’s Width. This value is available for Count and Linear Calculation methods.   l Specify the material’s Height. Only available for the Count Calculation method.   l Click the Update from Pattern button to make the Width and Height values here match those set on the PATTERN panel. Only available when Count or Linear is selected as the Calculation method.   l Specify the material’s Depth. Only available for the Count Calculation method, this value is only used for Materials List calculations when the material is applied to a Soffit or Primitive object. This value may also be used if the Material Painter is used to create a floor or ceiling finish. See Floor and Ceiling Finishes and the Material Painter on page 429. MANUFACTURER PANEL If the selected material is from a Manufacturer library catalog, the Define Material dialog will have a  fifth  panel: the MANUFACTURER panel, which lists contact information. See Manufacturer Catalogs on page 961.   1076 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Pattern from Texture Dialog Pattern from Texture Dialog Click the Pattern from Texture button in the Define Material dialog to create a custom pattern based on the material’s texture. This dialog also opens if you click on the name of a custom pattern in the Type drop-down list. See Pattern Panel on page 1067.   Source l Select a material map assigned to the selected material from the Source drop-down list. See Material Maps on page 1050. l The full pathname of the selected Source File is reported and can be changed in the text field. Click the Browse button to choose a different file if you wish. See Opening and Importing Files on page 44. Simple The Simple option is selected by default. Use the Threshold slider bar or text field to control the strength of edge lines in the pattern output. A low value produces many pattern lines while a high value produces few.   Advanced Select Advanced to enable additional controls for generating edge lines in the pattern.   l Use the Low and High Threshold slider bars and/or text fields to control the strength of edge lines in the pattern output. Low values produce many pattern lines while high values produces few.   1077 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Pattern from Texture Dialog l Click the Auto Compute Thresholds button to reset the Threshold values automatically generated for the current material texture.   l When Use Threshold Factor is checked, the High Threshold setting will be greater than the Low Threshold setting by the Threshold Factor value and the two values will be tied together. Uncheck this box to edit the two values separately.   l Specify the Threshold Factor, between 1 and 10. Not available when Use Threshold Value is unchecked.   l Select a Filter Size from the drop-down list. A smaller size generates fewer lines while a larger size generates more.   Original Image A preview of the material texture displays in the Original Image pane for reference.   Output Image A preview of the pattern displays in the Output Image pane. As changes are made to the settings on the left, this preview will update.   1078

3D Views Chapter 32 Little preparation is needed to create a 3D view of a model: simply click a button to create an overview or click and drag to create a camera or cross section/elevation view. To improve the quality of the rendering and create a custom look, you can adjust lighting and edit the materials used in the plan. See 3D Rendering on page 1131. Many objects can be placed and edited in 3D views, and any camera view or overview can be saved or even used to record a walkthrough. See Pictures, Images, and Walkthroughs on page 1184. TOPICS Types of 3D Views 1080 3D View Defaults and Preferences 1080 Camera Defaults Dialogs 1081 3D View Defaults Dialog 1083 3D View Tools 1084 Creating Camera Views 1086 Creating Overviews 1087 Cross Section/Elevation Views 1089 Clipped Section Views 1091 Detailing Cross Section/Elevation Views 1094 Displaying 3D Views 1097 Navigating in Camera Views 1100 Editing 3D Views 1105 Cross Section Slider 1108 Working in 3D 1109 Virtual Reality 1110 Saving and Printing 3D Views 1115 Camera Specification Dialogs 1116 Cross Section/Elevation Specification Dialogs 1124 1079 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Types of 3D Views Types of 3D Views There are three categories of 3D views in Chief Architect: camera views, overviews and cross section/elevation views. Each of these view types can be generated using a variety of Rendering Techniques. See Rendering Techniques on page 1150.   Every 3D view is also either orthographic or perspective in nature. Cross section/elevation views are always orthographic while camera views are always perspective. You can choose to generate overviews as either orthographic or perspective.   PERSPECTIVE AND ORTHOGRAPHIC VIEWS Perspective views have a focal, or vanishing, point. Surface edges and lines that would be parallel in real life appear to converge towards that focal point, and objects closer to the camera appear larger while objects farther from the camera appear smaller.   Orthographic views do not have a focal or vanishing point. Parallel surface edges and pattern lines appear parallel in these views and objects appear to be the same size regardless of their distance from the camera.   Perspective views display 3D objects much the way that they appear to the eye in real life, so they are ideal for presentation views. By default, perspective views are created using the Standard Rendering Technique.   Orthographic views, on the other hand, are useful for technical drawings. By default, orthographic views are created using the Vector View technique.   RENDERED AND VECTOR VIEWS 3D views can be generated using a variety of different Rendering Techniques. See Rendering Techniques on page 1150.   Most rendered views represent materials using textures. Surface edge lines are generally not drawn and lighting is often modeled, creating results that range from a photorealistic appearance to artistic painting styles. Standard rendered views can also be Ray Traced for additional realism. See CPU Ray Tracing on page 1167. Vector Views are non-photorealistic views in which objects are drawn using surface edge lines, or vectors. Limited lighting and shadows can be calculated and materials are represented using pattern lines and solid colors. Vector Views are ideal for layout drawings and high resolution printing. See Vector View on page 1150.   3D View Defaults and Preferences There are a number of defaults and preference settings that allow you to control the initial characteristics of 3D views.   Camera positioning, field of view and related initial settings for camera views are specified in the Camera Defaults dialogs. See Camera Defaults Dialogs on page 1081.   The settings in the 3D View Defaults dialog control a variety of functions that affect views created by all 3D View tools. See 3D View Defaults Dialog on page 1083.   1080 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Camera Defaults Dialogs The default characteristics of the Generic Sun light source can be specified in the Generic Sun Defaults dialog. See Adjust Sunlight Dialog on page 1148.   As in plan view, the display of objects in 3D views can be controlled by layer. You can specify which layer set is initially used when a view is created by each of the 3D View tools. See Layer Set Defaults on page 183. 3D views can be generated using any of the Rendering Techniques. See Rendering Techniques on page 1150.   The initial settings for each Rendering Technique can be set in the Rendering Techniques Defaults dialog. See Rendering Technique Options on page 1153.   The RENDER panel of the Preferences dialog has settings that affect 3D views. See Render Panel on page 124.   Camera Defaults Dialogs There are several defaults dialogs for cameras, which can be accessed by selecting or by double-clicking either the Orthographic or Perspective View Tools parent button. Select an item in the submenu to open the defaults dialog associated with your selection. The defaults dialog for Camera Tools other than Overviews can be accessed by double-clicking the associated toolbar button.   The various Camera Defaults in the list can be multiple-selected and then edited as a group by holding down the Shift or Control keys. Depending on the selection, not all settings may be available. See Shift and Ctrl Select on page 214.   The settings in the Camera Defaults dialogs affect how each type of camera captures, clips, and renders views; how they display in  plan view; how they are positioned; and how they move.   Once a camera is created, its attributes can be customized. See Editing 3D Views on page 1105. FULL CAMERA DEFAULTS Specify the initial attributes of cameras created using the Full Camera tool. See Camera Views on page 1084. The settings in this dialog are the same as those the Full Camera Specification dialog. See Camera Specification Dialogs on page 1116. Note: The Reflections setting in the Full Camera Defaults is used by walkthroughs created using the Walkthrough Path tool. See Recording a Walkthrough on page 1215. 1081 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Camera Defaults Dialogs FLOOR CAMERA DEFAULTS Specify the initial attributes of cameras created using the legacy Floor Camera tool. This tool is not in the menus or default toolbars but can be added to the toolbars  and/or assigned a hotkey if you wish. See Toolbars and Hotkeys on page 128. The settings in this dialog are the same as those in the Floor Camera Specification dialog.   PERSPECTIVE FULL OVERVIEW DEFAULTS Specify the initial attributes of cameras created using the Perspective Full Overview tool. See Full Overview on page 1087.   The settings in this dialog are the same as those in the Perspective Full Overview Specification dialog. PERSPECTIVE FLOOR OVERVIEW DEFAULTS Specify the initial attributes of cameras created using the Perspective Floor Overview tool. See Floor Overview on page 1087.   The settings in this dialog are the same as those in the Perspective Floor Overview Specification dialog. PERSPECTIVE FRAMING OVERVIEW DEFAULTS Specify the initial attributes of cameras created using the Perspective Framing Overview tool. See Overviews on page 1085.   The panels in this dialog are the same as their respective panels in the Orthographic Framing Overview Specification dialog. CROSS SECTION/ELEVATION DEFAULTS Specify the initial attributes of cameras created using the Cross Section/Elevation tool. See Cross Section/Elevation Views on page 1085.   The settings in this dialog are also found in the Cross Section/Elevation Specification dialog. See Cross Section/Elevation Specification Dialogs on page 1124.   BACK CLIPPED CROSS SECTION DEFAULTS Specify the initial attributes of cameras created using the Back Clipped Cross Section tool. See Cross Section/Elevation Views on page 1085.   The panels in this dialog are the same as their respective panels in the Cross Section/Elevation Specification dialog. See Cross Section/Elevation Specification Dialogs on page 1124.   WALL ELEVATION DEFAULTS Specify the initial attributes of cameras created using the Wall Elevation tool. See Cross Section/Elevation Views on page 1085.   The panels in this dialog are the same as their respective panels in the Wall Elevation Specification dialog. See Cross Section/Elevation Specification Dialogs on page 1124.   1082 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - 3D View Defaults Dialog ORTHOGRAPHIC FULL OVERVIEW DEFAULTS Specify the initial attributes of cameras created using the Orthographic Floor Overview tool. See Full Overview on page 1087.   The panels in this dialog are the same as their respective panels in the Orthographic Full Overview Specification dialog.   ORTHOGRAPHIC FLOOR OVERVIEW DEFAULTS Specify the initial attributes of cameras created using the Orthographic Full Overview tool. See Overviews on page 1085.   The panels in this dialog are the same as their respective panels in the Orthographic Full Overview Specification dialog. ORTHOGRAPHIC FRAMING OVERVIEW DEFAULTS Specify the initial attributes of cameras created using the Orthographic Framing Overview tool. See Overviews on page 1085.   The panels in this dialog are the same as their respective panels in the Orthographic Framing Overview Specification dialog. 3D View Defaults Dialog Select 3D> 3D View Defaults or Edit> Default Settings to open the 3D View Defaults dialog.   The settings in this dialog control a variety of functions that affect views created by all 3D View tools.   General Options These settings affect all 3D views. l Check Camera Bumps Off Walls to prevent cameras from moving freely through walls. When this setting is on, you can "walk" up a staircase by moving the camera using the Move Camera Tools. 1083 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - 3D View Tools l When Turn Automatically is checked, cameras automatically change direction when they approach a wall, door opening, or staircase. This should be unchecked when using a 3D mouse or gamepad. See 3Dconnexion® 3D Mice on page 1101 and Move Camera Tools on page 1103. l Check Auto Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings to automatically rebuild floors and ceilings before a 3D view or elevation is displayed. When this is unchecked and the structure is not up-to-date, the Rebuild Walls, Floors, Ceilings icon displays near your mouse pointer. See Rebuilding Walls, Floors and Ceilings on page 735. l Check Legacy Compatible Texture Mapping to use global texture mapping settings rather than texture mapping fixed to individual objects. Legacy Compatible Texture Mapping should remain unchecked except in legacy plans with custom rotated textures. l When Auto Adjust Electrical Default Glass Properties is checked, the program automatically adjusts the behavior of electrical fixture glass in Standard rendered and CPU Ray Trace views in response to interior and exterior lighting conditions. When this box is unchecked, these adjustments are not made. l Check Always Display Active Cameras to turn on the display of active camera symbols, even when the “Cameras” layer is turned off. When unchecked, active camera symbols obey the layer setting. l When Display Openings Independent of Walls and Roofs is checked, doors, windows, and skylights display in 3D views when their containing wall or roof plane does not. Uncheck this to prevent these objects from displaying in 3D when their parent objects do not. Surface Edge Lines Specify how Surface Edge Lines display for all objects in Vector View renderings. Surface edge line color in Technical Illustration renderings are also affected by these settings. See Rendering Techniques on page 1150. l Check Use Layer Settings to display surface edge lines for objects using the display settings specified by layer in the Layer Display Options dialog. If this option is not checked, all edge lines are drawn black and solid with a line weight of 0. See Layer Attributes on page 177. l When Use Object Settings is checked, all objects that have non-default settings specified on the LINE STYLE panel of their specification dialog display using those settings, overriding the layer settings in the Layer Display Options dialog. Only available when Use Layer Settings is checked. See Line Style Panel on page 305. 3D View Tools Select 3D> Create Orthographic View to display the Orthographic View Tools or 3D> Create Perspective View to display the Perspective View Tools. There are four types of 3D Views: CAMERA VIEWS Camera views are Perspective views. They are not scaled and cannot be annotated but are ideal for creating presentation views.   The Full Camera tool creates multi-floor views of the 3D model. It can be used to create interior and exterior perspectives, and is good for displaying cathedral ceilings, roofs, lofts, stairwell openings, and other variation in floor and ceiling levels. 1084 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - 3D View Tools The Floor Camera tool creates perspective views of the current floor only. Nothing above the ceiling surface is generated, and neither is anything below the floor. This legacy tool is not in the menus or default toolbars but can be added to the toolbars  and/or assigned a hotkey if you wish. See Toolbars and Hotkeys on page 128. OVERVIEWS An overview can be either orthographic in nature or perspective, depending on the tool used to create it. See Creating Overviews on page 1087. The Orthographic and Perspective Full Overview tools create views of the entire model including all floors, ceilings, and the roof.     The Orthographic and Perspective Floor Overview tools create views of the current floor with the ceiling removed and all floors beneath it visible.     The Orthographic and Perspective Framing Overview tools create views of the framing in the model. Framing must be built in order for it to display in a framing overview. See Framing Overview on page 1088.   The Isometric Overview tools create specially oriented and scaled overviews that are common in engineering drawings. These tools are only available when an Orthographic Overview is active. See Isometric Overviews on page 1088.   CROSS SECTION/ELEVATION VIEWS Cross Section/Elevation views are similar to the traditional, scaled orthographic views often used in drafting. They are scaled and can be fully annotated. See Cross Section/Elevation Views on page 1089.   A Cross Section/Elevation view displays all floors of the model. If the view is created outside the structure looking toward it, the result is an exterior elevation. If the view is created inside the structure, or passes through any of the structure, a cross section is created.   The Back Clipped Cross Section tool includes only the objects between the starting point and stopping point of the cross section line.   The Wall Elevation tool creates an elevation of a wall on a single floor and in a single room. The Wall Elevation tool cannot be used to create exterior views.   Select 3D> Create Auto Elevations to access tools that create, save, and name elevation views as soon as the tool is selected. These tools can also be added to your toolbars. See Auto Elevation Tools on page 1091.   The Front Elevation tool creates an exterior elevation of the front of the model (on screen, the bottom).   The Back Elevation tool creates an exterior elevation of the back of the model (on screen, the top).   The Left Elevation tool creates an exterior elevation of the left side of the model.   The Right Elevation tool creates an exterior elevation of the right side of the model.   The All Elevations tool creates an exterior elevation of the front, back, left, and right sides of the model.   The Create Room Elevation Views edit tool creates an interior elevation view of each wall defining a selected room. This tool is found on the Edit Toolbar for a selected room rather than in the 3D menu. See Editing Rooms on page 419.   1085 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Creating Camera Views An individual wall’s framing members can also be displayed and edited in a Wall Detail view. See In Wall Detail Views on page 880. CPU RAY TRACE VIEWS CPU Ray Trace views are a special type of high-quality 3D view in which the paths individual photons are calculated so that realistic lighting effects can be modeled. They cannot be created directly from plan view. Instead, you must first create a Standard or Physically Based rendered view of the desired scene and then select 3D> CPU Ray Trace. See CPU Ray Tracing on page 1167.   Creating Camera Views All Camera views are created using the same method. To create a camera view 1. In plan view, select the desired camera tool. The mouse pointer displays the camera icon. 2. Click and drag a line to define the view direction. A. Camera Position (click) B. Line of Sight (drag) C. Focal Point (release) D. Field of View l The camera's position is where you click to begin the line. l The line that you drag defines the direction the camera is pointed. l The end of the line is the focal point of the view, the point the camera rotates around. l The Field of View is 55° by default. 3. When you release the mouse button, a view generates in a new window. 4. Return to the plan view. A camera symbol now displays in plan view. See Working in Multiple Views on page 150. In order to create a camera view, you must click and drag at least as far as your current Snap Distance. See Snap Properties Panel on page 119. A new camera can also be created by copying and pasting an existing camera symbol selected in plan view. See Copying and Pasting Objects on page 167. You can also create a camera view based on a single frame of a Walkthrough Path. See Walkthrough Previews on page 1212. 1086 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Creating Overviews CAMERA HEIGHT By default, Cameras are created at a height of 60” (1500 mm). Where this height is measured from depends on the location of the camera: l If the camera is inside a room, it is measured from that room’s subfloor. l If the camera is outside a room but inside the Terrain Perimeter, it is measured from the terrain at the location of the camera.   l If the camera is located in neither a room nor within the Terrain Perimeter, it is measured from the default height of the subfloor for the current floor. Once created, a camera’s height can be modified in its Camera Specification dialog, and the default height value can be set in the Camera Defaults dialog. See Camera Panel on page 1117. Creating Overviews In Chief Architect, there are three different overview types: Full, Floor, and Framing Overviews.   Each type of overview can be generated as either an orthographic or perspective view. An overview window’s title bar indicates whether it is perspective or orthographic. See Perspective and Orthographic Views on page 1080.   Overviews generate as soon as you select the tool and are always created at the same 120° angle. The initial focal point is located at the center of the architectural model: the terrain is not taken into consideration determining its position. The distance of the camera from the model will vary depending on its size: the larger the architectural model, the further away the camera will be from the focal point so that the entire model can be seen in the view. A new overview camera can also be created by selecting an existing overview camera in plan view and then copying and pasting it. See Copying and Pasting Objects on page 167. Once generated, an overview window’s title bar indicates its view type and a camera symbol in plan view represents its location. An overview camera can be edited much like regular camera views can. See Editing 3D Views on page 1105. FULL OVERVIEW Select 3D> Create Orthographic View> Orthographic Full Overview or 3D> Create Perspective View> Perspective Full Overview to generate an exterior view of the entire model. FLOOR OVERVIEW Select 3D> Create Orthographic View> Orthographic Floor Overview or 3D> Create Perspective View> Perspective Floor Overview to create a view of the current floor with the ceiling removed and all floors beneath it visible. Floor Overviews are an effective tool for illustrating traffic flow and the relationships between spaces.   1087 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Creating Overviews To see a different floor, select Tools> Floor/Reference Display> Up One Floor or Down One Floor . You can also return to plan view and make another floor current before generating the Floor Overview. If you prefer, you can specify in the Camera Defaults dialog that only the current floor be included in Floor Overviews. See Camera Defaults Dialogs on page 1081.   FRAMING OVERVIEW Select 3D> Create Orthographic View> Orthographic Framing Overview or 3D> Create Perspective View> Perspective Framing Overview to create a view of the entire model, displaying only framing and the foundation. Framing overviews include all floor, wall, and roof framing as well as foundations. Unlike other overviews, which use the Camera View layer set, Framing Overviews use the 3D Framing Set. See Layer Sets on page 182. Framing must be built before generating this view or the view will be empty.   ISOMETRIC OVERVIEWS An Isometric Overview is a special orthographic view in which the camera is positioned in such a way that the angles between the X, Y, and Z axes are all 120° in that view. See 3D Drafting on page 13. In addition, Isometric Overviews use scaling that is approximately 1.2 times that used in a normal projection so that lines parallel to the X, Y, and Z axes measure their true length in the 2D projection. As such, Isometric Overviews can be useful for technical drawings but may not be well suited for presentation views.   1088 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Cross Section/Elevation Views To create an Isometric Overview, begin in an Orthographic Overview. See Perspective and Orthographic Views on page 1080. To create an Isometric Overview 1. Create an Orthographic Full Overview or Floor Overview . 2. With the Orthographic view active, select 3D> Isometric Overviews and choose a view option from the submenu. 3. The camera’s position will adjust, as will the scaling used in the view. 4. If you move, orbit, or tilt the camera, the camera will return to normal scaling. Cross Section/Elevation Views The cross section/elevation tools produce the traditional, orthogonal views often used in drafting. Regardless of their distance from the camera, all lines and dimensions in these views are their true lengths, making it easy to accurately see the spatial relationships of the 3D objects in the model. Cross section/elevation views are the only 3D views that can be enhanced with the 2D CAD tools. They can be fully annotated and dimensioned, sent to layout, and printed to scale. See Detailing Cross Section/Elevation Views on page 1094. CREATING CROSS SECTION/ELEVATION VIEWS Each of these tools has a specific function: A Cross Section/Elevation view displays all floors of the model. The cross section begins at the point where the camera arrow is drawn and continues through the entire model.   The Back Clipped Cross Section tool includes only the objects or portions of objects between the starting point and stopping point of the camera’s Line of Sight.   The Wall Elevation tool creates an interior elevation of a single wall defining the room that the camera is drawn in. It creates a 2D projection of that wall and the objects located between that wall and its Cross Section Line; does not cut through walls or show the ceiling, floor, or roof; and is used primarily for kitchen and bath elevations. This tool cannot be used to create exterior views.   Additional tools allow you to create and save multiple elevation views with a single click:   1089 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Cross Section/Elevation Views The Auto Elevation Tools create exterior elevations of the front, back, left and right sides of the model. See Auto Elevation Tools on page 1091, below.   The Create Room Elevation Views edit tool creates an interior elevation view of each wall defining or present in a selected room. To create elevation views for a room, select the room and then select this edit tool. See Editing Rooms on page 419.   Cross Section/Elevation, Back Clipped Cross Section, and Wall Elevation views are created in the same way.   To create a cross section/elevation view 1. Select the Cross Section/Elevation , Back Clipped Cross Section , or Wall Elevation tool. The pointer changes to a with crosshairs marking the position of the pointer. 2. Click and drag a line in plan view.   l If you selected the Wall Elevation tool, you must click inside a room area. l A Camera symbol displays where you click, along with a Cross Section Line indicating the plane of the camera’s cross section cut line.   A. Camera location (click) B. Line of Sight (drag) C. Focal Point (release) D. Cross Section Line E. Back Clipping Line (when applicable) 3. Drag in the direction of the Line of Sight to draw a camera arrow.   l Always drag the camera arrow perpendicular to the wall to be viewed.   l If the view is a Back Clipped Cross Section, a second Cross Section Line at the end of the Line of Sight indicates the furthest extent of the back clip.   4. When you release the mouse button, the view generates in a new window.   5. Once created, a cross section/elevation view's extents can be edited. See Camera Panel on page 1125. As with camera views, you must click and drag at least as far as your current Snap Distance in order to create a Cross Section/Elevation view. See Snap Properties Panel on page 119.   A new cross section/elevation view can also be created by copying and pasting an existing cross section/elevation camera symbol selected in plan view. See Copying and Pasting Objects on page 167. Once created, the clipping in all cross section/elevation views can be customized to control how much of the model is included in the view. See Camera Panel on page 1125.   If the Line of Sight does not cut through a 3D object and the object is within the back clipped distance, such as a window shown in elevation, the object retains its 3D definition and can be selected, moved, stretched, or otherwise modified in the view. The 3D model is updated in all views.   1090 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Clipped Section Views AUTO ELEVATION TOOLS The Auto Elevation Tools create exterior elevations of the front, back, left and right sides of the model. To use any of these tools, simply select it: the camera view - or all four camera views - are automatically created, saved and named. See Saving 3D Views on page 1115.   At least one wall or railing must be present in the plan in order for the Auto Elevation tools to work. If no walls or railings have been drawn, nothing will happen when any of these tools is selected.   The directions that these four elevation cameras point are directly related to the orientation of the X and Y axes, reference grid and snap grid in the plan. See 3D Drafting on page 13.   The front elevation is located below the model on-screen and points upward while the back elevation is found above the model and points downward. This may not be the case, however, if you have used the Rotate Plan View tool. See Rotate Plan View on page 147.   If the same Auto Elevation view is created more than once, the additional camera symbols are placed progressively further away from the model in plan view and are numbered. If an Auto Elevation is renamed and then the view created again, the symbols may overlap.   The Auto Elevation Tools parent button can be added to the toolbars if you wish. See To add a button to a toolbar on page 132.   CALLOUT LABELS By default, cross section/elevation cameras display a callout symbol in plan view. When the view is sent to layout, the Automatic Text Below Line will report the Label of the layout page the view was sent to. To avoid  unexpected results when using the Automatic Text Below Line, do not send the same camera view to layout more than once. See Plan Display Panel on page 1128.   Clipped Section Views The Cross Section/Elevation Specification dialog has Scene Clipping options that allow you to control the extents of the view and thus how much of the model it shows. See Camera Panel on page 1125. In plan view, information about its front, back, and side clipping are indicated when a camera symbol is selected. In a clipped view, side and elevation clipping are indicated using Clip Lines on the "CAD, Clip Lines" layer. See Displaying 3D Views on page 1097. FRONT AND BACK CLIPPING All cross section/elevation views have a clipping plane positioned at the same location as the camera and running perpendicular to its Line of Sight. This front clipping plane is also referred to as the Cross Section Line, and is shown in plan view when the camera's symbol is selected. If an object is positioned so that it is cut by this plane, its edges will be drawn but the object will not be selectable in the view. There are two ways to adjust the position of the front clipping plane: l Specify the camera's X and Y Position value in the Cross Section/Elevation Specification dialog. l Use the camera's edit handles in plan view to reposition the start point of its Line of Sight. 1091 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Clipped Section Views By default, Back Clipped Cross Section views also have a second clipping plane: the Back Clip plane, which controls how far into the model from the camera the view extends: objects located further from the camera than the Back Clip plane are not included in the view while those located between the front and back planes are. A Back Clip can be specified for any cross section/elevation view once it has been created. There are two ways to specify the distance between the front and back clipping planes: l Set a specific Back Clip After value in the Cross Section/Elevation Specification dialog. l Use the camera's edit handles in plan view to move the end of its Line of Sight, changing its length. STEPPED CUTTING PLANES You can create one or more steps in the front and back clipping planes using the Add Break edit tool, allowing you to cut some objects while avoiding others. See Add Break on page 254.   To create a stepped cutting plane 1. In plan view, select a Cross Section/Elevation or Back Clipped Cross Section camera. See In Plan View on page 1097.   2. Click the Add Break edit button, then click on the front cutting plane of the selected camera symbol to add a new diamond-shaped Resize edit handle at the point where you clicked.   3. Click and drag the edit handle on either side of the break perpendicular to the cutting plane to create a step.   4. Click and drag the edit handle associated with the break parallel to the cutting plane to adjust the position of the step.    1092 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Clipped Section Views SIDE CLIPPING By default, cross section/elevation views include the entire width of the 3D model. You can instead choose to Clip Sides in the Cross Section/Elevation Specification dialog. There are three ways to specify a view's Clip Width: l Set a specific value in the Cross Section/Elevation Specification dialog. l Use the edit handles in plan view to change the length of the Cross Section Line, or front cutting plane. l In the view itself, turn on the "CAD, Clip Lines" layer and adjust the position of the vertical Side Clip lines using the edit handles. You can toggle side clipping in an active view by selecting 3D> Camera View Options> Clip Sides. This option is not available for views set to Clip to Room. TOP AND BOTTOM CLIPPING By default, cross section/elevation views include the entire height of the 3D model. You can instead choose to Clip Elevation in the Cross Section/Elevation Specification dialog. There are two ways to specify the top and bottom extents of a clipped view: l Set a specific Bottom and Top Clip Elevation values in the Cross Section/Elevation Specification dialog. l In the view itself, turn on the "CAD, Clip Lines" layer and adjust the position of the horizontal Elevation Clip lines using the edit handles. When both Side and Top/Bottom Elevation clipping are in use, the Add Break and Make Parallel/Perpendicular edit tools can be used to customize the horizontal top and bottom clipping planes. These tools do not affect the vertical side clipping planes, however. See Add Break on page 254 and Make Parallel/Perpendicular on page 250. You can toggle elevation clipping in an active view by selecting 3D> Camera View Options> Clip Sides. Not available for views set to Clip to Room. CLIP TO ROOM The Clip to Room option in the Cross Section/Elevation Specification dialog is only available when a selected view camera is located inside a room. This option is the default for Wall Elevation views, and produces a view showing a single wall defining the camera's room along with any objects between the camera and that wall. When this setting is in use, the other clipping options are disabled. SCENE CLIPPING AND CAMERA DEFAULTS The default Scene Clipping settings for the Cross Section/Elevation, Back Clipped Cross Section, and Wall Elevation tools are restricted to preserve these tools' intended functions and avoid unexpected behavior; however, once a view is created using one of these tools its clipping settings are fully editable. If you change the Scene Clipping settings of a view and then use the Set as Default edit tool: l It will update the Wall Elevation Defaults if Clip to Room is checked. l It will update the Back Clipped Cross Section Defaults if Back Clip is checked. l If neither of these boxes is checked, the Cross Section/Elevation Defaults will be updated. See Set as Default on page 79. 1093 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Detailing Cross Section/Elevation Views Detailing Cross Section/Elevation Views CAD objects, including Text and Dimensions, can be created in cross section/elevation views. These objects are superimposed on the view and have no effect on the 3D model itself. If CAD objects have been added to a cross section/elevation view, the program will prompt you to save the view before closing the window. This information is then stored in the view. See Saved Views on page 144.   Labels for cabinets and other objects can display in cross section/elevation views. See Displaying Labels on page 700. A selection of Auto Elevation Dimension tools automatically generate dimension sets and story poles in cross section/elevation views. See The Automatic Dimension Tools on page 472.   Annotations in cross section/elevation views are created using the view’s Active Defaults, which can be set in the Cross Section/Elevation Specification dialog. See Selected Defaults Panel on page 1128.   In cross section views, some objects, such as walls, may be represented using Cross Section lines. If a dimension line finds an object surface edge represented by a Cross Section line, a Point Marker will be placed at that location, and the dimension will locate it instead of the Cross Section line. See Markers on page 529.   CAD objects will snap to the Snap Grid when Grid Snaps are enabled. Note that the 3D model may obscure the display of the Snap Grid. See Grid Snaps on page 163.   When the Vector View rendering technique is used, you can select CAD> CAD Detail From View to create a 2D line drawing of the active cross section/elevation view in a CAD Detail window. This drawing can then be edited as needed. See CAD Detail from View on page 338.   Annotated cross section/elevation views can  also be sent to layout. See CAD and Text in Layout on page 1337.   AUTO DETAIL The Auto Detail tool automatically creates CAD objects for commonly detailed components of cross section views. To use this tool, select CAD> Auto Detail while a cross section view is active. Auto Detail creates CAD objects in walls, floor and ceiling platforms, foundation walls and footings, slabs, roof and ceiling planes, as well as Material Regions and Custom Backslashes that are intersected by the cross section plane as follows: l Walls - Creates closed CAD polylines for each wall layer with a fill style specified in the wall type definition. The polyline uses the same fill as that specified for the wall layer. See Wall Type Definitions on page 384. 1094 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Detailing Cross Section/Elevation Views l Floors and Ceilings - Creates closed CAD polylines for each floor and ceiling layer with a fill style specified in the Platform or Finish definition. See Floor and Ceiling Platform Definitions on page 429. l Roof and Ceiling Planes - Creates closed CAD polylines for each roof layer with a fill style specified in its Surface, Structure, or Ceiling definition. See Roof Layers on page 806. l Foundations - Closed polylines are created for foundation walls, footings, and floors. o The fill styles for wall layers are specified for the wall layer in the wall type definition. o The fill style for footings is “Concrete”. o The fill style for the floor is set in the floor platform definition. l Slabs - Closed polylines using the “Concrete” fill style are created for Slabs. See The Slab Tools on page 719. l Material Regions - Closed polylines for each layer of a Wall or Floor Material Region or a Custom Backsplash are created. The polylines use the fill style specified in the object’s material layers definition. See Floor and Wall Material Regions on page 1037. The CAD objects created by the Auto Detail tool are placed on the Current CAD Layer. See Current CAD Layer on page 326. Once created, these CAD objects can be selected and edited. See Editing Closed Polyline-Based Objects on page 228 and Editing Box-Based Objects on page 232. Note: Using the Auto Detail tool twice results in two copies of the same CAD objects. Insulation and Air Gaps Instead of using the fill style specified for a given structural assembly Material Layer, the Auto Detail tool can generate an Insulation CAD box along the length of a structural layer. See Insulation on page 320.   To achieve this for a particular Material Layer, select that layer and check Auto Detail as Insulation in the structural component's definition. See Wall Type Definitions Dialog on page 387 and Material Layers Definition Dialogs on page 1040. Similarly, if a Material Layer has Air Gap checked, no CAD object will be created to detail that layer, regardless of its specified fill style.   DEPTH CUE The Depth Cue tool allows you to add a partially transparent mask over part of a cross section/elevation view based on surfaces' distance from the camera. Surfaces nearer the camera are more prominent while those further are partially obscured. 1095 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Detailing Cross Section/Elevation Views Depth Cue creates the appearance of fog over surfaces in the distance. To add Depth Cue to an active cross section/elevation view, select 3D> Camera View Options> Depth Cue . l Check Use Depth Cue to apply this effect to the current view and enable the settings below. l When Keep Start/End in Sync is checked, the Start and End values are always the same, producing a sharp border where the fog begins. Uncheck this to produce variation in the level of fog transparency. l Specify the Start and End distances from the camera between which the Depth Cue opacity is applied. l Specify the Fog Opacity, which controls how opaque or transparent the cue is. 0% is totally transparent while 100% cannot be seen through at all. l The Fog Color displays in the Color button. Click this button to choose a different color if you wish. See Color Chooser/Select Color Dialog on page 203. Depth Cue does not affect appearance of text, dimensions, or CAD objects drawn in the view. 1096 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Displaying 3D Views Displaying 3D Views A variety of tools and settings allow you to control the appearance of 3D views. There are also numerous ways to adjust a 3D view’s position, focal point and field of view. See Editing 3D Views on page 1105. The name of the current plan file and the type of view displays at the top of each view window in its title bar. If a 3D view is saved, its name also displays. There is no limit to the number of 3D view windows that you can have open at a given time; bear in mind, though, that each window demands use of your computer’s resources and that you may see poor performance if too many views are open. See Working in Multiple Views on page 150. The 3D model will rebuild automatically as you draw; however, if you notice any anomalies in the model in 3D, select 3D> Rebuild 3D to regenerate all 3D data associated with the current plan. All open views will remain open. LAYER DISPLAY OPTIONS As in plan view, the display of objects in 3D views can be controlled by layer. See Layer Display Options Dialog on page 179. Different view types use different layer sets when they are created. See Layer Sets on page 182. To show framing in a cross section/elevation view, framing must first be built using the Build Framing dialog and the appropriate framing layers must be turned on in the Section View layer set. See Framing on page 850. To show a view's Clip Lines, turn on the "CAD, Clip Lines" layer in that view. See Clipped Section Views on page 1091.   IN PLAN VIEW Cameras can be represented in plan view in either of two ways: l By symbols that indicate the camera’s position, field of view and focal point. l A selected camera symbol representing a cross section/elevation view indicates its front clip plane position, line of sight, and back clip plane position if there is one.   1097 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Displaying 3D Views l By callouts or, for cross section/elevation views, double callouts.   You can control the display of a camera’s focal point and line or sight, or its back clip plane indicator and line of sight, as well as specify a camera symbol or callout, in the camera’s specification dialog. See Plan Display Panel on page 1120.   2D camera symbols are located on the “Cameras” layer  by default; however, you can place a selected camera on any layer you wish. See Layers on page 176. By default, active camera symbols display regardless of whether the “Cameras” layer is on or off. If you prefer that their display be turned on or off with this layer, uncheck Always Display Active Cameras in the 3D View Defaults dialog. See 3D View Defaults Dialog on page 1083.   Active camera symbols and callouts use the Selection Line color set in the Preferences dialog. All other display attributes are derived from the “Cameras” layer. See Colors Panel on page 98.   By default, the symbols for Full Overviews, Cross Section/Elevation, and Back Clipped Cross Section views display on all floors, while those for Full Cameras, Floor Overviews, and Wall Elevations display only on the floor where they were created. You can, however, specify whether any camera’s symbol displays on all floors or not in its specification dialog. See Plan Display Panel on page 1120. You can also move a camera to a different floor by clicking the Up One Floor or Down One Floor button while the camera view is active. Note that this may affect what is seen in the view as well as its display in plan view. See Floor Up / Floor Down on page 737. CAMERA LABELS AND CALLOUTS Both saved and unsaved active cameras can have labels indicating the camera or callout number or its name. Camera labels are located on the “Cameras, Labels” layer and use the Text Style assigned to that layer. See Label Panel on page 700. Camera labels and callout numbers are numbered sequentially in each plan in the order they were created unless you rename them. l Camera labels always use the Camera Name. Saved cameras’ names can be specified in the Camera Specification dialogs. See Camera Panel on page 1117.   l Saved camera callout labels and additional text can also be specified. See Plan Display Panel on page 1120.   l If a cross section/elevation view using a callout is sent to layout, the layout page’s Label can display as the callout’s Text Below Line. See Layout Page Information on page 1358.   Camera symbols display a letter indicating the Rendering Technique it uses. This letter uses the same text style as the camera label. See Rendering Techniques on page 1150.   Camera symbols are an on-screen reference: they do not print unless Print Image is used and cannot be sent to layout except as an image. They are, however, included when CAD Detail from View is used and in views exported to .dxf/.dwg. In contrast, camera callouts are included when the view is sent to layout, printed, or exported and when CAD Detail from View is used.   1098 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Displaying 3D Views IN RENDERED VIEWS There are a number of factors that contribute to the appearance of rendered 3D views: l Select View> Color to toggle between color and grayscale in 3D views. See Color On/Off on page 191. l Select 3D> Rendering Technique to select a technique to apply to the current view. See Rendering Techniques on page 1150. l Select 3D> Lighting> Adjust Lights to open the Adjust Lights dialog and edit the light sources in the current plan. See Adjust Lights Dialog on page 1140.   l Select 3D> Toggle Patterns in a rendered view with Hand Drawn Lines on Top enabled to turn the display of material pattern lines on or off. See Rendering Technique Options on page 1153. Several other factors can contribute to the overall quality of a rendered 3D view. See Rendering Tips on page 1132.   IN VECTOR VIEWS There are also a number of factors that affect the appearance of 3D Vector Views:   l Select 3D> Toggle Patterns in a Technical Illustration, Watercolor, Hand Drawn Lines, or Vector View to turn on or off the display of the “Patterns, 3D Views” layer, which controls the display of material pattern lines. See Layers on page 176.   l Select View> Color to toggle between color and black and white to control the display line and fill colors.   l The line style, color, and weight of objects in Vector Views can be specified by layer or, for some objects, individually in their specification dialogs. See Line Style Panel on page 305.   l The line weight, color, and style of material patterns are set in the Define Material dialog. See Define Material Dialog on page 1066.   l Line weights display on screen when Show Line Weights is enabled. See Line Weights on page 1371.   3D BACKDROPS A backdrop is an image, usually of an exterior view, that displays in the background of 3D views to help place the model into a realistic setting and add a sense of perspective. If a backdrop is not specified, Chief Architect applies a background color. See 3D Backdrops on page 1204.   RENDERING TECHNIQUES Any 3D view can be assigned a Rendering Technique for a range of different purposes: from detail drawings to artistic presentation views. Select 3D> Rendering Techniques to access these tools. See Rendering Techniques on page 1150.   DELETE 3D SURFACE The individual surfaces that make up objects can be temporarily removed from any 3D view by selecting 3D> Delete Surface and then clicking on a surface. When the pointer is over a surface, that surface will become highlighted. Surfaces removed in one view are removed in all 3D views, but are not permanently removed from the model. Continue clicking surfaces to remove them, then select another tool when you are finished. 1099 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Navigating in Camera Views Surfaces in 3D views are composed of multiple triangles. Hold the Alt key while clicking to delete one triangular face at a time rather than all triangles forming a  surface. See Edge Smoothing on page 1134. To restore the most recently deleted surface, select 3D> Delete Surface or click the toolbar button. There are several ways to restore all deleted surfaces: l Select Build> Floor> Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings . l Exit the 3D view and reopen it. l Generate a new 3D view. Navigating in Camera Views Once a 3D view is created, there are many ways to manipulate the camera location and the direction of its line of site using the mouse, the keyboard, and the menus. The Move Camera with Mouse buttons are included on the toolbars  in 3D views by default; but, you can add the other tools your toolbars as well as customize their hotkeys. See Toolbars and Hotkeys on page 128.   When the keyboard, toolbar buttons, or menu commands are used to move or rotate a camera, the adjustments occur in regular increments. The size of these increments is specified in the Camera Specification dialog: l The Incremental Move Distance controls Panning movement and forward and backward Dolly movement. l The Incremental Rotate Angle controls Orbit movement, Tilt movement, and side to side Dolly movement. See  Camera Panel on page 1117. Each time you move the camera, the view is updated. If you are using either the toolbar or keyboard to move the camera,   you can hold down the Shift key, suppressing the redraw of the view until the Shift key is released and allowing you to move multiple increments more quickly. Press the Ctrl + Alt + S keys on your keyboard while in a camera view or overview to spin the view. To stop the spinning, press the Esc key. You can also move a camera to a different floor by clicking the Up One Floor or Down One Floor button while the camera view is active. Note that this may affect what is seen in the view as well as its display in plan view. See Floor Up / Floor Down on page 737. MOUSE SCROLL WHEEL AND TRACKPAD 3D views can be panned and zoomed when any tool is active using the mouse scroll wheel or trackpad gestures. See Trackpads on page 15. The program adjusts the speed of these actions depending on characteristics of the camera: l Zoom speed depends on how close the camera is to the object located behind the mouse pointer. When the target object is far from the camera, zooming is faster; as the camera gets closer to the target, zooming slows. l Panning speed depends on the length of the camera’s Line of Sight. In general, it is likely to be faster in an exterior view of a large model, slower in an interior view of a small room. See Creating Camera Views on page 1086. By default, panning and zooming adjusts the position and direction of the camera. It does not, however, adjust the distances at which surfaces are clipped. This means that if you zoom in closely on an object, some of its surfaces may be removed 1100 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Navigating in Camera Views from the view. One way to avoid this is to lower the camera’s Clip Surfaces Within value in the Camera Specification dialog. See Camera Panel on page 1117.   3DCONNEXION® 3D MICE 3Dconnexion®'s 3D mice can be used to navigate in all views - including camera views and overviews. In the Windows version of Chief Architect, preprogrammed view direction hotkeys are supported on devices with buttons for that purpose. MacOS™ does not provide mapping support to the view direction commands; however, you can create custom hotkeys for the commands in Chief Architect and then program your 3D mouse to use those hotkeys. See Hotkeys. In Orthographic views, navigation is centered around the camera’s focal point; for Perspective views, you can specify whether navigation is centered about the camera or its focal point in the Preferences dialog. See Render Panel on page 124. For best results when using a 3D mouse, uncheck Turn Automatically when Camera Bumps Off Walls is enabled. See 3D View Defaults Dialog on page 1083.   Rolling is not supported in Chief Architect, In addition, 3D mice cannot be used to move the mouse pointer. For details about using your 3D Connexion® mouse, refer to its documentation. GAMEPADS In the Windows version of Chief Architect, gamepads can be used to navigate in camera views, overviews, and elevation views. To use a gamepad in Chief Architect, Select Tools> Toolbars and Hotkeys> Gamepad Settings, then check Enable Gamepad in the Gamepad Settings dialog. You can also adjust the sensitivity and other aspects of thumbstick functionality when used in Chief Architect. See Gamepad Settings Dialog on page 140. Note: Gamepads cannot be used in Virtual Reality. See Virtual Reality on page 1110. You can also specify whether navigation is centered about the location of the camera or its focal point in the Preferences dialog. See Render Panel on page 124.   Each button on the gamepad is mapped to a command in Chief Architect. You can review and customize these commands in the Gamepad Settings dialog, as well. If you wish, you can create a custom hotkey for Toggle Gamepad Change Height in 3D. See Toolbar Customization Dialog on page 134.   You can add the Gamepad Settings and Toggle 3D Mouse and Gamepad Navigation buttons to your toolbars if you wish. See To add a button to a toolbar on page 132. MOVE CAMERA WITH MOUSE An active camera’s position can be edited using the mouse. Select 3D> Move Camera With Mouse to access the Move Camera with Mouse modes, select a mode, and use the left mouse button for the primary behavior or the right mouse button for the secondary behavior. With the exception of Mouse Orbit Camera, which is available in Orthographic Overviews, these tools are not available in Orthographic views. 1101 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Navigating in Camera Views Tool Primary Behavior (Left-Click) Alternate Behavior (Right-Click) Mouse-Orbit Camera Left-click and drag to rotate the camera around its focal point. The camera’s position and direction both change. You can temporarily activate Mouse-Tilt Camera by using the right mouse button while the Mouse-Pan Camera or Mouse-Tilt Camera mode is active. To continuously rotate the camera around its focal point, left-click in the 3D view, drag the mouse, and release the mouse button to “throw” the view. Click again in the view to stop it from rotating. Right-click and drag to tilt the camera instead of orbiting. In the Mac version of the software, you can temporarily activate Mouse-Orbit Camera while another tool is active: hold down the Option + Shift keys, then left-click and drag. When the mouse button and keys are released, the previously active tool will again be active. Mouse-Pan Camera Left-click and drag to move the camera in any direction. The camera’s position changes, but its direction does not. Right-click and drag to orbit instead of panning. Mouse-Dolly Camera Left-click and drag up and down to move  the camera forward and backward or drag left or right to rotate the camera side to side. Right-click and drag to tilt the camera instead of dollying. Mouse-Tilt Camera Left-click and drag in any direction to tilt the camera, changing its view direction but not its position. You can temporarily activate Mouse-Tilt Camera by using the right mouse button while the Mouse-Orbit Camera or Mouse-Dolly Camera mode is active. Right-click to orbit instead of tilting. 3D Center Camera on Point Lets you focus the camera at a particular point in the scene. This changes the camera’s direction and focal point, but not its position. To use this tool, activate it and then click on any object in the scene. N/A 1102 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Navigating in Camera Views Tool Primary Behavior (Left-Click) Alternate Behavior (Right-Click) 3D Focus on Object Lets you focus on a specific object by changing the camera’s position, direction, focal point, and the length of its line of sight. To use this tool, activate it and then click on an object in the scene. Alternatively, select an object in the view and click the Focus on Selected edit button. N/A MOVE CAMERA WITH KEYBOARD An active camera’s position can be changed using the Arrow keys on your keyboard. Select 3D> Move Camera with Keyboard to access the Move Camera with Keyboard modes. With the exception of Mouse Orbit Camera, which is available in Orthographic Overviews, these modes are not available in Orthographic views. These modes use the Incremental Move Distance and Incremental Rotate Angle set in the active 3D view’s Camera Specification dialog. l Keyboard-Orbit Camera lets you use the keyboard to rotate the camera around the focal point. The camera’s position and direction both change. l Keyboard-Pan Camera lets you move the camera up, down, right, and left using the keyboard. The camera’s position changes, but its direction does not. l Keyboard-Dolly Camera lets you move the camera forward and back using the Up and Down Arrow keys, and rotate side to side using the Left and Right keys. l Keyboard-Tilt Camera lets you use the Arrow keys to tilt the camera up, down, or side to side to change the focal point. The camera’s direction changes, but its position does not. Although the Arrow keys are set to move active cameras by default, you can create custom hotkeys for these commands if you prefer. See Hotkeys on page 137. MOVE CAMERA TOOLS Select 3D> Move Camera in a 3D view to access these tools. These tools change the active camera’s position but not its direction, and are not available in Orthographic views. The Move Camera Forward and Move Camera Back tools allow you to "walk" up and down stairs when Camera Bumps Off Walls is checked. See 3D View Defaults Dialog on page 1083. These tools use the Incremental Move Distance set in the active 3D view’s Camera Specification dialog. Description Move Camera Forward moves the camera and its focal point forward. Move Camera Back moves the camera and the focal point back. 1103 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Navigating in Camera Views Description Move Camera Left moves the camera and the focal point to the left in a line perpendicular to the line of sight. Move Camera Right moves the camera and the focal point to the right in a line perpendicular to the line of sight. Move Camera Up moves the camera and the focal point up. Move Camera Down moves the camera and the focal point down. ORBIT CAMERA TOOLS Select 3D> Orbit Camera in a 3D view to access these tools. Orbiting the camera rotates it about the focal point using the Incremental Rotate Angle set in the active view’s Camera Specification dialog. These tools are not available in Cross Section/Elevation, Back Clipped Cross Section, or Wall Elevation Defaults views. Description Move Camera In moves the camera closer to the focal point along the line of sight. The camera cannot move past the focal point using this tool. Move Camera Out moves the camera away from the focal point along the line of sight. Orbit Camera Upward rotates the camera up about the focal point. The camera cannot rotate past a vertical line looking straight down on the focal point. Orbit Camera Downward rotates the camera down about the focal point. The camera cannot rotate past a vertical line looking straight up at the focal point. Orbit Camera Left rotates the camera to the left about the focal point. Orbit Camera Right rotates the camera to the right about the focal point. TILT CAMERA TOOLS Select 3D> Tilt Camera to access these tools. Tilting keeps the camera in one place and pivots the camera about its vertical or horizontal axis. This movement uses the Incremental Rotate Angle set in the active view’s Camera Specification dialog and is similar to tilting your head up and down or turning it side-to-side. These tools are not available in  Orthographic views.   1104 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing 3D Views Description Tilt Camera Upward tilts the camera up while keeping it in the same location. The camera cannot tilt beyond the vertical position. Tilt Camera Downward tilts the camera down while keeping it in the same location. The camera cannot tilt beyond the vertical position. Turn Camera Left turns the camera to the left while staying in the same location. Turn Camera Right turns the camera to the right while staying in the same location. VIEW DIRECTION TOOLS The View Direction Tools allow you to view the model from a specific direction in a camera view or overview. While one of these views is active, select 3D> View Direction to access these tools.   Description Front View creates a front view of the model. Back View creates a back view of the model. Top View creates a top view of the model. Bottom View creates a bottom view of the model. Left Side View create a left side view of the model. Right Side View create a right side view of the model. Restore Original View restores the original view position. Editing 3D Views In addition to its position and direction, there are other ways to modify a 3D view. If you make changes to an open camera view that was saved previously, you will be prompted to resave the view when you close it. 1105 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing 3D Views IN THE SPECIFICATION DIALOG You can  make adjustments to a camera in its specification dialog. This dialog is particularly helpful for making fine adjustments to the camera’s position, appearance, and other attributes such as its Rendering Technique, layer set, and backdrop image. See Camera Specification Dialogs on page 1116 and Cross Section/Elevation Specification Dialogs on page 1124. Tile a 3D view and plan view and use the camera movement tools to see how they affect the camera. See Tiling Views on page 150. USING THE EDIT TOOLS A camera symbol or symbols selected in plan view can be edited in a variety of ways using the buttons on the Edit Toolbar. See The Edit Toolbar on page 130. USING THE EDIT HANDLES Return to plan view without closing the 3D view. See Working in Multiple Views on page 150.   Using the Select Objects tool, select the camera object. When a camera symbol is selected, it displays six edit handles. l Drag the Rotate Label handle or smaller Move Label handle to rotate or move the camera label.   l Drag the Line of Sight handle to change the camera angle without moving the focal point. l Drag the Move handle to relocate the camera while maintaining its relative angle. l Drag the Focal Point handle to reposition the focal point and change the line of sight without moving the camera. l Drag the Rotate handle to rotate the camera’s line of sight about its center. The 3D view corresponding to the camera symbol reflects changes made to the symbol in plan view. Note: Camera callouts do not display labels, so they do not have label edit handles. When a cross section/elevation camera is selected, it displays seven edit handles, three of which are unique to cross section/elevations.   1106 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Editing 3D Views l Drag either of the two Resize Clip Plane handles to adjust the length of the clip plane line, which is perpendicular to the camera’s line of sight. Left-click to resize the line concentrically and maintain the camera’s position; right-click to move the selected end as well as the camera. This will affect what can be seen in the view if Clip to Sides is checked. See Camera Panel on page 1125.   l Drag the Move Clip Plane handle to move the camera and its clip plane parallel to its line of sight.   l If a stepped cutting plane is created, additional edit handles are available. See Stepped Cutting Planes on page 1092.   Multiple camera symbols can be selected; however, their editing options are limited to being moved, rotated, and deleted. You can also create revision clouds around group-selected camera symbols. USING THE CONTEXTUAL MENU In a 3D view, right-click in an empty space in which the backdrop or background color displays to access the contextual menu. See Contextual Menus on page 19. l In Vector Views, the options are a selection of commonly used commands from the File, Edit, Tools and Window menus.   l In the other Rendering Techniques, the options are a selection of tools and toggles specific to the current view. UP ONE FLOOR/DOWN ONE FLOOR You can move a camera to a different floor. While the camera view is active, select Tools> Floor/Reference Display> Up One Floor  or Down One Floor. Note that this may affect what is seen in the view as well as its display in plan view. See In Plan View on page 1097. The position and movement of a camera is affected by its location within the model. When the camera is outside a building, its height is relative to the terrain and follows the terrain as it is moved. When inside a building, the camera height is relative to the floor of the room it is drawn in. If the camera is on an upper floor and you move the camera outside the building, the camera remains at the same height relative to the floor it was created on. ZOOMING The Zoom Tools are available in all 3D views. See Zoom Tools on page 153.   Selecting Window> Zoom In , Zoom Out or Fill Window does not change the camera’s location or field of view. Instead, the extents of the view are expanded or cropped. If you wish, you can instead set the Zoom tools to change the Field of View when used in a 3D view. See Render Panel on page 124.   1107 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Cross Section Slider FIELD OF VIEW The Field of View refers to a camera’s field of vision. A wider field of view makes the focal point appear further away, as more of the image is included in the same view window. In plan view, the angled lines of a camera symbol indicate its field of view. A camera’s field of view can be adjusted in the Camera Specification dialog. See Camera Panel on page 1117. Cross Section Slider Select 3D> Camera View Options> Cross Section Slider when a camera view or overview is active to open the Cross Section Slider dialog. Note: The Cross Section Slider is not available when the Vector View Rendering Technique is used. See Rendering Techniques on page 1150. To use the Cross Section Slider 1. Check the box beside a cross section cutting plane to select it and make its Position slider and text box active. 2. Move the Position slider to adjust the position of the cutting plane. l The cutting plane Position is measured from the edge of the model that is cut first by the selected cutting plane. l Position the Cutting Plane with accuracy using the text field to the right of the slider. 3. Repeat steps 1-3 to use additional cutting planes if you wish. 4. Click OK to close the dialog. If the active camera is saved, its Cross Section Slider settings will also be retained. See Saving 3D Views on page 1115. 1108 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Working in 3D Working in 3D A variety of tools are available in 3D views that allow you to edit your 3D model as well as annotate it. ANNOTATING CROSS SECTION/ELEVATION VIEWS The Text, CAD, and a selection of Dimension tools are available in cross section/elevation views, allowing you to add technical information, call attention to details, and other tasks in these views. See Detailing Cross Section/Elevation Views on page 1094.   The Auto Detail tool automatically creates CAD objects for commonly detailed components of cross section views. See Auto Detail on page 1094. To add annotation to any other 3D Vector View, first create a line-drawn copy of the view using the CAD Detail from View tool. See CAD Detail from View on page 338.   CREATING OBJECTS IN 3D VIEWS You can place windows, doors, cabinets, electrical objects, corner trim, and most library objects directly into 3D views. To do this, select the appropriate tool and click in the 3D view. You can then edit the object’s size and placement.   When created in 3D, most objects must be placed against a wall, on a floor platform, or within the Terrain Perimeter.   You can also click and drag to draw some CAD-based objects such as  custom countertops, roof planes,  terrain features and roads in camera views and overviews.   The Build Framing and Build Roof dialogs are also accessible in 3D views, although the manual Framing Tools and Roof Tools are not.   SELECTING AND EDITING OBJECTS IN 3D VIEWS Most objects can be selected and edited in 3D views. Select Edit> Select Objects and click on the surface of an object to select it. Once selected, objects can be edited using their edit handles, buttons on the Edit Toolbar, and the object’s specification dialog. See Editing Objects on page 205.   When you select an object, edit handles and a handle surface display. The handle surface is a rectangle around the perimeter of the object that indicates the overall height and width of the selected surface. The edit handles that display depend on the type of object selected. Walls, for example, display two resize edit handles when selected while the top of a cabinet displays ten handles, allowing you to move, resize and reshape it.   Note: If the wall height of the Exterior Room is adjusted in a 3D view, the default Floor or Ceiling Height of the entire floor is changed. See Floor and Room Defaults on page 413. All moving or resizing is in the plane of the handle surface. You cannot  move an object directly towards or away from the camera, for example, because that surface plane cannot be seen in the view.   By default, object movement is restricted to 1 inch (10 mm) increments, but this restriction can be set to custom increments in the Plan Defaults dialog and toggled off and on by selecting Edit> Snap Settings> Grid Snaps . See Grid Snaps on page 163.   1109 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Virtual Reality Unrestricted positioning can also be enabled by holding down the Ctrl key while moving or resizing an object. See Unrestricted Movement on page 244.   Temporary dimension lines display when many objects are selected to help you resize the object and determine its height. These are sometimes easier to see when the color is toggled off. See Temporary Dimensions on page 473. Because cross section/elevation views are orthogonal and display objects at their actual dimensions, they are sometimes more suitable for editing objects than camera views or overviews. See Cross Section/Elevation Views on page 1089.   When several 3D views are open, changes made in the plan automatically rebuild the model in all views.  Because of this, it is typically faster to make changes to your plan with as few windows open as possible.   EDITING MATERIALS IN 3D VIEWS Select 3D> Materials> Adjust Material Definition, then click on a surface in the 3D view to open the Define Material dialog for that material. See Adjust Material Definition on page 1058.   Select 3D> Material Painter to apply materials to surfaces in the view using the Material Painter Tools. See Material Painter Tools on page 1052.   Select 3D> Material Painter> Material Eyedropper to apply the material on a surface in the view to other surfaces in the view. See Material Eyedropper on page 1053.   CROSS SECTION LINES Cross Section Lines are created in cross section views to represent any objects split by the cross section line of the camera. They are placed on the “Cross Section Lines” layer, which is locked by default, and they get deleted and replaced whenever the view is redrawn.   When a dimension is drawn to locate an object split by a camera’s section line, it actually locates Cross Section Lines. So that dimensions can be retained when Cross Section Lines are regenerated, a Point Marker is automatically created where a dimension meets a Cross Section Line and the dimension locates it instead of the Cross Section Line. See Point Markers and Dimensions on page 530.   Cross Section Lines will print when their layer is turned on; however, they are not included when the view is sent to layout. The Point Markers created when dimensions locate Cross Section Lines, however, will both print and display in views sent to layout. See Layout on page 1333.   The “Cross Section Lines” layer can be unlocked, allowing Cross Section Lines to be selected and edited. Additional CAD objects can also be placed on this layer when it is unlocked, as well; however, when the view is redrawn, all CAD objects on this layer will be deleted and replaced with a fresh set of Cross Section Lines.   REBUILD 3D As changes are made to your plan, a 3D view automatically updates to reflect any changes visible in the view. If you find that a view is not updating as expected, select 3D> Rebuild 3D to rebuild the entire 3D model.   Virtual Reality The Virtual Reality option  is available in the Windows version of Chief Architect and allows you to view a plan in 3D using a VR headset. To view a model in VR, select 3D> Virtual Reality while a Perspective camera view or overview is active. 1110 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Virtual Reality SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS The following virtual reality headset models are supported for use in Chief Architect:   l Oculus: Rift, Rift S, Quest (using Link Cable), Quest 2 (using Link Cable)   l HTC: Vive, Vive Pro, Vive Pro 2, Vive Cosmos, Vive Cosmos Elite l Valve Index   l Microsoft Mixed Reality   In order to run Virtual Reality in Chief Architect, your computer should meet not only the program’s system requirements but also the system recommendations provided by your VR headset manufacturer.   In addition, you must first install Steam, a game and software distribution program available at store.steampowered.com.   Once it has been installed, you must also run the SteamVR Setup so that your headset runs through the Steam software. The setup will walk you through setting up the VR sensors in a clear area, free from obstructions, where you can walk and move around.   Virtual Reality can only be activated while viewing an active Perspective View using either the Standard or Physically Based Rendering Technique. If Hand Drawn Lines on Top or GPU Ray Tracing is in use in the current view, it will be ignored in VR. See Rendering Techniques on page 1150.   SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS Virtual Reality should only be run in a space free of obstructions that could cause injury.   To avoid slow performance that could result in motion sickness, turn off any other CPU and GPU intensive applications on your system before launching Virtual Reality.   In addition, these settings are recommended in the current camera view prior to launching Virtual Reality:   l Turn Reflections off.   l Turn on a minimal number of lights and shadows. See Lighting on page 1135 and Camera Specification Dialogs on page 1116.   Just like in a Chief Architect camera view, it is possible to navigate through objects in the model when in Virtual Reality, like walls and furniture. To avoid disorientation or motion sickness, you should avoid doing so.   To avoid motion sickness while using virtual reality, gamepad style controllers are not supported. You can, however, walk within the area designated during your Steam VR Setup. To navigate to different  locations in the model, you can also teleport as well as switch between Room View and Overview modes.   ROOM VIEW AND OVERVIEW MODES Chief Architect has two Virtual Reality modes:   l In a Room View, you can navigate a model by looking around, walking, and teleporting. Room View is active when you enter VR from a Perspective Camera view.   l In an Overview you can move and rotate the model in order to examine its exterior. Overview mode is active when you enter VR from a Perspective Overview.   Note: For best results, use the Full Camera tool for Room Views rather than Floor Camera. See 3D View Tools on page 1084. 1111 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Virtual Reality In both modes, your initial position and orientation in Virtual Reality are based on the position and angle of the camera. As you turn your head or walk, the view seen in the VR headset will update to reflect your movements. The original camera in Chief Architect will be unaffected, however.   Once you enter Virtual Reality, you can switch between the two modes:   l To transition from Room View to Overview, point either VR controller straight up until the Teleport Line changes to a short gray line. Press and hold the Transition button on your VR controller until the line changes entirely to the Mode Transition Color and the controller vibrates, then release the button. See Virtual Reality Dialog on page 1113, below.   l To transition from Overview to Room View, point either VR controller toward a valid surface on the model. Press and hold the Transition button until the line changes entirely to the Mode Transition Color and the controller vibrates, then release the button.   NAVIGATING ROOM VIEWS In a Room View, you can explore a model by looking around, walking in your predefined VR space, and teleporting.   To teleport to other locations within the model, press and hold the Trigger on your VR controller while aiming at a suitably flat surface. A Teleport Marker will appear at the location that you point at, and releasing the Trigger will teleport you to that location.   In Room View, the VR controller projects a Teleport Line that indicates whether a targeted surface is a valid location to teleport to. A valid surface is defined as any surface that has less than 45° pitch, however if a valid surface exists less than 12” below an invalid target location, it will show as valid and the teleport marker will be placed next to the targeted surface. This allows you to easily teleport next to an otherwise invalid surface, such as a wall or cabinet.   To cancel a teleport action, aim the Teleport Line at an invalid location. When the line changes color and the Teleport Marker disappears, release the Trigger.   In Room View, a number of navigation actions can be completed using your VR controller. These controls are the same on both right and left controllers, but specific functions differ slightly depending on the VR controller used.   Command HTC Vive/Microsoft Oculus Rift Teleport Trigger Undo Trackpad Left Thumbstick Left + Click Redo Trackpad Right Thumbstick Right + Click Reset Menu Button Thumbstick Up + Click Transition Trackpad Down X or A Button Update Lighting Trackpad Upper Click Y or B Button NAVIGATING OVERVIEWS In Overview mode, you can examine and model by moving and rotating it in front of you as if holding a scaled version of the model.   In this mode, the Grip buttons on your VR controller allow you to “grab” and rotate the model. Using the Grip buttons on both VR controllers simultaneously gives a more natural rotation, as if grabbing and rotating the entire model.   Pressing and holding the Trigger allows you to drag the model in any direction: up, down, left, right, towards you, and away from you.   Pressing the Triggers while holding the Grips on both controllers simultaneously allows you to zoom in and out. Moving your hands apart will zoom in to the model, moving them closer together will zoom out.   1112 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Virtual Reality In Overview mode, a number of actions can be completed using your VR controller. These controls are the same on both right and left controllers, but specific functions differ slightly depending on the VR controller used.   Command HTC Vive/Microsoft Oculus Rift Rotate Grip Drag Trigger Zoom Grip + Trigger Undo Trackpad Left Thumbstick Left + Click Redo Trackpad Right Thumbstick Right + Click Reset Menu Button Thumbstick Click Transition Trackpad Down X or A Button Update Lighting Trackpad Upper Click VIRTUAL REALITY DIALOG To view a model in VR, select 3D> Virtual Reality while a Perspective Camera view or Overview is active. The Virtual Reality dialog will open. Note: Neither Hand Drawn Lines on Top nor GPU Ray Tracing are supported in VR. VR Status The current Virtual Reality Status is stated at the top of the dialog, along with information about graphics card or chipset being used on the computer.   1113 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Virtual Reality l Click the Toggle Virtual Reality button to turn Virtual Reality on or off.   OpenGL Information Information about your graphics card is displayed here for reference. Visit chiefarchitect.com for information about system requirements.   Options l Validity of a surface is indicated by the color of the teleport line. The Valid Teleport Line and Invalid Teleport Line Colors can be set here.   l The teleport line will display the Mode Transition Color when switching between Room View and Overview Modes. This color can also be set here.   l When Virtual Reality is active, the program window shows what the user sees in the VR headset. By default, both eyes’ views are shown in a split screen. If you would prefer to see only the left eye’s view, uncheck Display Both Eyes On Screen in the Virtual Reality dialog.   l When Update Lighting on Teleport is checked, the lighting in the model will update when you teleport more than 10 feet (3 m) to ensure that your destination has lighting. Uncheck this is you prefer to only update lighting manually using the controller.   Room View Specify how the teleport feature works in Room View Mode.   l Use Curved Teleport Line changes the teleport line from a straight line to a curved arc. This is checked by default for Room Views.   l The Teleport Reference Height setting determines how the camera height is calculated when the teleport feature is used.   l When Floor Under Marker is selected, the new camera position will calculate its height based on the floor surface, or the floor directly beneath where the teleport marker lands if locating a raised surface such as a countertop or table. This may result in being teleported inside furniture or other objects.   l When Surface at Marker is selected, the new camera location will determine its height from the surface where the marker landed. This will place the camera on top of objects such as furniture and may result in the view being in or above the ceiling.   Overview Specify how the teleport feature works in Overview Mode.   l Use Curved Teleport Line changes the teleport line from a straight line to a curved arc. This is unchecked by default for Overviews.   l Lock X-Axis Rotation prevents the model from being tilted vertically.   l Lock Y-Axis Rotation prevents the model from being rolled left to right.   l Lock Z-Axis Rotation prevents the model from being spun horizontally.   When Virtual Reality is active, neither the camera nor the model can be edited in any way. If you wish to make modifications, you must Toggle Virtual Reality off in the Virtual Reality dialog, make the necessary adjustments, and then enter Virtual Reality again.   1114 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Saving and Printing 3D Views Saving and Printing 3D Views 3D camera views, overviews, and cross section/elevation views can be saved with the plan in which they are created, exported and saved as image files, as well as sent to layout and printed. SAVING 3D VIEWS Select Tools> Active View> Save Active View to save the current camera view in the plan. You can also save a camera view by checking the Saved box in the Camera Specification dialog. See Camera Specification Dialogs on page 1116.   Saved cameras can be closed and re-opened for later use, and retain their Cross Section Slider, Sunlight, Shadows, and Rendering Technique settings. See Cross Section Slider on page 1108, Adjust Sunlight Dialog on page 1148, Shadows on page 1133, and Rendering Techniques on page 1150. In addition, if  CAD or Text objects are drawn in a cross section/elevation view, you will be prompted to save the view when you close it. Any CAD or Text objects added to a cross section/elevation view are saved with the view as part of the plan file.   Once a 3D view is saved, it is listed in the Project Browser and can be named. The name displays in its label with the camera symbol in plan view and in its view window tab. Camera names must be unique. See Project Browser on page 58.   ACTIVATING SAVED VIEWS There are several ways to open a saved 3D view:   l Select the camera symbol in plan view and click the Open View edit button. l Right-click on the camera symbol in plan view and select Open View from the contextual menu.   l Double-click the camera symbol using the Select Objects tool. l Double-click on the saved camera view's name in the Project Browser or right-click on it and select Open View from the contextual menu.   Unsaved cameras that are open in another view window can also be activated using the Open View edit button.   If you open a saved camera view and then modify its location or direction using any of the tools available in that view, the program will confirm whether you want to re-save the camera using these new settings when you close it. See Navigating in Camera Views on page 1100.   CAD DETAIL FROM VIEW In any 3D view using the Vector View rendering technique, you can select CAD> CAD Detail From View to generate an editable line drawing of the view in a CAD Detail window. CAD Details created from a view do not update when the model is changed. See CAD Detail from View on page 338.   EXPORTING 3D VIEWS All 3D views can be exported and saved as .bmp, .jpg, .png, or .tif files. Select File> Export> Picture to save the current screen image as an image file. See To export a picture on page 1191. The Export 360 Panorama tool creates a spherical panoramic image file. See Export 360 Panorama on page 1238.   1115 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Camera Specification Dialogs In addition, Vector Views can be exported and saved as .emf files. See Metafiles on page 1195.   Once saved, a picture can be opened and converted into many other formats using a graphics program. Picture files can be sent to layout or used in word processing, desktop publishing, and web development programs to create advertisements, brochures, etc. PLAN BACKUP When transferring a plan to another computer or to another user, it is helpful to include all the Images, Textures, and Backdrops used in the plan so that rendered views are complete. The Backup Entire Plan tool allows you to do so. See Backup Entire Plan or Layout on page 55.   PRINTING 3D VIEWS Since all 3D views other than Vector Views are created using pixels instead of lines, File> Print> Print Image must be used when printing. Print Image is a special Chief Architect function that prints the screen in picture format. The entire view prints, including images such as plants and textures. 3D views can also be sent to layout and then printed as part of your construction documents.   Select File> Send to Layout to send the current view to layout. See Sending Views to Layout on page 1338. Select a saved, inactive camera symbol in plan view and click the Send Camera’s View to Layout edit button to send the view to layout.   For high quality renderings, consider using ray tracing. See CPU Ray Tracing on page 1167. CLOSING 3D VIEWS Although you can have any number of 3D views open at a time, to conserve resources on your computer it is a good idea to close views when you no longer need them. There are a number of different ways to do this. See Closing Views and Files on page 155. Camera Specification Dialogs The Camera Specification dialog can be accessed in plan view by selecting one or more camera symbols and clicking the Open Object edit button. See In Plan View on page 1097. This dialog can also be accessed while a camera view or overview is active by selecting Tools> Active View> Edit Active View. The settings in this dialog may vary somewhat depending on the tool used to create the selected view. This tool name is indicated in the dialog’s title bar: the specification dialog for a Full Camera , for example, is named Full Camera Specification. See 3D View Tools on page 1084. The Camera Specification dialog has the following panels: The settings in this dialog are also found in the Camera Defaults dialogs for each of the various camera tools. See Camera Defaults Dialogs on page 1081. 1116 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Camera Specification Dialogs CAMERA PANEL The CAMERA panel is also found in the Walkthrough Path Specification and Defaults dialogs. See Walkthrough Path Specification Dialog on page 1210. Some settings only affect some types of views. Depending on the type of camera view selected, not all the settings may be available.   General l Specify a Name for the camera that displays in its label in plan view and in the Project Browser. Names must be unique. See Project Browser on page 58. l Check Saved to save this view with the plan. As soon as you type anything in the text field, this box becomes checked. If you click OK while this box is checked, it will become checked permanently. Saved cameras are listed in the Project Browser. 1117 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Camera Specification Dialogs l Uncheck Show Color to toggle the display off in the current view. See Color On/Off on page 191. l Check Show Watermark to turn on the display of the default watermark. See Watermarks on page 1377. Rendering l Choose the selected camera or walkthrough path’s Rendering Technique from the drop-down list. o Click the Define button to open the Rendering Technique Options dialog. Any changes made in that dialog only affect the selected view or path. See Rendering Techniques on page 1150.   l Check Show Shadows to turn on shadows in the selected camera view. When unchecked, shadows are not generated. See Shadows on page 1133. o Check Ray Casted Sun Shadows for higher quality shadows cast by sunlight. Ray Casted Sun Shadows take longer to generate than regular shadows and only refresh when the camera is not moving.   Note: Ray Casted Sun Shadows are not used in Virtual Reality. See Virtual Reality on page 1110. l Check Reflections to turn on reflections in the selected camera view. When unchecked, reflections are not generated. See Reflections on page 1133.   l Light Bloom occurs around areas of intense illumination and looks as though the light is ‘bleeding’ beyond the edges of the light source. It adds realism to the view but can take longer to render. Only affects Standard, Duotone, and Watercolor renderings. See Rendering Techniques on page 1150.   l Check Edge Smoothing When Idle to apply high quality edge smoothing to edge and pattern lines when the selected camera is not in motion. See Edge Smoothing on page 1134. l Select the amount of Ambient Occlusion in the view using the slider bar or text field. Ambient Occlusion allows variation in the strength of the ambient light. It is more realistic than uniform ambient light, but can take longer to render. Only affects Standard, Duotone, Watercolor, and Physically Based renderings. See Ambient Lighting and Occlusion on page 1137. Depth of Field These settings allow you to add blur to objects that are not in focus in the current Standard, Vector View, Physically Based, Glass House, or Technical Illustration rendering.   l Check Depth of Field Enabled to enable the settings below and add blur to out-of-focus objects. l Set the F-Stop using the scroll bar or text field. A low value increases blur while a high value reduces blur. l Specify the Focus Distance, which is the distance from the camera at which objects are in focus and no blur occurs. Objects closer to the camera than this distance are subject to blur, as are those further away from the camera. Lighting These settings control which and how many light sources are used in the current view. See Light Sets on page 1139.   l When Use Sunlight is checked, the sun light source is on in the current view. Uncheck this box to toggle sunlight off. l Click the Adjust Sunlight button to open the Adjust Sunlight dialog. Not available in the Camera Defaults or Walkthrough Path Defaults dialogs. See Sunlight and Moonlight on page 1136. 1118 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Camera Specification Dialogs l Select Automatic, then specify the Maximum Number of lights that can be used in the current camera view. l Select Light Set, then choose a set from the drop-down list. Click the Adjust Lights button to view and modify the selected Light Set’s properties. See Adjust Lights Dialog on page 1140.   Options l The Field of View defines the camera’s field of vision in angular degrees. See Field of View on page 1108. l Clip Surfaces Within - Objects located within this distance from the camera do not display in the view. Decrease this value to display objects located close to the camera; increase it to improve the appearance of some surfaces in Overview cameras with very large extents. l Uncheck Show Lower Floors to show only the current floor in the selected Floor Overview. When checked, the current floor plus any floors beneath it are included in the view. Only available for Floor Overview. See Floor Overview on page 1087.   l Check Hide Camera-Facing Exterior Walls to suppress the display of any exterior walls that face the camera. Interior walls set as Attic walls are also suppressed. This setting only has an effect when the selected camera’s position is on the exterior of a structure and also has an associated toggle. See Hide Camera-Facing Exterior Walls on page 1135. l Check Extend Terrain to Horizon to create a virtual extension of the Terrain Perimeter in camera views that appears to extend to the horizon. This setting only has an effect if a Terrain Perimeter is present. See Terrain Perimeter on page 1244. POSITIONING PANEL Only the X and Y Position settings are available in the Cross Section/Elevation Specification dialog. See Cross Section/Elevation Specification Dialogs on page 1124. Position These settings determine the position and orientation of the camera. Only the Height Above Floor and Tilt Angle are available in the Camera Defaults dialogs. See Navigating in Camera Views on page 1100.   l The Height Above Floor defines the height that the camera is above the floor level for the current floor. See Camera Height on page 1087.   1119 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Camera Specification Dialogs l The Tilt Angle determines the vertical angle that the camera is tilted. The camera maintains its focal point and position in plan view, but if the camera is tilted, the focal point is above or below the current camera height. l Specify the selected camera’s Camera Angle. This is an absolute value: an angle of 0° points the camera toward the left in plan view.   l Specify the X Position and Y Position for the selected camera. These are absolute coordinates. Specifying zero for both places the camera at the plan’s origin point (0,0).   Navigation These settings control how the camera is affected when you navigate using the mouse. See Move Camera with Mouse on page 1101.   l The Incremental Move Distance controls how far the camera moves each time you Pan in any direction or Dolly forwards or backward using the keyboard, toolbar buttons, or menu. For interior views a small number is good, but for exterior you may want a larger increment.   l The Incremental Rotate Angle defines how many degrees the camera rotates each time you Tilt, Orbit, or Dolly side to side using the keyboard, toolbar buttons, or menu. A setting of 90° would make one full rotation in four moves.   BELOW GRADE PANEL The settings on the BELOW GRADE panel control the appearance of objects positioned below grade. These settings only affect Vector Views and are also found in the Cross Section/Elevation Specification dialog. See Below Grade Panel on page 1127.   SELECTED DEFAULTS PANEL The settings on the SELECTED DEFAULTS panel control which Saved Defaults and layer settings are used in the view. These settings are also found in the Active Defaults dialog. See Active Defaults Dialog on page 82.   PLAN DISPLAY PANEL The settings on the PLAN DISPLAY panel control the appearance of the selected camera's symbol in plan view. See In Plan View on page 1097.   1120 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Camera Specification Dialogs Display on All Floors   Check this box to display the selected camera’s symbol on all floors. When unchecked, it only displays on the floor where the camera was created. See Creating Camera Views on page 1086.   Display as Callout   Check this box to use a callout symbol to represent the selected camera and enable the settings that follow:   l Specify the Callout Label, which is the text that displays inside the callout circle. If no Text Below Line is specified, the Callout Label is centered in the callout.   l Specify the Text Below Line for a bottom row of text, if desired. Check Automatic to populate the Text Below Line with the camera’s Name, as specified on the Camera Panel on page 1117. See Camera Labels and Callouts on page 1098.   l To specify the Callout Size, uncheck Automatic and then type in the text field. When Automatic is checked, the size is based on the length of the Callout Label and the size of the current Text Style.   l Specify the appearance of the Callout Arrow. Choose None, a Small arrow, or a Large arrow. Uncheck Filled if you do not want a solid filled arrow.   Note: A camera callout arrow will only display its solid fill when the camera view is not open. When the view is open, the arrow will display as transparent. Standard Options   These settings allow you to specify the appearance of the selected camera’s standard symbol. Most of these options are disabled when Display As Callout is unchecked, above.   1121 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Camera Specification Dialogs l The Camera Symbol Size is measured in plan inches (mm).   o Check Show Camera Focal Point to display the camera’s focal point in plan view. When unchecked, the camera’s line of sight and focal point are hidden until the camera is selected.   o Check Show Field of View Indicators to display the camera’s field of view indicators in plan view.   l You can also change the FOV Indicator Length, which is measured in plan inches (mm).   BACKDROP PANEL The settings on the Backdrop panel allow you to specify a backdrop image or color to display behind your model in the selected 3D view. See 3D Backdrops on page 1204.   The BACKDROP panel is also found in the Walkthrough Path Specification and Defaults dialogs. See Walkthrough Path Specification Dialog on page 1210. Specify Backdrop A preview of the selected backdrop image is shown here. A backdrop cannot be selected or removed when Use Generated 1122 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Camera Specification Dialogs Sky is checked, below.   l Backdrop Name - The selected backdrop image’s name displays for reference.   l Click Select Backdrop to choose a backdrop image from the library. See Select Library Object Dialog on page 974.   l Click Remove Backdrop to use a solid color instead of a backdrop image in all 3D views, then specify the color below.   Use Generated Sky Not available for Orthographic Overviews or Cross Section/Elevation views, and is not used in CPU Ray Tracing.   l Check Use Generated Sky to use a sky backdrop that simulates different times of day based on the position of the Generic Sun. When checked, Spherical Panoramic Backdrop will also be checked and a preview of the Generated Sky will display in the current view behind the dialog, and will update as changes are made to the settings below.   l Specify the Starlight Intensity, which is how bright the stars appear in the sky.   l Specify the Star Density, which controls how close stars are to one another.   l Specify the Moon Luminance, which is how much light the moon contributes to the scene.   l Specify the Moon Intensity, which is how bright the moon appears in the sky.   l Specify the Moon Tilt, which is the direction that the moon's light shines.   l Specify the Moon Direction, which describes the position of the moon in the sky.   l Specify the Moon Angular Radius, which controls the size of the moon.   l Specify the Sun Angular Radius, which controls the size of the sun.   l Click the Reset button to reset all Generated Sky settings to the system defaults. Spherical Panoramic Backdrop These settings are only available when a Backdrop image is selected, and are not available for Orthographic Overviews or Cross Section/Elevation views. When User Generated Sky is checked, above, these settings cannot be edited.   l Check Spherical Panoramic Backdrop to place the selected backdrop onto a sphere that surrounds the model in the current view. This box is checked automatically when Use Generated Sky is checked, above.   l Horizontal Tile - Specify how many times to tile the selected backdrop image side by side.   l Vertical Tile -  Specify how many times to stack the selected backdrop image one above the other.   l Specify the Horizontal Span, which is how much of the sphere the backdrop is applied to. A Span of 360° wraps the entire sphere.   l Specify the Horizontal Offset, in degrees, to shift the backdrop image or tiled images in a clockwise direction.   l Specify the Vertical Max, which is the height of the bottom of the backdrop, measured relative to the top of the sphere.   l Specify the Vertical Min, which is the height of the bottom of the backdrop, measured relative to the bottom of the sphere.   l The Eye Level setting controls the vertical position of the camera within the sphere. A value of 0 positions the camera at the bottom of the sphere while a value of 1 positions it at the top. The default value is 0.5., which centers the camera inside the sphere.   1123 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Cross Section/Elevation Specification Dialogs Background Color l Click the Color bar to select the Background Color that displays when a backdrop image is not being used. See Color Chooser/Select Color Dialog on page 203.   The Background Color for plan views and CAD Details is set in the Preferences dialog. See Colors Panel on page 98.   LAYER PANEL The setting on the LAYER panel lets you  choose which layer the selected camera’s plan view symbol is placed on. For more information, see Layer Panel on page 186.   LABEL PANEL In the Camera Specification dialogs, the settings on the LABEL panel are limited to the Suppress Label check box and Position and Orientation settings.   Camera labels always use the Camera Name specified on the CAMERA panel. When callouts are used, the Callout Label and Text Below Line are specified on the PLAN DISPLAY panel.   For information about this panel, see Label Panel on page 700.   Cross Section/Elevation Specification Dialogs The Cross Section/Elevation Specification dialogs can be accessed in plan view by selecting one or more cross section/elevation camera symbols and clicking the Open Object edit button. See In Plan View on page 1097. This dialog can also be accessed while a cross section/elevation view is active by selecting Tools> Active View> Edit Active View. The Cross Section/Elevation dialog has the following panels: Most of the settings in this dialog are also found in the Cross Section/Elevation, Back Clipped Cross Section, and Wall Elevation Defaults dialogs. See Camera Defaults Dialogs on page 1081.   1124 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Cross Section/Elevation Specification Dialogs CAMERA PANEL General l Specify a Name for the camera that displays in its label in plan view and in the Project Browser. Names must be unique. See Project Browser on page 58.   l Check Saved to save this view with the plan. As soon as you type anything in the text field, this box becomes checked. If you click OK while this box is checked, it will become checked permanently. Saved cameras are listed in the Project Browser. l Uncheck Show Color to toggle the display off in the current view. See Color On/Off on page 191. l Check Show Watermark to turn on the display of the default watermark. See Watermarks on page 1377. Rendering l Choose the selected camera’s Rendering Technique from the drop-down list. Click the Define button to open the Rendering Technique Options dialog. See Rendering Techniques on page 1150. l Check Show Shadows to turn on shadows in the selected camera view. When unchecked, shadows are not generated. See Shadows on page 1133. 1125 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Cross Section/Elevation Specification Dialogs l Check Ray Casted Sun Shadows for higher quality shadows cast by sun light. Ray Casted Sun Shadows take longer to generate than regular shadows and only refresh when the camera is not moving. l Check Edge Smoothing When Idle to apply high quality smoothing to edge and pattern lines when the camera is not in motion. See Edge Smoothing on page 1134. Lighting l When Use Sunlight is checked, the sun light source is on in the current view. Uncheck this box to toggle sunlight off. l Click the Adjust Sunlight button to open the Adjust Sunlight dialog. Not available in the Camera Defaults dialogs. See Sunlight and Moonlight on page 1136. Scene Clipping These settings control the extents of the camera view. Not all settings are available in the various cross section/elevation defaults dialogs. See Clipped Section Views on page 1091. l Check Framing Back Clip to include only the framing objects or portions of framing objects located between the start and end points of the camera's Line of Sight in the view. o Specify the Back Clip Framing After distance, which is the distance from the camera's position beyond which framing objects are clipped. l Check Back Clip to include only the objects or portions of objects located between the start and end points of the camera's Line of Sight in the view. This box is checked by default for Back Clipped Cross Section views and is not available in any of the Defaults dialog.   o Specify the Back Clip After distance, which is the distance from the camera's position beyond which objects other than framing are clipped. It is also the length of the camera's Line of Sight from the Cross Section Line at its start to the Back Clip Line at its end. This text field reports the length of the camera's Line of Sight even when Back Clip is unchecked above, and is not available in any of the Defaults dialogs.   l Check Clip Sides to limit the selected view’s side-to-side extents to the Clip Width specified below. When unchecked, the full width of the model is included in the view.   l Specify the Clip Width, which is the width of the camera's side-to-side extents. This value controls the length of the camera's Cross Section Line when its symbol is selected in plan view. When Clip Sides is checked, it also affects how much of the model is shown in the view, and the Cross Section Line has end edit handles that adjust this value when they are dragged. See Editing 3D Views on page 1105.   l Check Clip Elevation to limit the selected view's vertical extents to the elevation values below. When unchecked, the full height of the model is included in the view.   o Specify the Bottom Clip Elevation, which is the bottommost extent of the view. Objects or parts of objects located below this elevation are not included in the view. When Clip Sides is checked and the bottom clipping plane has been edited, this value refers to the end point with the higher elevation.   o Specify the Top Clip Elevation, which is the topmost extent of the view. Objects or parts of objects located above this elevation are not included in the view. When Clip Sides is checked and the top clipping plane has been edited, this value refers to the end point with the lower elevation.   1126 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Cross Section/Elevation Specification Dialogs l Check Clip to Room to confine the extents of the current view to the room that the camera is located in. The view's clip values are reported above for reference. This box is checked by default for Wall Elevation views, is only available when the selected camera is located inside a room, and is not available in any of the Defaults dialogs.   o Check Ignore Railings and Invisible Walls to ignore the room definition created by these types of walls in a selected view. When this is unchecked, only room definition created by regular walls is recognized.   o Check Ignore Walls Above to prevent any walls located above the selected camera's room from displaying in the view. This option typically has an effect only when the camera's room has Flat Ceiling Over This Room unchecked, or the room above has Floor Under This Room unchecked, in the Room Specification dialog. See Structure Panel on page 439. POSITIONING PANEL The settings on the POSITIONING panel let you specify the location of the camera symbol in plan view. See Positioning Panel on page 1119. BELOW GRADE PANEL The settings on the BELOW GRADE panel control the appearance of objects positioned below grade. These settings only affect Vector Views.   Below Grade Line Settings Specify the appearance of lines that are below grade in the current view. When a box below is unchecked, objects' default line attributes are used.   l Check Override Color to replace the default object line color(s), then click the Color button to choose the replacement color.   l Check Override Style to replace the default object line style(s), then select the replacement line style from the dropdown list.   l Check Override Weight to replace the default object line weight(s), then specify the replacement line weight.   Affects Lines Below Specify where the selected Overrides are applied.   1127 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Cross Section/Elevation Specification Dialogs l Select Terrain Perimeter to apply Overrides below the top surface of the terrain. For best results, Auto Rebuild Terrain should be checked in the Terrain Specification dialog. If the terrain's contours are not up to date, you may be prompted to rebuild it. See Building the Terrain on page 1256.   l Select Absolute Height and then specify the height of a horizontal plane below which Overrides are applied, measured from zero.   Affected Object Types The types of objects affected by the line setting overrides are listed here for reference. SELECTED DEFAULTS PANEL The settings on the SELECTED DEFAULTS panel control which Saved Defaults and layer settings are used in the view.   These settings are also found in the Active Defaults dialog. See Active Defaults Dialog on page 82.   PLAN DISPLAY PANEL The settings on the PLAN DISPLAY panel control the appearance of the selected camera in plan view. See In Plan View on page 1097.   Display on All Floors Check Display on All Floors to display the selected camera’s symbol in plan view on all floors. When unchecked, it only displays on the floor where the camera was created. See Creating Camera Views on page 1086. Display As Callout In order for a camera's symbol to be included when sent to layout, printed, or exported, it must be set to Display as Callout.   1128 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Cross Section/Elevation Specification Dialogs l Check Display as Callout to represent the selected camera with a callout symbol in plan view and enable the settings below. l Specify the callout Placement, either at the Center, Left Side, Right Side, or Both Sides of the clip plane. If Center or Custom is selected, no clip plane line displays. l When Custom is the specified Placement, specify the camera icon's Offset from Center. l Specify the Callout Label, which is the text that displays inside the callout circle. If no Text Below Line is specified, the Callout Label is centered in the callout.   l Specify the Text Below Line for a bottom row of text, if desired. Check Automatic to populate the Text Below Line with the layout page Label if the selected view is sent to layout. If no layout page Label is specified, no automatic Text Below Line will be created. See Camera Labels and Callouts on page 1098.   l To specify the Callout Size, uncheck Automatic and then type in the text field. When Automatic is checked, the size is based on the length of the Callout Label and the size of the current Text Style.   l Specify the appearance of the Callout Arrow. Choose None, a Small arrow, or a Large arrow. Uncheck Filled if you do not want a solid filled arrow.   Note: To help distinguish it from other cameras, if a camera view is open, its callout label will display unfilled in plan view regardless of its settings. It will appear as expected if sent to layout or printed, however.   l Specify the Cross Section Line Style. Not available when Center or Custom is selected, above, unless the cross section line is stepped. Check By Layer to use the line style specified for the selected callout’s layer, or choose a line style from the drop-down list or the Library. See Stepped Cutting Planes on page 1092.   l Specify the Cross Section Line Weight. Not available when Center or Custom is selected, above, unless the cross section line is stepped. Check By Layer to use the line weight specified for the selected callout’s layer, type a line weight in the text field.   Standard Options These settings allow you to specify the appearance of the selected camera’s standard symbol. Most of these options are disabled when Display As Callout is unchecked. See Dynamic Defaults on page 79. l Uncheck Default beside any of these options to modify it. l The Camera Symbol Size is measured in plan inches (mm). l Check Show Camera Focal Point to display the camera’s focal point in plan view. When unchecked, the camera’s line of sight, focal point, and clip plane indicators are hidden until the camera is selected. l Specify the Clip Plane Indicator Length in plan inches (mm). See To create a cross section/elevation view on page 1090. BACKDROP PANEL The settings on the BACKDROP panel allow you to specify a backdrop image or color to display behind your model in the selected 3D view. See Backdrop Panel on page 1122.   LAYER PANEL The setting on the LAYER panel lets you  choose which layer the selected camera’s plan view symbol is placed on. For more information, see Layer Panel on page 186.   1129 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Cross Section/Elevation Specification Dialogs LABEL PANEL In the Cross Section/Elevation Camera Specification dialog, the settings on the LABEL panel are limited to the Suppress Label check box and Position and Orientation settings.   Camera labels always use the Camera Name specified on the CAMERA panel. When callouts are used, the Callout Label and Text Below Line are specified on the Plan Display panel.   For information about this panel, see  Label Panel on page 700. 1130

3D Rendering Chapter 33 There are a variety of tools available to create 3D views of a model: simply click a button to create an overview, or click and drag to create a camera or cross section/elevation view. See 3D Views on page 1079.   To improve the quality of the rendering and create a custom look, you can adjust lighting, edit the materials used in the plan, choose from a variety of rendering techniques, and fine-tune 3D view quality settings.   You can also use CPU Ray Tracing to create highly realistic images of your Chief Architect plans. As the name implies, ray tracing calculates the rays of light in a view as they travel through the 3D model and reflect off surfaces. As a result, ray tracing is slower than regular rendering, but can be used to achieve much more complex effects such as complex reflections and highly realistic lighting. See CPU Ray Tracing on page 1167. TOPICS Rendering Tips 1132 Lighting 1135 Light Types 1137 Displaying Lights 1138 Light Sets 1139 Light Specification Dialog 1142 Sun Angles and Shadows 1143 Sun Angle Specification Dialog 1145 Adjust Sunlight Dialog 1148 Rendering Techniques 1150 Rendering Technique Options 1153 1131 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Rendering Tips Rendering Tips There are a variety of factors which affect the appearance and quality of rendered 3D views. You can use these tools and settings to achieve renderings that meet your needs. GPU RAY TRACING On Windows systems that support it, GPU Ray Tracing produces highly realistic lighting, shadows, and effects such as refraction in real time using the Graphical Processing Unit (GPU). GPU Ray Tracing calculates the paths of light rays in the scene and can be used in 3D views using the Physically Based and Clay Rendering Techniques. See Rendering Techniques on page 1150. When GPU Ray Tracing is active in a view, multiple samples of indirect lighting in the scene are created, improving the lighting quality and removing image noise with each sample. By default, samples are run as long as a given view is active; you can, however, specify the Maximum Export Samples to be used when the view is exported as a picture or sent to layout, and you can also specify that samples in the view be capped at that value instead of running indefinitely. The current number of samples is reported in the Status Bar. See Physically Based (Ray Trace) Panel on page 1156 and The Status Bar on page 24. Before exporting a GPU Ray Trace camera view, you may want to make sure that it is denoised and that the Coordinate Indicators are turned off. See Coordinate System Indicators on page 145. GPU Ray Tracing can also be used when recording a Walkthrough. Each frame will use the Maximum Export Samples value and Denoise setting, and will take considerably more time to record. See Recording a Walkthrough on page 1215. You can find out if your computer's graphics card supports GPU Ray Tracing in the Preferences dialog. See Video Card Status Panel on page 125. In other Rendering Techniques in which lighting is supported, GPU Ray Tracing enhances the quality of shadows and ambient occlusion only. For troubleshooting purposes, you can turn this feature off or on in the Preferences dialog. See Render Panel on page 124. If your system does not support GPU Ray Tracing, you can instead use CPU Ray Tracing to produce renderings with high quality lighting and effects. CPU Ray Tracing runs in its own process using the computer's processor, so you can let it run in the background while continuing to work in Chief Architect. See CPU Ray Tracing on page 1167. Denoising GPU Ray Trace views are initially grainy, or noisy, and improve in quality over time as more samples are taken. The Denoise View tool removes light artifacts and the appearance of graininess from an active GPU Ray Trace view: either while a real-time ray trace is process or once it is completed. Select 3D> Camera View Options> Denoise View to replace the current live GPU Ray Trace View with a temporary, offline version that has been denoised; select Denoise View again to return to the original view. Because denoising does not occur in a live view, you cannot navigate or interact with the model in a denoised view. If you move the camera, modify the scene's lighting, or modify the model, the denoised view will be removed and you will return to the original view where sampling will restart. You can specify that GPU Ray Trace views be automatically denoised when exported, printed, or recorded in a walkthrough in the Rendering Technique Options dialog. See Physically Based (Ray Trace) Panel on page 1156. There are a number of situations where you may want to denoise a GPU Ray Trace view: 1132 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Rendering Tips l Preparing for a high quality ray trace: Denoise a view in which relatively few samples have been taken to see if you need to make changes to the model, lighting, or camera. l Creating a high quality ray trace: Run a ray trace with a high number of samples and denoise for extra quality when it is finished. l Recording a Ray Traced Walkthrough: Specify a moderate number of samples and then denoise each frame. LIGHTING Lighting is extremely important in most 3D renderings, in ray tracing, and in VRML file export. Lighting controls the visibility of objects in a view, affects the appearance of surfaces, and influences the appearances of colors and textures on those surfaces. Even small changes to light intensity, direction and color can have a large impact on image quality. See Lighting on page 1135. SHADOWS Like lighting, shadows have an important effect on image quality. Shadows can be generated in any type of camera view using any Rendering Technique aside from Glass House. See Rendering Techniques on page 1150. When shadows are enabled and the sun is shining directly at a window, its light can shine through the window and into an interior room. These shadows use Ray Casted Sun Shadows by default, but this option can be unchecked if it slows performance in 3D views. See Sunlight and Moonlight on page 1136. Shadows are enabled in Full Camera views by default. You can, however, check or uncheck Show Shadows and Ray Casted Sun Shadows in the defaults dialog for any camera tool or in the specification dialog for any camera view. In addition, you can select 3D> Camera View Options> Toggle Shadows in any camera view. See Camera Panel on page 1117. Shadows are affected by the number of light sources in a plan, as well as what Rendering Technique is in use. In order for a light source to cast shadows, it must be On in the current view and have Cast Shadows checked in its specification dialog. See Light Data Panel on page 675. In addition to their appearance in camera views, sun shadows can also display in plan view to represent the shadows created by the sun at a particular date, time, and location. See Sun Shadows on page 1144. REFLECTIONS Reflections are another aspect of lighting that can increase a 3D view’s realism. When a flat surface is assigned a Mirror material, it can display the reflections of other objects in the scene. Bear in mind that a Mirror surface cannot display the reflection of another mirror: when one mirror can be seen in another, its material is shown rather than a reflection. A material can be assigned the Mirror class in the Define Material dialog. See Properties Panel on page 1072. Reflections in Mirrors only generate in Perspective 3D views using Rendering Techniques that show material textures. In some situations, they can slow down 3D view generation and responsiveness. See Rendering Techniques on page 1150. When the Physically Based Rendering Technique is in use, reflections on non-mirror surfaces are modeled, as well. See Physically Based (Ray Trace) on page 1151. Reflections in Mirrors can be toggled on or off in a camera view by selecting 3D> Camera View Options> Toggle Reflections as well as in the Camera Specification dialog. 1133 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Rendering Tips GPU Ray Tracing in Physically Based renderings is capable of more extensive reflection effects. When GPU Ray Tracing is enabled, Reflections should be toggled on for best quality. See GPU Ray Tracing on page 1132, above. MATERIAL DEFINITIONS Textures are graphic files that represent contoured surfaces of objects such as carpet, bricks, tile, and wood in rendered views. Textures are assigned to materials which in turn are assigned to objects. See Patterns and Textures on page 1050. The display of materials in rendered views is controlled by settings on the TEXTURE and PROPERTIES panels of the Define Material dialog. See Define Material Dialog on page 1066. For realistic rendered views, it is sometimes helpful to make adjustments to texture properties so that they map to surfaces correctly. See Mapping Patterns and Textures on page 1062. Brightness, shininess and transparency control how light sources affect the display of surfaces in rendered views. See Lighting on page 1135. If no texture is selected for a material or if the display of textures is turned off, affected surfaces are a solid color instead. Specially produced material map image files can add realism to a material’s appearance in rendered and CPU Ray Trace views by making it appear contoured instead of flat or glossy instead of rough. See Material Maps on page 1050. IMAGES Image objects use picture files to represent individual objects such as trees, flowers, and vehicles in 3D views and exported VRML files. Images are useful because they have only one 3D surface, allowing them to represent complicated 3D objects with a high degree of realism but with minimal cost in terms of performance. See Placing Images on page 1185.   BACKDROPS AND GENERATED SKY A backdrop is an image, usually of an exterior view, that displays in the background of 3D views to help place the model into a realistic setting and add a sense of perspective. If a backdrop is not specified, Chief Architect applies a background color. See 3D Backdrops on page 1204. The Generated Sky is a spherical backdrop option that simulates the sky at different times of day based on the position of the Generic Sun. A horizon line is also modeled when the Generated Sky is in use. In a camera with a Tilt Angle of 0°, the horizon line runs across the center of the view window. As the sun is moved closer to the horizon, its intensity decreases and its color becomes an increasingly deep amber color. When the sun is moved below the horizon it may continue to contribute to light to the sky, but it will not cast light on the model. When the sun is either below the horizon or toggled off, representations of the moon and stars become visible. See Sunlight and Moonlight on page 1136. Backdrops and the Generated Sky are view specific and can be set in the Camera Specification dialog. See Backdrop Panel on page 1122. EDGE SMOOTHING Angled surface edges and pattern lines will sometimes display on screen as jagged or stair-stepped. Edge Smoothing softens this effect, producing cleaner looking lines. You can specify how much Hardware Edge Smoothing occurs in 3D views in the Preferences dialog. Hardware Edge Smoothing is set to "High" by default. Using a lower setting will lower rendering quality but may improve performance on some systems. See Render Panel on page 124. 1134 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Lighting Even higher quality Edge Smoothing can be produced by checking Edge Smoothing When Idle in the Camera Specification dialog. This setting does not affect a camera while its position or orientation are being changed, but applies additional smoothing to edge and pattern lines when the camera is not in motion. See Camera Panel on page 1117. This high quality Edge Smoothing option is view-specific and can also be toggled on or off by selecting 3D> Camera View Options> Toggle Edge Smoothing When Idle . HIDE CAMERA-FACING EXTERIOR WALLS Occasionally, it can be very helpful to view the interior of a structure from an exterior view. To achieve this, create an exterior camera view or overview and select 3D> Camera View Options> Hide Camera-Facing Exterior Walls. This option is view-specific and can also be set in the Camera Specification dialog. See Camera Panel on page 1117. Hide Camera-Facing Exterior Walls is also an option for Walkthrough Paths. See Record Walkthrough Options Dialog on page 1216. When Hide Camera-Facing Exterior Walls is enabled in a camera view, the CPU Ray Trace tool will not be available. MATERIAL TRANSPARENCY Most materials are opaque while some materials, such as glass, are partially transparent. Transparency can be set in the Define Material dialog. See Properties Panel on page 1072. There are two ways to specify a material as transparent: l For General materials, the Transparency setting controls how opaque or transparent a material is and can be set along with other properties like Roughness.   l Transparent materials are instead completely transparent but have an Index of Refraction setting that controls how much light bends when it passes through the material in GPU and CPU Ray Trace views.   Transparency is supported in all Rendering Techniques. Most Rendering Techniques, however, have an Opaque Window Glass setting that, when checked, overrides the transparency of the Glass components of exterior doors, exterior windows, and interior windows. Interior doors with Glass components are unaffected. When this box is checked, Glass components display the Material Color assigned to their material. See Rendering Technique Options on page 1153. Lighting Lighting controls the visibility of objects in 3D views, affects the appearance of surfaces, and influences the appearances of colors and textures on those surfaces.   Each individual light source has a set of properties, such as intensity and color, that can be defined. See Light Data Panel on page 675.   By default, a maximum of eight lights can display in a given camera view or overview. If more than eight are present, those with the highest intensity located in the same room as the camera are rendered. Lights in adjacent rooms may also be rendered, with the highest intensity lights rendered first. l You can specify a different Maximum Lights number in the Camera Specification dialog. See Camera Panel on page 1117. l You can also manually turn on and off individual lights in order to get the desired lighting effects. See Displaying Lights on page 1138.   l In addition, you can create custom Light Sets with specific lights turned on or off as needed for specific purposes. See Light Sets on page 1139.   1135 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Lighting When the camera is outside a building, the program normally uses sunlight for lighting calculations and turns off all other light sources. You can turn the sunlight off and use all the other exterior lights to simulate nighttime views. There are five types of light sources in Standard rendered and CPU Ray Trace views: DEFAULT INTERIOR LIGHTS If you create a Standard interior camera in a room where no lights have been placed, the program creates a Default Light source within that room. The Default interior light acts like a central point light source but cannot be selected or edited. Because the Default Light cannot be adjusted, if you want to control the light in an interior rendered view, you must add lights to the rooms in your plan by placing light fixtures and Added Lights. LIGHT FIXTURES An electric symbol that represents a Light Fixture can have one or more light sources associated with it. Properties for each light source such as light type, color, and intensity can be modified in the fixture’s specification dialog. See Light Data Panel on page 675. If the light source is a Point or Spot Light, you can also adjust its Offset, or position relative to the fixture. If you choose to Show Position in Camera View, you can see where the light source is located.   Light sources look most realistic when they are offset from a surface.   ADDED LIGHTS In plan view, select 3D> Lighting> Add Lights to quickly add a light source to a plan. Added Lights and their labels are placed on the “Light Sources” and “Light Sources, Labels” layers by default.   Added lights only act as light sources in plan files that have at least one room defined. They display 2D symbols in plan view but do not display as objects in 3D views. While Added Lights do not display as objects in 3D, you can specify that an Added Light’s position be represented by red crosshairs in rendered views that use lighting. Spot Lights also display a blue arrow indicating the light's direction. See Light Data Panel on page 675. Added lights can be placed into objects that normally do not generate light, such as a TV. There are two types of added light sources: Point Lights and Spot Lights. See Light Types on page 1137. SUNLIGHT AND MOONLIGHT Sunlight is the only source of light in exterior daytime camera views. When standard shadows are enabled, sunlight can also shine through windows into interior rooms. See Shadows on page 1133. Select 3D> Lighting> Toggle Sunlight while in a camera view to simulate either daytime or nighttime exterior lighting. There are two types of sunlight: l The Generic Sun’s default intensity, color, and angle can be set in the Generic Sun Defaults dialog, and can be modified in the Adjust Sunlight dialog. In addition, you can specify that it follow the camera in 3D views so surfaces are always illuminated. The Generic Sun’s settings are view specific: each 3D view can have its own, unique settings. See Adjust Sunlight Dialog on page 1148. 1136 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Light Types l You can instead place a Sun Angle in plan view to produce sunlight based on specific date, time, latitude, and longitude information. See Sun Angles and Shadows on page 1143. You can specify that a particular Sun Angle or the Generic Sun be used in any active camera view in the Adjust Sunlight dialog. See Adjust Sunlight Dialog on page 1148. Select 3D> Lighting> Move Sun, then click and drag in any direction in a camera view to adjust the position of the Generic Sun. You can also Ctrl + click (Command + click in macOS™) to place the Generic Sun at the location where you click. This tool is only available in Rendering Techniques that support lighting, or any camera view using the Generic Sky backdrop. This option is most effectively used when Use Generated Sky is in use and cannot be used while Sun Follows Camera is checked in the Adjust Lights dialog. When the Generated Sky is in use and the Generic Sun is either toggled off or has been moved below the horizon, representations of the moon and stars can be seen in the sky. Select 3D> Lighting> Move Moon, then click and drag in any direction or Ctrl + click to adjust the position of the moon. This tool is only available in Perspective Views. The intensity and other attributes of the moon and stars can be set in the Camera Specification dialog when Use Generated Sky is checked. See Backdrop Panel on page 1122. AMBIENT LIGHTING AND OCCLUSION Ambient lighting simulates the way light bounces around a scene, producing a basic level of uniform illumination on all surfaces. It is used in camera views and overviews using the Standard, Duotone, and Watercolor Rendering Techniques and in ray trace views. There are three types of ambient light in Chief Architect: l Interior Ambient controls the ambient light in interior views. l Daytime Ambient controls the ambient light in exterior views when Toggle Sunlight is on. See Sun Angles and Shadows on page 1143. l Nighttime Ambient controls the ambient light in exterior rendered views when Toggle Sunlight is off. You can control the brightness of each in the Rendering Technique Options dialog. See Standard Panel on page 1154. Ambient occlusion adds shading to surfaces near corners which, because of their location, reflect less light compared to other surfaces. Too little ambient occlusion can result in a view having a flat appearance. You can specify the amount of Ambient Occlusion to use in Standard, Duotone, Watercolor, and Physically Based renderings in the Camera Specification dialogs. See Camera Panel on page 1117. Additional ambient occlusion options are available in  ray trace views. See Lighting Panel on page 1172.   Ambient occlusion maps add the appearance of depth to materials by indicating which parts a texture receives more ambient light and which parts receive less. See Material Maps on page 1050.   Light Types There are two types of light source, each of which generates light in a different way and allows you to create a variety of lighting effects:   l Point Light sources l Spot Light sources Any light source  except a Sun Angle can be specified as a Point or Spot Light in the Electrical Service Specification dialog. See Light Data Panel on page 675.   1137 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Displaying Lights In addition to being assigned to light fixtures, these two types of light sources can be placed in a plan as Added Lights, which are light sources that are not associated with a fixture. As with light fixtures, the lighting properties of Added Lights can be specified in their specification dialog. See Light Specification Dialog on page 1142.   POINT LIGHTS Like a bare light bulb, a Point Light radiates light equally in all directions from its origin. Point lights are a realistic representation of non-directional electric lighting.   If no user defined light exists, Chief Architect creates a Point Light source to represent a light within a room.   To create a Point Light source 1. In plan view, select 3D> Lighting> Add Lights . 2. Click in plan view. Do not drag the pointer when you click the screen, or you will create a Spot Light. SPOT LIGHTS A Spot Light focuses the light in a specified direction. The Tilt and Direction Angles can be specified in a Spot Light’s specification dialog.   To create a Spot Light source 1. In plan view, select 3D> Lighting> Add Lights . 2. Click and drag in plan view no more than two plan feet (600 mm) in any direction. 3. As you drag, the light preview will look like a Spot Light icon. 4. When you release the mouse, a Spot Light pointing in the direction that you dragged is created. You can also use a Spot Light’s edit handles in plan view to move it, as well as change its direction and Cut Off Angle.   Displaying Lights The display of light fixtures and Added Lights in floor plan and 3D views is controlled in the Layer Display Options dialog. Light fixtures are placed on the “Electrical” layer by default, and Added Lights, on the “Light Sources” layer. See Layer Display Options Dialog on page 179. In addition, they can serve as sources of light in rendered and/or CPU Ray Trace 3D views. They can be turned on and off, as well as set to cast shadows. IN PLAN VIEW In plan view, both light fixtures and Added Lights can display labels when the “Electrical, Labels” and/or “Light Sources, Labels” layers are turned on. See Label Panel on page 700. 1138 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Light Sets IN 3D VIEWS Light fixtures and Added Lights can serve as sources of light in rendered and/or CPU Ray Trace views.   To turn a light on or off There are several ways to turn a light fixture or Added Light on or off:   l Select one or more fixtures or Added Lights and click the Turn Light(s) Off in 3D or Turn Light(s) On in 3D edit button. l Uncheck On in the object’s specification dialog. See Light Data Panel on page 675. l Clear the On/Off check box in the Adjust Lights dialog. See Adjust Lights Dialog on page 1140. Added Lights are not associated with a 3D fixture, but you can specify that any light source’s location be represented in 3D views using crosshairs. Position Indicators can display in all Rendering Techniques aside from Hand Drawn Lines. See Light Data Panel on page 675.   Light source position indicators will only display when the light is in use in the current 3D view. That is, it must be:   l Turned on. l Specified for use in Camera views. l In-use in the current view. l Either located in a room or in an exterior view with Sunlight toggled off. Sunlight will shine through windows into interior rooms when shadows are enabled. See Shadows on page 1133.   Light Sets By default, cameras use an Automatic Lighting Mode that allows a set number of lights to illuminate the view. This number can be specified in the Camera Specification and Adjust Lights dialogs. See Camera Panel on page 1117. If more than the set number of lights are present, lights are prioritized in this order: l Lights in the same room as the camera before those in different rooms. l Higher intensity lights before lower intensity lights. l Lights closer to the camera before those further away. Regardless of their intensity or proximity to the camera: l Interior lights are not used in exterior camera views. l Exterior lights are not used in exterior camera views when the Sunlight is toggled on. See Sunlight and Moonlight on page 1136. l Lights on floors above the camera are not used in Floor Overviews. See 3D View Tools on page 1084. Light Sets are an alternative to this automatic behavior. When a Light Set is specified, you control which lights are in use in the current camera and which are not, regardless of their distance from the camera. Multiple Light Sets can be created for different purposes in a single plan, including CPU ray tracing. See Lighting on page 1181.   The Automatic Lighting Mode is useful because it is an easy way to produce reasonable lighting without taxing your video memory. Light Sets can take some time to set up and may require more resources on your system; however, they give you greater control when producing presentation views. Light Sets are not removed when lights are deleted from a plan. They are removed, however, when objects are purged using the Save as Template tool. See Save as Template on page 89.   1139 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Light Sets ADJUST LIGHTS DIALOG Light fixtures and Added Lights in the current plan are listed and can be edited in the Adjust Lights dialog. Select 3D> Lighting> Adjust Lights to open this dialog in floor plan or any 3D view. You can also open it by clicking the Adjust Lights button in the Camera Specification dialog. See Camera Panel on page 1117.   The Adjust Lights dialog is an efficient way to control which lights are turned on in 3D views. Light Settings The settings at the top of the dialog allow you to manage the Light Settings in the current plan. When the dialog is opened while a camera view is active, these settings are available:   l The name of the Current Camera is stated here for reference. l Specify the desired Lighting Mode. Automatic uses the specified Maximum Lights while Light Set uses the lights as specified below. When Light Set is selected, several additional settings are available:   l Select a Light Set to edit from the drop-down list. If the dialog is opened from a camera view, this Light Set will become active.   l Check Modify All Light Sets to apply any changes made to the properties of the selected Light Sets to all Light Sets.   l Click the New Set button to create a new Light Set with all light sources turned off.   l Click the Copy Set button to create a new Light Set that is an exact copy of the one that is currently selected.   l Click the Rename Set button to type a new name for the selected Light Set. Not available for the Default Set.   1140 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Light Sets l Click the Delete Set button to delete the selected Light Set. A Light Set can only be deleted if it is not in use, and only if the Adjust Lights dialog is opened from the menu in plan view. Not available for the Default Set.   In some circumstances, performance in the Adjust Lights dialog can be slow when opened from a camera view.   l To avoid this, uncheck Update Lighting Automatically. l When Update Lighting Automatically is checked, you can click the Update button to update the lights in the camera view. Light Source Properties All lights in the current plan are listed here, and a variety of their attributes can be edited; however, only the On setting is specific to the selected Light Set. The others are global. Note: If a light fixture is assigned to a Distribution Path or Region, it will only be listed once in the Adjust Lights dialog. See Distributed Objects on page 1042. l Total Light Objects, Light Sources, and In Use lights are reported for reference. l  All lights in the current plan are listed in the table using the same Names as their labels.   o If a line item is a light fixture, it will have an arrow to the left of its name. Click this arrow to show the fixture’s light sources as individual line items.   o Check the box in the On column to turn it on or uncheck the box to turn it off. If a fixture has multiple light sources and only some are on, a solid square will display in its check box.   o The Count column lists the number of light sources assigned to each light fixture. This column is empty for Added Lights.   o The Room column states the location of each light. If a light is not in a room, “Outside” will be reported.   o The Floor column states the floor level that each light is on.   o The Type column states the type of light source used by each light. See Light Types on page 1137.   o The Intensity column states the strength of each light.   o The Color column displays the light’s color. Click the button to choose a different color if you wish.   o The Used In column states which types of views each light is used in: camera views only, CPU Ray Trace views only, or both.   o The Show Position column indicates whether each light source's position is set to show in camera views. See In 3D Views on page 1139. o The In Use column states whether each light is emitting light in the Current Camera view. If a fixture has multiple light sources and only some are in use, a blue box will display in its row.   Adjust To adjust the properties of a light in the list, double-click on its name or select it and click the Adjust button. Make changes to the light in its specification dialog and click OK. For more information, see Light Specification Dialog on page 1142 or Light Data Panel on page 675.   Multiple lights can be selected by holding down the Shift key. If multiple lights are selected, clicking the Adjust button opens the Light Data dialog, which is similar to the LIGHT DATA panel of a single object’s specification dialog. This dialog will also open if a Tray Ceiling Polyline is the selected light source. 1141 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Light Specification Dialog If you are in a 3D view that displays lighting, the view will regenerate based on the new light settings.   The Generic Sun  and Sun Angles are not listed in this dialog. See Sunlight and Moonlight on page 1136.   Light Specification Dialog Select one or more Point or Spot Lights and click the Open Object edit button to open the Light Specification dialog.    You can also select 3D> Lighting> Adjust Lights to access a list of the light sources present in the current plan and open the specification dialog for any of them. See Adjust Lights Dialog on page 1140. LOCATION PANEL Light Display Specify where the selected Added Light displays in plan and 3D views.   l Select All Floors to display the selected light on all floors in plan view. See Multiple Floors on page 730. l Select Specify Floor Number to display the light on one floor only, then choose a floor number from the drop-down list. Note: The floor or floors that an Added Light displays on in plan view is totally independent of where it displays in 3D. l Specify the selected light’s Absolute Elevation, measured relative to 0, which is the default height of Floor 1. l Specify the Display Size, which is the diameter of the circle representing the Added Light in plan view. LIGHT DATA PANEL The settings on this panel are also found on the same panel of the Electrical Service Specification dialog. See Light Data Panel on page 675.   Depending on the type of light(s) selected, the options available here may vary. LAYER PANEL For information about the settings on this panel, see Layer Panel on page 186.   LABEL PANEL Labels for Added Lights display in plan view when the “Light Sources, Labels” layer is turned on and use the Text Style assigned to that layer. See Text Styles on page 538.   1142 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Sun Angles and Shadows For information about the settings on this panel, see  Label Panel on page 700. Sun Angles and Shadows In addition to the functional and aesthetic properties of ambient light and light sources in rendered views, the direction and angle of the sun’s light and shadows are an important consideration. Two tools allow you to generate sunlight and sun shadows with accuracy: North Pointers allow you to specify the direction of true north in a plan. Sun Angles let you specify an exact location, date, and time for sunlight and sun shadow generation. NORTH POINTER The North Pointer tool is used to define the direction of true north in a plan. The direction of north does not affect the orientation of the Snap and Reference grids, but it does affect the direction of sunlight and sun shadows, how conditioned area totals are calculated, and how bearing information is interpreted by the program. Every bearing is defined relative to North, so it is best to establish this direction before entering survey information for a site plan. If a North Pointer is not used, north is assumed to be straight up on screen in plan view. Select CAD> North Pointer , then click and drag to draw the pointer, starting at the tail and dragging toward the point. Once it is drawn, you can define its exact length and angle in its specification dialog. See Line Specification Dialog on page 304. Multiple North Pointers can be drawn in a given plan file, and will always point in the same direction automatically. If you rotate one of them, the others will automatically rotate to match. Similarly, if you draw a new North Pointer at a different angle, existing North Pointers will rotate to that angle automatically. If you choose to display line angles when a North Pointer exists, be sure to select the appropriate format in the CAD Defaults dialog. See CAD Defaults and Preferences on page 291. l If angles are set to Bearings, they are relative to the North Pointer. l If angles are set to show as Degrees, the angle relates to 0° (horizontal to the right) even if a North Pointer is present. 1143 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Sun Angles and Shadows A North Pointer can be selected and edited using its edit handles and Edit Toolbar buttons. All attributes of the N aside from its size are drawn from the Text Style assigned to the  layer it is are placed on. For more information, see Editing Line-Based Objects on page 216. SUN ANGLES Sun Angles let you establish exactly where your plan’s building site is located, and a precise date and time. This information allows the program to determine the sun’s location in the sky and generate sunlight and sun shadows with accuracy.   Note: Sun Angle calculations do not adjust for elevation. They are based on formulas published by the United States Naval Observatory and have limited accuracy as documented by the USNO. When an exterior 3D view is rendered, the program looks for an active Sun Angle. If it finds none, the Generic Sun is used. See Sunlight and Moonlight on page 1136.   To create a Sun Angle 1. In plan view, go to Floor 1 or Floor 0. Sun Angles can only be created on these floor levels. See Multiple Floors on page 730.   2. Select CAD> Sun Angle and click in the drawing area to place a Sun Angle arrow at that location.   3. In the Sun Angle Specification dialog, specify the Sun Angle’s Earth Data and other information. See Sun Angle Specification Dialog on page 1145.   4. After it is created, a Sun Angle cannot be rotated; but it can be moved as well as resized using its edit handles. Shadows are not affected.   Multiple Sun Angles can be created, each with different specifications; however, only one can be used as a light source in a given 3D view. If more than one Sun Angle is present, specify the one to use in the current view in the Adjust Sunlight dialog. See Adjust Sunlight Dialog on page 1148.   Sun Angles can display their date and time in plan view and can also produce sun shadow polylines in plan view. Both Sun Angles and their shadows are on the “Sun Angles & Shadows” layer by default.   SUN SHADOWS Sun Angles  allow the program to produce shadows cast by a building that reflect the exact position of the sun in the sky in a particular location and at a specific date and time. This position and time information is specified in the Sun Angle Specification dialog; the date format is derived from your operating system settings. See Earth Data Panel on page 1146 and Region and Language Settings on page 78.   In plan view, sun shadows are represented by polylines filled with a hatch pattern. If a Terrain Perimeter is present, the shape of a sun shadow polyline is affected by changes in terrain height. If no Terrain Perimeter exists, sun shadows fall on 1144 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Sun Angle Specification Dialog an imaginary plane at a height of zero, the default height for Floor 1. Sun shadows rebuild whenever the terrain is rebuilt. See Build Terrain on page 1245.   No sun shadow generates if the sun is below the horizon or if it is so low on the horizon that the shadow would be extremely long.   Multiple Sun Angles can be placed in the same plan to allow the simultaneous display of shadows cast at different times in plan view. Only one should be turned on in 3D views at any given time, however.   Specify different line colors and/or styles for shadows cast by multiple Sun Angles on the Line Style and Fill Style panels of the Sun Angle Specification dialog. To generate the sun shadows associated with a particular Sun Angle, select it and click the Make Shadow edit button or click the Make Shadow button in the Sun Angle Specification dialog. See Lighting Data Panel on page 1147.   There are several ways to delete a sun shadow polyline:   l In plan view, select and delete the defining polyline.   l In plan view, select and delete the Sun Angle arrow.   l In plan view, select the Sun Angle arrow and click the Delete Shadow edit button.   l In the Sun Angle Specification dialog, click the Delete Shadow button. See Earth Data Panel on page 1146.   l In the Sun Angle Specification dialog, click the Make Shadow button to delete existing shadows and create new ones.    Sun Angle Specification Dialog Select CAD> Sun Angle, then click in plan view to open the Sun Angle Specification dialog and create a new Sun Angle. See Sun Angles and Shadows on page 1143. To open the Sun Angle Specification dialog for an existing Sun Angle, select it and click the Open Object edit button. This dialog can also be accessed by clicking the Edit button in Adjust Sunlight dialog. See Adjust Sunlight Dialog on page 1148.   1145 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Sun Angle Specification Dialog EARTH DATA PANEL The settings on the EARTH DATA panel let you establish exactly where your plan’s building site is located, and exactly when the sun’s light should be calculated. This information allows the program to generate sunlight and sun shadows with accuracy. Solar Angles The Solar Angles display for reference and may update as changes are made to the settings on this panel. l The Solar Altitude is the angle of the sun above the horizontal plane, in degrees. l The Solar Direction is the angle between true North and the sun's direction. This is the angle the Sun Angle arrow points in plan view relative to the direction of North. See North Pointer on page 1143. Location   Specify the Location of the selected Sun Angle. The initial location can be set in the Preferences dialog. See CAD Panel on page 114. l Specify the Latitude, which is measured either North or South of the equator, depending on which radio button you select. l Specify the Longitude, which is measured either East or West of the Greenwich meridian, depending on which radio button you select. Date and Time Specify the Date and Time of the selected Sun Angle. The initial time zone can be set in the Preferences dialog. l Specify a Date for the selected Sun Angle. Select a month from the first drop-down list, a day from the second, and a year from the third. 1146 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Sun Angle Specification Dialog l Specify a Time for the selected Sun Angle. Select an hour from the first drop-down list; minutes in 15 minute increments can be selected from the second list. l If you want the Sun Angle to observe Daylight Savings Time, check this box. l Specify the Time Zone that the building site is located in. Plan View Display l Specify the Length of Plan Symbol, which is the length of the Sun Angle arrow in plan view. l Check Show Date on Sun Angle to have the date and time display on the Sun Angle arrow in plan view. This label uses the Text Style assigned to the “Sun Angle & Shadows” layer. See Text Styles on page 538. l Check Auto Rebuild Terrain to rebuild the terrain automatically whenever you create a sun shadow. If this is unchecked and you regenerate sun shadows, the program will prompt you to rebuild the terrain. >See Building the Terrain on page 1256. When you use the Build Terrain command in plan view, all sun shadows in the plan are automatically updated. l Click the Make Shadow button to create or regenerate the sun shadow in plan view. See Sun Shadows on page 1144. l Click the Delete Shadow button to remove the sun shadow from plan view. l Check Always Update to have the program update the selected Sun Angle’s shadow whenever any of the defining information is changed. When this is checked, the program may be slower when changes are made in this dialog. l If Always Update is unchecked and you make changes in this dialog, click the Make Shadow button to generate a new shadow. Note: The Make Shadow option does not toggle Shadows, but may cause 3D views to update if they are using the selected Sun Angle. See Shadows on page 1133. LIGHTING DATA PANEL A Sun Angle can be used as a light source in 3D views. The settings on the LIGHTING DATA panel control attributes of the sunlight associated with the selected Sun Angle. The settings defined on the LIGHTING DATA panel do not affect the sun shadow in plan view: they only affect 3D views in which lighting and shadows can display. l When Casts Shadows is checked, the light source associated with the selected Sun Angle casts shadows. These shadows are similar to the shadow shown in plan view, but may render differently based on the presence of other light sources. See Shadows on page 1133. 1147 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Adjust Sunlight Dialog l Select an Intensity from the drop-down list or specify a value using the text field to define the relative strength of the light source. The time of day as set on the EARTH DATA panel does not affect how the Sun Angle renders as a light source, but this does. l Click the Color bar to select a color for the sunlight associated with the selected Sun Angle. See Color Chooser/Select Color Dialog on page 203. LINE STYLE PANEL For information about the LINE STYLE panel, see Line Style Panel on page 305. FILL STYLE PANEL The settings on the FILL STYLE panel control the appearance of the selected Sun Angle’s shadow in plan view. For information about these settings, see Fill Style Panel and Dialogs on page 193. ARROW PANEL For information about the settings on the ARROW panel, see Arrowheads on page 327. Adjust Sunlight Dialog The Adjust Sunlight dialog allows you to control the intensity, direction and color of the Generic Sun light source in the currently active 3D view or to select a Sun Angle to serve as the source of sunlight in the currently active view. See Sunlight and Moonlight on page 1136.   The settings in this dialog are view specific. Any changes made to them affect the sun in the currently active 3D view only. Other 3D views can have their own unique settings.   The initial sunlight attributes used in a newly created camera are set in the Sunlight Defaults dialog. See 3D View Defaults and Preferences on page 1080.   There are four ways to open the Adjust Sunlight dialog:   l Click the Adjust Sunlight button in the Camera and Cross Section/Elevation Specification dialogs. See Camera Panel on page 1117. l From the menu, select 3D> Lighting> Adjust Sunlight. l From the toolbar, click Camera View Lighting Tools , then click the Adjust Sunlight button. l Right-click in an empty space in the background area, then select Adjust Sunlight from the contextual menu. 1148 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Adjust Sunlight Dialog Use Generic Sun Select Use Generic Sun to represent the sun in the currently active 3D view using the settings that follow. l Use the Intensity slider bar or text field to control the brightness of the Generic Sun's light. This setting is not applied in views using the Generated Sky. See Backdrops and Generated Sky on page 1134. l Click the Color bar to define the color of the light being modeled. Colored sunlight may be used to achieve special lighting effects, but may alter the appearance of your material colors and textures. The color selected here is not used in views using the Generated Sky. l Check Sun Follows Camera to adjust the position of the Generic Sun so that it is always behind the camera, illuminating surfaces in the view. When this is checked, the Tilt and Direction Angle settings that follow are disabled. This option must be unchecked in order to use the Move Sun and Move Moon tools. See Sunlight and Moonlight on page 1136. Note: If the Generated Sky is used in the current view and Sun Follows Camera is checked, the Generated Sky will not update if the camera is moved. l Specify the Tilt Angle, which is the angle of the sunlight with respect to the horizon. A value of 90° means that the light points straight up, while a value of -90° means that the light points straight down. 0° is parallel to the horizon. l Specify the Direction Angle, which is the direction that the sunlight points toward. 0° is measured horizontally on screen, pointing to the right. Positive values rotate in a counter-clockwise direction from there, while negative values rotate clockwise. l Click the Reset to Defaults button to restore the settings set in the Sunlight Defaults dialog in the current view. l In the Sunlight Defaults dialog, the Restore Initial Settings button is available instead. Click this to reset the options in that dialog to the originally installed settings. Use Sun Angle Select Use Sun Angle to represent the sun using a light source defined by a Sun Angle . See Sun Angles and Shadows on page 1143.   l Select a Sun Angle from the drop-down list to serve as the source of sunlight in the currently active 3D view. If no Sun Angle is present, the Generic Sun is used. 1149 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Rendering Techniques l Click the Edit button to open the Sun Angle Specification dialog for the selected Sun Angle. By default, the Generic Sun light color is pure white, which has the least effect on the appearance of material colors and textures. See Materials on page 1049. Rendering Techniques Any camera view, cross section/elevation view, or overview can be generated using a variety of Rendering Techniques to produce views for a range of different purposes: from detail drawings to artistic presentation views. To access these tools, while a 3D view is active, select 3D> Rendering Techniques, then select one of the following techniques: There are two ways to create a view using a particular Rendering Technique:   l Create a 3D view, then select the desired rendering technique from the menu.   l Select the desired rendering technique in the Camera Defaults dialog, then create a 3D view. See Camera Defaults Dialogs on page 1081.   Once a view is created, the effects of the selected rendering technique can be adjusted in the Rendering Technique Options dialog. See Rendering Technique Options on page 1153.   If a camera view is saved, its Rendering Technique settings are saved, as well. See Saving and Printing 3D Views on page 1115.   You can specify which Rendering Techniques use a backdrop image. See 3D Backdrops on page 1204.   The Watercolor and Hand Drawn Lines techniques require more time to generate than other Rendering Techniques. To save time, adjust the camera’s perspective before using one of these techniques. See Editing 3D Views on page 1105. STANDARD RENDERING Standard rendering is a photo-realistic technique that represents materials using textures, models lighting and shadows, and can also display reflections. Surface edge lines are not drawn and no special colors or effects are applied; however, when Hand Drawn Lines on Top is enabled, pattern lines are used. In plan view, the camera symbol for a view using the Standard technique displays an S in its center. See Displaying 3D Views on page 1097. VECTOR VIEW In Vector Views, surface edge lines are drawn and pattern lines and colors are used to represent materials while textures are not. Shadows are supported, and when in use a single light source is used to produce them. Shading 1150 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Rendering Techniques Contrast can be applied to surfaces, but other special colors or effects are not.   In plan view, the camera symbol for a view using the Vector View technique displays a V in its center.   PHYSICALLY BASED (RAY TRACE) Physically Based rendering is similar to the photo-realistic Standard technique: it represents materials using textures, does not draw surface edge lines, models lighting, and can display shadows. When Hand Drawn Lines on Top is enabled, pattern lines are also used. Physically Based rendering models material properties and light propagation more accurately than other rendering techniques and is best used when a focus on lighting and finish materials is the goal. On systems that support it, real-time GPU Ray Tracing is performed in Physically Based renderings. See GPU Ray Tracing on page 1132. In plan view, the camera symbol for a view using the Physically Based technique displays a Ph in its center. CLAY Clay renderings emphasize the shapes and proportions of objects in the model rather than the materials on their surfaces.  Surfaces are rendered using a single solid color or a palette of colors of your choosing, and Ambient Occlusion and Metal maps are included for any materials that have them. When Hand Drawn Lines on Top is enabled, pattern lines are also used. Lighting and shadows are modeled, and on systems that support it, real-time GPU Ray Tracing is an option. See GPU Ray Tracing on page 1132. In plan view, the camera symbol for a view using the Clay technique displays an C in its center. 1151 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Rendering Techniques GLASS HOUSE Glass House rendering uses different shades of a single color to display the model with surface edge lines and semitransparent surfaces. Lighting and shadows are not modeled, and materials are not represented, so neither pattern lines nor textures are used. In plan view, the camera symbol for a view using the Glass House technique displays a G in its center. TECHNICAL ILLUSTRATION Technical Illustration rendering draws surface edge and pattern lines, and uses shades of two colors, Warm and Cool. The warm shade is applied to surfaces that face the light source in the view, and the cool shade, to surfaces that face away from it. Only one light source is used: the light with the highest Intensity found in the room containing the camera. In exterior views, this light is always the Generic Sun. If no lights are on, a fallback light is used. Lighting is modeled as nonphotorealistic, stylized highlights and shadows are supported. See Lighting on page 1135.   In plan view, the camera symbol for a view using the Technical Illustration technique displays a T in its center.   WATERCOLOR Watercolor rendering approximates the effects of watercolor painting such as pigment pooling and flow. It uses textures to represent materials and models lighting, shadows, and reflections. When Hand Drawn Lines on Top is enabled, pattern lines are also used. In plan view, the camera symbol for a view using the Watercolor technique displays a W in its center.   1152 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Rendering Technique Options HAND DRAWN LINES In a Hand Drawn Lines rendering, surface edges are represented by lines with a hand-drawn style. Surfaces are completely opaque and patterns are used, but textures, lighting, and shadows are not.   In plan view, the camera symbol for a view using the Hand Drawn Lines technique displays an H in its center. Note: In some plans, the Watercolor and Hand Drawn Lines techniques may take a considerable amount of time. You can press the Esc key to cancel the rendering. DUOTONE Duotone rendering represents materials using textures and models lighting, shadows, and reflections. Surface edge lines are not drawn; however, when Hand Drawn Lines on Top is enabled, pattern lines are used. Two colors, one Light and one Dark, are applied over the surfaces, allowing you to create special effects such as sepia tone or grayscale. In plan view, the camera symbol for a view using the Duotone technique displays a D in its center. Rendering Technique Options The settings in the Rendering Technique Options dialog allow you to control the specific effects of each rendering technique on an active 3D view. To access this dialog, create a camera view, cross section/elevation view, or overview and select 3D> Rendering Techniques> Technique Options. The Rendering Technique Options dialog can also be accessed by clicking the Define button in the active view's specification dialog. See Camera Panel on page 1117. This dialog can also be accessed by double-clicking the Rendering Techniques parent button. The settings in the Rendering Technique Defaults dialog are the same as those in this dialog, but control the initial settings of each technique when it is first applied.   In the Rendering Technique Options dialog, select a technique from the list on the left to make its options active on the right. When this dialog is first opened, the technique currently used by the view is selected. 1153 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Rendering Technique Options As changes are made in the Rendering Technique Options dialog, the 3D view automatically updates to reflect those changes for all techniques except Watercolor, Hand Drawn Lines, and Physically Based using real-time Ray Tracing. To update views using these techniques, which take more time to draw than the others, click the Update button in the dialog. When a 3D view is saved, its Rendering Technique Options settings are saved, as well. See Saving 3D Views on page 1115.   The Rendering Technique Options dialog has the following panels: STANDARD PANEL The active 3D view immediately updates to reflect any changes made to the Rendering Technique Options for Standard renderings. There are a variety of other tools that affect the appearance of Standard rendered views, as well. See Displaying 3D Views on page 1097. General l When Use Backdrop Image When Available is checked, the backdrop image specified for this view is used. When unchecked or if no backdrop image is specified for the current view, the specified Backdrop Color is used instead. See 3D Backdrops on page 1204. l Check Opaque Window Glass to make the glass in windows and exterior doors opaque. When unchecked, door and window glass is transparent. See Material Transparency on page 1135.   l When Opaque Window Glass is checked, specify the color of door and window glass: l Select Use Material Color to use the glass material's color. See Patterns and Textures on page 1050. l Select Use Custom Color to click the Color button and select a glass color. See Color Chooser/Select Color Dialog on page 203.   1154 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Rendering Technique Options Ambient Light Specify the amount of Ambient light to use in different situations in Standard, Watercolor, and Duotone renderings. See Ambient Lighting and Occlusion on page 1137. l Interior Ambient affects interior views.   l Daytime Ambient affects exterior views. l Nighttime Ambient affects nighttime exterior views. Hand Drawn Lines on Top Add lines with a hand-drawn style along surface edges in the current view. Material patterns are also represented. See Patterns and Textures on page 1050.   l Check Hand Drawn Lines on Top to enable the settings that follow.   l These settings are also found on the HAND DRAWN LINES panel. See Hand Drawn Lines Panel on page 1163. Reset l Click Reset to Defaults to apply the Standard settings defined in the Rendering Technique Defaults dialog.   l In the Rendering Technique Defaults dialog, the Restore Initial Settings button is available instead. Click this to reset the options on this panel to the system defaults. VECTOR VIEW PANEL The active 3D view immediately updates to reflect any changes made to the Rendering Technique Options for Vector Views.   Additional settings that affect the appearance of Vector Views can be found in the 3D View Defaults dialog. See 3D View Defaults Dialog on page 1083.   There are a variety of other tools that affect the appearance of Vector Views. See Displaying 3D Views on page 1097.   l Check Use Backdrop Image When Available to use the backdrop image specified for this view. When unchecked or if no backdrop image is specified for the current view, the specified Backdrop Color is used instead. l Check Opaque Window Glass to make the glass in windows and exterior doors opaque. When unchecked, door and window glass is transparent. See Material Transparency on page 1135.   l When Opaque Window Glass is checked, specify the color of door and window glass: 1155 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Rendering Technique Options l Select Use Material Color to use the glass material's color. See Patterns and Textures on page 1050. l Select Use Custom Color to click the Color button and select a glass color. See Color Chooser/Select Color Dialog on page 203.   l Specify the Shadow Intensity, which is how dark or light shadows appear. A value of 100% creates shadows that hide any objects located within them; a value of 0% effectively produces no shadows.   l Check Apply Shading Contrast to use different levels of shading on surfaces oriented at different angles to the camera. When unchecked, unmodified material Colors are shown on all surfaces. Each material’s Shading Contrast can be set individually. See Pattern Panel on page 1067. l Click Reset to Defaults to apply the Vector View settings defined in the Rendering Technique Defaults dialog.   l In the Rendering Technique Defaults dialog, the Restore Initial Settings button is available instead. Click this to reset the options on this panel to the system defaults. PHYSICALLY BASED (RAY TRACE) PANEL The active 3D view immediately updates to reflect any changes made to the Rendering Technique Options for Physically Based renderings.   There are a variety of other tools that affect the appearance of Physically Based rendered views, as well. See Rendering Tips on page 1132.   1156 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Rendering Technique Options General l When Use Backdrop Image When Available is checked, the backdrop image specified for this view is used. When unchecked or if no backdrop image is specified for the current view, the specified Backdrop Color is used instead. Exposure Exposure is the amount of light in the scene that is captured by the camera. A low value produces a darker view; too high a value can make the scene look washed out. l When Automatic Exposure is selected, the program automatically adjusts luminance in the scene based on the light sources in use. l Select Manual Exposure to manually adjust the level of luminance. This can sometimes be helpful in some dimly lit scenes.   Global Illumination l When Use Ray Tracing is active and checked, multiple samples of indirect lighting in the scene are created, improving the lighting quality with each sample. This setting and those below it will not be active if real-time GPU Ray Tracing is not supported on the system. See GPU Ray Tracing on page 1132. l When Refraction is active and checked, light will bend when passing through a Transparent material. l When Soft Sun Shadows is checked, the sun casts shadows with soft edges. l Specify the Maximum Export Samples, which is how many samples to take for a view that you wish to export as a picture, print, record a walkthrough, or send to layout as an image. See Pictures on page 1191 and Recording a Walkthrough on page 1215. l When Cap Live Samples is unchecked, a GPU Ray Traced view will run samples indefinitely. Check this box to instead stop running samples when the Maximum Export Samples value is reached. l When Denoise When Complete is checked, exported views are denoised after the Maximum Export Samples are taken. See Denoising on page 1132. l Specify the Daytime Background Intensity, which is the brightness of the view's background color or backdrop image when the Sunlight is toggled on. See Backdrop Panel on page 1122. l Specify the Nighttime Background Intensity, which is the background brightness when the Sunlight is toggled off. See Sunlight and Moonlight on page 1136. Color Adjustment You can adjust the Hue, Saturation, and Brightness of the view, if needed.   Hand Drawn Lines on Top Add lines with a hand-drawn style along surface edges in the current view. Material patterns are also represented. See Patterns and Textures on page 1050.   l Check Hand Drawn Lines on Top to enable the settings that follow.   l These settings are also found on the HAND DRAWN LINES panel. See Hand Drawn Lines Panel on page 1163. 1157 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Rendering Technique Options Reset l Click Reset to Defaults to apply the Physically Based settings defined in the Rendering Technique Defaults dialog.   l In the Rendering Technique Defaults dialog, the Restore Initial Settings button is available instead. Click this to reset the options on this panel to the system defaults.   CLAY PANEL The active 3D view immediately updates to reflect any changes made to the Rendering Technique Options for Clay renderings.   1158 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Rendering Technique Options General l When Use Backdrop Image When Available is checked, the backdrop image specified for this view is used. When unchecked or if no backdrop image is specified for the current view, the specified Backdrop Color is used instead. l Check Opaque Window Glass to make the glass in windows and exterior doors opaque. When unchecked, door and window glass is transparent. See Material Transparency on page 1135. l When Opaque Window Glass is checked, specify the color of door and window glass: l Select Use Material Color to use the glass material's color. See Patterns and Textures on page 1050. l Select Use Custom Color to click the Color button and select a glass color. See Color Chooser/Select Color Dialog on page 203.   l Specify the Camera Exposure, which is the amount of light in the scene that is captured by the camera. A low value produces a darker view; too high a value can make the scene look washed out. Color Specify the solid color or colors applied to object surfaces in the view.   l Select Use Layer Color to apply the colors assigned to layers in the current Layer Set to objects on those layers. See Line and Text Styles on page 178.   l Select Use Material Color to apply the Material Color associated with each material applied to the surfaces in the view. See Pattern Panel on page 1067.   l Select Use Custom Color to apply the color displayed in the Color bar to all surfaces in the view. Click the Color bar to choose a new color. See Color Chooser/Select Color Dialog on page 203.   l You can adjust the Hue, Saturation, and Brightness of the view, if needed. Material Most material properties are represented in Clay renderings but you can choose to suppress or override some of them if you wish. See Properties Panel on page 1072.   l Check Ignore Material Bump/Normal Map to ignore the Bump and/or Normal Maps assigned to materials in the view.   l Check Ignore Material Metalness to ignore the Metallic property or Metal Map assigned to materials in the view.   l Check Ignore Ambient Occlusion Map to ignore the Ambient Occlusion Maps assigned to materials in the view.   l Check Override Material Roughness to ignore the Roughness setting of materials assigned to any surfaces in the view and instead us a single Roughness value.   l Specify the Roughness of all surfaces in the current view. Lights The lights in the current Light Set are used in Clay renderings. See Lighting on page 1135. l When Override Light Colors is unchecked, the colors assigned to individual light sources in the view are used. Check this to specify a single color for all lights in the view. l When Override Light Colors is checked, click the Color bar to specify the light color used by all lights in the view. Global Illumination These settings are also found on the PHYSICALLY BASED panel. 1159 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Rendering Technique Options Hand Drawn Lines on Top Add lines with a hand-drawn style along surface edges in the current view. Material patterns are also represented. See Patterns and Textures on page 1050.   l Check Hand Drawn Lines on Top to enable the settings that follow.   l These settings are also found on the HAND DRAWN LINES panel. See Hand Drawn Lines Panel on page 1163. Reset l Click Reset to Defaults to apply the Clay settings defined in the Rendering Technique Defaults dialog.   l In the Rendering Technique Defaults dialog, the Restore Initial Settings button is available instead. Click this to reset the options on this panel to the system defaults. GLASS HOUSE PANEL The active 3D view immediately updates to reflect any changes made to the Rendering Technique Options settings for Glass House renderings. l When Use Backdrop Image When Available is checked, the backdrop image specified for this view is used. When unchecked or if no backdrop image is specified for the current view, the specified Backdrop Color is used instead. See 3D Backdrops on page 1204. l Click the Color bar to select a color for the semi-transparent surfaces and lines in a Glass House view. See Color Chooser/Select Color Dialog on page 203.   l Specify the Transparency of the surfaces in Glass House view. For example, to create a wireframe line drawing of your structure, turn transparency to full and minimize line thickness.   l Specify the Line Thickness of surface lines in Glass House view.   l Click Reset to Defaults to apply the Glass House settings defined in the Rendering Technique Defaults dialog.   o In the Rendering Technique Defaults dialog, the Restore Initial Settings button is available instead. Click this to reset the options on this panel to the system defaults. TECHNICAL ILLUSTRATION PANEL The active 3D view immediately updates to reflect any changes made to the Rendering Technique Options settings for Technical Illustration renderings.   1160 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Rendering Technique Options General l When Use Backdrop Image When Available is checked, the backdrop image specified for this view is used. When unchecked or if no backdrop image is specified for the current view, the specified Backdrop Color is used instead. See 3D Backdrops on page 1204. l Check Opaque Window Glass to make the glass in windows and exterior doors opaque. When unchecked, door and window glass is transparent. See Material Transparency on page 1135.   l When Opaque Window Glass is checked, specify the color of door and window glass: l Select Use Material Color to use the glass material's color. See Patterns and Textures on page 1050. l Select Use Custom Color to click the Color button and select a glass color. See Color Chooser/Select Color Dialog on page 203.   Effects l Click the Color bar to select a Warm Color for surfaces that face the light source and a Cool Color for surfaces that face away from the light. See Color Chooser/Select Color Dialog on page 203.   l Specify the Warm Blend, which is the degree to which the selected Warm Color is blended with original colors on well-lit surfaces in the view.   l Specify the Cool Blend, which is the degree to which the selected Cool Color is blended with original colors on shaded surfaces in the view.   l Specify the Line Thickness of all surface edge and pattern lines in the view. Surface Edge Line color in Technical Illustrations can be set by layer in the Layer Display Options dialog when Use Layer Settings is selected in the 3D View Defaults dialog. Some objects' Surface Edge Line color can also be set per object. See 3D View Defaults Dialog on page 1083.   l Specify the Shadow Intensity, which is how dark shadows. A value of 0% produces no shadows. See Shadows on page 1133.   1161 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Rendering Technique Options Reset l Click Reset to Defaults to apply the Technical Illustration settings defined in the Rendering Technique Defaults dialog.   l In the Rendering Technique Defaults dialog, the Restore Initial Settings button is available instead. Click this to reset the options on this panel to the system defaults. WATERCOLOR PANEL In order for the active 3D view to reflect changes made to the Rendering Technique Options settings for Watercolor renderings, you must click either the OK button or the Update View button in the dialog. This may take several moments.   General l When Use Backdrop Image When Available is checked, the backdrop image specified for this view is used. When unchecked or if no backdrop image is specified for the current view, the specified Backdrop Color is used instead. l Check Opaque Window Glass to make the glass in windows and exterior doors opaque. When unchecked, door and window glass is transparent. See Material Transparency on page 1135.   l When Opaque Window Glass is checked, specify the color of door and window glass: l Select Use Material Color to use the glass material's color. See Patterns and Textures on page 1050. l Select Use Custom Color to click the Color button and select a glass color. See Color Chooser/Select Color Dialog on page 203.   1162 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Rendering Technique Options Effects l Specify the Smooth Amount, which is the degree to which details are removed from the original view.   l Specify the Paint Contrast, which determines the extent to which variations in pigment color are used.   l Specify the Turbulence Strength, which produces “pooling”, or variations in the strength of pigment colors.   l Specify the Turbulence Scale, which controls the size of the areas of pooling.   l Specify the Pigment Settling Strength, which is creates the appearance of pigment settling into low areas in paper.   l Specify the Edge Strength, which is how well-defined surface edge lines are.   Hand Drawn Lines on Top Add lines with a hand-drawn style along surface edges in the current view. Material patterns are also represented. See Patterns and Textures on page 1050.   l Check Hand Drawn Lines on Top to enable the settings that follow.   l These settings are also found on the HAND DRAWN LINES panel. See Hand Drawn Lines Panel on page 1163. Reset l Click Reset to Defaults to apply the Watercolor settings defined in the Rendering Technique Defaults dialog.   l In the Rendering Technique Defaults dialog, the Restore Initial Settings button is available instead. Click this to reset the options on this panel to the system defaults.   l Views using the Watercolor technique do not update as changes are made to the settings here as they do with most Rendering Techniques. Click Update View to apply any changes to these settings to the current view. HAND DRAWN LINES PANEL Lines with a hand-drawn appearance can also be drawn in the Standard, Physically Based, Clay, Watercolor, and Duotone Rendering Techniques.   1163 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Rendering Technique Options General l When Use Backdrop Image When Available is checked, the backdrop image specified for this view is used. When unchecked or if no backdrop image is specified for the current view, the specified Backdrop Color is used instead. l Check Opaque Window Glass to make the glass in windows and exterior doors opaque. When unchecked, door and window glass is transparent. See Material Transparency on page 1135.   Effects l Click the Color bar to select the color of the lines used to draw the view.   l Specify the Thickness of the lines, in scaled pixels.   l Specify the Extend Amount, which is the distance that lines may extend past intersecting surface edges.   l Specify the Squiggle Amplitude, which controls the average amount of curvature in the lines’ squiggles. A value of 0 produces straight lines.   l Specify the Squiggle Frequency, which controls how often the lines have curves. A value of 0 produces straight lines. Reset l Click Reset to Defaults to apply the Hand Drawn Lines settings defined in the Rendering Technique Defaults dialog.   l In the Rendering Technique Defaults dialog, the Restore Initial Settings button is available instead. Click this to reset the options on this panel to the system defaults. DUOTONE PANEL The active 3D view immediately updates to reflect any changes made to the Rendering Technique Options settings for Duotone renderings.   1164 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Rendering Technique Options General l When Use Backdrop Image When Available is checked, the backdrop image specified for this view is used. When unchecked or if no backdrop image is specified for the current view, the specified Backdrop Color is used instead. See 3D Backdrops on page 1204. l Check Opaque Window Glass to make the glass in windows and exterior doors opaque. When unchecked, door and window glass is transparent. See Material Transparency on page 1135.   l When Opaque Window Glass is checked, specify the color of door and window glass: l Select Use Material Color to use the glass material's color. See Patterns and Textures on page 1050. l Select Use Custom Color to click the Color button and select a glass color. See Color Chooser/Select Color Dialog on page 203.   Color l Click the Color bars to select a Light Color and Dark Color for surfaces and lines in a Duotone view. See Color Chooser/Select Color Dialog on page 203. l Specify the Desaturation, which is the degree to which color is removed from the original image. A value of 0% retains the original colors in the view while a 100% results in a grayscale image.   l Specify the Tone, which is the extent to which the Light and Dark Colors cover the original colors in the view. A value of 100% completely obscures the view’s original colors as well as the effects of Desaturation.   Hand Drawn Lines on Top Add lines with a hand-drawn style along surface edges in the current view. Material patterns are also represented. See Patterns and Textures on page 1050.   1165 Chief Architect Premier X15 Reference Manual - Rendering Technique Options l Check Hand Drawn Lines on Top to enable the settings that follow.   l These settings are also found on the HAND DRAWN LINES panel. See Hand Drawn Lines Panel on page 1163. Reset l Click Reset to Defaults to apply the Duotone settings defined in the Rendering Technique Defaults dialog.   l In the Rendering Technique Defaults dialog, the Restore Initial Settings button is available instead. Click this to reset the options on this panel to the system defaults.   1166